PUB.

(ENROUTE)

SAILING DIRECTIONS

★

★

2010

175

NORTH, WEST, AND SOUTH 

COASTS OF AUSTRALIA

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

Bethesda, Maryland

© COPYRIGHT 2010 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

TENTH EDITION

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Internet: http://bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001
II

Pub. 175

Preface

0.0 Pub. 175, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Norh, West, and

South Coasts of Australia, Tenth Edition, 2010, is issued for

use in conjunction with Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean. Companion

volumes are Pubs. 171, 172, 173, and 174.

0.0 Digital Nautical Charts 4 and 5 provide electronic chart coverage for the area covered by this publication. 

0.0 This publication has been corrected to 10 July 2010, including Notice to Mariners No. 28 of 2010.

Explanatory Remarks

0.0 Sailing Directions are published by the National GeospatialIntelligence Agency (NGA), under the authority of Department

of Defense Directive 5105.40, dated 12 December 1988, and

pursuant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10,

Sections 2791 and 2792 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing

Directions, covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the

world, provide information that cannot be shown graphically

on nautical charts and is not readily available elsewhere.

0.0 Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence

Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas

called “Sectors.”

0.0 Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees

from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General

bearings are expressed by initial letters of points of the compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings

have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are intended

degrees are used.

0.0 Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital Nautical

Chart (DNC).

0.0 Coastal Features.—It is assumed that the majority of ships

have radar. Available coastal descriptions and views, useful for

radar and visual piloting are included in geographic sequence

in each Sector.

0.0 Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,

additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk,

as follows: 

0.0 1. Toll free: 1-800-362-6289

0.0 2. Commercial: 301-227-3147

0.0 3. DSN: 287-3147

0.0 4. DNC web site: http://www.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

DNC.portal

0.0 5. Maritime Do0.0 main web site: http://www.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 6. E-mail: navsafety@nga.mil

0.0 7. Mailing address: Maritime Domain

0.0 National Geospatial-Intelligence

0.0 Agency

Mail Stop D-44

0.0 4600 Sangamore Road

0.0 Bethesda MD 20816-5003

0.0 New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the

date of the publication shown above. Important information to

amend material in the publication is available as a Publication

Data Update (PDU) from the NGA Maritime Domain web-site.

0.0NGA Maritime Domain Website

http://www.nga.mil/NGAPortal/MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same

manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a

course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of

origin along a track having the identical meridianal angle as the

designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow

for every influence tending to cause deviation from such track,

and navigate so that the designated course is continuously

being made good.

0.0 Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward

which currents set.

0.0 Dangers.—As a rule outer dangers are fully described, but

inner dangers which are well-charted are, for the most part,

omitted. Numerous offshore dangers, grouped together, are

mentioned only in general terms. Dangers adjacent to a coastal

passage or fairway are described.

0.0 Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1

minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed

in meters, or tenths of miles.

0.0 Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally

those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in parentheses following another name are alternate names that may

appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted

only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,

such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to

specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the

interest of typographical simplicity. Geographic names or their

spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political

status of an area by the United States Government.

0.0 Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference

used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Index-Gazetteer.—Navigational features and place-names

are listed alphabetically in the back of the book. The approximate position, along with the Sector and paragraph numbers

(e.g. 1.1), facilitate location in the text.

0.0 Internet Links.—This publication provides internet links to

web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, including but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hydrographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.

NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the

accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of the web

sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and omissions of these web sites.

0.0 Light and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light

Lists should be consulted for complete information.

0.0 Ports.—Directions for entering ports are depicted where

appropriate by means of chartlets, sketches, and photos, which

facilitate positive identification of landmarks and navigational

aids. These chartlets and sketches are not always to scale, how-
III

 Pub. 175

ever, and should be used only as a general informational guide

in conjunction with the best scale chart. Specific port facilities

are omitted from the standard format. They are tabulated in

Pub. 150, World Port Index.

0.0 Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids are not

described in detail. Publication No. 117 Radio Navigational

Aids and NOAA Publication, Selected Worldwide Marine

Broadcasts, should be consulted.

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the

charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Special Warnings.—A Special Warning may be in force for

the geographic area covered by this publication. Special

Warnings are printed in the weekly Notice to Mariners upon

promulgation and are reprinted annually in Notice to Mariners

No. 1. A listing of Special Warnings currently in force is

printed in each weekly Notice to Mariners, Section III, Broadcast Warnings, along with the notice number of promulgation.

Special Warnings are also available on the Maritime Division

website.

0.0 Wind Directions.—Wind directions are the true directions

from which winds blow.

Reference List

0.0 The principal sources examined in the preparation of this

publication were:

0.0 British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.

0.0 Various port handbooks. 

0.0 Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels and

various shipping companies.

0.0 Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and documents.

0.0 Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other documents in possession of the Agency.

0.0 Internet Web sites, as follows:

0.0 1. Albany Port Authority

0.0 http://www.albanyport.com.au

0.0 2. Broome Port Authority

0.0 http://www.broomeport.com

0.0 3. Bunbury Port Authority

0.0 http://www.byport.com.au

0.0 4. Dampier Port Authority

0.0 http://www.dpa.wa.gov.au

0.0 5. Darwin Port Authority

0.0 http://www.nt.gov.au/dpa

0.0 6. Esperance Port Authority

0.0 http://www.esperanceport.com.au

0.0 7. Fremantle Port Authority

0.0 http://www.freport.wa.gov.au

0.0 8. Geraldton Port Authority

0.0 http://www.geroport.wa.gov.au

0.0 9. Grant and Tracey’s Lighthouse Page (Grant and

0.0 Tracey Maizels):

0.0 * Robe Light—paragraph 8.65

0.0 * Penguin Islet—paragraph 8.68

0.0 http://www.maizels.nu/lights

0.0 10. Lighthouses of Australia (Malcolm Macdonald)

0.0 http:/www.lighthouse.net.au/lights

0.0Material from this web site Copyright 1997, 1998,

1999 Lighthouse Computer Training and Development, 9 Richard Avenue, Ocean Grove, Victoria 3226,

Australia. All rights reserved.

0.0The following photographers in this website have

given permission to use photographs in this book:

0.0 *Robert Cook:

0.0 robcook@melbpc.org.au

0.0 Cape Willoughby Light—paragraph 8.12

0.0

0.0 *Peter Coombs:

0.0 petensha@alphalink.com.au

0.0 Cape Borda Light—paragraph 8.2

0.0

0.0 *Ed Kavaliunas:

0.0 edkav@pipeline.com.au

0.0 Troubridge Island Light—paragraph 8.36

0.0

0.0 * Sophia M. McHarney:

0.0 clmshem@goldsboro.net

0.0 Bathurst Point Light—paragraph 5.36

0.0 11. Lighthouses of Western Australia (Pauline and

0.0 John O’Brien):

0.0 * Woodman Point Light—paragraph 5.41

0.0 http://bajoran.upnaway.com/~obees/lights

0.0 12. Port Hedland Port Authority

0.0 http://www.phpa.wa.gov.au

0.0 13. Queensland, Ports Corporation of

0.0 http://www.pcq.com.au/html/02_ports.htm

0.0 14. South Australia Ports

0.0 http://www.portscorp.sa.gov.au
 Pub. 175

V

0.0SECTOR LIMITS — PUB. 175
Pub. 175 VI

Conversion Tables

Feet to Meters

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74

 10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79

 20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84

 30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89

 40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93

 50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98

 60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03

 70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08

 80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13

 90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

Fathoms to Meters

Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46

 10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75

 20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03

 30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32

 40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61

 50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90

 60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19

 70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47

 80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76

 90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

Meters to Feet

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53

 10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34

 20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14

 30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95

 40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76

 50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57

 60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38

 70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19

 80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99

 90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92

 10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39

 20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86

 30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33

 40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79

 50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26

 60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73

 70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20

 80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67

 90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13
VII Pub. 175

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units

°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)

cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)

cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars

dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz

FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)

grt gross registered tons nrt net registered tons

kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions

N north S south

NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest

NE northeast SW southwest

ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest

E east W west

ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest

SE southeast NW northwest

SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types

LASH Lighter Aboard Ship ro-ro Roll-on Roll-off

LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier

LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier

OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil

Time

ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time

ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level

MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs

HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps

LW low water MHWS mean high water springs

MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps

MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs

HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide

HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide

LWN low water neaps

Communications

D/F direction finder MF medium frequency

R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency

LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation

LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SPM Single Point Mooring

NAVSAT Navigation Satellite TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System VTC Vessel Traffic Center

SBM Single Buoy Mooring VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

COLREGS Collision Regulations

IALA International Association of Lighthouse

Authorities

No./Nos.

PA

Number/Numbers

Position approximate

IHO International Hydrographic Office PD Position doubtful

IMO International Maritime Organization Pub. Publication

loa length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
Pub. 175 IX

Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II

Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII

Sector 1

North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sector 2

North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Sector 3

Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Sector 4

Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Sector 5

West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Sector 6

Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Sector 7

South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer including Spencer Gulf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Sector 8

South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland including Kangaroo Island and Gulf St. Vincent . . . . . . . . 197

Sector 9

The Cocos Islands, Christmas Island, Heard Island, and the McDonald Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Index—Gazetteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
1

Pub. 175

1. 

North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria

1.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
3

Pub. 175

SECTOR 1 

NORTH COAST OF AUSTRALIA—THE GULF OF CARPENTARIA

1.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Gulf of Carpentaria from

the Cape York Peninsula to The English Company’s Islands,

and includes the offshore island groups off the S and W coasts

of the gulf. The arrangement is S from Slade Point to the head

of the Gulf of Carpentaria, then N to Cape Arnhem, and finally

W to Arnhem Bay. 

General Remarks

1.1 The Gulf of Carpentaria is a deep indentation in the N

coast of Australia which is entered between the NW extremity

of the Cape York Peninsula and Cape Arnhem, about 300 miles

WSW. The E shore of the gulf is low and regular, but the W

side rises in parts to wooded hills and is indented with bays and

creeks which are fronted in places by groups of numerous islands. The head of the gulf is mostly covered with mangroves

up to 9m high, which restrict the view of the plains beyond.

1.1 Soundings in the gulf do not exceed 82m anywhere with

general depths of 55 to 66m in the center. In general, there is

deeper water closer to the W shore than the E, but the entire

coast is difficult to approach because it is fronted by shoals in

many places. The 6m line generally lies from 3 to 10 miles offshore, except at the head of the gulf, where it is 15 miles off

most of the coast.

1.1 Winds—Weather.—The Southeast Monsoon (also known

as the Southeast Trade Winds), which is generally associated

with clear weather, extends from April to September and becomes well-established in July, when it dominates all the area

N of 25°S, with directions varying between S and E. Within 20

miles of the coast, land and sea breeze effects are felt under

suitable conditions. Away from the coast, the wind generally

maintains a remarkably steady direction, with strengths of

force 4 to 6; force 7 is not uncommon. This can raise a considerable sea in the western part of the Gulf of Carpentaria and

low-powered vessels are recommended to stay nearer the E

shore during this period.

1.1 The Northwest Monsoon blows from December to March.

During December, Nw to N winds spread from W and N across

the Arafura Sea and the Timor Sea and into the Gulf of Carpentaria. By January, the Northwest Monsoon has established itself over most of the sea area N of 20°S and E of 110°E and has

also spread to the Torres Strait region. It continues to occupy

this area through February, with the winds becoming variable

in March and the Southeast Monsoon beginning to establish itself in April. In contrast to the Southeast Monsoon, the Northwest Monsoon is associated, especially at its onset, with clouds

and rain, and frequently with thunderstorms. The onset of the

Northwest Monsoon is preceded by a period of calms and variable winds, with high daytime temperatures. The winds of the

Northwest Monsoon do not have the strength of those from the

Southeast Monsoon, and become variable in the transition periods.

1.1 With the approach of the Northwest Monsoon, squalls, with

thunder and heavy rain, occur first at interval of 4 to 5 days, but

their frequency gradually increases until they occur almost daily.

1.1 Characteristic squalls are reported on the S shores of the

Gulf of Carpentaria on about two mornings in five, from September to November, and occasionally in April. They have the

character of a line squall and are known locally by the name

“Morning Glory.” In general, it has the characteristic of a coldfront squall and is accompanied by an arch of clouds extending

from horizon to horizon. It occurs out of calm conditions,

which prevail again with a short time after the passage of the

squall. The squall normally comes from the ENE, but at times

can come from other directions between NE and S. In most

cases, the wind speed reached is between 12 and 22 knots.

1.1 During the Northwest Monsoon period and the following

transitional period, from December to April, prevailing winds

are liable to be disrupted by temporary disturbances, in the

form of clockwise circulations of wind accompanying tropical

depressions.

1.1 Between the Northwest Monsoon and the Southeast Monsoon, there is a transitional period, generally lasting several

weeks. It initially occurs before the Northwest Monsoon during some part of the period from October to December; after

the Northwest Monsoon, it occurs during at least parts of

March and April. The wind is unsteady in directions, but more

often blows from the direction appropriate to the Northwest

Monsoon or the trade wind season. It is generally light, but not

often calm, and in the quieter periods there will often be no

wind other than the daily alternation of land and sea breezes.

1.1 Tides—Currents.—In the Gulf of Carpentaria, during the

period from December to April, the Northwest Monsoon causes a clockwise current that sets S along the E coast, W along

the S coast, and N along the W coast. The rate is usually not

over 0.5 knot, except along the islands on the W coast, where it

Copyright 2004 http://www.dropbears.com

The Gulf of Carpentaria—“Morning Glory” cloud system
4 Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 

Pub. 175

combines with the tidal current to attain a somewhat greater

rate.

1.1 During the period from April to September (the Southeast

Monsoon), the current is weak and variable, with little effect

except in the extreme N part of the Gulf of Carpentaria, where

the drift is about 0.5 knot to the W.

1.1 In the Gulf of Carpentaria, the tides rise somewhat uniformly, although various differences are in effect, mostly in the

Groote Eylandt and Sir Edward Pellow groups. In general, the

tidal rise is about 2.3m on the E side of the gulf, 3.5m at the

head of the gulf, and 1 to 3m on the W side of the gulf.

1.1 Offshore currents.—The currents of this region are highly

variable and are affected to a considerable extent by the changing monsoon winds, so that the predominant direction of the

current reverses with the season. During the Southeast Monsoon, from April to November, the predominant direction of

the current is W through the Torres Strait, WSW through the

Arafura Sea and the Timor Sea, and then W as the beginning of

the South Equatorial Current. During the Northwest Monsoon,

the predominant direction of the current is reversed over the area, becoming NE or ENE through the Timor Sea and the

Arafura Sea.

1.1 Offshoots of this E current reach into Joseph Bonaparte Gulf

(14°15'S., 128°40'E.) and the Gulf of Carpentaria (14°00'S.,

139°00'E.), where they may develop weak clockwise circulations. Another offshoot recurves into the large, but shallow, indentation in the coastline between Cape Leveque (16°23'S.,

122°56'E.) and Port Hedland (20°19'S., 118°34'E.), to set SW

as a countercurrent in the region of Eighty Miles Beach

(18°56'S., 121°33'E.).

1.1 The mean rate is usually less than 1 knot but, on individual

occasions, rates of between 2 and 3 knots, setting either E or

W, sometimes opposed to the predominant directions, have occurred in both seasons.

1.1 The tidal currents of the coastal areas are sometimes very

strong and usually completely override the outer offshore currents.

1.1 Visibility.—Fog is very rare and in the coastal waters its frequency is either nil or less than 2 per cent throughout the year.

In November and December, more than 20 perc ent of observations report mist or haze from some part of the N coast of Australia, but from April to June there are very few reports (less

than 5 per cent) of even haze.

1.1 Dust and smoke from bush fires are common causes of

coastal haze, which is frequent during the Southeast Monsoon.

1.1 In the Gulf of Carpentaria, the few occasions of true fog occur mainly in the dry season, and most frequently in some lagoons and estuaries. Visibility is also liable to be reduced to

fog limits in some of the heavier downpours of the wet season.

1.1 Radiation fog, which occasionally forms towards dawn near

the coast, clears quickly after sunrise.

1.1 Caution.—Information on the shores and soundings of the

Gulf of Carpentaria is imperfect and in some cases is taken

from very early surveys. Great care is therefore necessary

when navigating in these waters.

Slade Point to Duyfken Point

1.2 Slade Point (10°59'S., 142°08'E.), about 30 miles SW

of Cape York, is low and sandy and forms the NE entrance

point of the Gulf of Carpentaria. Extensive sandy shoals, including the low Crab Island, lie off the point and extend over

15 miles NW, almost completely across the entrance of Endeavour Strait. The E side of the Gulf of Carpentaria, between

11°S and the entrance to the Wenlock River, about 60 miles S,

has been satisfactorily surveyed. A stranded wreck lies 10

miles S of Slade Point.

1.2 Carpentaria Lightfloat, equipped with a racon, marks Carpentaria Shoal and lies about 65 miles WNW of Slade Point

and is primarily placed for vessels approaching Torres Strait.

1.2 Vrilya Point (11°14'S., 142°07'E.), about 15 miles S of Slade

Point, is fringed with cliffs 15 to 20m high, and a steep bare 30m

hill close E. A rock, which dries 0.7m, lies 1 mile SSW, and

depths of less than 5m extend up to 1 mile from the point.

1.2 A rock, with a depth of 25m, position doubtful, lies 50 miles

W of Vrilya Point. 

1.2 The Skardon River (11°45'S., 142°00'E.), about 12 miles N

of Cullen Point, was declared a port in February 2002. The river and bar are shallow in areas. The port services a mine situated upstream. 

1.2 Cullen Point (11°57'S., 141°54'E.), marked by a conspicuous clump of trees, extends N from the coast about 46 miles

SSW of Vrilya Point.

1.2 Kerr Reef (11°48'S., 141°50'E.), a rock, which dries 0.3m,

lies about 10 miles NNW of Cullen Point; in 1975, a reef with

a depth less than 2m was reported to extend from 1 to 3 miles

NW of Kerr Reef. A spit, with depths of less than 5m, extends

7 miles from the coast a short distance S of Kerr Reef.

1.2 Port Musgrave (12°00'S., 141°55'E.), entered between

Cullen Point and the coast 2 miles E, forms a good natural harbor for the protection of small vessels seeking shelter from either monsoon. The entrance channel is narrow and intricate,

with a least charted depth of 3.3m, and local knowledge is necessary.

1.2 A sand bar, with a depth of 0.3m, extends nearly 3 miles

NNW from Cullen Point and caution is required.

1.2 The estuary is about 3 miles in diameter with the Wenlock

River entering from the S and the Ducie River from the E. Numerous shoals and flats lie within the entrance, but good anchorage is reported available, in a depth of 11m, sand, about 1

mile S of Cullen Point.

1.2 Mappon Mission Station, established in 1891, is situated

about 1 mile SW of Cullen Point and maintains radio communication with Thursday Island. There is an airstrip between the

mission and the point.

1.2 Two unexamined shoals, with depths of 9.1m and 10.1m, lie

15 and 18 miles SW, respectively, of Cullen Point. A stranded

wreck lies on the coast about 3.25 miles NE of Cullen Point.

1.2 The coast between Cullen Point and Duyfken Point, about 41

miles SSW, consists of low sand dunes backed by swampy

ground. 

Albatross Bay

1.3 Duyfken Point (12°34'S., 141°36'E.), consisting of

four low, sandy, and tree-covered points, has low red cliffs on

Maritime Safety Queensland

http://www.msq.qld.gov.au/QT/MSQ.nsf/index/msqhome
Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 5

Pub. 175

its SE side. A few hillocks, 21m high, lie along the S edge of

the point and are the only noticeable natural features along this

part of the coast. Drying reefs and foul ground extend up to 1

mile S and W from the point.

1.3 Duyfken Point Light is shown from a stainless steel framework tower, 28m high, on the SW extremity of the point. A

monument stands between the shore and the light structure.

Duyfken Point Light has been reported difficult to identify in

daylight. The light is equipped with a racon.

1.3 Caution.—Due to the coast being fronted by shoals and surveys in certain areas being incomplete, recommended routes

between Albatross Bay and Torres Bay are indicated on the

chart.

1.4 Janssen Shoal (12°35'S., 141°34'E.), with a least

depth of 5.5m, lies 2 miles WSW of Duyfken Point. There is a

drying reef between the shoal and the point, and no attempt

should be made to pass inside this danger.

1.4 Albatross Bay (12°40'S., 141°40'E.), entered between Duyfken Point and Boyd Point, about 21 miles to the S, is the estuary for the Pine River in the N and the Mission River and the

Embley River in the NE. The head of the bay is generally shoal

with the 5m line lying up to 6 miles offshore, mostly in the NE

part. There are sand banks and shoals off the mouths of all the

rivers and caution is required.

1.4 The Mission River is approached over depths of 3m and is

available to small vessels with local knowledge.

1.4 The Embley River, entered between Kerr Point on the N and

Urquhart Point to the S, contains the main facilities for the

bauxite port of Weipa; it can be approached by a natural channel on the N or a dredged channel to the S.

1.4 Fairway Lighted Beacon (12°42'S., 141°41'E.), a red and

white metal tripod, marks the entrance to South Channel, the

dredged approach to Weipa. A spoil ground lies from 2 to 4

miles N of Fairway Lighted Beacon.

1.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage is permitted anywhere in Albatross Bay, except in the area shown on the chart, extending for

3 miles to seaward of Fairway Lighted Beacon and 1 mile either side of the leading line for South Channel. Anchoring is

also prohibited in South Channel.

1.4 Good anchorage for light-draft vessels seeking shelter from

NW winds can be taken ESE of Duyfken Point, in 5.5 to 6.4m,

good holding ground, about 1 mile offshore.

1.4 Small craft can anchor in any of the sheltered coves, clear of

the tidal currents.

Weipa (12°40'S., 141°52'E.)

World Port Index No. 54672

1.5 The port of Weipa is primarily engaged in the export

of bauxite and generally only ore vessels enter to load.

1.5 Weipa is also a center of the shrimp industry and a fleet of

trawlers is stationed here.

1.5 Winds—Weather.—Albatross Bay is generally calm for the

greater portion of the year. Strong SE winds will raise a chop in

the bay that is difficult for boats. From May to August an occasional swell from SW enters the bay caused by strong S winds

at the head of the gulf. From November to March, a W swell

occasionally up to 3m high enters the bay and breaks heavily

on the shallow banks. During the Northwest Monsoon the visibility may sometimes be reduced by heavy rain squalls.

1.5 Tides—Currents.—Mean spring tides rise 2.3m and mean

neaps rise 1.8m. The Northwest Monsoon, when blowing with

strength from the W, has raised tide levels as much as 4.3m.

1.5 During the Northwest Monsoon, when water levels are higher, the ebb currents may reach 4 knots at springs off Lorim

Point. The flood attains rates of 2 or 3 knots at springs, but is

considerably less at neaps.

1.5 The currents flow generally in the direction of the channels,

except at the outer portion of the dredged South Channel,

where the flood current sets in a NE direction, diagonally

across the channel. Care must also be taken at the inner end of

the dredged channel off Urquhart Point, as the currents set

strongly across the channel entrance.

1.5 At the berth at Evans Landing, both the flood and ebb currents set perpendicular to the berth towards the shore. Off

Lorim Point, both the flood and ebb currents set parallel to the

berth.

1.5 Depths—Limitations.—South Main Channel is dredged

(2002) to a depth of 10.8m. Cora Bank, with a least depth of

0.6m, divides the harbor into two channels. The main channel

on the N side has a depth of 10.8m, and Cora Bank Channel on

the S side has a depth of 7.3m.

1.5 Export Wharf, off Lormin Point, is equipped for bulk loading of bauxite. The wharf consists of 13 caissons lying parallel

to the shore, and can accommodate vessels up to 256m long at

each berth, in a depth of 12.3m. The center of the wharf is connected to the shore by a bridge structure. There are mooring

dolphins about 50m off each end of the wharf. Vessels berth

heading NW, at high water slack.

1.5 Evans Landing, with a depth alongside of 9.6m, can accommodate vessels up to 30,000 dwt, and up to 191m in length; it

is used for the discharge of petroleum products. The bottom at

Ports of Weipa

http://www.pcq.com.au/2004/ports_weipa.cfm

Copyright @ Winsome Bonham 2002

Lorim Point
6 Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 

Pub. 175

this berth is soft silt. Two conspicuous oil tanks are situated

close NE of the berth.

1.5 Humbug Point Wharf, designed to receive heavy equipment,

has a length of 130m and a depth alongside of 9.5m. The berth

will accommodate vessels up to 137m in length. The bottom at

this berth is mainly sand.

1.5 Vessels up to 92,800 dwt and 259m in length have entered

the port. Drafts to 10m can be taken in or out on most high waters. The deepest draft accommodated to date is 12.8m. Arriving vessels must have an underkeel clearance of 0.6m;

departing vessels must have a clearance of 0.9m.

1.5 The swinging basin off Lorim Point has a width of 487m and

it is dredged to a depth of 9.6m.

1.5 Evans Landing swing basin has a diameter of 335m and a

least depth of 9.6m.

1.5 Aspect.—The ore storage pile inland of the Export Wharf is

conspicuous.

1.5 Lighted beacons, marking the N and S sides of the entrance

to South Channel, stand 1 mile ENE of Fairway Lighted Beacon. Eight additional pairs of lighted beacons mark the N and S

sides of the channel, which has a bottom width of 106m.

1.5 Range lights are established for South Channel and, in line

bearing 078°, lead through the center of the fairway.

1.5 The inner channels are marked by lighted beacons and

buoys.

1.5 An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated about 5 miles E of

the river entrance.

1.5 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels greater than

35m long. Pilots must be requested 48 hours prior to arrival

and amended or confirmed 24 hours prior to arrival. If, after the

24-hour notice, the vessel’s ETA changes by more than 1 hour,

the vessel’s agent shall notify the pilots. The request message

should include the following information:.

1. Vessel name.

2. ETA and ETD.

3. Draft fore and aft.

4. LOA and beam.

5. GRT.

6. Whether propeller is fixed or variable pitch.

7. Whether vessel has an operable bow thruster.

8. Preferred side alongside.

9. Whether line launch has been ordered.

10. Whether pratique has been granted.

11. Pilot ladder boarding arrangements.

1.5 Vessels should contact Weipa Harbor 2 hours and 1 hour before arriving at the pilot boarding position, on VHF channel 16,

to confirm the vessel’s ETA and to obtain the pilot boarding

position.

1.5 Deep-draft vessels usually sail from Weipa 2 hours before

high water. Priority is given vessels loading ore.

1.5 The pilot boards 2 miles SW of Fairway Lighted Beacon in

position 12°43.3'S, 141°39.8'E. 

1.5 Regulations.—There is a speed limit of 10 knots W of a line

joining Gonbung Point and No. 19 Beacon, and of 8 knots E of

that line.

1.5 Inbound vessels must call Weipa Harbor on VHF channel 16,

as follows:

1. When entering South Channel—upon passing Fairway Lighted Beacon.

2. When secure at a berth.

1.5 Outbound vessels, or vessels changing berths or anchorages,

must call Weipa Harbor on VHF channel 16, as follows:

1. When leaving a berth.

2. Upon securing to the new wharf.

3. When passing Fairway Lighted Beacon.

1.5 There is a ship safety exclusion zone which extends 50m

from the Lorim Point Export Wharf; this exclusion zone includes the access jetty and mooring dolphins. Vessels which

are not involved in port operations are prohibited from entering

this area. 

1.5 Anchorage.—Vessels waiting for the pilot should anchor in

the designated areas N and S of the approach fairway, remaining clear of the prohibited anchorage. There is good holding

ground in this area, mud and shells, with a depth of about 11m. 

1.5 There is good anchorage at the E end of Jackson Channel, N

of Urquhart Point, and clear of the range line, in depths of 15 to

20m, sand. There is an emergency anchorage, marked by lighted buoys, situated S of Jessica Point, in depths of 7 to 15m,

sand and mud. Permission to use the anchorage should be obtained from the harbormaster.

1.5 Anchorage is prohibited in South Channel and in the fairway

between Urquhart Point and Evans Landing. Vessels are prohibited from anchoring or remaining at anchor, between sunset

and sunrise, within 1 mile of the lighted aids marking South

Channel or Cora Bank.

Boyd Point to Point Burrowes

1.6 Boyd Point (12°55'S., 141°38'E.) lies about 17 miles

SW of the entrance to the Embley River. The intervening coast

is generally low, sandy, and tree-covered, with some red bauxite cliffs about 5 miles NE of Boyd Point; shoals and reefs extend up to 2 miles from the coast.

1.6 Pera Head (Para Head) (12°57'S., 141°36'E.), the center of a

headland about 7 miles wide, is formed with Boyd Point to the

N and Thud Point to the S. The head is conspicuous because it

consists of a rocky point with red bauxite cliffs, about 21m

high, on either side. A mission is charted on the summit.

1.6 A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 2.25 miles

NNW of Pera Head. Another rock, with a depth of less than

1.8m, lies about 4 miles SW of Pera Head. In 1972, a detached

reef, with a depth of 0.6m and which sometimes breaks, was

reported to lie 1 mile SW of Pera Head.

1.6 False Pera Head (13°05'S., 141°37'E.), about 9 miles S of

Pera Head, is so named from its resemblance to the latter. False

Pera Head is S of Thud Point and should not be visible from

Albatross Bay.

1.6 The coast from False Pera Head to the Archer River, 15

miles SSE, is low, sandy, and covered with scrub. The river is

available only to boats.

1.6 Caution.—Between Pera Head and the Nassau River

(15°55'S., 141°23'E.), numerous shoal patches and obstructions lie within 20 miles of the coast. A depth of 10.3m was reported in 1985 to lie about 25 miles SW of Thud Point and

about 22 miles from the coast.

1.7 The coast S of Pera Head to the head of the Gulf of

Carpentaria has not been fully surveyed and vessels are recommended not to approach within 20 miles of the shore without
Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 7

Pub. 175

local knowledge.

1.7 Cape Keerweer (13°55'S., 141°28'E.), about 48 miles S of

Para Head, has no prominent features to distinguish it from the

low sandy coast to the N and S. 

1.7 Extensive shoaling and shallow depths have been reported in

the area extending 30 miles S and SW of Cape Keerweer. A

13.3m shoal lies 12 miles NW of the cape.

1.7 An obstruction has been reported to lie in approximate position 14°43.0'S, 141°25.5'E.

1.8 The Mitchell River (15°13'S., 141°35'E.) discharges

about 75 miles S of Cape Keerweer and has an entrance about

1 mile wide. Sand banks lie across the approach and the river

probably has no access except to boats. The coast in this vicinity is lower than that to the N and numerous tributaries discharge N and S of the main branch. There is a mission on the

shore of the river about 3 miles from the sea.

1.8 Shoals, with depths of 4.6m to 10.1m, extend about 20 miles

seaward from the coast NW of the entrance to the Mitchell River. A dangerous wreck, the position of which is approximate, is

reported (1987) to lie about 28 miles SSW of the river entrance

and about 3 miles from the coast.

1.8 The Nassau River, 44 miles SSW of the entrance to the

Mitchell River, is narrow and joins Rocky Creek just inside its

mouth; only boats should attempt to enter.

1.8 The coast S of the entrance to the Nassau River continues

low and marshy with several rivers entering the sea amidst the

surrounding mangroves. The coastal bank, with depths of less

than 5.5m, extends from 4 to 10 miles offshore and prevents

close approach to the coast except by light-draft vessels with

local knowledge. The mouths of the Staaten River and the Gilbert River, both available to boats, discharge 30 and 39 miles,

respectively, S of the Nassau River. A 12.5m shoal lies 26

miles W of the mouth of the Staaten River; another shoal, with

a depth of 14.6m, lies 32 miles SW of the river mouth, about 14

miles offshore.

1.8 Point Burrowes (16°58'S., 140°58'E.), low and sandy, is

backed by lowlands and tidal flats. Van Diemen Inlet is entered

close N of the point, but is available only to boats and small craft

as it is fronted by a bar with a depth of 0.6m. Within the entrance

the depths increase to about 3m, but the river quickly becomes

narrow and tortuous and can be navigated only by boats.

1.8 Caution.—A dangerous wreck is charted about 12 miles

NW of Point Burrowes. A depth of 4.6m, mud, lies about 7

miles WSW of the point and numerous patches of 5.5m and

less lie within a radius of 4 miles to the entrance of Van Diemen Inlet. A dangerous wreck is charted 6 miles NW of the entrance to Spring Creek (16°48'S., 141°05'E.).

Head of the Gulf of Carpentaria

1.9 The coast between Point Burrowes and the Norman

River (17°30'S., 140°50'E.), about 30 miles S, is sandy

throughout for its first 17 miles; the river entrance has few

landmarks from which a vessel’s position can be obtained by a

stranger. The coast is low and covered with mangroves and

from a distance appears as much of the head of the gulf. The W

side of the river entrance, named Alligator Point, is covered

with high thick mangroves, but the E side is low and sandy,

with has several houses on it.

1.9 Karumba (17°40'S., 141°05'E.) (World Port Index No.

54690), a small river port, is situated on the E side of the river

about 1 mile within the entrance. Zinc slurry is piped 300km to

the port from the Pasminco Century Mine, and loaded onto

transfer vessels, which take the product to ships in the anchorage area. Other facilities in the port provide for general cargo,

fuel, fisheries porducts, and the export of live cattle.

1.9 Tides—Currents.—The tidal experience at Karumba is diurnal with an exteme range during spring tides of up to 4.7m.

Tidal currents can attain a rate of 4 knots at springs.

1.9 Tidal currents in the river attain rates of 2 knots at springs

and 1 knot at neaps.

1.9 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel lies between

sand banks extending about 5 miles offshore, where it is

crossed by a bar with a depth of 3.5m (2002). Depths of less

than 5.5m lie up to 10 miles offshore NW of Alligator Point

and 12 miles offshore WNW of the same point.

1.9 There are only small piers in the port, along with a wharf and

mooring dolphins for coasters.

1.9 The river above Karumba can be navigated by vessels with

drafts up to 3m as far as Double Island, about 11 miles upstream.

1.9 The town of Normanton, 17 miles above Double Island, can

be reached by small craft on most tides.

1.9 Aspect.—Lighted buoys and a lighted range mark the approach channel.

1.9 Landfall Light is shown from a water tower 2 miles SE of

Alligator Point. Another light is shown close SE of a conspicuous boat shed on the E entrance point.

1.9 The tower of the pilot signal station near the E entrance point

is conspicuous.

1.9 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels

35m long and over and is available 24 hours. Pilots come from

Cairns and must be requested a minimum of 72 hours in advance. See Pub. 127, Sailing Directions (Enroute) East Coast

of Australia and New Zealand, for further information.

1.9 Pilots contact the vessel on VHF channel 16 about 30 minutes prior to boarding. Pilots board about 1 mile WNW of Fairway Lighted Buoy.

1.9 Regulations.—Vessels intending to enter or depart the port

are required to announce their intentions on VHF channel 16.

Vessels must monitor VHF channel 16 throughout the entire

transit of the Norman River entrance channel.

1.9 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor in Karumba roadstead, 14

miles NW of Fairway Lighted Buoy (17°26.0'S, 140°45.5'E),

in depths of 9.0 to 11m, mud. An anchorage for small vessels

lies on the NW side of the river and is marked by special lighted buoys and Lighted Beacon No. 25. 

1.9 Directions.—Vessels should approach the channel with the

water tower, SE of Alligator Point, ahead bearing 123°. Lighted Buoy No. 2, Lighted Buoy No. 4, and Lighted Buoy No. 6

are passed to port.

1.9 On passing Lighted Buoy No. 6, alter course to 085° and

leave Lighted Buoy No. 1 to starboard, then steer ESE for the

river entrance, leaving Lighted Buoy No. 8 to port.

Ports Corporation of Queensland Port Profiles

http://www.pcq.com.au/2004/ports_karumba.cfm
8 Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 

Pub. 175

1.10 The coast trends SW from Alligator Point and forms a

long shoal bight which extends W to Gore Point. Depths of less

than 5.5m extend in places up to 15 miles off this coast and surveys in the area are imperfect and incomplete.

1.10 Several rivers enter the gulf at its head but they are all small,

with depths in their approaches limited to 0.6 to 0.9m. The

shores are low, lined with mangroves, and difficult to identify

from any distance off the coast. Large tidal flats, which cover

on most high waters, extend nearly across the entire head of the

gulf and change the contour of the land between high and low

water.

1.10 Caution.—Dangerous wrecks, the positions of which are approximate, lie about 28 miles WNW and 43 miles NW of Alligator Point.

1.11 Gore Point (17°38'S., 139°56'E.), about 52 miles

WSW of the entrance to the Norman River, may be identified

by a particularly bare sand hill, about 12m high; there is no

other similar hillock on this coast.

1.11 Disaster Inlet, entered immediately S of Gore Point, has a remarkable quoin-shaped clump of mangroves on its S entrance

point. The inlet is of no commercial importance and the bar

across its entrance is barely passable by boats.

1.11 The coast W of Gore Point is sandy for the first 6 miles and

forms a conspicuous mark when viewed from offshore because

of the break in the mangrove trees. About 9 miles WNW of

Gore Point, near the mouth of the Leichhardt River, the mangroves again resume, some with considerable height that are

visible for some distance offshore. 

1.11 The Albert River (17°34'S., 139°45'E.), entered between

Kangaroo Point on the E and Stokes Point, 1 mile to the W, can

be identified by an odd-shaped clump of trees on the first-mentioned point. A light is shown from Kangaroo Point. The coast

E of Kangaroo Point is sandy and backed by straggling trees,

while that to the W is covered with mangroves. The land behind the coast is very low, with few identifying marks.

1.11 Drying and shoal banks extend for a considerable distance

offshore, constant sounding is required to safely make the entrance. Depths of 5.5m and less extend 20 miles N and 9 to 13

miles NE of the river mouth. 

1.11 The bar off the entrance to the Albert River lies about 3 miles

NNE of Kangaroo Point and has depths of 0.9 to 1.5m. Its position and the depths over it are subject to change as it consists of

shifting sand. The channel is often visible because of breakers

on the coastal banks or discoloration over the shoals.

1.11 An obstruction, consisting of a large stranded tree which

dries 0.9m, lies 5 miles NE of Kangaroo Point.

1.11 The Albert River extends to Burketown (17°44'S.,

139°32'E.) (World Port Index No. 54680), about 30 miles

above the entrance. Small vessels or coasters can proceed up

the channel on most high waters. The least depth to Truganini

Landing, just below Burketown, is 1.4m. Pilots are not available.

1.12 The coast from Stokes Point to Tarrant Point, about 22

miles WNW, is low and covered with thick mangroves. Several

rivers flow to the gulf along this stretch of the coast. Shoal water extends up to 15 miles off the shore and drying mud flats lie

up to 2 miles seaward of Tarrant Point.

1.12 Point Parker (17°02'S., 139°09'E.), about 25 miles NW of

Tarrant Point, is wooded and rises to a hillock about 9m high. It

is fringed by rocky ledges which extend 1 mile SE, and there is

a sandy beach, clear of mangroves, on the S side of the point.

The long bight formed between Tarrant Point and Point Parker

is covered with mangroves in its S part, but rises slightly farther inland when closer to the latter.

1.12 Anchorage.—Small vessels can take anchorage between

Point Parker and Allen Island, about 3 miles E, where there are

depths of 4.6 to 8.2m, with the point bearing 259° at about 1 to

2 miles. Vessels should approach from S of Bentinck Island

and then steer NW for Point Parker, passing 3 miles SW of Creffild Point, the SE extremity of Allen Island, until clear of the

islet, when course may be altered NNW for the anchorage.

1.12 Tidal currents set SE with the rising tide and NW with the

falling tide.

1.12 Bayley Point (16°55'S., 139°02'E.), about 9 miles NW of

Point Parker, is low and covered with mangroves. Tidal flats lie

behind the point, and the shore between the points is intersected with creeks and streams.

1.12 Forsyth Island lies directly off Bayley Point and is included

under the Wellesley Islands in paragraph 1.19.

The Wellesley Islands

1.13 The Wellesley Islands (16°45'S., 139°30'E.) lie off

the W side of the head of the Gulf of Carpentaria, and include

Mornington Island, the largest of the group, the Bountiful Islands, Sweers Island, the Bentinck Islands, and Forsyth Island.

The area between this group and the adjacent coast between

Tarrant Point and Bayley Point has not been thoroughly examined, but the depths are recorded to be mostly under 5.5m and

there appear to be many dangers.

1.13 In the NW approach to the Wellesley Islands, a bank, with a

least known depth of 9.1m, lies about 32 miles NW of the W

extremity of Mornington Island. Two banks, with depths of

16.5 to 18.3m, lie about 16 miles to the NE of the 9.1m bank.

1.13 Manowar Islet (16°17'S., 139°16'E.), the N extremity of the

Wellesley Islands, is small and rocky, and lies about 11 miles

NNW of Halls Point, the NW extremity of Mornington Island.

There is a stranded wreck on the S point of the islet.

1.13 Rocky Islet (16°19'S., 139°17'E.) lies about 2 miles SSE of

Manowar Islet and is somewhat larger, being 1 mile long in a

N-S direction and about 0.5 mile wide. Deposits of guano have

been found on the island and a ree,f which dries and is often

covered with birds, lies about 0.5 mile off the NE point.

1.13 There is good anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon, in a

depth of 7.3m, about 0.35 mile off the W shore of Rocky Islet.

1.13 Caution.—There is a channel between Rocky Islet and

Mornington Island, however, numerous coral heads and depths

of less than 11m are reported to lie up to 6 miles off the coast

of Mornington Island and vessels should keep fairly close to

the islet to avoid them.

1.13 A 12.5m patch lies 8 miles ENE of Rocky Islet. A 7.9m

patch lies 8 miles E, and a 1.8m patch lies close NE, respectively, of Rocky Islet.

1.14 Mornington Island (16°35'S., 139°25'E.), the main

island of the Wellesley Islands, is about 32 miles long and up to

15 miles wide. It is in general surrounded by shoal water and

reefs; the waters to the N, W, and S are not completely sur-
Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 9

Pub. 175

veyed.

1.14 Cape Van Diemen (16°32'S., 139°43'E.), the E extremity of

Mornington Island, appears to be foul with rocks and breakers

extending up to 7 miles to the S and E. Lingnoonganee Island

lies close offshore, about 2 miles N of the point, and foul

ground extends about 6 miles NE from it.

1.14 Pisonia Islet (16°30'S., 139°48'E.) lies approximately 5

miles ENE of Cape Van Diemen and is formed of a high sand

bank on a coral foundation. A reef lies close N of the islet and a

dangerous rock is charted about 2 miles to the E.

1.14 Watson Patch (16°23'S., 139°42'E.), existence doubtful and

with little water over it, extends a little over 1 mile and lies, apparently isolated, about 9 miles N of Cape Van Diemen.

1.14 Halls Point (16°28'S., 139°19'E.), bordered by reef to a distance of 1 mile, forms the NW extremity of Mornington Island

and is located about 3 miles W of the Sandalwood Place River.

The coast hereabouts is low and wooded, but becomes sandy

farther E, and backed by low, white cliffs near the N extremity

of the island.

1.14 Depths of less than 9.1m extend up to 5 miles NW of Halls

Point; a depth of 4.9m lies about 5 miles WNW of Halls Point. 

1.14 Brookes Reef, reported in 1979, lies about 1 mile offshore, 8

miles SW of Halls Point. This area is not fully surveyed and

numerous coral heads have been reported in the vicinity.

1.15 Denham Island (16°43'S., 139°10'E.) is about 4

miles in length and covered with vegetation and grazing land.

It is separated from Mornington Island by Apple Channel,

which is suitable for vessels with local knowledge drawing up

to 3.7m. The channel is marked by beacons, but the approaches

are difficult unless a local seaman can be obtained.

1.15 There is a mission station on Dubbar Point, at the W entrance to Apple Channel, which serves the entire Wellesley Islands. 

1.15 Midbagar Point, the S extremity of Denham Island, is foul

with Andrew Islet located close S. A shelf of dangerous submerged rocks lies up to 6 miles SE of this point.

1.15 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, with good holding

ground, about 2.4 miles, 197° from Gee Wee Point (16°38'S.,

139°09'E.), the W extremity of Mornington Island. The approach to this anchorage appears clear from the N, but a line of

dangers extends about 11 miles NW of the S extremity of Denham Island and caution is necessary. A channel leads to the

mission station where there is a boat jetty.

1.16 Sydney Island (16°41'S., 139°28'E.), the largest of

the islands off the SE coast of Mornington Island, lies about 17

miles SW of Cape Van Diemen. The island is fringed with dangers and two drying patches lie about 2 miles to the E. The

coast of Mornington Island to the NE and SW of Sydney Island

is composed of shallow bays which dry at their heads. Numerous dangers lie off this coast, and the area and its approaches

has not been fully surveyed.

1.16 The Bountiful Islands (16°40'S., 139°52'E.) lie approximately 10 miles SE of Cape Van Diemen and form the E group

of the Wellesley Islands. The NE and largest island is low, with

some cliffs of ironstone formation on the SE side. The crests of

the island consist of red sandstone and the N and E points are

fringed by reefs with several rocks above water.

1.16 The SW island is small and surrounded by coral reefs which

extend up to 2 miles to the W. Rocks which cover and uncover

have been reported to lie in approximate position 16°42.2'S,

139°50.8'E.

1.16 A stranded wreck lies on the NW side of the largest island.

1.16 Anchorage can be found, in 5.5m, about 0.5 mile NNE of the

N point of S Bountiful Island.

1.17 Sweers Island (17°06'S., 139°37'E.), the SE of the

Wellesley Islands, lies about 17 miles NNE of Tarrant Point

(17°22'S., 139°25'E.) and is separated from the larger Bentinck

Island to the W, by Investigator Road. Inspection Hill, 32m

high, rises on the S extremity of Sweers Island, and being the

highest land in the vicinity forms a good mark from nearly all

directions. The E side of the island is fringed by rocky ledges

extending up to 1 mile from the shore, and the S side by similar

ledges also extending up to 1 mile offshore.

1.17 Macdonald Point, fringed by reef, forms the SW extremity of

Sweers Island, and Inscription Point, 1.25 miles to the N, is

low, white, and sandy. Red cliffs form a third point 1 mile NE

of Inscription Point, with a shoal bay between.

1.17 Locust Rock, 3m high, lies nearly 2 miles SSE of Inspection

Hill, with foul ground between the shore and the rock. A reef,

which dries at low water, lies 0.5 mile ENE of the rock, and

shoal water extends with a least depth of 1.8m about 1 mile to

the S. A lighted beacon has been established in the S part of the

island.

1.17 Bentinck Island (17°04'S., 139°30'E.) lies with Raft Point,

its E extremity, about 1 mile NW of Inscription Point. Raft

Point is wooded and easily identified, but Bentinck Island as a

whole is only slightly elevated and covered with grass, scrub,

and trees. Most of the island is fringed by reef and rocks and

shoals extend up to 3 miles off Oaktree Point, its N extremity.

1.17 The W side of Bentinck Island is fringed by shoals and tidal

flats and the waters to the W are unsurveyed. Four islets,

known as Albinia, Margaret, Bessie, and Douglas, extend

NNW for 8 miles from the W extremity of the island, with

Douglas, the outermost islet, lying on a ledge of rocks. A rocky

ledge, with an above-water rock lying on its outer end, extends

about 2 miles S from Kirk Point, the S extremity of the island.

1.17 Fowler Island (17°07'S., 139°33'E.) lies 2 miles SSW of

Raft Point, but is not easily distinguished from a distance.

There is a clump of trees near its S extremity which is a good

mark when fairly close in. The E side of the island is fringed by

rocks and foul ground to a distance of 0.75 mile offshore.

1.18 Investigator Road (17°07'S., 139°35'E.) lies between

the S part of Sweers Island and the E side of Fowler Island, and

is the only secure anchorage for ocean-going vessels at the

head of the Gulf of Carpentaria. It is sheltered from the prevailing winds by Sweers Island to the E and Fowler Island and the

Bentinck Islands to the W. All but small craft must enter from

the S as shoal water and reefs extend across the road from Raft

Point to the N part of Sweers Island. The roadstead is spacious,

having a broad and clear passage leading to it, with depths of

7.3 to 10.1m throughout the S part. 

1.18 It should be noted that a drying rock lies in mid-channel 1

mile ENE of Raft Point.

1.18 Tides—Currents.—Spring tides in the vicinity of Investigator Road rise about 2.6m. The tidal currents set S on the flood

and N on the ebb. The ebb current usually commences from 2
10 Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 

Pub. 175

to 3 hours before HW and attains a maximum of 2 knots; however, the rate and duration of the set are considerably influenced by the wind.

1.18 Anchorage.—Vessels of moderate draft can take anchorage

in Investigator Road, nearly 1 mile SW of Inscription Point,

with the red cliffs on the W side of Sweers Island just open to

the NW. The depth here is 9.1m, over a bottom of sand and coral. Caution is necessary to avoid closing Sweers Island, where

coral heads may extend nearly 0.25 mile offshore.

1.18 A mooring buoy is situated about 1.5 miles SSW of Inscription Point.

1.18 Directions.—Vessels should enter from the S. Pass Locust

Rock at a distance of 1.5 miles. When Raft Point, which is

wooded and easily identified, opens W of Macdonald Point,

steer on the clump of trees on the S extremity of Fowler Island

bearing 313°, which leads to the entrance of the roadstead.

When Inscription Point, a low sandy spit, is in line with the

NW extremity of Sweers Island, course may be altered NNE

for the anchorage.bearing about 030°.

1.18 Caution.—Fowler Island does not show up well against

Bentinck Island.

1.19 Allen Island (17°02'S., 139°14'E.) lies between the

W extremity of Bentinck Island and the mainland coast at

Point Parker (17°03'S., 139°11'E.). The island is low and fertile, being covered with grass, small trees, and shrubs, but iron

cliffs face the SE end. Creffild Point is the SE end of the island

and Greenaway Point, 4 miles NW, forms the opposite extremity.

1.19 There is a channel between Allen Island and the mainland

NW, but the charted depth is only 2.1m and local knowledge is

recommended.

1.19 Horseshoe Island, along with several islets and above-water

rocks, lies off the NE side of Allen Island; it is known to be enclosed by reefs, but the area has not been closely examined.

1.19 Forsyth Island (16°50'S., 139°07'E.), surrounded by islets,

rocks, and reefs, lies between the SW extremity of Mornington

Island and the mainland coast at Bayley Point (16°55'S.,

139°02'E.). Bayley Island and Pains Island lie 3 and 2 miles,

respectively, SW of Forsyth Island and are low and fairly

small. These islands are generally covered with vegetation and

trees; although the climate is pleasant in winter, during summer

they are hot and humid with hordes of poisonous sandflies

which cause considerable discomfort to unprotected personnel.

1.19 There is a channel between Forsyth Island and Pains Island

with a least depth of 5.5m. Numerous shoals lie close to the

edge of the channel and local knowledge is recommended.

1.19 Caution.—The area in the vicinity of Mornington Island and

Forsyth Island is not completely surveyed and vessels should

attempt navigation only in good light, with proper lookouts and

at reduced speed. During the Southeast Monsoon, visibility

may be reduced by haze to about 5 miles and a vessel without

local knowledge may have considerable difficulty in fixing its

position.

Bayley Point to the McArthur River

1.20 From Bayley Point (16°55'S., 139°02'E.) to Tully Inlet, 53 miles W, there are numerous shoals, with depths of less

than 1.8m, up to 6 miles offshore. Discoloration of the water

gives no positive indication of the depths, as numerous muddy

streams discharge to the sea through the sandy beach along this

coast.

1.20 The Calvert River (16°16'S., 137°45'E.), approximately 40

miles NW of Tully Inlet, is more than mile wide at its entrance,

but at times has a drying sand bar extending right across the approaches. Within the bar there are depths of about 1.8m, and

the river is wide but mostly shallow. The E side of the entrance

is marked by a projecting point with a hillock on it.

1.20 About 4 miles E of the Calvert River entrance there is a coral

reef, and numerous shoals lie in the entire area, with depths of

5.5m or less extending up to 6 miles offshore.

1.20 Shoals with depths of 20m and 11m were reported in 1980 to

lie about 42 miles N and 26 miles NNE, respectively, of the

mouth of the Calvert River. A depth of 4m was reported in

1985 to lie about 18 miles NE of the river mouth.

1.20 The Robinson River (16°02'S., 137°16'E.) flows to the sea

approximately 32 miles WNW of the Calvert River, and had a

depth of 1.2m over the bar a number of years. Immediately inside the entrance the river divides into three parts and then

joins again 2 or 3 miles upstream. There are depths of 6 to 9m

about 2 miles above the entrance; the river is available to vessels drawing about 1.8m at HW.

1.20 About midway between the Calvert River and the Robinson

River are numerous cuts and inlets, within which are small rivers and lagoons. The coast between these two rivers consists of

tidal flats, with mangroves along the banks of the small rivers.

The depths along this coast are shoal with many banks and

rocks off the inlets.

1.20 Caution.—A wreck, best seen on chart, with a least depth of

7m, lies 20 miles NE of the Robinson River entrance.

1.21 From 1 to 5 miles W of the Robinson River entrance

the 5.5m curve extends up to 5 miles offshore; from there to

Pelican Spit, about 13 miles farther WNW, the coastal area has

not been adequately surveyed.

1.21 From Pelican Spit to the McArthur River entrance, 19 miles

W, the coast is fringed with mangroves, has no distinctive features, and is reported to be fronted by shoal water and drying

banks extending up to 6 miles offshore.

1.21 The McArthur River (15°50'S., 136°47'E.) is shoal in its

approach and the entrance changes after every freshet. It has

been reported able to accommodate vessels with drafts up to

2.4m at HW, however, vessels with drafts to 3.4m have been

known to enter. The channel is reported to be marked by buoys

and beacons, but any such aids are not to be depended on. Borroloola, a town in which there is a mission, lies on the W bank

of the river about 35 miles above the entrance; there is an airfield and the mission is equipped with radio.

The Sir Edward Pellew Group

1.22 The Sir Edward Pellew Group (15°40'S., 136°52'E.)

consists of five principal islands surrounded with numerous islets and rocks lying off the approaches to the McArthur River.

1.22 The islands are moderately high and composed mostly of

hard sandstone, with a small mixture of quartz and iron. They

are mostly covered with trees and scrub, and game and birds

abound.

1.22 Vanderlin Island, the largest of the group, lies farthest E and
Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 11

Pub. 175

is separated from the W islands by Addison Channel. Lake

Eames, in the middle of the N half of Vanderlin Island, contains an unlimited supply of fresh water. The main islands on

the W side are arranged to the compass points and consist of

North Island, Centre Island, Southwest Island, and West Island. 

1.22 Vanderlin Island (15°43'S., 137°02'E.) lies approximately

20 miles ENE of the entrance to the McArthur River and is

very prominent, especially from the E in the morning. The island attains a height of approximately 150m and is skirted by

rocks and islets concentrated along its E shore. Cape Vanderlin,

the N extremity, is 46m high, steep-to on its W side, and composed of hard sandstone boulders; Vanderlin Rocks, which dry

2.4m, lie 2 miles NE of the cape and appear steep-to, as they

are not always marked by breakers. Refuge Cove, which provides good shelter for boats, lies at the N end of the island

close E of Cape Vanderlin.

1.22 Turtle Island, 5m high, lies 1 mile W of Cape Vanderlin and

is located on the N end of Middle Shoal, which extends in a

SSW direction for 3 miles and terminates in David Islet at its S

extremity. Middle Shoal carries depths of less than 3m over

most of its length, and Steven Rocks, consisting of sandstone

boulders 3m high, lie off the N end of this shoal close N of Turtle Islet. Turton Rock and Marsden Shoal, close W of David Islet, are just covered at high water and then are marked by tide

rips. A rock, with depths less than 1.8m, lies close E of the

same islet.

1.22 Wheatley Islet, 25m high, lies about 1 mile SW of Cape

Vanderlin and is composed of sandstone boulders on which

grow a few trees and prickly grass. Disaster Reef, with a depth

of 0.3m, lies about 1 mile SW of Wheatley Islet on the edge of

a bank with depths of less than 5.5m; no sign of this reef shows

even when there is a strong tidal current over it. A submerged

rock lies close S of Wheatley Islet.

1.22 Barbara Cove, entered between Kedge Point, about 3 miles

SSW of Cape Vanderlin, and Symonds Bluff, 1.25 miles further SW, is shoal and available only to boats at HW

1.23 Charles Point (15°41'S., 136°55'E.), the W extremity

of Vanderlin Island, is a long narrow finger of land which lies

about 7 miles SW of Cape Vanderlin. Geranium Bay, shoal and

rocky, lies close N of Charles Point and is dangerous to enter.

Brown Islet, on the SW end of a reef about 1.25 miles long, lies

3 miles SW of Charles Point and is a good mark in daylight.

An islet, approximately 10m high, is located 3 miles ENE of

Brown Islet. A shoal, with a depth of 4m, lies about 0.5 mile N

of Brown Islet.

1.23 Clarkson Point (15°50'S., 137°02'E.), marked by a conspicuous house, forms the SW extremity of Vanderlin Island and

lies about 12 miles SE of Charles Point, with several unsurveyed coves and two islets between. General depths at 3 miles

off this coast run from 3.7 to 4.6m, but a 1.8m patch was reported (1964) to lie 3 miles NW of Clarkson Point.

1.23 Goat Point (15°51'S., 137°04'E.), the S extremity of Vanderlin Island, lies about 2.25 miles ESE of Clarkson Point, with

Little Vanderlin Islet, not completely examined, about 0.75

mile to the S. The E coast of Vanderlin Island, to the N of Goat

Point, is strewn with rocks and has not been surveyed. The

5.5m curve appears to lie up to 2 miles off the shore in some

places and vessels are recommended not to approach this side

of the island within a distance of 3 miles.

1.23 A depth of 2.1m has been reported (1988) to lie approximately 13 miles ENE of Goat Point.

1.23 Three Hummocks Point (15°38'S., 138°04'E.), the NE extremity of Vanderlin Island, is about 34m high and formed of a

steep-sided islet lying close offshore, with numerous rocks extending up to 1 mile to the E.

1.23 Investigator Bay is entered between Three Hummocks Point

and Mesley Point, 2 miles NW, and gives shelter in S and W

winds. The head of the bay is shoal and a 3m patch lies 1.5

miles N of Three Hummocks Point.

1.24 North Island (15°35'S., 136°52'E.) lies with Red

Bluff, its E extremity, 5 miles W of Cape Vanderlin and is separated from Vanderlin Island by Addison Channel and Hyde

Channel. Cape Pellew, the NE extremity of the island, lies 5

miles N of Red Bluff with the coast between being mostly

rock. Bald Hill, 38m high and devoid of vegetation, stands 1.25

miles S of Cape Pellew with low ground to the W and SW.

North Hill, 3 miles S of Cape Pellew, is 66m high and wooded.

Red Bluff is a 26m high conspicuous headland composed of

massive red sandstone boulders.

1.24 Islets and rocks, with intermediate foul ground, lie from 2 to

5 miles E of Cape Pellew and include Pearce Islet, 13m high,

and Urquhart Islet, 7m high.

1.24 North Rock, 24m high, lies close off Cape Pellew and is a

good mark from NW and SE.

1.24 Observation Island (15°37'S., 136°54'E.), 22m high, lies on

the edge of the 5m curve about 1.5 miles S of Red Bluff and is

composed of red sandstone boulders. An obelisk, 5m high,

stands on the islet and is a good mark. Rocky spits, usually

marked by the tide rips, extend 0.25 mile N and SE, respectively, from the island; a 3.7m patch lies 0.5 mile to the NE.

1.24 Walker Point, the SE extremity of North Island, lies 3 miles

SW of Red Bluff with Cabbage Tree Cove, shoal and fronted

by boulders, lying between.

1.25 Phil Point (15°39'S., 136°51'E.), the S extremity of

North Island, is bordered by reef which extends along the shore

immediately to the NE and NW. The W coast of the island to

the N of Phil Point is indented by small shoal coves which have

not been surveyed. Skull Island and Watson Island lie about 1

mile off this shore, but neither have been completely examined.

1.25 Paradice Bay (15°32'S., 136°51'E.), at the N end of the W

shore of North Island, affords good anchorage for small vessels

seeking shelter from the Southeast Monsoon. The mud bottom

0.3 mile offshore. The best approach appears to be from NW,

and the beach area, at the head of the bay, is a good landing

place. A depth of 8.4m was reported to lie approximately 2

miles NW of Paradice Bay.

1.25 Centre Island (15°42'S., 136°46'E,.) separated from North

Island by Centre Channel, lies with Rocky Point, its NE extremity, about 1.5 milse SW of Phil Point. The E side of Centre

Island is fronted by a bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extending up to 1.5 miles offshore. A large shallow bay occupies

much of this same side of the island, but is only available to

boats at HW. A dangerous wreck, with masts showing, lies

about 1.25 miles SE of Rocky Islet, which is located close E of

Rocky Point.

1.25 Ataluma Point (15°45'S., 136°49'E.), the SE extremity of

Centre Island, is the outer end of a small irregular peninsula
12 Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 

Pub. 175

which extends a little over 1 mile from the shore. The 5m curve

lies about 0.35 mile off the point and is steep-to, with depths of

12.8m close seaward. The S shore of the island is foul up to Labu Islet, which lies close off the SW extremity.

1.25 Gould Point, the NW extremity of Centre Island, is fringed

by a reef, with Red Island close SW.

1.25 The N coast of Center Island, between Gould Point and

Rocky Point, forms the S side of Centre Channel, and is bordered by reef. Crab Rocks, one of which is above water, lie

about 0.5 mile offshore midway between the points.

1.26 Southwest Island (15°44'S., 136°40'E.) lies close W

of Centre Island and is practically connected to the mainland

SW by mangrove swamp. The island has not been closely examined.

1.26 Buchanan Bay (15°40'S., 136°43'E.) lies between the NE

side of Southwest Island and the W side of Centre Island, and

has depths of 3.7 to 4m across its entrance. The head of the bay

is shoal but leads to Georges Channel, separating the two islands, which is available to boats at HW.

1.26 The Craggy Islets (15°36'S., 136°41'E.), consisting of Black

Islet, the larger, and White Islet, lie about 4 miles N of Southwest Island and have not been closely examined.

1.26 West Island (15°35'S., 136°33'E,.), the westernmost of the

Sir Edward Pellew Group, lies 3 miles NW of Southwest Island

and is connected to both the mainland and the former by extensive mud flats. The island has not been thoroughly examined,

but a dangerous reef is known to exist about 2 miles off its NE

end. A depth of 3.7m was reported in 1965, 7 miles NE of the

N point of West Island.

Channels.—Addison Channel forms the main approach to

the anchorages available in the Sir Edward Pellew Group. It is

the favored channel for vessels of any size as it has a least

charted fairway depth of 7.6m. It should be noted, however,

that because the water between the islands is never clear and

since the bottom in the vicinity of the shoals cannot be seen,

caution is required. 

1.26 Bruce Channel leads between Pearce Islet and Urquhart Islet, but is only recommended to small vessels with local knowledge. It should be approached from the NE with Pearce Islet

ahead, then steering S when the W extremity of Urquhart Islet

bears 158°.

1.26 Hyde Channel leads between Middle Shoal and the NW side

of Vanderlin Island. It has a least charted depth of 6.1m in the

fairway, but is not recommended without local knowledge.

Middle Shoal and Disaster Reef usually do not show even under good conditions, and are dangerous to any size vessel.

1.26 Centre Channel, with a least depth of 4.9m, leads between

North Island and Centre Island, and can be run by small vessels, with Skull Point ahead bearing 308°.

1.26 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, according to the

shelter required, at numerous places between the E side of

North Island and the W side of Vanderlin Island. Depths generally run from 8 to 11m, mud bottom, with swinging room for

moderate sized vessels.

1.26 Small vessels can anchor close off Cape Vanderlin, in depths

of 7 to 10m, but clear of the spit extending N of Wheatley Islet.

1.26 Geranium Bay affords excellent shelter from all E winds to

small vessels, in depths of 4 to 6m, thick mud. Local knowledge is recommended.

1.26 Paradice Bay, on the NW coast of North Island, provides

good anchorage for small vessels during SE winds, in depths of

4.6 to 6m.

1.27 Bing Bong Offshore Bulk Cargo Loading Berths

(15°26'S, 136°31'E.) lie N of West Island and are best seen on

the chart.

1.27 Tides—Currents.—During local springs, low tides can

cause delays of about 4 hours before the barge can leave the

loading berth. 

1.27 Winds—Weather.—Frequent dense morning fog reduces

visibility to less than 100m at the anchorage; this occurs mostly

in winter, between June and September, and may cause delays

of up to 5 hours.

1.27 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels of up to 46,000 dwt are allowed to partially load; vessels of 28,000 dwt can be fully loaded. The cargo is zinc/lead concentrate that is transported by a

3,300 dwt barge from Bing Bong (15°36'S., 136°24'E.). 

1.27 Pilotage.—Although not compulsory, pilots are available, as

follows:

1. Approaching from NW—Gove, Northern Territory.

2. Approaching from a port on the E coast of Australia—from that last port of call.

3. Pilots can also be flown in from the Torres Strait and

board from the barge.

1.27 Pilot arrangements should be made 5 days in advance.

1.27 Regulations.—Port clearance, customs, and quarantine formalities are handled by the Master or the Chief Officer of the

barge. There are no medical facilities at Bing Bong; emergency

cases may be airlifted to Darwin, 600 miles away.

1.27 At the anchorage, vessels are required to maintain a freeboard of 9.5m at all times before, during, and at completion of

loading. This freeboard is measured to the height above the

bulwark or the hatch combing, whichever is higher.

1.27 Anchorage.—Both anchorages, charted as BB1 and BB2,

lie N of West Island and are best seen on the chart. Both anchor

berths have a depth of about 12m, good holding ground. Vessels use the starboard anchor.

1.27 Directions.—Bing Bong Anchorage BB2 is approached

http://www.mim.com.au/mcarthur.html

Bing Bong
Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 13

Pub. 175

from position 15°20'S, 136°32'E; from this position steer S for

3 miles and anchor 16.5 miles NNE of Bing Bong Light

(15°38'S., 136°23'E.) by keeping E of a 9.3m shoal.

1.27 Bing Bong Anchorage BB1 is approached from position

15°20'S, 136°32'E. From this position, steer S for 4.5 miles by

keeping E of the 9.8m patch, then alter course to 216° and steer

on it for 2 miles until in position to drop the starboard anchor

13.25 miles NE of the light.

Limmen Bight

1.28 From a position S of West Island (15°35'S.,

136°33'E.), the coast trends NW for approximately 60 miles to

the entrance of the Limmen Bight River and is generally feaureless, with mud flats extending up to 5 miles offshore. A

shoal, which breaks and has depths of less than 1.8m over its

central part, lies about 8 miles NW of West Island. A rocky

outcrop extends 1 mile offshore ,about 15 miles WNW of the

same island. A dangerous submerged rock, with depths less

than 2m, was reported in 1986 to lie about 9 miles W of Labyrinthian Shoals.

1.28 Labyrinthian Shoals (15°12'S., 136°07'E.) are a group of

sand banks, with some rocky heads, having depths of less than

1.8m, centered about 31 miles NW of West Island and up to 8

miles off the mainland coast; part of these banks have been reported above water, with some bushes growing on the driest areas. Vessels are recommended to give these shoals a wide

berth, passing to the NE and not proceeding into depths of less

than 13m in their vicinity.

1.28 Limmen Bight (14°45'S., 135°40'E.) is formed by the coast

between a point on the shore, about 17 miles WNW of West Island, and Rantyirrity Point (14°11'S., 135°54'E.), about 75

miles NNW. The shores of the bight are generally low and

sandy, being backed by low level country only broken by an

unnamed range of hills about 20 miles inland. The bight is not

well surveyed, especially in the NW part, and several dangers,

marked position doubtful or position approximate, are situated

here.

1.28 The Limmen Bight River (15°06'S., 135°43'E.) enters Limmen Bight on the SW shore about 55 miles NW of West Island

but is blocked by nearly drying mud flats extending up to 3

miles offshore. Mount Young, an isolated hump, 65m high, rises about 2 miles S of the entrance, and Beatrice Islet, with a

rock NE, lies on the edge of the mud banks about 4 miles NE

of the river mouth.

1.29 Maria Island (14°52'S., 135°44'E.) lies near the middle of Limmen Bight, about 12 miles N of the entrance to the

Limmen Bight River. It is approximately 61m high and consists of stony soil covered with brushwood; the E and S sides

are relatively steep-to, but the W side is shoal and indented by

Eagle Bay. A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 1

mile W of the NW extremity of the island. Depths in the passage between the island and the mainland run from 5.5 to 7m

from 2 miles S to 4 miles W of the SW extremity.

1.29 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken during the Southeast

Monsoon with the SW extremity of Maria Island bearing 118°,

and during the Northwest Monsoon with the same point bearing 320°. Small craft may anchor in 5m depth with the N entrance point of Eagle Bay bearing NE at a distance of 1.25

miles.

1.29 Caution.—Meikleham Reef, with a depth of less than 1.8m,

lies approximately 7 miles NE of Maria Island. Another reef,

the position of which is doubtful, lies charted 11 miles E of the

island.

1.29 Low Rock, two above-water rocks on a rocky shoal, lies

about 13 miles NNE of Maria Island and appear to be isolated.

1.29 Considerable caution is required in the approach to Maria Island because of the above dangers and unsurveyed areas lying

to the N and SE.

1.30 The Roper River (14°45'S., 135°25'E.), entered

about 20 miles WNW of Maria Island, may be identified by

Gulnare, a remarkable buff 41m high, terminating in a range of

hills N of the river. The depth over the bar is charted at 1.2m,

but the depths change with the seasons and the channel is

known to shift. Within the bar the depths increase gradually to

9.1m, this being carried for some distance, with the river being

navigable for about 100 miles by small craft with local knowledge. There is a town 10 miles above the entrance and a mission station, equipped with radio, is situated 30 miles farther

upstream.

1.30 Tides on the bar of the Roper River are not well-established

but MHHW rises about 1m.

1.30 The mud flats fronting the coast N and S of the entrance to

the Roper River dry up to 6 miles offshore. They generally terminate at Warrakunta Point, about 10 miles NE of the river

mouth, where the shore becomes reef-fringed and rocky.

1.31 Edward Islet (14°30'S., 135°37'E.) lies on the outer

edge of the mud flats about 10 miles NE of Warrakunta Point

and 1 mile offshore. It is 3m high and fringed by reef on its SE

and SW sides. Lamparrinya Reef lies 1 mile SE of the island

and Wilipili Islet lies 1 mile S.

1.31 Sandy Islet (14°26'S., 135°53'E.), standing in the middle of

a large area of drying sand banks, lies about 15 miles NE of

Edward Islet, with the surrounding waters mostly unsurveyed.

A reef and a small islet lie about 3 miles E of Sandy Islet,with a

drying spit nearly connecting the two.

1.31 Rantyirrity Point (14°11'S., 135°54'E.), about 14 miles N

of Sandy Islet, is wooded, as is the shore S to Edward Island.

To the SW of the point shoal flats extend up to 8 miles offshore

reaching their greatest distance adjacent to Sandy Islet.

1.31 Minintirri Islet and Ammarrity Islet, the latter being rocks

that dry 0.9m, lie close offshore about 4 miles SW of Rantyirrity Point. Nungkanangka Islet lies in the entrance of the Rose

River, about 11 miles SW of the Rantyirrity Point.

1.31 Alagna Shoal (14°06'S., 136°03'E.), with a depth of 1.8m,

lies about 11 miles NE of Rantyirrity Point and appears isolated. The waters N of this shoal are incompletely surveyed.

1.31 The coast N of Rantyirrity Point is described beginning in

paragraph 1.42.

Groote Eylandt

1.32 Groote Eylandt, the outermost of the group extending

E from Cape Barrow (13°40'S., 136°04'E.), is the largest island

in the Gulf of Carpentaria and lies with its NE extremity approximately 53 miles off the W shore. 

1.32 Central Hill is approximately 183m high and is the highest
14 Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 

Pub. 175

land bordering any of the shores in the gulf. Some of the ridges

descending from Central Hill are wooded, but the island is

mostly barren rock, with densely wooded flats in the lowlands.

The S half of the island is higher than the N half, but the latter

is bordered by numerous islets and indented with several bays.

1.32 Cape Beatrice (14°18'S., 136°58'E.), the SE extremity of

Groote Eylandt, is fronted by islets and rocks which extend up

to 3 miles offshore. The coast between the cape and South

Point, the SW extremity of the island, 37 miles to the W, is also

fronted by numerous islets and rocks, some of which lie up to 5

miles offshore. 

1.32 The coast W of Inamalamandja Point, midway between

Cape Beatrice and South Point, has not been closely examined

and should not be approached.

1.32 Cumberlege Reef (14°28'S., 136°53'E.), which dries about

2m and on which the sea has been seen to break, lies about 10

miles SSW of Cape Beatrice. A 7m patch lies about 1 mile NW

of the reef; an 11m patch lies 5 miles NW of the reef.

1.32 South Point (14°15'S., 136°19'E.) is the S extremity of a

narrow sandy peninsula which forms the SW end of Groote

Eylandt. Tasman Point, the N extremity of the above peninsula,

lies about 1 mile N of South Point and has a sand hill on it; an

above-water rock lies close off the peninsula at Tasman Point.

1.32 The tidal currents meet off Tasman Point and heavy tide rips

are encountered hereabouts. The soundings off the point are irregular, with depths of 7.3m apparently extending up to 3 miles

to the W and SW.

Groote Eylandt—West Coast

1.33 The W coast of Groote Eylandt extends N from the inner end of the peninsula forming the islands SW extremity, and

is bordered by irregular depths and foul ground. Several areas

along the S part of this shore are unsurveyed and caution is advised.

1.33 Angurugu Creek (13°58'S., 136°25'E.), 15 miles NNE of

Tasman Point, is the largest of a number of creeks which discharge along the W coast of the island. There is a boat landing

within the entrance of the creek, but only small craft with local

knowledge can approach as an area of unsurveyed rocky shoals

lying from directly off the mouth to a distance of approximately 2.5 miles offshore. At the head of the creek, about 3 miles

inland, there is a mission station with an airstrip and radio

equipment. A conspicuous group of buildings stands about 2

miles ESE of the mouth of the creek.

1.33 Rutland Shoal (14°00'S., 136°21'E.), with a least depth of

3.9m, rock, lies 4 miles WSW of the entrance to Amgurugo

Creek and is marked by eddies and tide rips on both the ebb

and flood.

1.33 North West Bluff (13°50'S., 136°25'E.), the NW extremity

of Groote Eylandt, rises to a height of 75m and is cliffy on its

N side. A conspicuous yellow patch is located on the side of

the cliff forming the NE extremity of the bluff and can be identified from a considerable distance seaward.

1.33 The town of Alyangula and the ore port at Milner Bay are

situated about 1 mile SSE of North West Bluff.

1.33 Bartalumba Bay (13°48'S., 136°30'E.) is located between

Winchelsea Island and North West Bluff. An inlet lies about

mile ESE of the conspicuous yellow patch on North West

Bluff. A jetty used by shrimp boats is situated on the NE entrance point to the inlet. A below-water rock was reported

(1984) to lie off the jetty and a dangerous wreck, with masts

showing, was reported (1986) to lie about 0.4 mile NE of the

head of the jetty.

1.33 Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of about 10m, about

0.4 mile NE of the conspicuous yellow patch, but except for the

anchorage area the bay has not been surveyed.

Approaches to Milner Bay

1.34 Brady Rock (13°41'S., 136°27'E.), small and steepto, lies about 9.25 miles NNE of North West Bluff and is

marked by a light shown from a white hut, 3m high.

1.34 Winchelsea Island (13°43'S., 136°30'E.), barren and rocky,

lies with its NW extremity, Winchelsea Rock, about 2 miles

SSE of Brady Rock. Numerous submerged rocks and an unnamed islet lie up to 1 mile N of the island, and no attempt

should be made to closely approach its shores without local

knowledge. The S end is thickly covered with mangroves and a

narrow boat channel leads between this shore and the mainand.

North West Bay, on the E side of the island, has not been closely examined and should be avoided.

1.34 Bustard Island (13°42'S., 136°24'E.), 32m high, with a

ridge on its N part, lies about 3 miles SW of Brady Rock with

Arruwa Islet close WSW of it. The waters surrounding Bustard

Island are unsurveyed and several dangers are known to exist

up to 2 miles SW of it.

1.34 Hawknest Island (13°38'S., 136°25'E.), low and sandy, lies

about 4 miles NW of Brady Rock and has depths of 7.6 to 10m

off its S side. Because of its low height, Hawknest Island will

probably not be sighted from the NE before Bustard Island.

1.35 Connexion Island (13°50'S., 136°21'E.), high and

wooded, lies 2.25 miles W of North West Bluff (13°50'S.,

136°25'E.), and is separated from Groote Eylandt by Connexion Channel. The latter, which has a least known depth of

10.8m in the fairway, is encumbered by an 8.2m unexamined

shoal at its N end and therefore, because of this and the strong

tidal currents, local knowledge is recommended.

1.35 The waters around Connexion Island are not completely surveyed and vessels are cautioned not to closely approach its

shores, especially to the N or S. Burley Shoal, with a least

known depth of 5.5m, lies 1 mile S of the island, but has not

been surveyed to its N limits.

1.35 Connexion Island Light is shown from a metal post on the W

extremity of the island. The light is obscured by the island between the bearings of 219° and 344°.

1.35 Hand Islet, small and rocky, is located about 4 miles NW of

Connexion Island Light and close off Bickerton Island.

1.35 Bickerton Island (13°45'S., 136°14'E.), about 80m high,

lies about 4 miles NW of Connexion Island and is the largest of

the islands between Cape Barrow and Groote Eylandt. It is

roughly 12 miles in width and the same in length, with two

large bights, known as North Bay and South Bay, penetrating

the W part of the island toward its hilly interior.

1.35 The island, which is skirted by rocks, has not been closely

examined and only partly surveyed in South Bay, where there

is anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge, seeking

shelter from the Northwest Monsoon.

1.35 Bickerton Island Light is shown from a 3m high white hut on
Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 15

Pub. 175

a point close WSW of Hand Islet.

1.35 Woody Islet, 1 mile W of the SW extremity of Bickerton Island, lies on the outer edge of a shoal connecting it to that island.

1.35 Warwick Channel (13°48'S., 136°19'E.), surveyed over a

width of about 2 miles between Connexion Island and Bickerton Island, has a depth of 29m in its center, however, depths in

the N approaches run from 16 to 20m between Connexion Island and Bustard Island.

Milner Bay (Alyangula) (13°52'S., 136°25'E.)

World Port Index No. 54671

1.36 Milner Bay, a port of entry, is situated on the W coast

of Groote Eylandt just S of North West Bluff, the island’s NW

extremity. There is one berth for the loading of manganese ore

which extends from the shore close S of the town; several tanks

mark the area. The port, which is sheltered by Connexion Island, must be approached from the NE as the S approaches are

not adequately surveyed or marked.

1.36 Winds—Weather.—During the dry season, from May to

October, the prevailing winds are from the SE. The winds can

blow strongly during the day, but subside after sunset. 

1.36 During the wet season, from November to April, the predominate NW winds can bring heavy rains and moderate seas.

1.36 In June and July, heavy morning fog has been known to last

until 1000 or 1100.

1.36 Tides—Currents.—Tidal rises in Milner Bay area are variable, with springs rising from 1 to 1.3m and neaps from 0.3 to

1m.

1.36 In the vicinity of the loading berth the currents, which are

parallel to the pier, attain a rate of approximately 2 knots on

both the flood and the ebb; the latter sets to the N.

1.36 Due to the uneven bottom in the approaches to Milner Bay,

tidal streaks and eddies are common near the edges of the

channel.

1.36 Depths—Limitations.—Warwick Channel has a depth of

29.1m in the approaches to the port. Connexion Passage may

also be taken and is a shorter, though shallower passage. In

transiting Connexion Passage, care must be taken to avoid the

5.5m patch off North West Bluff, as well as the 8.2m patch approximately 3 miles NE of Connexion Islet. 

1.36 The ore-loading berth has a length of 345m between the outer dolphins, but the loading conveyor is fixed and vessels must

shift to load various hatches. The depth alongside is 12.5m.

Vessels of up to 63,000 dwt, with lengths up to 225m, beams

up to 32m, and drafts up to 12.5m, have been accommodated at

the port.

1.36 A small cargo wharf, with a depth of 4.6m alongside, lies on

the N side of the root of the pier; shoal water lies close NNW

of this wharf. A rock ledge which dries extends about 90m

WSW from a position on the shore about 135m N of this

wharf.

1.36 Aspect.—In addition to the lights on Brady Rock, Bickerton

Island Light, and Connexion Island, the conspicuous oil tanks

that mark the port area assist in the approach.

1.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is available during

daylight hours only. The pilot normally boards about 1.5 miles

W of the pier, but will board in the vicinity of Brady Rock if

prior arrangements are made. Tugs are available to assist in

berthing.

1.36 Standard ETA and quarantine messages are required to be

transmitted to the port radio station. The vessel’s ETA should

be sent 7 days, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance. Vessels

should request berthing instructions 4 hours prior to arrival at

the pilot boarding position.

1.36 The port may be contacted on VHF radio; the calling frequency is VHF channel 16, while the working frequencies are

VHF channels 6 and 67. Vessels should maintain a listening

watch on VHF channel 16 when in the port approaches and at

anchor.

1.36 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage about 1.5 miles W of

the pier head, in a depth of 12m, sand, good holding ground.

The bottom farther offshore is uneven and rocky in places, and

caution is recommended when attempting to anchor in the outer approaches.

1.36 Directions.—Vessels approaching Milner Bay from the NE

steer SW to pass 1 mile SE of Brady Rock, and then when

about 1 mile SE of Bustard Island, alter course to SW with

Bickerton Island Light dead ahead. When approximately 2

miles from Hand Islet, course should be altered to pass through

the center of Warwick Channel, SW of Connexion Island, and

then ENE with the towers at Milner Bay ahead. 

Groote Eylandt—North Coast

1.37 Chasm Island (13°40'S., 136°35'E.) lies about 1 mile

N of the E entrance point of North West Bay. A stranded wreck

lies on the SW end of the island.

1.37 Chasm Shoal, with a depth of 7.6m, lies about 1 mile NNE

of the E extremity of Chasm Island. 

1.37 North Point Island (13°38'S., 136°42'E.), which is actually

two islands, lies 1 mile offshore, about 6 miles ENE of Chasm

Island. The outer island, lying to the N, is the larger of the two

and rises to a height of 35m.

1.37 Several rocky islets and smaller rocks lie scattered up to 1

mile offshore and up to 2 miles E of North Point Island.

1.37 Pinnacle Rock, with a least known depth of 10.4m, lies unexamined about 3 miles NNE of Jagged Head. A 2.4m patch lies

about 1 mile W of this rock.

Milner Bay Wharf
16 Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 

Pub. 175

1.37 Jagged Head (13°42'S., 136°45'E.), a conspicuous headland

about 35m high, is actually an island which lies close to the

coast about 5 miles SE of North Point Island. The seaward

sides of this headland are formed of broken rock rising nearly

to the summit; numerous above and below-water rocks lie

close offshore. An islet lies on a shoal about 0.5 mile ENE of

the headland.

1.37 Woodhouse Rocks, 6m high, lie about 1.5 miles NE of

Jagged Head and are connected to it by a shoal ridge. The outer

rock is awash.

1.38 Port Langdon (13°48'S., 136°46'E.), entered between

Jagged Head and Scott Point, about 6 miles SE, has general

depths of 11 to 13m over its greater part and provides good anchorage, especially in SE winds. The shores of the port are

covered with thick scrub, except at Jagged Head, which is barren. On the E and S sides are sand hills, but the W shore is

mostly rocky and unsurveyed. Baird Cliff, at the head of the

port, lies approximately 8.5 miles S of Jagged Head and is red,

conspicuous, and about 10m high. A spit, which dries in places, extends nearly 1 mile N from the face of the cliff. McComb

Point, 24m high and fringed with foul ground, lies 4 miles

NNW of Baird Cliff and divides the W shore into two bays, the

N of which is Hempel Bay; both bays are unexamined.

1.38 Spit End, 6 miles SSW of Scott Point, is the end of a narrow,

shelving spit, 3 miles in length, which encloses Little Lagoon

to the E. Although this lagoon is about 3 miles in length and

has depths of 5 to 8m in its central part, the entrance channel S

of Spit End is shoal and available only to a small craft possessing local knowledge. An iron pipe, situated 0.5 mile E of Spit

End, marks the N side of the inner end of the channel to Little

Lagoon.

1.39 Central Hill (13°58'S., 136°39'E.), described in paragraph 1.32, bearing 207° and just open E of McComb Point,

leads through the entrance of Port Langdon between Jagged

Head and Cody Shoal in a least depth of 14.9m. When Baird

Cliff bears about 185°, course is altered to the S until McComb

Point bears W or NW, when a heading for the anchorages can

be taken.

1.39 Two white triangular beacons are situated on the shore about

2.25 miles ESE of Baird Cliff and, when in line bearing 148°,

lead small craft between the reefs to a landing place at the head

of Port Langdon.

1.39 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained on the E side

of Port Langdon, in a depth of 11m, mud and sand, W of the

spit enclosing Little Lagoon. There is also sheltered anchorage

in the SE corner of the port, in a depth of 9 to 10m, mud, NW

of Spit End. Caution is necessary when proceeding between

the anchorages off the above spit as a dangerous rock is charted

about 0.35 mile offshore midway along its length.

1.39 Laycock Hill, 46m high, stands close within the NE corner

of Little Lagoon and forms a good mark from the anchorage.

1.39 Caution.—Central Hill is not always visible. In such instances, vessels should steer in on McComb Point.

1.40 Scott Point (13°45'S., 136°51'E.), the W extremity of

the broad peninsula which forms the NE end of Groote Eylandt, is low, sandy, and fringed by rocks. The point rises to a

conspicuous pink sandhill close S and shoal water extends

about 1 mile offshore to the W.

1.40 North East Islet (13°38'S., 136°57'E.), the outer extremity

of a group of islets off the NE end of Groote Eylandt, lies,

along with Lane Islet and Hawk Islet, on a coral reef extending

up to 10 miles NE of Scott Point. There are numerous submerged dangers and above-water rocks close about these islands, and also between them and the shores of Groote Eylandt

to the S and W.

1.40 North East Islet Light is shown from a white hut situated at

an elevation of 62m on the summit of the islet.

1.40 Moresby Rock, with a least depth of 14.8m, lies about 2

miles N of North East Islet Light. Heavy tide rips are formed

between this rock and the islet and vessels are advised not to

close the shore within 4 miles when rounding this danger.

1.40 A rocky ledge extends 1 mile NW from the reef between

North East Islet and Hawk Islet. Several rocks, with depths of

less than 1.8m, lie up to 2 miles W of the W extremity of Hawk

Islet, and a rock, which dries 1.8m, lies 1 mile NW of the same

point.

1.40 Two islets, one 29m high and the other 6m high, with rocks

awash N and S, lie close together about 3 miles SSE of Hawk

Islet.

1.40 A ridge of shoal water, terminating in an unexamined 4m

patch, extends about 4 miles S of North East Islet. Two rocks

lie on the N end of this ridge about mile S of North East Islet.

1.40 Cody Bank, with depths of 1.2 to 4.2m, extends about 7

miles SW of Hawk Islet and shows light in color during daylight. There is an unexamined channel, with a charted depth of

6.4m, between Cody Bank and Scott Point, but it is not recommended.

Groote Eylandt—East Coast

1.41 The E side of Groote Eylandt, from a point about 6

miles SE of Scott Point to Cape Beatrice, 32 miles S, is deeply

indented by two bays.

1.41 Alexander Hill, 57m high, rises about 7 miles S of Scott

Point; the hill is the S extremity of a line of prominent white

sand hills.

1.41 Mamalimandja Point (13°55'S., 136°52'E.), about 2 miles

S of Alexander Hill, is the N point of an unnamed bay which is

unsurveyed and completely open to the SE. Reefs front the

point and extend SW and over 2 miles NE from it; the NE reef

is named Rocky Islet. A depth of 4.6m lies charted about 5

miles NE of the point, but the area has not been completely examined and lesser depths may exist.

1.41 Dalumba Bay (14°07'S., 136°49'E.), entered between Ilyungmajda Point, the S point of the previously-mentioned unnamed bay, and Ungwariba Point (14°08'S., 136°55'E.), about

9 miles SE, has not been completely examined, but depths of

18 to 22m were found in the approaches. The entrance to the

inner part of the bay, about 9 miles W of Ungwariba Point, is

obstructed by an islet and a reef with depths of 9.1m between

them. Several islets lie up to 4 miles S of Ilyungmadja Point,

but the depths in the vicinity are not well charted.

1.41 Bombard Shoal (14°04'S., 136°59'E.), with a depth of 7.9m,

lies close to the 35m curve and is about 6 miles NNE of Ungwariba Point.

1.41 The coast between Ungwariba Point is rocky, with reefs and

dangers extending up to 2 miles offshore. Groote Reef, with a
Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 17

Pub. 175

least known depth of 5.5m, lies unexamined 3 miles offshore

about 8 miles NNE of Cape Beatrice, and is the most seaward

charted danger along this part of the coast.

Limmen Bight to Cape Shield

1.42 The coast from Rantyirrity Point, the N entrance point

of Limmen Bight, to Cape Barrow, about 30 miles NNE, consists of sandy hummocks and sand hills, with low and level

country inland. This section has not been thoroughly examined, but apparently shoal flats and foul ground extend some

distance from it.

1.42 Blue Mud Bay (13°30'S., 136°15'E.) is entered between

North Point Island (13°38'S., 136°43'E.) and Cape Shield,

about 28 miles NW. The S side of the bay is formed by the N

sides of Groote Eylandt and Bickerton Island while the N side

is formed by the mainland W of Cape Shield.

1.42 The bay has not been completely surveyed and the N and W

shores are difficult of access because of the extensive shoals

which occupy large portions of that part of the bay.

1.42 Lowrie Channel (13°45'S., 136°05'E.), the S approach to

Blue Mud Bay, lies between the mainland and the W side of

Bickerton Island. There are depths of 5.5 to 11m charted in the

fairway, but it has not been fully examined and local knowledge is advisable.

1.42 The Walker River (13°35'S., 135°50'E.) flows through the

W shore of Blue Mud Bay, about 15 miles WNW of Cape Barrow (13°40'S., 136°04'E.). The intervening shore and that to

the N has not been closely examined; vessels approaching this

part of the coast should bear in mind the possible existence of

uncharted dangers. Mount Ranken, a high point of the Bath

Range, rises above the N bank of the Walker River about 15

miles inland and is a fairly good mark in clear weather. A peninsula, fringed by foul ground, extends about 15 miles into the

bay from a point 10 miles N of the river entrance.

1.43 Grindall Point (13°19'S., 136°03'E.), located in the

NW part of Blue Mud Bay, is a narrow projection extending S

for 5 miles and forming Jalma Bay to its W and Grindall Bay

to its E. Mount Grindall, a hill, is located on the E side of the

peninsula about 3.25 miles NNE of the point.

1.43 Round Hill Islet, 69m high, lies on a shoal ridge extending

from the E side of Grindall Point to Woodah Island. Several

submerged rocks lie up to 1 mile E of the islet and limited

depths lie to the S. A large rock lies above-water about 2 miles

SW of Round Hill Islet.

1.43 Point Blane (13°17'S., 136°10'E.), 8 miles ENE of Grindall

Point, is a narrow tongue of land projecting 3 miles SSE from

the N shore. Grindall Bay penetrates approximately 10 miles

inland between Round Hill Islet and Point Blane, and has

depths of 5.5 to 7.3m on the E side of the entrance, but appears

shoal at its head.

1.43 Myaoola Bay (13°08'S., 136°20'E.), entered between Point

Blane and Cape Shield, about 10 miles ESE, is extensive in its

outer part with depths of 5.5 to 7.3m, but the inner part is shoal

and has not been completely examined.

Woodah Island (13°27'S., 136°09'E.), the largest of the islands in Blue Mud Bay, lies with its S extremity 6 miles NNE

of Cape Barrow and is generally low compared with the adjacent islands. Its S half is quite low and sandy but terminates in

a rocky irregular point; the E side of the island is similar in appearance except the rocks lie submerged farther offshore.

1.43 Nichol Islet stands on the outer edge of a shoal ridge extending about 4 miles E of the E extremity of Woodah Island. Numerous rocks, some above-water, lie on the above ridge S and

W of the islet.

1.44 Burney Island (13°36'S., 136°14'E.), about 4 miles SE

of the S extremity of Woodah Island, lies surrounded by foul

ground extending up to 1 mile off its shores. There is a cove on

the NW side of the island which may be convenient for boats. In

1984, a rock with a depth of 1.2m was reported to lie midway

between Burney Island and the N coast of Bickerton Island; an

obstruction was reported to be situated about 1.25 miles SW of

Burney Island.

1.44 Amagbirra Islet, low and sandy, lies about 1 mile E of Burney Island, and Wedge Rock, with above and below-water

rocks to the N and W, lies about 3 miles farther E.

1.44 Morgan Islet, 66m high and partially covered with trees, lies

approximately 1.5 miles W of Woodah Island, with no passage

between. Meringa and Marinnan are two small islets on the N

edge of the shoal on which Morgan Islet lies. An above-water

rock lies about 0.5 mile S of the latter islet.

1.44 Anchorage.—Small vessels can obtain fairly-sheltered anchorage, in a depth of 7.3m mud, from 1 to 2 miles S of Morgan Islet. Moderate-sized vessels can anchor, in depths of 13 to

24m, mud, from 1 to 2 miles SW to W of the S extremity of

Woodah Island.

1.44 Caution.—The NE approach to the above anchorages is between Nichol Island and Burney Island, and the S approach

through Lowerie Channel. Vessels navigating in the above waters should bear in mind that these areas are not completely

surveyed and additional dangers may exist in addition to those

shown on the chart.

Cape Shield to Cape Arnhem

1.45 Cape Shield (13°20'S., 136°21'E.), 34m high, is the S

end of an irregularly shaped peninsula which extends nearly 7

miles SW from the mainland. The shores are generally sandy,

but numerous rocks lie submerged on the shoal ground which

surrounds the cape to a distance of 1 mile. Gooninnah Islet lies

approximately 2 miles E of Cape Shield on a reef which extends nearly 2 miles offshore.

1.45 Burns Shoal, with a least depth of 4.9m, lies off the entrance

to Blue Mud Bay, about 16 miles E of Cape Shield. A dangerous wreck lies charted about 9 miles SE of Burns Shoal.

1.45 Point Arrowsmith (13°15'S., 136°28'E.), 8 miles NE of

Cape Shield, is 22m high and rocky, but the coast between

forms a shallow bay which has not been examined. 

1.45 Wardarlea Bay, between Point Arrowsmith and Bagbiringula

Point, about 7 miles NNE, apparently is also shoal and likewise

has not been examined; both bays afford little shelter.

1.45 Trial Bay (13°02'S., 136°34'E.), located about 22 miles NE

of Cape Shield, is entered between Bald Point on the S and

Guyuwiri Point to the N. The bay is not completely examined

and is generally encumbered with rocks and reefs. A reef on

which the sea breaks extends up to 2 miles SE of Bald Point.

1.45 St. Davids Bay and Wonga Bay, both unexamined but rocky,

lie W and E, respectively, of Guyuwiri Point.
18 Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 

Pub. 175

1.45 Cape Grey (13°00'S., 136°40'E.), 46m high and rocky, is the

E extremity of a narrow peninsula extending about 3 miles SE

from mainland; it is bordered by reefs and shoal water extending up to 1 mile to the E and S. Doyle Rock, 1m high, lies with

a submerged rock close S, about 2 miles SSW of the cape; a

dangerous wreck lies sunk about 1 mile ENE of Doyle Rock.

1.46 Caledon Bay (12°51'S., 136°35'E.), entered between

Cape Grey and Point Alexander, extends in a NW direction for

about 14 miles to Middle Point, where it is divided into two

smaller bays, the northern being known as Grays Bay. Mount

Caledon, 11 miles WNW of Cape Grey, is composed of granite

and has a spur extending NE from the coast for a distance of

about 2 miles, forming a point at the sea.

1.46 The SW side of the bay, from Cape Grey to the above point,

is fringed by rocks and shoals extending up to 2 miles offshore,

with an above water rock lying about 2 miles SE of the same

point. Within the latter point the bay has not been closely examined, but the inner part W of Middle Point is shoal and poorly sheltered. Grays Bay, on the W side of Point Alexander,

although not completely examined, affords good anchorage to

vessels able to enter.

1.46 A line of dangers extends approximately ESE from Point Alexander for 11 miles to Dudly Shoal, which has a depth of

10.3m. Three islets, named McNamara, Bridgland, and Dudly,

and several above and below-water rocks lie in this area; caution is required to clear it. Regan Shoal, about 2 miles S of

Dudly Islet, is the southernmost of these dangers and has a

depth of 7.9m. A rock, awash, lies about 4 miles SSE of Point

Alexander, and about 1 mile NE of the track recommended for

entering.

1.46 Anchorage.—Vessels seeking shelter can obtain good anchorage in Grays Bay, in depths of 6 to 13m, mud. One of the

best anchorages is in a depth of 7.3m, gray mud, about 0.7 mile

E of an islet located N of Middle Point. The least charted depth

in the approach is 7.9m.

1.46 Directions.—To enter Caledon Bay, steer 300° to pass midway between the dangers N of Cape Grey and the dangers SE

of Point Alexander, with the point extending from Mount Caledon slightly on the port bow. Care should be taken not to confuse this point with the red sandy point in the W part of the bay.

1.46 When Middle Point bears 330°, alter course for it and round

McNamara Island. When Grays Bay is open fully, course

should be altered to 000° for the anchorage.

1.46 Caution.—Caledon Bay should be entered during daylight

hours only. Vessels with a draft of greater than 6m should not

enter the bay. Cape Gray and Mount Caledon should be identified before attempting to enter the bay.

1.47 Mount Alexander (12°42'S., 136°41'E.), 99m high

and visible over 20 miles in clear weather, rises close to the

coast at the inner end of a small peninsula located approximately 9 miles NNE of Point Alexander. The outer end of this

peninsula, known as Wanyanmera Point, is fronted by rocks,

some lying nearly 3 miles offshore. Three Hummocks, a group

of three islets, with a maximum height of 47m, lies about 4

miles S of the point.

1.47 Port Bradshaw (12°33'S., 136°43'E.), entered about 10

miles NE of Mount Alexander, affords good anchorage for

small vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 5.5 to 9.1m.

The channel, between Binanangoi Point to the S and Gwapilina

Point to the N, is somewhat obstructed by islets and rocks, but

once inside there is good protection from SE winds. The W

side of the port is backed by a range of hills from 122 to 150m

high, consisting mostly of granite.

1.47 The coast to the N and S of Port Bradshaw has not been completely examined, but is known to have reefs and rocks extending up to 1 mile offshore. Between the entrance to Port

Bradshaw and Cape Arnhem, about 16 miles NNE, the shore is

sandy with low white sand hills within. Several above-water

rocks lie close offshore. Sir Roderick’s Rocks, an extensive

group of above and below-water dangers, lie from 5 to 8 miles

ENE of the entrance to the port.

1.48 Cape Arnhem (12°21'S., 136°59'E.), the W entrance

point of the Gulf of Carpentaria, is a grassy projection rising

gradually to a height of 45m. The cape is fringed with reef and

has some low cliffs on its S side. Within the N shore it forms

Dalywoi Bay, shoal and open to the NE. There are strong tide

rips for a distance of about 1 mile off the cape and irregular

depths extend up to 2 miles offshore. 

1.48 Arnhem Rock, 2m high, lies about 1 mile S of Cape Arnhem

and there is an unexamined 9.8m shoal about 1 mile SW of the

rock. Arnhem Shoal, with a least known depth of 6.9m, lies, also unexamined, from 1 to 2 miles N of Cape Arnhem and is approximately 1 mile in diameter.

Approaches to Gove Harbor

1.49 Mount Dundas (12°13'S., 136°52'E.), flat-topped

and covered with trees, rises to a height of 70m, close within

the coast about 10 miles NW of Cape Arhem. The low barren

land along the shore here accentuates this hill and in clear

weather it can be seen from a considerable distance offshore. A

conspicuous red and white cliff is located about 2 miles WNW

of Mount Dundas, and a radio mast stands 2 miles W of the

cliff.

1.49 Yirrkala Mission Station, situated at the head of a sandy

bight about 2.25 miles SE of Mount Dundas, is marked by several buildings and a conspicuous towe,r 57m high. There is an

air strip about 4 miles WSW of the station, and the two are

connected by road. Miles Islet lies close off the coast about

1.25 miles SE of the above tower.

1.49 Cape Wirawawoi (12°10'S., 136°47'E.), low and sandy, lies

about 6 miles NW of Mount Dundas.

1.49 Mount Saunders (12°11'S., 136°47'E.), 71m high and more

or less flat except for its peak at the SE end, rises about 1 mile

SSW of Cape Wirawawoi. Two radio masts showing red obstruction lights stand on Mount Saunders; another radio mast

stands near the shore about 1 mile ESE.

1.49 Caution.—Lone Rock, awash, lies on the edge of foul

ground about mile offshore N of Mount Dundas. This rock is

isolated and steep-to on its seaward side, making it dangerous

to approach.

1.49 Foul ground fills the bight which extends between Cape

Wirawawoi and Mount Dundas, and a rock, which dries 2.1m,

lies on the edge of this foul area, about 3 miles SE of the cape,

with drying sand banks between.

1.49 A shoal, with depths of 3.6 to 4.6m, lies from 1 to 2 miles

NW to NNW of Cape Wirawawoi.
Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 19

Pub. 175

1.50 Bremer Island (12°07'S., 136°49'E.), the SW extremity of which lies about 1.75 miles NNE of Cape Wirawawoi, is

the largest of the group known as the Bremer Islets, and is low

and sandy, with a maximum height of 28m near its NE end.

The island is almost entirely fringed by reef and rocks, with

depths of less than 5m extending up to 1 mile SSE of the S extremity. A dangerous submerged rock, with depths of less than

2m, lies about 0.75 mile NNW of the N extremity of the island

and a bank, with a least depth of 3m, lies close off the NW side

of the island. A preferred route for shallow draft vessels leads

between Bremer Island and the mainland, and is shown on the

chart.

1.50 Higginson Islet, 16m high and conspicuous, is the northeasternmost of the Bremer Islets, and is located about 4 miles NE

of that extremity of Bremer Island.

1.50 Bremer Rock, North East Bremer Islet, Forlsche Rock, and

East Bremer Islet form a line of islets and rocks extending from

a position 1 mile NW of Higginson Islet, S for about 6 miles.

The largest of these, East Bremer Islet, attains a height of 20m

and has a line of above-water rocks extending 1 mile S from it.

In 1985, it was reported that rocks, with depths of less than 2m,

lie midway between East Bremer Islet and Bremer Island.

1.50 Veronica Islet (12°03'S., 136°47'E.), 14m high, is small and

rocky and lies 3 miles NW of the NE extremity of Bremer Islet.

A rock, 1m high, lies mile SSE of Veronica Islet. A light has

been established on the islet.

1.50 Sykes Shoal, unexamined, with a least known depth of 6m,

lies about 2 miles NE of Veronica Islet. An 8.4m patch lies

about 1 mile SSE of Sykes Shoal.

1.50 Caution.—Most of the waters within the Bremer Islets have

not been surveyed and, with the exception of the S end of

Bremer Island, vessels should give them a berth of at least 3

miles.

1.51 Truant Island (11°40'S., 136°50'E.), at the NE extremity of The English Company’s Islands, is 46m high and

marked by a light shown from a metal framework tower, 39m

high. 

Anchorage, in depths of 6.2 to 10m and protected from NE

through S winds, can be obtained off the NW part of the island,

with the light bearing 122°, distant 0.9 mile. A marine farm has

been established directly off the N shore.

1.51 Truant Bank, extending from 3 to 6 miles in an ENE direction from Truant Island, has general depths of less than 30m.

The least depth on the bank is 2.7m over Buccaneer Rock,

about 4 miles NE of Truant Island Light. Barbette Shoal, with a

depth of 8.4m, lies on the E end of the bank, about 6 miles

ENE of the same light.

1.51 Barricade Shoal (11°43'S., 136°49'E.), with a depth of 11m,

lies about 3 miles SSW of Truant Island Light.

1.51 Attack Shoal (11°43'S., 136°43'E.), with a least depth of

9.9m, lies about 7 miles WSW of Truant Island Light and is

steep-to, especially on the S and E sides.

1.51 Truant Island Passage (11°42'S., 136°45'E.), leading between Truant Island and Attack Shoal, is frequently used by

vessels approaching Gove Harbor from the N. The center of the

passage has depths of 36 to 50m, but there is a 16.1m patch on

the E side about 3 miles SW of Truant Island Light. The latter

depth can easily be avoided by deep-draft vessels. Recommended tracks are shown on the chart.

1.52 Melville Bay (12°05'S., 136°40'E.), entered between

Cape Wirawawoi and Cape Wilberforce, about 19 miles NW,

lies encompassed by Bremer Island to the E, Gove Harbor to

the S, and the mainland to the W. The shore of the bay from

Cape Wirawawoi to Wargarpunda Point, 6 miles WSW, is low

and sandy, heavily wooded, and generally foul. A group of

conspicuous silos stand on Wargarpunda Point. East Woody Islet, small, rocky, and connected to the mainland by a sand spit,

lies 2 miles W of the cape.

1.52 West Woody Islet, small, rocky, and heavily wooded lies

about 0.5 mile W of Wargarpunda Point (12°11'S.,

136°41'E.), with foul ground and dangerous rocks between. A

rocky spit extends about 0.35 mile SSW from the islet and a

detached rock, with less than 1.8m, lies nearly 0.75 mile S of

the S extremity.

1.52 A shoal, with a depth of 9m, lies about 0.75 mile W of West

Woody Islet. An 8.2m shoal lies nearly 1 mile SW of the same

islet.

1.52 Mount Bonner (12°06'S., 136°34'E.), about 66m high, rises

on the W side of Melville Bay and extends out to a rocky point

about 2 miles NE. The latter point, which is located about 7

miles NW of West Woody Islet, is foul with two small islets

offshore, the NE being conspicuous. A reef extends NE of

these islets, ending in a 1m high rock about 2 miles NE of the

point. 

1.52 The coast S of Mount Bonner is low and sandy except for

Shepherd Bluff, about 5 miles SSE.

1.52 About 7 miles NNW of Mount Bonner there is another rocky

point, forming the S entrance point of a shallow unsurveyed

bay. A ridge of hills, rising to Mount Bonner, extends SSE

from this point.

1.53 Cape Wilberforce (11°55'S., 136°35'E.), formed of

cliffs up to 70m high, is the extremity of a narrow peninsula

extending about 7 miles ENE from the mainland. The waters S

of the cape have not been surveyed and discolored water has

been reported to the E. Numerous dangers exist of the N side of

the peninsula.

1.53 Bromby Island (11°50'S., 136°40'E.), the largest of the Bromby Islets, lies with its E extremity about 8 miles NE of Cape

Wiberforce and is about 58m high and cliffy. The entire chain,

which extends about 10 miles NE of the cape, terminates in

Bromby, a rocky islet with a reef extending N from it. The inner islets are surrounded by reef.

Gove Harbor (12°12'S., 136°40'E.)

World Port Index No. 54675

1.54 Gove Harbor is located in the vicinity of Dundas

Point, about 1 mile SW of Wargarpunda Point. The port handles bulk alumina, bulk bauxite, and bulk liquids.

1.54 Winds—Weather.—The climate is directly affected by the

monsoons. The prevailing wind during the dry season from

May to October is SE to S, usually easing with nightfall.

Strong winds up to 30 knots occur at times during this period.

1.54 The prevailing winds during the Northwest Monsoon from

November to April are light and variable, blowing mainly from

the NW. Cyclones which occur occasionally during this period

bring gale force winds.
20 Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 

Pub. 175

1.54 Average annual rainfall over 1,300mm, occurring predominantly during the Northwest Monsoon season, when heavy

downpours of short duration are experienced.

1.54 Tides—Currents.—Mean high water springs rise up to

3.2m and mean neap tides rise 2.2m.

1.54 Tidal currents in the harbor reach a maximum of 3 knots, but

usually are much less. The flood sets SSE through the entrance

and the ebb sets NNW. Docking before half-flood tide is recommended, as the tidal current is reported to set off the Bulk

Cargo Wharf after that time.

1.54 Depths—Limitations.—Depths in the approach to Gove are

deep. The least depth in the direct approach to the Bulk Cargo

Wharf W of Dundas Point is 13.7m, and to the General Cargo

Wharf E of Dundas Point is 7.3m. A depth of 10.3m lies about

0.5 mile W of the Bulk Cargo Wharf.

1.54 The Bulk Cargo Wharf, which is 305m long, has a depth of

14m alongside. The Tanker Berth, which is attached to the S

end of the bulk berth, also has a length of 305m; the depth

alongside is maintained to 13.7m. Two vessels of 60,000 dwt

can berth simultaneously. A minimum under keel clearance of

10 per cent of the draft is required for berthing and unberthing

at the Bulk Cargo Wharf.

1.54 The General Cargo Wharf extends about 0.2 mile offshore

on the E side of Dundas Point and is 94m long. There are two

berths, extended by dolphins, at its head. Vessels up to 20,000

dwt, with a maximum length of 183m, can be accommodated,

although vessels up to 30,000 dwt can berth under suitable tidal conditions. Alongside depths at each berth are maintained at

13.5m.

1.54 Perkins Wharf, with a berthing length of 73m, is situated

about 0.25 mile N of Harbour Islet. There are depths alongside

of 4.3m and the wharf is mainly used for the refueling of fishing boats. There is a concrete ramp on the E side of this wharf,

used by the ro-ro barge that operates a weekly service to Darwin. A stranded wreck lies 220m W of the wharf. A water intake for the power house is situated 440m E of Perkins Wharf.

1.54 Aspect.—Dundas Point, about 1 mile S of West Woody Islet,

is a low sandy spit which forms the N entrance point of Gove

Harbor. Parfitt Point, also low and sandy, forms the S entrance

point and lies about 2 miles SW of Dundas Point. Within the

entrance, the Drimmie Peninsula, high and rocky, extends 2

miles S from the shore about 2 miles ENE of Dundas Point and

forms the E side of the harbor; it is connected to the mainland

by a causeway which covers at high water. The SE part of the

harbor consists of a series of low tree-covered points with shoal

water between and rocks off-lying. The Granite Islands, about

1 mile S of Dundas Point, mark the outer limits of the shoals

extending to the shore on the S. Half Tide Rock, which dries

2.4m, lies about 1 mile ESE of Dundas Point. Harbour Islet lies

1 mile NNE of Dundas Point.

1.54 Fairway Lighted Buoy is moored about 2 miles NW of Dundas Point.

1.54 A 3m shoal, marked by a lighted buoy, lies about 0.2 mile SE

of Dundas Point and a 5.2m shoal lies about 0.3 mile SSE of

the same point. Five Fathom Lighted Beacon stands about 0.25

mile SSW of Dundas Point. A lighted beacon stands on Half

Tide Rock.

1.54 An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated at the airstrip about

Gove Harbor
Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 21

Pub. 175

10 miles SE of Gove Harbor.

1.54 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels using the

main berths. The pilot boards 1.5 miles W of West Woody Islet. Vessels should report, through Darwin, their ETA in GMT,

together with draft forward and aft, 10 days before arrival, and

confirming the arrival time at 48 hours and 24 hours prior to arrival. The port office at Gove can be contacted on VHF channel

16; the working frequencies are VHF channels 6 and 12.

1.54 Anchorage.—No. 1 Anchorage lies 2.1 miles WNW of

West Woody Island, in a depth of 15m, mud and shingle. 

1.54 No. 2 Anchorage lies 2.3 miles NW of West Woody Island,

in a depth of 18m. This anchorage is also used by laden tankers

awaiting a berth.

1.54 Small vessels seeking shelter can anchor according to draft,

in depths of 6 to 9m, sand and mud, SW of Half Tide Rock.

1.54 Two lighted mooring buoys, 180m apart, lie 800m ENE of

the General Cargo Wharf, in a depth of 7.5m.

1.54 Directions.—Preferred routes lead into Melville Bay and

can best be seen on the chart. Deep-draft vessels pass to the N

of Bremer Island and shallow draft vessels may pass to the

South.

The English Company’s Islands

1.55 Truant Island (11°40'S., 136°50'E.), previously described in paragraph 1.51, forms the NE extremity of The English Company’s Islands, which then parallel the coast for

approximately 50 miles to the SW. The island is marked by a

light. Shoals extend up to 7 miles to the NE.

1.55 Anchorage, in 6.2 to 10m, protected from NE, E, SE, and S

winds, can be found off the NW part of the island, with Truant

Light, bearing 122°, distant about 0.9 mile.

1.55 Wigram Island (11°47'S., 136°34'E.) lies with its E extremity about 12 miles WSW of Truant Island and is about 8 miles

in length. The E end is low, with an islet close offshore, but the

SE extremity is formed by a high cliff rising inland to a height

of 63m. The SW end of the island, also cliffy, is nearly as high

but shoal water is reported to extend nearly 1 mile off this

shore.

1.55 Miller Islet, small, low and apparently steep-to, lies about 2

miles ENE of the E end of Wigram Island; a rock lies close E

of the islet and a shoal, on which stands two above-water rocks,

lies between Miller Islet and Wigram Island.

1.55 Cotton Island (11°51'S., 136°29'E.), immediately SW of

Wigram Island, is 126m high and rocky. There is a high cliff at

the S end about 7 miles from the N extremity and most of the E

shore is steep. Depths of as little as 8m have been found in the

channel between Wigram Island and Cotton Island, where

strong tidal rips were reported in 1983. A small islet, 33m high,

stands off the W side of the island and a depth of 3m was reported in 1985 to lie about 1 mile NNW of this islet.

1.55 Pobassoo Island lies close off the S end of Cotton Island and

is connected to it by a reef. This island is 69m high; Herald Islet lies 0.5 mile to the W.

1.55 Astell Island, about 1 mile NW of Pobassoo Island, with

shoal water between, is 76m high and rocky. A reef, with a

depth of less than 1.8m and a least depth of 0.5m at its outer

end, extends 3 miles W from Herald Islet, and parallels with

the S side of Astell Island up to 1 mile offshore; depths of 7.3

to 9.1m are charted between this reef and the shore. Several

rocks lie off the N end of Astell Island and a reef extends a little over 2 miles to the N.

1.56 Inglis Island (12°02'S., 136°14'E.), the largest of The

English Company’s Islands, lies 5 miles SW of Astell Island,

with Bosanquet Islet close off its NE extremity. The latter is

separated from the main island by a narrow passage which is

partially restricted by a smaller islet. Several rocks lie about 2.5

miles WNW of Bosanquet Islet; a 3m patch lies 1.5 miles W of

the islet. Shoal depths of 8.2m and 15.8m lie 0.5 mile and 1

mile E and NE, respectively, of Bosanquet Islet.

1.56 Caution.—A 0.3m shoal has been reported (1990) to lie

about 2 miles ENE of Bosanquet Island.

1.56 The N side of Inglis Island is indented by a large open and

shoal bay, with shoals, drying patches, and two islets off it; the

N islet is 29m high. A 0.3m shoal lies about 1 mile NNE of the

NW extremity of the island; a 5.5m patch lies about 1.25 miles

further NNE. 

1.56 Maiyayigur Point, the W extremity of Inglis Island, is rocky

and 28m high. Hummocky Islet, 22m high, lies 1 mile SW of

the point and is conspicuous from the N and S. The dangers in

this vicinity are described with Pera Channel, in paragraph

1.57.

1.56 Malay Road (11°50'S., 136°25'E.) and Nalwarung Strait, its

continuation SW, bordered on the S by the Bromby Islets and

the mainland and on the N by Wigram Island, Cotton Island,

and Inglis Island, are from 1.25 to 6 miles wide, but the reef

fringing the shores in the narrow areas of the channel restricts

navigation to small vessels with local knowledge. There are

general depths in the fairway of 7.3 to 30m, but numerous dangers restrict the channel S of Cotton Island and at the W end of

Nalwarung Strait.

1.56 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken under the lee of the

various islands in Malay Road, although the shoal water S of

the W half of Wigram Island must be avoided. Large vessels

are cautioned that surveys are not complete in many areas of

The English Company’s Islands and great care must be exercised in approaching shore.

1.56 Small vessels have taken anchorage S of Bosanquet Island, E

of Inglis Island, in depths of 9 to 13m.

Arnhem Bay

1.57 Pera Channel (12°00'S., 136°04'E.), the main approach to Arnhem Bay, lies at the SW extremity of The English

Company’s Islands and leads between Inglis Island and

Flinders Point, about 4 miles to the W. The channel is restricted

by several rocks, islets, and shoals, but the fairway, which requires precise navigation, carries a least depth of 20m to the

bay.

1.57 Flinders Point (12°04'S., 136°03'E.), low but with a stony

hillock on its extremity, is the NE end of a long narrow peninsula separating Arnhem Bay and Buckingham Bay. The point

rises to a distinctive knoll, 46m high, about 1 mile within,

which, being close to the S shore, shows well from NE. Shoal

water and irregular depths border the shore N and E of Flinders

Point and cause heavy tide rips especially on the rising tide. 

1.57 Caution.—A rock, which dries 2.7m, lies about 1 mile

WSW of Hummocky Islet (12°05'S., 136°06'E.), and in the
22 Sector 1. North Coast of Australia—The Gulf of Carpentaria 

Pub. 175

fairway of Pera Channel. A sand cay, which dries 1.8m, lies

about 2 miles N of Hummocky Islet, and another rock, which

dries 2.7m with an islet close by, lies 2 miles farther NE. A

1.8m patch lies about 2 miles SSE of the same islet. Patches,

with depths of 6.4m and 7.9m, lie 2 miles NW and 1 mile N,

respectively, of Flinders Point.

1.57 Note.—Buckingham Bay, entered N of Flinders Point, is described in paragraph 1.60.

1.58 Probable Island (12°08'S., 136°02'E.), 91m high, lies

2 miles S of Flinders Point and attains its maximum elevation

near its center. The E side of the island is indented by numerous small sandy bays separated by prominent bluffs. The area

fronting this coast has not been examined to a distance of 1

mile, but surveys of the channel indicate a shoal shelf on which

tide rips and overfalls were seen extending up to 1 mile off the

center of the island.

1.58 Gwakura Island, close S of Probable Island, is formed of a

narrow ridge 61m high. The passage between these two islands

appears to be foul, with strong tide rips on the flood.

1.58 Rekala Island, about 0.75 mile S of Gwakura Island, is small

and low, with scrub and a few trees. The passage between these

two islands has not been examined.

1.58 Tides—Currents.—In Pera Channel, off Hummocky Islet,

the tidal currents attain a rate of 4 knots at springs. To the N of

the islet, near the sandy cay, the ebb current sometimes attains

a rate of 6 knots. At the entrance to Arnhem Bay, W of Mallison Island (12°11'S., 136°07'E.), the maximum rate of the tidal currents at springs is from 3 to 5 knots, being strongest near

the island. In the bay itself the maximum rate is 2 knots at

springs, again strongest near Mallison Island; it rarely exceeds

1 knots in any other part.

1.58 Spring tides rise up to 4.6m and neaps rise approximately

4m.

1.59 Everett Island (12°15'S., 136°04'E.), actually the NE

extremity of a broad peninsula extending from the mainland,

lies about 10 miles S of Flinders Point and can be identified by

the high distinctive red cliffs on its N and E sides. The cliffs

rise directly to the trees above, the tops of which have a height

of about 40m, and form a good mark from the entrance of Pera

Channel.

1.59 Hardy Island, close S of Everett Island, is low, rocky, and of

ironstone formation. It is covered with bushes and small trees,

and fringed by a rocky ledge which extends right to the shore

on the W.

1.59 Arnhem Bay (12°19'S., 136°11'E.) is entered using Pera

Channel, between the SW extremity of Mallison Island and the

NE end of Everett Island, about 4 miles SW. Arnhem Bay is

broad with deep water in its N part. The NE side of the bay

from Cape Newbald is generally low, sandy and foul, with

Rhodes Point, low with red banks, 2 miles SE of the latter and

forming a small foul bay between.

1.59 Cliffy Point (12°22'S., 136°18'E.), on the E side of Arnhem

Bay and about 14 miles SE of Cape Newbald, is composed of

red cliffs, 9m high, which are conspicuous in the afternoon. A

low wooded islet lies close off this point.

1.60 Low Islet (12°23'S., 136°10'E.), about 7 miles W of

Cliffy Point, lies in the S central part of Arnhem Bay and is

covered with bushes and small trees, the tops of which are

about 12m high. A reef extends 1 mile E from the islet, and

shoal water, with depths of 3 to 5.5m, extends nearly 2 miles N

and 2 miles NE of the islet. A spit, with depths of less than

11m and with a 4.9m patch near its N end, extends 5 miles N

from the same islet.

1.60 Rippling Shoal (12°18'S., 136°07'E.), which is narrow and

sandy, extends 5 miles SE from a position about 2 miles E of

Hardy Island, and is steep-to on its E side, with tides rips along

most of its length. The shallowest part, with a depth of 0.9m,

lies E of the S end of Hardy Islet and at times is marked with

discolored water.

1.60 A large sand bank, which dries 3m, lies about 5 miles WNW

of Low Islet, with reesf in the vicinity. The waters W of Rippling Shoal and S of Low Islet have not been examined but appear dangerous and shoal-encumbered.

1.60 Anchorage.—Arnhem Bay affords anchorage for a large

number of vessels. The best anchorage is on the E side of the

bay, where a vessel proceeding in as far as its draft will allow

can obtain shelter from SE winds which blow with considerable strength at times. Depths of less than 11m extend up to 5

miles off this coast, but depths of 6.7m are charted at a distance

of 2 miles from shore.

1.60 There is good anchorage for large vessels SW of Cape Newbald in the lee of Mallison Island, in depths of 13 to 22m, mud

or sand.

1.60 Buckingham Bay (12°05'S., 135°55'E.), entered between

Flinders Point and Napier Point, the cliffy extremity of the

Napier Peninsula, 10 miles NW, is rocky in character with numerous cliffy points along both shores. The bay has not been

surveyed but it appears shoal on its S side. A vessel entering

Buckingham Bay should give Flinders Point a berth of at least

3 miles. Islets are located as far as 2 miles offshore from the SE

side of the bay.
Pub. 175

2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry

2.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION
25

Pub. 175

SECTOR 2 

NORTH COAST OF AUSTRALIA—CAPE WESSEL TO CAPE LONDONDERRY

2.0 Plan.—This sector describes the N coast of Australia from

Cape Wessel W to Cape Londonderry and includes Van Diemen Gulf, Melville Island, Bathurst Island, and Joseph

Bonaparte Gulf. The outlying dangers, which are located N and

W of this coast, are described in proper sequence after the main

associated features.

General Remarks

2.1 Winds—Weather.—The Northwest Monsoon becomes well-established over the area described in the sector by

early in January, bringing clouds, rain, and thunderstorms.

Tropical depressions frequently occur during the period from

December to April and vessels should be prepared for them.

2.1 The Southeast Monsoon is accompanied by fine weather,

usually from May to September, but may reach force 5 to 7

over the open sea. A full description of the monsoon seasons is

contained paragraph 1.1.

2.1 Tropical storms, known as “Willy Willies,” in which the

wind may reach hurricane velocity, affect the coastline during

the summer season. The typical storm moves SW across the

Arafura Sea and the Timor Sea and then recurves off the NW

and W coasts of Australia, thereafter moving SE towards the

Great Australian Bight, located along the S coast of Australia.

However, almost as many of these storms continue to follow

the coast within a distance of 200 miles, and later recurve over

the SW portion of Australia. Gale to hurricane force winds, circulating in a clockwise direction, are liable to be encountered

over an area varying in diameter between about 20 and 130

miles.

2.1 The average speed of these storms is about 12 knots The

maximum frequency of these storms usually one to two per

year, occurs from January through March; the storm tracks are

generally erratic. the approach of a “Willy Willy” is heralded

by a falling barometer, freshening winds from the E, unusual

sultriness, and persistent overcast skies and rain. After the

storm passes, clouds quickly give way to clear skies.

2.1 Fog is very rare and in coastal waters is virtually unencountered. Haze, on the other hand, is a problem during the winter

months, especially close to land, often reducing visibility to approximately 3 miles. during the summer, visibility is usually

good, except during heavy rains or gales.

2.1 Tides—Currents.—During the period from December to

April, the Northwest Monsoon causes an E current along the N

coast of Australia, usually attaining a rate of about 0.5 knot. An

offshoot of this current sets S to SW, at a rate of about 0.5 knot,

into Joseph Bonaparte Gulf and towards the entrance to Cambridge Gulf.

2.1 The offshore currents in the region are highly variable. For

further information, see paragraph 1.1.

2.1 Directions.—Vessels proceeding E or W from or to Torres

Strait should fix their position on the recommended track to

pass approximately 10 miles N of Cape Wessel and then 25

miles NNW of Cape Van Diemen (11°10'S., 130°23'E.). From

the latter, the track line (062°/242°) leads to a position approximately 5 miles N of Penquin Shoal (13°05'S., 125°58'E.) and

then on the charted course (063°/243°) to a position 5 miles S

of Browe Islet (14°06'S., 123°33'E.). The least charted depth

on this track is 18.3m, however, depths of 16 to 17.5m lie within 3 miles of the track in some cases; deeper draft vessels may

wish to keep farther offshore.

2.1 Caution.—Offshore dangers are a definite threat to navigation, especially in regard to deep-draft vessels proceeding off

the N and NW coasts of Australia. The recommended tracks

should be closely adhered to, varying from them only when

safe navigation permits.

The Wessel Islands

2.2 The Wessel Islands consist of a chain of islands extending about 76 miles NE from the mainland at Napier Point

(11°57'S., 135°55'E.). The SE and E shores of these islands

consist mostly of rocky cliffs which rise abruptly from the sea,

but the opposite sides are mostly low and sandy.

2.2 The waters around these islands are only partially surveyed

and caution is required when standing into their immediate vicinity.

2.2 When the Wessel Islands are approached on the normal E-W

track line, which is charted approximately 10 miles N of Cape

Wessel, they may not be clearly seen during the summer

months, when the Northwest Monsoon causes the coastal features to be somewhat obscured by haze. Radar returns off the E

coast of Marchinbar Island may be received before those from

the cape itself and caution is recommended.

Cape Wessel (11°00'S., 136°45'E.), the NE extremity of

Rimbija Island, the northernmost of the Wessel Islands group,

is formed of a perpendicular cliff from 12 to 15m high. It has

been reported to give good radar returns up to 14 miles. A light

is shown from a black, metal framework tower situated on the

cape; a racon is situated at the light structure.

2.2 Discolored water and tide rips occur N of Cape Wessel and

foul ground extends up to 2 miles NW of the cape.

2.3 Marchinbar Island (11°14'S., 136°38'E.), the largest

of the Wessel Islands, is separated from Rimbija Island by a

narrow foul channel encumbered by numerous below-water

rocks. Emu Islet lies at the W end of this channel and is formed

of rock; another rock lies about 0.5 mile NNE.

2.3 Sphinx Head, with conspicuous cliffs 67m high, lies on the E

side of Marchinbar Island, about 10 miles SSW of Low Point,

the island’s NE extremity. The land rises S of the head to form

two flat-topped hills with a maximum height of 79m; however,

the entire E coast is cliffy and high. The island should not be

closely approached to its SE shore, which is not fully surveyed

and known to have a reef, which breaks, extending 1 mile S.

Two rocks, awash, 5 miles farther SSW lie about 1 mile offshore.

2.3 A large bay containing two islets lies 3 miles SW of Sphinx
26 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

Head. There is anchorage, in 20m, sheltered from all but strong

E winds, W of the N islet. The anchorage may be approached

on a NW course, passing midway between the two islets, in a

depth of 9m.

2.3 An unnamed bay, located between 1 and 2 miles NE of the S

end of Marchinbar Island, is unsurveyed and unsuitable as an

anchorage. The NE part of the bay is encumbered with rocky

outcrops, and while there is apparently deeper water in the SW

part of the bay, it is however exposed.

2.4 Two Island Bay (11°35'S., 136°24'E.), on the W side

of Marchinbar Island, is located 5 miles SSW of Cape Wessel,

between Mort Point and Auster Point. The bay contains North

Island and South Island, with rocks 0.5 mile W of the W end of

South Island.

2.4 Trafalgar Bay (11°07'S., 136°42'E.) is the next bay SW of

Two Island Bay; it is entered between Auster Point and Thumb

Point. The shores of the bay are reported to be foul. Sheltered

anchorage can be found, in 13m, about 0.5 mile WNW of the

W of the two small islets in the center of the bay.

2.4 Jensen Bay (11°08'S., 136°42'E.), formed between Jensen

Islet and Shark Point, about 3 miles SSW, has depths of 7 to

11m over most of its width, but is fringed by a dangerous reef

with only 0.6m over it at the center of its head. The bay, which

lies directly opposite Sphinx Head, would appear to provide

reasonably good anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon, but

is completely open to the NW.

2.4 Gedge Point (11°12'S., 136°38'E.), on the W shore near the

middle of the island, has a conspicuous clump of casuarina

trees on it, and landing is reported possible on a sandy beach at

the S end of Temple Bay, close E of the point. Shark Point,

about 2 miles NE of Gedge Point, is high, cliffy, and prominent

and forms the W side of Temple Bay.

2.4 Red Point, about 5 miles SSW of Gedge Point, is formed of

cliffs about 12m high. Near its S end, the island rises to a

height of 79m.

2.4 Caution.—A 0.3m shoal has been reported (1990) to lie

about 6 miles WNW of Southwest Point (11°27'S.,

136°28'E.).

2.5 Guluwuru Island (11°31'S., 136°26'E.), separated

from Marchinbar Island by Cumberland Strait, is high and

cliffy, rising to a height of 99m in its S part. The waters around

the island have not been closely examined, but a reef is known

to border the NW shore to a distance of about 2 miles.

2.5 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents along the W side of

Marchinbar Island and Guluwuru Island attain up to 2 knots at

springs, with the flood setting down on the shore. Tide rips are

formed in Cumberland Strait, with rates of up to 12 knots at

springs reported in 1987; because of this and several dangerous

rocks, it should only be attempted by small craft with local

knowledge.

2.5 Raragala Island (11°35'S., 136°17'E.), close SW of Guluwuru Island, has high cliffs on its SE side and rises to a height

of 42m at its SW end. The island is very irregular in shape and

has not been surveyed, but it is almost entirely fringed by a

reef, with numerous rocks and islets along the NW shore. A

passage, about 120m wide, runs between Raragala Island and

Guluwuru Island. It has depths of about 9m, but the tidal current runs strongly through the passage, attaining rates of 12

knots at springs with strong eddies. The passage is usable near

slack water.

2.5 Anchorage may be found, in a depth of 9.4m, mud and sand,

0.5 mile W of the N extremity of Raragala Island.

Islands off the Napier Peninsula

2.6 The Cunningham Islands (11°45'S., 136°06'E.),

consisting of Jirrgari Island, Sumaga Island, and Warnawi Island, 33m, 24m, and 18m high, respectively, lie in a line immediately SW of Raragala Island, with a reef between. They are

all fringed by rocks and there is no safe passage among them.

A spit, with a depth of 1.8m on its outer end, extends 5 miles

SSE from the N extremity of Sumanga, the center island; other

shoals may exist in the area. A light is shown from a structure

at the W end of Warnawi Island. A 0.6m patch lies about 1.5

miles E of the light.

2.6 Alger Island (11°53'S., 135°58'E.), the innermost of the

Wessel Islands, is 42m high and separated from Point Napier

by a shoal passage nearly 3 miles wide. Reefs and rocks extend

nearly 2 miles S of the island, with a sand cay on the outer extremity, and thus reduce the navigable width of this passage to

less than 1 mile.

2.6 There is a deep channel charted between Alger Island and

Warnawi Island, with a navigable width of approximately 2

miles. The soundings are from old surveys and caution is advised. A depth of 17.1m was reported (1983) to lie about 1.5

miles NE of Alger Island. A depth of 15.8m was reported 7.5

miles SSE of the N point of Alger Island in 1983.

2.6 Stevens Island (11°33'S., 136°06'E.) is the northeasternmost

of a chain of islands and rocks extending 46 miles NE from the

coast immediately W of the Napier Peninsula. The island is

30m high, with rocks and foul ground extending up to 2 miles

to the NE and SE.

2.6 A dangerous submerged rock of unknown depth lies about 6

miles NE of Stevens Island; another dangerous rock, the existence of which is doubtful, is charted about 4 miles N of the

same island. Several rocks and reported shoal patches lie up to

13 miles NE of Stevens Island. A light is shown from the NE

end of the island.

2.6 Burgunngura Island (11°36'S., 136°05'E.), 21m high and

surrounded by foul ground, lies 2.5 miles SW of Stevens Island. This island is low lying with thick vegetation and expanses of white sand beaches.

2.7 Drysdale Island (11°41'S., 136°00'E.), 43m high, lies

6 miles SSW of Stevens Island, with a drying reef which has

several islets and rocks that obstruct the channel between Drysdale Island and Burgunngura Island. On this reef is Yargara Islet, 30m high, which lies close off Dale Point, the NE end of

Drysdale Island. 

2.7 A rock, awash, lies off the W side of the island, 5 miles W of

Dale Point.

2.7 Graham Island, 29m high, lies close S of Drysdale Island,

with a small craft channel between. The passage should not be

attempted without local knowledge. Reefs fringe the N end of

Graham Island and caution is required.

2.7 Brown Strait (11°40'S., 136°05'E.), with a navigable width

of 3 miles and with depths of 16.5 to 38.4m in the fairway, separates the islands of the Wessel group from Stevens Island,
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 27

Pub. 175

Burgunngura Island, and Drysdale Island, and leads S to Cadell

Strait or the passage between Alger Island and Cunningham Island.

2.7 There is a detached shoal, with a depth of 1.8m, lies 1.5

miles SE of the S end of Stevens Island. A depth of 7.9m lies

about 5.5 miles NE of Alger Island.

2.7 Tides—Currents.—In Brown Strait, the tidal currents set S

on the flood and N on the ebb at rates of up to approximately 4

knots.

2.8 Elcho Island (11°55'S., 135°45'E.), the largest island

of the above group, lies adjacent to the Napier Peninsula, with

Cadell Strait between. Point Bristow, the SW extremity of the

island, lies nearly 29 miles from its NE end; several conspicuous tanks are situated about 2 miles to the N. A large mission

station, which is the principal timber-cutting center for missions in the Northern Territory, is located between Point Bristow and the above tanks. There is a small hospital and air

service is available with Darwin.

2.8 Anchorage.—Light-draft vessels can obtain good anchorage

during the Southeast Monsoon in the bay off the mission station. Approach can be made from the NE by steering for Abbott Islet (Sandy Islet), 3 miles off the W end of Elcho Island,

until the NE point of Howard Islet can be made for bearing S.

The best anchorage is abreast the mission station, in a depth of

5.5m, about 0.2 mile offshore.

2.8 Caution.—This area is not recommended during the Northwest Monsoon.

The Napier Peninsula to Cape Stewart

2.9 Cadell Strait (12°00'S., 135°45'E.) separates the NW

side of the Napier Peninsula from the SE side of Elcho Island

and is less than 1 mile wide near its middle part. The NE entrance is obstructed by a bar with a depth of 0.6m, but general

depths within run from 2 to 8m.

2.9 Small craft are reported able to navigate Cadell Strait in either direction by timing the passage to clear the bar at the NE

entrance at high water. There is good anchorage for small vessels at the W entrance.

2.9 Abbott Islet (Sandy Islet) (12°02'S., 135°30'E.), 3.5 miles

NW of Point Bristow, is a rocky islet lying on the S edge of a

sand bank. It is a good mark, having a moderate covering of

trees 4 to 8m high.

2.9 Howard Island (12°08'S., 135°24'E.), separated from the

mainland by a narrow boat channel, lies SW of Elcho Island

and forms with that island the SW entrance to Cadell Strait.

The island is 21 miles long and 6 miles wide at its widest point.

It has three hills on its E half, the northeasternmost of which

forms a good mark in the approach to Cadell Strait or the mission station on Elcho Island. The W coast consists of a series of

sandy beaches, separated by rocky headlands and fronted in

many places by fringing rock reefs. Large sand dunes predominate behind the beaches. Parts of the island are heavily wooded, particularly the SW end.

2.9 Castlereagh Bay (12°07'S., 135°09'E.), entered between the

NW extremity of Howard Island and Mjrungga Island, about

17 miles WNW, has not been thoroughly examined, but has

depths of 9.1 to 24m in its middle between the dangers which

extend from its shores.

2.9 Loosli Shoal (12°02'S., 135°16'E.), with a least depth of

1.1m, lies 10 miles ESE of Mjrungga Island and nearly in the

middle of the entrance to Castlereagh Bay. Foul ground extends up to 6 miles from the W side of the bay and 2 miles

from the E side. The shores are wooded, with low hills within.

2.9 The Woolen River (12°14'S., 135°10'E.) discharges into the

head of Castlereagh Bay, about 4.5 miles WSW of Guy Point,

the W extremity of Howard Islet. The channel has depths of 2.7

to 11m in the lower reaches, and river craft are reported to be

able to navigate up to 14 miles upstream.

2.9 The Crocodile Islands (11°44'S., 135°11'E.), consisting of

three islands and several islets and rocks, extend nearly 20

miles NE from the coast between Castlereagh Bay and Cape

Stewart, about 15 miles NW. Surveys of these islands are not

complete, along with discolored water having been reported in

several areas in the approach; because of their low nature with

surrounding coral reef, considerable caution is required in this

vicinity.

2.10 North Crocodile Reef (11°36'S., 135°10'E.), which

dries 0.6m, and a shoal patch of 6.4m lying 3 miles N, are the

outermost of the known dangers and lies 17 miles NE of Cape

Stewart (11°56'S., 134°44'E.). Caution Reef and NE Crocodile

Islet lie 7 miles SW and 11 miles SE, respectively, of North

Crocodile Reef, with breakers and discolored water between.

The NE Crocodile Islet, with trees on it about 24m high, was

reported to lie 2 miles farther N in 1984. Discolored water was

reported in 1937 about 11 miles SW of NW Crocodile Islet.

NW Crocodile Islet was reported to lie about 1.75 miles ENE

in 1984.

2.10 Mjrungga Island (11°57'S., 135°05'E.), the largest of the

Crocodile Islands, lie about 18 miles E of Cape Stewart, with

coral reef extending up to 8 miles to the N. The island is low

and covered with vegetation and cannot be easily identified

from a distance. In 1984, the island was reported to lie 1 mile N

of its charted position.

2.10 Yabomma Island, about 7 miles SW of Mjrungga Island, is

low and wooded. The N shore of the island is ridged with sand

dunes up to 18m high, and Hellier Point, the W extremity, is

fringed with reef to a distance of 0.3 mile. Numerous coral

reefs lie N and W of Hellier Point, with a narrow channel leading between; the channel between Yabomma Island and

Mjrungga Island is foul, with dangerous rocks, having a depth

of 1.8m, approximately in the middle.

2.10 Millingimbi Island lies about 2 miles SW of Yabomma Island, with Boojairagi Islet between. Millingimbi Island, low

and wooded, is separated from the mainland by a narrow channel available only to boats. A mission station, marked by two

aluminum oil tanks and a wooded pier, is situated on the SE

end of the island and is in communication with Darwin by radio and air.

2.10 Millingimbi Inlet, the narrow passage between Yabomma Island and Millingimbi Island, is entered 1 mile N of Yabomma

Island and E of the reefs off Hellier Point. The channel carries

a least depth of 2.1m and is available to small coasters with local knowledge. Mean neap tides rise about 3m, but the channel

is intricate, with sharp turns between the reefs, and caution is

required.
28 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

Cape Stewart to Cape Cockburn

2.11 Cape Stewart (11°56'S., 134°45'E.) separates Castlereagh Bay and the Crocodile Islands from Boucaut Bay to

the W. The point is low, wooded, and fringed by reefs. False

Point, about 4 miles W, is low, sandy, and bordered by a reef

which extends in a ledge 3 miles NNW to Sand Islet, small,

low, and surrounded by coral.

Caution.—A wreck, with a depth of 12.2m over it, was reported (2001) to lie 18 miles NW of Cape Stewart.

2.11 Boucaut Bay (12°00'S., 134°29'E.), entered between False

Point and Skirmish Point, about 24 miles W, has a low sandy

shore with patches of mangroves scattered on the W part.

There are general depths in the bay of 5.5 to 11m, but a 3m

patch and a 4.6m shoal lie nearly in the middle of the bay about

13 miles W of False Point. Submerged ledges extend up to 4

miles NNW of Skirmish Point and the sea breaks on the outer

portion.

2.11 The Liverpool River (12°00'S., 134°12'E.), the estuary of

which is entered between Skirmish Point and Point Hawkesbury, 23m high and thickly wooded, about 11 miles NW, provides good anchorage for small vessels seeking shelter from

the Southeast Monsoon. Although there is a government settlement within the entrance, the estuary and river channel have

not been surveyed for a considerable length of time; the channels are not marked or buoyed, and since the tidal currents set

across the entrance at rates up to 2 knots, caution is required on

entering. Local knowledge is recommended.

2.11 Haul Round Islet, the outer islet of the Liverpool Estuary and

marked by a light, is a small sand cay about 1.2m high, which

is located on the S end of a coral reef about 5 miles E of Point

Hawkesbury.

2.11 A shoal, with a least depth of 3m, lies about 2 miles SSW of

Haul Round Islet, and a shoal area about 2 miles long in a N-S

direction, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies midway between the

islet and Point Hawkesbury.

2.11 Entrance Island, about 4 miles S of Haul Round Islet, is conical in shape and 20m high. It is connected to North East Point,

about 2.5 miles SE, by shoal water.

2.11 Caution.—Only small vessels should proceed beyond Entrance Island.

2.12 West Point (11°57'S., 134°11'E.), low, sandy, and

fringed by reefs, lies about 1.75 miles W of Entrance Island,

with the entrance channel between. South West Point, 4.5 miles

SSE of West Point, narrows the river entrance and rises to a

wooded hummock, 54m high and 0.75 mile within. 

2.12 Mangrove Bluff (12°05'S., 134°12'E.), fringed with mangrove trees, lies about 2.75 miles S of South West Point and

rises about 1 mile within to moderately-high land covered with

grass and woods. A conspicuous tower stands 2.5 miles ENE

of the bluff.

2.12 The main channel lies between Haul Round Island and the

extensive shoal area 1.5 miles W, and then between Entrance

Island and the reef off West Point. It then leads about 0.85 mile

E of South West Point, to which a least charted depth of 5.5m

can be carried. It appears the channel can best be run on a

course of about 173°, passing 0.5 mile off the W extremity of

Entrance Island.

2.12 Above Mangrove Bluff, the river is narrowed by Bat Island

and becomes shoal and tortuous, with the channel generally

following the E bank. The mangroves are so thick that landing

is not practical and fallen trees make navigation difficult.

2.12 Anchorage.—Well-protected anchorage can be taken by

small vessels off the S side of Entrance Island, in depths of 5.8

to 9.1m, about 0.2 mile offshore. Depths shoal S of this anchorage and caution is required.

2.12 Moderate-size vessels can take anchorage in the channel W

of Entrance Island where there are depths of 13 to 20m, mud;

the tidal currents reach 2 knots hereabouts and a good watch is

required.

2.12 Small vessels can anchor about 0.5 mile NE of South West

Point, in a depth of 4.6m, or about 1.25 miles SSE of the point,

in a depth of 5.5m, mud. The latter anchorage lies about 0.75

mile NW of the government settlement which is in radio and

air contact with Darwin.

2.12 Caution.—Dangerous wrecks lie about 17 and 41 miles NE

of Haul Round Islet. There are two dangerous wrecks, one lying 17 miles NNE of Point Hawkesbury, with a least depth of

18.6m over it, the other 26 miles NE of the same point, with a

least depth of 12.2m over it. 

2.13 Rolling Bay (11°54'S., 134°06'E.), entered between

Hawkesbury Point and a rounded point 3.25 miles WNW, is

shoal and foul, with a ledge of rocks and submerged dangers

extending out for a distance of 3 miles through the center of the

bay. The outer part of this ledge breaks and vessels without local knowledge are recommended not to attempt to enter.

2.13 Junction Bay (11°50'S., 133°57'E.), entered between the

point W of Rolling Bay and Braithwaite Point, about 10 miles

farther NW, has general depths of less than 5.5m except for its

center part. The SE side of the bay is moderately elevated and

wooded, with some red cliffs, and a stretch of sandy beach

which is fringed by rocks to the E and W. There is a projection,

in the middle of the NW shore, from which the land close behind rises to a height of 35m. Immediately SW of this projection the land is low and swampy.

2.13 Braithwaite Point (11°46'S., 133°56'E.), low and wooded,

is heavily fringed by reef. Hall Point, 2.5 miles NW, has a

rocky spit extending about 1.5 miles N from it. Rocky ledges

fringe the shore across the head of a small bay between Hall

Point and Cuthbert Point, about 5 miles W. The land between

these points is low, sandy, and continues to SW of the latter

point.

2.13 Caution.—A depth of 9.1m was reported in 1941 about 57

miles NE of Braithwaite Point; another 9.1m patch lies 6.5

miles SSW of the first patch. The bottom here is irregular and

large vessels are recommended to give the area a wide berth.

2.13 A line of shoals, with rocks, breakers, and coral heads, extends about 14 miles NE of Braithwaite Point; the outer dangers have not be examined and should be given a wide berth.

2.13 A patch, reported in 1999, with a depth of 11.9m lies 13

miles N of Cuthbert Point.

2.13 Paxie Shoal (11°26'S., 134°09'E.), with a least depth of

9.4m, coral, lies about 23 miles NNE of Braithwaite Point.

2.13 A large shoal area, which breaks near its outer limits, extends 6.5 miles N of Cuthbert Point with several dangers on it

having depths of less than 1.8m. The limits of this area extend

to Hall Point, about 5 miles E, with depths on the inner part of
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 29

Pub. 175

less than 4m. Shoaling has also been reported (1991) to extend

up to 8 miles N of Hall Point. Other dangers NE and E of Hall

Point, and up to 25 miles N through NW of Cuthbert Point,

may best be seen on the chart.

2.14 Guion Point (11°46'S., 133°40'E.), about 11 miles

WSW of Cuthbert Point, is fringed by reefs and has a few rocks

N of it. The point, which is wooded, extends W from the coast

for about 1 mile and forms the entrance of a sandy bay located

between itself and a point about 4 miles SW. The bay has general depths of 3.7 to 5.5m, but a 3.7m shoal lies in the middle

of its entrance and a rocky ledge extends about 2 miles N of the

W entrance point.

2.14 Turner Point (11°45'S., 133°32'E.), about 8 miles W of Guion Point and forming the NW entrance point of the King River,

is fringed with rocks and has depths of less than 5.5m extending up to 1 mile to its N.

2.14 The King River has depths of 5.8 to 7.3m at its mouth, with a

depth of 5.5m for about 3 miles within. It trends S and SW

with heavily wooded shores, but is narrow, difficult, and only

available to boats over most of its length.

2.14 The Wellington Range, which attains an elevation of 174m,

commences about 8 miles SW of Turner Point and extends

about 20 miles W, giving the coast a distinctive rocky appearance in contrast with the low land E of the King River. 

2.14 Tor (11°56'S., 133°08'E.), an isolated pyramidal rock, 221m

high, is located about 19 miles SW of Ross Point and forms a

good mark in clear weather.

2.14 Barclay Point (11°44'S., 133°24'E.), 7.5 miles W of Turner

Point, is the extremity of a low peninsula which extends from

the coast to form a small bay on either side. The E bay is encumbered with rocks and has not been fully examined. Anuru

Bay, on the W side, had depths of 1.8 to 3m over its greater

part, although there is a deeper area on the W side of the entrance. The SW part of the bay dries for a distance of about 0.5

mile offshore and the head of the bay is formed of cliffs.

2.15 Ross Point (11°41'S., 133°21'E.), about 12 miles

WNW of Turner Point, is the NE extremity of a range of hills,

about 30m high, that forms the NW entrance point of Anuru

Bay. Submerged ledges extend about 0.25 mile from the N and

S sides of the point.

2.15 White Point (11°42'S., 133°18'E.) lies about 3 miles W of

Ross Point, and between it and Brogden Point, 16.5 miles NW,

there is a bay which has not been closely examined. The shore

from about 2 miles SW of White Point is low and sandy with

White Rocks, above-water and submerged, extending about 1

mile offshore, about 4 miles SW of the point. A rock, awash,

lies about 0.5 mile NW of White Rocks and a little over 1.5

miles off the coast.

2.15 Brogden Point (11°31'S., 133°05'E.), 61m high, can easily

be identified because of its higher character in relation with the

rest of the shore and the cliffs on its S side. The coast between

Brogden Point and De Courcy Head, a cliffy projection, 36m

high, is not completely examined, but is rocky and reeffringed.

2.15 Cape Cockburn (11°20'S., 132°52'E.), 3 miles W of De

Courcy Head, is low and rocky, with drying ledges extending

nearly 0.5 mile offshore. A rock, which dries 1.8m, lies 1.25

miles NNE of Cape Cockburn. The cape is wooded to within a

short distance of the shore, but is not as conspicuous as De

Courcy Head.

The Goulburn Islands

2.16 North Goulburn Island (11°30'S., 133°26'E.), located about 9 miles NNE of Ross Point, is about 7 miles long in

an E-W direction and generally low in character, but with a

ridge along its N and W shores. It is fringed by rocks in places,

mostly along the N shore. A shoal, with a depth of 4.3m, was

reported in 1980, 2.5 miles E of the NE extremity of the island.

A number of dangerous shoals exist within 9 miles to the NE of

the NE extremity and may be seen on the chart.

2.16 Mullet Bay, formed between Cone Point and Sand Point at

the W end of North Goulburn Island, affords good anchorage

sheltered from the Southeast Monsoon, in depths of 11 to 13m,

mud, about 1 mile offshore. A rock and a shoal, both with a

depth of 1.8m, lie in the S part of the bay; caution is advised.

2.16 South Goulburn Island (11°37'S., 133°25'E.), about 2.5

miles S of North Goulburn Island, is generally low and sandy,

with a mission station on its S end. The passage between the

two islands has depths of 9.1 to 12.8m in its fairway, but a 7.3m

patch lies 3 miles SW of Sand Point. This passage has not been

completely surveyed, and it has been reported that the coastline

and positions of the two islands are not accurately charted,

making it difficult to fix a vessel’s position when passing

through.

2.16 South West Bay, on the W side of South Goulburn Island,

has a sandy beach backed by cliffs, about 12m high, that are

stratified by red and white clay. Bottle Rocks, which are above

water, are separated from the N entrance point of the bay by a

narrow channel, with a depth of 3.7m; a 5.5m patch lies 1.25

miles WSW of these rocks.

2.16 Sims Islet, which lies in the approach to South West Bay,

about 3 miles WNW of the S extremity of South Goulburn Island, is formed of large course sandstone with rounded masses

over the N part of the island, on which is Sansom Head, 18m

high. A 6.4m patch lies about 1 mile SSE of the island.

2.16 Aspect.—A mission station is situated on the E side of the S

end of South Goulburn Island and is in radio and air communication with Darwin. The station can be reached by a trail from

South West Bay.

2.16 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained in South

West Bay, in depths of 9 to 11m, about 1 mile offshore. Small

vessels can anchor closer to shore in a depth of 5.5m, about

0.25 mile off the beach.

2.16 Small craft can anchor in the bay E of the mission station,

but local knowledge is required to proceed through the reef

which fringes the approaches off the E side of South Goulburn

Island.

2.17 Macquarie Strait (11°42'S., 133°25'E.), separating

South Goulburn Island from the mainland, is narrow and incompletely surveyed in the approaches. It has a reported depth

of 3.7m in the middle of the fairway and a depth of 7m was reported in the E approach in 1968. Tidal currents run at a rate of

about 2 knots, setting SSE on the flood. Only small vessels

with local knowledge should attempt this passage.
30 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

Islands and Dangers North of Cape Cockburn

2.18 New Year Island (10°54'S., 133°02'E.) lies at the NE

extremity of the group of islands and islets that extends up to

27 miles N of Cape Cockburn. It is wooded and fringed by

reefs, with deep water within 0.5 mile offshore except at its SW

end.

2.18 New Year Island Light is shown from a round metal framework tower situated about 0.5 mile W of the E extremity of the

islet.

2.18 Caution.—Vessels running the offshore track are recommended to pass not less than 6 miles N of New Year Island because of the extent of Bramble Rocks, about 16 miles W.

2.19 Hogmanay Shoal (10°59'S., 133°09'E.), with a least

depth of 8.2m, lies 8 miles SE of New Year Island and is about

3 miles long in a N-S direction. Depths in excess of 18.3m lie

close N, E, and S of this shoal, with the 20m curve about 1 mile

off in all directions.

2.19 The Oxley Islets, two in number, lie on a bank about 12

miles WSW of New Year Island and about 20 miles NNW of

Cape Cockburn. The N islet, which is low and wooded, is connected to the S islet by a spit which uncovers at low water. A

submerged rock lies 1.25 miles E of the S end of the N islet,

while a 10.9m shoal lies 1.25 miles W of the S end of the S islet. A depth of 11.9m lies 3.5 miles S of the S islet.

2.19 Between the Oxley Islets and New Year Island, surveys are

not complete, but irregular depths of 7.6 to 16.5m, coral, with

overfalls in places, have been reported in the area from 3 to 10

miles E of the S Oxley Islet.

2.19 Bramble Rocks (10°53'S., 132°46'E.), with a least charted

depth of 3.6m, lie off the N end of the bank on which the Oxley

Islets lie. The northernmost rock is located about 6.5 miles

NNW of the N islet and has a charted depth of 4.9m. These

rocks lie N of the parallel of New Year Island and are dangerous because of their proximity to the shipping lanes.

2.19 McCluer Island (11°04'S., 133°00'E.), 42m high, lies 11

miles SE of the Oxley Islets and is the highest of the islands N

of Cape Cockburn. Its N side is heavily fringed by reefs, with a

wooded islet located on a spur extending about 1 mile off the

NW extremity. The E side is also fringed by a reef extending

about 1 mile offshore, but several islets, formed of dead coral,

lie close offshore. The SW side of the island is sandy, with

depths of 3 to 4m extending up to 1 mile off the beach.

2.20 The Lawson Islets (11°04'S., 132°52'E.), two in number, lie about 6 miles W of McCluer Islet, with the N islet on a

reef which extends about 0.5 mile from the N and W sides and

1.5 miles from the E side. The S islet, which is smaller, low,

and wooded, is located about 2 miles to the SE, but the waters

around, and between it and the N islet, have not been completely surveyed. A shoal, with a depth of 10.5m, was reported in

1980 to be 1.5 miles SW of the SW extremity of the Lawson Islets.

2.20 Grant Island (11°09'S., 132°55'E.), 32m high, lies about 10

miles N of Cape Cockburn and is the southernmost island in

the group. The island is nearly surrounded by a reef and rises to

a peak at its NW end, but is low and wooded at the E and SE

shores. Depths of less than 5.5m lie up to 1.5 miles S and SE of

Grant Islet, with foul ground in this vicinity. In 1988, a shoal

with a least depth of 10m was reported 5 miles W of the S end

of Grant Island.

2.20 Depths between the Lawson Islets and Grant Island are irregular and not fully surveyed; however, soundings of 7 to 8.2m

have been taken.

2.20 The passage between Cape Cockburn and Grant Island and

between theOxley Islets and Croker Island is wide, deep, and

clear with a navigable width of about 6 miles between the 11m

curves. Depths of 12.8m and 14.6m were reported on the E

side of the passage in 1968. A 10.3m shoal patch lies mid way

between Templer Islet and Grant Island.

2.20 Money Shoal (10°21'S., 132°44'E.), with a least depth of

3.6m, lies approximately 39 miles NNW of New Year Island

and N of the recommended track laid off the N coast of Australia. This shoal is generally formed of coral heads and extends

in a NW- SE direction over a distance of about 4 miles.

2.20 During the Southeast Trade Wind season, Money Shoal has

been observed to break. On the rising tide in the general neighborhood the current sets WNW at rates up to 1 knot and may

combine with the coastal currents to set a vessel, which may already be too far N of the recommended track, in the direction

of this danger.

Cape Cockburn to High Point

2.21 Mountnorris Bay (11°22'S., 132°43'E.), entered between Cape Cockburn and Darch Islet, about 14 miles NW, affords shelter to small vessels during both monsoons, however,

large vessels are recommended not to use it as surveys are reported to be incomplete. Templer Islet, 17m high, lies in the

middle of the entrance to the bay, about 8.5 miles WNW of

Cape Cockburn, and is surrounded by reef. Depths of 4.6m and

5.9m were reported in 1984, 3 miles NNE and 3.5 miles NE,

respectively, of Templer Islet. Cowlard Islet, small and located

on a reef, lies nearly midway between Templer Islet and the

cape.

2.21 Malay Bay (11°23'S., 132°53'E.), on the E side of Mountnorris Bay, is entered between Cape Cockburn and Annesley

Point, about 4 miles SSW, and affords good anchorage for

small vessels, in depths of 5.5 to 7.3m, for about 2 miles within

the entrance. A reef extends nearly 1 mile N of Annesley Point

and caution is required.

2.21 Valentia Islet (11°23'S., 132°48'E.), 49m high and heavily

wooded, lies 2.5 miles W of Annesley Point, with no safe passage between. Reefs and rocks lie along the N shore of the islet

and extend about 0.75 mile from the SE extremity.

2.22 Copeland Island (11°29'S., 132°44'E.), 38m high,

near the head of Mountnorris Bay, lies 8.5 miles SW of Annesley Point and has a distinctive perpendicular yellow cliff on its

N side. The island is surrounded by reefs, and there is no safe

passage between it and the mainland, except for boats.

2.22 The head of Mountnorris Bay consists mostly of sandy

beaches separated by rocky points, but rocks and shoal water

extend up to 4 miles offshore on the W side of the bay and only

small vessels with local knowledge should proceed in this far.

The land backing the S shore rises on both sides to heights of

89m, and Bay Hill, with a height of 74m, rises directly behind

the head of the bay and is conspicuous.
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 31

Pub. 175

2.23 Croker Island (11°10'S., 132°33'E.), about 23 miles

long from Cape Croker to its S extremity, lies separated from

the mainland by Bowen Strait, about 16 miles NW of Cape

Cockburn. The E shore of the island is generally rocky and

backed by hills reaching elevations of up to 41m, but the W

side is mostly low and in places sandy. The S end attains the

greatest elevation and is heavily wooded.

2.23 Cape Croker (10°58'S., 132°36'E.), the N extremity of Croker Island, is a wooded point backed by a conspicuous hummock, 24m high, about 0.75 mile inland. Drying reefs extend

nearly 1 mile N of the cape and a 4.3m patch lies about 1 mile

farther seaward. The cape is marked by a light.

2.23 Britomart Shoal (10°54'S., 132°33'E.), with a depth of

5.5m, lies 5.5 miles NNW of Cape Croker and is the seaward

extremity of a spit extending from the cape.

2.23 Caution.—During the period from October to December, a

strong current sets toward the land in the vicinity of Cape Croker and vessels should make allowance for it.

2.24 Mission Bay (11°10'S., 132°37'E.), located approximately in the middle of the E shore of Croker Island, is entered

between a point backed by a 28m high red sandhill on the N,

and a rocky point about 2.5 miles S. A rock, which dries 0.9m,

lies 0.75 mile NNE of the latter point and breakers were reported in 1961 about 1 mile farther N. There is a mission station at

the head of the bay.

2.24 Anchorage can be obtained in Mission Bay, in depths of 4.9

to 12.8m, sand, during the Northwest Monsoon, however, caution is recommended during the Southeast Trade Wind season

when the sea is driven directly across the entrance.

2.24 Darch Islet lies about 14 miles SSE of Cape Croker and 2.5

miles SE of the entrance to Mission Bay. It is thickly wooded

and surrounded by reefs which extend up to 1 mile seaward of

its E extremity, One Tree Point. A rock lies on the N side which

covers and uncovers. In 1988, a shoal with a least depth of

7.9m was reported 2 miles NNE of One Tree Point.

2.24 There is a narrow channel, with depths of 8.5 to 12.8m, between Darch Islet and Croker Island, but it has not been closely

examined.

2.25 Point David (11°22'S., 132°35'E.), the S extremity of

Croker Island, is low, narrow, and stony, with a spit having

depths of less than 5.5m extending 3.5 miles ESE from it. The

SW coast of the island, between David Point and Adjamarrugu

Point, about 13.5 miles NW, also forms the E side of Bowen

Strait and is stony and mostly covered with brush.

2.25 Palm Bay (11°08'S., 132°29'E.), entered between Adjamarruga Point and a point about 6 miles NNE, affords good anchorage during the Southeast Trade Wind season, in depths of

7.3 to 9m. The NE part of the bay and the area about 2 miles

NW of Adjamarrugu Point are fouled with rocks and a reef;

caution is required. There is a sandy beach in the SE part of the

bay which apparently provides good landing.

2.25 Sommerville Bay (11°01'S., 132°30'E.), on the N side of

Croker Island, is entered between the W side of Cape Croker

and a low wooded point about 6.5 miles SW, off which extends

a reef, with Peacock Islet on its outer end, about 1 mile NW.

The bay has general depths of 7.3m to 14m, but its shores are

reef-fringed and landing appears difficult.

2.25 Bowen Strait (11°15'S., 132°31'E.), between the SW side of

Croker Island and the mainland, is encumbered with shoals and

has only been partially examined. It is reported to be suitable

for small vessels, with drafts up to 4.6m, which possess local

knowledge to follow the channel E of the shoals in the middle

of the strait; however, the E entrance, which is narrow with offlying shoals, appears to carry a least depth of 5.8m and is difficult.

2.25 The coast forming the W side of Bowen Strait has been only

partially examined and stretches from Mountnorris Bay about

15 miles NW to High Point.

High Point to Port Essington

2.26 Raffles Bay (11°10'S., 132°23'E.), entered between

High Point (11°13'S., 132°26'E.) and D’Urville Point, about 3

miles W, affords safe anchorage for small vessels with local

knowledge, sheltered from all but N winds, in depths of 5.5 to

7.3m. Both entrance points, as well as the shores on either side

of the inner bay, are fronted by ledges and rocks which reduce

the navigable width of the entrance channel to about 1 mile.

The head of the bay is low and covered with mangroves, but

there is a cliff on the E side about 2 miles SW of High Point.

2.26 Campbell Reef, rocky with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies

about 3.5 miles NW of High Point and in the approach to Raffles Bay.

2.26 Danger Point (11°07'S., 132°21'E.), a low, narrow point

about 8 miles NW of High Point, is fringed with reef and submerged rocks to a distance of nearly 1 mile. A depth of 7.7m

has been reported about 3.5 miles NNE of Danger Point; less

depths may exist in the vicinity.

2.26 Caution.—Jones Shoal, with a least depth of 7.3m, lies

about 11 miles NNW of Danger Point and encompasses an area

of about 2 square miles.

2.27 Port Bremer (11°08'S., 132°15'E.), situated between

Danger Point and Smith Point, about 11.5 miles W, is entered

between Sandy Islet No. 1 and Sandy Islet No. 2. Both these islets are low and reef-fringed; the latter is located about 2.5

miles WNW of Danger Point while the former is located about

3 miles E of Smith Point. A monument, 8m high, stands on

Smith Point. A shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, was reported 3

miles NW of this point.

2.27 The shores of the outer part of Port Bremer are fringed with

reefs, and dangerous rocks and sand banks lie up to 3 miles off

the coast in places; an isolated 2.3m patch lies about 2.5 miles

SW of Sandy Islet No. 2. Sandy Islet No. 1 is connected to the

shore SW by reef.

2.27 Edwards Point (11°11'S., 132°16'E.), about 6 miles SW of

Danger Point, and Kuper Point, 2 miles W, form the entrance to

the inner part of Port Bremer, but the channel is restricted by

the outer and inner dangers to a width of less than 0.5 mile, and

local knowledge is necessary to enter. There are charted depths

of 11 to 12.8m in the channel to Stewart Point, about 2 miles

SW of Edwards Point, but the inner part of the port is not adequately surveyed and the waters are used for the culture of

pearls therefore caution is required.

2.27 Caution.—An isolated 2.4m shoal was reported (1996) to lie

in the approaches to the inner part of Port Bremer, 3.5 miles

NW of Edwards Point. 

2.27 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained in Port
32 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

Bremer by vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 7.3 to

11m, to the E of Stewart Point, where there is shelter from all

but N winds.

Port Essington

2.28 Port Essington is an inlet on the N coast of Australia

which was originally used as a naval base in the nineteenth

century, but let go as a consequence of the climate and the unproductive character of the surrounding country. It is entered

between Smith Point (11°07'S., 132°08'E.) and Vashon Head,

about 8 miles W, but the land on both sides is very low and the

approach is somewhat difficult because of the reefs extending

from, and off-lying the entrance points.

2.28 The inlet, which is about 18 miles long, is divided into an

outer and an inner harbor by a spit of land about two-thirds of

the way S from the entrance. Both harbors provide good anchorage, the outer harbor for larger vessels and the inner harbor

for small vessels with local knowledge.

2.28 The small settlement of Victoria, situated on the W shore of

the inner harbor, is the only remnant of the original base and is

apparently only occupied at certain times of the year.

2.28 Orontes Reef (11°04'S., 132°05'E.), dangerous and difficult

to sight, lies on the approach to Port Essington, about 5 miles

NW of Smith Point. On its S extremity are several rocky heads

with depths of 0.6 to 0.9m, and on the N extremity is a rock

with about 4.6m of water over it. The sea seldom breaks on this

reef, and the reef itself cannot be seen even when close to, as

the discoloration of the water is not confined to its immediate

vicinity. The shoal is marked by lighted buoys.

2.29 Outer Harbor.—Smith Point (11°07'S., 132°08'E.),

on the E side of the entrance, is low and rocky with reef extending nearly 1 mile NW from its N extremity. Some of the

rocks near the outer end of this reef are above water, and a

depth of 7.4m was reported in 1965 to lie outside its limits

about 2 miles NNW of the point. Another shoal, with a depth

of 8.3m, was reported (1979) to lie 3 miles NW of Smith Point.

A monument, 8m high, stands on Smith Point.

2.29 Vashon Head (11°07'S., 132°00'E.), the W entrance point to

Port Essington, is low, wooded, and swampy, rising to a 48m

hill about 2 miles within. Reefs and foul ground extend nearly

3 miles NNE of the point, with a 0.1m patch on its E edge,

about 1.75 miles NE of the head.

2.29 Black Point, 2 miles S of Smith Point, is cliffy and covered

with trees on its S side. A conspicuous building stands on the

shore close N of the point. Reef Point, about 2.25 miles SSE of

Black Point, has reef extending nearly 0.5 mile SW from it.

2.29 Walford Point, on the W side of Port Essington, lies 5.5

miles SE of Vashon Head and is the NE extremity of a low

tongue of land which forms the SE side of Coral Bay. A detached shoal, in approximate position of 11°11'S, 132°05'E,

and with a depth of 1.8m, lies 1 mile E of Walford Point.

2.29 Turtle Point, moderately high, is located about 3.5 miles SE

of Walford Point, with Low Point and Kennedy Bay between.

Turtle Point can usually be identified before either Smith Point

or Vashon Head, but may be difficult to identify.

2.29 Berkeley Bay, on the E side of Port Essington, is entered between Reef Point and Table Head, a low rocky projection 3.5

miles SSE. A rock, which dries, lies about 0.5 mile W of the

latter head, with reefs between; a 3.7m patch lies 0.75 mile N

of the same point. The shore of Berkeley Bay is formed of several small cliffs from 6 to 9m high with small marshy coves between; a cliff 1.25 miles NE of Table Head is red in color.

2.30 Record Point (11°19'S., 132°11'E.), a long narrow

tongue of land, is partially wooded and separates the outer and

inner harbors of Port Essington. It is located about 5 miles S of

Table Head, with Observation Cliff between.

2.30 Saddle Hill (11°18'S., 132°15'E.), 76m high, rises about 3.5

miles E of Record Point, but is sometimes difficult to identify

as the surrounding country is thickly wooded.

2.30 Knocker Bay (11°18'S., 132°07'E.), entered between Curlew Point and Oyster Point, is located on the W side of Port

Essington about 5 miles SW of Table Head. The shores of this

bay are bordered by shoal water and patches of reef, but small

craft can enter without difficulty. A 3.7m patch lies a little over

1 mile NNE of Oyster Point, just E of the entrance to Knocker

Bay. The waters within the bay are used for the culture of

pearls.

2.30 Anchorages.—During the Southeast Monsoon, good anchorage can be taken between Smith Point and Black Point,

about 1 mile NW of the latter, in depths of 9.1 to 11m.

2.30 Coral Bay affords anchorage to small vessels, in depths of

5.5 to 7m, sheltered from E winds by Walford Point.

2.30 Small vessels and small craft can also seek anchorage in the

S parts of Berkeley Bay and Knocker Bay.

2.31 Inner Harbor.—The inner harbor of Port Essington

is spacious and nearly landlocked, so as to provide good shelter

in all winds. It can be entered by moderate sized vessels, but

local knowledge is recommended as the shoals NW of Record

Point extend into the channel.

2.31 Middle Head (11°21'S., 132°12'E.), 2 miles SSE of Record

Point, is a wide cliffy projection which rises to a height of 61m

and divides the inner harbor into two bays, namely Barrow Bay

to the E and West Bay to the W. A spit, with a rock having a

depth of less than 1.8m on its outer end, extends a little over 1

mile NW from Middle Head and another dangerous rock lies

about 1 mile farther in the same direction.

2.31 Barrow Bay (11°20'S., 132°12'E.), with general depths of

about 11m, is entered between Record Point and Middle Head

and has generally low shores fronted by mangroves, but with

the country inland being higher and thickly wooded; the shores

of the bay are fringed with mud flats which extend up to 0.5

mile seaward.

2.32 West Bay (11°23'S., 132°10'E.), a shoal bay with

depths of 3 to 5.5m, is entered between Middle Head and

Minto Head, a whitish cliff about 14m high, 2 miles to the W.

The head of the bay is divided into two coves by Mangrove

Point, which has a drying spit extending 1 mile NNW from it

and mud flats within. Mangrove swamps fringe the shores here

and the land is generally low, except at Middle Head.

2.32 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets SE into the entrance of Port Essington, S past Turtle Point, and then SE again

into the inner harbor. There is considerable strength to the flow

in the narrow parts of the harbor and into the bays. The ebb

current generally follows the fairways and sets strongly past

Black Point.
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 33

Pub. 175

2.32 Anchorage.—Ocean-going vessels can anchor in the inner

harbor of Port Essington just within the entrance to Barrow

Bay, in a depth of 11m, about 0.75 mile SSE of Record Point.

Small vessels can anchor 0.5 mile E of Minto Head, off the

abandoned settlement of Victoria, in a depth of 5.5m.

2.32 Caution.—When steering for the entrance of the inner harbor, care must be taken to avoid the 3.7m patch about 1 mile

NNE of Oyster Point and the shoal water extending about 1

mile NNW of Record Point. When past the latter, vessels

should pass about 0.25 mile off Record Point to clear the dangers on the W side of the entrance.

Port Essington to Cape Don

2.33 Vashon Head (11°07'S., 132°00'E.), the W entrance

point to Port Essington, has been previously described in paragraph 2.29.

2.33 Wanaraij Point (Wanary Point) (11°08'S., 131°58'E.), 2

miles W of Vashon Head, is low, sandy, and forms. with Arau

Point, about 6 miles WSW, the entrance to Trepang Bay. Arau

Point, also low and sandy, is covered with mangroves and surrounded by reef which extends up to 1.5 miles offshore. Midjari Point, reef-fringed and wooded, lies about 2 miles SSW of

Wanaraij Point, with a shoal bay between. A dangerous wreck

is situated approximately 2.5 miles NE of Wanaraij Point.

2.33 Trepang Bay (11°11'S., 131°56'E.) has depths of 9 to 11m

across its entrance and shoals gradually towards its head,

which consists of mud flats and mangroves. It affords good anchorage for vessels with local knowledge, during the Southeast

Monsoon, nearly anywhere outside the fringing reefs. A good

berth appears to be in a depth of about 10m, with Arau Point

bearing approximately 270°; vessels entering should take care

to avoid the 9.4m patch about 3.5 miles NW of Wanaraij Point

and the reefs extending from the entrance points of the bay.

2.33 Allaru Islet, small and sandy, lies about 1.5 miles NW of

Araru Point, with a boat channel between its S shore and the

reef extending from the point.

2.34 Blue Mud Bay (11°12'S., 131°51'E.), located between Araru Point and Lingi Point, about 4 miles WSW, is almost entirely encumbered with reefs, except for two arms

leading to the SE and SW extremities. The shores of the bay

are low and sandy on the E side, but overgrown and wooded

along the W shore to Lingi Point. Blue Mud Bay offers secure

anchorage to small craft, but caution is necessary on entering

as the tidal currents sweep around the outer reefs with a rate of

up to 2.5 knots.

2.34 Popham Bay is entered between Lingi Point (11°16'S.,

131°49'E.) and Ardigbiyi Point, about 4 miles SSW. The

shores of the bay are fringed with reefs, except at its head,

which shoals gradually to a low mud-filled mangrove swamp.

A 34m hill rises on the E side of the inner part of the bay and

provides a good observation spot. Bird Islet, 0.75 mile NNE of

Ardigbiyi Point, is low, flat, and covered with grass, but it appears to be surrounded by a reef; a 7.3m patch lies about 1.25

miles WSW of the bay.

2.34 Alcaro Bay and Christies Bay, both fringed by a reef, lie between Ardigbiyi Point and Cape Don, about 2.75 mile SW. Alcaro Bay is open to the NW and is of little importance;

Christies Bay, through which a narrow boat channel marked by

stakes has been cut, is entered close NE of Cape Don and leads

to a pier, in ruins, at its head. The pier dries at LW, but at HW

there is a depth of about 0.9m at the pier.

2.34 Cape Don (11°19'S., 131°46'E.), the E entrance point of

Dundas Strait, and the W extremity of the Coburg Peninsula, is

a low wooded point fringed by reefs and rising to a rounded

hill, 51m high, about 1 mile within. Shoal water, with depths of

4.9m to 10m, extends about 1.5 miles NW of the cape, and foul

ground consisting of above-water and submerged rocks, lies

about 1 mile to the N; Cape Don should be given a wide berth

as the tidal currents are strong.

2.34 Cape Don Light is shown from a gray concrete tower, 36m

high, close within the cape; the tower shows about 15m above

the trees.

Van Diemen Gulf

2.35 Van Diemen Gulf (11°50'S., 132°10'E.) is bounded

to the N by the Coburg Peninsula, of which Cape Don is the W

extremity; to the E and S by the mainland; and to the W by

Melville Island. It is entered from the N by Dundas Strait or

from the SW by Clarence Strait, and is frequently used by vessels plying between Torres Strait and Darwin.

2.35 The gulf, which is approximately 75 miles long in an E-W

direction and has a breadth of 45 miles, is heavily encumbered

by reef and shoals. Numerous islands and islets border its perimeter and large areas of the E half are not properly surveyed,

thus requiring strict adherence to the charted track lines.

2.35 The shores of the gulf are generally low, marshy and reef

fringed and are difficult to make out with the exception of Cape

Don and the hills on the S side of the Coburg Peninsula, and

the cliffs and hills at the E end of Melville Island. The E side of

the gulf is intersected by numerous rivers of which the largest

are the East Alligator Riverand the South Alligator River, both

located in the SE extremity of the gulf.

2.36 Dundas Strait (11°20'S., 131°40'E.), the N entrance

to the Van Diemen Gulf, is deep, wide, and clear, with irregular

depths of over 37m. It is about 15 miles wide between Cape

Don and the E extremity of Melville Island and follows a geographic axis of approximately NW-SE. Navigation is relatively

easy through the strait, the main consideration being the tidal

currents during poor visibility.

2.36 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Dundas Strait run

with considerable strength during spring tides and cause strong

tide rips and a dangerous race, sometimes attaining a rate of 5

knots, off Cape Don. Through Dundas Strait, the current continues to run for about 2 hours after HW or LW at Port Darwin.

2.36 During the rising tide the tidal current enters Dundas Strait

from N and sets SE past Cape Don; during the falling tide the

tidal current sets NNW out of the strait.

2.36 During the rising tide, the tidal currents setting S through

Dundas Strait and E through Clarence Strait meet about 30

miles ENE of Cape Hotham (12°03'S., 131°18'E.); the uncertainty of this position, however, sometimes renders navigation

in this part of the strait somewhat difficult, but vessels can usually maintain an accurate course by close scrutiny of the current tables on the appropriate charts.

2.36 In a position 1.25 miles S of Cape Keith (11°36'S.,

131°27'E.), 28 miles NNE of Cape Hotham, the tidal current
34 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

during the rising tide sets SSW, and NNE during the falling

tide; both currents have a maximum rate of about 1 knot, but

are irregular in duration, the W current having been observed

to run nearly continuously for about 22 hours.

2.36 From 1.5 to 3 miles SE of Ant Cliff (11°47'S., 131°11'E.),

20 miles SW of Cape Keith, the tidal current sets NE with the

rising tide, with a maximum rate of 1 knot; during the falling

tide the current sets SW with the same maximum rate.

2.36 At a position close S of Abbott Shoal (11°50'S., 131°31'E.),

the currents are mainly rotary and attain a rate of about 2 knots

at springs.

2.36 Depths—Limitations.—The depths throughout Van Diemen Gulf are very irregular, with numerous dangers across its

full width. The recommended track between Dundas Strait and

Clarence Strait has been well-surveyed and carries a least

depth of 11.9m in Howard Channel, the main passage of Clarence Strait. Numerous shoals lie within distances of 0.5 mile of

the track line and accurate navigation is required; however,

vessels with drafts up to 10m can be taken through on high water neaps.

2.36 The E part of Van Diemen Gulf has not been fully surveyed,

but is known to contain numerous dangers. Vessels without extensive local knowledge are recommended to keep clear of this

part of the gulf, which may contain many uncharted shoals and

reefs, and also less water than charted in the supposedly deeper

areas.

2.36 Pilotage.—Torres Strait Pilots will take vessels to Darwin

via Clarence Strait, providing prior arrangements have been

made.

Directions.—Vessels proceeding W from Torres Strait or the

Gulf of Carpentaria fix their positions on the track line approximately 6.5 miles N of New Year Island (10°55'S., 133°02'E.)

and then, if so desired, proceed through Van Diemen Gulf via

Dundas Strait and Clarence Straits for Port Darwin. This allows for a considerable saving in distance over proceeding W

of Melville Island, which must be rounded well offshore to

clear the off-lying shoals.

Van Diemen Gulf—West Side

2.37 Soldier Point (11°28'S., 131°32'E.), about 1.5 miles

SW of the E extremity of Melville Island, consists of a conspicuous red cliff about 11m high. A 32m hill rises close to the

coast about 1 mile NNE of the point and obscures the point

from N.

2.37 Caution.—The N coast of Melville Island, NW of its E extremity, has not been properly surveyed and should be given a

wide berth.

2.37 A line of shoals, consisting of Hinkler Patches, Ommaney

Shoals, and Renard Shoals, extends up to 12 miles S of Soldier

Point, and with depths of 2.4 to 4m, place a considerable danger to southbound vessels proceeding too far W on the flood

tide. Small vessels with local knowledge can proceed between

Soldier Point and Hinkler Patches or between Ommaney

Shoals and Renard Shoals, and take anchorage in the inner

channel or Napier Bay. Caution is necessary in the Southeast

Monsoon as the ebb tide then raises a short, steep sea.

2.38 Cape Keith (11°36'S., 131°27'E.), 6m high, lies about

9 miles SSW of Soldier Point, with Napier Bay between. The

cape is fringed with mangroves, and rises to a height of 27m

about 1 mile inland. Baxendell Reef, which lies centered about

2 miles NNE of the cape, dries 0.9m.

2.38 Cobham Bay (11°37'S., 131°24'E.), located W of Camp

Point, about 2 miles W of Cape Keith, has depths of 4m in its

middle and can only be approached by small vessels. The shore

of the bay and the coast SW are low and bordered by mangroves.

2.38 Conder Point (11°44'S., 131°17'E.), about 14 miles SW of

Cape Keith, is awash at high water and has a distinctive clump

of mangroves on its S end; there are some conspicuous red

cliffs, about 5m high, 0.6 mile W of the point. Nihill Patch,

with a least depth of 2.1m, lies 1.75 miles S of Conder Point.

2.38 Ant Cliff (11°47'S., 131°11'E.), a small section of red cliff,

lies about 6.5 miles SW of Conder Point, and is about 17m

high and prominent.

2.38 The coast SW of Ant Cliff is described with Clarence Strait,

beginning is paragraph 2.44.

2.39 Abbott Shoal (11°50'S., 131°31'E.), with a least

depth of 2.4m, lies about 14.5 miles ESE of Conder Point and

is best rounded to the SE by all vessels. Abbott Shoal Lighted

Buoy, equipped with a radar reflector, is moored close E of this

danger, but it should never be wholly relied upon due to the

strong tidal currents in the vicinity.

2.39 Several shoals lie between Abbott Shoal and Conder Point.

Taiyuan Shoals, a long narrow ridge of coral and sand, has a

least depth of 2.4m; the NE part of the shoal is marked by eddies. Beagle Shoals have a least depth of 1.2m; they are always

marked by discoloration, and, except at slack water, by tide

rips, while in bad weather they are marked by breakers. There

are deep passages between these shoals, but they are not recommended without local knowledge as the tidal currents,

which are strong at times, set directly across these dangers and

precise navigation is necessary to clear them.

2.39 Giles Shoal (11°42'S., 131°45'E.), a gravel bank with a least

depth of 1.5m, and Wells Shoal (11°47'S., 131°39'E.), a bank

of coarse sand with a least depth of 7m, lie E of the track line

about 19 miles ESE and 16 miles SE, respectively, of Cape

Keith. An unsurveyed patch of about 18.3m lies about 4 miles

N of Gillis Shoal.

2.39 Bill Shoal and Taylor Patches, with depths of 6.1m and

7.9m, lie S of the track line about 8 miles and 12.5 miles NE,

respectively, of Cape Hotham. Bill Shoal is marked by eddies.

2.39 Dangers W of Taylor Patches are included with Clarence

Strait, beginning in paragraph 2.44.

Van Dieman Gulf—North Side

2.40 From Cape Don (11°19'S., 131°46'E.), the SW side

of the Coburg Peninsula trends about 25 miles SE to Warigili

Point and is indented by several unsurveyed bays which are

fringed by reefs, offshore rocks, and other dangers.

2.40 Fitzpatrick Shoal, with a least depth of 7.3m, sand, shell, and

coral, extends from 4 to 7 miles SE of Cape Don, and is reported to be extending farther SE, with tide rips over its seaward

extremity.

2.40 Burford Island (11°29'S., 131°57'E.), 21m high and covered with mangroves, lies about 15 miles SE of Cape Don and

3.5 miles offshore; the waters around it have not been closely
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 35

Pub. 175

examined.

2.40 Warigili Point (11°33'S., 132°07'E.), the S extremity of a

headland that forms the SW end of the Coburg Peninsula, is

low and reef-fringed. Mount Bedwell and Mount Roe, two

conical hills, 130m and 158m high, respectively, lie about 4

miles NW of the point and form a good mark in clear weather.

2.40 The Sir George Hope Islands, five in number, lie S and E of

Warigili Point and extend in an E-W direction for about 14

miles. Greenhill Island, the W and largest of the group, lies 1.5

miles SSE of the point and has a conspicuous bluff on its NW

extremity, off which lies a 4.6m shoal and a dangerous rock,

the position of which is doubtful. The S end of the island is

reef-fringed and covered with mangroves; the waters to the S

and E are not well surveyed.

2.40 There is a passage between the N end of Greenhill Island and

Warigili Point which is restricted by reefs extending from both

sides, but a narrow channel, available to vessels with local

knowledge, leads to a protected anchorage, in a depth of about

11m, N of the Sir George Hope Islands.

2.40 Warla Islet, 2 miles NE of the N extremity of Greenhill Island, is surrounded by rocks, with a shoal patch close E.

2.40 The remaining Sir George Hope Islands extend up to 4 miles

E of Greenhill Island and are surrounded by shoal water and

foul ground.

2.40 Mataram Shoal (11°35'S., 131°52'E.), with a least depth of

1.1m, sand and rock, lies about 8 miles SW of Burford Island.

It has not been completely surveyed, but even in calm weather

it is marked by heavy overfalls and tide rips.

2.40 Christine Reef, which dries 0.3m, lies about 11.5 miles SW

of the SW extremity of Greenhill Island and has not been surveyed. Several shoal patches, the positions of some of which

are approximate, lie within a radius of 11 miles of this reef, and

Mataram Shoals have been reported to extend an unknown distance to the SE of these patches.

2.40 Ann Shoals (11°42'S., 132°12'E.) and Margaret Shoal

(11°46'S., 132°17'E.) lie 5.5 miles and 11.5 miles SE, respectively, of the SE extremity of Greenhill Island. Ann Shoals,

with a least depth of 0.4m, extend 3.5 miles in a NW-SE direction, and Margaret Shoal has a large patch of reef, which dries

3m.

Van Dieman Gulf—East Side

2.41 The E side of Van Diemen Gulf is very low and apparently swampy; it has not been closely examined and is difficult

to approach because of extensive coastal shoaling. 

2.41 Endyalgout Island (11°41'S., 132°34'E.) lies within the

shore separated from it by shallow creeks; a dangerous drying

reef extends a little over 3 miles from the SW end of the island,

and Mogogout Islet lies about 3 miles WNW of the islands NW

extremity.

2.41 The coast S of Endyalgout Island remains low and marshy,

with salt water creeks intersecting the lowlands. Aralay Beach,

14 miles S of Endyalgout Island, provides an open stretch

available to boats; the land rises slightly to the S.

2.41 Mount Borradaile (12°03'S., 132°54'E.), 138m high, rises

inland about 17 miles ESE of Aralay Beach.

Van Dieman Gulf—South Side

2.42 Field Island (12°05'S., 132°23'E.), located in the SE

extremity of Van Diemen Gulf, is low and mangrove-covered.

Reefs and foul ground surround the island and extend 2 miles

SW to Barron Island, also low and surrounded by reefs.

2.42 Beatrice Reef (11°53'S., 132°12'E.), sand and rock, dries on

its W end about 14 miles NW of the NW end of Field Island.

2.42 Victoria Shoal (11°54'S., 132°02'E.), unexamined and of

unknown length, lies with a drying patch of gray sand about 18

miles WNW of the NW extremity of Field Island.

2.42 The East Alligator River (12°06'S., 128°15'E.), entered 10

miles E of Field Island, between Point Farewell to the W and

the coast 3.5 miles E, has depths of about 2.7m in its entrance

decreasing to 0.9m about 7 miles within. The river has been examined for a distance of about 17 miles and is about 200m

wide.

2.42 The South Alligator River (12°09'S., 132°26'E.) is entered

between Field Island and Midnight Point, about 1.75 miles SE,

via Cunningham Channel, with depths of 7.3 to 12.5m in the

fairway. The river is navigable for vessels with drafts from 3 to

4.6m, depending on the season, for a distance of about 17 miles

above its mouth. The E side of the entrance is low, but the W

side rises to Mount Hooper, a wooded range with three peaks

rising to about 61m. The river has been explored for a distance

of about 36 miles and has soft mud banks thickly covered with

mangroves. The surrounding country is mostly flat grass-covered plain with only a few hills to break the level appearance.

2.42 The West Alligator River (12°13'S., 132°17'E.), entered

about 8 miles SW of Field Island, appears shoal and has not

been examined. Two drying patches, the W with some rocks on

it, lie between the entrance and Field Island, but there appears

to be a channel to the S from which the river could be approached.

2.42 Caution.—Crocodiles are numerous in the vicinity of the

three Alligator Rivers.

2.43 Finke Bay (12°13'S., 132°04'E.), entered between the

W entrance point of the West Alligator River and Point Stuart,

about 21 miles to the W, is mostly shoal and open to the N.

Submerged rocks lie about 4 miles offshore in the E part of the

bay and drying mud flats extend up to 2.5 miles E of Point Stuart; the land behind this point is low and apparently thickly

wooded.

2.43 Chambers Bay (12°12'S., 131°36'E.), entered between

Point Stuart and Cape Hotham, about 36 miles WNW, is a

broad, open bay mostly shoal at its head. Ruby Island and several patches of reef lie in the NW part of the bay, and shoal water, with depths of 0.3 to 1.8m, extends up to 8 miles ENE of

Cape Hotham.

2.43 Barbara Shoal (11°53'S., 131°45'E.), with a least depth of

3.7m, lies about 21.5 miles NNW of Point Stuart.

2.43 Caution.—Vessels without extensive local knowledge are

recommended to give the S shore of Van Diemen Gulf a wide

berth.
36 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

Clarence Strait

2.44 Clarence Strait, the W entrance to Van Diemen Gulf,

leads between Cape Gambier (11°56'S., 130°58'E.), the S extremity of Melville Island, and Gunn Point and Cape Hotham

on the mainland, 13 miles to the S, and 20 miles ESE, respectively. This passage is heavily encumbered by islands, reefs,

and shoals, but is divided into three channels, namely, North

Channel, Howard Channel, and South Channel, the middle of

which, Howard Channel, is marked and available to ocean-going vessels.

2.44 Tides—Currents.—In Clarence Strait, mean spring tides

rise about 4.4m and mean neaps rise 3.4m. Mean low water neap tides usually maintain a rise of about 1m above datum. The

least charted depth in the fairway of Howard Channel is 11.9m.

2.44 The rate of the tidal currents during mean spring tides is

about 4 knots. During extreme high water, spring tidal current

rates of about 6 knots have been observed. The best time for

large vessels to transit the strait is about 2 hours before HW at

Darwin, when the rate is about 0.5 knot.

2.44 Pilotage.—Torres Strait Pilots will take vessels, with drafts

up to 9.1m, from Torres Strait to Darwin via Clarence Strait.

2.44 Caution.—The position of the lighted buoys marking the

shoals in the approaches to Howard Channel should never be

wholly relied upon because of the strong tidal currents in this

area. Both buoys are equipped with radar reflectors and may

show on the screen before the surrounding coastal features.

2.45 Cape Hotham (12°03'S., 131°18'E.), a low wooded

promontory fringed by a reef, is the SE entrance point of Clarence Strait and forms a good mark when approaching from NE.

2.45 Cape Hotham Light is shown from a white metal framework

tower, 16m high, situated about 0.6 mile WSW of Cape

Hotham.

2.45 Caution.—A rocky spit extends about 1 mile N of Cape

Hotham, and Howard Knoll, with a depth of 4.1m, lies 1.75

miles N of the cape.

2.45 Bill Shoal, Taylor Patches, and the dangers E of Cape

Hotham have been previously described in paragraph 2.39.

2.46 Escape Cliff (12°08'S., 131°15'E.), reddish in color

and about 8.5m high, rises about 6 miles SSW of Cape Hotham

and forms a good mark from NW in clear weather.

2.46 Adam Bay (12°09'S., 131°12'E.), centered between Escape

Cliff and Point Stephens, about 5.5 miles WSW, is the estuary

for the Adelaide River and provides shelter and anchorage for

small vessels with local knowledge. Vessels up to about 200

tons can enter by steering SW for the low red cliffs on Point

Stephens and then pass W of Middle Bank and the shoals NW

of it. Vessels may anchor, in depths of 4 to 8.8m, in an area

known as Port Daly, 0.1 to 0.2 mile SE of Ayers Point.

2.46 The Adelaide River can be ascended by small vessels drawing up to 3m for a distance of about 40 miles to the bridge carrying the Arnhem Highway.

2.46 Stephens Bank (12°07'S., 131°11'E.), with a least depth of

3m, extends up to 4.75 miles NE of Point Stephens; it is covered by the red sector of Cape Hotham Light and should be

given a wide berth.

2.46 Glyde Point (12°10'S., 131°07'E.), about 2.5 miles WNW of

Point Stephens, is fringed by mangrove and fronted by a reef to

a distance of 0.75 mile. The land behind these points is covered

with trees rising only to a moderate height; the point is visible

only in good conditions.

2.46 Gunn Point (12°10'S., 131°00'E.), the SW entrance point of

Clarence Strait, is fronted by Gunn Reef, which extends up to

2.25 miles offshore and dries 4.3m. The point is heavilyfringed with mangroves and the land about 3 miles S of it rises

to a height of 55m at the top of the trees. 

2.46 Foelsche Bank, with a least depth of 0.5m, extends about 3

miles SW from the NW extremity of Gunn Reef, with depths

of less than 10m extending 3.25 miles farther W.

2.47 Vernon Island (12°03'S., 131°05'E.), consisting of

East Vernon, North West Vernon, and South West Vernon, are

three wooded, coral islands, each surrounded by a reef, which

lie on the S side of Clarence Strait. The trees on all of these islands reach heights of 18 to 21m and the reefs, which are generally steep-to, are entirely covered at HW. East Vernon Island

and North West Vernon Island are completely covered with

mangroves, but South West Vernon Island, with trees near its

center, is only fringed with this growth.

2.47 Knight Reef (12°01'S., 131°06'E.), which dries up to 2.7m,

lies close NE of the reef extending 3 miles E from North West

Vernon Island. A sand bank on the E end of the reef dries 3.3m

and can give a deceptive view of the extent of this danger when

just drying out. A shoal, with a depth of 6m, was reported in

1980, about 0.75 mile NW of Ward Point, the W extremity of

North West Vernon Island.

2.47 East Vernon Island Light is shown from a red metal framework tower on concrete piers close off the S point of the island.

2.47 South West Vernon Light is shown from a white fiberglass

structure, 3m high and fitted with a radar reflector, on the N extremity of the island.

2.47 North West Vernon Island Light is shown from a white hut

on a steel pile structure, 9m high, about 0.4 mile NW of Ward

Point.

2.47 Cape Gambier (11°56'S., 130°58'E.), the S extremity of

Melville Island, is low and covered by mangroves, with a reef

extending about 1.5 miles to the S and up to 4 miles NW along

the coast. An extensive coastal bank, with depths of less than

6m, extends up to 14 miles E of the cape, almost to the meridian of Ant Cliff, and nearly 10 miles offshore. Dangerous reefs

and rocks extend SSE from Cape Gambier almost to North

West Vernon Island, and with the exception of North Channel,

nearly block the N part of Clarence Strait. Hancox Shoal, with

a least depth of 3.2m, coral, lies about 5 miles SSW of the

cape.

2.48 Howard Channel (12°05'S., 131°05'E.), the main

shipping channel through Clarence Strait, leads between East

Vernon Island and North West Vernon Island, on the N side,

and South West Vernon Island, on the S side; it is deep, and the

only channel used by large vessels. It is entered from the E by

passing S of Rooper Rock, and from the W by passing N of

Marsh Shoal, and then proceeding on the recommended track.

Complete reliance should not be placed on the lighted buoys

being in their charted positions.

2.48 Rooper Rock (12°04'S., 131°11'E.), with a least depth of

5.5m, lies 5.75 miles E of East Vernon Island Light and on the

N side of the recommended track. When the tidal currents are
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 37

Pub. 175

running with considerable force, there is a heavy race over this

rock.

2.48 A dangerous wreck exists approximately 0.4 mile SE of

Rooper Rock. A lighted buoy is moored about 0.3 mile SSE of

Rooper Rock.

2.48 An extensive shoal, with a depth of 8.2m near its outer extremity, extends about 2.5 miles E of the SE extremity of East

Vernon Island; depths of less than 11m extend up to 0.35 mile

off the S side of the island and narrow the navigational channel

to about 0.65 mile between the 11m curves to the N and S of

the track. The center of the fairway has a least depth of 11.9m

in this vicinity and requires accurate navigation by deep-draft

vessels.

2.49 Henry Ellis Reef (12°05'S., 131°01'E.) and Van

Waerwyck Reef, which dry 0.9m and 0.3m, respectively, lie between 0.75 mile and 1.5 miles NW of South West Vernon Island Light. Another drying reef lies between the former and the

NW side of the island.

2.49 Marsh Shoal (12°06'S., 130°57'E.), with a least depth of

2.1m, is a extensive shoal area centered about 5 miles W of

South West Vernon Island Light. The N side of this shoal is

generally steep-to, but numerous patches of less than 11m extend up to 3 miles SW.

2.49 Lighted Buoy No. 4 is charted about 0.25 mile NW of Marsh

Shoal and the recommended tracks pass N and W of it. Vessels

are again cautioned to navigate with fixed aids when rounding

this shoal.

2.49 Wood Rock, with a least depth of 5.5m, lies on the N side of

the fairway, about 2.25 miles WSW of Ward Point, the W extremity of North West Vernon Island.

2.49 Several patches, with depths of 10.5 to 11m, lie from 5 to 7.5

miles W of Ward Point.

2.49 The recommended track SW from Marsh Shoal is continued

under the Approaches to Port Darwin in paragraph 2.60.

2.50 North Channel (12°00'S., 131°05'E.) leads between

the reefs extending from Cape Gambier, on the N side, and

Knight Reef and the reefs off North West Vernon Island, to the

S. There are no clearing marks for any of the dangers in the

channel and it can only be navigated in daylight, preferably at

LW when the reefs can best be seen. In the narrowest part, between Oliver Reef and the reef extending from North West Vernon Island, the fairway has a width of about 0.75 mile between

the 11m curves, but the water shoals rapidly within these limits. Prince Knoll, with a depth of 6.4m, lies about 2.25 miles

ENE of Oliver Reef and may not be visible even at low water.

2.50 North Channel should not be attempted by large vessels;

small vessels using it are recommended to have local knowledge as the tidal currents are strong and set across the fairway

in places.

2.50 South Channel (12°08'S., 131°02'E.) leads between the S

side of South West Vernon Island and the coastal reef which

extends from Glyde Point to Gunn Point. There are no marks

for clearing the reefs when they are covered and the channel is

only used by local coasters and small craft.

2.50 A line of dangers extends 2.5 miles E from the E end of the

reef off South West Vernon Island, and has a least depth of

1.2m near its outer end. The bar S of these dangers has a depth

of 7.3m, but local knowledge is required to cross it.

Melville Island

2.51 The coasts of Melville Island (11°30'S., 131°00'E.)

are generally low and, with the exception of the SE shore,

which is described in paragraph 2.35 with Van Diemen Gulf,

are unsurveyed or only partially examined. Numerous bays indent the shores, some leading to mangrove-fringed rivers

which extend up to 15 miles into the interior of the N shore.

The hills within the coast are mostly wooded and terminate in a

series of low cliffs, generally in the vicinity of the NW part of

the island. The hills near the S and SW shores, 6 to 11 miles

within Cape Gambier (11°56'S., 130°58'E.), rise to heights of

76 to 120m, but with the exception of Notch Peak, are difficult

to identify.

2.51 Point Jahleel (Point Jaheel) (11°11'S., 131°17'E.), the NE

extremity of Melville Island, is mostly low, reef-fringed, and

covered with mangroves and trees. Elphinstone Reef, with a

least depth of 1.2m, lies about 6 miles ESE of Point Jahleel and

nearly 3 miles offshore; the flood tidal currents set down on it

at a rate of 2.75 knots, and it should be given a wide berth.

2.51 In 1971, a depth of 7.9m was reported about 4 miles N of

Jahleel Point, and a depth of 8.5m was reported about 9 miles

NW of the point. The coast SE of the point, to the E end of the

island, is formed by several sandy bays, but has not been surveyed.

2.51 Smokey Point (11°15'S., 131°09'E.), about 8.5 miles WSW

of Jahleel Point, is reef-fringed and shoal. Breton Bay, E of

Smokey Point, leads to the Johnston River, but has not been

surveyed and appears dangerous.

2.52 Radford Point (11°18'S., 130°54'E.), about 15 miles

WSW of Smokey Point, is rocky with foul ground extending

about 1.25 miles from it. Madford Shoals, two drying patches

which usually break, lie 3 miles NE and 3.5 miles ENE, respectively, from the point. Shoal water, with a depth of 7.3m on

its outer extremity, extends about 20 miles WNW of the same

point.

2.52 Lethbridge Bay, with depths of 4.6 to 5.5m just within its entrance, lies about 7 miles ESE of Radford Point and is occasionally used during the Southeast Monsoon as an anchorage

for small vessels.

2.52 Burra-burra Head (11°22'S., 130°42'E.), with conspicuous

red cliffs extending up to 1.5 miles SW, lies about 8 miles

WSW of Radford Point. Laxton Reef, which dries 5m, and

Saunders Patch, with a depth of 2.5m, lie 1.25 miles NW and 3

miles NNW, respectively, of the head.

2.52 Cape Lavery (11°20'S., 130°39'E.), the N extremity of a

peninsula, lies about 15 miles W of Radford Point and is low

and surrounded by shoal water. Karslake Island, 41m high at

the tree tops, lies a little over 1 mile N of Cape Lavery, with

foul ground extending about 1 mile farther NW.

2.52 Snake Bay, entered E of Karslake Island, has general depths

of 6 to 8m, but shoals rapidly between Cape Lavery and Brown

Point, 4 miles SE. 

2.52 Anchorage can be found, in 5.5m, good holding ground,

about 0.4 mile WNW of Brown Point. A narrow channel, entered over a bar with a depth of 5.2m, lies close E of the peninsula S of Cape Lavery, and leads to an estuary between Curtis

Haven. A native welfare settlement is situated on the W shore

of the channel about 5 miles S of the cape, but only small ves-
38 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

sels with local knowledge can reach it.

2.52 Shark Bay, entered between Karslake Island and Purumpenelli Point, about 3.5 miles W, is narrowed in its outer

part to a width of about 1 mile by dangerous foul ground. Within the entrance, the bay widens somewhat and has depths of 3

to 5.5m, but it shoals rapidly toward its head.

2.53 Cape Van Diemen (11°10'S., 130°23'E.), the NW extremity of Melville Island, terminates in a low sandy point,

from which a spit of sand and rock, with numerous drying sand

cays, extends about 6 miles to the NNW.

2.53 From the NE extremity of Cape Van Diemen, the coast is

formed by a line of low cliffs extending intermittently 8.5 miles

SE and terminating in a coastal hill about 34 miles high. Although

radar returns may be received from these cliffs by vessels on the

offshore track, considerable difficulty would probably be experienced in determining an exact position from them.

2.53 Mermaid Shoal (11°09'S., 130°13'E.), an area of foul

ground with depths of less than 5.5m and with numerous submerged rocks, extends up to 18 miles W of Cape Van Diemen.

The N side of this shoal is steep-to, with overall depths of 7.3

to 18m.

2.53 The S side of Mermaid Shoal forms the N side of the approach and entrance to St. Asaph Bay at the N end of Apsley

Strait. This area has only been partially examined and less

depths than charted may exist.

Off-lying Dangers

2.54 Goodrich Bank (10°42'S., 130°19'E.), with a least

depth of 12.8m, gravel, lies about 27 miles N of Cape Van Diemen and about 4 miles N of the recommended track.A depth of

16.1m lies about 21 miles WSW of Goodrich Bank.

2.54 Cootamundra Shoal (10°51'S., 129°13'E.), with a least

depth of 14.8m, lies about 71 miles WNW of Cape Van Diemen.

2.54 Calder Shoal (10°51'S., 129°04'E.), with a least depth of

20.6m, lies about 9 miles W of Cootamundra Shoal. Vessels

proceeding to the Philippine Islands from Darwin, or from N of

Melville Island, proceed on the recommended track about 5.5

miles SW of this shoal.

2.54 Marie Shoal (10°55'S., 130°06'E.), with a least depth of

9.1m, lies about 22.5 miles NW of Cape Van Diemen. The recommended track for vessels proceeding to Port Darwin from

NNW of Cape Van Diemen passes 3 miles NW of this shoal. A

depth of 16.5m and discolored water were reported (1977)

close S of the southernmost recommended track, 4.5 miles

WNW of Marie Shoal.

2.54 Parry Shoal (11°12'S., 129°42'E.), composed of coral on

which the sea occasionally breaks, has a least depth of 11m and

lies about 40 miles W of Cape Van Diemen.

2.55 Moss Shoal (11°08'S., 129°55'E.), steep-to and with a

least depth of 7.6m, lies about 27 miles W of Cape Van Diemen

and 4.5 miles E of the recommended track for Port Darwin.

Vessels rounding this shoal from NE set their course on 169° to

proceed to a position about 8.5 miles NW of Cape Fourcroy

(11°47'S., 130°01'E.), and then steer S for the main Darwin

tracks.

2.55 Mesquite Shoal (11°13'S., 130°01'E.), steep-to on its W

side, has a least depth of 5.5m and lies about 21 miles WSW of

Cape Van Diemen.

2.55 Caution.—Lynedoch Bank (10°02'S., 130°49'E.), with a

least known depth of 9.8m, sand and coral, lies about 72 miles

NNE of Cape Van Diemen.

2.55 Evans Shoal and Franklin Shoal, each with a least known

depth of 9.1m, coral, and Flinders Shoal, with a least known

depth of 6.8m, coral, lie grouped in an area centered about 95

miles NW of Cape Van Diemen. These shoals and the surrounding waters have not been closely examined and less

depths than charted may exist.

2.55 Loxton Shoal (9°36'S., 128°43'E.), with a least known depth

of 10.3m, coral, lies about 136 miles NW of Cape Van Diemen.

Several shoals, including Martin Shoal, Troubadour Shoals,

and Sunset Shoal, all lie within a radius of about 23 miles to

the E, S, and W of Loxton Shoal. The least depth charted in

this area is 7.5m, but the general vicinity has not been closely

examined and lesser depths than charted may exist.

Apsley Strait

2.56 Apsley Strait (11°30'S., 130°25'E.), which separates

Melville Island from Bathurst Island, can be entered at its N

end by small vessels with local knowledge. The S part of the

strait is narrow and tortuous with numerous rocks in the channel, and generally only used by small craft.

2.56 St. Asaph Bay and Port Cockburn, just within the N entrance

to Apsley Strait, are deep and wide and provide good anchorage for vessels able to enter. The land on both sides is generally

low and thickly wooded, with numerous palm trees along the

shores.

2.56 The Narrows (11°17'S., 130°18'E.), at the N entrance to

Apsley Strait, is restricted to a width of about 1 mile by the S

side of Mermaid Shoal and the N end of a sandy spit extending

from Brace Point, the N extremity of Bathurst Island. During

daylight, vessels with local knowledge can enter in a depth of

about 9.1m by steering for the S wooded extremity of Piper

Head bearing 090°, until Luxmore Head, about 5 miles SSE,

can be steered for on an approximate SE bearing. Considerable

caution is required as there are no channel aids available. A

depth of 1.5m lies on the S side of the channel 3 miles NW of

Brace Point.

2.56 Caution.—When proceeding against the outgoing tide, a

good clearance should be given to the sandy spit extending N

from Brace Point, as the tidal current sets over it with significant strength when it is covered. 

2.56 St. Asaph Bay (11°19'S., 130°22'E.), entered between Piper

Head and Brace Point, has general depths of 13 to 22m over a

width of about 2 miles. Luxmore Head, at the SE end of the

bay, consists of a series of rocky points with red cliffs to the S.

The whole of the E shore is fronted by a rocky reef, and the

land within is generally low and wooded.

2.56 The W shore of St. Asaph Bay is fringed by sandy beaches

forming small bays where landing can be easily effected. The

land rises gently within and several fresh water streams flow

from the hillsides.

2.56 Caution.—Mariners should navigate with caution due to unclear waters in the approach to St. Asaph Bay. 
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 39

Pub. 175

2.56 Port Cockburn (11°22'S., 130°23'E.), immediately S of St.

Asaph Bay, extends SSE to Harris Islet about 5 miles from

Luxmore Head. The E shore, consisting mostly of steep red

cliffs backed by trees, is fringed by shoal water with numerous

rocky heads, but the W shore is generally deep and clear of

dangers. Garden Point, 4 miles SSE of Luxmore Head, is fronted by a reef which extends nearly 1 mile to the WNW; a mission station equipped with a radio and an airstrip, is situated on

the point.

2.56 Tidal currents at the W entrance to the narrows set E on the

flood and W on the ebb, with a maximum rate of about 2 knots

at springs. The rate is about the same in the approach to Port

Cockburn but somewhat less in St. Asaph Bay, which is wider

and less restrictive.

2.57 The S part of Apsley Strait, from Harris Islet

(11°26'S., 130°24'E.), takes a SSE direction for about 30 miles

with general depths of 7.3 to 26m; it has never been thoroughly

examined, and uncharted dangers may exist. Near the S entrance the depths become very irregular, the channel being encumbered with rocks and drying shoals. These dangers,

together with the strong tidal currents which sometime attain a

rate of 4 knots, render Apsley Strait unsuitable in its entirety

except for powerful small craft with local knowledge.

2.57 The shores are mostly low and covered with mangroves, with

no noticeable features except for the entrances to the various

rivers emptying into the strait.

2.57 Medina Inlet (11°51'S., 130°35'E.), the S entrance to Apsley Strait, is only about 0.5 mile wide. It attains a NE-SW direction from close off the SE extremity of Bathurst Island. The

radio tower on Mission Hill, about 4 miles NW of the SE extremity of Bathurst Island, is prominent. Tidal currents follow

the general direction of the channel and can reach 4 knots at

springs. Pilotage is not available and local knowledge is recommended. The channel, with a least depth over the bar in

1996 of 3.7m, leads E of the shore of Bathurst Island. A drying

ridge extends about 5 miles SW of Buchanan Island and forms

the SE side of the channel, but the waters to the W and S are

unsurveyed. A mission station is situated off the E end of

Bathurst Island where Medina Inlet meets Apsley Strait.

Bathurst Island

2.58 The NW and S coasts of Bathurst Islet are unsurveyed, with the exception of the waters about 12 miles N and

W of Cape Fourcroy, the SW extremity. The NW shore of the

island is formed of a series of bays and inlets and fronted by

rocky shoals which extend some distance offshore. The land

backing the coast is generally wooded with mangroves thickly

formed within the inlets. The N end of the island is mostly low

with a few small hills rising above the woodlands, but the S

shore is high and cliffy with heights of over 61m closely backing the coast. The island is separated from Melville Island by

Apsley Strait, previously described in paragraph 2.56.

2.58 Brace Point (11°19'S., 130°20'E.), the N extremity of

Bathurst Island, is low and poorly defined. A sandy spit extends about 2.5 miles N of the point and coastal shoaling, the

limits of which have not been defined, extends 3 to 4 miles offshore between the point and Rocky Point, 16 miles SW.

2.58 Rocky Point (11°29'S., 130°09'E.), the NW extremity of

Bathurst Island, is fringed by reefs and fronted by submerged

rocks to a distance of up to 3 miles offshore between its S extremity and Caution Point, 4 miles NNE.

2.58 Clift Islet lies close to the shore, 4 miles SSE of Rocky Point.

The area between the point and this islet and up to nearly 6

miles offshore, has not been examined.

2.58 Gordon Bay (11°39'S., 130°07'E.), entered between Clift Islet and Cape Helvetius, about 9 miles SW, affords good shelter

during the Southeast Monsoon for small vessels with local

knowledge.

2.58 Twin Cliffs, with a sandy cove indenting the shore between

them, lie on the SE shore of Gordon Bay; there is a sandy

beach between them and Cape Helvetius. Port Hurd, an inlet

entered about 3 miles NE of Twin Cliffs, is deep and about 0.5

mile wide; however, it is fronted by a bar with a depth of 2.7m.

2.59 Cape Fourcroy (11°48'S., 130°01'E.), the SW extremity of Bathurst Island, is faced by conspicuous dark red

cliffs from 9 to 12m high; a sand hill, about 20m high, lies

about 1 mile NNE of the cape. Reefs and foul ground extend

up to 0.75 mile off the cape and a shoal, with a depth of 5.5m,

lies about 2.5 miles to the NNW. A light is shown from a 15m

high white metal framework tower on the cape.

2.59 From a distance Cape Fourcroy and Cape Helvetius, 7 miles

NNE, somewhat resemble each other, but the former can be

identified by the light and other buildings on it. Caution is required by vessels passing W of the capes during poor visibility,

as radar returns from Cape Fourcroy have been reported poor

and vessels may find themselves approaching Cape Helvetius,

from which shoal water extends nearly 7 miles to the NNW.

2.59 The S side of Bathurst Island from Mitchell Point, about 3.5

miles SE of Cape Fourcroy, is formed by a line of prominent

sand hills and cliffs extending about 27 miles E nearly to the

SE extremity of the island.

2.59 Radar Hill (11°50'S., 130°05'E.), a conspicuous sand hill

about 56m high, with a cliff at its base, rises about 2 miles E of

Mitchell Point, and, along with Penguin Hill, 69m high and

conical, about 1.5 miles E, forms a good mark from S.

2.59 Castle Hill (11°48'S., 130°11'E.), about 1.25 miles long in

Copyright 2002 Lighthouses of Australia Inc.

Cape Fourcroy
40 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

an E-W direction, rises to a height of 61m about 7 miles E of

Mitchell Point. A radio tower stands 2.75 miles NE of Castel

Hill. Lubra Point, fringed by reefs, is located about 1 mile E of

the hill, and a cliff, approximately 30m high and nearly 1 mile

long, is located on the shore, about 3.5 miles ENE of the point.

2.59 The coast from the latter cliff trends ENE for 3.5 miles, and

then 18 miles ESE, to the entrance of Medina Inlet. The shore

is closely backed by wooded hills rising to heights of about

105m, with two stretches of cliffs, about 37m and 30m high,

located 13 and 18 miles E, respectively, of Lubra Point.

Approaches to Port Darwin

2.60 Beagle Gulf (12°10'S., 130°19'E.), entered between

Mitchell Point on the N and Point Blaze (12°56'S., 130°08'E.)

to the S, forms the W approach to Clarence Strait and Port Darwin. It is generally deep, wide, and clear, but requires caution

to avoid the shoals fronting its shores and head. Shepparton

Shoal, described below, lies in the middle of the entrance to the

gulf and vessels are recommended to keep clear of it, especially in heavy weather.

2.60 The coast from Charles Point (12°23'S., 130°37'E.), for a

distance of 25 miles SW, is fronted by shoals and reefs which

extend up to 20 miles offshore in places, and vessels approaching Beagle Gulf from W or SW should steer to round the outer

dangers at a distance of at least 6 miles before turning in for the

entrance of Port Darwin.

2.60 Newby Shoal (11°52'S., 129°11'E.), with a least depth of

12.8m, lies about 50 miles W of Cape Fourcroy and is apparently of coral formation. A bank, with a least depth of 15.8m,

lies about 25 miles NE of Newby Shoal.

2.60 Shepparton Shoal (12°06'S., 129°53'E.), with a least depth

of 11.3m, sand and coral, lies 20 miles SSW of Cape Fourcroy.

A heavy swell may build up over this bank during the Northwest Monsoon.

2.61 Afghan Shoal (11°54'S., 130°08'E.), with a least

depth of 1.2m, extends 7.5 miles ESE from a position 3.5 miles

S of Mitchell Point (11°49'S., 130°03'E.). This shoal lies partially outside the arc of visibility of Cape Fourcroy Light, and

the early part of the ebb tidal current sets down on it from S.

2.61 A shoal, with a least depth of 6.4m, lies about 19 miles E of

Afghan Shoal.

2.61 The historic wreck of a Japanese submarine lies about 13

miles S of Afghan Shoal and a protected zone, with a radius of

500m, within which unauthorized activities are prohibited, has

been established around the wreck.

2.61 Lorna Shoal (12°21'S., 130°19'E.), the northernmost of the

dangers fronting the shore SW of Charles Point, consists of

four patches with a least depth of 3.2m centered about 18 miles

W of the point. No attempt should be made to pass S of this

shoal as numerous dangers, both drying and submerged, lie to

the SE.

2.62 Fenton Patches (12°12'S., 130°43'E.), with a least

depth of 13.1m, consist of an area of irregular soundings centered about 12.5 miles NNE of Charles Point. Vessels approaching Port Darwin from Clarence Strait pass SE of Fenton

Patches. A wreck, marked on its NW side by a buoy, lies close

NW of Fenton Patches; obstructions lie about 1 mile SE and 1

mile S of this wreck.

2.62 Moresby Shoals, Lowry Shoal, and Skottowe Shoal, with

least depths of 6.1m, 6.7m, and 8.8m, respectively, are a series

of scattered patches centered about 14 miles WSW of Cape

Gambier (11°56'S., 130°58'E.). Vessels are cautioned to keep

clear of this area, as surveys N of these dangers are incomplete

and navigation in their vicinity would be difficult.

2.62 Directions.—Vessels approaching Port Darwin from Torres

Strait generally use Clarence Strait proceeding on the recommended tracks. From a charted position about 1 mile N of

Marsh Shoal Lighted Buoy, a course of 223°30' leads to the

general vicinity of Charles Point Lighted Buoy No. 5.

2.62 Vessels not wishing to use Clarence Strait proceed to a position 30 miles NW of Cape Van Diemen (11°10'S., 130°23'E.)

and then steer 213°, passing midway between the charted

14.6m and 16.4m depths, to a position 5 miles WNW of Moss

Shoal. From this position steer 169° to a position 10 miles 325°

from Cape Fourcroy Light. From the latter position, a course of

180° is steered for a position 9 miles 218° from the same light,

and then 119° for the vicinity of Charles Point Lighted Buoy

No. 5.

2.62 When coming from W follow the track indicated on the

chart, passing approximately 5 miles N of Lorna Shoal; then

steer 101°30' for the vicinity of Charles Point Lighted Buoy

No. 5.

Entrance to Port Darwin

2.63 Port Darwin is an estuary of considerable size and is

approached between Lee Point (12°20'S., 130°54'E.) and

Charles Point, about 17 miles WSW. The W side of Port Darwin, from Charles Point to Talc Head, is described; then the E

side of Port Darwin, from Lee Point to Fort Point is described.

Channel dangers are then described from N to S.

2.63 Charles Point (12°23'S., 130°37'E.) is low and faced by reddish cliffs on its E side; a rocky ledge, which dries, extends 0.5

mile NW from the point, and shoal water with depths of less

than 1.8m, extends 1.5 miles to the NE.

2.63 A light is shown from a conspicuous red and white framework tower standing about 1 mile ESE of the point. Radio

masts stand about 1.5 miles SSE and 8.5 miles SE of the light

structure.

2.63 The coast between Charles Point and West Point (12°26'S.,

130°46'E.), 9 miles ESE, is low and is fronted by a coastal

bank, which dries and has rocky ledges on it. Several shoal

patches exist between the coast and Charles Point Patches, 4

miles NE. A pier extends out to a depth of 3m, about 0.4 mile

SSE of West Point. A dangerous wreck lies about 0.8 mile ESE

of the head of the pier

2.64 Talc Head (12°29'S., 130°47'E.), 2.5 miles SSE of

West Point, is a conspicuous narrow cliffy promontory, 19m

high, that is covered with brush. It forms a useful mark in making for Port Darwin.

2.64 Lee Point (12°20'S., 130°54'E.), on the E side of the approach, is low, with rocky ledges extending nearly 1 mile

NNW of it.

2.64 A conspicuous hospital, with a chimney 73m in elevation,

stands about 1.5 miles SSW of Lee Point; it is a useful aid

when approaching from W.
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 41

Pub. 175

2.64 Angler Reef, with depths of less than 1.8m, lies 1.75 miles

NW of Lee Point. 

2.64 Night Cliff (12°23'S., 130°51'E.) is located 3.75 miles SW

of Lee Point; the coast between is fronted by a drying bank of

weed, sand, and mud and is fringed with casuarina trees. Old

Man Rock, which dries 5.6m, lies 2.5 miles SW of Lee Point.

A conspicuous water tower stands at an elevation of 39m,

about 0.5 mile S of the NE end of the cliff; a second water tank

stands about 0.25 mile ESE of the water tower.

2.64 An aeronautical lighted beacon is occasionally shown from a

conspicuous water tank about 3 miles SSE of Night Cliff. An

aeronautical radiobeacon transmits from a position about 5.5

miles E of the lighted beacon.

2.65 East Point (12°25'S., 130°49'E.), about 3.5 miles NE

of West Point, is formed of cliff and attains a height of 22m.

Drying reef fronts the point for a distance of 0.35 mile.

2.65 Emery Point (12°27'S., 130°49'E.), about 3 miles S of East

Point, is formed of low cliffs about 6m high. A sand bank,

which dries up to 3.9m on its S part, extends 2 miles N of the

point.

2.65 Emery Point Light is shown from a white, metal framework

tower on the extremity of the point. A red sector of the light

covers the above sand bank. When entering, vessels steer for

this light between the bearings of 135° and 139°. It has been reported (2000) that the light structure has been difficult to locate

during the day.

2.65 Elliott Point (12°28'S., 130°49'E.), about 0.3 mile SSE of

Emery Point, is a cliffy promontory 10m high.

2.65 The Naval Base is situated about 0.35 mile SE of Elliott

Point; the approach between the breakwaters is indicated by a

range which is shown on the chart.

2.65 Fort Point (12°28'S., 130°51'E.), about 2 miles SE of Emery

Point, rises to Fort Hill, which is 23m high. A conspicuous silo,

43m in elevation, stands on a point near the quarantine station,

about 3.25 miles ESE of Fort Point.

2.65 Wickham Point (12°30.5'S., 130°51.5'E.) rises to Peak Hill,

which is 31m high. Approximately 1 miles S of the point is

Wickham Point LNG Terminal, which consists of a 1,295mlong jetty with a T-head at its extremity. There is a depth alongside of 12m. There is also an isolated danger lighted buoy

740m W of the berth.

2.65 Regulations.—A restricted area has been established around

Wickham Point LNG Terminal. Vessels are prohibited from approaching within 100m of the jetty at all times. This distance is

extended to 500m beginning 45 minutes before the berthing of

an LNG tanker and until the LNG tanker has departed. The N

and S boundaries of the 500m restricted area are marked by

lighted buoys. 

2.66 Charles Point Patches (12°21'S., 130°40'E.), with a

least depth of 2.3m and marked by tide rips, lie from 3 to 5

miles ENE of Charles Point. Charles Point Lighted Buoy No. 5

marks the NE extremity of these patches. A detached 8.2m

patch is marked on its NE side by Charles Point Lighted Buoy

No. 5. There is an area of sandwaves, with depths of not less

than 10m, about 1 mile ESE of this patch; ESE of this same

patch, and joining up with Middle Ground, there are several

other detached patches with depths of less than 10m.

2.66 Middle Ground (12°22'S., 130°46'E.), with depths of 2.3 to

10.0m, extends about 6.5 miles NW of East Point and is covered by the red sector of Emery Point Light.

2.66 Caution.—Unexploded ordnance lies in a depth of 13m, in

an area with a radius of 0.5 mile, centered NE of Middle

Ground, about 3.75 miles NW of East Point.

2.67 Channel Rock (12°25'S., 130°47'E.), with a least

depth of 6.3m, lies 2 miles WSW of East Point and is usually

indicated by tide rips and overfalls. A lighted buoy is moored

close SW of this danger.

2.67 Abbot Patches (12°28'S., 130°48'E.), with depths of 7.3 to

10.1m, extend about 1.25 miles SSE from a position 1.25 miles

W of Elliot Point; they are marked by a lighted buoy.

2.67 Two dangerous wrecks lie close W of the S extremity of Abbot Patches; an experimental fish device lies in the same position.

2.67 Bennett Shoal (12°28'S., 130°50'E.), with a depth of 4.6m,

lies 1 mile SE of Emery Point and is marked by a lighted buoy.

2.67 A dangerous wreck lies about 0.65 mile S of Fort Point. A

submarine pipeline extends about 0.5 mile S from a position on

the shore about 0.9 miles ESE of Emery Point.

Darwin (12°28'S., 130°51'E.)

World Port Index No. 54670

2.68 Darwin is the principal port on the N coast of Australia. The port lies on the S shore of the Beagle Gulf in the Timor

Sea. A line between Charles Point and Lee Point, 17 miles

ENE, marks the extent of the port limit. The city is the capital

of the Northern Territory and is of considerable importance. It

stands on a table about 20m high and is favored by cool breezes

throughout the year.

2.68 Numerous vessels, including ore carriers of considerable

size, enter Port Darwin; the large tides in this area enable deep

drafts to be accommodated. Live cattle are a major export in

Darwin in addition to the offshore oil and gas industry in

Northern Australia.

Winds—Weather

2.68 Darwin is under the influence of the monsoon seasons year

around. The Northwest Monsoon blows from November to

April with occasional winds from E, especially at night. From

April to September the Southeast Monsoon prevails and is

strongest in July. The transition period occurs in October and

winds are generally light.

2.68 The cyclone season extends from November to April. Ships

may be placed on short notice for sea and required to maintain

themselves in seaworthy condition at all times.

2.68 Visibility during the latter part of the Southeast Monsoon is

often reduced by haze, and objects are frequently obscured at a

distance of 3 miles. During the Northwest Monsoon, the visibility is usually good, except in the vicinity of thunderstorms

and squalls.

2.68 The rainy season commences during the latter part of OctoDarwin Port Authority Home Page

http://www.nt.gov.au/dpa
42 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

ber and lasts about 5 months, with the greatest amount falling

in January and February. Lightning, torrential rain, and squalls

are common at this time. From May to September, during the

Southeast Monsoon, rain is very rare.

2.68 Temperatures range from a high of 37°C in summer to a low

of 15°C in winter.

Tides—Currents

2.68 Near the entrance to the harbor, the strength of the tidal currents diminishes considerably, and the direction within the harbor usually corresponds with the direction of the channel.

2.68 During the flood current, considerable eddies may be experienced close to the wharves. These eddies often produce a current setting directly towards the jetties, or sometimes running

along the jetties in a direction opposite to the current at a position about 200m off them. During the ebb current, the currents

close to the jetties run in the same general direction as those

Darwin—Iron Ore Wharf (left), Fort Hill Wharf (center), and Stokes Hill Wharf (right) from SW 

Courtesy of Darwin Port Authority

Darwin—East Arm Port from W

Courtesy of Darwin Port Authority

Darwin—East Arm Port from SE
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 43

Pub. 175

offshore, but care must be taken to guard against the fact that

the currents do not always run directly along the jetties, but

may set towards or away from them. The currents area are considerably affected by heavy rains and by strong NW or SE

winds.

2.68 Owing to the strong tidal currents, discoloration is present at

all times, and during springs, a turgid, muddy color is seen in

the harbor, the whole of which is disturbed by eddies.

2.68 Caution.—Mean high water spring tides rise 6.9m. The

mean high water neap rise is 5m; low water neaps usually

maintain a height of about 2m above datum, but the tides are

mixed, which varies the daily heights. It is highly recommended that ships enter port during the high tide/slack water period

due to the rapid shift in velocity of current. Significant currents

are present. 

2.68 Tidal currents in the approach channel, about 6 miles NW of

East Point, run in the direction of the fairway at a rate of 1 to 2

knots, although a 4 knot ebb current has been reported (2000).

The flood commences about 5 hours before HW; the ebb commences about 1 hour after HW. The currents become rotary at

both HW and LW, with little slack.

2.68 Off East Point, the currents run mainly NNW and SSE, and

attain rates of 3 to 4 knots at springs.

2.68 Currents in the vicinity of the quarantine anchorage run

mostly NW and SE at rates up to 2 knots.

Depths—Limitations

2.68 Darwin is approached between Charles Point Patches and

Middle Ground through Middle Pass (12°21'S., 130°43'E.) and

is entered between Charles Point and Lee Point. Middle Pass is

a deep water route through the isolated patches of less than

10m which lie across the fairway between Charles Point Patches and the NW end of Middle Ground; it is marked by lighted

buoys and is the main approach channel for deep-draft vessels.

Middle Pass has a least depth of 13m.

2.68 The average depth in the main channel from Middle Pass to

the quarantine anchorage, situated SW of the wharves, is 20m.

2.68 Vessels up to 245m in length, with drafts up to 12m, are generally the maximum size accepted. Greater drafts may be accepted by prior consultation, depending upon tidal predictions;

vessels up to 246m in length and 12.8m draft have been accommodated. No restrictions on beam are in force. There are no air

draft restrictions to access the port.

2.68 The Iron Ore Wharf, also called the No. 1 Berth, is a dolphintype berth with a face length of 142m; mooring dolphins are situated 69m E and W of the wharf. The wharf was reported (2010)

being demolished and unavailable for use. 

2.68 New Fort Hill Wharf stands close NE of Bulk Ore Wharf.

Berth 2W and Berth 2E are each 150m long, with an alongside

depth of 12m. Vessels with a maximum draft of 11.7m can be

accommodated.

2.68 A ro-ro terminal is situated at the W end of New Fort Hill

Wharf. A pontoon, 77m in length, can be extended or retracted,

thus enabling ro-ro vessels of any size or type (side-loading,

end-loading, quarter-loading, port or starboard side-to) to use

the Port of Darwin. When the pontoon is retracted, its outer end

forms an extension of the New Fort Hill Wharf, and can then

be used for vessels such as car carriers with side doors.

2.68 Stokes Hill Wharf, the main general cargo berth, is a concretedecked steel-piled wharf with a trestle approach. Berth 3E and

Berth 3W, on the outer side of the wharf, are each 146m long, with

an alongside depth of 9m. Bulk, container, and general cargo are

handled.

2.68 Berth 4E and Berth 4W are situated on the inner side of Stokes

Hill Wharf. Each berth is 80m long, with an alongside depth of

4.5m. Fishing vessels and pleasure craft, with a maximum length

of 70m and a maximum draft of 4.5m, can be accommodated.

2.68 Fort Hill Wharf No. 4 (Old Fort Hill Wharf) is presently restricted to small or special vessels by arrangement with the harbormaster.

2.68 A shipyard for small craft is situated on the W side of

Frances Bay, with depths of up to 5.5m in the vicinity. There

are moorings for small craft at Francis Bay Marina. The minimum depth is 3.5m.

2.68 East Arm Port is situated about 2.5 miles ESE of Fort Point.

The berthing face is 490m long, with a depth of 12m alongside.

Vessels up to 246m long can be accommodated. Bulk cargo,

general cargo, and livestock are handled at this facility. Oil, fuel, and chemical cargo-handling capabilities are expected to be

operational by late 2005.

Aspect

2.68 A radio mast and a water tower, both conspicuous, stand

about 1.25 miles E and about 1 mile ESE, respectively, of the

light on Emery Point. A conspicuous white building of unusual

shape stands about 1 mile ENE of the light structure, but is obscured by East Point when bearing greater than 160°. Due to

the close proximity of other prominent towers, caution is advised when identifying individual marks.

2.68 Peak Hill, 30m high and covered with bush, rises about 5

miles SE of Emery Point and is occasionally used as a leading

mark for entering the port.

2.68 Kings Table, 47m high, is a circular flat-topped hillock about

7 miles SSW of Emery Point. It is the highest land in the Darwin

area and can be seen from the approach in clear weather.

2.68 Stokes Hill is located about 0.5 mile NE of Fort Point.

Frances Bay, consisting mostly of drying flats except for an area on the W side, lies E of Stokes Hill.

Pilotage

2.68 Pilotage is compulsory for all craft exceeding a length of

25m unless a current Pilotage Exemption is held by the master.

2.68 Notice of ETA and request for a pilot must be made to the

harbormaster not less than 24 hours before ETA at Channel

Rock Buoy and confirmed 2 hours before arrival. The harbormaster continuously monitors VHF channels 16 and 67 and the

ETA may be confirmed or adjusted on these frequencies. Port

working frequencies are VHF channels 8, 10, and 12. Pilot

boats are painted with a white and yellow superstructure and a

blue hull with the word “PILOT” on each side.

2.68 The usual pilot boarding point is 1 mile NW of Channel

Rock Buoy No. 6. With prior arrangement, vessels with a draft

of over 9m will board the pilot about 1 mile N of Charles Point

Patches Lighted Buoy No. 5. In case of bad weather, the pilot

boat will lead ahead to sheltered waters, using the VHF. Pilot

boarding arrangements must be in accordance with IMO rules. 

2.68 Vessels awaiting a pilot may anchor between 1 and 2 miles
44 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

NW of Channel Rock Buoy, in 25m, sand, good holding

ground.

Regulations

2.68 Darwin is within the southern zone of tropical revolving

storms. The season extends from November to April each year

and the Port may be more or less affected at any time during

that period. All vessels entering Darwin during the “cyclone

season” are supplied with copies of the Port Procedures, which

set out in full the various stages of alert and preparation to be

observed in the case of an approaching cyclone. Vessels may

be placed on short notice for sea in such circumstances and required to maintain themselves in seaworthy condition at all

times.

2.68 Vessels must not immobilize main engines without prior permission from the harbormaster. Tankers will not be allowed to

shut down main engines while working cargo. Petroleum tankers are not moved during hours of darkness except in emergency conditions.

2.68 Vessels with a draft greater than 12m may need to await the

tide before crossing Charles Point Patches.

2.68 A vessel traffic separation scheme, best seen on the chart,

runs in an E-W direction off Emery Point to Fort Point. 

2.68 Vessel reporting system.—Vessels are to report at the following points:

1. Inbound—When entering the Deep Water (DW) channel in position 12°18.2'S, 130°41.1'E, and when passing the

inner deep-water channel in position 12°25.2'S, 130°10.6'E.

2. Outbound—When passing the inner deep-water channel in position 12°25.2'S, 130°10.6'E.

Anchorage

2.68 Anchorage is available anywhere in the harbor where the

depths are convenient and anchorage is not prohibited. The

holding ground is good, but vessels remaining for more than a

short period during the Northwest Monsoon should moor because of the stronger currents during the wet season.

2.68 Vessels under quarantine must anchor in the quarantine anchorage SW of Fort Hill until cleared. A lighted buoy, painted

yellow, marks a foul area in this anchorage.

2.68 Prohibited anchorage.—Anchorage is prohibited, due to

power and telephone cables in the charted area, within the limits of East Point and the coast just W of West Point to the N,

and between Elliot Point and Oak Point to the S. There is a foul

area between Emery Point to the E and Oak Point to the W.

Vessels are cautioned not to anchor, trawl, or sweep within the

area indicated due to the remains of boom defense netting and

cables.

2.68 Vessels must not anchor in the vicinity of the pipeline E of

Bennet Shoal. Anchorage is also prohibited in an area SE of

Fort Point, as best seen on the chart.

2.68 Anchoring is also prohibited, as shown on the charts, between Elliott Point and Darwin Naval Base due to the existence

of submarine cable extending SW from the coast and in an area

SE of Fort Point.

2.68 Vessels should keep clear of the Naval Area encompassing

all the waters of West Arm and Middle Arm.

Directions

2.68 There is a deep-water route for LNG vessels which passes

between Lighted Buoy LNG 1 and Lighted Buoy LNG 2.

Caution

2.68 It has been reported (2001) that when using the deep water

approach to Darwin, the visual appearance of Lighted Buoy A

and Lighted Buoy B, situated E of Charles Point Patches, gives

the illusion that these buoys are incorrectly charted.

2.68 A fish haven has been established on the seaward side of the

causeway leading to Stokes Hill Wharf. A lighted buoy is situated close SE.

2.68 Mariners should note the existence of gas pipelines running

from Darwin to Sahul Banks in the Timor Sea and exercise appropriate caution. 

Charles Point to Cape Hay

2.69 The coast and waters between Charles Point, the W

entrance point of Port Darwin, and Pelican Islet (14°46'S.,

128°47'E.), about 183 miles SW, have not been thoroughly examined and should be given a wide berth at night or during

poor visibility. Vessels running this coast under these conditions are advised to stay in depths of 37m or more until making

an approach to port.

2.69 Inshore of Lorna Shoal (12°21'S., 130°19'E.), previously

described in paragraph 2.61, there are numerous scattered

shoals and reefs, some of which dry up to 6m. Jones Bank and

Bass Reef, both of which dry up to 0.6m, lie about 8 miles inshore of the outer part of Lorna Shoal and are surrounded by

foul ground.

2.69 Fish Reef (12°26'S., 130°26'E.), a coral reef which dries

2.1m, lies about 3 miles NE of Jones Bank and is marked on its

W end by a light shown from a concrete tower.

2.69 Loee Patches, with a least depth of 4.9m, lies 23 miles WSW

of Charles Point.

2.69 Bynoe Harbor (12°39'S., 130°32'E.) and Port Patterson, two

inlets on the W side of the Cox Peninsula, are generally only

used by small craft and fishing vessels with local knowledge of

the area. They are both entered at the N from a position about 7

miles W of Charles Point by either of two channels, which are

divided at their entrance by Middle Reef (12°28'S., 130°31'E.),

a coral patch which dries 6.1m. Thrings Channel, to the E, has

a limiting depth of 3.3m, but West Channel, entered between

Middle Reef and Fish Reef to the NW, carries a least depth of

7.6m.

2.69 The best time to enter is at LW when the reefs are visible and

the channel can generally be seen; at HW, discoloration usually

obscures even the shallowest patches and makes navigation difficult. There is a patch of bright yellow sand on the S end of

Middle Reef which forms a good mark.

2.70 Port Patterson (12°37'S., 130°28'E.), with depths of

5.5 to 11m in its entrance, is divided by a drying sand bar

through its center. An extensive reef, on which are located the

Gross Islets, the Bare Sand Islets, and Quail Islet, is located on

the W side of the port. The latter islet, which is located about

18 miles SW of Charles Point, is 9m high and is the outermost
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 45

Pub. 175

on the above reef. Quail Islet extends for 4 miles SSW before

branching into E and W arms. The island is a former bombing

range and is now closed due to the presence of unexploded ordnance. The Gross Islets are low and covered with mangroves.

2.70 Bynoe Harbor, separated from Port Patterson by Indian Island, can be entered by Thrings Channel or West Channel, although the latter is preferred. The harbor is entered between

West Point, the N extremity of Indian Island, and East Point,

about 2.5 miles E, in a depth of about 19m, and is deep

throughout the fairway, except for a 7.6m patch E of the S end

of Indian Island. Numerous shoals fringe the edge of the channel and local knowledge is recommended.

2.70 Native Point (12°43'S., 130°21'E.), located 25 miles SW of

Charles Point, is fringed with a drying reef and faced with red

cliffs, about 10m high, which extend about 5 miles to the S.

The head of Fog Bay, entered between Native Point and Point

Jenny, 15 miles SW, is low with dense mangroves and tidal

swamps fronted by drying sandflats extending up to 3 miles

offshore.

2.70 Point Blaze (12°56'S., 130°08'E.), located 3.5 miles SW of

Point Jenny, is fringed by drying reef which extends along its

shores for about 3 miles to the NE and S. Blaze Reef, which

dries 0.6m, lies 2.5 miles NNW of Point Jenny, and Bowra

Shoals, with a depth of 3m over them, lie 1.5 miles N of the

reef. Shoal water, with depths of 5.8 to 7.9m over it, extends

about 4.5 miles NW of Bowra Shoals, and caution is required

on entering Fog Bay.

2.70 Anchorage.—Fog Bay affords reasonable shelter during the

Southeast Monsoon and has good holding ground of sand and

mud. Vessels can anchor as convenient, but the bay should only

be entered from the NW to avoid the dangers which extend up

to 8 miles NNW of Point Jenny.

2.71 The coast between Point Blaze and Channel Point, 14

miles S, is low and considerably wooded. Foul ground extends

up to 2 miles offshore here and the area should be approached

with caution.

2.71 The Peron Islands, lying up to 5.5 miles W of Channel

Point (13°10'S., 130°07'E.), are two low sandy islands surrounded by drying reef and sand flats, some of which uncover

to a height of 6.1m. The NW and largest of the islands has a

grassy peak nearly 30m high on its N end; the rest of the islands are fringed with mangroves. There is a landing place for

boats, available at any stage of the tide, on the SW shore of the

S island. Shoal water extends up to 3.5 miles N and W of the N

island, and the two islands are connected by drying reef.

2.71 Anson Bay (13°20'S., 130°03'E.), entered between Channel

Point and Cape Ford, about 21 miles SW, has low, mangrovecovered shores along its NE side from the former point to the

mouth of the Daly River, at its head. Red Cliff rises 17.5 miles

S of Channel Point to a height of 15m, with the land behind it

about 37m high.

2.71 Anchorage.—During the Southeast Monsoon, there is good

anchorage, for vessels with local knowledge, about 5 miles

NNW of Red Cliff, in a depth of 9.1m, mud.

2.71 There also appears to be anchorage available during good

weather, in depths of 9 to 11m, about 2 miles S of the S extremity of South Peron Island.

2.71 Caution.—Bateman Shoal, with a least depth of 3.3m, lies

on the N side of the approach to Anson Baylies, about 5.5

miles WSW of the SW extremity of North Peron Island; a

shoal patch, with a depth of about 5.5m, lies about 3 miles to

the N of this shoal. Other shoals, with depths of 3.6m and 3m,

lie 2.25 miles N and 1.75 miles WNW of Cape Ford.

2.71 Wade Rock, with a depth of 0.6m, lies on the 5.5m curve

about 2 miles NW of Red Cliff. Pelican Rock, awash at LW,

and the position of which is approximate, lies about 3 miles

WSW of the same cliff.

2.71 A shoal flat, which dries up to 0.9m, extends up to 5 miles

off the entrance to the Daly River; it has been reported to be

shoaling extensively and caution is required.

2.71 The Daly River (13°19'S., 130°17'E.) has been reported

available at HW to vessels with drafts of 1.8 to 2.4m and possessing local knowledge. The bar at the entrance has been reported to be shoaling and lesser depths than charted may exist.

During the wet season the river becomes a torrent and is not

navigable.

2.72 Cape Ford (13°26'S., 129°52'E.) is a low narrow

promontory from which a reef extends about 1 mile N. The

coast to Cape Scott, about 5.5 miles SW, has a barren appearance, consisting of high bare sandhills fronted by reefs and foul

ground. Cape Scott is a low, sandy spit terminating in a conspicuous rounded clump of mangroves; a rocky ledge extends 2

miles N from the cape and a shoal, with a depth of 0.9m, is

charted about 1 mile farther NE; another ledge extends about 2

miles SW from the cape.

2.72 About 6 miles S of Cape Scott, the coast becomes higher and

is thickly wooded to the edge of reddish cliffs extending to

Dooley Point, about 7 miles farther S. This coast is fronted by

shoal water to a distance of about 1.5 miles; a 1.8m patch lies

about 5 miles NW of Dooley Point.

2.72 Cape Dombey (13°54'S., 129°42'E.) is located 24 miles S of

Cape Scott and is fringed by reefs to the N and SE. The Barthelemy Hills rise about 7 miles E of the cape and attain a maximum elevation of 103m. A reef, about 200m in diameter and

which dries 1.8m, lies about 3.5 miles NNW of Cape Dombey,

and a rocky patch, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 1.5 miles

SW of the reef.

2.72 Hyland Bay (13°58'S., 129°39'E.), entered between Cape

Dombey and Tree Point about 10 miles SW, is shoal, but there

are depths of 5.5 to 7.3m midway between the entrance points.

White Cliff Point, with a line of cliffs extending about 2 miles

to its SW, lies at the head of the bay; the shores along the rest

of the bay are low. Reefs and foul ground, some of which dry

up to 3.7m, lie up to 2.5 miles NW of Tree Point.

2.72 Caution.—Banks Shoal, with a least depth of 1.8m, lies centered about 7 miles NNW of Tree Point (14°01'S., 129°36'E.);

depths of 3.7 to 5.5m extend up to 3 miles to the N and S.

2.72 A depth of 1.8m lies about 11.5 miles N of Tree Point and

several patches, with depths of 8.5 to 11m, lie up to 4 miles S.

This area has not been closely examined and additional dangers may exist.

2.73 Port Keats (14°04'S., 129°33'E.), entered between

Tree Point and the NE extremity of Dorcherty Island, extends

approximately 8 miles S, where it divides into two arms, the E

of which leads to a mission station at the foot of Mount Goodwin, 92m high. Although the entrance to this inlet has depths of

5.5 to 9.1m, the channel within is shoal and narrowed by reefs,
46 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

and local knowledge is required.

2.73 Vessels may anchor about 3 miles W of Tree Point, in a

depth of 10m. Small vessels may anchor about 3 miles SW of

the point, in depths of 4 to 8.8m.

2.73 Cape Hay (14°03'S., 129°29'E.), the NW extremity of

Dorcherty Island, is low and surrounded by foul ground. Shoal

water, with a least depth of 1.5m, extends up to 3 miles NNW

of the cape, but the waters up to 8 miles SW are unsurveyed.

Howland Shoals, which dry 0.6m, lie from 3.5 to 7.5 miles

NNW of Cape Hay. Drying rocks lie up to 4 miles W of the N

extremity of Howland Shoals; depths of less than 11m extend

up to 6.5 miles W and 8.5 miles NW of Howland Shoals.

2.73 Caution.—Emu Reefs, the exact extent of which are unknown and which dry up to 4.6m, lie centered about 11.5 miles

N of Cape Hay; strong tide rips are formed between Emu Reef

and the N end of Howland Shoals.

2.73 A rocky patch, which dries up to 1.2m and on which the sea

breaks heavily, lies 18.5 miles NNW of Cape Hay. This patch

is steep-to, especially on its E and W sides, where depths of 18

to 22m lie within 1 mile of it.

Joseph Bonaparte Gulf

2.74 Joseph Bonaparte Gulf consists of a large coastal

bight between Port Darwin and Cape Londonderry, about 240

miles SW. At its head is the Victoria River to the E and Cambridge Gulf to the W, with the latter leading to Hare Channel

and the port of Wyndham. Cambridge Gulf provides good anchorage to medium-sized vessels in most weather. Wyndham

can accommodate ocean-going vessels of moderate size.

Aspect.—Joseph Bonaparte Gulf is entered between Cape

Hay and Cape Rulhieres (13°56'S., 127°22'E.), about 125

miles W. The head of the gulf is divided into the estuary of the

Victoria River on the E side, and Cambridge Gulf on the W

side, but with the exception of the latter and its approaches, has

not been thoroughly surveyed. 

2.74 The coast between Cape Hay and Pierce Point, 24 miles

SSW, is low and mostly wooded, with sandhills and cliffs in

several places. Flat rocky shelves extend seaward from the

cliffs in some places; elsewhere the foreshore is sand or mangrove clumps.

2.74 A bank, with less than 10m, lies 6 to 7 miles offshore extending up to 12 miles S from Howland Shoals. It has not been

completely surveyed and undiscovered dangers may exist off

this stretch of coast. Vessels approaching Cambridge Gulf are

recommended to remain in depths of 37m or more until within

about 15 miles of the outer entrance, and not to proceed into

any other part of Joseph Bonaparte Gulf without local knowledge.

2.74 In 1980, safe anchorage was found, in 15m, about 2.5 miles

SW of Cape Hay, but caution is necessary in approaching this

anchorage because of the imperfectly surveyed bank mentioned above.

2.74 Caution.—The waters of the S and SE parts of Joseph

Bonaparte Gulf are almost turbid, as sediment is held in suspension by the strong tidal currents and dangers may not be apparent. In some instances overfalls and eddies indicate deep

holes and trenches as well as shoals.

2.75 Pearce Point (14°26'S., 129°21'E.), the N entrance

point of the estuary of the Fitzmaurice River and the Victoria

River, is a rocky promontory with wooded sandhills, 7m high,

behind it. A level wooded cliff, 26m high, is located 0.5 mile E

at the head of Treachery Bay. Providence Hill, 72m high, rises

4.5 miles E of the point, with increasing elevations within.

2.75 Rocky shelves extend about 300m offshore from Pearce

Point and there is a 3.2m shoal 1.5 miles SW of it.

2.75 Shoals, with depths of 14.8m and 12.2m, lie 9 miles NNW

and 5.5 miles WNW, respectively, of Pearce Point.

2.75 The area W of Pearce Point consists of broken ground. In

this vicinity overfalls dangerous to small craft have been observed up to 6 miles offshore. A shoal, with a least depth of

11m, lies 9 miles W of the point.

2.76 Mermaid Bank (14°30'S., 129°20'E.), located 4

miles SSW of Pearce Point, has a depth of 3.3m at its N end,

4.3m at its S end, and dries 0.3m in its central part.

2.76 Detached shoals of 8.2m and 6.7m lie about 7 miles SE of

the shallowest part of Mermaid Bank. These shoals signal the

start of finger-like drying banks, lying in a NW-SE direction,

which extend seaward from the mouths of the Fitzmaurice River and the Victoria River. An 11m shoal lies 5 miles W of the S

end of Mermaid Bank.

2.76 There are shoals between Mermaid Bank and Treachery Bay,

the positions and depths of which can best be seen on the chart.

2.76 New Moon Inlet (14°36'S., 129°37'E.), entered 15 miles SE

of Pearce Point, extends E for about 14 miles, where it divides

into two branches at the foot of Table Hill, a 195m high flattopped peak. The inlet is shoal and filled with sand banks

which just dry. The surrounding land is very low and somewhat

swampy.

2.76 Keys Inlet (14°46'S., 129°37'E.), entered about 17 miles

SSE of Pearce Point, forms the approach to the Fitzmaurice

River, but is filled with shoals and sand banks requiring local

knowledge to navigate. The surrounding land is very low and

sometimes covers at high water springs; there are no leading

marks or aids to navigation, but the channel to the river is said

to carry a depth of 3.7m for about 30 miles from the coast.

2.76 Quoin Island (14°51'S., 129°33'E.) is low and covers at

highest spring tides. It consists of large areas of dried mud flats

and mangrove swamps. There is a distinctive clump of trees at

its N end. A bank, which dries, lies 6 miles WNW of the N end

of Quoin Island. Clump Island lies about 1 mile NE of the island’s E side.

2.77 The Victoria River (15°00'S., 129°33'E.), believed to

be the longest river in northern Australia, rises about 300 miles

inland, but has only been traced for about 150 miles. It is entered via Queens Channel from a position about 16 miles S of

Pearce Point and can accommodate small vessels, possessing

local knowledge, with drafts to about 3.7m. Above Blunder

Bay (15°12'S., 129°44'E.), just within Entrance Island, the river becomes encumbered with shoals and sandbars which alter

annually and can only be navigated by light-draft vessels with

extensive knowledge of the channels.

2.77 Queens Channel (14°41'S., 129°21'E.), the inlet to the Victoria River, is entered between Quoin Island and the sand banks

E of Turtle Point, 17 miles W, and carries a depth of about

5.8m to within 7 miles of Entrance Island. The best time to enter is at LW, when the sandspit and banks NW and SW of
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 47

Pub. 175

Quoin Island can be seen, but great caution is necessary as

there are depths of only 1.8 to 3.3m off the entrance to the

channel. 

2.77 In 1981, it was recommended that the best approach through

Queens Channel was with River Peak bearing 137°. This leads

to a position 2 miles W of Quoin Island, where the extensive

sand banks, described above, will be encountered.

2.77 Tidal currents are strong, reaching 7 knots at springs, and the

river floods heavily during the rainy season.

2.77 Caution.—Navigation of the Victoria River and Queens

Channel is considered difficult and hazardous. There are no

aids to navigation, the tidal currents are strong even in the approaches, and the exact position of the outer bars and shoals is

doubtful. If it necessary to enter, vessels must exercise extreme

caution and have enough power to overcome the cross currents

in the channels.

2.78 Turtle Point (14°51'S., 129°14'E.) consists of low,

scattered sandhills fronted by mangrove flats. Shoals and foul

ground, with drying patches, extend 26 miles NW and nearly

12 miles NE of the point, the latter forming the SW edge of

Queens Channel. Much of the shore S and SE of Turtle Point is

intersected by creeks and small inlets, and is inundated during

high water springs and the wet season.

2.78 A large shoal inlet, mostly unexamined, extends about 22

miles S from the W side of Turtle Point. The entrance, which is

about 9 miles across, appears to be fronted by rocks and should

not be approached without extensive local knowledge.

2.78 Pelican Islet (14°46'S., 128°47'E.), 6m high, lies on the outer edge of a drying flat about 5 miles offshore and 26 miles W

of Turtle Point. About 3 miles N of the islet there are charted

depths of 11 to 12.8m, but the area has not been completely examined and several shallower depths, including a reef which

dries 4.3m, lie up to 20 miles offshore in this vicinity.

2.78 Rocky Islet (14°44'S., 128°38'E.), 30m high, lies close off

the coastal flats about 9 miles WNW of Pelican Islet. Patches,

with depths of less than 11m, lie up to 12 miles N of the islet

and shoal water extends W and NW to Medusa Banks.

2.78 The coast W of Rocky Islet is more hilly than that to the E

and gives a distinctive appearance to the shoreline that is useful

in making the entrance to Cambridge Gulf.

Cambridge Gulf

2.79 Cambridge Gulf (14°55'S., 128°13'E.) is located in the

SW part of Joseph Bonaparte Gulf and entered between Cape

Domett and Cape Dussejour, about 10 miles WNW. It is divided in

its entrance into two channels by Lacrosse Island (14°45'S.,

128°19'E.), which lies nearly midway between the capes. From

Lacrosse Island, the gulf extends 45 miles in a SSW direction to

Port Wyndham, and then in a WSW direction for 5 miles, where it

contracts to a width of only 0.25 mile through The Gut, a rocky

gorge 2 miles in length, which opens into a shallow lagoon.

2.79 The N limit of the port is a line joining Cape Dussejour and

the summit of the highest hill on Lacrosse Island.

2.79 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in the vicinity of Lacrosse Island reach a maximum of 4 knots at springs. Within

the narrow reaches of the channel, however, they can attain a

maximum rate of 6 knots and large vessels may have to adjust

their speed to negotiate the fairway near high water slack.

2.79 Depths—Limitations.—The preferred approach is W of Lacrosse Island, but the fairway through the greater part of the

gulf is deep. Hare Channel, about 33 miles above Lacrosse Island, has a least depth of 6.4m and is the controlling depth to

Wyndham; tides rise up to 7.3m, which allow deep-draft vessels to be taken in. Range lights have been established.

2.79 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels of

more than 150 tons gross register whose masters do not hold a

Pilotage Exemption Certificate. A master requiring a pilot

should notify the Harbor and Light Department at Fremantle of

the ETA 10 days in advance and the Harbormaster at Wyndham

48 hours and 24 hours in advance; the 48-hour message should

also include the vessel’s maximum draft.

2.79 The Sea Pilot Station is 4.7 miles S of Lacrosse Island Light

and the Wyndham Pilot Station is 6 miles NE of Black Cliff

Point; the master should state at which point the pilot should

embark. It is preferable that vessels should arrive at the pilot

boarding place at dawn, as entrance is only made in daylight.

There is a port radio station at Wyndham and the pilot launch is

equipped with VHF; the calling frequency is VHF channel 16,

while the working frequencies are VHF channels 6 and 12.

2.79 Regulations.—Vessels should maintain a listening watch on

VHF channel 16 at least 2 hours prior to boarding the pilot.

2.80 Cape Domett (14°49'S., 128°23'E.) is fronted by low

cliffs on its NW side and fringed by reefs terminating with its

SW extremity at Shark Rock, which dries 6.4m. Shakespeare

Hill, with a flat-topped rocky summit, 131m high, rises 3 miles

E of the cape and from a distance appears as an island. Cone

Hill, 72m high, rises about 0.75 mile E of the cape and when

aligned with the former hill, bearing 085.5°, forms a good

mark from the pilotage area.

2.80 Medusa Banks (14°30'S., 128°19'E.), with depths of less

than 5.5m, extends 20 miles NNW from the coast between

Rocky Islet and Cape Domett. These banks form the E side of

the approach to Cambridge Gulf and have isolated patches with

depths of only 0.9m, some near the outer extremity. 

2.80 Lacrosse Island (14°45'S., 128°19'E.) lies with White Stone

Point, its SE extremity, about 4 miles NW of Cape Domett; the

summit of the island, 141m high, rises near its SW end and

forms a good mark in the approach. The N coast of the island

consists of rugged sandstone cliffs, but the SE extremity is

composed of a low spit formed by boulders; the S side is fronted by extensive mud banks. 

2.80 Tucker Bank, awash at low water springs, is an oblong sandy

patch extending from 0.5 to 1.75 miles S of White Stone Point.

2.80 West Bluff, the NW extremity of Lacrosse Island, rises to a

height of 100m close within, and Bream Ledge, a rocky reef,

steep-to on its W side, extends about 0.35 mile to the NNW.

Shoal water extends 2.5 miles E of this ledge.

2.80 Lacrosse Island Light is shown from a white metal hut situated on a hill 0.25 mile ESE of West Bluff; a racon transmits

from the light. In 1985, a shoal, with a depth of 9m, was reported to lie 8.6 miles NNE of Lacrosse Island Light.

2.80 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in the lee of Lacrosse Island on either side.

2.80 Vessels waiting for the pilot can take anchorage, in depths of

16 to 18m, sand and shell, about 4 miles S of Lacrosse Island,

on the line of Cone Hill and Shakespeare Hill.

2.80 Directions.—Vessels should steer for the summit of La-
48 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

crosse Island on a heading of 170°. When 4 miles from the island, alter course to pass 1 mile off West Bluff, the NW

extremity of Lacrosse Island. When Lacrosse Island Light

bears 040°, alter course to 145° for the pilot boarding position,

situated about 3.5 miles S of Lacrosse Island, with Cone Hill

and Shakespeare Hill in range to the E. From the pilot boarding

position, vessels steer 225° for Black Cliff Point, which lies

about 1.25 miles W of Nicholls Point, the NW extremity of

Adolphus Island. Directions S of this point are continued in

paragraph 2.83.

2.81 Cape Dussejour (14°45'S., 128°13'E.), the W entrance point of Cambridge Gulf, is 43m high, with a low neck

of land within that causes the cape to appear as an island from

N. Three hills, from 122 to 161m high, rise between 2.5 and 4

miles WNW of the cape.

2.81 King Shoals, which form the W side of the approach to Cambridge Gulf, are three narrow sandy ridges nearly parallel to

each other and with drying patches and shoals of less than

1.8m scattered across their limits. They extend generally 15

miles NNW of Cape Dussejour, with narrow channels within,

which should not be attempted without extensive local knowledge.

2.81 Fathom Rock (14°43'S., 128°14'E.), 2m high, lies 2.5 miles

NNE of Cape Dussejour, and Entrance Shoal, with a least

depth of 4.9m, lies nearly 1 mile ENE of this rock. In 1966, an

8.2m shoal was reported 1.75 miles NNW of Fathom Rock.

Lory Rock, awash at low water springs, lies on a spit with

depths of less than 5.5m, which extends 0.25 mile E from Cape

Dussejour.

2.82 Vancouver Point (14°50'S., 128°12'E.), 5 miles SSW

of Cape Dussejour, terminates in a bluff from which cliff extends 1.5 miles along the shore to the NW. Two peaks, each

about 100m high, are located about 1 mile NW of the point and

can easily be identified from the NE. Myrmidon Ledge, a drying reef, extends 0.4 mile SE of Vancouver Point and a 4.6m

patch lies about 0.75 mile NE of the point.

2.82 Cowan Patches (14°50'S., 128°16'E.), with a least depth of

3.4m and with shoal depths extending 2.5 miles SW, lies centered about 4.5 miles E of Vancouver Point. A depth of 9.6m

lies midway between Cowan Patches and Lacrosse Island.

2.82 Guthrie Banks (14°55'S., 128°10'E.), which dry up to 3m,

extend approximately 8 miles S of Vancouver Point and up to 4

miles offshore. These banks consist mostly of sand and nearly

fill the W part of the gulf S of the above point; the NE extremity of Guthrie Banks lies only 1.25 miles W of the SW limit of

Cowan Patches.

2.82 East Banks (14°56'S., 128°16'E.), which dry up to 3.6m, lie

on the E side of the fairway. about 7 miles SE of Vancouver

Point. The shore within these banks and between them and

Cape Domett consists of a series of poorly-defined inlets

formed by low mangrove islands and should not be approached

without local knowledge.

2.82 Adolphus Island, a hilly island with a maximum elevation of

234m, lies with Nicholls Point (15°03'S., 128°07'E.), its NW

extremity, about 20 miles SSW of Lacrosse Island. The shores

of the island are low and mangrove-covered, with the exception

of the above point, and are about 24m high, with Webster Bluff

and Steep Head, two cliffy projections, on the W side.

2.82 Australind Bank extends about 4 miles NE of Nicholls Point

and consists of drying sand banks. Small vessels can take anchorage off the W side of this bank, about 2.5 miles NNE of

Nicholls Point, where they will be clear of the main tidal currents, in depths of 9.1 to 11m.

2.83 Black Cliff Point (15°02'S., 128°06'E.), conspicuous

from NE, lies 1.25 miles W of Nicholls Point and is a rocky

bluff surmounted by a grassy slope 19m high. Pilots steer for

Black Cliff Point, bearing 225°, from the boarding ground S of

Lacrosse Island; a 144m high hill lies about 1 mile SW of the

point and forms a range on this bearing; caution is necessary as

there are numerous other hills in this area.

2.83 Directions.—The channel S of Nicholls Point is difficult and

intricate and should not be attempted by vessels without a pilot.

The tidal currents run up to 6 knots at springs and cross the

track in places. The fairway has a least depth of 6.4m and a

minimum width of about 0.2 mile; it should not be run by large

vessels below the level of half tide.

2.83 Vessels approaching Black Cliff Point on a course of 225° alter their heading for Agnew Point when it comes in line, bearing 203°, with Flat Top Hill, 266m high, about 5 miles SSW.

When Saville Islet, 1 mile N of Dundas Point (15°10'S.,

128°06'E.), the N extremity of Fairfax Island, bears 186°, steer

for it to maintain a mid-channel course until off Steep Head

(16°18'S., 123°31'E.), the W extremity of Adolphus Island.

2.83 From Steep Head, vessels steer to pass E of Saville Islet and

then in mid-channel between Fairfax Island and Kent Islet,

about 0.5 mile NE. The channel then leads E of Fairfax Island

and E of Russell Island, about 2 miles S, to a position about

0.35 mile E of Pender Point Light (15°17'S., 128°06'E.). A

shoal depth of 4.1m was reported (1990) to lie about 0.4 mile S

of the S end of Fairfax Island.

2.84 Hare Channel (15°19'S., 128°04'E.) leads SW from

Pender Point between the mainland and Middle Ground, a

bank of sand marked by beacons, which nearly blocks Main

Channel to the E. At Laffan Point, 2.5 miles SW of Pender

Point, the channel turns SSE for Wyndham. The least depth in

Hare Channel, in the approach to Wyndham, is 6.4m.

2.84 Range beacons mark both reaches of Hare Channel. The first

set, on Laffan Point, consists of two range marks and a channel

beacon, all in line bearing 228°; the second set, N of Laffan

Point, consists of two white columns in line bearing 336.75°,

and also two white columns, on the E shore N of Wyndham, in

line bearing 156.75°. On approaching the S part of the second

range, vessels must veer to the E and pass between two beacons to avoid the tongue extending NNE from Myrmidon

Bank. Vessels may then shape a course for the wharf, giving

Stony Point a wide berth.

2.84 Anchorage can be taken SW of Steep Head, in mid-channel

depths of 22 to 31m, by ocean-going vessels waiting for the

tide or slack water. Tidal currents run about 3 knots at springs

in this area.

Wyndham (15°27'S., 128°06'E.)

World Port Index No. 54660

2.85 Wyndham is the principal port in the Kimberly Dis-
Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 49

Pub. 175

trict for the export of cattle and frozen meat. A large meat plant

has been erected in the town and is well-equipped with engineering and other facilities. The wharf is specially equipped

with facilities for the loading of frozen cargoes and rail facilities lead directly from the meat plant to the berths.

2.85 Winds—Weather.—From April to September, the Southeast Monsoon prevails and brings a considerable amount of

haze to the area. Fresh SE winds blow in the outer part of Cambridge Gulf at this time, but the port area is protected by the

hills to the E.

2.85 In September, the weather is hot and misty, and continues so

until the rains of the Northwest Monsoon set in, usually in October or November. Flies and mosquitoes are prevalent.

2.85 Tides—Currents.—At Wyndham, mean spring tides rise

7.4m, and mean neaps rise 5.6m. At Lacrosse Island, the tidal

rise is about 0.8m less.

2.85 The flood sets on to both ends of the wharf at a slight angle

with a rate of 2.5 to 3 knots. The ebb currents set off the wharf

at a slight angle with a rate of 3 to 4 knots.

2.85 Currents in the approach to Wyndham are included with the

descriptions under Cambridge Gulf in paragraph 2.79.

2.85 Depths—Limitations.—The least depth in Hare Channel in

the approach to Wyndham is 6.4m.

2.85 Wyndham Wharf (Meat Works Wharf) is 482m long. There

are two berths, with an alongside depth of 9.1m; the bottom is

composed of mud and silt and is subject to silting. The wharf is

of steel structure and flush-decked, allowing road and rail traffic.

2.85 An unmarked wreck, with a least depth of 3.6m, lies off the

NW end of the wharf.

2.85 A shoal, with a depth of 3.3m, lies about 1 mile S of the SW

end of the Meat Works Wharf.

2.85 Vessels up to 190m in length, with a maximum allowable

draft of 8.8m, can be taken to Wyndham on most high waters;

vessels up to 26,000 tons, with a length of 210m, have been accommodated.

2.85 Vessels are taken in and out during daylight hours only.

2.85 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots board 4.7 miles S

of Lacrosse Island Light. See Cambridge Gulf, paragraph 2.79,

for additional information.

2.85 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken about 0.25 mile

WSW of Wyndham Wharf, in a depth of 9.1m, mud.

2.85 Vessels subject to quarantine must anchor on a line S of

Wyndham Wharf and N of Anthon Landing, about 0.5 mile S.

Caution is necessary to avoid the 3.3m patch about 0.5 mile S

of the latter wharf.

2.85 Directions.—The port is marked by a leading line bearing

045.2°.

Joseph Bonaparte Gulf (continued)

2.86 The coast from Cape Dussejour (14°45'S.,

128°13'E.) trends NW for 70 miles to Cape Rulhieres and is

mostly rocky with a few sandy beaches. It is open, exposed,

and fronted by rocks, which in places extend about 2 miles offshore. Large areas of sand waves exist between King Shoals

and Cape Rulhieres, extending to a distance of about 12 miles

offshore. The largest area of these sandwaves lies to seaward of

Rocky Islet and in 1975 carried a least depth of 8.8m.

2.86 Deep-draft vessels should exercise caution within this area

and are advised to remain to seaward of the 50m depth contour

when passing between Medusa Banks and Lesueur Islet.

2.86 The sandwave areas may be clearly identified by day when

the tidal current transports bottom sediment and causes brown

discoloration.

2.86 Obstruction Hill (14°40'S., 128°08'E.), 184m high, rises

close to the coast about 7.5 miles NW of Cape Dussejour and is

one of the highest hills in this area. Double Hammock, consisting of two peaks, 140 and 138m high, lies 2 miles SE of Obstruction Hill and Hunch Hill, about 175m high, lies about 3.5

miles SSW of Double Hammock.

2.86 Caution.—Vessels are advised against basing navigation

wholly upon these hills, as there are numerous peaks in this area and identification may be difficult under some conditions.

Copyright 2000 Northern Territory Government

Wyndham Port Facility

Copyright 2000 Northern Territory Government

Wyndham Wharf
50 Sector 2. North Coast of Australia—Cape Wessel to Cape Londonderry 

Pub. 175

2.87 Thurburn Bluff (14°35'S., 128°03'E.), about 30m

high, rises 7 miles NW of Obstruction Hill; the coast is fringed

by cliffs for 3 miles SE and 2 miles NW. About 3.5 miles NW

of Thurburn Bluff, there is a bay 2.25 miles wide, which dries

up to 1.25 miles from its head. Above-water and submerged

rocks extend up to 0.2 mile off the SE entrance point.

2.87 Buckle Head (14°26'S., 127°53'E.), about 13.5 miles NW of

Thurburn Bluff, rises to a height of 76m, with a shoal bay on

each side. Reveley Island, 63m high, lies close offshore, 5 miles

NW of Buckle Head. Two barren islets, from 9 to 23m high, lie

about 1.75 miles E of the island; they are both surrounded by a

reef.

2.87 Mount Casuarina (14°24'S., 127°42'E.), 210m high and

flat-topped, rises 7 miles W of Reveley Island. There are some

conspicuous sand hills, 92m high near Cape St. Lambert, about

4 miles NW of the same island.

2.87 Cape Rulhieres (13°56'S., 127°22'E.), the W entrance point

of Joseph Bonaparte Gulf, has a white cliffy appearance and

several projecting points from which rocky ledges extend up to

1.5 miles. The coast SE of the cape, for about 24 miles, has not

been closely examined, but several rocky islets and dangers are

known to exist along this stretch.

2.87 There is a rocky bay S of Cape Bernier, about 9 miles SE of

Cape Rulhieres, which affords shelter to boats, but there are

several dangerous patches within it.

Cape Rulhieres to Cape Londonderry

2.88 Lesueur Islet (13°50'S., 127°16'E.), about 6 miles

NW of Cape Rulhieres, is low, sandy, and surrounded by coral

reefs which extends up to 1.5 miles from the NE and W sides.

There appears to be a passage between the island and the mainland, but in 1983, the islet was reported to lie 1.4 miles NW of

its charted position and caution is advised. A light is shown

from a metal framework tower on the NW extremity of the islet.

2.88 The coast trends W from Cape Rulhieres for about 10 miles

to a high islet lying close offshore. The shore is much indented

with shoal bays, which have not been closely examined, and

reefs, which dry in patches, extend about 3 miles NE of the

high islet. A sandy bay lies SW of Cape Rulhieres and the King

George River empties at its head; this bay has been visited by

small craft.

2.88 Caution.—Depths of 5.8m and 9.4m were reported (1983)

to lie 1.5 miles SSW and 1.25 miles W, respectively, of Cape

Rulhieres.

2.88 The coast from the above high islet extends about 16 miles

NW to Cape Londonderry and is much indented by small bays

and coves, the entrance points of which are fringed by reefs.

One of these bays, about 8 miles SE of Cape Londonderry,

forms a boat haven with sandy shores. The headland 6.5 miles

SE of the cape is marked by red cliffs.
51

Pub. 175

3. 

Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape 

Leveque

3.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION
53

Pub. 175

SECTOR 3 

NORTHWEST COAST OF AUSTRALIA—CAPE LONDONDERRY TO CAPE LEVEQUE

3.0 Plan.—This sector describes the NW coast of Australia from

Cape Londonderry SW to Cape Leveque, and includes the offshore islands and dangers relative to their adjacent coastline.

The outlying dangers, from Sahul Bank to Scott Reef, are described at the beginning of the sector after General Remarks.

General Remarks

3.1 Winds—Weather.—The Northwest Monsoon becomes well-established over the area described in the sector by

early in January, bringing clouds, rain and thunderstorms.

Tropical depressions frequently occur during the period from

December to April and vessels should be prepared for them.

3.1 The Southeast Monsoon is accompanied by fine weather,

usually from May to September, but may reach force 5 to 7

over the open sea. A full description of the monsoon seasons is

contained paragraph 1.1.

3.1 Tropical storms, known as “Willy Willies,” in which the

wind may reach hurricane velocity, affect the coastline during

the summer season. A full description is contained in paragraph 2.1.

3.1 Tides—Currents.—Because of the configuration of the

coastal area between Cape Londonderry and Cape Leveque,

and the restricting nature of the Timor Sea, the Indian Ocean

tidal waves produces very large tides along this section of the

Australian coast. Mean spring rises, as much as 10m, occur in

some of the bays and sounds, although the average rises appear

to be between 6 and 7m. Under such conditions, large apparent

changes in hydrography and topography occur and caution is

required.

3.1 The offshore currents in the region are highly variable. For

further information, see paragraph 1.1.

3.1 Aspect.—With the exception of King Sound and Yampi

Sound, the bays, gulfs, and sounds included in this sector contain only anchorages for vessels with local knowledge. The numerous off-lying dangers, and the limited number of

navigational aids throughout this area, make the approach to

the coast difficult for large vessels, even in daylight.

3.1 Yampi Sound (16°08'S., 123°38'E.), described in paragraph

3.75, contains facilities for loading ore, the berth being situated

on the S side of Cockatoo Island. The ore piers can accomodate

vessels up to 160,000 dwt, but no other facilities are available.

3.1 King Sound (16°25'S., 123°20'E.), described in paragraph

3.94, contains the port of Derby, situated on the E side of the

sound near its head. The harbor dries at low water, but tides up

to 10m allow moderate size vessels to dock, where they then

lay over on the soft mud bottom until the next high water.

Caution.—The coast between Cape Londonderry and Hall

Point, about 190 miles SW, is very indented and should be approached with caution because of the numerous off-lying islets,

rocks, and reefs, as well as the strength of the tidal currents. In

addition, certain portions of this coast have not been properly

surveyed and some areas lie unsurveyed or only partly examined, requiring that when varying from the recommended

tracks, the charts and sailing directions should be used with

caution.

3.1 Oil exploration rigs and production platforms may be encountered off the NW coast of Australia and within the Timor

Sea. 

Sahul Banks—Outlying Islands and Dangers

3.2 The Sahul Banks consist of numerous shoals and

banks of sand and coral rock extending ENE from the vicinity

of position 12°45'S, 123°30'E to position 10°05'S, 127°25'E; so

far as is known the depths over these shoals and banks range

from 5 to 29.5m. The shoaled area extends farther ENE, to

Evans Shoal (9°55'S., 129°33'E.), with least depths ranging

from 4 to 8.4m. The banks rise abruptly from the sea bed in positions generally near to the charted 200m curve, which runs

approximately parallel to the S coast of Timor, and at an average distance of about 80 miles. The northwesternmost known

shoal has a depth of 29.5m, coral, and lies 70 miles SE of

Tandjung Oisana, the SW extremity of Timor. The bottom near

these banks is generally coarse sand and broken shells, with

white sand farther off. When clear of the banks, the bottom

consists of green muddy sand. No breakers have been seen on

the Sahul Banks, although it was stated to be dangerous in

places.

3.2 The Sahul Banks and the area in their vicinity has only been

partially surveyed and vessels navigating in the neighborhood

should proceed with caution. A recommended track (122°-

302°) through North Sahul Passage (10°10'S., 126°50'E.) is

indicated on the charts for passing NE of Sahul Banks.

3.2 Bayu-Undan Gas Field (11°04'S., 126°39'E.), is situated in

the central Timor Sea about 270 miles NW of Darwin, Australia and about 135 miles S of Suai in East Timor. The field consists of a lighted production platform, from which a racon is

transmitted, and an FSO, which lies 2 miles WNW. Mooring

buoys are also present. The field stands in 80m of water. Production began in late 2003 and is expected to have a life of 25

years.

3.2 An Operational Restricted Zone, with a radius of 5 miles, is

centered on the platform. Vessels must remain outside of this

zone. 

3.2 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels. Vessels should send

their ETA to the terminal 72 hours, 48 hours, 24 hours, and 12

hours prior to arrival. Contact can be made with the terminal by

VHF for pilot boarding information when within the 5-mile

zone. The pilot normally boards approximately 2 miles N and

W of the terminal. 

3.2 Elang Terminal (Kakatua) (10°52'S., 126°34'E.), consisting

of a LANBY, is situated within an area of oil wells and submerged pipelines that is best seen on the chart. The terminal

stands in 90m of water. An anchorage area lies 12.5 miles NE

of the LANBY. A cautionary area has been established and is

centered in this location.

3.2 Laminaria and Corallina Fields (10°37'S., 126°00'E.), are
54 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

situated in a remote area of the Timor Sea, approximately 300

miles WNW of Darwin and 85 miles S of Timor. The terminal

consists of an SPM lying about 11.5 miles WNW of Elang Terminal, is situated within an area of oil wells and submarine

pipelines that is best seen on the chart. The Northern Endeavor Marine Terminal (10°38'S., 126°59'E.), a FPSO, is permanently moored between the two fields. A cautionary area has

been established and is centered in this location. 

3.2 Pilotage.—The pilot boards 3 miles N in position 10°34'S,

125°59'E.

3.2 Caution.—Between longitudes 125°05'E and 127°21'E, vessels not registered to the Republic of Indonesia are prohibited

from entering waters within 12 miles of the S coast of Timor.

3.3 Dillon Shoal (11°00'S., 125°35'E.) has a depth of

13.1m and lies 17 miles SSW of Karmt Shoal. Between Dillon

Shoal and Barton Shoal, 26.5 miles SW, there are several

shoals and banks with depths of 18.3m or less; Barton Shoal

has a least depth of 13.7m.

3.3 In 1936, a depth of 25.5m was reported about 75 miles ENE

of Dillon Shoal; its position is approximate.

3.3 Other shoal areas, best seen on the chart, lie between Barton

Shoal and Mangola Shoal (11°40'S., 125°07'E.), which has a

least known depth of 9m and lies about 22 miles SW of Barton

Shoal. 

3.3 Pee Shoal (11°45'S., 124°50'E.), with a least known depth of

10.3m, lies 14.5 miles SW of Mangola Shoal. A number of other banks in the vicinity are best seen on the chart.

3.3 Fantome Bank (11°38'S., 123°57'E.) has a least known

depth of 7.1m; a depth of 7.3m was reported 6.5 miles SSE of

the charted position of Fantome Bank and an 18m patch lies 6

miles NE of the same position.

3.3 Vee Shoal (11°50'S., 123°49'E.) has a least known depth of

13.4m and lies 14 miles SW of Fantome Shoal. A number of

banks, with depths of 12.5 to 30.5m, lie about 20 miles between the bearings W and NNW from Vee Shoal; these banks

have not been thoroughly examined.

3.4 Hibernia Reef (11°59'S., 123°21'E.), reported to lie

1.6 miles NW, is composed of coral and dries, with a drying

sand bank near its E extremity. Extensive banks, with unexamined depths as shoal as 12.8m, lie between 5 and 30 miles N

and NNE of Hibernia Reef.

3.4 Ashmore Reef (12°15'S., 123°03'E.), composed of coral and

sand, with four low islets on it, and also several sandbanks

which dry about 2.1m, lies 19 miles SW of Hibernia Reef.

3.4 Fresh water has been used from wells on all the islets, but in

1984 it was reported that all the wells were contaminated.

3.4 East Islet and Middle Islet are each 3m high, sandy and covered with grass; the top of Middle Islet is depressed. There is a

conspicuous tree on Middle Islet. West Islet is about 2.5m high.

3.4 There are depths of 7.9m 1.75 miles NNE and 25.5m 13.75

miles NE of West Islet. Marlin Bank, located 2.5 miles NNE of

West Islet and extending 3 miles NE, has a least depth of 9.5m.

3.4 The S side of Ashmore Reef is an unbroken ridge of coral

marked by heavy breakers, while its N edge is broken with four

passages to the lagoons, of which only the W one was examined.

3.4 The W opening lies 2 miles NE of West Islet and leads into a

lagoon where there are numerous detached reefs and coral

heads, many of which have charted depths of less than 2m, in

general depths of 10 to 25m. A visitors’ mooring is situated in

the lagoon.

3.4 A 9.1m shoal lies 6 miles N of East Islet; a 10.6m shoal lies

8 miles NE of East Islet.

3.4 Anchorage can be found anywhere along the N side of Ashmore Reef, in depths of 31 to 46m at a distance of about 1 mile.

3.4 Tidal currents in the vicinity of Ashmore Reef set E on the

flood and W on the ebb. In the vicinity of the entrance to the W

lagoon, the current is reported to set SE on the flood and NW

on the ebb. The effect is fairly local and rates of up to 4 knots

are evident at springs.

3.5 Johnson Bank (12°23'S., 123°17'E.), 12.5 miles SE

of East Islet, has not been closely examined. It has a least

known depth of 8.5m, and a 10.7m patch lies 4.5 miles ESE of

it; both are located on an extensive bank with depths of 20m

and less.

3.5 Woodbine Bank (12°24'S., 123°30'E.), of sand and coral,

with a least depth of 11.5m, lies 13 miles E of Johnson Bank.

The 200m curve SW and SE of Woodbine Bank is marked by

tide rips.

3.5 Cartier Islet (12°32'S., 123°33'E.), 1m high, lies 29 miles

SE of Ashmore Reef and is formed of sand and loose coral; the

surrounding reef dries in places and is steep-to.

The islet is now the site of the Cartier Island Marine Reserve.

Access to the reserve is prohibited. Legal action will not be

taken against masters or crewmembers of vessels forced to

shelter in the reserve for safety reasons. No collecting or fishing is permitted in the reserve.

Caution.—Cartier Islet is a former Military Exercise Area

and may contain unexploded ordnance.

3.6 Pasco Passage (12°28'S., 123°32'E.), with depths of

over 183m, lies N of Cartier Islet, at the S end of the charted

183m shelf extending S from Woodbine Bank.

3.6 In moderate weather the sea does not break on Cartier Islet

Reef from 2 hours before to 2 hours after high water. As the

current attains a rate of 1 knot, and its direction is uncertain, it

presents a considerable danger to vessels, especially as soundings give no warning. A tide rip exists within the passage at position 12°25'S, 123°45'E.

3.6 The bottom between a distance of 10 and 20 miles NE of

Cartier Islet is uneven and rocky, with the soundings varying

from 20 to 90m, but no dangers have been reported.

3.6 Anchorage, good in SE winds, can be obtained about 0.25

mile off the W extremity of Cartier Islet Reef, in a depth of

38m. Landing is possible from 2 hours before until 2 hours after high water if the wind is light.

3.6 Wave Governor Bank (12°34'S., 123°36'E.), with a depth

of 33m, lies 3.5 miles SE of Cartier Islet. Barracouta Shoal,

with a least known depth of 10.3m, lies 25.5 miles E of Wave

Governor Bank; a detached 25.5m bank lies 8.5 miles NE of

this shoal. An oil wellhead, marked by a lighted buoy, lies 23

miles NE of Barracouta Shoal; vessels are requested to pass at

no less than 2.25 miles.

3.6 Vulcan Shoal (12°48'S., 124°17'E.), composed of live coral,

with a least depth of 9.5m, lies 45 miles ESE of Cartier Islet,

and it is steep-to. A 18.8m patch lies 7 miles SE of Vulcan

Shoal. Eugene McDermott Shoal, with a least depth of 11.1m,
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 55

Pub. 175

lies 24 miles SE of Vulcan Shoal.

3.6 Osborn Passage, between Barracouta Shoal and Vulcan

Shoal, lies near the entrance to one of the recommended tracks,

indicated on the charts, approaching Port Darwin and Clarence

Strait from W. The entrance to this track lies 11 miles SE of

Cartier Islet.

3.7 Seringapatam Reef (13°40'S., 122°05'E.) encloses a

lagoon. The reef dries and there are large boulders round its

edges, with a few sandbanks, which dry about 1.8m, on its W

side; it is steep-to on all sides. On a calm night the breakers on

the reef were heard from a distance of 6 miles.

3.7 Scott Reefs (14°00'S., 121°53'E.), lying 15 miles SSW of

Seringapatam Reef, consists of three separate coral reefs enclosing lagoons. North Reef encloses a lagoon and South Reef

is crescent-shaped. Each reef is of considerable extent, almost

dry, and has several above-water rocks on their outer edges. 

3.7 Sandy Islet (14°03'S., 121°46'E.) lies on the central Scott

Reef; this reef dries and extends from 0.5 to 1 mile from the islet. There is a conspicuous tower on the islet and also a boulder

which dries 2.4m near its N end; a detached reef, which dries

0.6m, lies 1.5 miles NE of Sandy Islet.

3.7 East Hook and West Hook are the E and W extremities, respectively, of the N ends of South Reef. Between North Reef

and South Reef there is a passage, about 1 mile wide, with

depths of more than 366m; there is also a passage, with a depth

of 33m, between the reef surrounding Sandy Islet and West

Hook. 

3.7 A stranded wreck lies approximately 2.5 miles SW of Sandy

Islet just off West Hook. 

3.7 The lagoon enclosed by South Reef has depths of over 24m

throughout the greater portion. The lagoon within North Reef

has not been examined, but is apparently deep.

3.7 The depths are great around Scott Reef. The sea breaks

heavily on the weather side, and at night the breakers may be

heard from some distance; the lee side is quite smooth, but the

tidal currents are strong, and caution is necessary when approaching the reef as soundings give no warning.

3.7 The recommended offshore track passes about 10 to 15 miles

S of Scott Reef.

3.8 Jabiru Oil Terminal (11°55'S., 125°00'E.) is situated

to the S of Sahul Banks and consists of a permanently-moored

converted tanker. The terminal stands in 120m of water. 

3.8 Pilotage is compulsory; the pilot will transfer to an approaching vessel when it reaches a distance of 3 miles from the

terminal. Off-taking vessels are moored in tandem with the terminal tanker, FPSO Jabiru Venture, and are required to keep

their engines on stand-by.

3.8 Vessels of 140,000 dwt are generally accommodated. Larger

vessels may be accepted with prior permission. The terminal is

situated in deep water and there are no draft restrictions. However, in such case as a vessel being unable to moor on arrival

and requiring to anchor, it should do so at least 5 miles from

the terminal to avoid subsea production facilities.

3.8 Vessels should send their ETA to the Production Manager,

Perth, at least 5 days, 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance. The 72-hour message should contain the following information:

1. Vessel name and call sign.

2. HF radiotelephone frequencies.

3. INMARSAT Identification Number and which satellite in use.

4. RT and WT frequencies.

5. Arrival draft and trim.

3.8 The terminal is equipped with VHF. Inbound vessels are advised by radio the approach bearing which they should steer

when closing the terminal. 

3.8 The limiting wave height for mooring is 2.2m. During the

summer months, the area is subject to occasional cyclones.

Particularly in January and February, inclement weather and

sea states may delay mooring. 

3.8 Challis Terminal (12°07'S., 125°01'E.), 11 miles S of Jabiru

Oil Terminal, consists of a permanently-moored 115,000 dwt

barge built as an off-loading facility. The terminal stands in

105m of water. 

3.8 The terminal is equipped with a radio direction finding beacon with a frequency of 404 kHz and range of 100 miles. 

3.8 Anchorage, pilotage, and capacities are as listed for Jabiru

Oil Terminal. Both terminals are equipped with a port radio.

Cape Londonderry to Cape Talbot

3.9 Cape Londonderry (13°44'S., 126°58'E.) is a low,

rocky headland from which a drying reef extends nearly 5

miles NNW; the two Stewart Islets, about 6m high and sandy,

lie on the outer end of this reef and are surrounded by foul

ground.

3.9 Two shoal bays indent the coast W of Cape Londonderry, but

both are open to the NW and appear to be foul. Drying reef and

foul ground extend right across the entrance to these bays, between Cape Londonderry and Cape Talbot, and up to 6 miles

offshore.

3.9 Caution.—The sea N and W of the Stewart Islets is often

discolored and many tide rips are formed. Vessels should give

this area a wide berth as uncharted dangers may exist.

3.10 Cape Talbot (13°48'S., 126°45'E.), about 13 miles

WSW of Cape Londonderry, is low, sandy, and closely backed

by trees and scrub. The extremity of the cape is difficult to disJabiru Oil Terminal tinguish from seaward because of its low-lying nature and the
56 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

contour of the land to the E. The land behind the cape is thickly

wooded and rises slightly with the tops of the trees reaching a

height of about 18m.

3.10 A drying reef extends 4.5 miles NNE from Cape Talbot and

Sandy Islet, 3m high, lies 3 miles NE of the cape; there is another islet 1.5 miles farther ENE. A spit, with a depth of 7.6m

on its extremity, extends 3 miles NW of the cape and is marked

by muddy patches during the strength of the tidal currents.

Napier Broome Bay

3.11 Napier Broome Bay (14°00'S., 126°47'E.) is entered

between Cape Talbot and the NE extremity of the Sir Graham

Moore Islands, about 7.5 miles WSW. The shores of the bay

are indented by four smaller bays separated by projecting

points, between which sheltered anchorage can be taken; however, the approaches are somewhat encumbered by shoals and

obstructions, and some local knowledge is recommended.

3.11 The Sir Graham Moore Islands (13°52'S., 126°36'E.), two

in number, lie on the W side of the entrance to Napier Broome

Bay and are marked by a distinctive flat-topped summit, 61m

high, located on the NE island and shaped like a truncated

cone. In clear weather this is the first land sighted on the approach to the coast; from offshore the islands appear as one.

3.11 Scorpion Point, the E extremity of the NE island, is 11m

high and the extremity of a low neck of land; a detached drying

reef lies about 0.5 mile NE of the N end of the island, and an

obstruction was reported (1968) about 2.75 miles ESE of Scorpion Point. In 1986, depths of 0.3m and 4.9m were reported

about 4 miles ESE and 3.75 miles E, respectively, of the point.

The 0.3m shoal is marked by eddies when the current is running.

3.11 The SW and larger of the Sir Graham Moore Islands rises to

a conspicuous bluff, 55m high, at its E extremity, which is

joined to the W part of the island by a low wooded neck of

land. The NW and W sides of the island have not been surveyed, but a mast is charted on the NW extremity.

3.11 Koojara Shoal (13°47'S., 126°35'E.), with a least depth of

0.8m about 4.5 miles NNW of the NE Sir Graham Moore Island, lies on the NE end of a reef which extends SW to the NW

extremity of the larger Sir Graham Moore Island. The N end of

this reef, about 0.5 mile NNW of the shoal, breaks in N winds;

a depth of 0.8m lies about 1.5 miles SSE of the islet. 

3.12 Anjo Point (13°57'S., 126°35'E.), the E extremity of

the Anjo Peninsula, lies on the W side of Napier Broome Bay,

about 3 miles S of the Sir Graham Moore Islands, with Geranium Bay between. The point, which is formed by a thin finger

of land, is thickly wooded as is the peninsula SW, and forms a

cove on its S side.

3.12 Carronade Islet, 12m high, lies 1.5 miles E of Anjo Point and

is sandy and covered with small trees about 15m high; there is

a conspicuous group of rocks on the E side of the islet.

3.12 Geranium Harbor (13°55'S., 126°34'E.), entered between

the SE extremity of the Sir Graham Moore Islands and Carronade Island, is about 1.5 miles wide and 5 miles long with general depths of 13 to 20m, mud. The harbor provides sheltered

anchorage for a number of vessels with local knowledge, but

should only be approached from the E, as the S and W entrances are foul. The three small Geranium Islets lie on the N side of

the harbor, off the narrow neck of land joining the E extremity

of Sir Graham Moore Island to its main part. The outer islet is

12m high and the two inner islets are covered with mangroves.

3.12 The Louis Islets (14°01'S., 126°34'E.), four in number, lie

centered in an area fouled by rocks and a reef about 5 miles

SW of Carronade Islet. The SE islet, known as Bird Islet, lies

near the outer edge of the foul area, but shoal water extends

nearly 1 mile farther to the E and S; large numbers of sea birds

nest here. The inner islets are covered with trees about 12m

high.

3.12 Mackenzie Anchorage (14°01'S., 126°32'E.), S of the Louis

Islets, is approached from a position about 1.5 miles S of Bird

Rock, and affords good shelter, in depths of 9 to 13m. The tidal

currents are weak here, but caution is necessary on entering

due to the shoal water S of the Louis Islets and Pearl Shoal,

with a depth of 1.8m, about 3 miles S of Bird Rock.

3.12 West Bay (14°05'S., 126°29'E.), entered between Guy Point,

about 5 miles SSW of the Louis Islets, and a point 2 miles NW,

has not been completely surveyed but has a depth of 9.1m in its

center. The shores are low and wooded, much of it covered

with mangroves except in the beach areas; there is an old jetty

charted at the W end of the bay. Vessels with local knowledge

can enter West Bay and anchor, in a depth of 7.3m, mud, near

the W shore. The W side of the bay is shoal. In 1984, a depth of

2.7m was reported in the bay about 3 miles W of Guy Point.

3.12 Bluff Point (14°04'S., 126°39'E.), high and rocky, is an elongated point extending from the SE side of Napier Broome Bay

which is closely backed by a hill rising to a height of 66m; this

hill slopes gradually to the head of Mission Cove where it is

low and covered with brush.

3.12 Caution.—Due to the existence of unexploded mines, a danger area, with a radius of 1 mile, is centered approximately 1

mile NE of Bluff Point.

3.13 Deep Bay (14°07'S., 126°38'E.), at the head of Napier

Broome Bay, is entered between Guy Point and Bluff Point, but

provides little anchorage as it is open to the N and shoal at its

head. King Harman Point is located on the SW side of the bay

and Pim Hill, 201m high, rises to a conspicuous bare summit

about 2.5 miles SW of the point.

3.13 Mission Bay (14°06'S., 126°42'E.), entered between Bluff

Point and Red Bluff, about 4.5 miles NE, provides some of the

best shelter in Napier Broome Bay. Mission Cove, so named

because of the abandoned mission near its head, lies at the S

end of the bay and has a channel, with a depth of 8.2m, extending from the entrance to within 1 mile of its head. Depths shoal

rapidly outside the channel and at the head of Mission Cove;

caution is required. The E and SE shores of the cove are fairly

clear of mangroves, but the remainder is thickly covered; the

buildings of the old mission can be seen through the trees.

3.13 Anchorages.—There is good anchorage in the entrance to

Mission Cove, in a depth of 9.1m, about midway between the

entrance points; anchorage is also available in the middle of the

cove, NW of the mission station, in a depth of 8.2m.

3.13 Anchorage can be taken by vessels of moderate size, in

depths of 11 to 12m, mud, about 3 miles N of Bluff Point; anchorage is also available, in depths of 14 to 16m, about 3.5

miles ENE of Scorpion Point in the entrance to Napier Broome

Bay.
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 57

Pub. 175

3.14 The Governor Islets (13°56'S., 126°42'E.), consisting

of West Governor Islet, the largest of the two, and East Governor Islet, are located close together on the E side of Napier

Broome Bay, about 2 miles NNW of the N extremity of Red

Bluff. Both islands are foul and not completely examined, but

the latter is marked by a conspicuous mass of wedge-shaped

rock, the W side of which is perpendicular and especially noticeable when viewed from N. Both islets are lighter in contrast

than the coast to the S.

3.14 Steamer Rock, 6m high, lies 2 mile NNE of East Governor

Islet, and resembles a ship from a distance.

3.14 Directions.—Steer on a course of 190° for the 61m high

flat-topped summit of the NE of the Sir Graham Moore Islands

as soon as it is sighted. Alter course to 167° for the perpendicular cliff, which looks like a wedge-shaped mass of rock when

viewed from N, located on the W side of East Governor Island,

when it comes on that bearing.

3.14 When the NW extremity of Carronade Islet and Anjo Point,

the E extremity of the Anjo Peninsula, come into line on a

bearing of 230°, steer on that bearing until the N point of the

NE of the Sir Graham Moore Islands is abeam, when course

can be altered to 203° for Mackenzie Anchorage or to 180° for

Mission Bay, as desired.

Vansittart Bay

3.15 Vansittart Bay (14°04'S., 126°18'E.) is formed by an

indentation of the coast about 20 miles W of Napier Broome

Bay. It must be approached from E of Cape Bougainville, described below, and is available as an anchorage for ocean-going

vessels; however, the bay is mostly unsurveyed and only partially examined, and local knowledge is strongly recommended.

3.15 Cape Bougainville (13°53'S., 126°06'E.), the N extremity of

an extensive peninsula which separates Vansittart Bay from

Admiralty Gulf, is 54m high and fringed with reef. Red Islet,

35m high, lies close off its E extremity and is fronted by red

cliffs which are conspicuous when the sun is in a favorable position.

3.15 Caution.—For a distance of 50 miles from Cape Bougainville, the water is so discolored and isolated rocks so numerous

that it is highly probable uncharted dangers exist. Vessels having a draft of more than 3.7m should proceed cautiously at low

water.

3.15 A shoal, with a least depth of 1.2m, lies about 4 miles W of

the W extremity of Sir Graham Moore Island.

3.16 Approach to Vansittart Bay.—Jones Islet (13°45'S.,

126°21'E.), 3m high, is sandy and surrounded by reef. It lies

near the NW extremity of a large shoal area, known as the

Eclipse Archipelago, which uncovers in places, and extends up

to 9 miles E and 14 miles S of the islet. Numerous rocks and

dangers lie within this area, the exact limits of which are unknown in places.

3.16 Tait Bank (13°45'S., 126°15'E.), with a least depth of 7.3m,

lies 6 miles W of Jones Islet and is best passed to the N and W.

3.16 The Eclipse Islands (13°54'S., 126°19'E.), four in number

and unsurveyed, lie surrounded by reef and rocks on the S end

of the Eclipse Archipelago. Long Island, the SE of the group, is

rugged and consists mainly of masses of worn sandstone;

Eclipse Hill, on an island close W of Long Island, rises to a

flat-topped summit 86m high, and forms a good mark.

3.16 Mary Island (13°59'S., 126°23'E.), 3 miles SE of Long Island, is connected to the mainland E and S by reef. A drying

reef extends 1 mile NW from the island and rocks and dangers

extend nearly 2 miles SW from this reef. A bare rock, 6m high,

lies on the reef 3.5 miles ENE of Mary Island, and an islet lies

about 1.5 miles SE of the rock. Middle Rock, 0.6m high, lies

midway between Mary Island and Long Island. There is an obstruction W of the rock. A boat passage is reported between the

rock and the reef extending NW from Mary Island.

3.16 Vansittart Bay is entered between Mary Island and a point on

the Bougainville Peninsula, about 8 miles W. The E part of this

peninsula is indented and mostly unsurveyed, but a 90m hill is

charted on another point about 3 miles SE of Cape Bougainville.

3.16 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage in the middle of the

entrance to Vansittart Bay, in depths of 12.8 to 16.5m, mud,

usually with a light to moderate breeze from sea. As stated before, the approach to this anchorage is unsurveyed and only

partially examined, therefore, caution is necessary on entering.

3.17 Several small bays indent the W shore and the head of

Vansittart Bay, but none have been properly surveyed and only

small vessels with local knowledge should attempt to enter.

3.17 Jar Islet, to the W, and Low Islet lie near the head of Vansittart Bay, and there is a channel with depths of 13 to 15m between them. 

3.17 Waratah Shoal, with a depth of 4m, lies on the E side of the

entrance to this channel about 1 mile E of Jar Islet, and caution

is required.

3.17 Anchorage.—Moderate-size vessels with local knowledge

can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 15m, about 1.25 miles N of

Jar Islet; small vessels can anchor about 0.75 mile S of Low Islet, in depths 7.3 to 9m, mud.

Islands and Dangers North of Cape Bougainville

3.18 Islets, rocks, and reefs, with passages between, extend

approximately 50 miles N from Cape Bougainville to the limits

of Penguin Shoal. The depths throughout this area are very irregular, and the waters in the passages and over the deeps usually maintain a considerable amount of turbulence due to the

tidal currents which run up to 3 knots in places.

3.18 Large vessels are recommended to only use the recommended tracks, which are charted about 4 miles N of Penguin Shoal,

and never proceed into the waters S of this position. Vessels

finding it necessary to enter the area should proceed at slow

speed with caution, and at low water when many of the dangers

are visible; the tidal rise in this vicinity is as much as 6m.

3.18 The water color gives no indication of danger. Uneven

ground is frequently marked by overfalls and eddies on the

flood current of the Northwest Monsoon and by the ebb current

during the Southeast Trade Winds.

3.18 Holothuria Banks (13°51'S., 126°00'E.), with depths of less

than 37m, extend from 14 to 47 miles N of Cape Bougainville.

They consist mainly of dead coral, covered with sponges, and

are roughly divided by Penguin Deeps, with depths of over

91m.

3.18 Penguin Shoal (13°05'S., 125°59'E.), composed of coral,
58 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

has a least depth of 9.7m and lies off the N end of Holothuria

Banks. It is the northernmost of the dangers extending from

Cape Bougainville and has depths of 42 to 55m N of it.

3.18 Warn Rock (13°09'S., 126°06'E.), existence doubtful, with a

least depth of 10.3m, is located on the N end of Holothuria

Banks, about 8 miles ESE of Penguin Shoal.

3.19 Bassett-Smith Shoal (13°18'S., 125°45'E.), composed of coral, has a least depth of 4.8m and lies 19 miles SW

of Penguin Shoal. It has been reported that the sea has not been

seen to break over this shoal, and that there is nothing in the appearance of the water to indicate its position. All vessels are

recommended to give it a wide berth. An 18m patch lies about

3 miles SW of this shoal.

3.19 Combe Rock (13°25'S., 125°55'E.), about 30 miles NNW of

Cape Bougainville, lies on the W part of the S half of Holothuria Banks and dries up to 0.6m. Except in strong winds, it does

not break when there is a depth of more than 1.8m; a rock, with

a depth of 1.5m, lies 0.5 mile SW of Combe Rock.

3.19 East Holothuria Reef (13°35'S., 126°00'E.), which dries up

to 3.7m in places, lies on the SE edge of Holothuria Banks, and

covers an area about 10 miles long and up to 4 miles wide. A

conspicuous rock, 0.6m high, is located on the N side of the

reef, and a rock, awash at high water springs, lies on the E side.

3.19 West Holothuria Reef (13°35'S., 125°45'E.), which is reported to dry up to 2.1m, lies surrounded by foul ground on the

SW edge of Holothuria Banks, about 28 miles NW of Cape

Bougainville. This reef is seldom visible, as the tidal currents

keep the waters in its vicinity most turbid.

3.19 East and West Holothuria Reefs are nearly connected by foul

ground and drying patches which are dangerous to navigation.

Vessels should never attempt to pass between these reefs.

3.19 Branch Banks (13°38'S., 126°12'E.) are two coral banks lying close together E of East Holothuria Reef; the N bank has a

least depth of 10.3m, while the S has a least depth of 12.1m. A

15.9m patch lies about 4.5 miles N of Branch Banks.

3.19 Otway Bank (13°40'S., 126°04'E.), with a least depth of 3m,

coral, lies off the SE end of East Holothuria Reef.

3.20 Troughton Islet (13°45'S., 126°09'E.), 9 miles NNE

of Cape Bougainville, is 4m high and reddish in color. It is

composed of ironstone, covered with grass, and is surrounded

by a coral reef. Two prominent boulders, the largest 1.2m high,

lie on the edge of the reef NE of the islet. A rock, which dries

1.5m, lies close off the S end of Troughton Islet. There is a

landing place in an opening in the reef on the SW side of the islet.

3.20 A conspicuous white building stands on the islet. Bishop

Rocks (13°44'S., 126°07'E.) consist of a small group of coral

heads which dry 0.6m and lie 2 miles WNW of Troughton Islet. A reef, which dries 3.7m, lies about 0.75 mile ENE of

Bishop Rocks, and shoals and foul ground extend intermittently for 8 miles NE of the reef.

3.20 Troughton Passage (13°48'S., 126°07'E.) leads E and S of

Troughton Islet, with depths of 40m in the fairway. There are

tide rips off the E and S extremities of the islet, and patches of

mud and debris stirred up from the bottom sometimes have the

appearance of coral reefs.

3.20 The channel between Troughton Islet and East Holothuria

Reef is not recommended.

3.21 Van Cloon Shoal (12°39'S., 126°25'E.), with a least

depth of 14.2m, lies about 38 miles NE of Penguin Shoal and 5

miles N of the recommended track. A heavy swell may build

up over this shoal in strong N winds and vessels are cautioned

to keep clear of it.

3.21 Baldwin Bank (12°51'S., 126°06'E.), with a least known

depth of 15.5m, lies about 18 miles NE of Penguin Shoal and

close N of the recommended track.

3.21 Gale Bank (12°37'S., 126°05'E.), with a least depth of 22m,

lies 19 miles WNW of Van Cloon Shoal. There are depths of

37 to 55m within 2 miles of it.

3.21 Favell Bank (12°42'S., 126°09'E.), with a least depth of

22m, lies isolated about 7 miles SSE of Gale Bank. It is steepto with depths of 55m within 1 mile of it.

Cape Bougainville to Gibson Point

3.22 The coast between Cape Bougainville (13°54'S.,

126°05'E.) and Gibson Point, 9 miles SW, is heavily indented

and forms several shoal bays. The land within rises to several

flat-topped ridges from 40 to 130m high.

3.22 Hat Point (13°56'S., 126°01'E.), 5 miles WSW of Cape

Bougainville, has an isolated hill on it, 42m high, which is easily identified from NE and SW. It is covered with brush and is

the only good landmark in the vicinity.

3.22 The depths between Hat Point and the cape are very irregular

with numerous tide rips over the outer part; a shoal bay between the points, provides shelter for small craft in S winds.

3.22 Landing in calm weather can be effected over the rock face

on the W side of Hat Point, and also at high water on a beach

on the SE side of the point.

3.22 Parry Harbor (13°58'S., 126°03'E.), entered between Hat

Point and Gibson Point, about 4.5 miles SW, affords shelter to

small vessels in all weathers. The bay is divided into two arms

by a flat-topped, ridged peninsula, but the SW arm is shoal. A

10.3m patch lies in the entrance to the E arm, 1.75 miles S of

Hat Point. Hecla Islet, 23m high, rocky, and covered with

grass, lies 2 miles NE of Gibson Point and is fringed by drying

reef except on its SE side. A patch of drying reef lies 1.75

miles NNE of Hecla Islet, and Fury Rock, awash at high water

springs, lies 1.5 miles W of the islet.

3.22 Anchorage.—Make for Parry Harbor to pass 2 miles N of

Fury Rock, then keep in mid-channel between the drying reef S

of Hat Point and Hecla Islet and anchor as convenient, in

depths of 8 to 11m, mud, N of the peninsula.

Admiralty Gulf

3.23 Admiralty Gulf is entered between Gibson Point

(14°00'S., 125°58'E.) and Cape Voltaire, 28 miles SW. Much of

it has not been surveyed and the available information is old

and should be used with caution. The gulf is approached from

N through Troughton Passage and from W by the channels of

the Institut Islands, which lie between Cape Voltaire and Long

Reef. The entire gulf, with the exception of its center part, is

heavily encumbered by islets and shoals, and is abundant with

fish.

3.23 Cape Voltaire (14°15'S., 125°34'E.), 45m high, is the NW

extremity of a large peninsula which separates Admiralty Gulf

from Montague Sound. There is a flat-topped hill, 123m high,
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 59

Pub. 175

about 2.75 miles ENE of the cape, and Sharp Peak, 145m high,

rises 2.25 miles SSE of the cape. Krait Bay, with about 7.3m in

its middle part, is entered about 2 miles NE of the cape.

3.23 Bigge Point (14°17'S., 125°44'E.), 9 miles E of Cape Voltaire, is fringed with above and below-water rocks which lie up

to 1.25 miles offshore. The coast in this area has not been surveyed.

3.24 Long Reef (13°55'S., 125°45'E.), with its adjacent

dangers, is centered about 23 miles NNE of Cape Voltaire, and

extends for nearly 18 miles in a N-S direction. It forms the W

side of the N approach to Admiralty Gulf and lies with its N

extremity about 14.5 miles NW of Hat Point. The reef is composed of sand and coral, dries up to 3m, and is surmounted by

Sand Islet, 1.3m high and covered with grass, about 3 miles S

of its N end.

3.24 Rothery Reef, a detached coral reef surmounted by a sand

cay which dries 6m, lies about 1.5 miles NNE of Long Reef.

Submerged dangers, including rocks with depths of less than

1.8m, extend up to 6 miles N of Rothery Reef; these dangers do

not break and due to the lack of visual contacts, especially at

high water, the area between Long Reef and Holothuria Reefs

is considered dangerous to navigate.

3.24 Low Rocks (14°04'S., 125°52'E.) are a group of white rocks,

surrounded by drying reef, which lie 3 miles SE of the SE extremity of Long Reef. The highest part of these rocks, is a flattopped boulder, 6m high, located on the SE and largest islet.

3.24 Tancred Bank, with a least depth of 3.3m, coral, lies 2 miles

SE of Low Rocks.

3.24 Forrest Rock, with a least depth of 4.6m, coral, lies steep-to,

with depths of over 22m close around, about 3 miles S of Low

Rocks.

3.24 Cassini Island (13°57'S., 125°38'E.) lies 5 miles W of the W

extremity of Long Reef. It is generally flat with a maximum elevation of 22m near the S end. Being composed of ironstone, it

shows a light reddish color and has cliffs from 9 to 18m high

along its shores, except at the N end, where the land slopes

gradually to a rocky ledge awash at high water. The island is

fringed by drying reef except for some beaches on the E side.

3.24 Anchorage can be found, in 15m, sand and rock, in the entrance to a bay on the NE side of Cassini Island. There is a

beach suitable for landing on the NW side of the bay and a fairly good landing place on the SE shore of the island.

3.24 Oliver Rock (13°58'S., 125°33'E.), a small coral head with a

least depth of 2.7m, lies 4 miles WSW of Cassini Island. The

sea has not been seen to break over this rock and there is nothing in the appearance of the surrounding waters to indicate its

presence.

The Institut Islands

3.25 The Institut Islands are a group of islands, islets, and

rocks lying between Cape Voltaire and Long Reef, in the W approach to Admiralty Gulf. The principal islands are Fenelon,

Descartes, and Corneille, all inhabited; the larger islands are

covered with stunted trees, and from all directions appear flat.

3.25 Condillac Islet (14°06'S., 125°33'E.), the westernmost island of the Institut group, lies about 9 miles N of Cape Voltaire,

and has a table-topped summit 72m high. It is covered with

bushes and has a rocky coast, except at its E extremity, which

consists of a high sandy beach. A rock, 0.6m high, lies 0.1 mile

NNE of the islet, and a 5.5m coral patch lies a little more than

0.5 mile N of the islet.

3.25 Randall Islet, 2.5 miles SE of Condillac Islet, is rocky, with a

conspicuous hump 15m high near its S end. It is surrounded by

coral reef which extends up to 0.5 mile to the N and E.

3.25 Baudin Islet, 1.75 miles NE of Randall Islet, is dark in color

with a well defined summit 67m high. The NE extremity of the

islet is separated by a low isthmus and appears as a second islet, close by, when viewed from the NW at a distance. The islet

is fringed by a coral reef which dries, except on its SE side,

where a sandy beach provides good landing.

3.25 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 18 to 25m, sand, 0.25

mile off the above sandy beach, with the S extremities of Condillac Islet and Baudin Islet in line, bearing 295°.

3.25 Tidal currents in the vicinity of Baudin Islet set S and W on

the flood, commencing about 20 minutes before low water. The

ebb current sets N and E and commences about 2 hours before

high water.

3.26 Pascal Islet (14°04'S., 125°39'E.), 4 miles NE of

Baudin Islet, has a sharp conical peak, the summit of which

consists of ironstone and attains a height of 38m. The island is

surrounded by coral reef which extends 0.4 mile from its S

side. A 1.4m shoal lies 0.5 mile S of the island.

3.26 Fenelon Island (14°08'S., 125°42'E.), the largest of the Institut Islands, is 104m high and lies 5.5 miles E of Baudin Islet.

The island is 2 miles long in a N-S direction and surrounded by

reef with a large drying patch isolated about 1.5 miles NE of its

N extremity. Flat Islet, 26m high, lies close off the S extremity

of Fenelon Island and is connected to it by a shoal spit.

3.26 Oyster Rock, small, dark, but whitened at its top by bird

droppings, is located about 5 miles ENE of the N end of

Fenelon Island, with Oliver Island and several rocks and reefs

between. Lee Rock, a dangerous pinnacle with a depth of 0.9m,

lies about 0.75 mile NNE of Oyster Rock and generally shows

no sign except at low water springs when some slight tide rips

are occasionally formed.

3.26 Descartes Island, 94m high, lies about 1.25 miles SW of

Fenelon Island, and islets, rocks, and reef extend SW to Cape

Voltaire. An islet, 17m high, is located 1 mile NW of Descartes

Island, and Lavoisier Islet, 11m high, lies about 1 mile off the

mainland 4 miles SW of Descartes Island.

3.26 Bullara Rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 2

miles NW of Descartes Island, with reef extending to its S. It

must be rounded to the N with care as no sign of it is usually

visible. 

Approach to Fenelon Passage

3.27 Corneille Island (14°11'S., 125°44'E.), 130m high

and the highest of the Institut Group, lies about 2 miles SE of

Flat Island and has foul ground extending 0.5 mile N from it. A

reef, with a 5.5m high rock on it, extends the same distance SE.

The tidal current close N of Corneille Island sets in a 060° direction at 1.5 knots on the flood.

3.27 The Kingsmill Islands, consisting of two main islands with

some rocks and a very shallow bar between them, lie close together on a bank of shoal water about 2 miles NE of Corneille

Island. The W island is 9m high and the E island, known as
60 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

Lafontaine Island, is long, narrow and 19m high. A 7.8m shoal

lies 1.5 miles NE of Lafontaine Island.

3.27 Mushroom Rocks, one of which is 7m high, lie on a bank of

shoal water within 1 mile NW of the W Kingsmill Island.

3.27 Lagrange Islet, 4m high, lies 2.5 miles SE of Corneille Island, on an extensive drying reef which surrounds the island to

a distance of 1 mile off its shores. A shoal spit, with a depth of

1.2m, extends nearly 1.5 miles SW of Lagrange Islet, and several above-water rocks and another islet, 21m high, lie up to 2

miles SE.

3.27 Moliere Islet, 18m high, lies 3.5 miles ESE of Lagrange Islet. Patches of reef lie about 0.5 mile E and S of the islet, and a

4.9m shoal lies 2.25 miles ESE.

3.27 White Islet, Racine Islet, and Berthoud Islet lie 2 miles N,

1.5 miles S, and 3 miles SE, respectively, of Moliere Islet. In

1987, depths of 2.4m and 1.5m were reported to lie about 1.5

miles NW and 0.5 mile SSE, respectively, of Racine Islet.

3.27 Caution.—There can be lesser depths than charted in and

among the Institut Islands.

3.28 There are three passages through the Institut Islands

between Long Reef and Cape Voltaire, but caution must be exercised when navigating in their vicinity, especially at low water. The bottom is very irregular and the sea is heavily clouded

with lime, which generally reduces visibility through the water

to less than 1m. Since additional dangers other than those

which are charted may exist, larger vessels are recommended

to keep clear of the group.

3.28 Oyster Rock Passage (14°02'S., 125°46'E.) leads between

Oyster Rock and Long Reef, however, it is fouled with Lee

Rock and is not recommended without local knowledge.

3.28 Fenelon Passage (14°09'S., 125°41'E.) leads between

Fenelon Island and Descartes Island. Vessels from W pass to

the N of Baudin Island (14°08'S., 125°37'E.) and steer with

the S end of Fenelon Island ahead bearing 119°, passing NNE

of Bullara Rock. The line of bearing (157°) to the W end of

Parry Islet (14°19'S., 125°46'E.) ahead, or 337° to Pascal Island astern, leads through Fenelon Passage passing between

the 21m rock lying close off the SW extremity of Fenelon Island and the 7.9m shoal located 0.5 mile N of Descartes Island.

A shoal, with a least depth of 5.3m, lies 0.6 mile SW of Cornneille Island.

3.28 Voltaire Passage (14°13'S., 135°37'E.) leads between Dice

Rock and the islets W of it, to the N, and Lavoisier Islet to the

S. It is only recommended to small vessels with local knowledge. In 1987, a depth of 3m was reported close N of Lavoisier

Islet.

Admiralty Gulf—West Side

3.29 Bigge Point (14°17'S., 125°44'E.), the NE extremity

of a narrow peninsula located about 9 miles E of Cape Voltaire,

is fringed by both above and below-water rocks up to 1.25

miles offshore. The coast both W and S of the point has not

been surveyed, but is known to be rock with dangers extending

up to 2.5 miles offshore in places.

3.29 Parry Islet, 18m high, lies 3 miles SE of Bigge Point with

foul ground between. Several large rocks lie close SW of the

islet.

3.29 Walmesly Bay (14°24'S., 125°42'E.) is entered between

Bigge Point and Pickering Point, about 8 miles S, but has not

been surveyed. The shores appear low with several rocks offshore, and the Mitchell River, with mangroves fringing its

mouth, flows into the S part of its head.

3.29 There is a narrow peninsula, 3.5 miles SE of Pickering Point,

which extends 2 miles NE from the coast. The bay formed between the above points is unsurveyed but appears shoal and

foul with submerged rocks across its mouth and up to 1.5 miles

off the extremity of the peninsula. A rock, which dries 3m, lies

0.5 mile E of the E extremity of the peninsula.

3.30 Crystal Head (14°27'S., 125°51'E.), a steep rugged

flat-topped projection covered with small trees and grass, is located about 6.5 miles SE of Pickering Point. Foul ground extends 1 mile NE of the head, and a detached reef, which dries

5.2m, lies about 0.5 mile farther in the same direction. 

3.30 Anchorage can be found, in about 7m, mud and clay, about

0.6 mile SSW of the SE extremity of Crystal Point.

3.30 Port Warrender (14°31'S., 125°52'E.), at the head of Admiralty Gulf, is a secure harbor which affords good anchorage, in

depths of 8 to 27m, generally S to SE of Crystal Head. The

land around the port area is rugged and rocky, and the hills on

the W side, which rise up to 244m, are thickly covered with

trees and grass.

3.30 The E side of Port Warrender is formed by a reef that extends

up to 4 miles N from a point about 7 miles SSE of Crystal

Head, and has two islets and several drying patches on it. The

head of the port is shoal and foul from a position about 7.5

miles S of Crystal Head, and sand bars lie across the entrances

of two rivers located at its S extremity.

Admiralty Gulf—East Side

3.31 The E side of Admiralty Gulf has not been surveyed

and little is known of the depths up to 7 miles offshore in places. The coastal features hereabout are only approximately

charted and should not be wholly depended on for navigation.

3.31 Borda Island (14°14'S., 126°01'E.), also known as North

Osborne Island, is low and stony. It lies off the S entrance point

of a large unsurveyed bay, the N entrance point of which is located about 6.5 miles SSE of Gibson Point (14°00'S.,

125°58'E.). North Rock, an islet 1.75 miles NE of Borda Island, lies on foul ground which extends between the two,

thence NE apparently across the entire head of the bay.

3.31 The Osborne Islands, consisting of Middle Osborne Island,

Southwest Osborne Island, Osborne Island, and Steep Head Island, lie in a group centered about 7 miles SSW of Borda Island. Middle Osborne Island, the largest of the group, rises to a

height of 216m near its center, and on its W coast has a bluff

about 213m high.

3.31 West Rock, the westernmost of the Osborne Islands, is a

large rock located about 3 miles W of the N extremity of

Southwest Osborne Island; Center Rock lies midway between.

The area E of West Rock has not been surveyed.

3.31 Steep Head Island, the southernmost of the Osborne Islands,

is conspicuous because of its precipitous form. It lies about 1

mile S of an unnamed point on the coast about 3 miles SE of

the S extremity of Southwest Osborne Island. 

3.31 Moon Rock, which dries 2.4m and on which the sea seldom

breaks when covered, lies about 1 mile off the above unnamed
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 61

Pub. 175

point and 1.5 miles NNW of Steep Head Island.

3.31 Mount Connor (14°32'S., 126°08'E.), the highest peak

charted in the area, rises to a height of 587m about 11 miles SE

of Steep Head Island.

The Bonaparte Archipelago

3.32 The Bonaparte Archipelago (15°00'S., 125°00'E.)

comprises all of the islands, islets, rocks, and shoals lying off

Montague Sound, York Sound, and Brunswick Bay, all of

which are encumbered by islets, rocks, and shoals.

3.32 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise along the coast within the

Bonaparte Archipelago attains heights as great as 8.2m at mean

springs and causes a considerable difference in the coastline

and shoal areas between high and low waters. The tidal currents set through the narrower channels with considerable force

and tide rips are common near some of the outer dangers. 

3.32 Caution.—The waters within the Bonaparte Archipelago

and the coastal areas upon which it borders, are only partially

surveyed and navigation requires a considerable amount of

caution. Deep-draft vessels are recommended to remain seaward of the archipelago and not proceed within 10 miles of the

outer dangers except in case of emergency.

3.32 In 1985, the positions of the coastline and topographical features in Montague Sound, York Sound, and Brunswick Bay

were reported to differ from those shown on land survey maps;

inshore areas are generally unsurveyed.

3.33 Montague Sound (14°25'S., 125°25'E.) is the water

area between the peninsula, of which Cape Voltaire (14°15'S.,

125°34'E.) is the NW extremity, and Bigge Island, about 26

miles SW. The sound is encumbered with islets, rocks, and numerous dangers, and most of the off-lying islands are chiefly

rock formations with a reddish tinge.

3.33 Montalivet Group (14°18'S., 125°16'E.), the outermost of

the visible dangers in the approach to Montague Sound, consists of five principal islets and several rocks, all centered about

19 miles W of Cape Voltaire. They appear dark in color and are

covered by undergrowth. 

3.33 East Montalivet, the largest islet of the group, has a flattopped summit 70m high, and lies on a reef with Patricia Islet

and Don Islet, close NE, and Walker Islet 0.5 mile S. A sand

cay, which dries about 6m, lies 1 mile NE of Patricia Islet and

Wolf Rock, conspicuous at low water, dries 3m, about 4 miles

ENE of the same islet.

3.33 West Montalivet Islet, located about 4 miles WSW of East

Montalivet, is fringed by reef and has a dark flat-topped summit 76m high.

3.33 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off the SE side of

West Montalivet Islet, in a depth of 12m; there is a sandy beach

on this shore where landing can be effected.

3.34 Jamieson Reef (14°04'S., 125°21'E.), with depths of

less than 4m, lies about 14 miles NNE of East Montalivet Islet.

A sand cay, which dries 2.7m, lies on a coral patch located on

the E side of this reef.

3.34 Ingram Reef (14°07'S., 125°17'E.), steep-to and about 1

mile in diameter, lies with its shallowest part, a coral reef

awash, about 6.5 miles SW of Jamieson Reef. The sea does not

break on this reef until nearly low water springs, and before

that time there is nothing in the appearance of the water to indicate danger.

3.34 Albert Reef (14°15'S., 125°10'E.) lies about 4 miles NW of

West Montalivet Islet and dries 1.2m. Foul ground extends

about 0.5 mile NW and S of the drying portion.

More or less to the S of a line drawn between Cape Voltaire

and the N extremity of Bigge Island, there are a number of islets, rocks, and dangers located across the entrance to Montague Sound, only the most important of which are described

below.

3.34 Water Islet (14°21'S., 125°30'E.), the E of the above islets,

is 45m high, rugged, and light in color. On the SE coast there is

a small sandy beach which affords good landing; a reef, awash,

extends nearly 0.15 mile offshore from the NE side of the islet.

In 1986, the island was reported to lie 0.5 mile W of its charted

position.

3.35 Tancred Islet (14°20'S., 125°20'E.), about 5 miles W

of Water Islet, is a conspicuous rugged islet with a light-colored and well-defined summit about 45m high. It has two remarkable fissures crossing the surface in a NW-SE direction,

and is steep all around.

3.35 Cleghorn Islet, about 1.5 miles S of Tancred Islet, is 61m

high. Islets and rocks, some awash, lie up to 1.5 miles E and 4

miles S of Cleghorn Islet, but the area has not been surveyed

and caution is advised.

3.35 Biddles Rock, 1.2m high, lies 2 miles N of Tancred Islet, and

is steep-to with a depth of 31m all around it.

3.35 Hawick Islet, about 1.5 miles W of Tancred Islet, is rugged,

light in color, and 24m high. A reef, on which lie two small islets, extends about 0.35 mile N of Hawick Islet. There are

depths of 7.3m close N of the reef. 

3.35 Warn Islet, 29m high, lies about 3.5 miles W of Hawick Island and is round and rocky. About 0.1 mile from the E shore

there is a rock about 0.6m high which is connected to the islet

by a sunken reef. Shoal depths of 4m and 6m lie 1.25 miles S

and 2.5 miles ESE of Warn Islet.

3.35 Clerk Islet, 11m high, lies 4 miles S of Warn Islet, with Bishop Islet, 19m high, about 1 mile SE of it. A reef extends 0.25

mile off the NE shore of the latter islet.

3.35 The Prudhoe Islets (14°25'S., 125°15'E.), four in number,

lie centered about 4.5 miles W of Clerk Islet. The largest of the

group has a well-defined black summit, 85m high, but the N islet, which is surrounded by reef, is only 4m high. There is a

chain of islets between this group and the NE coast of Bigge Island.

3.35 Branch Islet, 18m high, lies 1.25 miles SE of the larger Prudhoe Islet, and a 4m high islet lies between. Another small islet

lies about 2.5 miles SE of Branch Islet.

3.35 Cotthurst Rock, 4m high, lies about 1.5 miles NNE of the N

extremity of Bigge Island. There are depths in excess of 20m at

a distance of 0.15 mile all around this rock. A shoal depth of

0.6m lies about 2 miles WNW of Cotthurst Rock.

3.36 The coast of Montague Sound between Cape Voltaire

and the NE entrance point of Swift Bay, nearly 15 miles S, consists of small bays and rocky points, which are mostly unsurveyed from about 4 miles S of the cape.

3.36 An unnamed island lies close off the coast about 5.5 miles S

of Cape Voltaire, and there is a channel between it and Water
62 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

Islet, 4 miles W, which has depths of 13.7 to 18.3m leading to

Swift Bay.

3.36 Katers Island (14°28'S., 125°32'E.), 105m high at its N end,

lies 10 miles SSW of Cape Voltaire and forms the W side of the

approach to Swift Bay. Between the SE extremity of the island

and the N entrance to the bay, there is a channel about 1 mile

wide with reported depths of 5.5 to 14.6m, which leads S to the

entrance of the bay. Several islets and reefs lie off the W and

NW sides of Katers Island.

3.36 Anchorage can be obtained by small vessels with local

knowledge, in a depth of 14.6m, mud, in the channel between

Katers Island and the mainland. There is a more secure anchorage in Swift Bay, in depths of 7.3 to 12.8m, but these waters

are unsurveyed and caution is required. Tides rise up to 6.4m at

springs.

3.36 Wollaston Island (14°30'S., 125°28'E.), 189m high, lies 3

miles SW of Katers Island and is 3 miles long in a NW-SE direction. A reef, with depths of less than 1.8m, extends about 1

mile NW from the N extremity, and several rocks and islets lie

off the NE side of the island. The island is separated from the

mainland by a narrow rock-filled channel that should only be

attempted by boats.

3.36 Mudge Bay (14°33'S., 125°23'E.), a deep indentation in the

coast, is entered about 5 miles WSW of Wollaston Island, between a peninsula, 155m high on the W, and a point off which

lie several islets, to the E. Depths in the bay vary from 7 to

18m, but surveys are incomplete and only small vessels with

local knowledge should attempt to enter. A shoal patch of 0.5m

was reported (1988) to lie in the middle of the entrance to the

bay.

3.36 Combe Hill Islet, 119m high, along with several other high

islets, lie in a line up to 2.5 miles N of the peninsula that forms

the W side of Mudge Bay. In the bay itself there are several

other islets and numerous rocks which dry up to 3m.

3.36 Capstan Islet (14°35'S., 125°16'E.), high and rocky, lies

about 6 miles SW of the above peninsula, with several islets

and rocks between. The coast within is rugged and rocky, with

stunted trees and shrubs; it has not been examined, and the waters bordering it should be approached with great caution.

3.36 A rock, which covers at high water springs, is charted about

2 miles NE of the N extremity of Capstan Islet.

3.37 Bigge Island (14°34'S., 125°10'E.), which forms the

W side of Montague Sound, is 14 miles long in a N-S direction

and about 7 miles wide. It is rugged and barren with several irregularly-shaped hills, composed of quartzite tinged with oxide

of iron, that maintain general heights of 61 to 91m. 

3.37 Savage Hill, near the S extremity of the island, is tabletopped and rises to a height of 143m; Camp Hill, near the W

coast, is 125m high, and Round Hill, dark in color, rises to 97m

near the center of the island.

3.37 Numerous rocks are heaped up on Bigge Island, with deep

fissures in nearly every direction. The coast is rugged and

rocky, with occasional short sandy beaches, and on the NW

side is Boomerang Bay, an indentation about 2 miles in length.

3.37 A chain of rocks and islets extends about 2.5 miles NE from

a position on the shore about 2 miles SE of Cape Chateaurenaud, the N extremity of Bigge Island.

3.37 Scott Strait (14°30'S., 125°07'E.), the channel separating

Bigge Island from the mainland SE, has not been thoroughly

examined and is only navigable by vessels possessing local

knowledge and exercising extreme caution. The SE shore of

the strait is composed of broken rock and is fronted by numerous islets and dangers which reduce the width of the fairway to

only 0.25 mile in places. The least charted depth in the channel

is about 16.5m; however, the bottom is irregular and the tidal

currents are strong, which causes the water to maintain a muddy character that obscures the numerous dangers.

3.37 The waters to the W and SW of Bigge Island are unsurveyed;

several islands and dangers are known to exist hereabouts. The

northernmost of these, known as Championet Islet, is rocky

with a flat grassy summit 11m high. Eyre Rock, steep-to, dries

6m and lies 1 mile W of Championet Islet; both of the above

are located in the entrance to Boomerang Bay. A shoal depth of

9.1m lies 2 miles WSW of Eyre Rock. Queen Islet, surrounded

by reef and 40m high, lies 1.25 miles off the W side of Bigge

Islet and 10 miles SW of Cape Chateaurenaud. 

3.37 An islet, 14m high, with a reef extending 0.5 mile to its

NNE, lies 0.75 mile NNW of Queen Islet. Tooth Rocks, a

group of rocks from 3 to 5m high, lie about 4 miles WSW of

the SW extremity of Bigge Islet. Breakers were reported in

1964, about 0.5 mile NW of Tooth Rocks, and a small islet lies

midway between Bigge Island and these rocks. A submerged

reef, with several above-water rocks on it, lies off the W end of

Scott Strait and extends from 2 to 6 miles SSW of the S extremity of Bigge Island.

3.38 The Maret Islets (14°25'S., 124°59'E.), two in number and connected by reef, lie centered about 11 miles W of

Cape Chateaurenaud and rise to heights of 32m and 52m; the

lower islet is to the N.

3.38 Berthier Islet, about 2 miles S of the Maret Islets, with several high rocks between, rises to a height of 98m with a flat summit. This islet and the two Maret Islets extend over a distance

of 9 miles in a N-S direction, and from seaward because of

their increasing height to the S, give the general appearance of

Cape Bougainville, the ridges being flat-topped and surmounted by an ironstone cap with stunted gum trees.

3.38 Corvisart Islet, 14m high, lies about 1.25 miles S of Berthier

Islet; a drying reef is located about 0.75 mile ESE of the islet

and a dangerous rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies a little over 0.5 mile SSE of the same islet.

3.38 Combe Islet, with a height of 12m, is black and rocky, and

lies about 2.5 miles E of the S Maret Island; reef extends about

0.4 mile W from the islet. Ripple Rock, which dries 3.7m, lies

1.5 miles SSW of Combe Islet.

3.38 Caution.—The banks and reefs in the vicinity of Maret Islet

and Berthier Islet are steep-to, and because of the strong tidal

currents, the surrounding waters are usually turbid. Surveys in

this area are incomplete and vessels navigating in this vicinity

are recommended to exercise extreme caution.

Robroy Reefs (14°27'S., 124°52'E.) consist of three partially-drying rocky patches centered about 7.5 miles W of the S

Maret Islet. A sand cay on the N reef dries 4.3m.

3.38 The Albert Islets (14°32'S., 124°55'E.), a group of five

small islets, mostly connected by reef, lie centered about 5

miles SW of the S Maret Islet. The largest islet, near the N end

of the group, is 43m high; the S islet is known as Suffren Islet.
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 63

Pub. 175

3.39 York Sound (14°53'S., 125°07'E.), which is entered

between Cape Pond and Fontanes Islet, about 14 miles SW,

forms the approach to Prince Frederick Harbor, located about

19 miles within the entrance. The E side of the sound consists

of two irregularly shaped bays, both unsurveyed, and the W

side is only partially examined, therefore vessels are recommended to exercise a considerable amount of caution when entering.

3.39 Cape Pond (14°45'S., 125°08'E.), consisting of broken rock

and fronted with dangers, forms the E entrance point of York

Sound. Numerous rocks are located close off the S shore of the

cape and a rocky islet, with reef extending 1 mile off its S extremity, lies charted about 2.5 miles SSE.

3.39 Lamarck Islet (14°47'S., 125°02'E.), 58m high, lies in the

entrance to York Sound, about 6 miles WSW of Cape Pond.

The islet is fairly steep with reef generally bordering its shores,

but there is good landing on the E side. Some islets and rocks,

including Tournefort Islet, lie within 1.5 miles SSE of the S extremity of Lamarck Islet, however, the waters to the E are unsurveyed.

3.39 Jussieu Islet, low and fringed by reef, lies 5 miles NNW of

Lamarck Islet. A spit, with a least depth of 0.9m, extends about

0.4 mile W from the N extremity of the islet.

3.40 Cape Torrens (15°00'S., 125°06'E.), a point of land

in the SW part of York Sound, is the E extremity of a rugged

peninsula which extends approximately 6 miles N from the

mainland and terminates at its N end in Hardy Point. A reef,

which dries 6.4m and on which the sea breaks, lies 5 miles NW

of Cape Torrens.

3.40 The Anderdon Islets (14°56'S., 125°09'E.), a group of rocks

and islets, lie on the E side of York Sound about 5 miles NE of

Cape Torrens. Reef extends approximately 1 mile W from the

westernmost islet and the passages E and SE of the group are

reported to be foul.

3.40 Prince Frederick Harbor (15°05'S., 125°16'E.), a continuation of York Sound, is entered between Cape Torrens and the

Anderdon Islets and forms a fairly good anchorage for vessels

with local knowledge. The harbor is rather encumbered with

rocks and islets and also several submerged dangers, but vessels can enter by passing midway between the N extremity of

an island on the W side of the harbor, and the islets and dangers

off the W extremity of the peninsula that lie SE of the Anderdon Islets.

3.40 The head of Prince Frederick Harbor is divided into two inlets which lead NE and SE, respectively, from the E shore of

the harbor; both inlets are unsurveyed. The S inlet, which leads

to the Roe River, is about 3 miles wide at its entrance, with reported depths of 9.1 to 12.8m in the channel.

3.40 The coast of much of the harbor is backed by irregular ranges of steep rocky hills, rising to several hills, the most prominent being Manning Peak, 15.5 miles E of Cape Torrens, and

Mount Brookes, about 22 miles SE of the cape.

3.40 Anchorage.—Fair anchorage can be taken in the entrance of

Prince Frederick Harbor, in depths of 22 to 37m; however, the

bottom is rock and caution is necessary.

3.40 Vessels with local knowledge can take anchorage in Prince

Frederick Harbor about 0.5 mile SSW of an islet located 15

miles SE of Cape Torrens, in a depth of about 12m, good holding ground. Caution is necessary during the rainy season as the

currents from the Roe River are very strong.

3.41 Hardy Point (14°59'S., 125°01'E.), the W extremity

of an irregularly shaped peninsula, is backed by a 91m conical

hill about 0.75 mile ESE. Another hill, 135m high, rises about

1.5 miles SE of the point and is a good mark from seaward.

3.41 Ena Island, small and rocky, lies 1 mile NNE of Hardy Point

and a drying reef, previously mentioned with Cape Torrens in

paragraph 3.40, lies 2.25 miles farther in the same direction.

3.41 The Coronation Islands, centered about 5 miles W of Hardy

Point, extend in a N-S direction for about 12 miles and consist

of one large and several smaller islands, with numerous islets

and rocks scattered around. They are covered with vegetation

and the larger island is heavily wooded.

3.41 Fontanes Islet (14°54'S., 124°55'E.), 71m high and the

northernmost of the Coronation Islands, lies 7 miles NW of

Hardy Point. From this island, islets and reefs extend 2 miles

SSE to a position about 0.75 mile E of Gale Island.

3.41 Gale Islet, 120m high, lies close off the N extremity of the

largest of the Coronation Islands. The islet appears to be surrounded by dangers, but the waters in its vicinity are unsurveyed.

3.41 A chain of islets extends about 3 miles NNW of Gale Islet

terminating in the Desaix Islets, with the latter being four in

number.

3.41 The largest Coronation Island lies 5 miles W of Hardy Point

and has two conspicuous peaked hills, the highest near the

middle of the E coast, rising to a height of 151m. The coast is

irregular in shape forming two shallow bays along its SE part;

a reef which dries 0.6m lies 0.25 mile offshore, about 1 mile

SSE of the N extremity of the island.

3.42 Port Nelson (15°04'S., 125°00'E.), entered between

Hardy Point and Fontanes Islet, forms a secure anchorage area

on the W side of the promontory which separates it from Prince

Frederick Harbor. The port is protected from W winds by the

Coronation Islands and extends about 8 miles S from Hardy

Point, gradually shoaling towards its head where it forms two

inner bays.

3.42 The W entrance to Port Nelson, between the S extremity of

the Coronation Islands and the mainland coast, is narrow and

not fully examined. It is available to small vessels with local

knowledge proceeding to and from Brunswick Bay.

3.42 The general coastline of the port is rugged and steep with numerous small bays, the lower shores of which are lined with

mangroves.

3.42 Careening Bay (15°06'S., 125°00'E.), entered between a

point 6.5 miles S of Hardy Point and another point 1 mile SW,

has depths of about 3.7m in its middle part, but shoals to a

sandy beach which provides good landing for boats. A drying

reef lies 0.5 mile N of the E entrance point of Careening Bay

and caution is advised when approaching.

3.42 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken, according to

draft, nearly anywhere in Port Nelson; the nature of the bottom

almost everywhere is mud. The best anchorage area appears to

be from 1 to 1.5 miles NW of the head of Careening Bay, in

depths of 9 to 11m.

3.42 Caution.—Tidal rises are in excess of 9.1m. Care is necessary not to anchor over shoal areas at HW.
64 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

3.43 Colbert Islet (14°52'S., 124°43'E.), 46m high, lies 12

miles W of Fontanes Islet, the N extremity of the Coronation

Islands. Foul ground, with above and below-water dangers, extends up to 2 miles N and 1.5 miles S from the islet; another islet surrounded by drying reef lies about 2 miles to the E.

3.43 Buffon Island, 73m high, lies 3 miles SSE of Colbert Islet;

two islets close together are located off its SE extremity, and

two rocks lie off the NW point of the island.

3.43 Keraudren Island, 49m high, lies about 2.5 miles WSW of

Buffon Island, with several islets scattered off its N end. A narrow reef, which dries 2.4m, extends from about 1 to 2.75 miles

NNW of Keraudren Island, and depths of less than 11m extend

up to 1 mile SW of this reef. A reef extends 0.5 mile SE and a

shoal, which breaks, extends SW from the S point of the islet

close W of Keraudren Island. Rocks, which dry, lie 2 miles W

and 2.5 miles SW of the summit of Keraudren Island.

3.43 De Freycinet Islet (15°00'S., 124°32'E.), 26m high, lies

about 9.5 miles WSW of Keraudren Island and is easily identified because of its resemblance to an inverted basin. A reef,

which covers at high water, lies about 1.5 miles ENE of the islet. A small islet, 14m high, lies 2 miles E of De Freycinet Islet.

3.43 All of the above islands and islets lie in the approach to

Brunswick Bay.

3.44 Brunswick Bay (15°10'S., 124°40'E.), a large open

bay formed between the W side of the Coronation Islands

(15°00'S., 124°56'E.) and the E side of Augustus Island, about

25 miles SW, has an irregular coastline and is encumbered with

numerous islets and dangers. The bay forms the approach to St.

George Basin, the Prince Regent River, and Port George IV,

and is stated to be frequented by small vessels with local

knowledge. Brunswick Bay has not been closely examined

throughout and in many places soundings are scanty, requiring

considerable caution when entering.

3.44 Cape Brewster (15°06'S., 124°54'E.), located in the NE part

of Brunswick Bay, is steep, rocky, and thickly covered with

brush. Bat Islet, located close off the cape, consists of a mass of

sandstone which is connected to the cape by a narrow ridge of

rocks. The cape and the islet are similar in appearance, both being rocky and barren.

3.44 Cape Wellington (15°10'S., 124°50'E.), about 5.5 miles SW

of Cape Brewster, terminates in a narrow point fringed with

foul ground. The shore S of the cape terminates in a second

point about 1 mile SSW and then trends NE to form an irregular peninsula. Several islets surrounded by foul ground lie centered about 4 miles SW of Cape Wellington; at half-ebb strong

tide rips have been observed E of these islets. A dangerous

rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 5 miles WSW

of the cape; another dangerous rock, reported in 1987, lies

about 3 miles WNW of the cape.

3.44 High Bluff (15°16'S., 124°41'E.), 10 miles WSW of Cape

Wellington, is formed of perpendicular cliffs about 76m high.

It is located at the NW extremity of an irregularly-shaped peninsula which separates Hanover Bay from Port George IV, to

the S. There is a low rocky point about 1.5 miles E of High

Bluff which forms the W entrance point of Hanover Bay.

3.44 Adieu Point (15°15'S., 124°35'E.), the N extremity of Augustus Island, is a table-topped, rocky bluff about 61m high,

which appears as two humps from seaward. A chain of islets

and reefs, terminating in Lucus Islet, extends 4.5 miles NW

from the point.

3.45 Islands and dangers in Brunswick Bay.—Desfontaines Island (15°02'S., 124°50'E.), 30m high, lies 6 miles

NW of Cape Brewster with several islets off its W shore, and

Low Rock lies about 2.5 miles to the ESE. An unnamed island,

52m high, lies 3 miles NNW of Desfontaines Island and there

are several small islets in the vicinity of the unnamed island.

3.45 Bernouilli Island (15°02'S., 124°45'E.), 60m high, lies

about 4.5 miles W of Desfontaines Island and has several islets

off its NE and W shores. A dangerous rock, with a depth of less

than 1.8m, lies about 2 miles ENE of the island.

3.45 The D’Arcole Islands (15°08'S., 124°35'E.), centered about

10 miles WSW of Bernouilli Island, lie scattered over an area

about 10 miles square, with Forbin Island at the E extremity;

Commerso Island and Jackson Island to the S; Browne Island,

Rocky Islands, and Duguesclin Island to the W; and three isolated rocks to the N. The highest of the group is Duguesclin Island at 41m. The S islands appear to be surrounded by foul

ground, but the entire area has not been completely examined.

3.45 White Islet (15°14'S., 124°19'E.), about 18.5 miles NW of

Adieu Point, is 9m high and covered with white guano. It lies

on a reef about 2 miles long, which dries 5m at its N end and

has a depth of 3.7m at its S end.

3.45 A 3.6m shoal lies 6.5 miles ENE of White Island and a 6.1m

patch is located about the same distance to the NE.

3.46 The Prince Regent River (15°16'S., 124°51'E.), entered about 5 miles S of Cape Wellington, at the head of Brunswick Bay, is available to small vessels with local knowledge.

The entrance channel, which is approached E of the islets SW

of Cape Wellington, is deep, but becomes narrow and somewhat tortuous with reefs fringing the numerous islets within,

thus reducing the fairway to a width of about 0.25 mile in places.

3.46 Tidal currents vary with the width of the channel, but reach 7

knots in the narrow parts during springs.

3.46 St. George Basin (15°24'S., 125°01'E.), roughly 10 miles in

diameter, lies about 11 miles within the entrance to the Prince

Regent River and provides good shelter to vessels able to enter.

Several islets and rocks lie in the N part of the basin, the largest

being St. Andrews Island, and on the NE shore there are two

conspicuous hills of fort-like appearance.

3.46 The upper reaches of the Prince Regent River, from the SE

end of St. George Basin, runs straight in a SE direction for

about 14 miles between rocky hills rising up to 120m. Although depths in the fairway are reported to be from 7.3 to

14.6m, numerous islets and dangers border the channel and local knowledge is necessary. The river continues for about 50

miles into the interior, but is winding and shoal in its upper

part.

3.46 Anchorage.—St. George Basin appears to be deep, however,

the E and S shores have not been closely examined. There is no

extensive anchorage until above St. Andrew Island, where a

vessel with local knowledge can anchor, in depths of 5.5 to

25m, between the NW shore and the above islands, out of the

strength of the tidal currents.

3.47 Hanover Bay (15°17'S., 124°46'E.) is entered between High Bluff and the W extremity of the reef extending
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 65

Pub. 175

from the islets SW of Cape Wellington. The E side of the bay is

formed by Uwins Island, lying in the entrance to the Prince Regent River, and the W side by the peninsula of which High

Bluff is the N extremity.

3.47 Anchorage.—Good anchorage, in depths of 14 to 22m, excellent holding ground, can be taken nearly anywhere in Hanover Bay. The anchorage is reported safe except in strong

NNW winds. Vessels usually approach from the N just E of the

islets about 3 miles NE of High Bluff.

3.47 Port George IV (15°22'S., 124°39'E.), entered between

High Bluff and Adieu Point, extends about 14 miles S and terminates in Augustus Water, a narrow inlet at its head. Although

the harbor affords good anchorage and excellent shelter, the approaches are somewhat encumbered with dangers which in

places have not been surveyed. It is recommended that only

vessels with local knowledge attempt this anchorage and then

only in daylight.

3.47 Entrance Island (15°17'S., 124°37'E.) lies in the middle of

the entrance to Port George IV and is conspicuous due to the

light-colored reddish cliffs, 60m high, at its NE extremity. A

dangerous patch, which dries, lies about 2 miles NE of the island and Hummock Island, so named for its shape, is located

about 2 miles to the S of Entrance Island. A shoal was reported

(1998) to lie 1 mile NE of the red cliffs of Entrance Island,

fronting High Bluff.

3.47 Depths—Limitations.—The channel E of Entrance Island

is wide, deep, and except for the drying patch NE of the island,

clear of dangers. The light-reddish cliffs on the NE extremity

of Entrance Island form a good mark for making this channel

and vessels would best approach it on a SSE heading.

3.47 The channel W of Entrance Island is encumbered with reef

and rocks, but there is a narrow intricate fairway SE of Adieu

Point which can be taken by small vessels with extensive local

knowledge.

3.47 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can take anchorage, in depths of 16 to 18m, mud, between Entrance Island

and Hummock Island. Anchorage is also available, in a depth

of 18.3m, mud about 1 mile E of Hummock Island.

3.47 Directions.—Vessels proceeding to Port George IV generally approach from the W by proceeding 3 miles S of White Island and thence steering to a position 2 miles SW of the SW

end of Browne Island, in order to avoid the reefs NE of Vulcan

Island (15°14'S., 124°23'E.). Course is then altered for High

Bluff, bearing 116°, until the cliffs on the NE extremity of Entrance Island bear SSE, when a heading for the E channel may

be taken.

3.47 Navigation above Hummock Island requires extensive local

knowledge due to the limited surveys of the area.

3.48 Augustus Island (15°21'S., 124°33'E.) is high, rocky,

and mostly covered with stunted trees and scrub. From its N

extremity, Adieu Point (15°15'S., 124°35'E.), the E coast of

the island forms the W side of the Port George IV, and is high

and rocky with numerous islets and rocks close offshore. The

W shore of the island is very irregular with several bays and inlets, but it is unsurveyed with numerous rocks and islets lying

off most of its various points.

3.48 Rogers Strait separates the SE coast of Augustus Island from

the mainland, but is encumbered with islets, rocks and shoals.

It is used primarily by small vessels with local knowledge

which find sheltered anchorage in the bay area SW of Brecknock Islet, the westernmost of the two largest islets in the

strait.

3.48 Wildcat Reefs (15°17'S., 124°08'E.), two drying reefs about

1.5 miles apart in an E-W direction, each with a head that dries

from 7 to 7.6m, lie between 23 and 28 miles W of Adieu Point.

A shoal, with a depth of 7.3m, lies about 2 miles NNW of the

middle of the W reef. Drying rocks lie up to 1.25 miles S of the

reef.

3.48 Red Island (15°13'S., 124°15'E.), 35m high, lies about 6

miles NE of the NE extremity of Wildcat Reefs and is a rounded mass of dark red sandstone with low perpendicular cliffs.

There is a little stunted vegetation on the summit. A reef,

which dries 0.3m, lies about 0.5 mile W of Red Islet.

3.48 Violet Shoal, with a depth of 0.6m, lies 2 miles NW of Red

Islet. Orange Shoal, with a depth of 1.5m, lies 1.5 miles NNE

of the islet.

3.48 Osborn Reefs (15°09'S., 124°12'E.), consisting of two reefs

1 mile apart, lie about 5 miles NW of Red Islet. The N reef

dries 0.6m; the S reef 0.3m.

3.49 Rainbow Shoals extend from 1.25 to 3.5 miles SSW

of Red Islet and consist of a chain of reefs, one of which dries

7m. A shoal, with a depth of 10.1m, lies midway between the S

end of these reefs and the N extremity of Champagny Island,

about 3 miles ESE.

3.49 The Champagny Islands (15°09'S., 124°14'E.), consisting

of the main island of that name together with the islets and

rocks surrounding it, and Degerando Island, 2 miles SW, lie on

a bank of foul ground centered about 20 miles WSW of Adieu

Point. Champagny Island is 53m high near its NE end and appears as a light-colored rocky formation thickly covered with

scrub. The small islets NE, S, and SW of it are similar in appearance.

3.49 Degerando Island is 32m high and lies on the end of the reef

extending SW from Champagny Island; the island is surrounded with foul ground. Two islets lie off the E extremity of Degerando Island, and a reef, which dries 6m, lies close off the W

extremity; a rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies close N

of the reef. A reef which dries 1.8m lies about 2.75 miles SE of

Degerando Island.

3.49 Degerando Light (15°20'S., 124°11'E.) is shown from a

white round metal hut on the W end of the island.

3.49 Caution.—The passage between the Champagny Islands

and Wildcat Reefs has a least charted depth of 9.1m, however,

the E approach between the Vulcan Islets and Red Islet has not

been closely examined and caution is advised.

3.50 The Heywood Islands (15°20'S., 124°23'E.), three in

number with numerous surrounding islets, rocks, and reefs, lie

centered about 6 miles E of the Champagny Islands, and are

separated from the latter by a strait which has been inadequately surveyed. Drying patches and other dangers extend SE from

Degerando Island into the strait and vessels without extensive

local knowledge are not recommended to attempt it.

3.50 Tidal currents during the falling tide have been observed in

the above strait at a rate of 6 knots, and strong rips and eddies

have been seen near its S end where the bottom is uneven and

the general area unsurveyed.

3.50 Byam Martin Island (15°24'S., 124°21'E.), the S of the
66 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

Heywood Islands, rises to a height of 67m near its N end; the

waters around it are unsurveyed.

3.50 The Vulcan Islets (15°14'S., 124°23'E.), the largest of which

attains a height of 88m, lie about 3.5 miles WNW of the N extremity of the Heywood Islands. Reefs have been reported to

extend up to 5 miles NNE and 3 miles NE of the main islet, and

others lie between the group and Adieu Point.

3.50 Caution.—In 1984, the Vulcan Islets were reported to lie

1.25 miles ESE of their charted positions.

Camden Sound to King Sound

3.51 Camden Sound (15°26'S., 124°24'E.) is bounded on

the N and NE by the islands of the Bonaparte Archipelago, on

the E by the mainland coast, and to the S by Wilson Point. The

N part of the sound is unsurveyed, but the islands, numerous

rocks, and dangers are known to exist. The N entrance of the

sound between the Heywood Islands and Augustus Island appears to be foul.

3.51 Wilson Point (15°33'S., 124°24'E.), the rocky S entrance

point of Camden Sound, rises steeply to a hill 66m high about

0.25 mile within. Battery Point, 3 miles NE of Wilson Point, is

flat, rocky, and about 7m high.

3.51 The Slate Islets, four in number, are between 5 and 43m

high, and lie close off Wilson Point. Two of these islets, which

lie closest inshore, are connected to Wilson Point and to each

other by coral reef. The outer two islets, which are separated

from the inner by a channel 0.15 mile wide, are connected to

each other by drying reef which extends up to 0.2 mile S of the

extremity of the S islet.

3.51 Bumpus Islet, 1 mile N of the Slate Islets, is barren, rocky,

and 24m high. It is surrounded by drying reef, extending up to

0.15 mile from the S side. Between this reef and that extending

from Slate Islets, there is a channel 0.5 mile wide with a least

depth of 18.3m.

3.51 Rice Rocks are two isolated pinnacles about 0.2 mile apart in

a N-S direction which dry up to 1.8m; the S rock lies a little

over 1 mile N of Bumpus Rock.

3.52 Sampson Inlet (15°31'S., 124°28'E.), entered on the

NE side of the bay between Battery Point and Wilson Point, is

deep and narrow widening at its E end into a well sheltered

bay. Small vessels with local knowledge proceed through the

inlet which is only about 100m wide, but steep-to, with depths

of 14 to 15m, and enter the bay where good anchorage, sheltered all around, can be taken, in 9.1 to 14.6m, mud and clay,

good holding ground.

3.52 Brecknock Harbor and Camden Harbor lie in the NE part of

Camden Sound, the former being entered between the SW extremity of Augustus Island and the mainland S, and the latter

located approximately 4 miles to the SE. Both these harbors

are encumbered with islets and rocks which restrict the anchorage to the use of small vessels with local knowledge.

3.52 New Islet (15°28'S., 124°30'E.), located in the middle of the

entrance to Brecknock Harbor, lies 4 miles NE of Battery Point

and has two above-water rocks close off its SW extremity. Four

islets lie in a semi-circle about 0.5 mile off the N side of the islet and Needle Rock, 6m high, lies off the S side. There is a

clear channel with depths of 11 to 29m on either side of New

Islet, but the tidal currents are strong and caution is advised.

3.52 Granite Islet (15°29'S., 124°36'E.) lies about 6 miles ESE

of New Islet on the E side of the approach to Camden Harbor.

The latter harbor, although deep in places, is encumbered with

rocks and shoal ridges rendering it undesirable even for small

vessels.

3.53 Hope Point (15°37'S., 124°24'E.) is located about 4.5

miles S of Wilson Point. The coast between these points is

rocky and broken by reddish cliffs from 30 to 60m high. Bluff

Hill, 88m high, rises 1.5 miles NNE of Hope Point and is

wooded with reddish cliffy slopes descending to the sea.

3.53 Deception Bay (15°38'S., 124°25'E.), entered between Hope

Point and Buckland Point, approximately 1 mile S, is free from

dangers except at its N and S ends which are shoal with fringing reef at the shoreline. The latter point is low and rocky, with

reddish cliffs close S of it. A ridge of hills extending S from the

point reaches a height of 44m about 0.3 mile within, and in

conjunction with Hope Point and the hills to the E, provides

good shelter within the bay during all but W winds. The portion of the bay with depths of over 5.5m is only 1 mile in extent

and it affords anchorage only to small vessels able to maneuver

within its confines.

3.53 Hall Point (15°40'S., 124°22'E.), the W extremity of an islet

2.5 miles SW of Buckland Point, is fairly steep and fringed by

reef. The islet rises to an isolated rocky summit, 81m high,

which is covered with trees and appears wedge-shaped when

seen from N or S, being steepest on its E side. The islet is connected to the mainland by a sandy spit which covers at high

water, and a large rock, 20m high, lies close off its N extremity.

3.53 Between Hall Point and Buckland Point, a small bay is divided by Kid Islet, rocky, 10m high and connected to the shore

by a sand spit; this bay affords shelter to small vessels except in

N and W winds.

3.53 Tidal currents off the coast between Wilson Point and Hall

Point set NW on the ebb and SE on the flood, with a maximum

rate of about 2 knots at springs.

3.53 Prior Point (15°43'S., 124°23'E.), about 3 miles SSE of Hall

Point, is the N extremity of a narrow, rocky tongue of land

which rises at its S end to a height of 79m. A coral reef, with a

depth of 3.7m, lies 0.5 mile NW of the point; the reef is identifiable by eddies over it when the current is running.

3.53 The Claret Islets, a group of rocky islets with a maximum

height of 24m, lie in the entrance to the bay formed between

Hall and Prior Point. The depths in this bay are irregular at its

N and S extremities, but shelve slowly towards a white sandy

beach at the center of the bay. Good anchorage in 8m, sand bottom, away from tidal effects, can be found 0.6 mile off the

beach. The anchorage is sheltered from winds between N and

SE.

3.53 The coast between Prior Point and a point about 10 miles S,

is generally low, straight, and rocky affording no shelter. The

waters off this shore have not been closely examined, but a coral reef lies off the S point extending to Lizard Islet, about 3.5

miles farther S.

3.54 Doubtful Bay (16°03'S., 124°02'E.), entered by Foam

Pass between Raft Point (16°04'S., 124°27'E.) and a rocky,

high island, about 2 miles NNE, is nearly 10 miles long in a

NE-SW direction, but has not been closely examined. The island forming the N entrance point is the S extremity of a chain
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 67

Pub. 175

of high, rocky islands nearly 10 miles long; the coast E of the

islands has not been surveyed.

3.54 Depths in Foam Pass apparently are not less than 18.3m

throughout the fairway; however, there are two islets located on

the S side of the fairway; the E one, known as Steep Islet, attains an elevation of 149m and lies 1.5 miles ENE of Raft

Point. Within Doubtful Bay, general depths of 18.3 to 30m

have been reported, but a reef, with a depth of 1.5m, lies more

or less in the middle of the area and the waters in the SE part

are unsurveyed.

3.54 Anchorage.—Doubtful Bay, being protected by the reefs

surrounding Montgomery Island, about 15 miles WNW, affords good shelter with excellent holding ground. However, because the bay and its approaches are only partially surveyed,

only vessels with local knowledge should attempt to enter. A

range of rocky hills, attaining heights of up to 275m, backs the

S and E shores of the bay, and Red Hill, about 8.5 miles E of

Raft Point, is conical, forming a good mark for entering. The

best anchorage is reported to lie about 2.5 miles E to ESE of

Steep Islet, in a depth of 11m.

3.54 Tidal currents in Foam Pass have been estimated to reach 4

knots; eddies have been observed in the narrower parts of the

passage.

3.55 Success Strait (15°57'S., 124°33'E.), the W of two

passages leading to George Water, below, is formed by a large

unnamed island at the N end of Doubtful Bay. The passage,

which is 6 miles long and about 0.2 mile wide, has depths of

18.3 to 31m and is clear except at its N end where there are two

small reefs, which dry. The N approach to the strait is shoal

with drying patches and the channel lies close N of the unnamed island.

3.55 Tidal currents in Success Strait are strong.

3.55 George Water (15°52'S., 124°35'E.), a landlocked bay located N of Doubtful Bay, has depths of about 27m over a considerable portion of its length, but its entrance is somewhat

obstructed N of Success Strait. It affords good anchorage to

vessels with local knowledge, but surveys are incomplete and

caution is required. The N part of the bay is obstructed by a

large mud bar and the NE section constricts to a small bay encumbered with islets and shoals.

3.56 The Montgomery Islands (15°57'S., 124°12'E.) consist of one low sandy island, which is densely wooded, lying

about 15 miles WNW of Raft Point, and several barren rocky

islets lying E of the main island. They all lie on the extensive

coral reef which mostly dries, but is generally unsurveyed off

its E and S sides. 

3.56 High Cliffy Islet, 22m high, lies on the E extremity of this

reef about 7 miles E of the largest island and 5 miles WNW of

Lizard Islet; islets extend along the SE side of the reef for a distance of 4 miles SW of High Cliffy Islet.

3.56 The Breakwater, a long coral spit about 1 mile wide, extends

7 miles N from the NW side of the main reef and terminates

about 9 miles NW of the largest of the Montgomery Islands. It

dries from 1.5 to 5m and forms a natural barrier during E and

W winds, which can be rather closely approached, especially

on its W side, by vessels seeking shelter.

3.56 Cockell Reefs (15°45'S., 124°05'E.), which are mostly dry,

lie from close off to 6 miles N of the N extremity of the breakwater. Cockell Bank, consisting of sand, is located in the SW

part of these reefs and dries 7.3m. There are numerous detached shoals and dangers off Cockell Reefs, and due to the

strong currents and discolored water often seen in this vicinity,

the area should be given a wide berth.

3.56 Reyne Shoal (15°42'S., 124°10'E.), a rocky steep-to shoal

patch with a least depth of 5.5m, lies about 7 miles NE of the

center of Cockell Reefs; Thorne Reef, a small coral head which

dries 1.8m, lies 2 miles SSW of this shoal.

3.56 Barron Banks (15°46'S., 124°18'E.) consists of two isolated

coral banks, with depths of 11.9m and 14.6m, lying from 7.5 to

10.75 miles ESE of Thorne Reef.

3.57 Niblock Rocks (15°49'S., 123°59'E.), isolated and

dangerous, lie with a depth of less than 1.8m, about 4 miles

NW of the N extremity of the breakwater. The NW side of

these rocks is steep-to with depths of about 26m close by. Nicolle Reef, coral, dries 2.8m and lies about 2.5 miles NNE of

Niblock Rocks. It is recommended that vessels without local

knowledge not attempt to pass between these dangers and

Cockell Reefs.

3.57 Denman Shoal (15°43'S., 123°56'E.), sand, with a least

depth of 18.3m, lies 9 miles WNW of Cockell Bank. Lorikeet

Shoal, with a least depth of 10.4m, lies 5.5 miles NE of Denman Shoal.

3.57 Viney Island (16°01'S., 124°01'E.), about 11 miles WSW of

the largest Montgomery Island, is 43m high, rocky, and covered with grass. The N coast is cliffy with reef and rocks off it,

and a spit on which there are several rocks, including one 9m

high, extends about 0.75 mile WNW from the W extremity of

the island. A detached shoal, with a rock which dries 0.9m on

it, lies close outside the seaward extremity of this spit.

3.57 The Pyramid, a small barren rocky islet 58m high and conical in shape, lies 2.5 miles SSE of Viney Island. An islet, 34m

high, lies about 0.25 mile SSW of The Pyramid.

3.57 Caeser Island (16°04'S., 123°56'E.), 28m high, rocky, and

covered with grass, lies 5 miles SW of Viney Island.

3.57 Scaddan Island, 6 miles SW of Caesar Islet, is 64m high,

rocky and covered with grass. A rock, which dries 1.2m, lies

0.2 mile NW of the NW extremity of the island.

3.57 Caution.—The waters between Caesar Islet and Scaddan Island are unsurveyed, but two islets are known to exist to the

SE.

3.58 Collier Bay (16°12'S., 124°15'E.), entered between

Raft Point (16°04'S., 124°27'E.) and an unnamed point 32

miles WSW, extends about 19 miles SSE, but is almost completely unsurveyed. The shores are fronted by islets and rocks,

many of which lie on the outer edge of what appears to be a

rather extensive and shoal shore bank extending along the E

side of the bay. Past reports have indicated that the coastline

charted within the bay is far from accurate and vessels attempting to enter should do so with great caution.

3.58 Collier Bay may be entered E or W of the large reef on

which the Montgomery Islands are located. The E entrance, between High Cliffy Islet and Lizard Islet, is probably preferred,

but several dangers are located within the bay S and SW of the

former islet. The W entrances between Viney island and The

Pyramid, and between Caesar Islet and Scaddan Islet are unsurveyed and little is known about them.
68 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

3.58 Eagle Point (16°11'S., 124°25'E.), about 6.5 miles SSW of

Raft Point, is a rocky spur extending N from a high range of

hills. A rocky patch, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about

0.5 mile W of the point.

3.58 The bay formed between Raft Point and Eagle Point is

fringed by a broad coastal bank, which dries. A vessel might

take temporary anchorage off this bank and just within the

points, where depths of 9.1 to 12.8m are charted.

3.58 High Bluff (16°17'S., 124°23'E.), about 6.5 miles S of Eagle

Point, is formed of gray slate. The entire shoreline between the

bluff and Eagle Point is backed by a coastal range of moderate

height which is remarkably rugged and has conical peaks scattered along its length.

3.59 Walcott Inlet (16°22'S., 124°22'E.), entered through

Yule Entrance, about 3 miles S of High Bluff, is a landlocked

bay about 5 miles wide and 32 miles in length. It provides excellent shelter for vessels able to enter, but the entrance channel

appears to be blocked by a drying sand bank. Vessels have proceeded in at high water and reported depths of 27m within this

bank, but the channel is narrow and unsurveyed. 

3.59 The tidal currents reach 8 knots at springs, causing whirlpools and violent eddies. The shores of the inlet are bordered

by hills 150 to 250m high, but little is known about the depths

within.

3.59 Fletcher Island (16°21'S., 124°21'E.) is charted on the edge

of the drying shorebank about 2 miles SW of Yule Entrance.

An islet lies close S of Fletcher Island, and two islets and several rocks lie about 3 miles to the NE just N of Yule Entrance.

3.59 Secure Bay (16°27'S., 124°23'E.), entered about 3.5 miles S

of Fletcher Island, through a narrow islet-strewn channel

known as The Funnel, is from 0.75 mile to 3 miles wide and

about 12 miles long. The bay, which is divided in its center by

a narrow cliffy channel with an islet in its middle, provides

good shelter for vessels able to enter, but is unsurveyed and has

strong tidal currents in the entrance. The hills surrounding the

bay are steep and rugged; the depths in the center of the bay are

reported to be deep, but little else is known of the general hydrography.

3.60 Shoal Bay (16°25'S., 124°16'E.), entered through a

chain of red sandstone islets extending across its entrance,

about 2 miles W of Secure Bay, is about 4 miles long and 2

miles wide. The shores of the bay are steep at the entrance, but

become flat farther in before gradually rising again at its head.

There are depths of 18.3 to 22m for about 1 mile within the entrance shoaling rapidly thereafter to 7.3m or less. The bay has

not been surveyed. 

3.60 Anchorage, in a depth of 7.3m, can be obtained in Shoal Bay

by vessels with local knowledge.

3.60 Tidal currents in Shoal Bay decrease rapidly towards its head

where they rarely exceed 0.5 knot.

3.60 The W shore of Collier Bay is backed by a range of barren

rocky hills from 150 to 275m high, rising abruptly from the

sea. Several unnamed islands and islets, between which dangers probably exist, lie off the coast, but they have not been

closely examined. Two larger islands lie about 10 miles off the

NW part of the W coast. The N island, with several islets off its

N extremity, is located about 3 miles SE of The Pyramid.

3.60 Talbot Bay (16°18'S., 123°52'E.), entered between the W

entrance point (16°13'S., 123°56'E.) of Collier Bay and a point

6 miles W, is unsurveyed and heavily encumbered with islets,

reefs and shoals. Dugong Bay, an extension of Talbot Bay, lies

about 10 miles S of the entrance to the latter, but the approach

is filled with rocks.

Approaches to King Sound and Yampi Sound

3.61 Browse Islet (14°06'S., 123°33'E.) lies N of the offshore tracks about 82 miles NNW of Champagny Island Light.

It is 6m high near its N end, and of coral formation covered

with white sand; slight vegetation has been observed upon it

which apparently varies with the seasons. The islet is surrounded by a coral reef which dries on the NW and N sides to a

height of 1.2m; the E side appears to afford the best landing for

boats, but only at high water. Anchorage is difficult as the reef

is steep-to and the bottom close to its vicinity is uneven. 

3.61 A historic wreck lies 1 mile ESE of the islet. In 1984, a depth

of 15.2m lies 1 mile E of the islet. In 1986,this shoal was not

found, but a depth of 25.6m was reported to lie 0.8 mile SE of

the islet.

3.61 Browse Islet Light is shown from a white, metal framework

tower with a white hut adjacent to it. A racon is situated at the

light structure.

3.61 Directions.—Vessels proceeding NE or SW off the NW

coast of Australia frequently make Browse Islet Light to establish an accurate position. Vessels proceeding to King Sound or

Yampi Sound from NE are recommended to make the same

light, especially if navigating by dead reckoning, and then steer

SSW for the vicinity of Adele Island.

3.61 Large vessels approaching Browse Islet from NE should exercise caution to avoid Echuca Shoal, about 24 miles ENE of

the islet and Heywood Shoal, about 26 miles NNE of the latter.

Both these shoals could be dangerous to such vessels, especially in heavy weather.

3.62 Adele Island (15°31'S., 123°09'E.) lies approximately 45 miles offshore, NW of the mainland peninsula which separates Collier Bay from King Sound. The island is from 2 to

3m high, sandy, and covered with bushes and grass. It is surrounded by an extensive drying reef, steep-to, and of coral formation, with patches of sand scattered over much of its length.

A sand cay on the N part of the reef has a height of 0.3m, and

much of the rest of the reef dries from 1.2 to 2.7m.

3.62 Adele Island Light is shown from a red, metal framework

tower close S of the N extremity of the island. A racon is situated at the light structure.

3.62 Fraser Inlet, a narrow inlet in the NE side of the reef surrounding Adele Island, can be entered by small vessels seeking

shelter. Although the entrance and the inlet are deep, the channel is narrow and fringed with dangers, and it should only be

attempted at low water and with local knowledge.

3.62 Barcoo Shoal (15°39'S., 122°55'E.), about 1.25 miles long

in a NW-SE direction, lies about 16 miles SW of Adele Island

Light and has a least depth of 3.9m, coral. Depths of less than

37m generally surround the shallowest part of this danger to a

distance of 0.5 to 1 mile.

3.62 Adele Island Shoal (15°42'S., 123°14'E.), with a least depth

of 8.m, lies about 13 miles SSE of Adele Island Light with

depths of less than 18m extending up to 2 miles S, and 4 miles
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 69

Pub. 175

N of it. There are heavy tide rips S of Adele Island Shoal during the peak of the tidal currents.

3.62 Frost Shoal (15°47'S., 123°21'E.), with a least depth of

5.5m, lies about 8 miles SE of Adele Island Shoal, on a bank

with depths of less than 37m. There are usually heavy tide rips

over this shoal during the strength of the tidal currents.

3.62 Tasmanian Shoal (15°53'S., 123°21'E.), with a least depth

of 14m, lies about 7 miles S of Frost Shoal.

3.62 Tidal currents in the vicinity of Adele Island are strong with

rates of 2 to 4 knots during springs. Along the W side of the

reef surrounding the island, the flood sets S to SSE and the ebb

N to NNW. To the N and S of the reef the flood and ebb currents, respectively, maintain an E-W character with rates more

commonly at or near the stronger levels in this vicinity.

3.63 Churchill Reef (15°28'S., 123°15'E.), an extensive

coral reef which dries 2.7m on its W part, is separated from the

E side of the reef surrounding Adele Island by a channel about

1.25 miles wide with depths of 73 to 110m along its W side.

The 37m curve off the W side of Churchill Reef is usually

clearly defined by the discoloration of the water between it and

the reef E of it. 

3.63 The waters N and E of Churchill Reef are unsurveyed and

the eastern limits of this reef are unknown. The bottom in this

area appears uneven and numerous uncharted dangers may exist.

3.63 Albert Reef (15°37'S., 123°20'E.), consisting of coral, dries

2.1m and lies about 13 miles SE of Adele Island. Another reef,

which dries 1.2m, lies close off the NW extremity of Albert

Reef, and a shoal, with a depth of 3.3m, is located about 2

miles NNW of the latter.

3.63 Beagle Reef (15°20'S., 123°31'E.), about 23 miles ENE of

Adele Island, is composed of dead coral and patches of white

sand. A sandbank in its center, about 0.75 mile in extent, dries

7m and forms a good mark at low water.

3.63 Dingo Reef (15°19'S., 123°37'E.), which dries 0.6m, lies 4.5

miles E of Beagle Reef, and Fox Shoal, with a depth of 6.7m,

lies 5.5 miles SE of Dingo Reef. The bottom between these

dangers is uneven and other shoals may exist.

3.63 Mavis Reef (15°31'S., 123°36'E.), on which there is a sand

cay which dries 6.1m, lies 11 miles SSE of Beagle Reef. Three

small drying reefs lie within 2 miles of the NW extremity of

Mavis Reef. A drying rock lies about 2 miles W of the southernmost drying reef.

3.63 Rosella Shoal (15°35'S., 123°50'E.), with a depth of 8.5m,

lies about 13 miles ESE of the SE extremity of Mavis Reef. A

depth of 11m was reported (1967) to lie about 6.25 miles NNE

of Rosella Shoal and a depth of 12.8m was reported (1964) to

lie about 5 miles NE of the same shoal.

The Buccaneer Archipelago—West Part

3.64 The Buccaneer Archipelago lies in the N approach to

Yampi Sound and the NE approach to King Sound. It consists

of numerous islands, islets, and rocks all generally located off

the NW extremity of the peninsula separating Collier Bay from

King Sound. There are channels between many of the islands,

some of which are available to deep-draft vessels; however, the

tidal currents are strong, reaching 6 to 10 knots in some of the

restricted areas, where violent tide rips and eddies are formed.

3.64 Caffarelli Island (16°02'S., 123°17'E.), the westernmost of

the islands in the Buccaneer Archipelago, is rocky and covered

with coarse grass and scrub. The summit of the island, which

rises to 63m, is located at the W end; the rest of the island is

formed of hills about 49m high. The coast of Caffarelli Island

is indented with several bays, but they all dry and are fringed

with dense mangroves. The S coast is steep-to, but the N coast

is fringed by drying reef with islets and rocks on it. An islet,

37m high, lies on the edge of the reef which extends from the

W extremity of the island; a rock, awash, lies close S of this islet.

3.64 Caffarelli Island Light is shown from a white metal column

situated on the summit at the W end of the island.

3.64 Caution.—Tidal currents W of Caffarelli Island are strong,

setting SSW to SE on the flood and NNW to NNE on the ebb.

Vessels should navigate with care as the currents shift direction

N and S, respectively, of the island.

3.65 Thornbury Reef (16°02'S., 123°15'E.), which dries

1.2m, lies 1.5 miles W of Caffarelli Island and is small and

steep-to. Its position can usually be ascertained using the tidal

eddies around it. There is a deep clear channel between Thornbury Reef and the islet off the W extremity of Caffarelli Island.

3.65 Brue Reef (15°56'S., 123°02'E.), which dries 6.7m, lies

about 15 miles WNW of Caffarelli Island Light and has numerous boulders on it, mostly at the N end. The reef is isolated and

generally steep-to all around.

3.65 Anchorage can be taken in good weather on the bank about 1

mile E of Brue Reef, in a depth of 24m, sand and coral. The area should be cleared if the weather becomes unsettled, as a

heavy swell can quickly rise in the vicinity.

3.65 Shepards Patch (16°01'S., 122°55'E.), with a least depth of

16.5m, lies with its shallowest part about 8 miles SW of Brue

Reef. Etheridge Patch, with a depth of 18.3m, lies about 6.5

miles SW of Shepards Patch, and is the shallowest part of a

bank, with depths of less than 37m, which extend S from positions 3.5 miles NNW and 2 miles SE, respectively, from this

patch. The tidal currents set at a considerable rate over these

two patches and vessels should pass SW of them.

3.65 Breading Patch (16°05'S., 123°02'E.), with a least depth of

14.6m, lies about 3.75 miles ENE of Etheridge Patch, and nearly in the center of the narrow bank with depths of less than

37m.

3.66 Fraser Rock (16°07'S., 123°04'E.), with a least depth

of 1.7m, is a dangerous pinnacle rock which lies 2.5 miles SE

of Breading Patch. Banks, with least depths of 12.8m and

14.6m, lie SSE and NNW, respectively, of Fraser Rock. Fitz

Gerald Patch, with a least depth of 11.8m, lies 4 miles SE of

Fraser Rock. The depths between Breading Patch and Fitz Gerald Patch are irregular; long lines of tide rips are seen during

springs.

3.66 Pincombe Reef (16°05'S., 123°10'E.), a pinnacle which

dries 1.8m and is steep-to all around, lies 6.5 miles WSW of

Caffarelli Island and is usually marked by eddies. The tidal

swirls around this rock make it appear to be much larger than

its actual size.

3.66 Cleft Islet (16°02'S., 123°21'E.), about 2 miles E of the E

extremity of Caffarelli Island, is the highest of a group of five

islets located close together on a coral reef extending 2 miles E
70 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

from its position. The islet, split in two by a chasm, rises to a

bare summit at its E end, 56m high, and forms an excellent

mark from seaward.

3.66 A rocky islet, 8m high, lies 0.5 mile W of Cleft Islet and

there is deep water at a distance of 0.1 mile all around it. Drying reefs lie between this islet and the E extremity of Caffarelli

Island.

3.66 Caution.—In 1983, tide rips were reported close W of Cleft

Islet. A depth of 5.8m lies 0.25 mile N of the NW point of Cleft

Islet.

3.67 Barrett Rock (16°04'S., 123°20'E.), 0.3m high, lies

1.75 miles SSE of the E extremity of Caffarelli Island and is

surrounded by drying reef to a distance of 0.25 mile; a detached drying reef lies about 0.4 mile W of this rock.

3.67 Fraser Island, Admiral Island, and King-Hall Island are the

largest of the islands extending about 5 miles ESE from Barrett

Rock, and along with numerous islets and rocks, are all located

on a connecting, drying reef. They are mostly flat-topped and

covered with bushes, the highest elevation obtained, 84m, being near the middle of Admiral Island. Detached reefs fringe

this group, mostly on the N side. Bowles Rock, 1m high, is the

farthest offshore, at a distance of 1.5 miles N of the E extremity

of Admiral Island.

3.68 Powerful Island (16°06'S., 123°26'E.) is separated

from the E extremities of Admiral Island and King-Hall Island

by a deep narrow channel through which the tidal currents flow

with considerable force. The E side of the island is heavily indented and fringed by reef, but the W side is steep and cliffy,

reaching a maximum elevation of 91m at Ram Point, the SW

extremity.

3.68 Dampier’s Monument, 86m high, lies 0.5 mile S of Powerful

Island and is conical in shape with a rounded summit. Although small, the islet is very conspicuous from NE and forms

a good mark from Yampi Sound.

3.68 Sir Frederick Island, 79m high, lies 1 mile W of Dampier’s

Monument and has numerous bays along its rocky coasts

which mostly dry. Reefs and shoal water fringe the island and

the entrances of the bays. Two reefs lie within a distance of

1.25 miles of the W extremity of the island; on the outer reef

there is a rock 12m high, and on the inner reef a rock 17m high.

There are also two islets close off the E extremities of Sir Frederick Island.

3.68 Caution.—The sheltered waters separating Powerful Island,

Sir Frederick Island, and King Hall Island are used for pearl

culture.

3.69 Lord Island and Bryon Island, 66m and 87m high, respectively, are located on the same reef S of Dampier’s Monument. The S coast of Bryon Island is steep-to, the W sides of

both being cliffs fronted by coral reefs. This reef extends a distance of 1 mile NE of Lord Island, with rocks mentioned below.

3.69 The Finch Islets are a group of rocks, from 15 to 47m high,

on the reef lying NE of the N extremity of Lord Island.

3.69 Reefs, which dry, extend 1.25 miles NW of the W extremity

of Byron Island; the outer dries 0.9m, the one between 7m,

with a rock 2m high between it and the island.

3.69 The Gagg Islets are a group of small islets and rocks, ranging

from 21 to 52m high, mostly connected by reef, lying nearly

parallel to the S side of Byron Island (16°10'S., 123°27'E.),

for 3.5 miles, rendering the channel between Byron Island and

Hidden Island dangerous.

3.70 Gibbings Island (16°09'S., 123°31'E.), circular in

shape, with an extreme width of 1.25 miles, lies midway between Byron Island and Margaret Island. It is steep-to at its N

and S extremities, but a coral reef extends 0.35 mile off its W

side and 0.7 mile off its E side. Its summit, which is a bare

rock, is 86m high.

3.70 A patch, which dries 0.3m, lies 0.5 mile SE of the SE extremity of Gibbings Island. Between the patch and the E shore

is a rock 14m high, about 0.75 mile off the mainland, and a

patch of 0.4m, about 0.15 mile from the mainland.

3.70 Dorothy Island, 44m high, is a narrow island E of Gibbings

Island, and encircled by the same reef. It has a rocky islet, 32m

high, close off its NW end.

3.70 Hidden Island (16°15'S., 123°30'E.), the largest of the archipelago, appears as a portion of the mainland, but is separated by a narrow channel. It is of irregular shape, and about 5

miles long, N and S, with an extreme width of 3.25 miles. Its

summit, near the S end, is 135m high; on the N part is a hill,

97m high. The island is covered with low scrub and stunted

gum trees.

3.70 There is a large bay on the SE side of the island, with a mangrove swamp at its head, fronted by mud flats, which form the

N side of Whirlpool Pass.

3.70 The Bayliss Islands (16°09'S., 123°32'E.), a narrow string of

islands connected at low water, lie 0.45 mile off the NE part of

Hidden Island; the N and largest is 56m high. A series of detached reefs extend for a distance of 1.5 miles NW of the Bayliss Islands, on which are four rocks from 1 to 19m high. A reef,

with depths of less than 5.5m, lies parallel to, and about 0.25

mile from, the E coast of the N Bayliss Islands.

3.70 Between the Bayliss Islands and the mainland are a number

of islets and reefs, mostly on the eastern side of the N approach

to Whirlpool Pass; a reef which dries 0.9m lies in the fairway

W of them, about midway between the N extremity of the Bayliss Islands and the SE extremity of Gibbings Island.

3.71 Whirlpool Pass (16°15'S., 123°30'E.) leads between

Hidden Island, on the W, and Chambers Island and Dunvert Island, on the E. It is only 0.2 mile wide at its narrowest part, and

the tidal currents run with great rapidity through it, forming

whirlpools, which restrict navigation only during slack water

by small craft with local knowledge.

3.71 Chambers Island (16°16'S., 123°32'E.), on the E side of

Whirlpool Pass and practically connected with the mainland, is

2.5 miles long and 0.7 mile wide; its summit, 92m high, is at its

E end.

3.71 Several islets from 37 to 55m high are located N and NE of

the E end of the island, between it and the mainland, and form

the E point of the entrance to Whirlpool Pass from the N.

3.71 Dunvert Island, 90m high, lies to the S of Chambers Island,

at right angles to it, being connected by a coral reef which dries

at low water. Steep Head, its S extremity, is a cliffy point, 89m

high, with a reef extending 0.25 mile in a S direction. A rock,

which dries 1m, lies in the middle of the channel 1.25 miles

NNW of Steep Head.
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 71

Pub. 175

3.71 Two islets lie 0.3 and 0.6 mile, respectively, from the E side

of Dunvert Island; between them and the mainland is a shoal

with depths under 5.5m.

The Buccaneer Archipelago—East Part

3.72 The Macleay Islands (15°15'S., 123°41'E.), mostly

connected by a reef, are located at the NE extremity of the islets and dangers forming the Buccaneer Archipelago. They extend in a general N-S direction from 9 to 16 miles N of Yampi

Sound and form a major navigational hazard in the NE approach to that body of water.

3.72 The King Islets (15°52'S., 123°38'E.), 16m and 19m high,

the NW of the group, are located on the W end of a reef 2.5

miles in extent; depths of over 37m will be found 0.4 mile W of

it. Rocks up to 11m high lie near the E and S extremities of the

reef.

3.72 Conway Islet, 9m high, lies N of the E part of King Islets

Reef, on a reef 0.6 mile in extent, practically connected with

the latter. An islet, 4.3m high, is located close SE of Conway

Islet.

3.72 Challis Rocks, the NE of the group, consists of a line of bare

rocks, 3.3m high, located on a reef 1.25 miles in length, about

1.75 miles E of King Islets Reef. Deep water will be found

close E of Challis Rocks.

3.72 Scobell Rocks, 1.3m high, lie on a reef 0.9 mile in extent,

and which dries 6.5m midway between the SE extremity of

King Islets Reef and the largest Macleay Island.

3.73 Macleay Island (15°57'S., 123°42'E.), the largest island of the chain, is a flat-topped grassy island, 69m high, and

2.25 miles in length in a N-S direction; its W side is formed of

steep cliffs, from 49 to 61m high. Near the N end of the island

is a salt-water lagoon nearly cutting the island in two. Two

small islets, 28m and 15m high, lie close off its S end.

3.73 Landing may be effected on either of the two shingle beaches at its S end. No water has been found on the island.

3.73 Crabbe Islet, 24m high, lies 0.5 mile S of Macleay Island, on

the same reef; it is steep-to on its S side.

3.73 Sweeney Patches (16°00'S., 123°44'E.), with a least depth

of 14.6m, are located on a bank 2 miles in length, from 1.5 to

3.5 miles SE of Crabbe Islet. There are heavy tide rips over

these patches during strong winds.

3.73 Gibbings Reefs (15°56'S., 123°45'E.), drying 0.9m at low

water springs, are two dangerous patches, 1.5 miles apart in an

E and W direction. The E reef lies about 5 miles E of the summit of Macleay Island; these reefs should be given a wide

berth, as they are usually hard to distinguish.

3.73 There is deep water to the E and W of the Macleay Islands,

but the channel to the W is preferred as Gibbings Reefs form a

natural danger on the E side. The channel between the S extremity of the Macleay Islands and the W extremity of Koolan

Island, about 7 miles S, is deep, wide and clear, and easily navigated.

3.74 Bathurst Island (16°02'S., 123°31'E.), 94m high

with steep cliffs along the SW coast, lies, along with Irvine Island, on an extensive coral reef, the greater part of which is

covered with sand. A rock, 5.2m high, is located near the edge

of the reef, extending for a distance of 0.45 mile from its N extremity.

3.74 Rocks, 24m and 46m high, are located on the reef which extends over 1 mile from the E side of the island, with a rock,

15m high, between the reef and Kathleen Island, and others as

charted. A detached reef lies awash about 0.75 mile E of the SE

extremity of Bathurst Island.

3.74 Irvine Island (16°05'S., 123°32'E.), 156m high, lies S of

Bathurst Island and is 2.25 miles in length, N and S, and 2.25

miles in breadth. Two bays, both of which dry at low water, lie

on either side of its SE point. The island is covered with stunted gum trees and coarse grass.

3.74 Kathleen Island, 81m, lies off the NE extremity of Irvine Island. Flora Islet, covered with coarse grass and about 24m

high, lies off the NW extremity of Irvine Island. 

3.74 Tanner Islet, marked by a light shown from a concrete tower

on the summit of the islet, lies near the SW side of Irvine Island. A patch of reef, which dries 5m, lies about 0.25 mile off

the W side of Irvine Island.

3.74 McIntyre Islet (15°59'S., 123°32'E.), 57m high, the N island of the above group, is located about 2 miles NNE from the

N extremity of Bathurst Island; a reef extends 0.25 mile off its

S and SE sides, and to a lesser distance elsewhere. A rock,

awash, lies close off its E end. There is a clear channel between

McIntyre Islet and Bathurst Island.

3.74 Lena Reef, which dries 0.3m at low water springs, lies about

0.7 mile NW from McIntyre Islet. It breaks heavily with a NW

swell.

Yampi Sound

3.75 Yampi Sound (16°08'S., 123°38'E.) lies between

Cockatoo Island and Koolan Island on the N and the mainland

on the S. Its shores are rocky, with numerous coves. The coast

ridge, which is from 150 to 180m high, is sterile, a few stunted

gum trees and low scrub being the only vegetation visible, and

the interior has scarcely a more fertile appearance.

3.75 A first port of entry encompasses Yampi Sound. The limits

of the port extend from position 16°13'S, 123°32'E in a N direction 10 miles to a position between Bathurst Island and Irvine Island, then E for 15 miles; then S to the mainland. The S

limit includes the coastline between the W and E limits.

3.75 Yampi Sound can be entered from the NW between Irvine

Island, and Gibbings Island, from the N via Galah Channel between Irvine Island, and Cockatoo Island, or from NE via Parakeet Channel between Cockatoo Island, and Koolan Island.

3.75 Caution.—Numerous uncharted pearl farms, consisting of

fixed or floating structures, along with their associated moorings, are situated in the bays and inlets between Yampi Sound

and Cone Bay. These farms are generally marked by buoys or

beacons, which may be lit, and should be avoided.

3.75 Tides in this area can rise as much as 10m at springs and caution should be exercised to not anchor over shoal areas during

HW.

3.76 Cockatoo Island (16°06'S., 123°37'E.), centered

about 3 miles ESE of Irvine Island, is 3.25 miles long in a

WNW-ESE direction and about 0.5 mile wide. Its summit near

the center is 137m high; there is a conspicuous cone-shaped

hill 55m high at its W extremity. A deep valley extends up the

center of the island in an ESE direction. 
72 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

3.76 Usborne Islet, 55m high and cliffy, lies close E of Cockatoo

Island and is connected to it by reef. The ore berth on Cockatoo

Island at Yampi Sound is described in paragraph 3.81.

3.76 Caution.—Unexploded ordnance lies in an area, with a radius of 0.5 mile, centered about 0.75 mile S of the NW end of the

island, in a depth of 10m. Unexploded ordnance also lies in an

area, with a radius of 0.5 mile, centered about 1.25 miles WSW

of the S end of the island, in a depth of 30m.

3.77 Black Rock (16°05'S., 123°35'E.), 4.6m high, lies 0.4

mile off the W end of Cockatoo Island, with which it is connected by a reef, dry at low water springs. A small reef, which

dries 0.6m, lies 0.25 mile S of Black Rock. A shoal, with a

least depth of 7.3m, lies between 0.2 and 1.1 miles SW of the

W end of Cockatoo Island.

3.77 The Piccaninnies are a group of rocks and shoals which lie

near the middle of Yampi Sound, about 1.5 miles SW of the E

extremity of Cockatoo Island. The E of these rocks, 24m high,

is surrounded by drying reef. The W rock, 13m high, and another rock, 20m high, are located together on a reef about 0.75

mile W of the E rock. A detached reef, which dries 2.4m, lies

about 0.2 mile S of the two westernmost rocks.

3.77 There is a clear deep channel about 0.5 mile wide between

The Piccaninnies and the S side of Cockatoo Island.

3.78 Koolan Island (16°08'S., 123°45'E.), about 1.5 miles

E of Usborne Islet, is separated from the mainland by a narrow

deep channel known as The Canal. The island is 204m high

near its center, 7 miles long in an E and W direction, and has a

maximum breadth of 3 miles at its E end, tapering to the W.

Sanders Point, the NE extremity, is 122m high, with cliffs

along its W extremity.

3.78 Roberts Islet (16°07'S., 123°46'E.) 60m high, lies 0.25 mile

off the W extremity of Sanders Point, with another islet, 33m

high, W of it, between which is a rock which dries 0.3m; both

are covered with scrub and are steep-to on their N sides.

3.78 There are large deposits of ironstone on Koolan Island,

Cockatoo Island, and Irvine Island.

3.78 Tarrant Islet, which is 71m high, lies off the W end of Koolan Island and is connected to it by a drying reef. The island is

0.5 mile long in an E-W direction and 0.1 mile wide. On its N

side it is bare and rocky with steep cliffs.

3.78 The Canal (16°08'S., 123°44'E.) is 0.6 mile wide at its W

end, narrowing considerably toward its E end, where it forms a

dangerous channel, known as The Gutter, through which the

tidal currents run with great velocity. There are depths of 20 to

30m over most of the length of this passage; it is used by large

vessels proceeding to the wharf at Koolan Island.

3.79 Nares Point (16°08'S., 123°42'E.), the S point of the

entrance to the canal, is 71m high, rising within. A light is

shown from Nares Point.

3.79 A reef, which dries 1.2m, lies about 1 mile SW from Nares

Point; between this reef and the point abreast, 38m high, are

other reefs.

3.79 The bights on either side of the latter point afford good anchorage for small craft. From the head of the western bight,

Silver Gull Creek extends about 1 mile SSE and then almost 1

mile NE; fresh water may be obtained from a spring in the

creek. At spring tides vessels with local knowledge and drawing not more than 2.7m can enter the creek from about half

flood to half ebb.

3.79 Margaret Island (16°09'S., 123°35'E.), with a bare conical

summit, 97m high, lies about 7 miles W of Nares Point and

close to the mainland. Woodhouse Point, its NE extremity, is

the W point of approach to Yampi Sound. A reef, which dries

5.5m, extends 0.35 mile N from the point.

Channels to Yampi Sound

3.80 Galah Channel (16°05'S., 123°34'E.), which leads between Irvin Island and Black Rock off Cockatoo Island, is a

clear passage with depths of over 37m over a width of about 0.3

mile on the W side of the channel. Galah Channel is frequently

used during daylight by vessels proceeding to or from Cockatoo

Island and the NE, but local knowledge is recommended.

3.80 Parakeet Channel (16°07'S., 123°40'E.) leads E of Cockatoo Island between Usborne Islet and Tarrant Islet and is wide

and deep, except for Comber Rock, a small steep-to reef which

dries 0.6m and lies in mid-channel. Parakeet Channel is frequently used by vessels proceeding to or from Koolan Island or

Cockatoo Island from the NE and is considered somewhat easier to navigate than Galah Channel. A shoal, with a least depth

of 20.1m, lies 2 miles NE of Comber Rock.

3.80 The main channel from NW leads between Irvine Island and

Gibbings Island; it is wide and deep. It is frequently used by

vessels unfamiliar with the sound when picking up pilots for

Derby or Cockatoo Island.

Yampi Sound (16°07'S., 123°40'E.)

3.81 Cockatoo Island (16°06'S., 123°37'E.) is a well-sheltered deep-water port in Yampi Sound whose sole function is

the export of iron ore. 

3.81 Winds—Weather.—From November to March, Yampi

Sound is near the S extremities of the Northwest Monsoon; cyclones can be expected during this period. The effects of cyclones are more prevalent in this area early in this period;

however, cyclones have been experienced here as late as April.

3.81 During the wet season, from November to March, the prevailing winds are from the W and are strong at times, particularly during the afternoon. Rain and thundersqualls are also

frequent during this period; the accompanying winds can reach

gale force.

3.81 During the dry season, from April to October, very little rain

falls. During the mornings, there are frequent periods of SE

winds; these give way to light W sea breezes in the afternoon.

No cyclones are likely during this period.

3.81 Temperatures during summer frequently reach 40°C and the

atmosphere becomes somewhat oppressive. During winter the

air is cool and dry, with temperatures falling to 14°C at night.

3.81 Tides—Currents.—The maximum tidal range is 9.9m. At

Cockatoo Island Jetty, the tidal current sets E except for a period 1 hour before to 3 hours after high water, when the current

sets W; it has been reported that the tidal current attains a rate

of 3 knots on both the ebb and the flood.

3.81 Depths—Limitations.—The depth in the channel approach

to the berth is 20.1m. It is reported that the depth alongside is

10.5m. The berth comprises seven berthing dolphins extending

170m E and 110m W of the shiploader.
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 73

Pub. 175

3.81 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boarding place

is 1.5 miles WSW of Cockatoo Island Jetty. The pilot launch is

equipped with a radiotelephone. 

3.81 Regulation.—An ETA is required 48 hours, 24 hours, and 2

hours prior to arrival.

3.81 Signals.—A light, situated on the top of the old power station, 0.5 mile NW of the jetty, is shown 24 hours before the arrival and after departure of vessels scheduled for loading at the

jetty.

3.81 The Port Office on Cockatoo Island is equipped with VHF

channels 6, 12, 14, 16, and 67. The call sign is Koolan Island.

3.81 Anchorage.—The quarantine anchorage is situated about

0.75 mile WSW of Collins Cove Lighted Beacon, in depths of

18 to 29m, mud.

3.81 Anchorage can be taken off the W entrance of The Canal, in

14 to 18m, mud, good holding ground, with the E extremity of

Tarrant Islet bearing about 341° and Nares Point Light bearing

about 100°.

3.81 Caution.—Vessels should not proceed E of the berth on

Cockatoo Island without a pilot.

3.82 Port of Koolan Island (16°09'S., 123°45'E.) is a

deep-water port located on the E side of Yampi Sound. The

sole function of the port is the export of iron ore.

3.82 Winds—Weather.—See Cockatoo Island (paragraph 3.81).

3.82 Tides—Currents.—The maximum tidal range is 8.9m. 

3.82 Depths—Limitations.—Koolan Isalnd is approached from

the W through Yampi Sound, or from the N through Parakeet

Channel. Maximum draft allowed is 15m plus tide less 1.5m

under keel clearance. The ore loading jetty consists of two

mooring and seven berthing dolphins forming an alongside

berth 377m in length with a depth alongside of 15m.

3.82 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boarding place

is 0.9 mile SSW of the W extremity of Tarrant Island. Two tugs

are available. Berthing is restricted to daylight hours. 

3.82 Anchorage.—Two anchorage areas have been established 2

and 2.75 miles respectively WSW of Naires Point. 

Approaches to King Sound

3.83 King Sound (16°25'S., 123°20'E.) is entered between

the S extremity of Hidden Island (16°17'S., 123°30'E.), which

is part of the Buccaneer Archipelago, and Swan Point, about 27

miles W. It extends about 60 miles SSE to the town of Derby,

which stands at the entrance to the Fitzroy River, and has

depths of more than 18m within 20 miles of its head. Within

this distance the depths gradually shoal towards the shore eventually drying at the Derby berth, but the sound itself affords anchorage throughout.

3.83 Caution.—Mean spring tides rise 10m at Derby, with maximum rises recorded at nearly 11m. Such rises result in very

strong tidal currents in the entrance to King Sound (up to 10

knots) and low-powered vessels are recommended to proceed

in only at or near slack water. Strong and dangerous overfalls

are formed at such times on and around the dangers in Sunday

Strait.

3.83 Vessels proceeding to Derby (see paragraph 3.105) and requiring a pilot frequently proceed to Cockatoo Island, where

pilots will board for the run into King Sound.

3.84 Swan Point (16°21'S., 123°02'E.), the NW extremity

of King Sound, is low and cliffy. A patch of 3.7m lies 0.4 mile

offshore, about 0.75 mile W from Swan Point.

3.84 Swan Point is the NE extremity of a peninsula some 40 miles

in length, within which is the W shore of King Sound. Shoals

extend about 7 miles N of the cape, and islets and shoals extend

some 12 miles E of Swan Point, terminating in the Sunday Islands. Between these are the surveyed channels leading to Sunday Strait, S of Pitt Shoal and the Twin Islets and into King

Sound. Meda Pass, between the Roe Islands and the Sunday Islands, is the recommended route. Escape Pass, 2.5 miles E of

Swan Point, leads directly into King Sound, but on account of

the strong tidal currents local knowledge is considered necessary for its safe navigation.

3.84 Swan Island, 15m high, and 0.5 mile long, is located 0.25

mile NNE of Swan Point, with which it is connected by a ridge

of rocks which dries 3.7m.

3.84 Karrakatta Rock, with a depth of 3.7m, is located on the NW

edge of a rocky ledge extending 0.5 mile WNW from the N extremity of Swan Island.

3.84 Between Karrakatta Rock and the E extremity of Alarm

Shoal is a deep channel 0.5 mile wide leading from seaward to

King Sound, by Meda Pass or by Escape Pass. The tidal currents rush around Swan Island with considerable violence, rendering the passage hazardous for low-powered craft, and

difficult without local knowledge.

3.85 Pitt Shoals (16°15'S., 122°53'E.) are the outer and

westernmost dangers in the W approach to Sunday Strait. The

main ridge within the 18.3m curve is about 4.5 miles in length

E and W, and from 0.2 to 0.5 mile wide, including detached

patches. The least depth on this ridge is 4.6m located about 10

miles NW of Swan Point. At a distance of 2 miles N of the

4.6m head is a shoal about 0.5 mile in extent with a least depth

of 3.7m.

3.85 Tides—Currents.—Over the Pitt Shoals the flood sets E

and the ebb W at a rate of 1 to 3.5 knots, and also in the fairway

between them and Alarm Shoal.

3.85 Alarm Shoal (16°20'S., 122°59'E.) is a long narrow shoal of

sand extending about 8 miles W from a position 1.5 miles N of

Swan Point. It is from 0.5 to 1 mile wide with depths varying

from 1.8 to 9.1m, and dries in places about 2.25 miles NW of

Swan Point.

3.85 Northwest Twin Islet (16°17'S., 123°04'E.), 9.1m high and

located 4.25 miles NNE of Swan Island, is the northwesternmost of the group. It is a rocky islet, 0.15 mile in extent, surrounded by a coral reef extending from 0.1 to 0.25 mile from it.

A sunken, rocky flat, with depths under 3.7m, extends 0.6 mile

NE from the islet.

3.85 To the E of this flat is a shoal 0.5 mile in extent, with a least

depth of 7.8m, steep-to. These flats are marked by strong tide

rips.

3.85 Ferret Reef, 0.5 mile in extent and steep-to, is nearly awash

at low water. Its NW extremity is located about 1.5 miles NW

from Northwest Twin.

3.85 Southeast Twin Island, rocky and 14m high, is 0.25 mile

long and 0.15 mile wide; it is located 2 miles SE of Northwest

Twin Island, and is surrounded by a fringing reef extending

from 0.1 to 0.2 mile from the coast, and steep-to on the W side.
74 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

3.85 Shoal water extends 0.5 mile NE from the island, 0.25 mile S

and SW, and 0.1 mile to the SE.

3.85 A bank, with depths of 12.8 to 16.5m, is located 1.5 miles SE

of the Southeast Twin Island, with other patches of 16.5m in

the same direction.

3.85 There is a channel nearly 2 miles wide between the dangers

off the E side of Southeast Twin Island and the northwestern

9.1m head of Anchor Shoal.

3.85 Anchor Shoal (16°21'S., 123°09'E.), with general depths of

2.7 to 5.5m, is a sandy shoal extending within the 10m curve,

for a length of 2.75 miles in a NW and SE direction, and having a breadth of about 0.35 mile. The shallowest part is a small

patch about 0.2 mile long, with a depth of 0.3m located nearly

in the center, at 4 miles SE from Southeast Twin Island. A detached shoal of 7.3m is located 0.75 mile E of this shoal head.

3.85 Anchorage.—Vessels proceeding into King Sound against

the N current may find it convenient to anchor on the bank N or

E of Anchor Shoal.

3.86 Sunday Strait—Approach channel—Sunday Strait

(16°24'S., 123°16'E.), the main entrance to King Sound, is located between the Salier Islands, the Tide Rip Islands, High Island, Tree Island, and Mermaid Island on the E, and Pincombe

Shoal, the Roe Islands, and the Sunday Islands on the W. It is

about 11 miles in length N and S by about 4 miles least breadth

between the East Roe Island and Hancock Reef, which extends

W of Tree Island. The tidal currents run with considerable velocity and must be guarded against in vessels of low power.

The fairway dangers are Menmuir Rock, with dangerous overfalls during the strength of the currents, and Amur Reef and

Alert Rock, 6 and 7 miles within it. A shoal, with a depth of

15.9m, lies on the recommended track about 0.5 mile ESE of

East Roe Island.

Caution.—Sunday Strait should be navigated during daylight hours only and preferably at the time of slack water.

The tidal currents are very strong; rates of up to 10 knots

have occurred at springs. These currents set across the track N

of East Roe Island and form dangerous overfalls in the vicinity

of Menmuir Rock and Rip Rock.

3.87 Sunday Strait—East side—The Tide Rip Islands

(16°19'S., 123°18'E.), a group of rocky islands, occupies a

space 2 miles long in an E and W direction, and 1.5 miles wide.

Gibson Island, 33m high, and Gregory Island, 41m high, are

the largest of the group, and are both of irregular form, standing on the same reef and nearly connected at their N extremities. A coral patch, drying 0.6m, is located 0.25 mile S of

Gibson Island.

3.87 Doris Island, 39m high, is the NW of the Tide Rip Islands,

and is nearly 0.5 mile long by 0.25 mile wide; it is separated

from Gibson Island by a narrow channel.

3.87 Fairthlough Ridge, with a least depth of 5.5m, coral, extends

about 2.5 miles NNW from a position 1.5 miles NNW of Doris

Island.

3.88 The Salier Islands (16°19'S., 123°16'E.), bare, rocky,

and small, form a closely connected chain, steep-to, 2 miles

long in a NW and SE direction, from 19 to 30m high, and

about 100m wide. The islands are separated from the Tide Rip

Islands by a channel 1 mile in breadth, which has a depth of

about 18.3m.

3.88 High Island (16°21'S., 123°21'E.), 89m high, 2.25 miles in

long, and 1 mile wide, is located about 1 mile SE of Gregory

Island; the W side is steep-to, high, and cliffy; the S coast is

much indented and has a fringing reef.

3.88 A narrow reef extends about 0.75 mile N from its NE coast,

and a small detached reef, which dries 5.5m, lies close off the

N extremity of the island. A reef, with a rock on it 13m high,

extends about 0.25 mile SE from the SE extremity of the island.

3.88 Caution.—The ebb current sets at a rate of 4 to 8 knots toward the S side of High Island.

3.89 Tree Island (16°23'S., 123°18'E.), 26m high, about

0.3 mile long, and about a little over 0.1 mile wide, lies 2 miles

SW of High Island, and forms the E side of the entrance to

Sunday Strait.

3.89 Reefs extend about 1.5 miles SE from Tree Island, having

upon them several islets and rocks, of which the Clarke Islets, a

group of three, 5.5m high, are located on the SW edge. The

Wood Islets, from 1 to 5m high, form a chain near the NE edge.

3.89 Reefs surround Tree Island, extending 0.4 mile W into the

strait, with rocks on it, the W of which is 6m high.

3.89 Hancock Reef dries 5m, and is located 0.3 mile SW of the

above rocks, to which it is connected by a shallow rocky ledge;

its W edge lies about 0.75 mile W of the summit of Tree Island.

3.89 Pillar Rock, 5.5m high and conspicuous, is located 0.1 mile

within the S edge of these reefs, and a rock, which dries 3m,

lies on the extreme edge, forming the W side of Mermaid Passage.

Mermaid Island (16°26'S., 123°21'E.), 66m high, 2 miles

long in a N and S direction, and 1 mile broad, is a rugged island, located 2.5 miles SE of Tree Island; reefs, with rocks

above-water, extend from the N and S extremities, but the E

and W sides are fairly steep-to. A reef, with three islets and

some rocks on it, extends as far as 0.5 mile from its SE side,

and a detached reef, which dries 1.5m, lies about 0.5 mile N of

the island.

3.89 Mermaid Passage (16°25'S., 123°20'E.), about 1 mile

broad, separates Wood Islets Reef, on which is Pillar Rock,

from Mermaid Island. A bank, with a depth of 11.9, and possibly less, marked by strong tide rips, is located in the center of

Mermaid Passage.

3.90 The Wybron Islets (16°28'S., 123°21'E.), a group of

four rocky islets lying on the same reef, of which the highest is

15m, are located 0.75 mile S of Mermaid Island; the channel

between the reefs on either side, 0.3 mile wide, is free from

dangers, but the tidal currents vary in direction.

3.90 Channel Rock (16°26'S., 123°23'E.), 2m high, is a small

reef, steep-to in the N entrance to Fantome Passage, and located 090°, 1.25 miles from the SE extremity of Mermaid Island.

The channel between is deep and free from dangers.

3.90 Fantome Passage, about 1 mile wide, and free from dangers,

separates the Wybron Islets from Vickery Islet, and affords the

best passage for small vessels proceeding from King Sound to

Yampi Sound.

3.90 Vickery Islet (16°29'S., 123°21'E.), 4m high, is a small bare

islet surrounded by a reef, and is the NW of two parallel chains

of small rocky islands, covered with scrub and long grass,
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 75

Pub. 175

about 0.15 mile apart, extending to Faint Point, the SW entrance point of Crawford Bay.

3.90 Strickland Bay and Cone Bay, entered from the N and S of

High Island (16°21'S., 123°21'E.), respectively, are two elongated bays, both shoal in their inner parts. The approaches and

confines of these bays are heavily encumbered with numerous

islets and dangers and only small vessels with local knowledge

should attempt to enter.

3.91 Sunday Strait—West side—The Roe Islands

(16°18'S., 123°12'E.) are two narrow islands lying about 9

miles E of Swan Point.

3.91 West Roe Island is rugged and bare, 33m high, 1.5 miles

long, and about 0.25 mile wide; the S side is steep-to, but a

fringing reef extends from 0.1 to 0.3 mile from the N coast.

The reef that extends W for about 0.5 mile from the W side of

the island appears to form part of the island. A rock, with a

depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 1 mile NNW of the W extremity of West Roe Island, and several rocks, from 5 to 12m

high, are located close off the same point.

3.91 East Roe Island (16°22'S., 123°47'E.), 0.9 mile E of West

Roe Island, is 23m high at the E end and covered with coarse

grass; the W end forms a knob.

3.91 Mid Rock, 3.7m high, is located midway between East Roe

Island and West Roe Island and lies on a reef nearly connected

with East Roe Island.

3.91 Pincombe Shoal, of sand, gravel, and coral, with a depth of

1.2m near the center, is 2.25 miles long within the 9.1m curve,

and 0.25 mile wide; it is located N of the Roe Islands, from

which it is separated by a channel 0.5 mile wide, with depths of

24 to 37m. Its N extremity, lies 2.5 miles NNW of Mid Rock.

3.91 The Sunday Islands (16°25'S., 123°13'E.) are two rugged

islands, sparsely covered with scrub, of irregular form, and located on the same reef, 11 miles ESE of Swan Point. The E and

smaller island is separated by a narrow passage, which dries at

low water, and extends in a NNE and SSW direction. The N

coasts of both islands, which are separated from the Roe Islands by Meda Pass, are fringed by narrow coral reefs, which

are wider on the E and S sides.

3.91 The westernmost Sunday Island is 56m high, 3.25 miles

long, and 1.5 miles wide; the E island is 49m high, 2.5 miles

long, and 0.75 mile wide. The W side of the westernmost Sunday Island is fronted by an extensive flat, on the edge of which

are Allora Island and other islands, mentioned with Hadley

Pass and Escape Pass.

3.91 A conspicuous boulder is located W of Waterlily Creek, on

the southern side of the W island, and a similar boulder near

the summit of the E island.

3.91 Tides.—At Sunday Islandn the mean spring rise is 6.7m;

mean neaps rise 4.9m.

3.91 Caution.—Dean Islet, an islet 11m high, steep-to on the N

side, is nearly joined to the N side of the W Sunday Island.

3.91 Hunt Islet, 5m high, with a fringing reef surrounding it, is located close to the NE point of E Sunday Island.

3.91 Rip Rock, above water, with a rock having a depth of less

than 1.8m close E of it, and foul ground, marked by strong

overfalls, extending 0.2 mile SE of it, is located 0.15 mile SE

of Hunt Islet.

3.91 Pelican Rock, 3m high, a small rock surrounded by reefs, is

separated from the S coast of East Sunday Island by a narrow

boat channel.

3.91 A reef, upon which are two rocks which uncover 6 and 5m,

respectively, extends 0.4 mile SE from Pelican Rock.

3.92 Menmuir Rock (16°22'S., 123°15'E.), with a depth

of 3.7m, lies near the W end of a narrow ridge of rocky ground,

having depths of 9 to 14.6m and marked by dangerous overfalls. It is located in the fairway of Sunday Strait, about midway between East Roe Island and Hancock Reef.

3.92 Amur Reef (16°28'S., 123°16'E.), of coral, steep-to, and

drying 1.2m, is 0.15 mile long in a N and S direction and 150m

wide, located in mid-channel, about 6 miles S of Menmuir

Rock, and bearing WSW distant 4.5 miles from the S extremity

of Mermaid Island.

3.92 A narrow bank, with depths of 10.1 to 14.6m and 0.25 mile

long, is located 0.35 mile E of Amur Reef.

3.92 Alert Rock, with a depth of 2.7m, is located 1 mile SSE of

Amur Reef.

3.92 Fairway Rocks (16°35'S., 123°19'E.), a rocky group about 1

mile in extent N and S, and 9m high, lie about 7 miles S of

Amur Reef and 2 miles W of Long Island. A coral reef, that

dries 0.9m, is located about 1.25 miles N of Fairway Rocks.

3.93 Passages in Sunday Strait.—Meda Pass (16°22'S.,

123°10'E.) is approached from W between Alarm Shoal and

theTwin Islets; it leads between Anchor Shoal and the Roe Islands to the N and the Sunday Islands to the S. This pass is preferred by many mariners for entering King Sound as the tide

rips are less violent than in Sunday Strait. Hadley Rock, with a

depth of 9.1m, is the only danger in the pass. The tidal currents

in the pass attain rates of 4 to 8 knots.

3.93 Hadley Pass (16°25'S., 123°09'E.), the E passage through

the island chain leads between Allora Island and the reef extending from the E side of Tallon Island. It then leads W of

Hancock Island where it joins with the S entrance to Escape

Pass. The pass is narrow and intricate with a least width of

about 0.3 mile.

3.93 Pearl Pass, connecting Karrakatta Bay with King Sound, is

narrow and used by small craft with local knowledge.

3.93 Rees Islet (16°23'S., 123°06'E.) and Howard Islet, 2 miles

W, form the N entrance of Escape Pass, which then leads SSE

between Tallon Island on the E, and the reef to the W, on which

Leonie Island and Jackson Island lie. This pass, which is deep

and not less than 0.4 mile wide, is the shortest route into King

Sound from the W, but the tidal currents, which attain a rate of

10 knots during springs, require that vessels proceeding

through possess local knowledge to maintain safe navigation.

King Sound

3.94 Long Island (16°34'S., 123°22'E.), rugged and rising

to a height of 68m near its center, lies with its N extremity

about 10 miles SE of the E end of the Sunday Islands. An islet,

34m high, lies close off the SE extremity of Long Island, and

Long Island Shoal, which dries 0.3m, parallels the island about

0.75 mile to the NE.

3.94 Cascade Bay (16°34'S., 123°26'E.), entered between the

above islet and Lachian Island, 2.5 miles ESE, is formed between the shoal NE of Long Island and the mainland to the E.

The E side of this bay is heavily encumbered with shoals, but
76 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

the N part is nearly steep-to. Depths in the entrance of the bay

range from 14.6 to 29m, and from 18.3 to 37m within. Rip

Reef, which dries 1.2m, lies isolated about 2 miles SSW of the

W extremity of Lachian Island and must be avoided.

3.94 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in the NE part of

Cascade Bay out of the strength of the tidal currents, S of the E

extremity of Pecked Island, at the N end of the bay. Depths in

this anchorage vary from 11 to 18m, good holding ground; the

tidal currents are weak and varied.

3.94 Caution.—The tidal currents in the entrance of Cascade Bay

are strong with rates of 6 to 8 knots at springs. The ebb flows

NW through the S entrance of the bay and forms violent eddies

over the uneven ground.

3.95 Port Usborne (16°39'S., 123°30'E.), a small harbor,

lies S of Lachian Island and NW of Point Usborne. It is fronted

by Swirl Shoal, Rip Reef, and Tree Island and is difficult to enter except by small vessels with local knowledge which sometimes use it as an anchorage area. The head of the harbor is

somewhat obstructed by Brolga Shoal, with a depth of 2.7m,

and a large unsurveyed inlet is entered immediately NE. Rip

Reef, which dries 1.2m, lies isolated about 2 miles SSW of the

W extremity of Lachian Island and must be avoided.

3.95 Caution.—The tidal currents W and N of Tree Island

(16°40'S., 123°29'E.) are very strong and the area is unsuitable

for anchorage. Swirl Shoal, NW of Tree Island, has a least

depth of 2.4m and the tidal currents form eddies over it.

Towndrow Rock, which dries 0.6m, lies about 0.5 mile NE of

Swirl Shoal and is dangerous.

3.96 The coast from Port Usborne trends E for 7 miles to

the base of Compass Hill, 213m high, and then SE 17 miles to

Stokes Bay. The first part of the coast is high and rocky, but the

last is a low muddy mangrove shore, with a level track of land

between it and ranges of hills, extending in a SE direction from

Compass Hill. Saddle Hill, about 198m high, and Round Hill

are conspicuous. A bank, with 7.3m and possibly less, lies SE,

5 miles from Usborne Point.

3.96 The Helpman Islets (16°44'S., 123°38'E.), from 8 to 11

miles ESE of Point Usborne, are connected to the coast by a

shoal ridge, which dries. A shoal, with a least known depth of

5.8m, lies 2.5 miles WSW of the NW Helpman Islet and then

extends NW to the bank SE of Point Usborne.

3.96 Stokes Bay (16°55'S., 123°40'E.) is about 15 miles in length

and 8 miles in breadth; its head is nearly dry at low water for

about 7 miles and the soft muddy shores are fringed with mangroves, through which the tide flows, inundating at spring tides

many miles of the interior country. The land around the bay is

also low and swampy for a breadth of nearly 3 miles in places,

and then rises gradually, the slope being well wooded with

white gum trees.

3.96 The Meda River discharges into the SE corner of Stokes Bay,

and is navigable at high water for about 15 miles for vessels of

2.7m draft.

3.96 The Robinson River is on the E shore of Stokes Bay, and

traverses the valley between Saddle and Round Hills.

3.96 The May River in the S portion of Stokes Bay, 30 miles from

its mouth, joins the Meda River and then takes the name of the

Lennard River.

3.96 The entrances of these rivers appear to be obstructed by sand

bars which probably dry at low water.

3.97 Point Torment (17°00'S., 123°36'E.), the W extremity of Stokes Bay, has a spit, with depths under 5.5m, extending

about 6 miles NW of it; it dries out 3 miles from the point.

3.97 Point Torment Creek, a small stream 4 miles E of Point Torment, was ascended for 12 miles by boat, where it terminates in

a mangrove swamp. No landing could be effected.

3.97 Aspect.—The remaining portion of the E shore of King

Sound from Point Torment takes a general S direction for about

20 miles to the Fitzroy River. The coast is low, irregular, lined

with mangroves, and fronted by mud flats.

3.97 Nob Hillock, about 13 miles S of Point Torment, is a dark

wooded conspicuous hillock, about 22m high. About 5.5 miles

farther S are two similar elevations close together, named Double Nob Hillock; within the latter is the town of Derby, which

is described at the end of King Sound in paragraph 3.105.

3.98 Cygnet Bay (16°34'S., 123°01'E.) is the deep indentation between Shenton Bluff (16°28'S., 123°03'E.) and Cunningham Point, 14 miles SSE; in its N part are Lugger Cove,

Mission Bay, and Catamaran Bay.

3.98 The shore is almost totally fringed with closely twining mangroves; the country behind gradually rises to an average height

of 61m and is thickly covered with various kinds of gum trees.

3.98 Gilbert Rock (16°29'S., 123°03'E.), 2.4m high, is a small

rock located 0.6 mile S of Shenton Bluff, with which it is connected by a rocky ledge.

3.98 A sand patch, which dries 6.5m on the same reef, is located

0.2 mile W of Gilbert Rock.

3.98 Reefs and foul ground extend 0.5 mile W of Gilbert Rock,

near the W extremity of which there is a rock which dries

2.4m. Within the 30m curve the bottom is foul.

3.98 Newman Ledge is a reef 0.2 mile long in a N-S direction

which dries 2.4m, and is located 0.8 mile E of Gilbert Rock.

3.98 Shoal water surrounds Newman Ledge to a distance of about

0.35 mile, and a rock, drying 3m, is located midway between it

and Gilbert Rock.

3.98 Lugger Cove (16°28'S., 123°02'E.), located W of Shenton

Bluff, is encumbered by a sand flat fringed with coral reefs extending from the head.

3.98 Riddel Point, the W point of Lugger Cove, is 20m high and

faced by cliffs; a reef extends 0.2 mile from this point.

3.98 Bird Rocks are a group of small rocks, from 3 to 7.3m high,

located on the outer part of the shore reef about 1.5 miles SSW

of Riddel Point.

3.98 Anchorage.—Good anchorage, in a depth of 7.3m, sand, is

found in Lugger Cove with Shenton Bluff bearing 107°, about

0.9 mile distant, avoiding a rocky spit of 0.6m which extends

about 0.5 mile W from that bluff.

3.98 Between Riddel Point and Bird Rocks the coast recedes and

forms two shallow bays, N of which is Mission Bay, where

there is a house belonging to the Roman Catholic Mission; the

S bay is Catamaran Bay.

3.99 Skeleton Point (16°32'S., 123°01'E.), 38m high, is a

narrow point located about 4 miles SW of Shenton Bluff. It is

fringed by reef, and rocky ledges, on which are rocks 0.6m

high, extending from the NE and SE ends of the point.

3.99 Shell Bank (16°30'S., 123°06'E.), with general depths of 11
Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 77

Pub. 175

to 14.6m, sand and coral bottom, and from 0.5 mile to 1 mile

wide within the 18.3m curve, has been traced for a distance of

6 miles in a SW direction from a position 0.75 mile SW of

Evans Rocks to the entrance to Escape Pass. The least known

depth is 7.6m, located about 4.5 miles ENE of Skeleton Point;

a patch of 8.2m lies 1.5 miles NE of this position.

3.99 Cunningham Point (16°41'S., 123°08'E.), the S extremity

of Cygnet Bay, is a steep rocky cliff connected with the mainland by a low narrow isthmus covered at springs. A rocky

ledge, which dries 3m, lies close N of the point, and shoal water borders the shore to a distance of 1 mile E of the point.

3.99 Meda Shoal (16°35'S., 123°07'E.), awash at low water and

about 1 mile in diameter, lies 6 miles N of Cunningham Point.

The waters around Meda Shoal have not been completely surveyed, but numerous shoals are known to exist within a radius

of 4.5 miles to the N, W, and S.

3.99 Anchorage.—Most of the smaller bays in Cygnet Bay afford good anchorage for vessels with local knowledge in

depths of 7 to 9m between 0.5 mile and 2 miles offshore and

out of the strength of the tidal currents. Caution is required in

the approach as the waters of Cygnet Bay have not been thoroughly surveyed and additional dangers may exist.

3.99 The best anchorage for small vessels is in the bay immediately W of Cunningham Point in depths of 4 to 5m, but care is

required on approaching to avoid the shoals between the above

point and Meda Shoal.

3.100 Carlisle Head (16°45'S., 123°08'E.), 2.75 miles S of

Cunningham Point, is a conspicuous cliff, between which and

the latter point, the coastal bank dries for about 0.5 mile offshore, with three rocks on its outer edge.

3.100 A narrow shoal, about 3.5 miles in length and which just

dries at low water springs, lies centered about 2.5 miles E of

Carlisle Head.

3.100 Foul Point (16°48'S., 123°09'E.), fronted S by a reef to a distance of about 1 mile, falls in conspicuous cliffs; it also marks

the S termination of the range of cliffs on the W side of King

Sound.

3.100 Goodenough Bay lies between Carlisle Head and Foul Point,

and is dry throughout at low water, and foul to some distance

beyond the points.

3.100 Disaster Bay (16°54'S., 123°11'E.), entered between Cornambie Point and Repulse Point about 8 miles SSE, mostly

dries and is foul with reefs and shoals. There are some conspicuous red cliffs at the head of the bay, about 2 miles SW of Cornambie Point. A long narrow shoal composed of coarse sand

and gravel, which dries 2.1m, extends approximately 7.5 miles

N of Repulse Point and forms a natural breakwater fronting Disaster Bay.

3.100 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9 to 15m, within the

above shoal and the shoal flats off Disaster Bay.

3.101 South Meda Shoal (16°54'S., 123°17'E.), 5 miles NE

of Repulse Point, has a least depth of 0.3m, coarse sand, with

depths of less than 11m extending 0.75 mile N and up to 1.5

miles SSE from its shallowest part.

3.101 Tides—Currents.—At spring tides there are extensive eddies and overfalls over all the shoal areas in King Sound and in

other areas of irregular depths. In strong winds dangerous tide

rips occur in the vicinity of most of the projecting points along

the shore of the sound, and discolored water is frequently observed in the approaches to the Fitzroy River during the spring

ebbs.

3.101 Spring rates of 5 knots are frequent throughout the fairway in

the S part of King Sound.

3.101 Valentine Islet (17°05'S., 123°19'E.), 26m high, with cliffs

at both ends and a low valley between, lies on the edge of the

shore bank about 8 miles SSE of Repulse Point. A conspicuous

white sandy patch, 24m high, is located on the coast 4 miles

NW of Valentine Islet.

Estuary of the Fitzroy River

3.102 The Fitzroy River (16°15'S., 123°53'E.) flows into

the head of King Sound and forms a rather extensive but shoal

estuary which is entered between Point Torment (17°00'S.,

123°36'E.) and Valentine Island, 15 miles W. The E side of the

estuary, between the above point and the river entrance, approximately 20 miles S, is low, irregular, and lined with mangroves fronted by mud flats. Black Rocks, a group of drying

reefs and submerged rocks, lie within 1.5 miles of the coast

about 3 miles S of Point Torment.

3.102 A light is shown, at an elevation of 13m, from a position

close off the coast 3 miles S of Point Torment.

3.102 Christine Point (17°12'S., 123°17'E.), 10 miles S of Point

Torment, is low and swampy; two inlets enter the coast immediately E of the point, and a spit, with depths of less than 5.5m,

extends nearly 7 miles NW of the same point.

3.103 Nob Hillock (17°16'S., 123°37'E.) stands close to the

coast about 4 miles S of Christine Point; Double Nob Hillock is

located about 5.5 miles farther S.

3.103 The W side of the estuary S of Valentine Islet is low, marshy,

and poorly defined. The coast is backed by timbered country,

but the waters on the W side of the estuary are nearly unsurveyed.

3.103 Caution.—Numerous shoals and dangers lie within the entrance to the estuary of the Fitzroy River and local knowledge

is essential to enter. An isolated patch, with a depth of 5.2m,

lies 4.5 miles W of Point Torment.

3.104 Outer Rip Shoal (17°06'S., 123°31'E.), which dries

2.1m, is located 6 miles SW of Point Torment, and depths of

less than 5.5m extend 0.75 mile NNW and SSE of its drying

part.

3.104 Inner Rip Shoal, which dries 2.1m, is located 9 miles SSW

of Point Torment; depths of less than 5.5m extend 1.5 miles

NW of the drying portion of this reef, and the SE extremity is

nearly connected to the coastal bank. 

3.104 Elbow Shoal, with general depths of 1.8 to 3.7m and on

which there is a bank which dries 1.8m, extends 4 miles NW

and W of Christine Points.

3.104 North Mary Islet (17°16'S., 123°33'E.), lies 4 miles W of

Nob Hillock and is about 11m high to the tops of the trees. The

N end of the mangrove-covered flat extending from this islet is

known as Josephine Point.

3.104 South Mary Islet, 0.75 mile S of North Mary Island, is 5m

high and covered with mangroves which nearly connect it to

the latter. There are numerous shoal flats, several of which are
78 Sector 3. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Londonderry to Cape Leveque 

Pub. 175

covered with mangroves, that extend SW from South Mary Islet to the W shore of the estuary.

3.105 Derby (17°18'S., 123°36'E.) (World Port Index No.

54640), a small port near the head of King Sound, is the capital

of the West Kimberly District and was a shipment area for pastoral and mineral produce. The port is reported closed to commercial shipping; all cargo was being handled through Broome

(see paragraph 4.13).

3.105 Anchorage.—There is anchorage for vessels, in 11 to

12.8m, with Black Rock Light bearing 090°, distant 4 miles.

Anchorage is also available, in depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, NNW of

North Mary Island, with the front range light bearing 141°, distant 6.5 miles. Small vessels can anchor just NE of the same islet, in depths of 5.5 to 7.3m. A lighted mooring buoy lies 1.5

miles N of the N end of North Mary Island

3.105 Directions.—Vessels should proceed through Sunday Strait

passing about 0.5 mile E of East Roe Island and 0.75 mile E of

East Sunday Island thereby avoiding Menmuir Rock. When at

a position about 2.75 miles SW of Amur Reef, steer 157° for

about 28 miles passing W of Fairway Rocks to a position with

Black Rock Light bearing 135°, distance 14 miles. Steer for the

light structure until about 4 miles from it, then proceed to the

anchorage. The approach is subject to constant change.

King Sound to Cape Leveque

3.106 The coast between Swan Point, the W entrance point

of King Sound, and Cape Leveque about 7 miles WSW, is low

and sandy, and fronted by coral ledges and sandflats extending

up to 1.5 miles offshore.

3.106 Hunter Creek (16°23'S., 122°59'E.), about 3.5 miles SW of

Swan Point, dries, but can be entered by local craft with local

knowledge at high water when there are depths of about 5m

over the bar. Between the creek and Cape Leveque, about 3.5

miles WSW, there is a bay entirely obstructed by a reef known

as Jonas Shoal. There are some red sand hills, 34m high, at the

head of the bay.

3.106 Cape Leveque (16°23'S., 122°56'E.) is a red cliffy point

about 37m high. Reefs, on which Leveque Islet is located, extend 1 mile N and 0.6 mile W of the cape. A light is shown

from the cape and a racon is situated at the light structure. Ball

Rock, with a depth of 3m, is located about 0.5 mile N of

Leveque Islet.
Pub. 175

4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape

4.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION
81

Pub. 175

SECTOR 4 

NORTHWEST COAST OF AUSTRALIA—CAPE LEVEQUE TO NORTH WEST CAPE

4.0 Plan.—This sector describes the NW coast of Australia from

Cape Leveque to North West Cape, and includes the offshore

islands and shoals. The principal ports described include

Broome, Dampier, and Port Hedland. The general arrangement

of each group of islands or shoals is from NE to SW, with each

island group or shoal under a separate heading.

General Remarks

4.1 The Australian coast from Cape Leveque SW to North

West Cape, about 600 miles distant, is generally barren and

consists of a low coastline backed by low sand hills. The coastal regions are undulating with an interior slope to the central

portion of the continent. Large areas of Western Australia are

hilly for some hundred miles inland, however, there are a few

hills near the coast, with heights to 152m which are conspicuous.

4.1 The coast is imperfectly examined and charted, mariners are

cautioned to proceed accordingly. There are some ports and

good anchorages, but the shore is much indented with shoal or

drying bays. In general, the 18.3m curve may extend offshore

50 miles, as in the vicinity of North West Island (20°22'S.,

115°30'E.), with patches of less than 18.3m existing outside

this curve.

4.1 Winds—Weather.—The principal winds in this sector are

the Southeast Monsoon, also known as the Southeast Trade

Winds, and the Northwest Monsoon. Further information can

be found in paragraph 1.1.

4.1 Tides—Currents.—The currents in this sector are affected

to a considerable extent by the changing monsoon wind. At

distances of more than 60 miles from the coast, the predominant direction of the current is NE to E, in summer, at a rate of

about 0.5 knot, with countercurrents in some of the bays. In

winter the currents are variable but are generally of a SW to W

nature.

4.1 Throughout the year the constancy of the predominant direction is generally less than 25 per cent, but in some areas it is

between 25 per cent and 50 per cent. The mean rate is usually

less than 1 knot, but on occasion rates of between 2 and 3

knots, setting either E or W (and sometimes opposing the predominant direction already referred to), have occurred in both

seasons.

4.1 On detached reefs, the tidal currents usually set towards the

reef from all sides during the flood tide and away from the reef

during the ebb tide. The currents are particularly noticeable in

the channels through the reef, where the rates may be considerable.

4.1 Visibility.—Fog is very rare. In coastal water, the frequency

of fog is either nil or less than 2 per cent throughout the year.

There is some increase over the ocean towards 35°S. It is almost frequent in the extreme SW during summer and autumn,

but even here its frequency does not exceed 2 per cent.

4.1 Mist or haze is more common. Visibility of less than 5 miles

is reported on 40 per cent of the occasions around North West

Cape in January and February. In November and December,

more than 20 per cent of observations report mist and haze on

some part of the N coast of Australia, but from April to July reports of even haze occur at a frequency of less than 5 per cent.

Dust, and smoke from bush fires, are the common causes of the

haze.

4.1 In the tropical part of the region, the few occasions of true

fog occur mainly in the dry season, most frequently in some lagoons and estuaries. Visibility is also liable to be reduced to

fog limits in some of the heavier downpours of the wet season.

4.1 Caution.—Numerous oil and gas fields exist off the NW

coast of Australia. Each field contains clusters of installations

consisting of lighted and unlighted, permanent and moveable,

awash and submerged structures. Most, but not all, structures

exhibit lights, especially platforms. Since not all features are

charted or marked, mariners are cautioned to exercise special

care when navigating these waters.

4.1 Pipelines lead between structures within a field, between the

various fields, and to shore-based collecting stations. Cautionary and restricted areas exist in which navigating and anchoring are prohibited. Gas from a damaged gas pipeline could

cause an explosion or other serious hazard.

Rowley Shoals

4.2 Rowley Shoals (17°20'S., 119°20'E.) consists of three

extensive coral reefs lying 150 miles offshore. The sea breaks

heavily on these reefs and in clear weather they are readily

seen; however, they present poor radar targets. The reefs are

steep-to and afford no anchorage.

4.2 Mermaid Reef (17°06'S., 119°37'E.), the NE of the three

reefs, is an atoll with a large lagoon enclosed by a rim of coral,

which dries. There are many drying patches in the lagoon. On

the NE side of the reef, there is a passage, about 60m wide,

leading into the lagoon. The passage is narrow and difficult,

but suitable for vessels up to 4m draft, provided that the sun is

sufficiently high for the many dangers to be seen. The tidal currents, with violent tide rips, set through this passage at a considerable rate. 

4.2 Anchorage can be obtained, in 13m, about 0.1 mile inside

the lagoon. In 1965, there was a sand bank, which covers at

HWS, on the N end of the reef. A historic wreck lies midway

along the W side of Mermaid Reef.

4.2 Clerke Reef (Minstrel Shoal) (17°19'S., 119°21'E.) lies

about 15 miles SW of Mermaid Reef. The reef has a length of

about 9 miles N to S, and a width of about 4 miles. Near the N

end of the reef lies Bedwell Islet, a bare sand cay about 2m

high. On the E and W sides of the reef there are a number of

boulders which dry. A narrow passage, which is navigable by

boats at high water slack, leads to a lagoon, with many detached coral patches within the reef. There is anchorage in the

lagoon for vessels up to 15m in length. The depths are over

183m within a short distance of the reef.

4.2 Imperieuse Reef (17°35'S., 118°55'E.) lies about 22 miles
82 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

SW of Clerke Reef and is the southwesternmost of Rowley

Shoals; it is about 10 miles in length N to S and has a width of

about 5 miles. On the SE edge of the reef there are numerous

coral boulders, which dry about 3m. Large areas of the reef dry

at low water and there are two lagoons, which each contain

many coral patches within. 

4.2 Cunningham Islet, a small sand cay 3.7m high and devoid of

vegetation, is located close within the N extremity of the reef,

and appears to be surrounded by a small lagoon, 93m wide.

4.2 Imperieuse Reef Light is shown from a round metal tower,

on a concrete base, on Cunningham Islet. In favorable conditions the light structure has given good radar returns at a range

of 36 miles. A racon is situated at the light structure.

4.2 Caution.—During the strength of the tidal currents, heavy

tide rips were experienced along the 183m curve about 60

miles E of Rowley Shoals. These rips were about 0.2 mile wide

and, at a distance of 1 mile, resembled heavy breakers.

Cape Leveque to Cape Baskerville

4.3 The coast between Cape Leveque, described in paragraph 3.106, and Cape Baskerville (17°08'S., 122°14'E.),

about 58 miles SW, is generally low, fronted by rocks and shoal

water, and indented by shoal or drying bays. The 40m curve is

charted from 20 to 30 miles offshore on this stretch of coast,

except in the vicinity of the Lacepede Islands and Baleine

Bank, where it extends to 60 miles. Isolated banks, with depths

of less than 37m, lie outside the charted 37m line.

4.3 From Cape Leveque to Chile Head, about 8 miles SSW, the

shore is formed by sandy beaches backed by sandhills from 15

to 26m high; 4 miles SSW of Cape Leveque there are some low

red cliffs with red sandhills inland. The coast is fronted by

rocks and drying ledges extending up to 1.5 miles offshore.

Chile Head, the S entrance point to Thomas Bay, has a shoreline 1 mile in length, is shaped like an anvil, and is formed of

boulders; it rises to a conical hill 11m high. Rocky ledges,

which dry up to 6.7m, extend 1.75 miles N and SW from Chile

Head, forming natural breakwaters to the adjacent bays.

4.3 Thomas Bay (16°28'S., 122°53'E.) is entered between Chile

Head and a point 2.5 miles NE. The bay recedes about 1.5

miles SE, and is backed by sand hills from 18 to 24m high.

Drying reefs extend from both points across the entrance. A

detached drying reef lies in the entrance, 2 miles NNE of Chile

Head; there are depths of 1.8 to 5.5m within the bay.

4.3 From Chile Head to Cape Borda, about 14 miles SSW, the

coast continues to be backed with low sand hills and is fronted

by rocky and drying reefs. A detached 9.1m patch lies 4 miles

WSW of Chile Head, about 1 mile outside the 10m curve.

Black Rod Rock, which dries 0.6m, lies about 6 miles SW of

Chile Head and 0.75 mile offshore. McVilly Rock, which dries

1.5m, lies 3 miles NNW of Cape Borda and 2 miles offshore.

Some rocky ledges, which dry, with foul ground around them,

extend to the cape. There are other rocks, with less than 1.8m

over them, N of McVilly Rock, and drying ledges NNE to

shore.

4.4 Lord Mayor Shoal (16°31'S., 122°37'E.) lies about

13 miles W of Chile Head. The shoal has a least depth of 7.6m

and lies on the N side of a coral bank that extends S and SW.

4.4 Pender Bay (16°44'S., 122°41'E.) is entered between Cape

Borda and Emeriau Point, about 10.5 miles SW. Cape Borda is

a low rocky point, with a white sandy patch near its extremity,

backed by red cliffs from 18 to 21m high. Behind the cape,

white sand hills partly covered by scrub rise to a height of 42m.

Depths of less than 11m extend up to 5.5 miles W of Cape Borda.

4.4 From Cape Borda, the eastern shore of Pender Bay extends

SE to Kelk Creek, which dries throughout, then SW to Bell

Point, a rocky point 6.5 miles SSW of Cape Borda. The S shore

of Pender Bay, between Bell Point and Emeriau Point, about 7

miles W, consists mostly of red cliffs broken in places by small

sandy beaches. From 1 to 2 miles WSW of Bell Point, the cliffs

are from 6 to 24m high and are conspicuous. From these cliffs,

the shore extends W about 2.5 miles, then NNW to Perpendicular Head, then W to Emeriau Point.

4.5 Woodhouse Rocks (16°43'S., 122°42'E.), some of

which dry from 2.1 to 2.7m, form the outer dangers in Pender

Bay and lie about 3.3 miles SW of Cape Borda. Chimney

Rocks lie close NE of Emeriau Point; the outermost of the four

rocks is the largest and is 13m high. It is easily identified when

seen clear of the land.

4.5 Anchorage can be obtained during good weather, in depths

of 7m, 1 mile E of Perpendicular Head, with Chimney Rocks in

line with the head.

4.5 The coast between Emeriau Point and North Head, about 5

miles SSW, is fronted by rocks, many of which uncover at low

water. About 3.5 miles SSW of Emeriau Point, the coast is indented by Tappers Inlet, which dries throughout. The position

of the entrance to the inlet is liable to shift.

North Head (16°50'S., 122°32'E.), the N entrance point to

Beagle Bay, is a low dark-colored cliff with a conspicuous

stony hummock, 16m high, above it; it has a ridge of grassy

hummocks which extends NE about 0.5 mile. A wooded hill,

about 26m high, is located 0.5 mile E of North Head.

4.5 Beagle Bay (16°52'S., 122°30'E.) is entered between North

Head and Sandy Point, about 4.5 miles SW. The depths in the

bay decrease regularly from 12.8m in the entrance to its head,

about 7 miles SE. On the E side of the bay, about 2.25 miles

SSE of North Head, there is a conspicuous sand-faced ridge,

and about 0.5 mile farther S, there is a conspicuous green peak,

22m high. East Sandy Point, 4 miles S of North Head, rises to a

height of 23m.

4.6 Sandy Point (16°54'S., 122°28'E.), 9.1m high, the

SW entrance to Beagle Bay, is composed of sand hills with

their tops and inshore slopes sparsely covered with brush.

South Head is 0.6 mile within the extremity of Sandy Point and

rises to a height of 15m. The coastal bank, with depths of less

than 5.5m, extends 1 mile N and 0.5 mile NE of Sandy Point.

Several submerged rocks lie on the coastal bank; the outermost

of these, with a depth of 1.5m, lies 1 mile N of the point.

4.6 Tidal currents, which set in and out of the bay with rates

from 0.5 to 1.5 knots, set directly across the shoal ground N of

Sandy Point. Care is necessary in approaching Sandy Point, as

the currents setting across the shoal ground create a tide rip.

4.6 Good anchorage may be found on either side of the bay, according to direction of the wind and the draft of the vessel. Although the bay is open NW, strong winds are seldom

experienced from that quarter, and on rare occasions when they
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 83

Pub. 175

do blow, last a few hours only.

4.6 Caution.—Pearl culture activity is conducted in the bay.

Pearl beds, which may be floating or fixed structures, and their

associated moorings should be avoided. The beds are generally

marked by buoys or beacons, which may be lit. Their positions

are not charted.

4.7 The coast from South Head to Cape Baskerville, 19

miles SW, is indented by Camp Inlet and Baldwin Creek.

Camp Inlet dries throughout and for 1.5 miles W of its entrance. The shore S of Sandy Point to Camp Inlet, 3 miles S, is

low and sandy. From Camp Inlet SW to Baldwin Creek, about

7 miles distant, the coast is low and is backed by parallel ridges

of sandy hillocks, 6.1 to 20m high.

4.7 Red Bluff (17°03'S., 122°19'E.), about 4 miles SW of Baldwin Creek, is a conspicuous red cliff surmounted by a squaretopped sand hill, 45m high, covered with grass and shrubs. A

light, from which a racon transmits, is situated on the bluff.

4.7 King Peaks, located 3 and 6.5 miles ESE of Red Bluff, are

two conspicuous peaks, 77m and 84m high, on a wooded range

of hills. The W of the two peaks is known as Carnot Peak. The

shore from this area SW to Cape Baskerville continues as

conspicuous reddish sandy cliffs with little break in its configuration.

4.7 The coastal waters from Sandy Point to Camp Inlet are bordered by drying reefs extending 0.4 mile offshore and by a

bank that dries, 0.8 mile farther offshore. The coast for about 5

miles SW of Camp Inlet is fringed by foul ground which dries

up to 6m, and extends about 0.5 mile offshore. The 5m curve

extends up to 3 miles off this section of coastline. From Baldwin Creek, 4 miles SW to Red Bluff, rocky ledges extend up to

1.5 miles offshore.

4.7 Cape Baskerville (17°08'S., 122°15'E.), the N entrance

point to Carnot Bay, is a conspicuous sandy hillock 38m high.

About 1 mile E of this hillock there is a wooded hill, 50m high,

which is considerably higher than the land farther S. Carnot

Bay lies between Cape Baskerville and a low point 3.5 miles

SSW. The bay dries for a distance of 2 miles outside the line

joining the entrance points. Within the cape, its shores are flat

and swampy and are intersected by creeks.

Off-lying Dangers

4.8 The coastal bank, which includes Baleine Bank

(16°47'S., 122°00'E.) and the Lacepede Islands (16°53'S.,

122°09'E.), with depths of less than 18.3m, extend up to 35

miles NW from the coast between South Head and Cape

Baskerville.

4.8 The 10m curve extends 11 miles WNW of South Head and

embraces Sloper Shoal, which has a minimum depth of 6.4m.

There is an isolated 10.9m patch about 2 miles NW of Sloper

Shoal.

4.8 The Lacepede Islands (16°53'S., 122°09'E.), a group of four

islets about 10 miles in length NW to SE and about 5 miles in

width, lie from 10 to 20 miles NW of Red Bluff. East Islet and

West Islet lie in the SE and NW part of the group, respectively.

These islets lie on a coral reef that dries; at high water, its S

edge is marked by heavy breakers. Danger Rocks lie on the

edge of the foul ground extending 3 miles W from West Islet.

A light is situated on East Islet; a racon transmits from the light

structure. Surprise Reef, composed of sand and coral, with a

least depth of 2.1m, lies on a spit with its shallowest head about

4.75 miles SSW of East Islet; the sea occasionally breaks over

this reef at low water.

4.8 Baleine Bank (16°47'S., 122°00'E.), composed of sand and

coral, extends within the 20m curve, about 18 miles WNW

from the W end of West Islet. The bank, about 5 miles wide,

has general depths of 2.7 to 9.1m. The edges of this bank are

generally clearly marked by tide rips, but the water is usually

so discolored that it is difficult to detect the shallower spots.

Rocks other than those charted may exist. Weston Patch, a narrow ridge with a depth of 4.6m, lies on the N edge of the bank,

about 6.5 miles NW of West Islet. Walker Rock, with a least

known depth of 6.1m, lies 16.5 miles W of West Islet; an unexamined 4.3m patch lies about 5.5 miles ENE of Walker Rock.

4.8 Anchorage may be taken about 1.25 miles NNW of the E

end of West Islet, in a depth of 8.2m, but the bottom is uneven.

This anchorage is exposed to NE winds which occasionally

blow with sufficient force to cause an unpleasant sea. Vessels

with a draft of over 5.5m should anchor farther NE. Currents

set SE with the rising tide and NW with the falling tide.

4.8 Caution—Vessels engaged in underwater operations, including anchoring and trawling, SW of Baleine Bank are advised to do so with caution as well heads are reported in the

area.

4.9 Lacepede Channel (17°00'S., 122°15'E.) leads between the islands and the mainland, and is about 3 miles wide

between the 10m curves on either side. In approaching the

channel from the NE, the track passes E of Sloper Shoal. The

shoal water surrounding the Lacepede Islands lies along the W

side of the channel, while Eclipse Shoals, Awong Patch, Tangier Shoals, and Baskerville Shoal lie to the E of the track; these

shoals have depths of as little as 2.1m. There are isolated

patches of 10.9m in the channel. Useful aids are the lights and

racons at Red Bluff and East Islet.

Cape Baskerville to Roebuck Bay

4.10 Cape Bertholet (17°15'S., 122°11'E.), about 8.5

miles SSW of Cape Baskerville, is a low point that is difficult

to distinguish, located at the N end of a ridge of white sandhills; this ridge terminates about 1.5 miles SSW in a sandhill,

19m high. The shoreline from Cape Baskerville to Cape Bertholet is low and swampy, and is inundated at high water

springs.

4.10 The coastal bank from Carnot Bay SSW to Cape Bertholet,

with less than 5.5m over it, extends up to 3 miles offshore, and

has several drying rocks on it. Baskerville Shoal, with depths

of 2.1m, is centered about 6 miles NW of Cape Baskerville and

Panton Shoals, with several rocks that dry, lie on the coastal

banks off the entrance to Carnot Bay.

4.10 The coast from Cape Bertholet to Coulomb Point, about 7.5

miles SSW, presents a sandy shoreline backed by sandhills up

to 19m high, partly covered by scrub. A brush-covered sand

hill, 30m high, is located 0.75 mile SSE of Coulomb Point.

Foul ground, with rocks that dry, extends up to 3 miles offshore. A depth of 5.7m is located just inside the 10m curve

about, 6.5 miles NW of Coulomb Point.

4.10 Talboys Rock (17°18'S., 122°02'E.), an isolated coral head
84 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

with a depth of 3.7m, lies 7.5 miles WNW of Coulomb Point.

The rock is plainly marked by tide rips.

4.10 James Price Point (17°30'S., 122°09'E.), about 8 miles S of

Coulomb Point, consists of low cliffs backed by red sandhills,

27m high, partially covered with scrub. The intervening shore

between the two points is sandy for 2.5 miles S and is backed

by white sand hills. The remainder of the coast to James Price

Point consists of red cliffs, 8 to 24m high. A green hillock,

10m high, stands 4 miles S of Coulomb Point. The wooded

coastal range of hills rises gradually to its summit, 122m high,

15 miles ENE of James Price Point; there is also a hill, 100m

high, 6.5 miles ENE of the same point.

4.10 The coastal waters, with depths of less than 5.5m, extend to

2 miles offshore between Coulomb Point and James Price

Point; within this area there are submerged and drying rocks.

James Price Patches, composed of sand and coral, have a least

depth of 7.3m at their N end, about 2 miles W of James Price

Point.

4.10 Tidal currents between Cape Leveque and James Price Point

are rotary in the offing. When the tide begins to rise the current

sets to the SSE, gradually turning through E, and at high water

sets between NE and N.

4.11 Cape Boileau (17°40'S., 122°11'E.), about 10.5 miles

SSE of James Price Point, is the S extremity of a conspicuous

red cliff 3 to 6m high. From James Price Point S, the coast consists of sandy beaches and occasional low cliffs, backed by sandhills, partly covered by brush. The land immediately behind

the sandhills is low and covered with scrub, gradually rising inland to the slopes of the coastal range.

4.11 The 10m curve lies up to 4.5 miles offshore between James

Price Point and Cape Boileau. Farm Shoal, with a least depth

of 4.6m, lies 1 mile offshore, about 2.5 miles NNW of Cape

Boileau. Grey Shoal, with a least depth of 9.1m, lies outside

the 10m curve, about 8 miles WNW of Cape Boileau. Boileau

Patches, with a least depth of 8.2m, are located between Cape

Boileau and Naringla Shoal, a sand and coral shoal with a least

depth of 7.6m, about 4.25 miles W of the cape.

4.11 From Cape Boileau S to Gantheaume Point, 18 miles distant,

the coast is indented by two drying creeks. Barred Creek is located E of Cape Boileau; Willie Creek lies 6 miles farther S.

Between these creeks, the shore is sandy and fringed with a

low range of white sand hills. A house and a radio tower stand

on the N shore of Willie Creek, close inside its mouth.

4.11 From Willie Creek, the low sand hills run S to Station Hill,

which is a conical hill, 36m high, located 3.5 miles N of

Gantheaume Point. A range of sand hills continues SSW to

Gantheaume Point, which terminates in a rock cliff about

15.2m high. 

4.11 Coastal banks, which dry and extend up to 0.75 mile offshore, lie between Willie Creek and Gantheaume Point. Cary

Patch, with a least depth of 4.6m, is located 2 miles NW of

Willie Creek. Depths of 8.5m lie up to 15 miles off this section

of the coast.

4.11 Declaration Rock (17°55'S., 122°09'E.), with a depth of

4.9m, lies about 3.75 miles NNW of Gantheaume Point.

4.11 Whale Rock, which dries 0.9m, lies about 0.75 mile N of

Gantheaume Point. Swirl Rock, with depths less than 1.8m,

lies 0.5 mile NW of Gantheaume Point and is marked by tide

rips. Inshore of these dangers, the bottom is foul.

4.11 Caution.—Fish aggregation devices (FAD), marked by special spar buoys, are moored approximately 12 miles NW of

Gantheaume Point and should be given a wide berth by mariners.

Roebuck Bay

4.12 Roebuck Bay (18°05'N., 122°12'E.), one of the best

harbors on this coast, is entered between Gantheaume Point

and Cape Villaret, 22 miles SSW, and extends about 11 miles

E. The N shore of the bay trends SE nearly 3 miles to Entrance

Point, then NNE to Dampier Creek, with the town of Broome

on its W side. There are some red cliffs, 12m high, about 5

miles ENE of Entrance Point. A number of creeks discharge

into the NE and SE corners of Roebuck Bay; the E shore is

fringed by mangroves. The low shores continues WSW to

Bush Point, which has a clump of stunted trees and bushes on

it, located 11 miles NE of Cape Villaret. From Bush Point, the

low shore rises to Cape Villaret, a hillock 48m high, with some

red patches under it.

4.12 Roebuck Bay appears as a spacious bay at high water, but at

low water a large portion of the bay is occupied by drying sand

banks extending up to 7 miles from the S shore. Pearl Shoals,

which cover an extensive area, obstruct the entrance, leaving

Roebuck Deep, a channel about 0.75 mile wide, between their

NE side and the coast at Gantheaume Point.

4.12 Lights are shown from both Gantheaume Point and Entrance

Point; the light structure at Entrance Point is situated about 0.3

mile NW of the S extremity of the point.

Broome (17°58'S., 122°14'E.)

World Port Index No. 54630

4.13 Broome is situated close within the entrance to Roebuck Bay and is entered through Roebuck Deep. There is berthing for deep draft vessels at Broome Harbor and for light

draft vessels about 3 miles NE, in Dampier Creek, abreast the

town of Broome. The principal imports are general cargo and

bulk oil, and the exports are primarily frozen and chilled beef,

beef by-products, and wool. The port is also a major export

outlet for cattle to middle and far-eastern countries, and is also

a supply center and base for vessels servicing petroleum exploration activities off the coast, and for the pearling industry.

4.13 Winds—Weather.—The Southeast Trade Wind is the predominate wind throughout the year and is associated with good

weather. From December to February, the Northwest or West

Monsoon winds spread from W and N through this area. In

March the winds become variable, but by April the SE wind

has re-established itself.

4.13 The Southeast Monsoon or Southeast Winds are associated

with fine dry weather, with practically cloudless days. The

Northwest or West Monsoon is attended, especially at its onset,

with considerable cloud, rain, and frequently thunderstorms.

With the approach of the Northwest or West Monsoon, squalls

Port of Broome Home Page

http://www.broomeport.com
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 85

Pub. 175

occur at intervals of 4 to 5 days, but their frequency increases

until they occur almost daily. The transitional period from one

season to the next occurs through March and part of April and

during the quarter October to December. The winds at these

times are light and variable, but usually blow from the direction appropriate to the season.

4.13 Fog is rare, occurring only about 2 per cent of the time

throughout the year. It occurs more often in summer and autumn, although, mist or haze is more common. Dust and smoke

from brush fires are the common cause of haze. Visibility is also reduced to fog limits in some of the heavier downpours of

the wet season.

4.13 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Broome is 8.5m at

mean high water springs and 5.4m at mean high water neaps.

Strong tides can be experienced across the entrance channel

and at the berth. In Roebuck Deep and at the entrance to the inner anchorage, the tidal currents attain a rate of 4 to 5 knots

during springs; at other times the rate seldom exceeds 2 knots.

4.13 Tidal movements at the wharf may be quite different from

tidal movements in the channel.

4.13 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance to Broome is through

Roebuck Deep, which should be approached with caution.

Pearl Shoals, the SW danger of Roebuck Deep, has a minimum

depth of 2.1m; however, North Rock, with a depth of 1.2m, Escape Rocks, with a depth of 0.6m, and East Rock, with a depth

of 1.2m, lie on the N, NE, and E edge of Pearl Shoals, respectively. Nab Rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, is the outermost danger on the NE side of Roebuck Deep. 

4.13 From the SE end of Roebuck Deep, the passage E of Channel Rock (18°00.7'S., 122°12.8'E) has a least depth of 5.2m lying off the W end of Middle Ground. The passage W of

Channel Rock has a least depth of 11.3m. 

4.13 The wharf is situated about 0.75 mile NE of Entrance Point,

at the head of a concrete jetty which extends across the ledges

fronting the shore. The outer berth, which is 183m long, can

accommodate a vessel with a maximum draft of 9m. The inner

berth can accommodate a vessel with a maximum draft of 8m. 

4.13 Aspect.—Station Hill, 37m high, is the northernmost and

highest of a range of sandhills which lie to the N of Roebuck

Bay. Saddle Hill, 33m high, stands about 2.25 miles SSW of

Station Hill and is bare and conspicuous. Red Hill, 21m high,

is conspicuous and stands about 1 mile NW of Entrance Point.

Four radio masts stand within 0.2 mile ENE of Entrance Point

light structure and some conspicuous tanks are situated close N

of the structure. A conspicuous water tower and radio mast,

55m high, stand about 2.25 miles and 3.25 miles, respectively,

ENE of Gantheaume Point. A lighted buoy moored about 1.25

miles SW of Gantheaume Point marks the N extremity of Pearl

Shoals. Lighted beacons are situated 0.35 mile ESE and 0.65

mile ENE of the S extremity of Entrance Point, and in the approach to Dampier Creek, about 2.75 miles NE of the wharf.

4.13 Range lights mark the preferred track leading E of Channel

Rock. Range lights also mark the passage W of Channel Rock.

4.13 An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated about 3.75 miles NE

of Gantheaume Point and an aeronautical light is shown from a

position at the airfield, about 0.75 mile SSE of the radiobeacon.

4.13 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels of 500

gross tons or more and is available 24 hours. Pilots board about

5 miles W of the light on Gantheaume Point.

Broome
86 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

Broome—Tidal Currents
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 87

Pub. 175

4.13 The pilot vessel is equipped with VHF radio. The calling frequency is VHF channel 16; the working frequencies are VHF

channels 6 12.

4.13 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 7 days in advance with sent updates 48 hours and 24 hours prior to arrival.

4.13 Vessels may berth day or night depending on tidal conditions.

4.13 Vessels should report to Port of Broome on VHF channel 16

when passing position 17°59'28.8''S, 122°09'52.2''E. 

4.13 Signals.—Depth signals may be displayed from the signal

mast at the SW end of the wharf.

4.13 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken in Roebuck Deep as

convenient. Vessels may anchor in the pilot boarding area. The

holding ground is reported good, but the position is exposed.

Large vessels can anchor S of Middle Ground, in depths of 15

to 16m, about 3.5 miles ESE of Entrance Point Light.

4.13 Vessels can anchor in depths of 13 to 16m in the Inner Anchorage; at low water this anchorage is protected by Middle

Ground, but at high water, with strong E winds, a troublesome

sea may be experienced. There is a mooring buoy in the Inner

Anchorage, 2 miles ENE of the NE end of the wharf at

Broome.

4.13 Anchorage in smooth water with good shelter can be found

during E winds in a depth of about 12m about 2 miles NNE of

Gantheaume Light, and about 1.5 miles offshore.

4.13 A prohibited anchorage area is situated in the vicinity of the

wharf and is shown on the chart; beacons in line on the shore

about 1 mile N of the wharf indicate the NE limit of the area.

4.13 Directions.—When approaching Roebuck Bay, keep to seaward in not less than 15m until the light on Gantheaume Point

bears 094.5°, then steer for it and approach the pilot station,

which is about 6.5 miles W of the point.

4.13 Caution.—Declaration Rock, with a depth of 4.9m, lies 3.75

miles NNW of Gantheaume Point and Disaster Rock, 8 miles

SW of the same point, is a pinnacle rock with a depth of 1.5m.

Numerous isolated depths of less than 11m lie outside the 11m

curve for distances up to 20 miles off the salient points on the

coast in this area.

4.13 Pearl culture areas are situated in the coastal waters between

the Lacepede Islands and Cape Bossut. The farms, which may

be floating or fixed structures, and their associated moorings

should be avoided. The farms are generally marked by buoys

and beacons, which may be lit.

Roebuck Bay to Port Hedland

4.14 Gourdon Bay (18°27'S., 121°55'E.), located about

13.5 miles SW of Cape Villaret, is about 10 miles wide and

open W. The S shore of the bay dries, but depths of 5.5m are

charted 2 miles N of the S shore. Two prominent points,

Church Hill, 58m high, and Barn Hill, lie about 5 miles NE of

Cape Gourdon. The 10m curve lies about 4 miles NW of Cape

Latouche Treville; Justice Shoal, a patch with a least depth of

3.6m, is located about 8 miles W of the cape.

4.14 From Cape Latouche Treville, the coast trends 20 miles SSW

to Cape Bossut and is indented by Port Smith, a creek which

dries, and Lagrange Bay. A sand bank, which dries at low water, extends 1.5 mile W of Port Smith.

4.14 Lagrange Bay (18°38'S., 121°41'E.) is entered between

False Cape Bossut and Cape Bossut, about 10 miles SW. False

Cape Bossut is a rocky projection, 18m high, which appears to

be an island. From False Cape Bossut, the rocky shore of the

bay trends SE for about 3 miles to a mangrove swamp, then S

about 4 miles to Black Rock Point, which dries 6.1m. A ridge

of sandhills backs the shore SW to Cape Bossut, which is a

low, dark, rocky cliff with a ridge of sandhills, 14m high, partly

covered with scrub close within.

4.14 The waters of Lagrange Bay, E of a line joining the two entrance points, has depths of less than 5.5m. Outer Reef, which

dries, lies on the 5m curve about 2.75 miles W of False Cape

Bossut. Casuarina Reef, which dries 1.2m, is located inside the

5m curve about 2 miles W of Cape Bossut. Shell Patch, with a

depth of 0.9m, lies 2 miles NNE of Casuarina Reef. Roy Bank,

with a least known depth of 7.3m, lies between 5.5 and 8.5

miles W of Cape Bossut. A shoal, with a depth of 11m, was reported (1963) to lie 8 miles NW of Cape Bossut.

4.14 Tryon Point (18°44'S., 121°37'E.), located 2.5 miles S of

Cape Bossut, is similar in appearance to that cape, and forms

the SW extremity of the same peninsula. Admiral Bay, between Tryon Point and Cape Frezier, 8 miles S, is shallow

throughout; there is a creek at the head of the bay and extensive

swamps in the direction of Lagrange Bay. A hillock over Cape

Frezier is 20m high and falls seaward in conspicuous red cliffs.

Ledges, which uncover, extend 1 mile seaward of the cape.

4.14 Cape Jaubert (18°56'S., 121°33'E.), 5 miles S of Cape Frezier, has a remarkable white sand patch over it at a height of

14m, and some low dark-colored cliffs close S. Ledges, which

uncover at low water, extend 1 mile seaward of the cape. The

10m curve extends up to 18 miles offshore W of Cape Jaubert.

4.15 Eighty Miles Beach (18°56'S., 121°33'E.) is a low

sandy shore which commences at Cape Jaubert and extends in

a SW direction 80 miles to Red Hill, 17m high. It presents no

conspicuous objects except a high bare sandhill about 10 miles

S of Cape Jaubert and another bare sandhill, 15m high, about

22 miles ENE of Red Hill. The coastal range of sandhills is

from 4.5 to 6.1m high, some of the hills being covered with

vegetation. Nothing of the interior can be seen.

4.15 The 20m curve lies from 10 to 20 miles offshore along

Eighty Miles Beach. Patterson Shoal, with a least depth of

1.8m, has been reported to be about 13 miles SW of Cape Jaubert; this position is doubtful. A narrow ridge, with depths of 6.4

to 9.7m, extends from the vicinity of Patterson Shoal SW for a

distance of about 60 miles to a position about 13 miles NW of

Red Hill. Portions of these waters have not been examined and

lesser depths than charted may be encountered.

4.15 Mount Blaze (20°00'S., 119°41'E.), about 52 miles WSW of

Red Hill, is a sand hill, 18m high, located on a point. The coast

between Red Hill and Mount Blaze continues to be low and

sandy; there are occasional rocky points and low red cliffs,

with a continuation of the low flat country inland. From Cape

Keraudren, 6 miles NE to Mount Blaze, the shore consists of

shoal mangrove bays, with cliffy points between them. The

country behind Mount Blaze is swampy, with mangroves for a

few miles, gradually rising S to cone-shaped hills with flat

tops, from 60 to 150m high, some distance inland.

4.15 From Mount Blaze W to Larrey Point, about 35 miles distant, the coast is indented by a shoal bay and a number of

creeks, which dry. Poissonnier Point, 5 miles E of Larrey Point,

is the E side of the entrance to the De Grey River; the point is
88 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

low and thickly covered with mangrove. The De Grey River,

about 250 miles in length, extends in a general SE direction

from its mouth; it has a number of tributaries.

4.16 The waters NW of Red Hill and WSW to Larrey Point

are encumbered with numerous shoal patches of less than

9.1m, which lie up to 20 miles offshore. Solitary Islet, 9m high,

lies 1 mile offshore, 14 miles ENE of Mount Blaze, it is formed

of red sandstone and is connected to the coast at low water by a

sand spit. Amphinome Shoals, which have not been thoroughly

examined and which sometimes dry in places, have long lines

of breakers, irregular soundings, and tide rips located within,

and front the coast between Mount Blaze and Spit Point; they

lie up to a distance of 23 miles offshore.

4.16 Spit Point (20°02'S., 119°00'E.) is located about 8 miles SW

of Larrey Point. A sandspit, with depths of less than 5m, extends 8 miles NW from the point towards North Turtle Islet;

the inner part of the sandspit dries out.

4.16 Bedout Islet (19°35'S., 119°06'E.), a coral islet, 4m high,

covered with coarse grass, and surrounded by a coral reef that

dries, is located 22 miles N of Larrey Point. Shoals, with

depths of 3.3m, extend 4.5 miles WSW from the islet. These

shoals are marked by overfalls during the strength of the tidal

currents. Bedout Islet Light is shown from a stainless steel

framework tower in the center of the island. A racon is situated

at the light structure.

4.16 Caution.—A submerged well head lies about 56 miles

WNW of Bedout Island.

4.16 Between Bedout Islet and the coast to the S, and then SSW

to North Turtle Islet, there are many shoals with depths of 4.6

to 9.1m.

4.17 North Turtle Islet (19°53'S., 118°54'E.), 10m high,

lies 10 miles NNW of Spit Point and is composed of sand, covered with coarse grass and some shrubs. A reef, about 3 miles

in extent and dry at low water, surrounds the islet.

4.17 Little Turtle Islet, 9 miles SSW of North Turtle, is almost

awash at high water springs, and is surrounded by a reef. The

reef extends about 1 mile WNW of the islet. Shoal water, with

a least depth of 3.6m, may be found 13 miles W of Little Turtle

Islet.

4.17 Minilya Bank (20°11'S., 118°38'E.), a sand bank with a

least depth of 1.9m and about 1.5 miles in extent, is located 9

miles N of Cooke Point.

4.17 Caution.—Magnetic anomalies have been reported in localized areas about 9 miles NW of North Turtle Island and about 5

miles N of Cooke Point.

4.18 Cooke Point (20°18'S., 118°38'E.), about 27 miles

SW of Spit Point, is backed by hills about 15m high. The entire

coast between Spit Point and Cooke Point is an extensive

swamp and is fronted by sandbanks which dry up to 5 miles

offshore in some places. The shoreline extending 17 miles to

the SW of Spit Point consists of a ridge of sparsely covered

sandhills which form a barrier about 12m high, between the sea

and the low swampland behind. 

Port Hedland (20°19'S., 118°34'E.)

World Port Index No. 54620

4.19 Port Hedland, an ore-loading port, is entered between

Airey Point, an ill-defined point about 3.5 miles WSW of

Cooke Point, and Hunt Point, about 0.35 mile NW of Airey

Point. The port is approached through a channel, which is

marked by lighted beacons, and which is entered about 20

miles offshore NNW of the harbor entrance. Offshore oil and

gas rig servicing vessels also use the port facilities.

4.19 A special Decca Navigator Chain, with coverage extending

up to a radius of 75 miles, is in operation within the approaches

to the port in order to aid the large bulk-ore carriers negotiate

the channels through the offshore shoals during the limited

times of high water.

4.19 Winds—Weather.—The Southeast Trade Wind is the predominate wind throughout the year and is associated with fine

dry weather, with practically cloudless days. The Northwest or

West Monsoon is attended, especially at its onset, with considerable cloud, rain, and frequently thunderstorms. With the approach of the Northwest Monsoon, squalls occur at first at

intervals of 4 to 5 days, but their frequency increases until they

occur almost daily.

4.19 The transitional period from the Northwest Monsoon to the

Southeast Trade occurs through March and part of April, and

from the Southeast Trade to the Northwest Monsoon during the

quarter October to December. The winds at these times are

light and variable but usually blow from the direction appropriate to season that is to come.

4.19 The port is occasionally closed due to cyclones which occur

between November and April.

4.19 Fog is rare, occurring only about 2 per cent of the time

throughout the year. It occurs more often in summer and autumn; mist or haze is more common. Dust and smoke from

brush fires are the common cause of haze. Visibility is also liable to be reduced to fog limits in some of the heavier downpours of the wet season.

4.19 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Port Hedland is 6.8m at

mean high water springs and 4.7m at mean high water neaps.

Tidal currents in the harbor attain a rate of 3 to 4 knots; the

outgoing current is the stronger and at the highest tides may

reach a rate of 6 knots. At the offshore anchorage, the tidal currents attain a rate of 2.5 knots at springs.

4.19 Depths—Limitations.—Cornelisse Shoal (20°02'S.,

118°22'E.), with a least depth of 3.2m, is located 20 miles NW

of Port Hedland entrance and about 2.5 miles W of the approach channel; patches with depths of 6 and 8.1m lie 1 mile

SW of the SW end of this shoal. 

Port Hedland Port Authority Home Page

http://www.phpa.wa.gov.au
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 89

Pub. 175

4.19 Coxon Shoal (20°04'S., 118°28'E.) has a least depth of 6.6m

and lies on the E side of the approach channel, about 5 miles

SE of Cornelisse Shoal. A shoal patch, with a least depth of

6.6m, lies 3.25 miles S of Coxon Shoal and about 0.45 mile W

of the approach channel.

4.19 A spoil ground area extends about 6 miles N from the shore

close E of Airey Point and E of the dredged entrance channel.

Two additional spoil ground areas are situated 6.5 and 9.5

miles N of Airey Point; the limits of these areas can be seen on

the chart.

4.19 Drying coral ledges, covered with a thin layer of sand, extend up to 0.75 mile in places off the coast on either side of the

entrance.

4.19 An approach channel marked by pairs of buoys extends SE

from a position about 22 miles NW of Cooke Point for about

12 miles, where it joins a dredged entrance channel, which

leads into the harbor. The dredged channel, with a least depth

of 14.1m as far as the Port Hedland Turning Basin, is entered 4

miles NE of Cornelisse Shoal. The width of the approach channel varies from 430m in the pilotage area to between 183m and

300m inside the port limits.

4.19 Owing to the incomplete nature of the surveys and silting in

the approach waters, depths less than charted may exist and the

approach channel should not be approached from NE if the

vessel is in less than 20m. Vessels are cautioned not to enter the

dredged entrance channel except by way of the approach channel. Lighted Beacon No. 3 and Lighted Beacon No. 4, moored

3 miles SSW of Lighted Beacon C1, mark the route through a

shoal area close E of the channel. 

4.19 In addition to the approach channel, a recommended track

for inbound vessels of lighter draft is situated to the E of the

outer lighted beacons. From a position about 5 miles NNE of

the W outer lighted beacon, vessels should steer 146° for a distance of about 8.75 miles, then S for a distance of about 4.75

miles to the pilot boarding area. The inshore route has a least

depth of 10.2m. A 9.6m patch lies 4 miles ENE of Lighted

Beacon C1 and 0.75 mile E of the SE track.

4.19 No. 1 Berth is a steel and concrete structure situated about

0.2 mile W of the Shipping Control Tower. The berthing face is

about 213m in length with a dolphin situated 58m from the N

end. There is a depth alongside of 11.2m. Vessels up to 230m

long can berth here.

4.19 A basin for tugs lies close N of No. 1 Berth. The S part of the

wharf is used by drilling rig service vessels.

4.19 No. 3 Berth lies close SE of No. 1 Berth. This steel and concrete structure is 183m in length, with dolphins 46m off each

end. There is a depth of 13.4m alongside. Vessels up to 230m

long can berth here. A bulk salt loader is situated at the berth.

4.19 Nelson Point Wharf (BHP Iron Ore Limited Wharf.), privately owned, extends ESE in a continuous line from No. 3

Berth for a total length of 658m. The wharf is comprised of

Berth A and Berth B. There is a depth of 17.2m alongside. Vessels with a maximum length of 315m and a maximum beam of

55m can be accommodated. Vessels normally swing and berth

starboard side-to.

4.19 Goldsworthy Pier, privately owned, is situated on the W side

of the harbor on Finucane Island. The face of the pier, which is

220m in length, is extended by mooring dolphins to an overall

length of 378m. Vessels of up to 260m in length and 33m beam

can use the wharf. The depth alongside is 18.2m. Vessels normally berth port side to, heading out to sea. 

4.19 Aspect.—The hill backing North Point, NNW of Hunt Point,

on the W side of the entrance, has a white sand patch conspicuous from seaward. A conspicuous dome stands on North

Point. The Shipping Control Tower is prominent, standing 31m

high, about 0.4 mile SSW of Airey Point. A crushing plant

60m high stands 0.75 mile E of the Shipping Control Tower

and is the most conspicuous object in daylight. Conspicuous

tanks stand about 0.25 mile SE and 1 mile WSW of Cooke

Point Light and about 0.5 mile W of Hunt Point.

4.19 The outer W lighted beacon situated about 4.25 miles NE of

Cornelisse Shoal, is equipped with a racon. 

4.19 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels of 150 grt

and over, with the following exceptions:

1. Australian commercial fishing vessels of less than

35m in length.

2. Australian Defense Force vessels.

3. Vessels under the command of a master holding a valid exemption.

4.19 Requests for a pilot should be made to the Harbormaster Port

Hedland 48 hours, 24 hours, and 2 hours prior to arrival. This

request should include the last port and estimated draft on arrival.

4.19 Pilots board about 3.5 miles SE of Lighted Beacon No. 14

(20°10'S., 118°33'E.) by either pilot boat or helicopter. The pilot boat is equipped with VHF radio.

4.19 Before entering the Pilotage Area, vessels must call Port

Hedland Harbor on VHF channel 16 and receive permission to

enter.

4.19 Regulations.—Vessels without chart AUS 53 will be denied

entry. Inbound vessels should contact the Port Shipping Control Tower when within VHF radio range and obtain details of

the movement of outbound traffic. Vessels should also report

when at the beginning of the inbound track in position

19°56.37'S, 118°27.77'E. Vessels should then maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 16. Port Control will

advise vessels as to their radar position, berthing instructions,

and other ship movements. Pratique is not granted by radio. No

vessel may enter the dredged channel without the permission

of Port Control.

4.19 Inbound vessels should take the necessary action to avoid

impeding the passage of outbound vessels constrained by their

draft. Such action should be taken by reduction of speed to

avoid meeting in restrictive areas; the most restrictive areas lie

in the vicinity of Lighted Beacon C9 and Lighted Beacon C10.

4.19 Any vessel not restricted in its ability to maneuver shall

avoid impeding the passage of the vessel constrained by its

draft. Vessels usually berth near slack water. Vessels over

100,000 tons do not sail on the ebb.

4.19 Vessels over 280m in length are berthed during daylight

hours only.

4.19 Inbound vessels should not impede outbound vessels constrained by their draft or those restricted in their ability to maneuver. All inbound vessels, except those constrained by their

draft, are to use the recommended E inward route. Vessels using the E approach should note the least depth is 10.2m between beacons 2E and 3E, and ensure that their is sufficient

height of tide to provide safe passage. Information on the tide

height can be obtained 24 hours from Port Hedland Harbor on

VHF channel 16.
90 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

4.19 Signals.—The port is occasionally closed during cyclones,

which occur between November and April. Signals are displayed at night from the Control Tower to show the state of the

tide and to indicate port closure.

4.19 Anchorage.—Channel Escape Areas are established on either side of the channel 2.5 miles W of the pilot boarding area.

Anchorage is prohibited in this vicinity. 

Port Hedland to Port Walcott

4.20 Cape Thouin (20°20'S., 118°11'E.) lies about 22

miles W of Port Hedland. The coast between is intersected by

creeks which are backed by swamps. There are two hills charted about 9 miles SW of Port Hedland, 3 miles within the coast.

4.20 The coastal waters from Port Hedland to Cape Thouin are

fronted by rocky ledges, which dry or have depths of less than

1.8m, and by drying sandbanks which extend up to 2.5 miles

offshore; the 10m curve lies up to 7 miles offshore along this

stretch. 

4.20 The coast between Cape Thouin and Cape Cossigny

(20°29'S., 117°56'E.), about 16 miles SW, is formed by sand

hills from 9 to 12m high; the country inland is elevated and apparently thickly wooded. The coast is fronted by rocky ledges

and sand flats, which dry at a considerable distance from the

shore. A conspicuous tower stands on a sandhill, about 8.5

miles SW of Cape Thouin.

4.20 From Cape Cossigny to the entrance of the Sherlock River

(20°43'S., 117°33'E.), about 26 miles SW, there are numerous

islands and islets which lie up to 4 miles offshore. These islands and islets are connected to the mainland by sand banks

which dry at low water. Between the entrance to the Sherlock

River and Port Walcott, about 20 miles W, the land is low, flat

and intersected by several rivers, which discharge into the

swampy and mangrove-covered land bordering the coast. 

4.20 The coastal waters have irregular depths of less than 10m up

to 7.5 miles offshore and depths of less than 5m up to 4 miles

offshore. Mount Wangee, 75m in elevation and the highest

summit of a double ridge of grassy hillocks, is located about

2.5 miles inland from the shore S of Port Walcott. Mount Wangee and a lower summit, 53m high, located about 2 miles NE,

are the only prominent features along this coast.

4.21 Weerdee Island (20°19'S., 118°28'E.), 9m high, lies

6.5 miles WSW of Hunt Point and 1 mile offshore; within this

island is Oyster Inlet, which affords shelter for small vessels

with local knowledge, but it should only be approached from

the E at low water when the ledges can be seen.

4.21 A shoal, with a depth of 4.6m, lies 4.5 miles NE of Cape

Thouin. A 3m patch lies 8.5 miles NE of Cape Thouin and an

obstruction was reported (1936) to lie 2 miles NE of the patch.

A shoal, with a least depth of 8.8m, lies 16 miles NE of Cape

Thouin, with a 6.7m patch 3.5 miles WSW of it. In 1981, shoal

depth of 7m and 8m were reported 12 miles NE and 10.5 miles

NNE, respectively, of Cape Thouin. Depths of 3.5m, 3.4m, and

2.7m lie 8 miles N, 6 miles NW, and 4 miles WNW of Cape

Thouin.

4.21 Geographe Shoals (20°16'S., 117°54'E.) are several rocky

patches which extend up to 8 miles NNW of Cape Cossigny;

the sea generally breaks over these shoals, and some rocks are

visible at low water. The charted position of these shoals is approximate and they should not be approached in poor visibility

in a depth of less than 30m.

4.21 Beagle Reef (20°23'S., 117°50'E.), the charted position of

which is approximate, lies 8.5 miles NW of Cape Cossigny and

has a depth of 0.8m. There is reported to be a clear channel between Beagle Reef and Geographe Shoals, however, the entire

area is only partially surveyed and is best avoided. Shoals, with

depths of 4.5m and 4.8m, lie 4.5 miles N of Beagle Reef.

Shoals, with a depth of 5m and marked by tide rips, lie 3.75

miles and 5 miles WNW of Beagle Reef.

4.21 The Forestier Islands (20°32'S., 117°51'E.), the N extremity

of which lies 1 mile NW of Cape Cossigny, form a chain of

three narrow islands and reefs, extending SW, parallel to the

coast and from 1 to 3.25 miles offshore for 15 miles. Reef Islet,

the NE of the chain, has drying reefs extending 1.25 miles NE

and SW from it. All of these islets are composed of narrow

ridges of sandhills, covered with coarse grass and stunted

shrubs. Rosnard, the center and largest islet, is 15m high and

when seen from N, shows two peaks with a white patch under

each.

4.21 Sable Islet (West Forestier Islet) (20°35'S., 117°45'E.) is divided into two parts which are connected by a rocky causeway

awash at high water. The E part is 11m high, covered with

grass and low bushes. The W part is a narrow strip about 1 mile

in length, with Table Rock at its W end. Sable Islet is connected to the coast by a bank of sand and coral which dries. This

bank extends from the W extremity of the islet and has some

rocks with less than 1.8m over them on its outer extremity;

depths less than 5m extend 3 miles NW, forming the E side of

the approach to Depuch Island Anchorage.

4.22 Depuch Island (20°38'S., 117°43'E.) lies with North

Point, its NE extremity, 2 miles SW of the W end of Sable Islet, and consists of an irregular pile of reddish-colored hills, in

some parts resembling basaltic columns, rising to a height of

158m in the SW part. In the valleys, and on some of the more

level parts near the summit of the island, there is a little soil,

producing coarse grass and a few stunted trees. A bank of sand

and coral, which dries, extends 4.5 miles SW from the N extremity of Depuch Island. On this bank are East Moore Islet

and West Moore Islet, both having sandhills on them about

13m high; Sandy Islet, 3m high, is located between them.

Black Rock, which dries 4m, lies on the drying flat close SW

of the N extremity of the island.

4.22 The 10m curve extends up to 8 miles N of Depuch Island,

and several shoal patches, with a least depth of 6m, lie up to 15

miles NNW of the island. 

4.22 Depuch Island is an aboriginal reserve and landing is restricted.

4.22 Depuch Island Anchorage is located E of the N part of the island and is entered between North Point and the sand bank extending SW from Sable Islet.

4.22 Good anchorage may be taken about 0.65 mile ESE of North

Point, in a depth of 8.5m; this anchorage is protected from the

NE by the same bank extending SW from Sable Islet. Small

vessels can find anchorage, in about 3m, off Anchor Hill, 1.5

miles SE of North Point, taking care to avoid the shoals which

extend 0.5 mile N from the shore in the vicinity of this hill.

4.22 Tidal currents at the anchorage attain a rate of 3 knots at

springs, causing tide rips off North Point and Anchor Hill; the
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 91

Pub. 175

flood current sets SE and the ebb current sets NW.

4.22 Balla Balla (20°40'S., 117°47'E.), a small landlocked harbor

in the creek of the same, is entered 3 miles SE of Anchor Hill;

all but the narrow and tortuous entrance channel dry out.

4.22 Picard Islet (20°11'S., 117°16'E.) is a bare rock, 40m high,

located about 6 miles SE of Port Walcott. It is connected to the

coast by a sand spit, which dries. Hat Rock, and an islet 4m

high close SE, lie about 1.5 miles NE of Picard Islet.

Port Walcott (20°38'S., 117°13'E.)

World Port Index No. 54600

4.23 Port Walcott is entered between Picard Islet and Bezout Island, 9 miles NW. Port Walcott is a major iron ore-exporting port.

4.23 Winds—Weather.—The Southeast Monsoon prevails from

March to September, and seldom blows hard for more than a

few hours, being associated with fine weather. The Northwest

Monsoon prevails from October to March, with variable winds

in September and in the transition period during March. Cyclones occasionally occur during the Northwest Monsoon, usually in the months of November and December.

4.23 Tides—Currents.—Mean spring tides rise about 5.2m and

mean neaps about 3.4m.

4.23 The flood current sets SSE at a velocity of 1.1 knots at spring

tides, 4 hours after low water, in a position about 0.75 mile E of

the ore jetty. The ebb current sets across the same position, in a

reciprocal direction, at a rate of 1.3 knots, about 3 hours after

high water.

4.23 Depths—Limitations.—Cape Lambert Ore Jetty extends

1.5 miles NE from Cape Lambert. Two berths, each 350m

long, are situated at the seaward end of the jetty. Berth No. 1,

on the SE side, has a dredged depth of 18.5m and can accommodate vessels up to 225,000 dwt with a maximum beam of

50m. Berth No. 2, on the NE side, has a dredged depth of

19.8m and can accommodate vessels up to 290,000 dwt and a

maximum beam of 55m. 

4.23 Berthing of ore carriers is usually carried out 2 to 3 hours before high water.

4.23 The Service Jetty, close W of the root of the Ore Jetty, extends about 0.3 mile NE and has a berthing face 155m long, extended by dolphins to a length of 210m, with a depth alongside

of 10m. Vessels up to 190m in length can be accommodated at

the jetty.

4.23 The inbound entrance channel and the outbound buoyed

channel are described in Directions.

4.23 Aspect.—Cape Lambert (20°36'S., 117°11'E.) is rocky and

about 11m high. About 1 mile S of the cape, there is a promontory, 26m high, faced on the NE by a red cliff. To the W of the

promontory, an extensive swamp nearly separates Cape Lambert from the mainland. The swamp is backed by rocky hills

from 30 to 60m high, mostly barren and of a dark, rusty color.

Submerged reefs extend 1.5 miles NE from the promontory.

4.23 A disused wooden jetty, about 300m long, projects E from

Point Samson, which is located 2.5 miles SSE of Cape Lambert. Reader Head, a dark bluff point about 2 miles S of Point

Samson, is the N entrance point of Butcher Inlet. Cossack, an

abandoned town, is situated near the entrance and the town of

Roebourne is situated about 6 miles up the inlet.

4.23 John’s Creek, a fishing boat harbor, is entered close S of

Point Samson by way of a short channel marked by lighted

beacons.

4.23 The most conspicuous landmarks are a tank near the root of

the disused pier at Point Samson; the ore stockpiles at Cape

Lambert; a radio mast with red lights situated 3 miles SW of

Cape Lambert; and a number of chimneys, 56m in elevation,

standing about 0.5 mile W of the ore stockpiles.

4.23 Bezout Islet (20°33'S., 117°10'E.), about 2 miles N of Cape

Lambert, is dark-colored and has a height of 27m. Boat Rock,

which dries 4m, lies 0.5 mile E of Bezout Islet.

4.23 Jarman Islet, 21m high, is located within the port, 1.75 miles

SE of Point Samson. Pelican Rocks, consisting of two rocks,

one of which has a height of 1m, are located 1.25 miles ENE of

Jarman Islet. Popes Nose Rock, 15m high, lies in a drying bay

about 0.5 mile SW of Point Samson. A reef, which dries 3.9m,

lies 0.9 mile ESE of the root of the ore jetty.

4.23 Delambre Reef (20°26'S., 117°15'E.), composed of coral

and sand, with a least depth of 3.6m, lies 10 miles NNE of

Cape Lambert. A 6.7m patch was reported (1958) to lie 2.75

miles SW of the shallowest part of Delambre Reef.

4.23 Tessa Shoals, with a least depth of 7m, lie between 9 and 12

miles NE of Cape Lambert, on the S side of Bass Pass.

4.23 Pilotage.—Pilot boarding areas are situated close E of

Lighted Buoy C1 and about 5.8 miles ENE of the seaward end

of the ore jetty. Pilotage is optional for inbound vessels between Lighted Buoy C1 and the boarding area ENE of the oil

jetty; between this position and the berths, pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels within the port area

and for outbound vessels within the dredged channel. Pilotage

is also compulsory for deep draft vessels needing to transit the

Outer North Channel.

4.23 Vessels should send an ETA 7 days, 48 hours, and 24 hours

in advance. The pilot boat is equipped with VHF, but there is

not a continuous watch. Pilots may also board by helicopter for

vessels with a landing area; tankers may not board the pilot by

Courtesy of Robe River Mining

Port Walcott—Cape Lambert
 Pub. 175
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 93

Pub. 175

helicopter. Vessels unable to accept a helicopter should advise

the port at least 48 hours in advance.

4.23 There is a port radio station at Port Walcott.

4.23 Regulations.—All vessels must keep clear of large bulk carriers that are moored or maneuvering within an area 2 miles

wide, extending to 4 miles NNE of Port Samson and 2.5 miles

N of Cape Lambert.

4.23 Anchorage.—Fifteen designated anchor berths are situated

within an area from 2.75 miles NE to 8 miles ENE of Cape

Lambert. Depths in these anchor berths vary from 11.5 to 15m,

sand.

4.23 Directions.—Owing to the incomplete nature of the survey

in the approaches to Port Walcott, vessels should navigate only

in the recommended tracks. No reliance should be placed on

the lighted buoys always maintaining their exact positions.

4.23 Vessels should approach Port Walcott by making for Lighted

Buoy C1, which is equipped with a racon and moored 18 miles

NE of Cape Lambert.

4.23 A recommended track, for inbound vessels only, leads S

from Lighted Buoy C1 for about 7 miles, then leads WSW to

the port and anchorage area. This recommended track passes to

the S of Tessa Shoals, which are marked by a lighted buoy, and

have a least charted depth of 7m.

4.23 A deep-draft channel, for outbound vessels, winds NE and E

from the port to the vicinity of Lighted Buoy C1. This channel,

which passes through Bass Pass and N of Tessa Shoals, is

dredged to a depth of 16m and is marked on both sides by

lighted buoys. It is about 210m wide at the inshore end and

gradually widens to about 600m at the seaward end. Entry to

the port by this dredged and buoyed channel is prohibited.

4.23 Caution.—Local magnetic disturbances have been found in

the vicinity of a position 4 miles NNE of Cape Lambert, where

the magnetic compass was deflected up to 55°.

Port Walcott to Dampier

4.24 From Port Walcott to Dampier, the coast is fronted by

the islands that form the E part of the Dampier Archipelago

(20°27'S., 116°47'E.). The islands of the archipelago are generally high, rocky, and of a dark red color, extending about 40

miles in an E-W direction.

4.24 Nickol Bay (20°35'S., 116°55'E.), lying SW of Delambre Island, has not been completely surveyed, but vessels with local

knowledge may anchor, in depths of 11 to 12m, on the N side

of the entrance, which is between Bezout Islet and the foul

ground extending S from Delambre Island, then passing 5

miles N of Dixon Island (20°38'S., 117°04'E.). Dixon Island

lies 7 miles WSW of Cape Lambert, in the E part of Nickol

Bay. Port Robinson, a small harbor for vessels of less than

2.7m draft, lies close within the SW extremity of Dixon Island.

4.24 A marine farm has been established off the N side of Dixon

Island and extends approximately 1 mile offshore. Marine

farms are generally marked by buoys or beacons. The area

should be avoided.

4.24 Delambre Island (20°26'S., 117°05'E.), the E island of the

group, lies 10 miles NNW of Cape Lambert; it has a broken

sandstone cliff 35m high, and a peculiar pinnacle rock at its N

end, which, when approaching from the W, has the appearance

of a square building. A drying reef extends from the E and W

sides of the island; foul ground, irregular depths, and strong

tide rips extend for 3 miles from the island. 

4.24 Hauy Islet, 12m high and 5.5 miles W of Delambre Island, is

connected to the SE extremity of Legendre Island by a reef.

Heavy tide rips extend to Delambre Island.

4.24 Cape Legendre (20°21'S., 116°50'E.) is the NW extremity

of Legendre Island and is the northernmost point of the Dampier Archipelago. Legendre Island, a rocky formation, is 17m

high and sparsely covered with vegetation. Legendre Island

Light is shown from a white hut situated about 0.5 mile SE of

the cape. The N side of the island may be approached with confidence, but the SE extremity and the SW side are foul.

Madeleine Shoals, 2.5 miles N of Cape Legendre, have a least

depth of 14.1m, and Hammersley Shoal, which dries, extends 4

miles SW from the W end of Legendre Island.

4.24 Glomar Shoal (19°31'S., 116°47'E.), with a least depth of

22m, lies 50 miles N of the N extremity of Legendre Island and

is located on a bank with general depths of 27 to 37m.

4.24 Numerous oil and gas production wells exist in all directions

extending from Glomar Shoal and are best seen on the chart.

4.25 Wandoo Marine Terminal (20°°09'S., 116°°25'E.) is

situated about 28 miles NW of Cape Legendre. The terminal,

which consists of a CALM buoy, serves the Wandoo Oil Field.

The facility is surrounded by a cautionary area, which is best

seen on the chart

4.25 Winds—Weather.—Four to five tropical cyclones develop

in the area during the season, with one or two reaching storm

force. The most active season is from December through April.

4.25 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets SE, while the

ebb current sets NW. Rates of 1.3 knots have been experienced

at springs; rates of 0.4 knot have been experienced at neaps.

4.25 Seas are generally slight, except during cyclones or other

isolated storms. Seas of 2m or less occur more than 95 per cent

of the time; however, during the winter seas as high as 4m can

occur during E gales.

4.25 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 100,000 dwt can be

accommodated.

4.25 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels. The pilot

boards in the anchorage area, situated about 3 miles NW of the

terminal and best seen on the chart.

4.25 Regulations.—Vessels are required to send their ETA 72

hours, 48 hours, 24 hours, and 12 hours in advance and to provide a Notice of Readiness upon arrival. 

4.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken about 3.5 miles NW

of the CALM buoy, as shown on chart. 

4.26 Wanaea Marine Terminal (19°35'S., 116°27'E.) is

situated 33 miles N of Wandoo Marine Terminal. The terminal

consists of a 150,000 dwt tanker than has been converted into a

Floating Production, Storage, and Off-loading (FPSO) facility

and serves the Wanaea Oil Field and the Cossack Oil Field.

The facility is surrounded by a cautionary area, which is best

seen on the chart.

4.26 Winds—Weather.—See Wandoo Marine Terminal in paragraph 4.25.

4.26 Tides—Currents.—The terminal is situated close E of the

Western Australian Current, which flows NE along the continental shelf, and W of the return current which flows along the

coast. A rate of 1.5 knots can be expected during spring tides.

A rate of 3 knots has been reported (1995) at the terminal.
94 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

4.26 Information on sea states around the terminal can be found

in the description of Wandoo Marine Terminal in paragraph

4.25.

4.26 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 150,000 dwt can be

accommodated. Vessels are moored with their bow to the stern

of the FPSO. The terminal stands in 78m of water.

4.26 Berthing takes place only between 0600 and 1630.

4.26 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot will board vessels off Dampier Port at a position situated 7 miles from Legendre Island Light, on a bearing of 246° from the light. The

mooring operation will be assisted by a support vessel.

4.26 Regulations.—Vessels are required to send their ETA 72

hours, 48 hours, 24 hours, and 12 hours in advance. Vessels

shall notify the terminal if the ETA changes by more than 1

hour after the submission of the 12-hour notification.

4.26 Anchorage.—Glomar Shoal, 20 miles E of the terminal, has

been reported (1997) to have been used as an anchorage by

tankers. A yellow mooring buoy lies 4.25 miles SE of the facility in a depth of 60m.

4.27 Legendre Marine Terminal (19°42'S., 116°43'E.) is

situated approximately 54 miles N of Dampier and about 18

miles SE of Wanaea Terminal. The terminal consists of a production platform, submarine oil pipelines and a tanker mooring

buoy. The field stands in 50m of water. The facility is surrounded by a cautionary area, which has a radius of 3 miles.

4.27 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot will board vessels off Dampier Port at a position situated 7 miles from Legendre Island Light, on a bearing of 246° from the light. The

mooring operation will be assisted by a support vessel.

4.27 The pilot can be contacted by e-mail, as follows: 

4.27 Anchorage.—An anchor berth, as shown on chart, has been

established 700m NW of the platform.

4.27 Caution.—Extensive oil exploration activity is underway in

the area between Glomar Shoal and Rankin Bank (19°44'S.,

115°35'E.). Details can best be seen on the chart.

4.27 The moored storage tanker Modec Venture II, with an associated cautionary area with a radius of 2.5 miles, is located in

position 19°16.6'S, 116°36.6'E. This location is approximately

20 miles NNW of Wanaea Marine Terminal and 25 miles N of

Legendre Marine Terminal.

4.28 Stag Marine Terminal (20°17'S., 116°16'E.) is surrounded by a cautionary area, which has a radius of 3 miles.

This area consists of a production platform (Stag Terminal),

submarine oil pipelines, and a CALM (catenary anchor leg

mooring) buoy.

4.28 The CALM buoy is situated 1 mile N of the platform in 50m

of water. A storage tanker is moored at the bow at all times. A

second tanker (astern) is only on location when oil is being offloaded.

4.28 Regulations.—Vessels are required to send their ETA 10

days and 7 days in advance. Vessels should contact the Marine

Facility on VHF channel 16 when within 40 miles and confirm

ETA. On arrival, the vessel will be advised to proceed to the

approved anchorage (20°15'S., 116°15'E.) or proceed directly

to the berth. 

4.28 Anchorage.—An anchor berth, as shown on chart, has been

established 2 miles NW of the CALM buoy.

4.28 Mermaid Sound (20°30'S., 116°45'E.) is approached from

the N and its entrance lies about 7 miles SW of Cape Legendre.

The main ship channel to Port Dampier transits the entire

length of the sound, which has general depths of 6.4 to 16m.

The sound is bound on the E by Gidley Island, Angel Island,

and the mainland S to Dampier. Gidley Island lies 4.25 miles S

of the W extremity of Legendre Island and extends SSW about

3.5 miles. Angel Island, close S of Gidley Island, extends 3

miles farther SSW and Conzinc Islet lies about 1.5 miles SSW

of Angel Island. Drying shoals, encumbered with numerous

rocks and islets, lie SSE of Hammersley Shoal to Gidley Island, then continue S to Conzinc Islet.

4.28 Caution.—A spoil ground lies about 1 mile W of Conzinc

Island.

4.29 Flying Foam Passage, about 0.5 mile wide, runs NE,

with Dolphin Island on the E side and Gidley Island and Angel

Island on the W side. Many pearl culture farms obstruct this

passage, which can only be used by small craft with local

knowledge.

4.29 Withnell Bay, with a depth of 4.6m, is entered about 2.5

miles S of the Conzinc Islet. Star Rock, with a depth of 0.3m,

lies 1.25 miles W of the S entrance point of Withnell Bay and

pilotloadingmaster@woodside.com.au

Courtesy of Apache Corporation

Stag Marine Terminal from S
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 95

Pub. 175

is marked by a lighted beacon. King Bay, entered between

Phillip Point and Parker Point, lies 3.5 miles SW of Withnell

Bay and has depths of less than 5m. The W side of Mermaid

Sound is bound by the Malus Islands, West Lewis Island, and

East Lewis Island. 

4.29 Nelson Rocks (20°27'S., 116°41'E.) lie on the NW side of

Mermaid Sound, 3.5 miles NNW of Courtenay Head. Courtenay Shoal, with a least depth of 3m, has a 3.3m spot located

about 2 miles NNE of Courtenay Head. A lighted buoy lies 0.5

mile off the E side of Courtenay Shoal.

4.29 Courtenay Head (20°31'S., 116°41'E.), the NE extremity of

the four Malus Islands, is a remarkable bluff. The Malus Islands are all connected by sand spits. West Lewis Island lies

about 2.5 miles SSW of Courtenay Head. There is a height of

about 120m in the S part of the island. A small islet lies close

off the N extremity of West Lewis Island and Pueblo Shoal,

with a depth of 2.7m, lies 1.75 miles SE of the N extremity.

East Lewis Island, 71m high, is separated from West Lewis Island by a boat channel, which dries. Boiler Rock, 42m high,

lies 1 mile N of the NE extremity of East Lewis Island and is

connected to it by a reef. The E coast of East Lewis Island is

fronted by a spoil ground between Boiler Rock and Roe Point,

the island’s SE extremity.

4.29 The head of Mermaid Sound, about 15 miles within its entrance, has several islands located within it. From E to W the

principal ones are Tidepole Island, East Intercourse Island,

Mistaken Island, and Intercourse Island. Tidepole Island, about

0.5 mile long N to S, with a height of 14m, has a spoil ground

along the length of its W side. East Intercourse Island, 50m

high, is about 1.5 miles in length, in a NE-SW direction, and is

connected to the mainland by a causeway. Mistaken Island,

13m high, lies 0.5 mile W of the mainland by a causeway

which extends SSE to East Middle Intercourse Islet, then on

SSE.

4.29 The coast near the S end of the sound is generally high and

rocky; the hills, like the islands. are of a dark reddish color.

Dampier (20°40'S., 116°43'E.)

World Port Index No. 54605

4.30 The port of Dampier is entered between the NW end

of Legendre Island and Nelson Rocks, about 10 miles SW.

4.30 Dampier is one of the principal iron ore exporting ports on

the NW coast of Australia; salt is also exported. Imports include general cargo and building materials.

4.30 Winds—Weather.—The Dampier Archipelago is located in

the cyclone belt, with an incidence of about three cyclones per

year in an area extending from Port Hedland to North West

Cape. The cyclone season lasts from December to April.

4.30 Prevailing winds are easterly in winter and westerly in summer, but the surrounding hills give considerable protection and

wind in excess of 20 knots are infrequent.

4.30 The port facilities are situated in sheltered waters and experience only slight seas and an occasional low northerly swell in

the summer months.

4.30 Tides—Currents.—Spring tides at Dampier rise 4.5m; neap

tides rise 3.2m.

4.30 Tidal currents are weak within the archipelago, the flood

flowing to the S, with a maximum strength of less than 1 knot

at spring tides in the berthing areas.

4.30 Depths—Limitations.—A recommended track, which is indicated on the chart, leads from Sea Lighted Buoy to the entrance of the dredged channel SSE of Courtenay Head. This

channel, which is marked by lighted beacons, is maintained to

a depth of 15.6m until it bifurcates about 1.5 miles N of the E

extremity of East Intercourse Island. The SE channel, maintained to a depth of 15.3m and marked by lighted beacons,

leads to the ore jetty at Parker Point. The SW channel, maintained to a depth of 15.5m and marked by lighted beacons,

leads to the ore jetty on East Intercourse Island.

4.30 An unmarked channel, with a maintained depth of 11m,

leads to Dampier Cargo Wharf (Woodside Materials Offloading Facilities). This channel runs in a SE direction between the

Supply Vessel and Small Craft anchorage to the N and the S1,

S2, S3, and S4 anchorage areas to the S.

4.30 Normally vessels proceeding to the loading jetties do so by

passing straight across the bay from the area close E of the N

entrance to the dredged channel. The dredged channel is used

only by outbound loaded ships.

4.30 A recommended track runs directly from the pilot boarding

station in a SSE direction into the sound, and is used by vessels

proceeding to the LNG berth near Withnell Bay.

4.30 Parker Point Ore Jetty, on the E side of the port, consists of a

tubular steel pile structure with a slewing boom shiploader. The

pier face is 269m in length; however, ships berth port side-to

against eight dolphins, which stand clear of the jetty structure

and increase the berth to about 355m. The berth has a maintained depth of 16.8m. By day, the berth will accommodate

vessels up 140,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 270m; by

night, vessel size is restricted to 115,000 dwt, with a maximum

length of 260m. The maximum departure draft from this berth

is dependent upon tidal conditions and adequate underkeel

clearance.

4.30 Parker Point Ore Jetty was under construction in 2004. The

charted depth alongside in 2005 was 19.5m along the N side

and 19.5m along the outer half of the S side.

4.30 A Service Wharf is situated about 0.5 mile E of the Parker

Point Ore Jetty. The approach to the wharf is marked by a

range and has depths of 7.0m. The wharf is 70m in length and

can accommodate vessels up to 175m in length, with drafts up

to 7.2m.

4.30 East Intercourse Island Ore Jetty is similar in design to Parker Point Ore Jetty, except vessels berth starboard side-to. The

pier face is 341m long; the berthing length is extended to 430m

by dolphins. The berth has a dredged depth of 21.5m. Vessels

of up to 250,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 314m and

beam of 47m, can berth at the jetty. The jetty is connected to

the open sea by a channel dredged to 15.3m.

4.30 Mistaken Island Salt Wharf has a T-head and is situated

about 0.75 mile WSW of East Intercourse Ore Jetty. The head,

together with the dolphins at either end, forms a berth of 358m

in length. Vessels of up to 40,000 dwt can be accommodated

alongside the berth, which has a depth of 12m at the berth and

in the approach. Due to the fixed nature of the loader, vessels

Dampier Port Authority Home Page

http://www.dpa.wa.gov.au
96 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

must be warped alongside to bring each working hatch under

the loading boom. Vessels less than 35,000 dwt must have an

underkeel clearance of 1m; vessels greater than 35,000 dwt 4.30 A channel, dredged to a depth of 5.5m, leads between East

Courtesy of Dampier Port Authority

Dampier Cargo Wharf (Woodside Materials Offloading Facilities) from NW

Courtesy of Hamersley Iron Pty Limited

Parker Point Ore Jetty

Courtesy of Dampier Port Authority

Mistaken Island Salt Wharf
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 97

Pub. 175

Intercourse Island and the spoil ground extending W from

Tidepole Island. There is a basin, dredged to a depth of 7.1m,

close NE of the causeway joining East Intercourse Island to the

mainland; the basin provides a sheltered anchorage for small

vessels.

4.30 Withnell Bay Terminal (16°35'S., 116°46'E.) lies 1 mile

WSW of the S entrance point to Withnell Bay and consists of

two jetties. The E jetty contains an LPG dolphin berth, length

350m, width 75m and depth alongside of 13.5m; and the W jetty contains an LNG dolphin berth, length 425m, width 80m

and depth alongside of 13.2m. Vessels usually berth port sideto; a turning basin marked by lighted buoys is situated about

0.4 mile N of the berth. The approach to the berths is maintained to a depth of 12.3m. 

4.30 Dampier Cargo Wharf, also known as the Woodside Materials Offloading Facilities, extends 0.1 mile NNW from the shore

about 0.5 mile NNE of Phillip Point. The berth at the head of

the jetty, which has dolphins at either end, is 274m in length,

with a dredged depth of 10m on its W side and a depth of 6.5m

on its E side.. A second berth under construction (2004) just S

of Dampier Cargo Wharf has a depth of 13m alongside. A turning basin, with a depth of 11m, extends NW between the two

berths. 

4.30 A shoal patch, with a depth of 7m and marked by a lighted

beacon, lies about 2 miles WNW of the head of Dampier Cargo

Wharf

4.30 A basin, with a charted depth of 5.5m, used by vessels which

are employed on the natural gas projects, Woodside Petroleum

Supply Base, is situated at Phillip Point in the N part of King

Bay. The approach to the basin is marked by range lights. Mermaid Supply Base is accessed through a separate marked channel, depth 6m, just S of Woodside Petroleum Supply Base. A

wharf extending SW from shore has a charted depth of 7.5m at

its head. A boat slip is situated at the end of the channel with a

charted depth of 2m.

4.30 Aspect.—The most prominent landmarks in Port Dampier

are a group of tanks and a group of chimneys standing about

0.4 mile and 0.6 mile, respectively, SW of the root of the Service Wharf. A radio mast, 0.65 mile SE of the tanks, is also

conspicuous, as are three tanks close WSW of the mast. White

Peak, 157m, high, is located 3 miles S of Parker Point and

Sharp Peak, 103m high, stands 2.5 miles W of White Peak.

There are three peaks, close together, 96m high, located between White Peak and Sharp Peak.

4.30 A light is shown from the top of the port control tower, 45m

high, on East Intercourse Island. A light is also shown from a

structure, 58m in elevation, standing about 0.2 mile ENE of the

control tower.

4.30 A conspicuous tower, marked by red lights and 240m in elevation, stands on a hilltop 1.75 miles E of the N entrance point

to Withnell Bay. A gas flare tower, 149m high, stands about

0.75 mile SSE of the S entrance point to the bay and a tower,

118m high, is situated 0.5 mile N of the gas flare.

4.30 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels entering,

leaving, and maneuvering within the port, except for those of

150 tons or less and those whose masters hold a valid pilotage

exemption. The pilot boards N of Sea Lighted Buoy, about 6.5

miles NNE of Courtenay Head Light. The pilot boat is

equipped with radiotelephone. The port frequencies are VHF

channel 11 for the port working channel, VHF channel 67 for

emergencies, and VHF channel 72 for ship to ship communications. There is a port radio station and radar surveillance facility at East Intercourse Island.

4.30 Pilots may also be embarked by helicopters.

4.30 Regulations.—Dampier is a first port of entry. All arrival

notices and other communications from arriving vessels to the

harbormaster should be directed via vessel’s local agents. The

agent, in consultation with the relevant terminal operator, will

send pilot boarding, berthing or anchoring instructions for the

vessel by facsimile, telex or VHF radio. Vessels arriving from

overseas are to provide their ETA 7 days in advance, confirming 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours before arrival. Other vessels should provide their ETA 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours

before arrival. The 7-day or 72-hour message, as appropriate,

should include the vessel’s arrival draft, fore and aft, and its

deepest departure draft.

4.30 Vessels approaching the port or at anchor must maintain a

continuous listening watch on VHF channels 11 and 16.

4.30 Vessels should contact Dampier Port Control 4 hours prior to

arrival, on VHF channel 16, for pilot boarding information and

anchoring or berthing instructions.

4.30 A restricted area, best seen on the chart, bounds Withnell

Bay.

4.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in the Western

Anchorage, located 3.8 miles N of Nelson Rocks, and the Petroleum and Explosives Anchorage, situated 2 miles NW of

Cape Legenre. Both areas have depths of 29 to 38m, with

coarse sand and shell bottoms. These areas are best viewed on

the chart. A supply vessel and small craft anchorage is situated

just W of the LNG Wharf at Woodside Petroleum and has a

depth of 8m, mud and sand. Anchoring is strictly prohibited

between these anchorages and N of the pilot boarding area due

to the presence of underwater pipelines.

4.30 Caution.—A submarine pipeline runs from a position about

0.25 mile SW of the S entrance point of Withnell Bay in a N direction to the entrance of the sound and then NW to the Rankin

Gas Field. Within the port, anchorage is prohibited for 0.5 mile

each side of the pipeline.

Copyright 2003 North West Shelf Australia LNG Pty

Withnell Bay Loading Terminal
98 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

Dampier to Cape Preston

4.31 From Dampier to Cape Preston, about 28 miles WSW,

the coast is low and swampy; the land within for some distance, except near Cape Preston, is flooded at high water.

4.31 Mount Leopold (20°59'S., 116°37'E.), 252m high, is located 25 miles ESE of Cape Preston and 12 miles inland. Mount

Wilkie, 14 miles SE of the same cape and 6.5 miles inland, is

163m high. Mount Potter, 87m high, and Mount Rough, 69m

high, are located 6 miles SSE and 5 miles S, respectively, of

Cape Preston.

4.31 Cape Preston (20°50'S., 116°13'E.) is the N extremity of a

portion of land rising to a height of 60m at Mount Preston,

which is separated from the land about 3 miles S of the cape by

a low strip, which is occasionally flooded.

4.31 The coastal waters from Port Dampier to Cape Preston are

fronted by the islands that form the W part of the Dampier Archipelago. An extensive bank, with depths of less than 10m,

extends WSW from Nelson Rocks, previously described in

paragraph 4.29, for a distance of 10 miles. Miller Rocks, which

dry 0.9m, lie 2 miles WNW of Nelson Rocks and Brigadier Islet lies 1.5 miles WSW of Miller Rocks.

4.32 Rosemary Island (20°29'S., 116°36'E.), which is

about 76m high, lies on this bank; from the NNE the island appears as three hummocks. A light is shown from a white hut,

situated on high ground, near the center of the island. The NW

side of the island is fronted by Sailfish Reef, which breaks; the

20m curve runs close along the seaward side of the reef.

4.32 Kendrew Islet, 9m high, lies on the bank about 3.5 miles W

of Rosemary Island Light. Roly Rock, 5m high, lies on SW extremity of the bank, about 2 miles SW of Kendrew Islet.

4.32 Enderby Island (20°36'S., 116°32'E.), about 7 miles in

length E-W, has a height of 90m and lies with Rocky Head, its

SW extremity, about 9.5 miles SW of Rosemary Island. Bare

Rock, 9m high, stands on an isolated reef which extends about

3 miles S, and is located about 4 miles NNW of Rocky Head.

4.32 Goodwyn Island lies 2 miles N of Enderby Island and stands

on a bank, with depths of less than 10m, extending N from a

bay on the N side of Enderby Island.

4.32 It was reported (1999) that Fisheries Western Australia has

granted permission for a pearl oyster farm to be established between the islands of Enderby and Goodwyn. A further site, E

of Eaglehawk Island, is also under consideration. Mariners

should navigate with caution when in the vicinity of these sites.

4.32 North West Reefs, which dry 4.2m, lie about 3 miles WSW

of Rocky Head and South West Reef, which dries 1.2m, lies

3.5 miles S of North West Reefs.

4.32 Eaglehawk Island, 36m high, is located 3 miles SSW of

Rocky Head and is fringed by a drying reef which extends up

to 0.5 mile in places. Egret Islet lies close off the W extremity

of Eaglehawk Island.

4.33 Enderby Reef (20°36'S., 116°32'E.), with depths of

2.8 to 4.2m, extends about 2 miles ESE from close S of Rocky

Head. Dockrell Reef, with a least depth of 0.7m, lies about 1.5

miles SSE of the SE extremity of Enderby Reef. South East

Reef, with a depth of 3.7m, lies 3 miles WSW of Dockrell

Reef.

4.33 Mermaid Strait (20°39'S., 116°32'E.) is entered between

Rocky Head and North West Reefs; the strait leads to the Port

of Dampier. A recommended track is indicated on the chart.

The strait should only be used in daylight by vessels with local

knowledge; the least depth along the track was reported to be

6.4m.

4.33 Cod Bank, an isolated bank with a least depth of 8.2m, lies

about 9 miles W of South West Reef; another shoal spot, with a

depth of 10m, is located about 4.5 miles WSW of Cod Bank.

4.33 Regnard Bay, an extensive shoal bay, extends along the coast

for a distance of about 22 miles in an ENE direction from Cape

Preston. The 5m curve lies about 5 miles offshore of this bay.

Several rivers and creeks flow into the bay, the principal one

being the Maitland River, which flows into the E part.

4.33 Northeast Regnard Islet, a small sandy islet 13.1m high, lies

6.5 miles ENE of Cape Preston. Southwest Regnard Islet,

17.3m high, lies 2.5 miles ENE of the cape. A 1.8m patch lies

1.75 miles N of Northeast Regnard Islet.

Cape Preston to North West Cape

4.34 The coast between Cape Preston and James Point, 8.5

miles SSW, is backed by a rocky range of hills; Mount Rough

and Mount Potter are located in these hills. Delaney Hill, 9m

high, stands 6 miles SW of James Point and is prominent.

Mount Nicholson, 154m high, is a conspicuous point located

inland about 16 miles S of Delaney Hill.

4.34 From Delaney Hill to an unnamed point 10 miles SW, the

coast is backed by sandhills. Mount Salt, a hillock 21m high,

stands 1.5 miles inland from the coast, 6.5 miles SW of

Delaney Hill. Between this unnamed point and Robe Point

(21°20'S., 115°38'E.), 10m high, about 15 miles SW, there is a

shoal bay; the shore of the bay is a mangrove swamp, flooded

at high water and backed by low sandhills at its head.

4.34 Fortescue Road (20°53'S., 116°07'E.) is bordered on the S

and E by the coastline between Cape Preston and the entrance

to the Fortescue River, 12 miles SSW; on the W it is bordered

by a chain of islets, shoals, and reefs which lie from 5 to 9

miles offshore and extend 15 miles SSW from McLennan

Bank, 8 miles NW of Cape Preston.

4.34 McLennan Bank (20°46'S., 116°05'E.), the N danger in the

approach to Fortescue Road, has a least depth of 1.2m.

4.35 Steamboat Island (20°49'S., 116°04'E.), 12m high,

lies 8 miles W of Cape Preston; this island stands on an extensive shoal with a least depth of 0.6m, which extends 2.5 miles

NE and 3 miles SSE from the island. The Man in the Boat

Rock, which dries 3.6m, and Petersen Rock, with a depth of

1.5m, lie 1 and 2 miles NE, respectively, of Steamboat Island.

4.35 Fortescue Island (20°55'S., 116°02'E.), 12m high, lies 5.5

miles SSW of Steamboat Island and on the N part of the coastal

bank with depths of less than 5m over it, which extends up to 7

miles offshore at this point. North Fortescue Reef and South

Fortescue Rock, with depths of 2m or less over them, lie 1 and

1.75 miles SSW, respectively, of Fortescue Island.

4.35 Stewart Islet, 12.2m high, lies 11 miles SW of McLennan

Bank and 10 miles offshore. Stewart Rocks, with a depth of

0.6m, lie on the NW extremity of a rocky ledge that extends 1.5

miles N of Stewart Islet.

4.35 The Fortescue River, entered about 4 miles WSW of James

Point, is navigable by vessels of light draft for about 1 mile; a
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 99

Pub. 175

landing place is located on the W bank about 0.5 mile within

the entrance.

4.35 The channel between Steamboat Island and Fortescue Island,

although used by coastal craft, is not recommended.

4.35 Anchorage may be taken, in a depth of 6m, mud, about 4.5

miles ESE of Fortescue Island; considerable swell is experienced at this anchorage during strong winds.

4.35 Tidal currents in the anchorage set SW on the rising tide and

NE during the falling tide, the rate being from 1 to 1.5 knots.

4.35 Vessels approaching Fortescue Road should keep Cape Preston bearing more than 135° until Steamboat Island bears 248°;

then a SW course may be steered for the anchorage.

4.36 The Passage Islands (21°03'S., 115°48'E.) are a chain

of seven islands that front the shore between Sholl Island and

South Passage Islet, about 16 miles SSW. Sholl Island, 15m

high, is sandy, with small bushes on it. The island lies 4.5 miles

SSW of Stewart Islet and about 8 miles offshore. Sholl Island

is located on a reef, which dries in part, and is fairly steep-to on

the NW; the reef extends 6 miles SSW. Round Islet, 9m high,

and Long Islet, 13m high, lie on the reef 2.5 and 5 miles SSW,

respectively, of Sholl Island.

4.36 Pearl culture areas are situated in the vicinity of Sholl Island.

The farms, which may be floating or fixed structures, and their

associated moorings should be avoided. The farms are generally marked by buoys and beacons, which may be lit.

4.36 The remaining islets of the Passage Islands lie on the coastal

bank and from 4 to 7 miles offshore; in order from N to S, they

are Middle Islet, Angle Islet, Passage Islet, and South Passage

Islet. A reef, which dries 1.2m, lies between the two last-mentioned islets. All the islets in the group are of sandy formation

and sparsely vegetated, with flat summits.

4.36 Meda Reef (21°03'S., 115°46'E.), composed of coral and

with a least depth of 0.9m, is about 1 mile in extent and lies

about 8 miles offshore.

4.36 North Sandy Islet (21°06'S., 115°39'E.), 11m high and located near the center of a reef, is partly dry at low water; a light

is shown from a metal framework tower in the center of the islet.

4.36 Pup Islet, a rock 8m high, lies 3.5 miles S of North Sandy Islet and is surrounded by a reef.

4.36 Great Sandy Islet (Beagle Islet) (21°12'S., 115°38'E.), 11m

high, lies on a drying reef about 6.5 miles offshore. The summit of the island near its SW end is covered with stunted bushes. Great Sandy Islet Light is shown from a white metal building near the SW extremity of the island; two conspicuous white

masts stand near the NE end of the islet. 

4.36 Anchorage can be taken, in 7.3m, sand and mud, about 0.5

mile SE of the summit of Great Sandy Islet, or, in 8m, about 1

mile E.

4.37 The Monte Bello Islands (20°27'S., 115°33'E.),

about 45 miles NW of Cape Preston, are a group of islands, islets, and rocks extending about 10 miles N-S and 6 miles E-W.

They are surrounded by an extensive coral reef, which is awash

in places on its W side. The islands have been reported to give

good radar returns up to 17 miles

Caution.—Pearl farms are prevalent around the Monte Bello

Islands. These farms, which may be floating or fixed structures, and their associated moorings should be avoided. The

farms are generally marked by buoys and beacons, which may

be lit.

Extensive oil and gas operations are conducted in the vicinity of the Monte Bello Islands and Barrow Island. Dangers are

best seen on the chart.

4.38 North West Island (20°22'S., 115°31'E.), 20m high,

is surrounded by a reef which extends 1.5 miles N and NW

from it. North West Island Light is shown from a white hut on

the N side of the island.

4.38 Trimouille Island, 37m high, is located 0.75 mile SE of

North West Island. The island has a partially drying reef which

extends up to 1 mile off its NE side. A light is shown from a

white hut on the S summit of the island.

4.38 Caution.—Unexploded ordnance lies in an area, with a radius of 0.5 mile, centered about 5 miles ENE of the light on Trimouille Island, in a depth of about 45m.

4.39 South East Islet, 21m high, is close off the SE extremity of Trimouille Island; it is grassy and has a well-defined

summit on its NW end. Foul ground and depths of less than

10m extend 4.5 miles SSE from South East Islet and on it are a

number of islets, rocks, and reefs.

4.39 Flag Islet, which is 10m high and covered with grass, lies 2

miles SSW of South East Islet, on the above-described foul

ground.

4.39 Hermite Island lies 3 miles S of North West Island; between

these islands there is a chain of islet and rocks. Hermite Island

is covered with grass and has a height of 29m at the S end. The

fringing reef, which has drying patches, extends up to 4 miles

W of the island. A conspicuous shed stands near the SE extremity of Hermite Island, 0.5 mile SE of the 29m hillock.

4.39 Rocks, awash at high water, lie within 1 mile of the outer

edge of the SW part of the Monte Bello Islands reef and 5

miles N of the N extremity of Barrow Island; they are difficult

to see in the heavy breakers in the vicinity.

4.39 Anchorage.—During W winds, anchorage can be taken

about 0.6 mile SE of Flag Islet, in depths of 6 to 9m. Anchorage can also be taken in Parting Pool, 1.5 miles S of South East

Islet, in a depth of 16m, sand and shell.

4.39 There is anchorage, in a depth of 29m, in a position 1.25

miles NE from the SE extremity of North West Island, but

there is a fairly heavy swell here and it is close to the shoal extending from Trimouille Island.

4.39 These anchorages should only be approached by vessels with

local knowledge.

4.40 Tryal Rocks (20°17'S., 115°22'E.) consist of two coral reefs, close together, about 1.25 miles in length NE-SW; the

S reef dries 2.7m. The rocks are located about 9 miles NW of

the Monte Bello Islands.

4.40 Depths of less than 20m lie within 6 miles SW and 4 miles

NW of Tryal Rocks; the sea breaks on these shallower depths

in bad weather.

4.40 A 5.5m patch lies 3 miles W of North West Island Light.

4.40 The channel between Tryal Rocks and the Monte Bello Islands is 7 miles wide, with depths of 31 to 40m, and may be

used by vessels proceeding to the E side of Barrow Island.

4.40 The Lowendal Islets (20°29'S., 115°35'E.), located about 8

miles E of Cape Dupuy, the N end of Barrow Island, extend for
100 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

about 11.5 miles S from the SE extremity of Hermite Island

and are of sandy formation in part and covered with grass.

Shoal water lies between these islets and Barrow Island. 

4.41 Varanus Island Terminal (20°37'S., 115°35'E.)

serves Harriet Oil Field, which includes Harriet A, Harriet B,

and Harriet C Production Platforms, situated 3.25, 4.25, and

5.25 miles NE, respectively, of the NE extremity of the islet.

Varanus Island (20°39'S., 115°34'E.) is the largest islet of the

group, being 20m high. Lighted Platform Linda, Lighted Platform Sinbad, and Lighted Platform Campbell lie 3, 7, and 12

miles NE, respectively, of the Harriet Production Platforms. A

Cautionary Area surrounds these lighted platforms and is best

seen on the chart. Entry is restricted. Submarine oil/gas pipelines are laid to Harriet A Platform from the other five wells

and between Harriet A Platform and Varanus Island. The Gypsy Production Well lies approximately 6 miles ESE of Harriet

A Platform and has its own associated undersea pipeline. 

4.41 The offshore terminal, consisting of mooring buoys, is situated about 2 miles ENE of the NE extremity of the islet; a submarine pipeline extends SW from the terminal to the shore. A

group of tanks and a radio mast were reported to be situated on

the SE portion of the islet. 

4.41 The waters N and S of the terminal are incompletely surveyed and vessels should approach the terminal from the E,

with the terminal bearing between 240° and 300°. The port

limits are those waters within a circle, with a radius of 3.25

miles, centered on the terminal. 

4.41 A pilot will board in a position about 5 miles E of the mooring buoys. The terminal is equipped with VHF. Vessels up to

140,000 dwt, with lengths up to 300m, beam up to 46m, and

drafts up to 17m, can be accommodated. the vessel’s ETA

should be sent 96 hours in advance and confirmed or amended

48 hours and 24 hours prior to arrival. The ETA should be confirmed by VHF with the terminal within 100 miles of the Lowendal Islands or as soon as practicable thereafter.

4.41 The recommended anchorage is 3 miles E of the terminal, in

a charted depth of about 25m, variable holding ground.

4.41 Caution.—In the approach, there is a least depth of 20m,

about 4.5 miles ENE of the terminal. A shoal with a least depth

of 6m over it has been reported (2002) about 1.5 miles SE of

the terminal and close to the S boundary of the terminal. Within 0.5 mile of the terminal, the least depth is 20.4m.

4.42 Barrow Island (20°47'S., 115°24'E.) is formed by irregular and steep sand hills, extending N and S, which are

thickly covered with grass and small bushes.

4.42 The summit, 76m high, lies 9.5 miles S from Cape Dupuy,

its N extremity, in about the middle of the island. An ill-defined hill, 67m high, stands 4 miles SSW of Cape Dupuy; from

this hill, the land slopes down to some rounded hills at the

cape.

4.42 A communication mast is situated 3 miles NW of Shark

Point, the top of which stands 176m and is visible from sea. A

high intensity flashing white strobe light is shown by day and

three red lights vertically at night. 

4.42 Double Islet (20°44'S., 115°30'E.), with several small islets

within 1 mile NW, lies 4 miles SSE of Surf Point, the NE extremity of Barrow Island, and 1 mile offshore. Double Islet

Light is shown from a metal pipe.

4.42 Channel Rock is an isolated rock located about 0.5 mile SE

of the southernmost Double Islet.

4.42 Latitude Point (20°47'S., 115°28'E.) is located 7 miles SSE

of Cape Dupuy. The S extremity of the foul ground extending

SSW from the Lowendal Islets lies 2 miles ESE of Latitude

Point.

4.42 Boodie Island, 27m high, lies 4 miles S of the SW extremity

of Barrow Island. Pasco Islet, 29m high, lies 0.5 mile E of the

island described above; Poivre Reef, which dries, lies 3 miles

SW of the same island. There are depths of 7.6 to 11m about

1.75 miles W, and a 13.5m patch 7.25 miles WSW, of Poivre

Reef.

4.43 Barrow Island Shoals (21°05'S., 115°24'E.), with

depths of less than 5m, extend nearly 17 miles S from the S extremity of Barrow Island, but only the S part of these shoals,

which borders the N side of Mary Anne Passage have been surveyed. A sandy cay on the shoals, 12.5 miles SE of Pasco Islet,

dries 1.5m. The sea seldom breaks on these shoals, but they can

generally be discerned by an area of smooth water over them,

or a tide rip near their edges.

4.43 Cape Poivre (20°49'S., 115°19'E.) is a sharp, craggy point

on the SW side of Barrow Island; Cape Malouet is located

about 7 miles farther NE, about 4 miles SW of Cape Dupuy. A

shoal area located about midway between Cape Poivre and

Cape Malouet extends about 1 mile to seaward.

4.43 Barrow Island Light, situated in the NE part of the island, is

shown from a metal post on a concrete base.

4.43 Caution.—A number of well heads, best seen on chart, are

situated 25 miles WSW of Cape Poivre along the 100m curve.

4.43 Woollybutt (20°52'S., 114°55'E.), a series of production

wells and their associated pipelines and restricted areas, lie 25

miles WSW of Barrow Island. 

4.44 Barrow Island Offshore Terminal (20°48'S.,

115°33'E.) is situated 6 miles ESE of Latitude Point and is connected to the shore by a submarine pipeline. The port limit is

an arc of a circle, with a radius of 7 miles, centered on Latitude

Point. 

4.44 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds are from the SW

in the summer and the E in the winter.

4.44 Tides.—Currents.—The tidal currents in the vicinity of the

Barrow Island from NNE
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 101

Pub. 175

terminal attain a rate of about 1 knot at springs, with the flood

flowing WSW and the ebb flowing ENE.

4.44 Depths—Limitations.—The terminal consists of a group of

mooring buoys, which provide a berth for vessels up to

105,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 250m; the minimum

depth in the vicinity of the berth is 13.2m. An underkeel clearance of 1.6m must be maintained. 

4.44 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. A berthing master boards

2 miles E of the oil loading mooring buoys and remains on

board throughout the stay. Pratique must be obtained before arrival at Barrow Island. Port Hedland is the nearest port where

this can be obtained. 

4.44 Regulations.—Vessels proceeding to the terminal should

send their ETA 96 hours, 48 hours, 24 hours, and 12 hours in

advance to WAPET, Perth. The 96-hour message should contain the following information:

1. Quantity of ballast water carried.

2. Quality of ballast water carried.

3. Arrival draft.

4.44 Berthing is only done on the ebb tide in calm conditions during daylight hours. Tankers with local knowledge may be allowed to berth at night if they carry adequate searchlights. A

continuous listening watch on VHF channels 14 and 16 is to be

maintained by tankers when within 100 miles of the terminal.

4.44 The FPSO Four Vanguard, moored 30 miles WSW of Barrow Island, is enclosed within a cautionary zone 2.5 miles in

radius.

4.44 Directions.—The terminal should be approached by passing

the Monte Bello Islands to the N and E, then proceeding to the

berth on the due W recommended track, indicated on the chart.

The waters to the S of this route have been incompletely surveyed.

4.44 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained 2 miles E of the

terminal, with good holding ground reported. Anchorage is

prohibited in the vicinity of the pipeline, which is marked at

the seaward end by a lighted buoy.

4.44 Caution.—Shoal depths of 10.3m and 10m lie 2.75 miles

and 4.75 miles ESE of the terminal.

4.45 Rankin Bank (19°44'S., 115°35'E.), with a least

charted depth of 11m reported in 1979, lies about 35 miles N of

the Monte Bello Islands and is the outermost danger off the

group. Several well heads are situated to the E and S of Rankin

Bank.

4.45 North Rankin Gas Field is under development in the vicinity

of Rankin Bank. A production platform is situated about 30

miles ENE of the bank; a restricted area, with a radius of 5

miles, is centered on the platform. A submarine pipeline runs

SE from the platform to Withnell Bay within Dampier.

4.45 Caution.—Mariners are cautioned to exercise special care

when navigating these waters due to production wells and gas

pipelines.

Robe Point to North West Cape

4.46 Beadon Point (21°38'S., 115°06'E.) is located about

40 miles SW of Robe Point. The coast between is low and

sandy, with an extensive coastal marsh which floods at high

water for the first 24 miles; from this distance to Coolgra Point,

another 8 miles, there is a ridge of sandhills to 12m high, partially covered with vegetation. The coast between Coolgra

Point and Beadon Point, 8 miles WSW, is backed by sandhills

up to 15m high, slightly covered with vegetation and broken

occasionally by shoal mangrove creeks. Beadon Point, the W

entrance point of Beadon Bay, has a conspicuous bare sandhill,

21m high.

4.46 The coastal waters from Robe Point to Beadon Point are

shoal, and much encumbered with islets and drying shoals, the

10m curve lies up to 100.5 miles off the mainland in this area.

4.46 Mary Anne Reef (21°16'S., 115°28'E.) lies on the NW side

of the Mary Anne Islets, about 14 miles W of Robe Point.

Mary Anne Reef Light is shown from a white hut on a concrete

base. Flinders Shoal, with a least depth of 1.8m, lies 1.5 miles

NNE of Mary Anne Reef Light; overfalls and tide rips are seen

on this shoal on the ebb current.

4.46 Nares Rock (21°26'S., 115°18'E.) lies on a shoal patch, with

a depth of less than 1.8m, close within the 10m curve, about 14

miles SSW of Mary Anne Reef. 

4.46 The Mangrove Islands lie SE of Nares Rock; an unexamined

patch, with a depth of 5.2m, lies 5 miles NW of the same rock.

4.47 Direction Island (21°32'S., 115°08'E.) lies 6 miles

NNE of Beadon Point; shoal water extends from Direction Island ENE to Nares Rock. The island is 12m high and covered

with bushes. A conspicuous white building with black stripes,

which is not visible from N, stands on the islet.

4.47 The dangers N of Mary Anne Passage along this section lie

W and WSW of the S part of Barrow Island Shoals.

4.47 Ripple Shoals (21°11'S., 115°20'E.), with a least depth

3.3m, lie about 9 miles NW of Mary Anne Reef Light.

4.47 Taunton Reef, about 1 mile in diameter and on which the sea

breaks, lies about 14 miles WSW of Mary Anne Reef; a submerged well head, marked close E by a buoy, lies close ESE of

Taunton Reef.

4.47 Airlie Island (21°19'S., 115°10'E.) is small and sparsley

vegetated with a flat summit 9m high. A sunken reef, which extends 2.5 miles W from the islet, seldom breaks, except with a

heavy swell. Airlie Island Light is shown from a stainless steel

framework tower, 21m high, near the center of the island; two

conspicuous tanks lie close NE of the light. A shoal depth of

9.6m lies 6.5 miles W of Airlie Island Light.

4.47 Caution.—An underwater oil pipeline extends W from

Taunton Reef to Airlie Island. Two oil production platforms,

exhibiting lights and surrounded by a restricted zone, are situated 13 miles and 10.5 miles NNE of Airlie Island. A pipeline

is laid between each platform and from the N platform SSW to

Airlie Island. Moorings are situated 1 mile N of Airlie Islet at

the S end of the pipeline. A well head, exhibiting a light and

surrounded by a restricted zone, lies 1 mile E of the N platform; a pipeline is laid between platform and well head.

4.48 Airlie Island Terminal (21°18'S., 115°10'E.) is situated 1 mile NNE of Airlie Island and services Chervil Oil

Field. The terminal consists of six buoys and two swamped

moorings. The berth is exposed from W and N and is about

0.75 mile from reefs to the S. A safety zone surrounds the terminal.

4.48 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents may attain a rate of 4

knots at springs.

4.48 Depths—Limitations.—The depth at the terminal is 15.4m.
102 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

The terminal is designed to accept vessels up to 120,000 dwt

having a length of 300m, a beam of 50m, and a deep draft of

13.8m.

4.48 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Tugs are not available.

Berthing by night is preferred due to reduced wind and less

heat. The pilot boards in position 21°10'S, 115°06'E.

4.48 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA to Western

Mining Company 96 hours in advance, amending or confirming the ETA 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance. The

pilot boards in position 21°10'S., 115°06'E

4.48 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken about 10 miles

NNW of Airlie Island.

4.49 The Rosily Islets (21°16'S., 115°01'E.), 9 miles

WNW of Airlie Island, consist of a rocky islet 1m high, with a

sand cay 0.8m high close E. The islets are located on a sunken

coral reef which extends 0.75 mile N and W. A bank, with a

least depth of 5.3m, extends 3 miles SE.

4.49 Penguin Bank (21°12'S., 115°04'E.), of coral, with a least

depth of 4.6m, lies 4.25 miles NNE of th Rosily Islets and seldom breaks, except with a heavy swell. There is an 11.3m

patch 4.5 miles ENE of Penguin Bank.

4.49 Sultan Reef (21°25'S., 115°06'E.), a coral patch, lies 6.75

miles SW of Airlie Island. The sea only breaks on this reef

when there is a swell.

Thevenard Island (21°28'S., 115°00'E.), 12m high on its W

end, lies 12 miles NNW of Beadon Point. Three conspicuous

oil tanks stand near the E end of the island. The island is surrounded by a drying reef, which extends 2.75 miles N and NW.

A patch, which dries 1.2m, lies close within the edge of the

reef, 1.75 miles S from the E end of the island. Leading lights

mark the approaches to Thevenard Wharf.

4.50 Saladin Marine Terminal (21°27'S., 115°03'E.) is

situated on the E side of Thevenard Island. Saladin A and Saladin B, which are oil production platforms, are situated 2 miles

and 1.25 miles ENE, respectively, of the E extremity of the island. Saladin C, an oil production platform, lies 2 miles SW of

the E extremity of the island. Yammaderry, another oil production platform, lies about 1 mile SW of Saladin C. All the production platforms are surrounded by safety zones.

4.50 A lighted buoy marks the E side of a well head situated 0.75

mile S of the E end of the island; a lighted buoy also marks the

W side of a well head situated 3 miles SW of the E extremity of

the island.

4.50 A tanker mooring buoy is situated about 3.5 miles NE of the

E end of the island. A restricted area, with a radius of 1 mile,

surrounds the mooring buoy; vessels may enter this area only

with permission.

4.50 Pilotage is compulsory. Vessels should contact the terminal

and maintain a listening watch on VHF channel 14 when within 100 miles of the pilot boarding position. Vessels should send

their ETA 96 hours, 48 hours, 24 hours, and 12 hours in advance. The Mooring Master boards about 2 miles W of Saladin

Lighed Buoy.

4.50 Caution.—Oil pipelines connect Saladin A and Saladin B;

pipelines also connect the E end of the island to Saladin A and

Saladin B. A pipeline also connects the tanker mooring buoy to

the E end of the island.

4.50 Pipelines also connect Yammaderry with Saladin C and Saladin C with the E end of the island.

4.50 Brewis Reef (21°30'S., 114°55'E.), 3.5 miles SW of Thevenard Island, is nearly awash at its W end; vessels in transit

through the Inner Route pass S of this route.

4.50 Caution.—Cowle, a lighted production platform, which is

surrounded by a safety zone and connected to the E end of

Thevenard Island by a submerged pipeline, stands about 2.5

miles ESE of the E end of Brewis Reef. The platform lies close

N of the charted preferred route to the port of Onslow.

4.51 Griffin Marine Terminal (21°13'S., 114°39'E.) is a

Floating Platform and Storage Unit (FPSO). It is situated 23.5

miles NE of Thevenard Island and is the outlet for Griffin Oil

Field. A safety zone surrounds the facility.

4.51 Winds—Weather.—As the terminal is an open and unsheltered mooring, there may be times when mooring operations

may be difficult or inadvisable. Under these circumstances, the

terminal will be closed until conditions improve. During the

summer months, from October to March, the prevailing winds

will be from the S and SW quadrant; in the winter months,

June to August, the prevailing winds will be from the S and SE

quadrant.

4.51 During the summer months, the area is subject to occasional

cyclones; December through April is the most active period. In

January and February in particular, weather and sea state conditions may prevent mooring and unloading for periods of up

to a few days. Weather conditions and forecasts are closely

monitored before the arrival of a vessel and during loading. In

the event of deteriorating conditions or the approach of a cyclone, the facility will be closed down and the vessel released.

4.51 Except during the cyclone period, or during other isolated

severe storms, seas are generally slight. Seas of 2m and less

can be expected 95 per cent of the time. Larger seas are more

prevalent during the winter, when swells as high as 4m can be

generated during E gales.

4.51 Depths—Limitations.—The terminal stands in 130m of

water. Vessels up to 150,000 dwt can be accommodated. Berthing is done during daylight hours only; unberthing can be

done at any time.

4.51 Vessels are moored bow to the stern of the FPSU facility.

The FPSU with attached tanker can rotate a full 360° in response to current, wind, and wave conditions.

Thevenard Island from NNE
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 103

Pub. 175

4.51 Pilotage.—Pilotage by the Facility Master is compulsory;

the Facility Master board 3 miles from the FPSU. The pilot,

berthing superintendents, and equipment will be transferred to

the vessel by the facility workboat, weather permitting, or by

helicopter.

4.51 Regulations.—Vessels should advise ETA to the agent and

the terminal’s marine supervisor 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24

hours before arrival. Vessels should contact the terminal on

VHF channel 72 when 3 to 4 hours away from the terminal. Final berthing instructions will be advised by VHF. Vessels

should remain at least 5 miles off the terminal until instructions

to proceed are received.

4.51 The terminal’s marine supervisor can be contacted by e-mail,

as follows: 

4.51 Anchorage.—The Facility Master will advise the vessel

about anchoring. When passing SSE of Griffin Oil Field, anchoring should not be attempted due to pipelines extending

SSE from the oil field to the shore.

4.52 Mary Anne Passage (21°12'N., 115°30'W.), at the

NE end of the Inner Route, leads between Barrow Island

Shoals and Ripple Shoals, on the NW, and the islets and dangers fronting the mainland from Fortescue Road and Coolgra

Point, on the SE. Its narrowest part is 2.5 miles wide between

Barrow Island Shoals and Flinders Shoal. The least depths on

the track, as indicated on the chart, are to be found on Fairway

Shoals, which has general depths of 5 to 10m. It is a convenient

passage for vessels proceeding from E to Ashburton Road, for

vessels with local knowledge, using care to avoid the previously-described dangers.

4.53 Onslow (21°38'S., 115°06'E.) (World Port Index No.

54580) is a lighterage port, the limits of which are described as

the coast between Coolgra Point and Entrance Point, 17 miles

WSW; then N to Ashburton Islet; then E to Direction Islet; then

SE to Coolgra Point. In 1990, the port of Onslow was extended

to include the oil terminals of Saladin and Thevenard Island.

4.53 The town of Onslow is situated on Beadon Point.

4.53 It has been reported (2001) that a salt-exporting terminal has

been constructed in Onslow. The pilot for the terminal boards

about 3.2 miles ESE of the E extremity of Thevenard Island.

4.53 Vessels bound for Onslow approach on the charted recommended track, passing S or SE of Thevenard Island, to a position 5 miles W of Direction Island, then alter course to bring

Onslow Range Lights into line. This course leads W of Gorgon

Patch, with a depth of 2.2m, and Koolinda Patch, with a depth

of 2.5m, and E of Hastings Shoal, with a depth of less than 2m,

and Ward Reef, which dries 0.9m. Weeks Shoal, with a depth

of 1.9m, lies outside the 10m curve, 2.25 miles WNW of Direction Island.

4.53 Vessels departing the Port of Onslow may, when about 5

miles W of Direction Islet, steer W with Bessieres Island Light

ahead and Direction Islet astern; then with Bessieres Island

ahead about 3.25 miles, steer course 310°; then with Bessieres

Island Light S, 2.5 miles distant, steer course as desired, clear

of dangers, for their destination.

4.53 Vessels in transit of the described route should have local

knowledge. Dangers other than those described above may be

seen on the charts.

4.53 Anchorage.—Anchorage for vessels working cargo can be

taken about 0.5 mile N of the ruined jetty off Beadon Point, in

a depth of 7m, gravel and mud.

4.54 The coast from Beadon Point to Tubridgi Point, 29

miles WSW, is low and generally backed by low sand hills,

some of which are sparsely covered with vegetation; inland the

country is low and flat, covered with grass and a few bushes,

and is swampy in parts during the rainy season.

4.54 On this coast there are two conspicuous hills, one is 18m

high, located on the SW extremity of a sand ridge, 3 miles

SSW of Beadon Point. The other is Saddle Hill, 17m high and

dark in color, which lies 8 miles SW of Beadon Point.

4.54 The coastal waters are encumbered by islands and reefs.

There is a track through these waters for moderate draft vessels, but local knowledge is essential for safe passage.

4.54 Ashburton Road (21°39'S., 115°02'E.) is an open roadstead

about 6 miles W of Beadon Point; it provides anchorage, in

depths of 7 to 9m, sand and coral, but this anchorage is not recommended during the cyclone season, from December to

April.

4.54 Caution.—Four lighted production platforms stand from

about 2 miles E to 3 miles SW of Ashburton Island. Submerged

oil and gas pipelines also lie in the road.

4.55 Roller Shoal (21°39'S., 114°56'E.), with a least depth

of 1.5m, lies about 2.5 miles WNW of Entrance Point. This is

the least depth in Ashburton Road.

4.55 The 10m curve lies about 6 miles offshore to a position N of

Tortoise Islet; then the 10m curve lies up to 15 miles offshore

to the mouth of Exmouth Gulf.

4.55 The islets and dangers along the Inner Route W of Onslow

are described below.

4.55 Paroo Shoal (21°34'S., 115°00'E.), with a depth of 3.6m, is

located on the S side of the Inner Route, about 7 miles NW of

Beadon Point. Miles Shoal, with a depth of 3.3m, and Australind Shoal, with a depth of 3.4m, lie 2.3 and 4.5 miles W, respectively, of Paroo Shoal.

4.55 Tortoise Islet (21°35'S., 114°52'E.) is 10m high, sandy, and

covered with bushes. Bowers Ledge, which dries 1.8m, lies

close within the 10m curve, about 5 miles WNW of Tortoise Islet.

4.56 Bessieres Island (Anchor Islet) (21°31'S., 114°46'E.),

6 miles NW of Tortoise Islet, is 12m high, sandy, and covered

with grass and a few bushes; it is surrounded by a reef which

extends nearly 1 mile N and W from it. Bessieres Island Light

is shown from a tower situated in the center of the islet.

4.56 Caution.—Unexploded ordnance lies in an area, with a radius of 0.5 mile, centered about 5 miles WNW of Bessieres Island, in a depth of about 60m.

4.56 A lighted Single Buoy Mooring (SBM), surrounded by a

Cautionary Area with a radius of 5 miles, lies in position

21°13.4'S, 114°38.7'E, about 20 miles NNW of Bessieres Island. A gas pipeline extends SSE from the SBM to close E of

Bessieres Island, and then continues almost due S to a point on

the shore about 1 mile SW of Rocky Point (21°44'S.,

114°51'E.).

4.57 Black Ledge (21°34'S., 114°42'E.) is awash at high

petgrv.marinesuper@bhpbilliton.com
104 Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 

Pub. 175

water; it lies about 4 miles SW of Bessieres Island. Long Island, 12m high, formed by sandhills partly covered with vegetation, lies 6.5 miles SW of Bessieres Island; a submerged reef

extends 1.25 miles N of the island.

4.57 Serrurier Island (Long Island) (21°37'S., 114°40'E.), 6.5

miles SW of Bessieres Island, is formed by sandhills partly

covered with vegetation; its summit, 12m high, is located at its

NW extremity. The greater part of the island is fringed by a

submerged reef. Flat Islet, 8.5m high, lies 2.5 miles WSW of

the N end of Serrurier Island. Peak Island, 10m high, lies 6.5

miles W of Flat Islet, and is surrounded by a coral reef.

4.57 The Muiron Islands (21°40'S., 114°20'E.), two in number,

lie in a NE-SW direction, with the S extremity of the S island

about 9 miles NW of North West Cape. The islands are encompassed by coral reefs; however, they are separated by a channel

about 0.25 mile in width with depths of more than 7.3m. North

Muiron Island, 19m high, is formed by irregular, sparsely vegetated, sandy ridges. There are some conspicuous reddish-colored limestone cliffs on the NW side. South Muiron Island,

18m high near the center, is formed by irregular sandy ridges,

covered with coarse grass and small bushes.

4.57 Outtrim Patches, with depths of 6.4 and 8.7m, lie 2 miles E

and ENE, respectively, of the N extremity of North Muiron Island.

4.57 There is an 8.2m patch 1.75 miles SE of the S extremity of

South Muiron Island. A depth of 6.4m and a 10.1m shoal lie

1.25 and 3.75 miles E, respectively, of the S end of South Murion Island.

4.58 Exmouth Gulf (22°10'S., 114°19'E.) is entered between Tubridgi Point and North West Cape, 27 miles W; it is

bordered on the E and S by the mainland and on the W side by

the North West Cape Peninsula.

4.58 The gulf has an average width of 23 miles and recedes about

40 miles S. From a depth of 22m at its mouth, the gulf gradually shoals to mud flats at its head.

4.58 The E coast of Exmouth Gulf and off-lying waters for about

11 miles S of Tubridgi Point have not been surveyed, but the

coast was seen to be low-lying and mangrove fringed. From

this point to Giralia Bay, at the head of the bay, the coast is islands, sandbanks, and swamps, with the mainland 6 to 7 miles

E. The charted shore is fronted with numerous shoals, islets,

and reefs from the S extremity of South Muiron Island SSE for

15 miles to Y Islet, then SSW for 30 miles to the Sandalwood

Peninsula at the head of Exmouth Gulf. A light is shown from

the N shore of Y Islet.

4.58 The E side of the peninsula forming the W coast of Exmouth

Gulf is formed of a ridge of sand hills, from 12 to 18m high,

which extend along the coast SE from North West Cape to

Point Murat. 

4.58 Camp Hill (21°48'S., 114°10'E.), 19m high, is a sand hill

0.75 mile SSE of North West Cape. The coast from Point Murat to Heron Point, 27 miles S, is clear of mangroves and generally steeper than the rest of Exmouth Gulf.

4.58 From Heron Point (22°16'S., 114°08'E.) S to the head of

Gales Bay, about 16 miles, the coast is low and backed by red

sandhills.

4.58 Gales Bay (22°25'S., 114°11'E.) lies at the head of the gulf,

on the W side of the Sandalwood Peninsula; Giralia Bay lies on

the E side of the peninsula. The Centipede Mountains, 8 miles

S of the N end of the Sandalwood Peninsula, are a small rocky

conspicuous range of hills which rises to a height of about

107m.

4.58 The coastal waters on the W coast of Exmouth Gulf are

fronted by coral reefs up to 0.5 mile offshore, from North West

Cape S to Point Lefroy (22°18'S., 114°11'E.), about 3.5 miles

SE of Heron Point. The 11m curve lies about 1 to 1.5 miles offshore, with the exception of the S part, where the line lies up to

6 miles N of Point Lefroy.

4.58 Bay of Rest (22°17'S., 114°08'E.) is entered between Point

Lefroy and Heron Point; there are depths of 5.5 to 7.3m in the

entrance, but the bay is shallow and consists for the most part

of drying sands.

4.59 Point Murat (Port Exmouth) (21°49'S., 114°11'E.)

(World Port Index No. 54575) lies on the W side of Exmouth

Gulf; the port limits are defined by a line extending from the N

extremity of North West Cape, E for 4.8 miles, then S for 27.8

miles and then 231° to Point Lefroy. Within the port limits,

Point Murat is located about 2.25 miles SE of North West

Cape. The small town of Exmouth is situated 1 mile inland,

about 8 miles SSW of Point Murat, but is not clearly visible

from seaward.

4.59 A T-head jetty extends about 0.15 mile ESE from the coast

close SW of Point Murat; the jetty head is 49m in length with

depths of 12m alongside. Dolphins at both ends of the jetty extend the length to 320m. Light-hulled vessels are cautioned not

to lie alongside overnight as sea conditions may deteriorate

quickly without warning. It is recommended that vessels berth

heading S, 2 to 3 hours after the start of the ebb, making use of

the port anchor; the ebb current sets the vessel onto the jetty.

4.59 The jetty is situated within a restricted area and prior permission is required before entering it.

4.59 Pilotage.—Pilots may be arranged through the Port Authority, Fremantle. The pilot embarks 1 mile NE of Point Murat Jetty. The ETA of a vessel should be sent 24 hours in advance.

4.60 At Learmonth (22°13'S., 114°05'E.), 24 miles S of

Point Murat, in the S part of the port area, there is a jetty,

known as Wapet Jetty, which extends about 183m from the

coast. A group of fuel tanks at the root of the jetty is prominent. A fish factory, about 0.8 mile NW of the jetty, and a solar

observatory, about 0.5 mile SSE of the jetty, are conspicuous.

4.60 Bundegi Reef, with depths of less than 1.4m, lies 2 miles

SSW of Point Murat; it is steep-to on its E side. Cooper Shoal,

with a least depth of 2.7m, lies 14.5 miles S of Point Murat.

Camplin Shoal, with a depth of 8.2m, lies 1.5 miles WSW of

Cooper Shoal. Bennet Shoal, with a depth of 6.4m, and Stewart

Shoal, with a depth of 4.3m, lie 4 and 8 miles SW, respectively,

of Cooper Shoal. Wapet Shoal, with a least depth of 1.9m, lies

1.75 miles E of Wapet Jetty.

4.60 Anchorages.—In general, the holding ground in the anchorages of Exmouth Gulf is good, with fine brown sand having almost the consistency of mud.

4.61 North West Cape (21°47'S., 114°10'E.) is a low

sandy point at the N extremity of the peninsula forming the W

side of Exmouth Gulf. North West Reef, which dries 1.2m, lies

2 miles N of North West Cape. The seas generally break heavily on the reef and there are heavy tide rips between the reef and
Sector 4. Northwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leveque to North West Cape 105

Pub. 175

the cape; vessels should pass well outside the reef.

4.61 North West Cape Light is shown at an elevation of 137m

from a radio tower, one of a group up to 392m high, standing

1.75 miles S of the cape. The radio towers are very conspicuous, visually and on radar, by day and night. 

4.62 Eskdale Oil Field (21°23'S., 113°49'E.) is situated

approximately 31 miles NW of North West Cape. The area is

surrounded by a 2.5-mile wide cautionary zone.

Stybarrow Oil Field (21°28'S., 113°50'E.) is situated approximately 20 miles NW of North West Cape. The area is surrounded by a 2.5-mile wide cautionary zone.

Enfield Oil Field (21°29'S., 113°59'E.) is situated near Stybarrow Oil Field; the FPSO Nganhurra is located here. The area

is surrounded by a 2.5-mile wide cautionary zone in which

fishing, anchoring and navigating are prohibited. 
107

Pub. 175

5. 

West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin

5.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 5 — CHART INFORMATION
109

Pub. 175

SECTOR 5 

WEST COAST OF AUSTRALIA—NORTH WEST CAPE TO CAPE LEEUWIN

5.0 Plan.—This sector describes the W coast of Australia from

North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin. The sector includes the

ports of Cape Cuvier, Shark Bay, Carnarvon, Geraldton, Fremantle, and Bunbury. The descriptive sequence is from N to S. 

General Remarks

5.1 The coast of Australia from North West Cape, 755

miles SSE to Cape Leeuwin, is generally low, indented by a

few bays and rivers, and backed in places by mangrove swamps

through which water flows at high tides. In other places there

are cliffs which front the coast backed by hills and rise to elevations of 244m. Near Bunbury, in the S part of this sector,

there are mountains with heights to 515m about 18 miles inland and rise from an apparent level range. There are few good

anchorages along this coast. 

Winds—Weather.—The winds on the W coast of Australia,

between North West Cape and Cape Leeuwin, are generally

from the S, usually between SSW and SSE. During the summer, the winds are almost constant from this quarter, but in the

winter, their regularity is interrupted by occasional winds between N and W, which at times blow with considerable violence and are accompanied by heavy rains and misty weather.

In most seasons, the frequency of gales increases from N to

S along the coast S of Shark Bay (25°35'S., 113°32'E.). A more

rapid increase is to be found from N to S over the ocean in the

area S of 30°S in the winter and S of 35°S in the summer.

The gales associated with tropical revolving storms are important because of their violence rather than their frequency.

Gale force winds are most commonly experienced in squalls,

and the more violent of these are usually associated with thunderstorms.

The severity of the gales of Cape Leeuwin, and the rapidity

with which they succeed one another during the winter months,

are well-known. The barometer always foretells these gales

and generally begins to fall 1 or 2 days before they commence.

A S current, and the rising of the water above the normal sea

level, are also signs of an approaching NW gale.

Through most of the year, the driest region is a wide coastal

belt from near North West Cape N to Broome.

Rainfall generally increases to the S from North West Cape;

in winter there is a rapid increase to the S from Shark Bay to

Cape Leeuwin. In general, rain becomes more frequent with increasing distance from the shore, though this is less noticeable

S of 30°S, where the amount and frequency of rainfall increases with increasing latitude.

South of North West Cape, as the rainfall increases, its character also changes At Cape Leeuwin, the rain is spread over a

longer period, from May to October, with the rain less intense,

although more frequent.

At Perth, most of the rain falls in heavy showers at night.

Thunderstorms occur about twice a month, during the passage

of cold fronts in the wet season.

Fog is rare. In coastal waters its frequency is usually nil or

less than 2 per cent. Mist or haze is more common, with visibilities of less than 5 miles reported 40 per cent of the time in the

area around North West Cape in January and February.

Radiation fog, which occasionally forms towards dawn near

the coast, clears quickly after sunrise.

Tides—Currents.—Between North West Cape and Cape

Leeuwin, the tides are generally influenced by the winds, varying as much as 0.6m with offshore and inshore winds, with the

former reducing the water level. The rise and fall varies from

0.6 to 1.5m. The higher sea level is attained in June.

There are known seasonal changes in sea level in this sector.

These changes are the most noticeable where the tidal range is

small. Seasonal changes can usually be seen where they exceed

the range of the tide.

The currents of this sector show considerable variability,

largely due to the variable wind conditions which prevail over

most of the area for the greater part of the year. Caution is necessary because they may be modified or even reversed by the

prevailing wind.

At distances of more than 60 miles from the coast, the predominant direction of the current is NE to E in the winter and

N in the summer. Closer inshore, though there is no continuous

countercurrent, clockwise turning branches of the N or NE currents in the offing set E towards the coast or S along the coast.

The S set is more continuous in the winter than in the summer,

especially between 28°S and Cape Leeuwin.

The mean rate of the current in the waters covered in this

sector is less than 0.5 knot, but the S inshore current reaches a

rate of 0.5 to 1 knot between 30°S and 32°S.

South of 30°S, there is an onshore current more often than

not. This current mainly sets between NE and SE, sometimes at

a rate of 1 to 2 knots, although rates in excess of 2 knots have

been reported.

Between Cape Leeuwin and Cape Naturaliste, a N set at a

rate of 1 knot has been experienced. In January and February, a

strong E current setting towards land has been reported in the

offing between Cape Leeuwin and Fremantle. A current of

considerable velocity has also been experienced year round

setting towards the land in the vicinity of Cape Leeuwin. A

confused sea has been experienced just outside the 200m

curve, with smoother water both seaward and inshore.

On detached reefs, the tidal currents usually set towards the

reef from all sides during the flood tide and away from the reef

during the ebb tide. The currents are particularly noticeable in

the channels through the reef, where the rates may be considerable. A strong onshore current is usually experienced before

the onset of NW or W gales. The possibility of onshore sets

throughout the year should be kept in mind.

5.1 Caution.—Between November and June, extensive lobster

fishing takes place on the continental shelf between 24°S and

34°S. When passage permits, vessels are requested to transit

the area in depths greater than 200m. It has been reported that

the lobster fishing can be a hazard to navigation as the buoys

are numerous and unlit; the buoy lines are long and there are
110 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

generally no gaps between the lines.

5.1 An obstruction was reported (2004) to lies approximately 60

miles WSW of Cape Leeuwin at the terminus of a submarine

cable. A danger circle, with a radius of 1 mile, is centered on

position 34°53.0'S, 114°09.0'E and marks the obstruction on

the chart.

North West Cape to Shark Bay

5.2 From North West Cape to False Island Point, about 9

miles SW, the coast is fronted by a coastal reef extending 0.5 to

1 mile offshore; the sea breaks heavily on this reef.

5.2 Vlaming Head (21°48'S., 114°06'E.), 3.5 miles WSW of

North West Cape, is the N extremity of a conspicuous ridge of

hills that extend about 50 miles SSW; it is rocky, of a rugged

outline, and from 61 to 305m high. The slopes are vegetated

with coarse grass and bushes. A conspicuous unused light, 12m

high and made of gray concrete, stands on Vlaming Head.

5.2 Helby Bank (21°48'S., 114°01'E.), with a least depth of

14.9m, lies 4.75 miles W of Vlaming Head; the sea has been

seen to break on this bank with a heavy W swell. A 4.4m shoal

lies about 0.9 mile offshore, about 2.75 miles WSW of Vlaming Head. There is a 10.6m patch 3.75 miles W of Vlaming

Head. The sea breaks over both these shoals occasionally.

5.2 False Island Point (21°51'S., 114°01'E.), 5.5 miles SSW of

Vlaming Head, appears as an island when seen from NE or

SW.

5.2 From False Island Point to Point Cloates, 55 miles SSW, a

barrier reef fronts the coast; the reef lies between 1 and 3 miles

offshore and should not be approached within 1 mile. Depths

of 183m lie from 3 to 10 miles off this stretch of coast.

5.2 Point Cloates (22°43'S., 113°40'E.), which is sandy, rises to

Cloates Hill, 41m high. A disused lighthouse,14m high, stands

on the summit of Cloates Hill. Point Cloates Light is shown

from a white hut about 0.5 mile S of the disused lighthouse. 

5.2 Wealjugoo Hill (22°33'S., 113°43'E.) rises to a height of

142m about 10.5 miles NNE of Point Cloates; it is located at

the S end of a ridge extending S from Vlaming Head.

5.3 Norwegian Bay (22°37'S., 113°39'E.) affords anchorage for vessels with local knowledge. The bay lies 7.5 miles

NNW of Cloates Point. Range beacons, in line bearing 117°,

lead to the anchorage; there is a least depth of 5.5m on the

range and a depth of 4m close S. It was reported (1985) that the

range beacons were difficult to identify and in bad repair.

5.3 Frazer Islet (22°39'S., 113°38'E.), a sandy islet, lies just

within the barrier reef, 5 miles NNW of Cloates Point. Radar

returns from the islet have been reported up to 12 miles. A

stranded wreck and the remains of a derelict framework tower

are situated on the islet.

5.3 Black Rock, a pinnacle rock 2m high, on which the sea always breaks, lies 4 miles SSW of Cloates Point Light.

5.3 Point Maud (23°07'S., 113°46'E.) is the S entrance point of

a slight bay that extends 24 miles S from Cloates Point.

5.3 A radio tower stands 1.5 miles SSE of Point Maud. Entrance

Hill, 85m high, lies 5.5 miles E of Cloates Point; other conspicuous hills on the range extending S to Point Maud are Camp

Hill, 51m high, 6.5 miles SE of Cloates Point, and Whaleback

Hill, 70m high, 6 miles farther SE. Airey Hill, 68m high, lies 7

miles NE of Point Maud.

5.3 The barrier reef follows the curve of the coast from Cloates

Point S to Point Maud and lies 3 to 4 miles offshore. Passing

vessels should not approach the barrier reef within a distance

of 1 mile.

5.3 From Point Maud the coast trends SSW 29 miles to Cape

Farquhar (23°38'S., 113°37'E.), which is low and sandy with

a bare patch of sand. Yalobra Hill, 71m high, about 5 miles S of

Point Maud, has a conspicuous sand patch on its seaward side.

There is a conspicuous white sand hill at Alison Point, 12 miles

NE of Cape Farquhar. Bulbarli Point is located 6 miles NE of

the cape.

5.3 The barrier reef lies about 1.5 miles off the coast between

Point Maud and Cape Farquhar. North Reef, with a depth of

less than 1.8m, and on which the sea occasionally breaks, lies 2

miles N of Bulbarli Point.

5.3 The coast from Cape Farquhar to Red Bluff, 28 miles SSW,

is low and sandy. About 10 miles N of Red Bluff, there are

some red cliffs fronted by rock, the land being level.

5.3 Red Bluff (24°02'S., 113°25'E.) is level, rocky, and of a dark

reddish color, rising abruptly from the sea to a height of about

91m.

5.3 Cape Cuvier (24°13'S., 113°24'E.), 12 miles S of Red Bluff,

is 58m high, with light reddish cliffs, and is readily identified

when seen from the N. A large dark colored storage shed

stands on the cape and is conspicuous. Radar returns from

Cape Cuvier and Red Bluff have been reported up to ranges of

21 and 22 miles, respectively.

5.3 Reefs, on which the seas break, extend 2 miles from the

coast, from Cape Cuvier to a position 8.5 miles N. A rock, 3m

high, lies on the drying reef which extends 1 mile from the

cape.

5.4 Cape Cuvier (24°13'S., 113°24'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54565) lies close within the cape. There is a port radio station at the port. The port lies within the port limits of Carnarvon.

Depths—Limitations.—The port consists of a salt-loading

Cape Cuvier
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 111

Pub. 175

berth, with a depth of 15.2m alongside. There is a least depth

of 18m in the approach to the wharf. Vessels secure to six

mooring buoys and warp themselves into position for loading

each hold.

5.4 Berthing may be delayed due to strong winds or heavy swell,

and vessels may be required to return to anchor before completion of loading if the berth is affected.

5.4 Vessels of up to 65,000 dwt and 250m in length, with drafts

up to 14.4m, have been accommodated within the port.

5.4 Aspect.—A light is shown from the head of the wharf.

5.4 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory; there is no night berthing. The pilot embarks about 1 mile N of the Cape Cuvier

Jetty and remains on board while the vessel is at the berth. Pilotage should be requested from the Fremantle 10 days, 7 days,

and 4 days prior to arrival.

5.4 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA should be sent to the terminal operators 10 days, 7 days, 4 days, 48 hours, 24 hours, and

12 hours in advance. The 48-hour report should include the

vessel’s estimated draft fore and aft.

5.4 The vessel’s ETA should also be sent to the harbormaster at

Carnarvon 48 hours and 24 hours in advance.

5.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken NNE of the wharf,

about 1.5 miles distant, in a depth of 28m, good holding

ground. It has been reported there are depths of 16m about 0.3

mile offshore, in the vicinity of the anchorage.

5.4 Point Quobba (24°29'S., 113°24'E.), 16 miles S of Cape

Cuvier, is the N entrance point to Shark Bay. Three miles S of

Cape Cuvier are some high sand patches. Beagle Hill, 0.5 mile

E of Point Quobba, is a conspicuous sharp peak. Point Quobba

Light is shown from the summit of Beagle Hill.

Shark Bay

5.5 Shark Bay (25°35'S., 113°32'E.) extends S for a distance of 130 miles from Quobba Point, and is from 20 to 50

miles wide. It is bound on the E by the mainland and on the W

by Bernier Island, Dorre Island and Dirk Hartogs Island, and

the peninsula of Edel Land. The S portion of the bay is divided

by the Peron Peninsula into two arms; the E arm leads through

Hopeless Reach to Hamelin Pool and Lharidon Bight at the

head. The W arm leads through Denham Sound and Freycinet

Reach into Freycinet Estuary. The N portion of the bay has

depths of 18.3 to 37m.

5.5 The E shore of Shark Bay, from Quobba Point, trends SSE

for a distance of 26 miles to the Gascoyne River, and is mostly

barren. A prominent sand patch is located 9 miles SE of Quobba Point; Whaleback Hill and South Beejaling Hill are located

1.5 and 5.5 miles, respectively, farther SE. Pelican Hill, 51m

high and 6 miles S of South Beejaling Hill, is conspicuous.

5.5 Fitzroy Reefs (24°33'S., 113°24'E.), two detached dangers

on which the sea always breaks, lie between 1.75 and 3.75

miles S of Beagle Hill; the NW patch has depths of less than

1.8m, while a portion of the SE patch dries.

5.5 Darwin Reefs (24°36'S., 113°26'E.), with depths of less than

1.8m, lie on the extremity of a ledge extending 4 miles SSW

from a point 4 miles SE of Beagle Hill; the sea only breaks on

them in heavy weather.

5.5 Beejaling Shoals (24°39'S., 113°28'E.), with depths of 3.7

and 5.5m, lie from 3 to 4 miles WSW of Whaleback Hill; the

sea only breaks on them in heavy weather. An 8.8m patch lies

5.5 miles WSW of the same hill.

5.5 Blowfish Banks (24°48'S., 113°34'E.), with depths of 4 to

8.2m, extend up to 5.5 miles offshore from a point about 5

miles N of Point Whitmore, the N entrance point of the Gascoyne River.

5.5 Geographe Channel (24°40'S., 113°16'E.), the N entrance

into Shark Bay, is 21 miles wide between Point Quobba on the

E and Bernier Island on the W, and has depths of 31 to 42m.

5.5 Caution.—It has been reported that a strong S current or set

towards the land is experienced at times in the approach to Geographe Channel, between Cape Cuvier and Bernier Island;

this usually occurs prior to W or NW winds

5.6 Bernier Island (24°52'S., 113°08'E.), on the W side

of Shark Bay, is the northernmost of the three principal islands

forming the W side of the bay. Bernier Island is about 15 miles

long N to S and has a height of 37m. The W coast of the island

consists of high perpendicular cliffs, with a level outline; the

coast is steep-to, with depths of 50m being found 0.8 mile from

the cliffs. Cape Rosnard Light, in a white circular steel housing, is situated on the N end of the island. Koks Islet, about

7.6m high, is located close off the N extremity of Bernier Island.

5.6 Dorre Island (25°08'S., 113°06'E.) lies about 0.5 mile S of

Bernier Island. The island is about 17 miles long N to S and

has a height of 46m. Dorre Island has the same aspect as Bernier Island. Observation Hillock rises over Cape St. Cricq, the S

extremity, and is conspicuous. A light, shown from a white hut,

is situated on Observation Hillock.

5.6 Uranie Bank (25°10'S., 113°10'E.), of sand and rock, with

depths of 1.8 to 4.8m, lies off the E side of Dorre Island. The S

extremity of the bank extends about 11 miles E of Cape St.

Cricq.

5.6 Naturaliste Channel (25°22'S., 113°00'E.), the W entrance

into Shark Bay, between Dorre and Dirk Gartog Island, is 14

Source: Earth Science and Image Analysis, NASA

Shark Bay
112 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

miles wide. Dampier Reef, with a reported depth of 3.6m and

on which the sea breaks in heavy weather, lies with its E extremity about 5 miles S of Cape St. Cricq; there are strong

overfalls over this danger with the W tidal current, and it

should be given a wide berth. There are depths of 3.1 to 9.6m

up to 9 miles ENE through S of Dampier Reef.

5.7 Carnarvon (24°53'S., 113°39'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54560) lies about 23 miles within the N entrance of Shark

Bay, on the E shore within the Gascoyne River. The port is

closed to commercial shipping and is now used only by fishing

vessels and small craft.

Depths—Limitations.—Babbage Island, in the mouth of

the river, has a jetty which extends 1,500m WSW and has a

berth on the N side 110m in length that will accommodate a

vessel 107m in length, in depths of 5m. A harbor exists for

commercial fishing boats which can accommodate 30 vessels.

5.7 Aspect.—A group of tanks stands on the N end of Babbage

Island and a light is shown from the NW end of the island. An

aeronautical radiobeacon and an aeronautical light are situated

on the mainland, about 1.25 miles E of the root of the jetty. A

conspicuous dish aerial is situated 4 miles E of Babbage Island

Jetty. Radio masts, each with an elevation of 124m and each

marked by a red fixed light, stand 5 miles ESE of Babbage Island Jetty. There is a Coast Radio Station at Carnarvon. 

5.7 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in 6.4m, sand, 0.5

mile W of the jetty head. Vessels with deeper draft must anchor

in Gascoyne Road, some distance offshore.

5.7 Directions.—A vessel approaching Carnarvon from the N,

by Geographe Channel, should give the E shore a berth of at

least 8 miles to avoid the reefs and shoals off that shore; Babbage Island Light must be kept bearing less than 130° to avoid

the occasional set toward the shore.

5.7 Vessels bound for Gascoyne Road or Carnarvon from the S,

having passed through Naturaliste Channel, may pass on either

side of Dampier Reef, steer to clear the shoals NE, E, and SE

of that reef, and keep Cape St. Cricq bearing more than 260°

until Quoin Bluff North (25°03'S., 113°06'E.) bears less than

320° to avoid Uranie Bank, then steer for Gascoyne Road, allowing for the effects of the tidal current.

5.7 In approaching the jetty from either N or S, head for a position 4 miles W of Babbage Island Light; then steer for the jetty,

keeping the light on Babbage Island open N of the light on the

head of the jetty.

5.8 The E coast of Shark Bay from Mangrove Point

(24°54'S., 113°38'E.), close S of Carnarvon, to Grey Point, 13

miles S, is low. From Grey Point to Greenough Point, 10 miles

SE, there are low shores, thickly covered with mangroves and

intersected by many salt water creeks; Denham Hummock,

18m high, is the central of three hummocks dominating

Greenough Point.

5.8 Gascoyne Flats (25°00'S., 113°38'E.), which dry in patches,

extend up to 4 miles from the coast between Mangrove Point

and Greenough Point. Elbow Shoal, with a depth of 4.9m, lies

9 miles SW of Mangrove Point and 6 miles offshore.

5.8 The E shore of Shark Bay, from Greenough Point to the

Wooramel River, about 42 miles SSE, is low, intersected by

creeks, and lined with mangroves, through which the tide flows

at a considerable distance inland in some places. A range of

low sand hills extends along the greater portion of this coast;

the country inland, being low and flat, is in some part subject to

flooding.

5.8 From Greenough Point to Long Point, 14 miles SSE, the

coast is fronted by islets lying close offshore. From Long Point

to the Wooramel River, the coast is fronted by a drying bank,

with shoal water extending up to 7 miles offshore.

5.9 Hopeless Reach (25°40'S., 113°42'E.), in the SE arm

of Shark Bay, lies SE of the Cape Peron Peninsula. There are

depths in the reach of 12.8 to 16.5m, sand and shell, in the fairway between the coastal banks on either side.

5.9 A fish research area is situated about 4 miles NE of Cape

Peron. Pearl farms, which may be floating or fixed structures,

exist in this area. They, and their associated moorings, should

be avoided. The farms are generally marked by buoys and beacons which may be lit. The shallows bordering the Southern

Flats, 2 miles NE of Cape Peron, are utilized for mussel cultivation. All vessels should navigate with caution in the area.

5.9 Herald Bight (25°34'S., 113°33'E.) lies close SE of Cape

Bernier Island from SSE

Carnarvon—One Mile Jetty
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 113

Pub. 175

Peron. Herald Bluff, at the SE corner of the bight, is 39m high.

A submerged ledge, with depths of less than 1.8m, extends 5

miles N from Herald Bluff.

5.9 Anchorage can be obtained in Herald Bight, in a depth of

8m, W of the ledge described above. Anchorage can also be

obtained N of Herald Bight, in a depth of 12.8m, 3.75 miles

ESE of Cape Peron; and in a depth of 16m, 5 miles NE of the

same cape.

5.9 There are a number of islands and dangers in the bay S of

Hopeless Reach which may best be seen on the chart.

5.9 Faure Island (25°51'S., 113°53'E.) lies 6 miles E of the E

extremity of the Peron Peninsula; its central summit is 38m

high. A narrow spit, with a least depth of 1.2m, extends 11

miles NNW from the island.

5.9 Faure Flat, on which Faure Island lies, extends almost across

the width of the SE part of Shark Bay, and has depths less than

1.8m over a large portion of it; this flat extends S and connects

Faure Island with Petit Point, the N extremity of the peninsula

which separates Hamelin Pool and Lharidon Bight.

5.9 Disappointment Reach (25°45'S., 113°55'E.), with a least

depth of 9.1m in the fairway, is the passage on the E side of

Faure Island and forms the approach to Hamelin Pool. Herald

Loop, with a least depth of 3.7m, leads SSE from Disappointment Reach to Hamelin Pool, which has regular depths of 7.3

to 10.1m.

5.9 Herald Gut (25°47'S., 113°45'E.), on the W side of Faure

Island, lies at the N end of a narrow channel which leads S to

Lharidon Bight; the bight has depths from 9.1 to 11m.

5.9 The channels which lead to Hamelin Pool and Lharidon

Bight are narrow and difficult to transit; only those vessels with

local knowledge should attempt passage. 

Dirk Hartog Island—North Extremity

5.10 Dirk Hartog Island (25°51'S., 113°07'E.), which

forms the SW side of Shark Bay is about 43 miles in length N

to S and has a height of 185m. Cape Inscription, the N extremity of the island, is a remarkable jagged headland, 36m high.

On the W side of the island, heavy breakers extend for about 1

mile from the coast between Cape Inscription and a point about

4 miles SSW, but the remainder of the coast appears to be

steep-to. Quoin Head, on the W coast about 20 miles S of Cape

Inscription, is a conspicuous, bold point.

5.10 Herald Heights (25°57'S., 113°06'E.), the highest peaks on

the W coast, attain a height of 185m; the cliffs between them

and Cape Inscription vary from 30 to 90m high. Surf Point,

about 10 miles SE of Herald Heights, has a conspicuous sand

hill, 107m high, 0.75 mile N of it. 

5.10 Cape Ransonnet (26°10'S., 113°13'E.), the S extremity of

Dirk Hartog Island, is a bare wedge-shaped, sandstone point,

with two bare rocks, 2m high, close off it; there are shoal

depths between the ledges extending from Surf Point and the

extremity of Cape Ransonnet.

5.11 Steep Point (26°09'S., 113°09'E.), the NW extremity

of Edel Land, is a bold cliffy projection, 35m high, which lies 2

miles SW of Surf Point. Edel Land, S of Dirk Hartogs Island,

forms the W coast of Freycinet Reach and Freycinet Estuary.

5.11 South Passage, leading from seaward to Denham Sound and

Shark Bay, is about 1.5 miles wide between Steep Point and

Surf Point. The entrance to the passage is obstructed by Outer

Bar, which has a low water depth of 3.8 to 5.5m. The passage

should not be attempted without local knowledge, and then

only by small craft.

5.11 Denham Sound (25°41'S., 113°15'E.), the outer part of the

SW part of Shark Bay, is entered between Cape Levillain, the

NE extremity of Dirk Hartog Island, and Cape Peron, the N extremity of the Peron Peninsula, 26 miles E.

5.11 The Peron Peninsula (25°53'S., 113°35'E.), which forms the

E coast of Denham Sound, is about 45 miles in length N to S

and 12 miles in breadth at the center. A light is shown from

Cape Peron, the N extremity of the Peron Peninsula. A rock,

awash, was reported (1975) to lie 9 miles SW of Cape Peron.

5.11 Cape Peron Flats (25°25'S., 113°31'E.), with irregular

depths of less than 9.1m, extend about 12 miles N from the

cape; the shallowest part, with a depth of only 0.3m, lies about

2 miles N of the cape.

5.11 Caution.—Shoaling has been reported (1994) over this bank

5.12 Cape Lesueur (25°44'S., 113°23'E.), on the W side

of the peninsula 14 miles SSW of Cape Peron, is a bright sandy

bluff; Peron Hills, 43m high, are within.

5.12 From Cape Lesueur, the coast trends SSE 13 miles to Lagoon Point, which is 26m high, then S for 11 miles to Eagle

Bluff, the SW extremity of the Peron Peninsula.

5.12 From Eagle Bluff, a bold sandstone cliff, 42m high, the remaining portion of the W coast of the Peron Peninsula trends

SE 10 miles to Goulet Bluff (26°13'S., 113°40'E.), 27m high,

on the W side and near the center of Taillefer Isthmus.

5.12 The W side of Denham Sound is bound by the E side of Dirk

Hartog Island. The sound has general depths of 14.6 to 18.3m

as far as Herald Bay. A few isolated patches of 7.3 to 9.1m,

which may best be seen on the chart, lie in or near the fairway.

5.12 Turtle Bay (25°29'S., 112°58'E.), entered between Inscription Point and Cape Levillain, 3 miles ESE, provides good anchorage, in 15m, about 0.75 mile offshore. The anchorage is

protected from all winds from ESE through WSW, but should

be avoided during the period of NW gales which occur from

May to October.

5.12 From Cape Levillain, the E coast of Dirk Hartog Island

trends S 24 miles to Quoin Bluff South. The coasts consists of

red cliffs, from 6.1 to 18.3m high, with occasional sandy

beaches and is bordered by a reef. Quoin Bluff South is a bold

projection, 27m high, that appears as a wedge-shaped island

when seen from N.

5.12 Levillain Shoal (25°31'S., 113°01'E.), with a least depth of

4m and having some rocky heads with depths of less than

1.8m, on which the sea breaks at times, extends 3.5 miles from

a position about 1 mile E of Cape Levillain.

5.12 Herald Bay (25°53'S., 113°09'E.), on the N side of Quoin

Bluff South, provides anchorage, in a depth of 7.3m, sand and

shells, about 1 mile NNW of the bluff. Depths of 4.9m and

5.8m lie 0.75 mile NW and 1.5 miles NNE, respectively, from

the anchorage.

5.12 Notch Point (25°57'S., 113°08'E.) lies 3.5 miles SSE of

Quoin Bluff South. There are depths of less than 5.5m for a

distance of 3.5 miles NNE of Notch Point, terminating in a spit

with a depth of 3.6m, which lies 2 miles E of the N side of

Quoin Bluff South. A patch, with a depth of 0.9m, lies about 2

miles SE of Notch Point.
114 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

5.12 Dirk Hartog Homestead (26°00'S., 113°09'E.) is situated

on a point 4 miles SSE of Notch Point.

5.12 Anchorage may be taken, in a depth of 7.3m, about 3.25

miles SE of the homestead; anchorage can also be taken in the

same depth, about 1.5 miles NNE of the homestead. Care is

necessary when anchoring here as the coastal bank is steep-to. 

5.13 Cape Bellefin (26°01'S., 113°16'E.) lies in the S part

of Denham Sound, 8 miles SE of Notch Point, and is the N extremity of Bellefin Prong, a narrow tongue of land, 62m high.

Bellefin Prong forms the E side of Blind Strait.

5.13 Blind Strait (26°07'S., 113°13'E.), with depths of 7.3 to

9.1m, leads SSW from Denham Sound to South Passage, previously described in paragraph 5.11. North Sand, consisting of

sand and streaks of dark seaweed, has depths of 1.2 to 1.8m

and lies about 4 miles SSW of Cape Bellefin. Inner Bar has a

least depth of 3.4m, coarse shells and sand. South Sand, consisting of sand and streaks of dark seaweed, has depths of 0.3

to 1.8m, and lies about 1 mile offshore on the outer edge of a

flat fronting the coast of Dirk Hartog Island for a distance of 4

miles NNE of Cape Ransonnet. East Sand, of white sand, extends 1.5 miles from Bellefin Prong; it has depths of 0.6 to

1.8m and forms the E side of the N part of Blind Strait. The

strait leads between the shoal water fronting the W side of

Bellefin Prong and East Sand on the E and Edel Land Island to

the S.

5.13 Cape Heirisson (26°01'S., 113°20'E.), the N extremity of

Heirisson Prong, is located 3.5 miles E of Cape Bellefin.

5.13 Bellefin Flats (25°58'S., 113°17'E.), with a least depth of

0.3m, extends about 5 miles NNW from Cape Bellefin, joining

Heirisson Flats (25°57'S., 113°18'E.), which has depths of less

than 3.7m and some drying patches on them. Together, Bellefin

Flats and Heirisson Flats extend N to a position 5 miles E of

Quoin Bluff South. The channel between these spits and the

coastal bank extending from Notch Point forms the N approach

to Blind Strait.

5.13 Bar Flats, which occupy most of the area between Cape

Lesueur and Heirisson Flats, have a least depth of 0.9m and so

encumber Freycinet Reach, the channel leading from Denham

Sound into Freycinet Estuary, as to render navigation difficult

for other than light-draft vessels. The flats are reported to be

subject to considerable change.

5.13 Denham Channel (25°57'S., 113°12'E.) is a narrow passage, about 125m, wide between Heirisson and Bar Flats. A cut

dredged to a depth of 9.8m in 1979, which extends for nearly 1

mile SE from the light beacon marking the NW extremity of

Heirisson Flat, gives access to Denham Channel. The cut and

channel are marked by lighted beacons and unlit beacons.

5.13 A pile lighted beacon, 3 miles NNE of Cape Heirisson,

marks the NE side of the S entrance to Denham Channel.

5.14 Useless Loop (26°07'S., 113°24'E.) (World Port Index No. 54555), situated on the E side of Heirisson Prong, 7

miles SSE of Cape Heirisson, is the site of a salt works.

5.14 The jetty to the salt works E of Slope Island (Topper Island)

is approached through Naturaliste Channel and Denham Channel, which lead to an anchorage off the jetty.

5.14 Useless Loop lies within the port limits of Carnarvon. There

is a coast radio station at Useless Loop.

Depths—Limitations.—A dolphin-type jetty is laid out in a

N-S direction, 0.2 mile E of Slope Island. The jetty is 190m

long between the dolphins and has a depth of 10m alongside.

The berth will accommodate vessels up to 183m in length, with

a maximum beam of 25m and a maximum draft of 9.75m. A

pipeline, 2.5 miles in length, extends N from Useless Loop to

Slope Island.

Aspect.—A conspicuous water tower stands about 3 miles S

of the jetty.

5.14 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for the approaches to the

jetty; the pilot boards in position 25°51'S, 113°15'E. 

5.14 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA to the terminal operators 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance, with

any amendments being sent as soon as possible. Vessels must

arrive in a ballast condition, permitting optimum ship-handling

capabilities, or the vessel may be unable to berth. 

5.14 Directions.—Vessels proceeding to Useless Loop enter

Shark Bay by Naturaliste Channel. When Cape Inscription

Light bears 218° distant about 3.5 miles, steer course 128°.

When Cape Inscription Light bears 287° distant about 10

miles, alter course to 166° for the lighted beacon marking the

W end of Denham Channel. Then follow the marked channel,

steering to pass about 1 mile off the lighted beacon marking the

E end of the channel until the lighted beacon bears 345°, distant 2.5 miles. Then steer to a position about 0.5 mile off the

jetty at Slope Island.

5.14 Caution.—Strong S winds can sometimes cause abnormal

low tides and may require a vessel to leave the berth prior to

the completion of loading.

5.15 Henri Freycinet Harbor (Freycinet Estuary)

(26°25'S., 113°43'E.) is the continuation of Freycinet Reach,

and from Goulet Bluff extends 23 miles S to Disappointment

Loop, the S extremity of Shark Bay. There appears to be a regular depth of water in the harbor, varying from 7.3 to 14.6m,

but the approach through Freycinet Reach, as previously described, is difficult.

5.15 Caution.—Vessels are warned to proceed with caution because uncharted dangers may exist in the seaward approaches

to the three entrance channels to Shark Bay.

5.15 Tidal currents enter Shark Bay by Geographe Channel and

Naturaliste Channel on the flood tide, meeting near Uranie

Bank; the maximum rate at spring tides is about 1.25 knots.

Shark Bay to Champion Bay

5.16 The coast from Steep Point to Zuytdorp Point, 17

miles SSE, is high and precipitous, but it has not been examined. Epineux Bay (False Entrance) lies 3 miles N of Zuytdorp

Point; Dulverton Bay lies immediately N of that point.

5.16 Epineux Bay (False Entrance) (26°20'S., 113°17'E.) is a

shallow inlet about 12 miles S of South Passage. As both openings take a SE direction, Epineux Bay is liable to be mistaken

for South Passage when approaching from the S, but the light

on Steep Point should identify South Passage.

5.16 The coast between Zuytdorp Point and the mouth of the

Murchison River, about 90 miles SE, consists of a range of

rocky cliffs 91 to 122m high for the first 50 miles and 183 to

244m high farther S. Zuytdorp Point was reported to be prominent on radar. The land at the cliff top is generally level and the

coast is uniform, making it difficult to identify any particular
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 115

Pub. 175

part.

5.16 Mount Dorrigo (26°26'S., 113°20'E.), 35m high and 3 miles

S of Zuytdorp Point, is conspicuous and Womerangee Hill

(26°54'S., 113°47'E.), 286m high, and 40 miles SE of the same

point, is prominent. This coast appears to be steep-to, with

depths of 40m up to 1 mile offshore.

5.17 Gantheaume Bay (27°40'S., 114°10'E.), off the

mouth of the Murchison River, is an exposed bight, with rocky

and sandy shores backed by hills bearing stunted vegetation.

Meanarra Hill, 203m high, stands 3 miles E of the river entrance and is prominent.

5.17 The Murchison River has a bar across the mouth, protected

from the sea by a reef, which generally breaks heavily. There

appears to be no passage even for a boat, except at high water,

but in fine weather there is a convenient landing place under

the shelter of the reef. 

5.17 Meanarra Hill (27°42'S., 114°13'E.), 203m high, stands 3

miles E of the river entrance and is prominent.

5.17 Red Bluff (27°44'S., 114°09'E.), a short distance S of the

Murchison River entrance, forms the N extremity of a range of

reddish cliffs, about 61m high, which extend 7 miles SSW to

Bluff Point. These cliffs are succeeded by a sandy shore with

occasional rocky points and bays trending nearly S, 20 miles to

Shoal Point. There is a dark bluff about 8 miles N of Shoal

Point, and nearly midway between these are some remarkable

sandhills of considerable elevation.

5.17 Shoal Point (28°07'S., 114°10'E.) is a low sandy projection,

fronted with several rocks, awash, to a distance of 0.35 mile. A

light is shown from a structure situated on a hill 3.5 miles NNE

of the point; a racon is situated at the light. A depth of 11.5m

lies 7 miles SW of Shoal Point; the edge of the charted 36.5m

line, about 6 miles farther SW, is marked by tide rips.

5.17 From Shoal Point the low sandy shore trends SE about 5.5

miles to Hillock Point, the N point of Port Gregory, then 4

miles to the Hutt River entrance.

5.17 Hutt Lagoon extends from within and abreast of Shoal Point

to Port Gregory about 8.5 miles distant; 0.5 mile SE of Shoal

Point, the sea washes over the low sandy beach into the lagoon

with heavy W gales. On the E side of Hutt Lagoon, there is a

range of grassy hills attaining a height of 128m.

5.18 Port Gregory (28°11'S., 114°15'E.) is formed between the coast SE of Hillock Point and a ledge of rocks running parallel with this coast at an average distance of about 0.2

mile offshore. The main ledge of rocks which forms the seaward side of the port extends 2 miles ESE from Hillock Point

and is about 1m high. Two detached ledges, Flat Rock and

North Rock, each about 1m high, lie about 0.15 and 0.5 mile

NW, respectively, of the N extremity of the main ledge. 

5.18 Hero Passage, the best entrance to Port Gregory, is about

150m wide, with a least depth of 4.2m in the fairway between

Flat Rock and North Rock. A shallow bank, over which the sea

breaks in a heavy swell, lies nearly 0.5 mile NW of North

Rock.

5.18 The position of the port can be identified by a bare white

sand patch located about 0.5 mile N of Hillock Point, which is

visible from a distance of 12 miles and Scrubby Hillock, close

N of the same point.

5.18 Anchorage for vessels with a draft of less than 3.6m can be

obtained about 0.1 mile ESE of Hillock Point, in 5.5m, rock

and sand. This anchorage, between the shore and the shoal

bank extending E from the ledge, does not afford sufficient

room for swinging at a single anchor, so a vessel must moor

with one anchor on the shoal bank and the other on the beach.

5.18 A current generally sets N through the passage, and at times

may attain a rate of 3 knots. During the winter, with a succession of NW gales, the current runs in the opposite direction.

5.18 In the offing the current generally sets NW, with a maximum

rate of 2 knots through most of the year; when N and NW

winds prevail it runs in the opposite direction, though not so

strong, but the tendency in both cases is to set a vessel toward

the land.

5.19 The Hutt River (28°13'S., 114°18'E.) flows into the

sea 4 miles SE of Hillock Point; its mouth is generally closed

by a sand bar. About 3 miles NE of the river mouth there are

two remarkable conical peaks, Mount Victoria and Mount Albert; the latter has an elevation of 162m and is distinguished by

a conspicuous cone.

5.19 From the Hutt River, a rocky coast trends SE for a distance

of 14 miles to the Bowes River. The first 10 miles has a steep,

grassy ridge rising from the beach and varies from 116 to 133m

high; this coast is fringed by a line of reefs extending up to 0.25

mile offshore. About 4 miles NNW of the entrance to the Bowes River are two prominent bare sand patches.

5.19 The mouth of the Bowes River is usually closed by a sand

bar. The town of Northampton stands about 10 miles inland; it

is connected to Geraldton by road and a railway.

5.19 For about 20 miles SE of the entrance to the Bowes River,

the hills within the coast are table-topped, with perpendicular

sides, varying from 183 to 244m high.

5.19 Archdeacon Ledge (28°14'S., 114°16'E.), with a least depth

of 4m, lies 3 miles SSE of Port Gregory and 1 mile offshore.

5.19 From the Oakajee River, 12 miles SSE of the Bowes River,

to the Buller River, there are several ledges awash; the Buller

River is usually barred. There are several rocky ledges in

Drummond Cove, close S of the Buller River.

5.19 Woolawar Gully (28°30'S., 114°32'E.), a narrow gap with a

stream flowing through it, is 6.5 miles SE of the entrance to the

Bowes River. Kings Table Hill (Table Hill), 241m high and

conspicuous, stands 5 miles ENE of Woolawar Gully, and there

is a grassy hill, 95m high, about 2 miles SE of the same gully.

5.19 Yellow Gully, the Oakajee River, and the Buller River lie 2.5,

6, and 9.5 miles, SSE respectively, of Woolawar Gully.

5.19 Wokatherra Hill (28°39'S., 114°39'E.), 210m high, with

White Peak, 173m high, close SW of it, lies 17.5 miles SSE of

the Bowes River entrance. The Moresby Range has a flattopped peak at its S extremity, with a gap between it and Mount

Fairfax, which is 185m high, and stands 24 miles SSE of the

Bowes River entrance. A conspicuous television mast, 351m

high, stands on Moresby Range 2.5 miles SSE of Wokatherra

Hill. Wizard Peak, a conspicuous cone 215m high, is situated 7

miles SE of Mount Fairfax. There is comparatively low country

between Wizard Peak and Mount Fairfax.

5.20 Sandy Point (28°41'S., 114°36'E.), the N entrance

point of Champion Bay, is located 2.5 miles S of the entrance

to the Buller River, with Drummond Cove (Smugglers Cove), a
116 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

slight indentation in the coast, between them. The coast from

Sandy Point extends 5 miles S, then W 1.5 miles to Point

Moore, the SW extremity of Champion Bay.

5.20 The coastal waters from Port Gregory to Champion Bay are

rather steep-to, with few charted dangers.

5.20 Champion Bay (28°44'S., 114°36'E.) is protected on its S

and W sides by Point Moore and the reefs extending from it;

Point Moore Reefs lie to the W of Point Moore and Four-fathom Banks extend from a position 1.75 miles NNW of Point

Moore to Sandy Point.

5.20 Drying reefs extend up to 0.15 mile off Sandy Point and

depths of less than 11m extend up to 1.5 miles offshore abreast

this point. The Chapman River, 4 miles NE of Point Moore, is

generally closed by a sand bar. A spoil ground lies centered 0.5

mile offshore, about 1 mile SW of the Chapman River. 

5.20 A conspicuous radio tower, 76m high, stands about 0.5 mile

S of the entrance to the river. A light is shown at Point Moore

and an aeronautical radiobeacon is situated about 6.5 miles

ESE of the point.

5.20 Vessels approaching Champion Bay may easily identify the

locality by Mount Fairfax and Wizard Peak, which have been

described in paragraph 5.19, if the landmarks are not capped

with clouds.

Geraldton (28°47'S., 114°36'E.)

World Port Index No. 54540

5.21 Geraldton is situated in the SE corner of Chapman

Bay and has a harbor which is protected by breakwaters. There

is anchorage in Chapman Bay.

5.21 The port serves as a tanker terminal and supply platform for

offshore rigs, and handles bulk grain, copper ore, talc, general

cargo, and livestock for export.

5.21 Winds—Weather.—During the summer, prevailing winds

are from the SE, and from May to November gales sometime

blow with great strength from the NW through N to E. With a

falling barometer, accompanied by an unusual rise in the sea

level, a NW gale may be expected.

5.21 Tides—Currents.—The tides at high water springs are

1.1m. The sea level is greatly influenced by the winds. The

land breezes, which prevail during the summer months from

Courtesy Geraldton Port Authority

Geraldton from N

Geraldton Port Authority Home Page

http://www.geroport.wa.gov.au
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 117

Pub. 175

midnight to about 0900 or 1000, cause the lowest levels; W and

NW winds, being more prevalent during the winter months,

cause the highest levels. There is an unusual rise of the water

before a NW gale, and during the continuance of the gale, the

sea level remains from 0.9 to 1.2m above its ordinary level.

The sea level is correspondingly lowered during S winds, with

a maximum of 0.6m below datum having been recorded.

5.21 The currents during the summer months set in a N direction

while during the winter months the currents set in a S direction;

the ocean swell, however, being generally from the W, has a

tendency to set a vessel toward the coast. Swells of up to 6m

have been recorded in the seaward entrance to the outer

approach channel.

5.21 Depths—Limitations.—The approach to Geraldton Harbor

is through Champion Bay. The fairway through the reefs,

which is indicated by a range and marked by buoys, leads into

a dredged entrance channel, which is maintained to a depth of

14.5 to 13.1m in its outer part and 12.8m in its inner part, and

then leads between the breakwaters into the harbor basin,

which is maintained to a depth of 12.4m.

5.21 On the S side of the harbor are berths, with lengths of 99 to

281m. Berth characteristics are given in the accompanying table titled Geraldton—Berth Characteristics.

5.21 Vessels up to 225m in length and 33m in beam, with drafts

up to 12m, can be accommodated within the port.

5.21 A channel, dredged to a depth of 3.2m and indicated by a

range leads from the harbor entrance W along the S side of the

W breakwater to a fishing harbor. There is a marina, with

depths of 2.4m, situated in the SW part of the fishing harbor.

5.21 Aspect.—A radio mast 0.5 mile S of the mouth of the Chapman River is conspicuous. Scott Hill (Mount Scott), 40m high

and 2 miles E of Point Moore, is prominent on the skyline and

a conspicuous rectangular silo, 58m high, stands about 1 mile

W of Scott Hill.

5.21 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots usually embark in

the approach about 3 miles NW of Point Moore Light; if

weather conditions prevent the pilot boat from reaching this

position, the port authority will advise where the pilot will

board. The pilot boarding positions are, as follows:

a. Boarding Position A—28°45.5'S, 114°30.9'E.

b. Boarding Position B—28°41.9'S, 114°31.9'E.

Courtesy of Geraldton Port Authority

Geraldton from E

Geraldton—Berth Characteristics

Berth Length Max. Depth

No. 1 50m 8.4m
118 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

5.21 The vessel’s ETA is required 48 hours, 24 hours, and 2 hours

before arrival. The 48-hour ETA notice should include the vessel’s maximum draft fore and aft. There is a Coast Radio Station and a Port Radio Station at Geraldton. Geraldton Port

Control may be contacted on VHF channels 16 and 11.

5.21 Regulations.—Tankers are berthed during daylight hours

only.

5.21 The harbormaster can be contacted by e-mail, as follows:

5.21 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in 11m, about 2.25

miles NNE of Point Moore Light, good holding ground.

5.21 Nine anchor berths, each with a radius of 0.5 mile and

marked QN, S1, and N1 through N7, are in Champion Bay.

5.21 Caution.—Swells up to 6m high have been observed in the

approaches to the outer channel; at such times deep laden vessels should not attempt to enter.

5.21 During W weather, the sea breaks in depths of 7.3m and less,

and vessels are not to proceed inside the pilot boarding grounds

without instructions from harbor authorities.

Houtman Abrolhos

5.22 Houtman Abrolhos (28°39'S., 113°47'E.) consists of

three groups of islets and rocks, surrounded by reefs, extending

NNW-SSE about 49 miles, with a breadth of 10 to 13 miles.

They lie about 30 miles offshore and are separated from the

mainland by Geelvink Channel.

5.22 The basis of all these islands, rocks, and reefs is limestone,

consisting chiefly of coral and shells; the islets on the E side of

Easter and Pelsaert Groups are merely ridges of dead coral and

shells, while those on the W side are flat blocks of limestone,

about 1.5m high, covered by stunted vegetation.

5.22 On their E sides, the islets rise steeply from depths of about

45m; on their W sides, the barrier reef is steep-to off Pelsaert

Group, but becomes increasingly less steep-to farther N, off

Easter Group and Wallabi Group. There are off-lying dangers

NW of Easter Group and W of West Wallabi Islet.

5.22 Zeewyck Channel and Middle Channel, between the groups,

have a generally flat sandy bottom, with depths from 40 to

60m.

5.22 The passage between North Islet and Wallabi Group contains

many dangers; local knowledge is advised and a sharp lookout

is essential.

5.23 Wallabi Group (28°22'S., 113°42'E.) lies at the N

end of Houtman Abrolhos group; it is comprised of North Island, East Wallabi Islet, West Wallabi Islet, and several islets

and rocks, mostly connected by reefs.

5.23 North Island is on the E edge of a reef that extends 2.5 miles

N and 4.5 miles S. A light is situated on the island.

5.23 An oval-shaped bank, with a least depth of 11.4m, lies about

13 miles NW of North Island; heavy breakers have been observed on the shoal during bad weather. An isolated coral

patch, with a depth of 16.3m, lies 11 miles NNW of North Island.

5.23 East Wallabi Islet and West Wallabi Islet lie 11 miles SE and

SSE, respectively, from North Island. The islets lie in the central part of a reef about 8 miles in length N to S and a width of

12 miles. East Wallabi Islet, 15m high, has been reported to

give radar returns up to 20 miles.

5.23 North East Reef (28°25'S., 113°49'E.), awash and which often breaks, lies about 3.75 miles ENE of East Wallabi Islet.

Acute Bank, with a depth of 14.3m, lies 2 miles N of North

East Reef. Beagle Knoll, with a depth of 12.8m, and Assail

Bank, with a depth of 10.6m, lie 5 miles and 7.5 miles NW, respectively, of the reef.

5.23 Morning Reef and Noon Reef, about 4 miles ESE and SSE,

respectively, from East Wallabi Islet, form the SE extremity of

the Wallabi Group and are separated from each other by a clear

passage up to 0.5 mile wide, with depths from 35 to 42m. Broken ground extending 0.6 mile SW of the S extremity of Morning Reef constricts the width of the channel to about 0.3 mile.

5.23 Morning Reef has several islets on it and the historic wreck

of a vessel lies on its S extremity. A light is shown from Eastern Island, close to the reef’s NE extremity. Noon Reef has numerous islets and rocks on it and is separated from the reefs

joining the two Wallabi Islets by two narrow channels which

enclose a large triangular reef, the E side of the reef forming

the W boundary of a lagoon. A light is shown from Dick Island, in the reef’s S part. Evening Reef, a circular patch of

rocks, underwater and awash, which always break, is located 6

miles SSW from East Wallabi Islet and forms the S extremity

of the Wallabi Group.

5.23 Recruit Bay, protected on the W by East Wallabi Islet, affords anchorage to small vessels with local knowledge, in a

depth of 22m. The bay is encumbered by numerous coral

patches.

5.24 Easter Group (28°43'S., 113°47'E.) lies SSE of the

Wallabi Group and is separated from that group by Middle

Channel, with a least width of 6 miles between Evening Reef

and the dangers NW of Easter Group, and general depths from

42 to 60m, sand bottom in the fairway. A reported depth of

23.2m lies 4 miles ESE of Evening Reef.

5.24 Rat Island (Rat Islet) (28°43'S., 113°47'E.), about 2m high

and the largest of the Easter Group, lies nearly in the center of

a lagoon which is entered through Good Friday Bay, N of the

islet. The reefs which surround Rat Island extend about 3 miles

N of the island and about 7 miles in all other directions; the

reefs may best be seen on the chart.

5.24 Good Friday Bay, including its entrance from the N, is bordered on both sides by reefs. A steep-to 5.5m patch lies 4 miles

N of Rat Island.

5.24 Good Friday Bay is a secure anchorage, but local knowledge

is desirable. The anchorage, in 24 to 27.5m, lies about 0.35

mile NE of the jetty head on the NE side of Rat Island. There

No. 2 225m 9.6m

No. 3 225m 13.1m

No. 4 225m 13.1m

No. 5 225m 9.6m

No. 6 225m 12.2m

harbourmaster@geroport.wa.gov.au

Geraldton—Berth Characteristics

Berth Length Max. Depth
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 119

Pub. 175

are several patches in the vicinity of the anchorage and scattered throughout the navigable waters between Rat Island and

the E side of Easter Group.

5.24 Dart Shoal (28°40'S., 113°54'E.), with a depth of 7.6m, lies

1 mile E of Easter Group.

5.24 Snapper Bank (28°41'S., 114°00'E.), with a least depth of

8.2m, coral, is 5.75 miles ESE of Dart Shoal.

5.25 Pelsaert Group (Pelsart Group) (28°55'S., 113°55'E.)

is separated from the Easter Group by Zeewyk Channel, which

is about 4 miles wide in the narrowest part and has depths of 40

to 60m in the fairway. A shoal, with a least depth of 5.4m, lies

at the S side of the channel, 10 miles N of Wreck Point Light.

Shoal patches, with depths of 3.4 and 6.7m, lie 1 mile and 0.5

mile N of Wreck Point.

5.25 The main body of the Pelsaert Group is triangular in shape,

and encloses a lagoon which has its opening on the N side.

Middle Islet lies in the middle of the lagoon and Square Islet,

which is easily identified, lies 2 miles ENE of Middle Islet.

5.25 The Mangrove Islets (28°52'S., 113°59'E.) lie about 2 to 3

miles NE of Square Islet and form the E entrance to the lagoon;

they are surrounded by reefs and rocks, awash in places.

5.25 Pelsaert Islet forms the greater part of the E side of the lagoon. The islet is a narrow ridge of coral about 6 miles long,

and terminates at Wreck Point. Wreck Point Light is shown

from a white metal column.

5.25 The SW and W barrier of Pelsaert Lagoon is formed by a

narrow reef which extends about 11.5 miles NW of Wreck

Point.

5.25 Batavia Road is formed by a slight curve in the SE part of

Pelsaert Islet. Temporary anchorage, with local knowledge,

may be taken in the road, in depths of 22 to 24m, sheltered

from winds between SSE through W to about NE. A coral

patch, with a depth of 3.7m, lies 0.75 mile N of Wreck Point.

5.25 Hummock Islet (28°48'S., 114°03'E.), 9.5 miles NE of Middle Islet, has a small mound 5m high on its SE extremity; a

reef, with depths of less than 1.8m, surrounds the islet. A light

is shown on the islet.

5.25 King Reef, with depths of less than 9.1m and on which the

sea seldom breaks, lies 2.75 miles SSE of Hummock Islet; other shoal patches, some of which have been previously mentioned, lie to the E in Geelvink Channel.

5.26 Geelvink Channel (28°45'S., 114°15'E.), between

Houtman Abrolhos and the mainland, from Shoal Point to

Champion Bay, is about 30 miles wide, with depths of 19 to

48m, over a bottom of sand and shell. Mid Reef lies in the

channel 23 miles W of Point Moore Light; the reef consists of

at least two rocks awash. Another submerged rock which

breaks is located approximately 2 miles SW of Mid Reef.

There are shoal depths of 8.6, 9.1, and 10.1m 4.5 miles NNW,

1.25 miles ENE, and 3 miles WNW, respectively, from Mid

Reef. Other shoal patches in this vicinity may be seen on the

chart. Mariners are requested to navigate with caution when

passing the shellfish cultivation area, best seen on chart.

5.26 Turtle Dove Shoal (29°21'S., 114°12'E.) has a least depth of

9.1m. It is composed of coral and sand, and can be seen easily

on sunny days with clear water. Breakers, 12m high, have been

observed over the shoal, and blind rollers higher than this have

been seen on its edge. The sea breaks heavily at times on Turtle

Dove Shoal; less water than charted probably exists on this

shoal. Clio Bank, with a depth of 25.3m, lies 4 miles NNE of

this shoal.

5.26 Pelsaert Bank (29°27'S., 114°14'E.) has charted depths of

33 to 55m, coarse sand, coral and shell; it is probable that less

depths exist on the bank. The least known depth, 33m, lies 6

miles SSE of the 9.1m patch on Turtle Dove Shoal and a depth

of 29.6m lies 15 miles SSE of the 33m depth. Areas of broken

ground, rising from a general depth of 49m to a least depth of

32m, lie E of the Pelsaert Bank.

Champion Bay to Fremantle

5.27 The coast from Point Moore trends 5.5 miles SSE to

Cape Burney, which is smooth and of moderate height, then 29

miles SE to Leander Point. A conspicuous water tower stands

about 3 miles ESE of Point Moore.

5.27 From Cape Burney to Leander Point, the coast is formed of

sand hills varying from 40 to 92m high; inland there are several

scattered table-topped hills upwards of 244m high. Mount Hill,

with an elevation of 182m, stands 15.5 miles N of Leander

Point; Mount Horner, a conical peak 241m high; is 13 miles

NE of the same point.

5.27 From Point Moore to abreast Cape Burney, the shore is

fronted by reefs up to 2 miles offshore. The coastal reefs lie between 9 and 15 miles SE of Cape Burney and again from a position 20 miles SE of the cape they continue nearly to Leander

Point.

5.27 African Reef (28°58'S., 114°37'E.) lies between 5 and 7

miles S of Cape Burney. The least depth over the reef is a 2m

patch located 4 miles offshore; a patch of greater extent, with a

least depth of 2.2m, lies on the reef 1.75 miles offshore. The

sea breaks over the reef in moderate to heavy swell.

5.27 Between Point Moore and Freshwater Point, 53 miles SSE,

the coastal waters have not been fully examined inshore of the

30m curve; uncharted shoals may exist within this area and

mariners should not enter it without local knowledge.

5.27 North Bank (29°12'S., 114°52'E.) lies with its S extremity 2

miles WNW of Leander Point; from this position it extends

about 7.5 miles N and has several patches on it with depths of

less than 1.8 to 5.5m. The sea generally breaks on portions of

North Bank, especially in a swell.

5.27 Irwin Reef extends about 3 miles S from a position 3 miles

WSW of Leander Point; the sea usually breaks in places. The

reef forms the S side of Main Passage.

5.27 Leander Point (29°17'S., 114°55'E.), low and rocky, with an

elevation of 10m, lies 34 miles SSE of Champion Bay. Reefs,

which dry 0.3m with offshore winds, extend 0.3 mile NNW

from the point.

5.28 Port Denison (Dongara) (29°16'S., 114°55'E.) is a

fishing boat harbor enclosed by breakwaters close NE of Leander Point. There are two small jetties within the harbor. Depths

in the harbor range from 5.8m in the entrance to 2m in the middle. The harbor provides moorings for a crayfishing fleet, for

craft up to 25m in length. 

5.28 The approach to the harbor is made through Main Passage,

which is about 1.25 miles wide and lies between the S limit of

North Bank and the N extremity of Irwin Reef. There are

depths of 11 to 14.6m in the passage, except for an 8.8m patch
120 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

lying almost in mid-channel about 2.25 miles W of Leander

Point. Main Passage is indicated by a range. To enter the harbor

vessels pass N of Leander Point and turn onto the range, which

leads in a S direction between the breakwaters.

5.28 Anchorage may be found NE of the harbor entrance, but it is

unsafe in winter or with strong winds from NW or W. Anchorage, in 15.5m, good holding ground, may be found 1.25 miles

SW of Leander Point.

5.28 Leander Reef (29°23'S., 114°50'E.) lies about 9 miles SW

of Leander Point and about 7 miles offshore; the sea generally

breaks over it. The reef extends S for at least 1.25 miles.

5.28 From Leander Point, the coast trends S for 7.5 miles to

White Point, a bare sandy projection, then 8 miles S to Cliff

Head, 42m high, which has conspicuous dark cliffs. Freshwater

Point, 5 miles S of Cliff Head, is a limestone cliff. A light is

shown from Freshwater Point. Knobby Head, 82m high, is located 3 miles S of Freshwater Point.

5.28 An oil production platform is situated off the coast of Cliff

Head in approximate position 29°27'S, 114°52'E. 

5.28 The Beagle Islets (29°49'S., 114°52'E.), about 7.6m high, lie

SSW of Knobby Head, about 5 miles offshore. Breakers have

been reported about 2 miles NW of the two islets. It was reported that these islets are inhabited by seals and are a nature

reserve.

5.28 Caution.—From the coast opposite the Beagle Islets to

North Head, 22 miles S, numerous limestone reefs, with depths

of less than 1m, extend up to 3 miles offshore.

5.28 A dangerous wreck lies about 0.8 mile SSW of the islets.

5.29 From Knobby Head (29°40'S., 114°58'E.) to Green

Head, 24 miles S, the coast recedes a little and is lower. About

6 miles SE of Knobby Head is Woodada Hill (Wudada Hill),

98m high, the N end of a range 12 miles in length with a hill

106m high, near its S extremity. To the S of this range, the hills

join those E of Jurien Bay. The coast for about 16 miles N of

Green Head is low and cliffy; Green Head is a round grassytopped hillock, 29m high. Snag Islet, 6m high, lies 8 miles N of

Green Head and close offshore. Drummond Rock, above water,

lies 0.5 mile S of Snag Islet. A range shown at Leeman indicates a passage between Snag Islet and Drummond Rock.

5.29 Anchorage.—Green Head Anchorage, which is well-protected, is located about 1 mile N of Green Head. The approach

is indicated by two ranges and has a least depth of 3.1m. There

is a jetty, with a refueling dolphin at the anchorage, which is

used by fishing vessels.

5.29 The Fisherman Islets (30°08'S., 114°57'E.), 10m high, lie

nearly 3 miles offshore, 4 miles S of Green Head. The tops of

the islets are covered with grass and scrub.

5.29 There is a remarkable sandy patch midway between Green

Head and Sandy Point, 7 miles S. The coast for about 1.5 miles

S of Sandy Point consists of bare ridges, terminating in a slight

sandy projection. There are three indentations between Sandy

Point and North Head, 3 miles to the S.

5.29 North Head (30°14'S., 115°00'E.), 21m high, is the N entrance to Jurien Bay. Middle Head, 15.5m high, is in the center

of the bay, 3 miles SE of North Head. The hills S of Middle

Head become much lower and the shore trends gradually round

to Island Point, 4.5m high, the S extremity of the bay.

5.30 Mount Peron (30°07'S., 115°09'E.), 275m high, and

Mount Lesueur, 309m high, are two conspicuous table-topped

mountains located 10 miles NE and ENE, respectively, of

North Head. Mount Benia, 14 miles E of North Head, is 257m

high.

5.30 The coast from Leander Point to Jurien Bay is encumbered

by rocks and reefs extending to 7 miles offshore.

5.30 Jurien Bay (30°17'S., 115°01'E.) is entered between North

Head and Island Point, 5.5 miles SSE; it is protected on its S

and SW sides by several islets and reefs which extend up to 4

miles offshore. North Tail is the N extremity of a rocky ledge,

awash, which lies 2.5 miles SSW of North Head. A shoal,

which breaks in a heavy swell, lies about 1 mile NE of North

Tail.

5.30 Seaward Ledge, which dries, lies 2 miles S of North Tail;

submerged rocks, with a least depth of 2.7m, on which the sea

breaks at uncertain intervals, extend 1.5 miles S of Seaward

Ledge. Favorite Island, 14m high, is located 2.25 miles NNW

of Island Point, about 2 miles offshore.

5.30 Boullanger Island (Long Island) (30°19'S., 115°00'E.), 7m

high, lies 0.75 mile W of Island Point. The island is covered

with grass and scrub. An islet, 10m high, lies close off the N

extremity.

5.30 Whitlock Island, 9m high at its S end, lies 0.25 mile SW of

Boullanger Island, to which it is joined at low water. Tern Islet,

3.7m high, lies 0.3 mile N of Whitlock Island; foul ground,

with some drying patches, extends from the islet NNE to Favorite Island.

5.30 Anchorage can be obtained in Jurien Bay, in a depth of 9m,

about 0.75 mile NE of Favorite Island, sand and rock. A rock

has been reported to lie about 0.5 mile NNE of the same island.

Anchorage within the bar is available to vessels of not more

than 3.6m draft, about 1.25 miles ESE of Favorite Island, in a

depth of 11m. Lights, in range bearing 111.5°, are situated on

shore about 0.7 mile SSE of Middle Head; the approach to the

anchorages should be made on this range.

5.30 Jurien Boat Harbor is situated about 0.75 mile S of the front

range light and is protected by breakwaters. Range lights situated in the SW corner of the harbor lead over the sand bar

which fronts the harbor entrance.

5.31 From Jurien Bay, the coast trends SSE about 42 miles

to Lancelin Islet, which is 16m high, and covered with grass;

the islet lies about 0.5 mile offshore.

5.31 There are several conspicuous hills on this coast, the most

prominent being Molah Hill, 64m high, located 5.5 miles SSE

of Island Point. About 1 mile further SSE there is a bare sand

hill, with a dome-shaped top, 57m high. Cowalla Peak (North

Namban Flat), a conical hill, 241m high, lies about 13 miles

ESE of Island Point.

5.31 Thirsty Point (30°31'S., 115°03'E.) is a low scrubby point

located 12 miles S of Island Point. The land E of Thirsty Point

rises suddenly, and about 2 miles inland, SE of the point, there

is a long range of sandhills, with two remarkable dark bushy

summits, North and South Hummocks, 120m and 121m high,

respectively, near the S end. From near South Hummock, the

ridges continue SSE for about 11 miles, covered with grass and

shrub, the highest point, 157m high, being 5.5 miles SSE of

South Hummock. A conspicuous sand patch lies 1 mile NNE

of North Hummock.

5.31 A prominent sandy point is located about 20 miles S of
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 121

Pub. 175

Thirsty Point; from this sandy point an extensive tract of bare

sand stretches along the coast for about 6 miles, extending inland about 3 miles to a sand ridge that attains a height of 133m.

There are several conspicuous sand patches in this locality.

5.31 The coastal waters S of Jurien Bay are encumbered with

many rocks and reefs; the shoals lie up to 3 miles offshore,

from Island Point to Lancelin Islet.

5.31 Escape Island (30°20'S., 115°00'E.), 12m high, lies 2 miles

WSW of Island Point, and is covered with grass and scrub. A

light, shown from a 24m high metal framework tower, is situated near the center of the island.

5.31 Caution.—A local magnetic anomaly was observed in a position 8 miles WNW of Escape Island.

5.32 The Cervantes Islets (30°32'S., 115°02'E.) lie close

off Thirsty Point; reefs extend 1.5 miles W from them. Several

above-water rocks and ledges, which dry, extend 5 miles NW

from Thirsty Point; the outer rock lies 5 miles offshore. 

5.32 Ronsard Bay is 1.75 miles NNE of Thirsty Point; boats may

land there in moderate weather. A range is shown from the

head of the bay which has a least depth of 3m up to about 1.25

miles from the front range light.

5.32 A rock, 2m high, lies 4 miles S of the Cervantes Islets, about

2 miles offshore.

5.32 The Green Islets (30°41'S., 115°06'E.), two in number, lie

10 miles SSE of the Cervantes Islets and 1.75 miles offshore.

Red Rock, 3m high, lies 1.5 miles SE of the Green Islets; from

it a chain of reefs extend SSE to a position 0.5 mile from

Wedge Islet. Flat Rock, 4.25 miles NNW of Wedge Islet and

0.5 mile offshore, is 12m high.

5.32 Wedge Islet (30°50'S., 115°11'E.), 21m high, is perpendicular on its S side, but slopes gradually N; in fine weather, landing can be made on the NE side of the islet. The inshore waters

between Wedge Islet and the approaches to Fremantle have

been incompletely surveyed and caution should be exercised

accordingly. A tower, from which fixed red obstruction lights

are occasionally shown, stands on the mainland, about 2.5

miles ESE of Wedge Island.

5.32 Numerous beacons and towers, some of which carry red obstruction lights, stand up to 2 miles inshore within an area

which extends 8 miles SSE from Wedge Island.

5.32 Lancelin Islet (31°00'S., 115°19'E.), 17m high and covered

with grass, lies 13 miles SSE of Wedge Islet, 0.5 mile offshore;

on its E side there is a small sandy beach which affords safe

landing.

5.32 Lancelin Islet Anchorage Range Lights are situated on the

mainland about 1 mile NE of the islet. These lights are in

range, bearing 075.5°. The anchorage should only be used by

vessels with local knowledge. There are three small jetties at

Lancelin, about 0.5 mile SE of Lancelin Islet. A military exercise area is situated along the coast N of Lancelin.

5.32 There is a fairly constant S or SE current, from about 30°S,

past Cape Leeuwin. Strong variable currents are reported from

20 to 27 miles offshore between the Cervantes Islets and Lancelin Islet. These currents average from 2 to 3 knots and set in

various directions, but the SE direction predominates.

5.33 From Lancelin Islet to Trigg Islet, 57 miles SSE,

rocks and reefs extend to 5 miles offshore. Sand dunes, 15 to

30m high, extend 3 miles SSE along the coast from a point 1

mile N of Lancelin Islet. Within the coast, 1.5 miles SE of Lancelin Islet, the high ridges are covered with grass and scrub, attaining a height of 138m, 5 miles inland. 

5.33 Edward Islet, 5.5 high, lies 1.5 miles S of Lancelin Islet and

about 0.15 mile offshore. Numerous rocky ledges, most of

them awash, lie between Edward Islet and Ledge Point, 5.5

miles SSE.

5.33 Ledge Point (31°07'S., 115°22'E.) lies about 7 miles SE of

Lancelin Islet; a hill with a height of 59m, is located 3 miles SE

of the point. Range lights are shown from a position about 0.5

mile SE of Ledge Point and lead through a gap in the coastal

reef to an anchorage. Conspicuous water towers, 37m and 42m

high, stand 0.3 mile ESE and 0.65 mile NE, respectively, of

Ledge Point.

5.33 A dangerous wreck lies about 10 miles WSW of Ledge

Point.

5.33 Cape Leschenault (31°17'S., 115°27'E.), 11 miles SSE of

Ledge Point, appears as a dark bluff when seen from S; about 5

miles within the cape the hills reach a height of 65m. A sand

patch, 44m high, stands 3 miles SSE of the cape and there is a

conspicuous sand patch, 71m high, 3.75 miles farther SSE; the

Moore River flows out between these two patches. A range

marking a passage through the reef is situated on the cape; a

light is shown from a position on the coast about 3 miles SSE

of the cape.

5.33 Wreck Point (31°30'S., 115°35'E.) is located 10 miles S of

the Moore River; a range marks the passage which leads to the

marina. From Wreck Point the coast trends SSE 24 miles to

Trigg Islet; the intervening coast is backed by sand hills which

attain a height of 61m. Some conspicuous tanks stand about 4.5

miles SE of Wreck Point.

5.33 Leschenault Reef (31°17'S., 115°20'E.) lies from 6 to 7

miles W of Cape Leschenault; the sea only breaks over the reef

in a heavy swell. The coastal reefs, with depths of less than

1.8m, extend nearly 3 miles off the mouth of the Moore River,

about 6 miles SE of Leschenault Reef.

5.33 Direction Bank, with depths of 19 to 37m, is located with its

least depth about 17 miles WSW of Wreck Point. A depth of

24m lies at the SE extremity of the bank.

5.33 Eglinton Rocks (31°38'S., 115°39'E.), 2m high, lie close

offshore 9 miles S of Wreck Point; reefs, with depths of less

than 1.8m, extend up to 3 miles offshore between Wreck Point

and Eglinton Rocks. A conspicuous stranded wreck lies about

1 mile N of Eglinton Rocks.

5.33 Wanneru Beach, lying 3.25 miles SE of Eglinton Rocks, has

a small craft harbor. The approach from the SW is indicated by

a range.

5.34 Mullaloo Point (31°48'S., 115°43'E.) lies about 7.75

miles S of Wanneru Beach. Little Islet, 2.4m high, lies 1 mile

off Mullaloo Point. Reefs with depths of less than 1.8m, extend

up to 2.5 miles W, in the vicinity of Mullaloo Point, and continue S at the same distance offshore, for about 4 miles to Trigg

Islet.

5.34 A small craft harbor, with depths of 1.5m and protected by

breakwaters, is situated about 3 miles N of Mullaloo Point; the

approaches from NW and SW are indicated by ranges. A small

craft harbor lies about 1 mile SSE of Mullaloo Point.

5.34 A submarine cable extends in a W direction from a point on

the shore about 0.5 mile NE of Mullaloo Point; a prohibited an-
122 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

chorage area, extending 0.3 mile each side of the cable, is indicated by beacons on the shore.

5.34 Trigg Islet (31°53'S., 115°44'E.) is 5m high and connected

with the mainland at low water. A conspicuous building is situated near the shore, about 1 mile S of Trigg Islet. A prominent

water tower, 82m high, stands on a hill 1.25 miles E of Trigg

Islet and a radio mast, 178m high, stands 2.5 miles NE of the

water tower. Centaur Reef lies 2 miles WNW of Trigg Islet and

is marked by a lighted beacon.

5.34 From Trigg Islet to Cape Leeuwin, about 151 miles SSW, the

coast trends in a general S direction to Cape Bouvard, then

SSW to Cape Naturaliste, then S to Cape Leeuwin. The principal port, Fremantle, is situated about 11 miles S of Trigg Islet.

The port is protected on the W by Rottnest Island, Garden Island, and the reefs and rocks which lie between the two islands.

5.34 From Trigg Islet to Cape Peron, about 24 miles SSW, the

coast is indented by Gage Roads and Cockburn Sound, which

recede about 18 miles in a S direction from their entrance between Rottnest Island on the W and the mainland on the E.

5.34 Reabold Hill, 84m high, is located about 4 miles SSE of

Trigg Islet. The coast extending about 10 miles S from Trigg

Islet to the entrance of Fremantle Inner Harbor is generally low

and sandy.

Approaches to Fremantle

5.35 Rottnest Island (32°00'S., 115°30'E.) is located

about 10 miles WNW of Fremantle and is a good mark when

making for that port. Rottnest Island has been reported to be a

good radar target when approaching from the NW. The island

is 5.5 miles in length E to W and 2.5 miles at its widest point N

to S. The island is surrounded with rocks and shoals extending

for a distance of up to 1.5 miles. Rottnest Island Light is shown

from a white masonry tower situated in about the middle of the

island. Two prominent windmills are situated about 0.75 mile

ENE of the light structure. An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated at the E side of the island. Between November and June

lighted fish aggregating devices are deployed at charted sites.

Mariners are requested not to navigate through the area during

this period. 

5.35 Cape Vlaming (32°02'S., 115°27'E.), the W extremity of

Rottnest Island, is a narrow cliffy point 37m high. Submerged

rocks, the outer rock having depths of less than 1.8m, extend

up to 0.5 mile WSW of the cape; depths of 18.3m lie 0.1 mile

beyond the rock. A light is shown from Cape Vlaming.

5.35 Caution.—Unexploded ordnance lies in an area, with a radius of 0.25 mile, centered about 17.5 and 20 miles NW of Cape

Vlaming, in depths of 100m and 120m, respectively.

Reproduced with permission of the Rottnest Island Authority

Rottnest Island from S

Courtesy of Sophia M. McHarney and Malcom Macdonald’s Lighthouses of Australia Page

Bathurst Point Light
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 123

Pub. 175

5.36 The NW coast of Rottnest Island from Cape Vlaming

to North Point, 4 miles ENE, is skirted by Horse Shoe Reefs

and other rocky ledges, many of which dry, extending up to

0.85 mile offshore. Horse Shoe Reefs consist of several rocks,

with depths of 2.1 to 3.7m. About 2 miles offshore, N of Horse

Shoe Reefs, there are several patches with depths of 16 to 18m;

during heavy N and W gales there is a confused and dangerous

sea on these patches.

5.36 North Point Reef, with a depth of 13.8m, lies 1 mile NW of

North Point; the sea breaks on the reef in bad weather.

5.36 Bathurst Point (31°59'S., 115°32'E.), 1.5 miles E of North

Point, is the NE extremity of the island. A light is shown from

a gray stone structure on the point. Duck Rock, 5m high, stands

about 0.1 mile N of Bathurst Point; a lighted beacon is situated

on the rock.

5.36 Two small craft jetties are situated in Thomson Bay, about

0.5 mile S of Bathurst Point; ranges mark the approaches to the

jetties.

5.36 Caution.—Unexploded ordnance lies in an area, with a radius of 0.25 mile, centered about 1.5 miles N of Bathurst Point,

in a depth of about 15m.

5.37 Roe Reef, with a least depth of 4m, lies 1 mile N of

Bathurst Point. A rock, with a depth of 6.1m, lies 0.15 mile SW

of Roe Reef. Between Roe Reef and the N side of Rottnest Island, there are a number of detached shoals with depths of less

than 11m. Depths of 17.7 to 18.9m lie up to 1.5 miles N of Roe

Reef.

5.37 Phillip Point (32°00'S., 115°34'E.), the E extremity of Rottnest Island, is 16m high and is formed of scrubby hillocks. A

light shown from a red beacon is situated on Phillip Rock,

about 0.25 mile NNW of Phillip Point.

5.37 Kingston Reefs, consisting of numerous rocks, a sand bank

awash, and several drying rocks, lie on a bank with depths of

less than 5.5m, which extends about 1.25 miles offshore between Bathurst Point and Phillip Point. Kingston Spit, with

depths of 9.1m, extends 2 miles ENE from the coast between

Bathurst Point and Phillip Point; a 4.6m patch lies 1.25 miles

NE of Phillip Point. Kingston Reefs is marked by a lighted

beacon standing about 0.5 mile N of Phillip Point; Kingston

Spit is indicated by a lighted buoy moored about 1.5 miles

ENE of Bathurst Point.

5.37 Parker Point (32°02'S., 115°32'E.), the S extremity of Rottnest Island, is a round bare head, 24m high, connected with the

shore by a low narrow ledge of rock; when seen from the E or

W, it appears detached. From the point to Cape Vlaming, 4

miles W, the coast of the island is fronted by a reef and by numerous rocks extending to the 10m curve, which lies up to 0.75

mile offshore in places. The outermost danger off Parker Point

is a 5.5m rocky patch about 0.45 mile SSW of the point.

5.37 Strickland Bay and Salmon Bay lie between Cape Vlaming

and Parker Point; both are foul and rocky.

5.37 Mount Herschell, 34m high, and Tree Hill, 38m high, with a

conspicuous tower on it, stand 2 miles and 0.5 mile N, respectively, of Parker Point.

5.37 Dyer Islet (Direction Islet) (32°01'S., 115°33'E.), 14m high,

is located in Porpoise Bay, 1.25 miles ENE of Parker Point.

5.37 Porpoise Bay is entered between Parker Point and Bickley

Point, 1.5 miles NE.

5.37 Duffield Ridge (32°02'S., 115°28'E.), a narrow ledge of

rock, on which the sea breaks in heavy gales, has a least depth

of 16.4m and lies 1 mile SE of Cape Vlaming and 0.75 mile

offshore.

5.38 Pilot Reef (32°00'S., 115°35'E.), a rocky ledge with a

least depth of 3m, lies about 1 mile ESE of Phillip Point, on the

coastal bank which extends about 6 miles E of Rottnest Island.

Other dangers lie S of Pilot Reef on the coastal bank.

5.38 Middle Bank, with a least depth of 3.6m, lies 0.75 mile S of

Pilot Reef. Jackson Rock, with a least depth of 3m, lies 0.4

mile S of Middle Bank, on the N side of South Passage. Nineteen Feet Rock, which has two heads with a depth of 5.5m, lies

on the N side of South Passage, 0.75 mile ENE of Jackson

Rock.

5.38 From Middle Bank and the dangers in the vicinity, a reef,

through which there are a few passages, extends SSE to the N

end of Garden Island.

5.38 Champion Rock (32°02'S., 115°36'E.), with a depth of less

than 1.8m, lies near the center of a shoal with depths of less

than 5.5m, about 0.65 mile SSE of Jackson Rock. There are

some patches, with depths of 1 to 5.5m, between Champion

Rock and the N end of Straggler Reefs.

5.38 South Passage (32°02'S., 115°35'E.) leads into Gage Road S

of Rottnest Island, and is 0.5 mile wide between Nineteen Feet

Rock and the shallow patches extending NW from Champion

Rock. The passage is indicated by a range, which has a least

depth of 7.9m on the line, although the swell in this area limits

the passage to non-commercial vessels with a maximum draft

of 5m. This passage is not recommended.

5.38 Straggler Reefs (32°04'S., 115°38'E.), with numerous rocky

ledges, some of which dry, extend, with depths of less than

5.5m, from 1 to 3 miles SSW from Champion Rock.

5.38 Straggler Rocks (32°04'S., 115°38'E.), consisting of several

pointed rocks, the largest and highest of which is 12m high, are

located 5.5 miles SE of Phillip Point.

5.38 Straggler Channel lies between the SE end of Straggler

Reefs and the W end of Success Bank; it should only be used

with local knowledge.

5.38 The Roarers (32°06'S., 115°39'E.), rocks with depths of less

than 1.8m, lie 2.5 miles S of Straggler Rocks; there are many

dangers on the reefs which extend S from Straggler Rocks to

the N end of Garden Island, that may best be seen on the chart.

5.38 Carnac Island (32°07'S., 115°40'E.), 17m high, is located 2

miles N of Beacon Head, the NE extremity of Garden Island.

Submerged reefs and foul ground extend 0.5 mile W, almost

connecting it with the rocky ridge which extends N to The

Roarers.

5.39 Garden Island (32°12'S., 115°41'E.), which forms

the W side of Cockburn Sound, is about 5.5 miles in length N

to S; its W side, which is described here, is bordered with reefs

extending 0.2 to 0.4 mile from the shore. Entrance Point is the

NW extremity of the island.

5.39 The hills on the W side of the island rise abruptly from the

beach to a height of 56m, and are covered with grass and bushes. A light is shown from the W central portion of the island.

5.39 Careening Bay (32°14'S., 115°42'E.) lies on the S tip of

Garden Island between Colpoys Point and Parkin Point. The

bay is approximately 1 mile across, with a depth of 14m at its

center. 
124 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

5.39 Collie Head, the S extremity of Garden Island, is 19m high.

Foul ground extends about 0.45 mile SE from Collie Head.

Collie Ledge, with a depth of less than 2m, lies about 0.2 mile

SE of Collie Head and is marked by a beacon.

5.39 Southern Flats (32°15'S., 115°42'E.) extend about 1.75

miles ESE of Collie Head and S to John Point, the N extremity

of Cape Peron on the mainland. The flats are steep-to on their

NE and SE sides; with a heavy W or SW swell, the sea breaks

heavily on the flats.

5.39 A causeway has been constructed across Southern Flats from

a position on the coast 0.75 mile SE of John Point, N to Garden

Island. There are two gaps in the causeway, about 0.3 mile and

1.5 miles from its S end, each spanned by a bridge; the vertical

clearance under the N bridge is 12m.

5.39 Minstrel Channel, about 40m in width and about 2.9m deep

in 1989, has been dredged across Southern Flats under the N

bridge of the causeway. The channel is subject to silting and to

heavy swells in bad weather. In fine weather it can be used by

small vessels with local knowledge, however, the water level is

erratic and governed by weather conditions.

5.39 An area within 0.1 mile on either side of the causeway and

an area on the N and E sides of Garden Island have been declared Naval Waters.

5.39 Caution.—Five Fathom Bank extends S from a position

about 4 miles SE of Parker Point (32°02'S., 115°32'E.), for a

distance of 16 miles. The bank lies 2.5 miles to the W of Garden Island and the reefs which extend N from Garden Island.

There are a number of patches on the bank with depths less

than 1m.

5.39 Seaward Reef, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies on the

bank about 4 miles NW of Entrance Point; isolated shoals, with

depths of 4.6 to 8.5m, continue 2 miles S to Casuarina Shoal.

5.39 Casuarina Shoal, with a least depth of 3m, and Hawley

Shoal, with a least depth of 4.9m, are located on the bank about

3 miles W and 3 miles WSW, respectively, of Entrance Point.

5.39 Between Hawley Shoal and Coventry Reef, 10 miles S, the

patches on the bank are more scattered and have depths of 5.5

to 8.5m, except 3 miles N of Coventry Reef, where there is a

rock with a depth of 4.6m. Other shallow areas may exist on

the ridge and vessels should avoid crossing it.

5.39 Coventry Reef (32°20'S., 115°38'E.) consists of a small

group of rocks, which dries about 0.9m, over which the sea always breaks; it is surrounded by submerged rocks extending

0.1 to 0.2 mile from it.

5.39 The extent of Five Fathom Bank S of Coventry Reef has not

been defined.

5.39 There is a passage across Five Fathom Bank, with the obelisk S of Woodman Point Light in line with Entrance Rocks, off

Entrance Point which leads between Casuarina and Hawley

Shoals, through a least charted depth of 8.5m.

5.40 Gage Roads (32°02'S., 115°41'E.), in the approach to

Fremantle, are protected from W and S by Rottnest Island and

the reefs and shoals between it and Garden Island, as well as

Success Bank, but the roads are open to N and NW winds.

5.40 The coastal waters NE of Gage Roads are bordered by a

bank, with depths of less than 11m, extending up to 1.5 miles

offshore.

5.40 North Rock (31°58'S., 115°44'E.), with a depth of 7.4m, lies

1.25 miles offshore, 5.5 miles N of the North Mole; a 6.1m

patch lies 0.5 mile N of North Rock. A group of shoals, with a

least depth of 5.8m, and another group, with a least depth of

8.2m, lie 3 miles NNW and 2.5 miles WNW, respectively, from

North Rock.

5.40 Hall Bank (32°02'S., 115°43'E.), a rocky patch with a least

depth of 5.4m, lies 1.75 miles NW of the North Mole and is

marked on its W side by a lighted beacon.

5.40 The approach to Gage Roads from sea is open and readily

accessible for ships in all weathers; the entrance between Rottnest Island and the off-lying dangers is about 8 miles wide.

5.40 Beagle Rocks (32°04'S., 115°44'E.), which are foul and on

which submerged wrecks lie, are located about 0.4 mile SW of

the South Mole; these rocks are marked by a lighted beacon.

An area of foul ground, best seen on the chart, exists in the vicinity of Beagle Rocks.

5.40 Minden Reefs (32°03'S., 115°43'E.), with a least depth of

3.6m, lie 0.5 mile S of the head of North Mole.

5.40 Other dangers lie in the approaches, but are in general clear

of the entrance channels and best seen on the chart.

Fremantle (32°03'S., 115°44'E.)

World Port Index No. 54520

5.41 Fremantle, the chief commercial port in W Australia,

is situated on the S side of the entrance to the Swan River, on a

low sandy flat connecting Arthur Head with the mainland.

Perth, the capital of Western Australia, lies 11 miles upriver.

The port has facilities for handling bulk cargo, general cargo,

petroleum products, crew ships, containers, and ro-ro traffic.

5.41 The port of Fremantle consists of an outer harbor and an inner harbor. The outer harbor is comprised of Gage Roads,

Owens Anchorage, and Cockburn Sound. Gage Roads is accessible to most classes of vessels; the other two are only available

for vessels which can negotiate the dredged channels across

Success Bank and Parmelia Bank. The inner harbor consists of

Rous Head Harbor, the North Quay, and Victoria Quay.

Wind—Weather

5.41 The prevailing winds are from the SW. The barometer is a

good indicator of the weather as a general rule, rising with S

winds and falling with N winds. Gales generally commence

from N and rapidly shift W with a falling barometer.

Tides—Currents

5.41 The water level in Fremantle is erratic, being almost entirely

governed by the weather. Before and after W gales, a high level

of about 1.2m is maintained for possibly 6 days. In the summer

months, especially during E weather, a very low level may be

experienced for the same period. Tides normally range from

0.5 to 0.9m.

5.41 It was reported that after a period of heavy rains, the Swan

River produced a strong freshet in Fremantle Harbor. This curFremantle Port Authority Home Page

http://www.freport.wa.gov.au
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 125

Pub. 175

rent set obliquely onto Berth No. 8 and Berth No. 9 at about 5

knots, then parallel with the jetties, then strongly out of the harbor entrance.

5.41 In the approach channel from Gage Roads, the current ran

out of the harbor at about 4 or 5 knots, setting to the SW when

clear of South Mole.

5.41 In Gage Roads, the N current runs for about 10 hours while

the S current runs for about 14 hours; the rate is usually small,

but may be as much as 2 knots in unsettled weather in the winter months.

Depths—Limitations

5.41 Inner Harbor.—The Inner Harbor of Fremantle is an artificial harbor constructed within the estuary of the Swan River.

The entrance to Inner Harbor is a short channel having a depth

of 13m, and is protected by two rubble moles extending WSW

from the mainland.

5.41 The fully-protected inner harbor is safe for ships all year.

Rous Head Harbor, a commercial boat harbor and industrial

park, is entered from the S side of the North Mole to the Inner

Harbor. The depth in the S part of the harbor is maintained to

6m. 

5.41 The North Quay has number designations from 1 through 12,

beginning from the W. This quay extends 2,216m in length; the

ro-ro facilities are situated at Berth No. 11 and Berth No. 12.

Two container terminal covers berths 4 through 10. The declared depths along the North Quay run from 13 to 11m.

5.41 The berths at Victoria Quay are lettered A through J from the

entrance; the total length is 1,643m. The Fremantle Passenger

Terminal is situated at Berth F and Berth G. The declared

depths along Victoria Quay run from 13 to 11m.

5.41 The Swan River, at the head of Inner Harbor, is spanned by

three bridges with a minimum clearance under the lowest of

7.6m; a channel, marked by lighted beacons and piles, extends

about 11 miles up the river to Perth and is used by small craft.

5.41 A fishing harbor, enclosed by breakwaters, lies along the

shore close S of Inner Harbor. There are general depths within

the harbor from 2.4 to 4.6m.

5.41 Success Yacht Harbor has been constructed immediately S

of Fishing Boat Harbor. The harbor is enclosed by a curving

breakwater and has depths from 2.3 to 3.7m. Yacht marker

buoys are moored within 3 miles of the entrance.

Courtesy of Fremantle Ports

Fremantle—Inner Harbor
126 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

5.41 Owen Anchorage.—From Fremantle, the shore to Owen

Anchorage is low and sandy, trending S to Woodman Point

which is only a few feet above sea level. A light is shown from

a stone tower standing on a hill about 1 mile E of Woodman

Point.

5.41 Owen Anchorage, W of the coast between Catherine Point, 2

miles S of Fremantle, and Woodman Point, lies between

Success Bank on the N and Parmelia Bank on the S.

5.41 Success Bank, with depths of less than 5m, extends 5.5 miles

W from Catherine Point. The bank is composed of sand and

weeds, with rocky patches; depths on the bank vary from time

to time. Rowboat Rock, 4m high, and Mewstone, 16m high, lie

on the SW side of Success Bank.

5.41 There are a number of rocks and shoal areas in Owen Anchorage which may best be seen on the chart.

5.41 There is a special berth, Woodman Point Jetty, provided for

loading and unloading explosives, and is used exclusively for

this purpose. The jetty, which lies about 1 mile NE of Woodman Point, has a length of 61m, with depths of 5.2 to 7.9m

alongside.

5.41 Owen Anchorage is approached by a channel dredged

through Success Bank, which has a dredged depth of 14.7m

and a bottom width of 152m. The channel is marked by lighted

buoys and beacons and indicated by a range.

5.41 The quarantine station jetty is situated close within the N

side of Woodman Point.

5.41 Cockburn Sound.—The sound is formed between Garden

Island, on the W, and the mainland and is sheltered from the N

by Parmelia Bank.

5.41 Challenger Passage Range Lights, situated 0.75 mile N of

Courtesy of Fremantle Port Authority

Fremantle—Inner Harbor—Rous Head

Courtesy of Fremantle Port Authority

Fremantle—Outer Harbor—Kwinana Bulk Terminal Berth No. 2
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 127

Pub. 175

Garden Island, lead between the dangers lying between Carnac

Island and Garden Island into Cockburn Sound. These lights,

in line bearing 109°30', lead through Challenger Passage passing between two lighted buoys moored close N of Challenger

Courtesy of Fremantle Port Authority

Fremantle—Outer Harbor—Kwinana Oil Refinery Jetty

Courtesy of Fremantle Port Authority

Fremantle—Outer Harbor—Kwinana Bulk Jetty Berth 3 and Berth 4
128 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

Rock; then between Flat Ledge and Stag Rocks and over Pinnacle Rocks, in a least depth of 5.2m

5.41 Parmelia Bank separates Owen Anchorage from Cockburn

Sound and extends W from Woodman Point to beyond Carmac

Island. There are depths of 1.5 to 4.9m on the bank. There are

shoal patches 1.5 and 2.25 miles WNW of Woodman Point

which break heavily in a W swell.

5.41 Parmelia Bank Channel, 152m wide and dredged to 14.7m,

leads S from Owen Anchorage, across Parmelia Bank to Cockburn Sound. It is in line with, and forms a continuation of, Success Bank Channel. The channel is marked by lighted buoys

and beacons and is indicated by a range. 

5.41 East shore of Cockburn Sound.—From Woodman Point, a

ridge extends about 5 miles S to James Point, parallel with the

coast and 1.5 miles from it; there are shallow patches with

depths of 2.1 to 4.9m on the ridge. There are depths of 10m in

Jervoise Bay, close S of Woodman Point, and about 2 miles

NNE of James Point.

5.41 There are several passages over the submerged ridge, but

vessels with a draft of more than 3m, without local knowledge,

should use only Woodman Channel, Calista Channel, or

Stirling Channel.

5.41 It was reported (2002) that significant changes associated

with Jervoise Bay Development have been made to the navigation aids in the Medina Channel. Mariners are advised to navigate with caution in the area.

5.41 Woodman Channel, leading to Jervoise Bay, is entered

between two lighted beacons near the edge of the charted 10m

curve, about 2.25 miles SW of Woodman Point Light; the

beacons are about 125m apart. A directional sector light, for

night use only, is shown from Woodman Point Light. A

breakwater extends in a curve about 0.4 mile NW from a

position on the shore 1.5 miles SE of Woodman Point. 

5.41 Each jetty on the E side of the sound has been designed and

constructed for a specific purpose. Alumina Refinery Jetty is

situated about 2 miles NNE of James Point; the jetty has a

berth 334m in length with a depth of 11.6m alongside. The approach to the berth is by Stirling Channel and Calista Channel,

which are dredged to a depth of 11.6m and indicated by ranges.

5.41 The Kwinana Bulk Terminal, situated about 0.75 mile NE of

James Point, is approached by Stirling Channel. The North

Jetty (Kwinana Bulk Berth 1) has a length of 195m, with a

depth of 11m alongside. This berth is not currently in use

(2002). The South Jetty (Kwinana Bulk Berth 2) has a length

of 268m, with a depth of 12.2m alongside, and is an operating

berth.

5.41 Kwinana Oil Refining Jetty is situated about 0.5 mile S of

James Point. Three berths are situated parallel with the shore;

mooring dolphins extend the length of the jetty at either end.

Each jetty has an alongside depth of 14.7m, and can accommodate vessels up to 270m long; however; the channel depth restricts the allowable deep draft to 12.6m. The approach to the

jetty is indicated by a range.

5.41 A restricted area, shown on the chart, is situated in the vicinity of the Kwinana Oil Refinery Jetty; unauthorized vessels are

not permitted within the area.

5.41 Kwinana Bulk Jetty, about 0.5 mile S of Kwinana Oil Refinery Jetty, has a jetty head 480m long, with 13.4m alongside.

The jetty has two berths. Kwinana Bulk Berth 3 is the N berth.

The other berth is Kwinana Bulk Berth 4.

5.41 Kwinana Grain Jetty is situated about 1 mile SW of the Kwinana Bulk Jetty. The jetty head is 291m long with a dredged

depth of 16.8m alongside.

5.41 Mangles Bay (32°16'S., 115°43'E.), in the S part of Cockburn Sound, is protected from W and N by Cape Peron and

Southern Flats extending from Cape Peron to Garden Island.

5.41 Fleet Base West, a facility for naval vessels, is situated W of

Colpoys Point, in the N part of Careening Bay (32°14'S.,

115°42'E.), on the SE side of Garden Island. Two lighted

mooring buoys are situated in the NW approaches, 500m NE

and SE of Colpoys Point respectively.

5.41 There are two piers at Colpoys Point; the E pier has a depth

Courtesy of Fremantle Port Authority

Fremantle—Outer Harbor—Kwinana Grain Jetty
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 129

Pub. 175

of 11m alongside and the W pier has a depth of 9.8m alongside. An angled breakwater extends 0.15 mile E and NE from

Colpoys Point.

5.41 An armament jetty extends 430m from the shore at a point

about 0.25 mile S of Dance Head (32°10'S., 115°40'E.); an area S of the jetty is reportedly dredged to 10.5m.

5.41 When ships draw 9.2m and over, a clearance of 10 per cent

of the draft is required in transit of the channels.

5.41 Range lights, in line bearing 169°, situated in Cockburn

Sound, lead through the channels dredged through Success

Bank and Parmelia Bank; the channels are marked by lighted

beacons and lighted buoys. In addition, the range beacons exhibit lights visible from S, which, in line astern, lead to the

tanker anchorage and jetties in the S part of the sound. These

channels are dredged to a depth of 14.7m.

Aspect 

5.41 The coast NNE to SSE of the Inner Harbor is low and sandy,

and backed by a ridge of scrubby limestone hillocks in the SE

sector.

5.41 Fairway Landfall Lighted Buoy, equipped with a racon, is

moored about 7.25 miles NW of the entrance to Inner Harbor.

A directional sector light is situated about 2.5 miles NE of the

north mole.

5.41 Conspicuous landmarks within the vicinity of the Inner Harbor include a white obelisk, 71m high, standing on Buckland

Hill, about 3 miles NE of the harbor entrance; a large silo situated about 1 mile NE of the root of North Mole; and the signal

mast of the Port Authority Building standing about, 0.5 mile E

of the head of South Mole. Buckland Hill Directional Light

makes a fine visual aid on approaches to the harbor.

5.41 A war memorial standing on the summit of Church Hill, 62m

high, about 1 mile E of the harbor entrance, is also very prominent.

5.41 Other conspicuous landmarks include a group of the windmills, 66m high, standing about 2.5 miles SSE of the harbor

entrance; a white obelisk standing on a ridge with a windmill

close N, about 0.75 mile S of Woodman Point Light; a chimney, 76m high, standing about 2 miles SE of Woodman Point

Light; Mount Brown, 68m high and the highest point of the

coastal ridge, standing about 2.75 miles NNE of James Point; a

group of three chimneys, the tallest being 59m high, standing

about 0.5 mile S of the Alumina Refinery Jetty; a number of

chimneys in the vicinity of the Kwinana Oil Refinery Jetty and

the Bulk Cargo Jetty, which are best seen on the chart; and a silo,114m high, standing at the root of the Kwinana Grain Jetty.

A microwave tower standing about 1.25 miles SE of the head

of Mangles Bay is prominent.

Pilotage

5.41 Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels. Service is

available 24 hours. There are two boarding grounds, as follows:

1. For vessels up to 11m in draft the pilot boards in Gage

Roads, 1 mile W of Hall Bank Beacon, or 2 miles NW of the

entrance to the Inner Harbor, in position 32°02'00"S,

115°41'30"E. 

2. For vessels drawing 11m or greater, and for vessels

that do not have the appropriate charts for the approaches to

Fremantle, the pilot boards in an area with its center situated

about 3 miles NW of the Fairway Landfall Lighted Buoy.

5.41 The vessel’s ETA, including the request for pilot and details

of any dangerous cargo, must be sent 48 hours and 24 hours

prior to arrival at the Fairway Landfall Lighted Buoy and confirmed or amended 2 hours in advance.

Regulations

5.41 All inbound vessels approaching Fremantle are to report to

Port of Fremantle when crossing the reporting line.

5.41 The reporting line is drawn as a sector of an arc, extending

between the coast N of Burns Rocks WSW to a position due W

of Rottnest Island, with a radius of 15 miles centered on Fairway Landfall Lighted Buoy. 

5.41 Vessels are required to report their confirmation of pilot requirements at either the Outer or Inner Pilot Boarding Place.

5.41 Vessels proceeding to the Inner Pilot Boarding Place or to

anchorage in Gage Roads are required to indicate their intentions to use either East Channel or West Channel.

5.41 The port of Fremantle is able to provide VTS information relating to shipping movements.

5.41 A vessel carrying explosives or other dangerous cargo shall

indicate this fact by radio in its ETA message; the draft should

also be included.

5.41 All vessels requiring pratique anchor in Gage Roads and remain there until medical quarantine and customs requirements

have been satisfied.

Courtesy of Lighthouses of Western Australia

Fremantle—Woodman Point Light
130 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

5.41 A complete set of port regulations is available from the Fremantle Port Authority, Fremantle.

5.41 A speed limit of 8 knots is in effect in the Inner Harbor and

entrance channel. Vessels should avoid crossing the entrance

channel, but vessels which do so are required to cross by the

shortest possible route and obey the 8 knot speed limit.

Signals

5.41 The signal station is situated on top of the Port Authority

Building and is clearly visible to all ships in the vicinity.

5.41 All orders concerning shipping movements and related matters are passed to the ships through the signal station by VHF

radio. Vessels not equipped with VHF radio are signaled with

Aldis lamps.

5.41 Fleet Base West Port Control continuously monitors VHF

channel 14; tug control monitors VHF channel 69.

Anchorage

5.41 In the summer season, October to April, safe and convenient

anchorage will be found in Gage Roads, in depths of 14.6 to

16m, fine sand, about 1 mile WSW of the entrance to Inner

Harbor. In winter, vessels should anchor about 0.5 mile farther

W or NW. Prohibited anchorage areas, shown on the chart, are

situated in the deep-water channel extending SE from Fairway

Landfall Lighted Buoy and in the vicinity of the entrance to Inner Harbor.

5.41 Designated anchorage areas, 300m in radius, are situated in

Gage Roads E and W of the deep water channel and N and S of

the prohibited anchorage area in the vicinity of the entrance to

the Inner Harbor.

5.41 Anchorage may be taken in the center of Owen Anchorage,

in depths of 14m, but there are several shallow patches in the

anchorage. The SE part of Owen Anchorage, under Woodman

Point, is preferable during the summer, when strong breezes

prevail from S and W.

5.41 The NE part of Owen Anchorage, known as Beagle Anchorage, affords good shelter for small vessels of light draft, in all

seasons.

5.41 Mangles Bay provides anchorage, in 18m, mud.

5.41 Caution.—A submarine pipeline extends from a position on

the shore about 2.5 miles NNE of the North Mole in a W direction to Rottnest Island. Several disused submarine cables extend from the same position on the shore, to seaward in a NE

direction.

Directions

5.41 Gage Roads should be approached by passing N of Rottnest

Island, which should be given a berth of 4 miles.

5.41 Vessels approaching Gage Roads from the N should steer for

Fairway Landfall Lighted Buoy. Least depths of 11m lie within

the white sector of Woodman Point Light (32°08'S.,

115°46'E.).

5.41 From Fairway Landfall Lighted Buoy, steer for Buoy No. 1,

remaining in the white sector of Buckland Hill Direction Light.

5.41 Vessels with drafts of 11m or more must embark a pilot at

the outer boarding area; they may then proceed through the

buoyed channel.

5.41 Vessels with drafts of less than 11m may either pass to the E

of the buoyed channel and then steer S; or if the channel is

clear of a deep draft vessel, they may head directly S from

Buoy No. 1 and cut through the buoyed channel.

5.41 The approach to Gage Roads through South Passage should

only be used with local knowledge. Due to heavy swell, the

passage is restricted to vessels with drafts of 5m or less. The

passage is not recommended. The S coast of Rottnest Island

should not be approached nearer than 1 mile.

Fremantle to Bunbury

5.42 From Cape Peron to Cape Bouvard, 25 miles SSW,

the coast is indented by Shoalwater Bay, Warnbro Sound, and

an unnamed indentation which has a length of about 9 miles N

to S.

5.42 Shoalwater Bay lies between Cape Peron and Mersey Point,

2.5 miles to the S; drying reefs and foul ground extend up to 1

mile off the shores of this bay.

5.42 Warnbro Sound (32°20'S., 115°43'E.) is entered between

Mersey Point and Becher Point, 4 miles S. It is protected from

the W by a chain of islets, reefs, and rocks.

5.42 The N shore of the sound is very low, and behind it are extensive swamps, which dry in the summer. The E shore is

backed by sand hillocks, about 24m high. Warnbro Sound is

used for mussel aquaculture.

5.42 Passage Rock (32°20'S., 115°41'E.), 6m high, is located 1.5

miles SSW from Mersey Point; the rock rises abruptly from the

middle of a drying ledge. The bay N and S of Passage Rocks is

fronted by sand banks, rocks, and drying shoals.

5.42 A channel, with a depth of 9.1m, is entered on range lights,

which are situated SE of Passage Rock. The channel is narrow

and tortuous, and local knowledge is necessary when entering.

Port Kennedy, situated in the S part of the sound, offers good

anchorage, in depths from 12.8 to 16.5m.

5.42 Caution.—A fish haven, with a least depth of 14.2m, was reported (1990) to lie about 1.75 miles NNE of Becher Point.

5.42 The 10m curve lies about 0.75 mile W of Passage Rock;

Coventry Reef is located on Five Fathom Bank about 3 miles

W of Passage Rock.

5.43 Coventry Reef (32°20'S., 115°38'E.) and Five Fathom Bank have been previously described in paragraph 5.39.

5.43 From Becher Point, the coast trends SE about 3 miles to a

high sandy hillock, then SSW about 7 miles to Robert Point, a

low sandy projection with a high wooded hill within it. Stake

Hill, 46m high, stands 3.5 miles ESE of Becher Point. A conspicuous water tower, from which a light is shown, stands near

the summit of a hill, 52m high, about 0.5 mile S of Robert

Point; drying ledges extend about 0.3 mile off the point.

5.43 Shoals, with depths of 20m, 22m, and 27m, lie about 17

miles W, 18 miles W, and 20 miles WSW, respectively, of Cape

Peron. An isolated shoal, with a depth of 27m, lies 16.5 miles

WSW of Coventry Reef.

5.43 The Murray River, close E of Robert Point, is about 0.5 mile

wide at its mouth and is fronted by sand spits extending nearly

across it; lights are shown on each side of the entrance. The bar

is narrow and seldom has depths of more than 1.2 to 1.8m; the

depths vary according to the weather, and at times the mouth is

closed altogether. Peel Inlet is entered about 2 miles within the

mouth of the river and, with Harvey Estuary, extends nearly 14
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 131

Pub. 175

miles S from the river. Construction has been completed on a

channel cutting through the mainland from the coast into Harvey Estuary at Dawseville, 5.5 miles SW of Robert Point.

Lights have been established on the seaward ends of the breakwaters and the inner ends of the channel, which is named Dawseville Channel. Mandurah, a small town connected by road

with Fremantle and Bunbury, stands on the E bank of the Murray River, about 0.5 mile within its mouth. There are several

small jetties and a marina at Mandurah.

5.43 Murray Reefs (32°23'S., 115°41'E.), which extends about 6

miles SW from Becher Point, are an extension of the reefs that

front Warnbro Sound; the sea occasionally breaks on the S extremity of the reef. An isolated patch, with a depth of 7.6m, lies

outside the reef, 5 miles SW of Becher Point. There is a strong

set towards these reefs, especially during W gales.

5.43 Shoal patches, with depths of 7.6m, lie 5.5 miles NW and

SW, respectively, from Robert Point; a 6.7m patch lies 2 miles

W of the point.

5.43 From Robert Point, a rocky coast with occasional small

sandy beaches extends 10 miles SW to Cape Bouvard

(32°41'S., 115°36'E.). A light, 51m high, stands close E of

Cape Bouvard.

5.44 The coast from Cape Bouvard trends S for a distance

of 37 miles to Casuarina Point; a narrow grassy-topped ridge,

with an average height of 52m, extends 25 miles S of the cape;

then for 3 or 4 miles the hills are about 21m high, rising gradually S toward Koombana Bay, E of Casuarina Point. At 6 and

16 miles, respectively, S of the cape are two conspicuous sand

patches extending from the beach to the summit of the ridge.

Within the coastal ridges are Lake Clifton and Lake Preston;

farther inland the hills rise to a height of 75 and 108m, about

14 and 20 miles SSE, respectively, of the cape.

5.44 Bouvard Reefs (32°50'S., 115°35'E.) lie from 4 to 15 miles

S of Cape Bouvard, at distances varying from 2 to 3.5 miles

offshore; the sea only breaks on these reefs during a heavy

swell. It has been reported (1988) that the reefs cannot be

picked up on radar.

5.44 Casuarina Point (32°19'S., 115°38'E.), the W entrance

point of Koombana Bay, is composed of sandhills gradually

rising to a height of about 40m. A light is shown from Casuarina Point. A rock, with a depth of 1.4m, lies about 0.3 mile offshore, about 4 miles NNE of the point. A depth of 11m exists

nearly 2 miles N of Casuarina Point Light; there are depths of

11.3m up to 0.75 mile farther NNW.

5.44 Caution.—The waters along this coast have been incompletely surveyed.

5.44 Naturaliste Reefs (33°14'S., 115°02'E.) lie about 31 miles

W of Casuarina Point Light and consist of two patches 0.6 mile

apart. The NE patch is awash; the sea does not always break on

the SW patch in calm weather. An 11.9m shoal lies 2 miles

NW and a 9.4m shoal lies 1 mile S of Naturaliste Reefs; a wide

berth should be given these dangers as soundings give little

warning. 

Bunbury (33°19'S., 115°39'E.)

World Port Index No. 54500

5.45 The port of Bunbury, situated in the SW part of

Koombana Bay, is the principal port of the Southwest District

of Western Australia.

5.45 Winds—Weather.—In summer, the prevailing winds are

from the SE. In winter, the prevailing winds are from the NW

and SW.

Reproduced with permission of Bunbury Port Authority

Casuarina Point Light

Bunbury Port Authority Home Page

http://www.byport.com.au

Bunbury Berth Information

Berth Length Maximum draft Remarks

Outer Harbor

No. 1 184m 9.2m plus allowance for tide Mineral sands. Maxmum vessel length is 210m.

No. 2 184m 8.0m plus allowance for tide Methanol, general cargo, and grain.

Inner Harbor

No. 3 381m 11.6m Wood chips.

No. 4 123m 11.6m Alumina berth and caustic soda. Maxmum vessel length is 225m.

No. 5 240m 11.6m Bulk cargo.
132 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

5.45 Tides—Currents.—Tides in Bunbury are usually diurnal.

The tide at mean higher high water is 0.9m.

5.45 Depths—Limitations.—Berth No. 1 and Berth No. 2 are

situated in the Outer Harbor, along the E side of the breakwater.

5.45 The Inner Harbor is located in the SE sector of Koombana

Bay. The Inner Harbor Basin is approached by a dredged channel which is marked by lighted beacons and indicated by ranges. The seaward part of the channel is dredged to a depth of

12.8m; the inner part, basin, and berths are dredged to a depth

of 12.2m. The depth in the Outer Harbor approach is 9.6m.

There are four berths situated in the Inner Harbor.

5.45 Berth details for the Inner Harbor and the Outer Harbor are

given in the accompanying table.

No. 8 250m 11.6m Bulk cargo.

Bunbury—Outer Harbor from NE

Bunbury Berth Information

Berth Length Maximum draft Remarks
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 133

Pub. 175

5.45 Aspect.—Koombana Bay is entered between Casuarina

Point and the coast about 2 miles NE. The E shore is backed by

Leschenault Inlet which extends 7 miles N, parallel to the

shore. The E shore of the inlet is backed by a ridge of hills

from 30 to 60m high.

5.45 A light is shown from a structure standing about 100m S of

the N extremity of the outer W breakwater. A light is also

shown from a round metal tower, painted in black and white

checks, about 0.35 mile SSW of Casuarina Point.

5.45 The W side of the outer harbor is formed by a breakwater,

about 1 mile in length, which extends NE from Point Casuarina, following the line of the reef. The E side of the outer harbor

is formed by a disused jetty, about 1,150m in length, which extends NNE from a position about 0.3 mile SE of Casuarina

Point.

5.45 The approaches to the dredged channel are marked by a

range light and a directional light. The directional light stands

close E of Point Hamilla.

5.45 Leschenault Inlet opens into the SW corner of the bay. The

Preston River and the Collie River flow into the inlet.

5.45 Conspicuous landmarks include a group of tanks situated

close NE of Casuarina Point Light, a row of concrete silos situated about 0.25 mile E of Casuarina Point Light, a building situated about 0.25 mile SE of Casuarina Point Light. 

5.45 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels, except for

Australian-flagged vessels having an exempted master. The pilot boards in position 33°16'30''S, 115°36'30"E approximately

2 miles NW of McKenna Point.

Courtesy of Bunbury Port Authority

Bunbury—Berth No. 1 and Berth No. 2

Courtesy of Bunbury Port Authority

Bunbury—Berth No. 8
134 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

5.45 The harbormaster’s office, the pilot boat, and tugs are

equipped with VHF radiotelephone. The harbormaster must be

notified 24 hours and 4 hours prior to arrival; VHF channels

are 6, 9, 12, and 16. The pilot boat and the tugs may be contacted on VHF channel 16. Pratique is not granted by radio.

5.45 The pilot boat should be contacted 1 hour in advance.

5.45 Regulations.—Vessels berth and sail, day or night, dependent on the priority of other vessels, labor available, and weather conditions.

5.45 There is a speed limit of 8 knots in Koombana Bay and the

Inner Harbor. 

5.45 Anchorage.—Vessels moor under the direction of the harbormaster.

5.45 A recommended anchorage off the port, in a depth of 15m,

lies 3.5 miles NNW of Casuarina Point Light. The anchorage is

indicated by range lights, in line bearing 089.5°.

5.45 The breakwater affords good shelter during NW gales, which

are rather frequent from May to October. The usual anchorage,

in 7.3 to 8.2m, sand and mud, lies ESE and SE of the outer end

of the jetty; the holding ground is good.

5.45 Directions.—In approaching Koombana Bay from the W,

Mount Lennard, the highest hill on Roe Range, should bear no

less than 103° in order to clear Naturaliste Reefs, which lie

about 31 miles WNW of Casuarina Point.

5.45 The entrance channel is marked with beacons and range

lights. Vessels enter the bay with the range lights on the E

shore, in line bearing 157.25°, then steer as necessary for the

Outer Harbor or the Inner Harbor.

5.45 At night, if from SW, a vessel should not cross depths of less

than 15m until well N of Casuarina Point Mole.

5.45 Caution.—A submarine pipeline, which is disused, extends

in a W direction for 2.75 miles from a point on the shore about

4.25 miles NE of Casuarina Point Light. 

5.45 A strong set is experienced, generally towards the breakwater, more especially during the winter months, and vessels

should keep about 1 mile off the head of the breakwater when

approaching the port.

Geographe Bay

5.46 Geographe Bay (33°31'S., 115°21'E.) is entered between Casuarina Point and Cape Naturaliste, 34 miles WSW; it

is open to winds from N and NW.

5.46 From Casuarina Point, the coast trends 21 miles SW to

Wonnerup Inlet; for the first few miles a grassy ridge rises from

the beach, and nearly 3 miles S of Casuarina Point a doublepeaked grassy hillock, Koombana Paps (33°21'S., 115°37'E.),

rises to a height of 64m. From a position about 7 miles S of Casuarina Point, a continuous swamp extends in a S direction immediately behind the coastal ridge, which varies from 0.1 to

0.5 mile in width. Minninup, a bare sand patch 30m high, is located 13 miles SW of Casuarina Point; it forms one of the conspicuous features in this locality. Mount Lennard, 335m high,

about 13 miles E of the same point, is conspicuous.

5.46 The coast for a distance of 3 to 4 miles N of sand patch of

Minninup is fringed with rocky ledges, some of which dry;

about 2 miles N of the sand patch and 0.5 mile offshore, there

is a sunken reef, on which the sea breaks during a heavy swell.

The whole shore of Geographe Bay, SW of the sand patch of

Minninup is fronted by sandy and rocky banks, with depths of

1.8 to 5.5m extending from 0.5 to 1.5 miles offshore; depths of

less than 18.3m extend about 3 miles offshore abreast Casuarina Point and 5 miles offshore abreast Wonnerup Inlet.

5.46 Wonnerup Inlet has only sufficient depths for boats and is often completely barred. The inlet extends about 0.5 mile E,

opening into Wonnerup Estuary, which extends 3.5 miles NE.

5.46 Vasse Estuary extends, from its entrance in Wonnerup Inlet,

in a WSW direction and passes through Busselton.

5.47 Busselton (33°38'S., 115°20'E.) stands on the S shore

of Geographe Bay. Busselton Jetty is about 1,800m in length,

and has two berths at its head. The jetty is the longest wooden

pier in the southern hemisphere. The jetty was closed to commercial shipping in 1974 and is currently used as a tourist attraction.

5.47 A light is shown from a wooden gallows at the head of the

pier; a radio tower stands 5.5 miles W of the jetty.

5.47 A shoal, with a depth of 5.5m, lies 0.5 mile ENE of the head

of the jetty; in 1967, less water was reported close W of this

shoal. Patches of gravel, with depths of 4.9 to 5.5m, lie from

1.75 to 3 miles W of the jetty.

5.47 Anchorage can be obtained 0.5 mile W of the outer end of

the jetty, in a depth of 9m, sand and weed.

5.47 Caution.—A dangerous rock is charted close to shore.

5.48 Toby Inlet (33°37'S., 115°09'E.), which is generally

closed, is located 8.5 miles W of Busselton Jetty; Dalling Point

lies 4 miles NW of the inlet. Castle Rock, nearly detached from

the coast and 34m high, lies 1 mile N of Dalling Point. A fish

haven, with a depth of 21m, lies about 3 miles ENE of Dalling

Point.

5.48 Eagle Bay is a small indentation in the coast about 3.5 miles

N of Dalling Point; the coast between them rises abruptly from

the beach to heights of 107 to 131m. Anchorage can be obtained, with local knowledge, in Eagle Bay during S and SW

winds, about 0.75 mile offshore.

Reproduced with permission of Bunbury Port Authority

Bunbury—Inner Harbor
Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 135

Pub. 175

5.48 Bunker Point, dark, cliffy, and about 61m high, is located 1.5

miles E of Cape Naturaliste; Rocky Point, a bare rocky headland, is located 1.25 miles farther E. Bunker Bay (33°33'S.,

115°02'E.) lies between the two points. A rock, with a depth of

less than 1.9m, is located 0.6 mile NNE from Bunker Point.

5.49 Cape Naturaliste (33°32'S., 115°01'E.), 122m high,

is the W headland of Geographe Bay; its extremity is formed of

low sandy hillocks. About 6 miles S of the cape stands Mount

Duckworth, 227m high, with a ridge of high land between

them, which falls abruptly on its E and W sides. Cape Naturaliste Light is shown from a gray stone tower situated about 1

mile ESE of the cape. Radar returns from Cape Naturaliste

have been reported up to 26 miles distant.

5.49 Caution.—There is a rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, 1

mile NE of Cape Naturaliste Light; the sea does not always

break on this rock. A similar rock lies about midway between

this rock and Cape Naturaliste.

5.50 Wright Bank (33°30'S., 115°01'E.), with a reported

(1985) least depth of 6m, consists of two patches 0.5 mile

apart, from 1.5 to 2 miles N of Cape Naturaliste. The sea

breaks over these patches in a medium swell; in strong gales,

the rollers begin 0.5 mile W of these shoal spots, which indicates the edge of the shallow water. There is a depth of 42m,

gravel and shell, 100m N of the bank. Vessels should not pass

inshore of Wright Bank.

5.50 A fish research area, marked by a lighted buoy, is situated

about 15 miles W of Cape Naturaliste.

5.50 Current.—After NW gales or a continuance of NW winds,

there is a strong outset from Geographe Bay NW, which, meeting the swell off Cape Naturaliste, produces at times an appearance of broken water extending 3 to 4 miles from the cape.

Cape Naturaliste to Cape Leeuwin

5.51 Sugarloaf Rock (33°33'S., 115°00'E.), a remarkable

crag 42m high, is located 0.1 mile offshore, 1.5 miles S of

Cape Naturaliste. An unbroken cliffy coast extends 4.5 miles S

of the rock, and 2 miles beyond lies the S entrance point of a

small bight, with several rocks awash lying off it. A rock, 3.7m

high, is located 0.4 mile NNW of the S entrance point of this

bight.

5.51 Winjee Sam Rock (33°40'S., 115°00'E.), 6.5 miles S of

Sugarloaf Rock, is 14.3m high, and is the outermost of a group

known as Canal Rocks.

5.51 Cape Clairault (33°42'S., 114°58'E.), 10 miles S of Cape

Naturaliste, is 36m high, and is formed of sandy hillocks

sparsely covered with low scrub brush. The coastal ridge behind the cape rises abruptly to heights of 150 to 200m. 

5.51 Between Cape Clairault and Cowaramup Point, 10 miles S,

there are several breaks in the cliffs, through which brooks

flow into the sea. A partially-wooded hill, 187m high, stands

about 2 miles SE of Cowaramup Point. Along this rugged

coast, several submerged rocks lie from 0.1 to 0.35 mile off its

entire length.

5.51 Cowaramup Reef (33°50'S., 114°57'E.), with a depth of

less than 1.8m and over which the sea breaks in a heavy swell,

lies 2 miles NNW of Cowaramup Point, 1.5 miles offshore; the

ground is foul between the reef and the coast.

5.51 Cowaramup Point (33°52'S., 114°59'E.) is a bare sandy

projection, with rocky ledges extending 0.35 mile NW from it.

5.51 Cape Mentelle, 6 miles S of Cowaramup Point, is a dark

green headland, 43m high, faced with a steep cliff to the W,

and rising within to a height of 69m; rocky ledges, which dry,

front the cape extending 0.3 mile offshore.

5.51 Cow Rock (33°58'S., 114°58'E.), 3.6m high, with a small

submerged rock 0.1 mile N of it, lies 0.6 mile WNW of Cape

Mentelle.

5.51 The mouth of the Margaret River, which is generally barred

by sand, lies close S of Cape Mentelle; a high wooded hill rises

abruptly from the S side of the entrance. A prominent building

stands about 0.3 mile SE of the river mouth.

5.51 The coast from Cape Mentelle to Freycinet Point, 8 miles S,

is fronted by drying and submerged rocks, which extend up to

1 mile offshore.

5.52 Freycinet Point (34°06'S., 114°59'E.) is a low, dark,

rocky point, 18m high, with a flat-topped granite hill, 55m

high, a short distance E of it. The sea breaks on a rock, awash,

0.2 mile SW of the point.

5.52 North Point lies about 4 miles SSE of Freycinet Point; there

is a long dark rock, 12m high, on the rocky far shore close W

of it. Boranup Hill, 196m high, stands 1.5 miles NE of North

Point. A 10.3m patch is located outside the 20m curve, 1.25

miles SW of North Point.

5.52 Hamelin Bay (34°11'S., 115°01'E.) is entered between

North Point and White Cliff Point (34°13'S., 115°01'E.), 4

miles S. Boranup Sand Patch, located in about the middle of

the E side of the bay, is a conspicuous landmark which rises

from 143 to 192m high, 1.5 miles from the coast; in clear

weather it is visible from a distance of more than 20 miles.

White Cliff Point is fringed by cliffs about 22m high.

5.52 The waters of Hamelin Bay are encumbered by numerous

rocks and shoal patches which are awash.

5.52 Edith Rock, 1.75 miles NW of White Cliff Point, is 4.2m

high. Two rocky ledges, which dry, lie 0.25 mile SW of Edith

Rock; some rocks, with depths of 2.7 to 5.5m and on which the

sea generally breaks, lie 0.5 mile SSW of the same rock.

5.53 Old Man Rock (34°12'S., 115°00'E.), 2m high, lies

near the W edge of the ledges, which dry in places, extending

1.25 miles WNW from White Cliff Point; the ledges extend up

to 0.5 mile around the rock.

5.53 Hamelin Island, 32m high, lies near the outer end of a reef

which extends 0.75 mile W of White Cliff Point. The island,

with the adjacent reefs, protect the inner harbor and also the

bay to a certain extent, from S winds.

5.53 South Rock, with a depth of 4m, and South East Ledge, with

a depth of 5.8m, lie 1 mile NNW and 0.9 mile N, respectively,

of White Cliff Point.

5.53 Peak Islet (34°12'S., 115°01'E.), 13.1m high, lies 0.45 mile

WNW of White Cliff Point. A reef, with depths of less than

5.5m, extends 0.2 mile E from the islet; its E end forms the

NW side of the entrance channel to the Inner Harbor.

5.53 Mushroom Reef, about 0.2 mile ESE of Peak Islet, has several patches, awash, and one which dries 0.3m. The reef has a

1.2m patch about 0.35 mile N of White Cliff Point, which lies

on the SE side of the entrance channel to the Inner Harbor.
136 Sector 5. West Coast of Australia—North West Cape to Cape Leeuwin 

Pub. 175

5.54 Hamelin Inner Harbor (34°12'S., 115°01'E.) lies between Peak Islet and Mushroom Reef, on the N, and Hamelin

Island and adjacent reefs, on the S and SW. A jetty, which has

been condemned as unsafe for traffic, extends about 0.3 mile

WNW from the shore, 0.2 mile NE of White Cliff Point. The

harbor has been reported closed to shipping.

5.54 Vessels approaching the anchorage from the N should give

Freycinet Point a berth of about 2 miles, and when the middle

of Boranup Sand Patch bears about 085°, steer to pass 0.3 mile

N of Edith Rock, and then to the anchorage.

5.54 From S, give Cape Hamelin a berth of at least 4 miles, keeping outside the 40m curve. When Hamelin Island summit bears

more than 050°, Old Man Rock and Edith Rock will be visible.

Steer to pass through Lisle Channel, about 0.3 mile WNW of

Old Man Rock.

5.54 Anchorage may be taken in Hamelin Bay; vessels should

ride with a long scope of cable. From the beginning of May until the beginning of November, upon the usual indications of a

NW gale, vessels of too deep a draft to find protection in the

Inner Harbor are advised to put to sea and seek shelter in

Flinders Bay until the gale is over. Anchorage may also be taken 0.3 mile ENE of the SE extremity of Peak Islet, in a depth of

11m, sand and weed.

5.54 If passing outside Edith Rock from the S, give it a berth of

0.5 mile and steer into the bay, passing 0.3 mile N of the rock

and then to the anchorage.

5.54 The coast from White Cliff Point to Knobby Head, 2 miles S,

forms the E side of Foul Bay. Foul Bay is so encumbered with

sunken reefs it is useless as an anchorage or place of shelter.

Foul Bay Light is shown from a white square tower, 6m high,

situated about 1.5 miles SSE of White Cliff Point.

5.55 Knobby Head (34°14'S., 115°02'E.) is smooth and

grassy, 41m high, with a high reddish cliff to seaward. A short

distance within the head are some dark bush-topped sand hills,

from which a large bare sand patch extends to the SW, and is

not visible from NW.

5.55 Seaward of Knobby Head there are several ledges, awash

and submerged, with a rock with a depth of less than 1.8m, lying 1.5 miles W of the head; the sea breaks on this rock with a

heavy swell.

5.55 Southwest Rock (34°14'S., 114°59'E.), 2m high, lies 1.75

miles NW of Knobby Head. Breakers have been observed for

about 0.4 mile SW of Southwest Rock.

5.55 Cape Hamelin (34°15'S., 115°02'E.) is a low cliff-faced

point, fronted with numerous drying ledges and sunken rocks

which extend 1.5 miles W, 1.75 miles SW, and 2 miles S. There

is a rock, 15m high, about 0.6 mile NW of the cape.

5.55 From Cape Hamelin, the coast trends SE 8 miles to Cape

Leeuwin. Nearly 1 mile SE from Cape Hamelin, Turners Brook

flows into the sea. On its S side and 0.5 mile above its mouth, a

perpendicular cliff rises on the NW side of an 84m hill and is

conspicuous when seen from SW.

5.55 A high and conspicuous sand patch is located 2.25 miles SE

of Cape Hamelin, which, in hazy weather, may possibly be

mistaken for Boranup Sand Patch in Hamelin Bay.

5.55 The coast between Cape Hamelin and Cape Leeuwin is

fronted by reefs extending up to 4 miles offshore.

5.56 Cape Leeuwin (34°22'S., 115°08'E.), the SW extremity of Australia, lies 8 miles SE of Cape Hamelin. Cape Leeuwin is a small round head, about 21m high, joined to the

mainland by a low swampy isthmus. Within the cape, the land

rises abruptly to a height of 149m, in a position 1.25 miles

NNE of the cape. From this position, the hills extend, with a

few breaks, NNW beyond Cape Hamelin, attaining a height of

222m, 3.5 miles NNW of Cape Leeuwin.

5.56 Cape Leeuwin Light is shown from a gray round stone tower

situated on the south summit of the cape. Cape Leeuwin has

been reported to give good radar returns up to 17 miles. 

5.56 Directions for rounding Cape Leeuwin.—The distance to

which submerged dangers extend off a long stretch of the coast

in the vicinity of Cape Leeuwin, and the frequent thick weather

that prevails with strong onshore winds and a set towards the

coast, renders it imperative to give this dangerous cape a berth

of at least 15 miles in all but settled weather and good visibility.

5.56 When approaching the coast between Cape Naturaliste and

Cape Leeuwin by day, in clear weather, vessels may navigate

into a depth of 55m, the bottom being coarse sand mixed with

shells and small stones.

5.56 Great caution should be used in navigating at night to make

Cape Leeuwin Light; with reduced visibility the light may not

be visible as far as Geographe Reef, 8 miles NW, due to mist

hanging about the land when it is clear at sea. Soundings

should not be neglected, and vessels should not venture into

depths of less than 128m.

5.56 Caution.—Reefs extend up to 5 miles SE from the cape.

Off-lying Dangers

5.57 Geographe Reef (34°19'S., 114°59'E.), 4 miles offshore and 8 miles WNW of Cape Leeuwin, consists of two

steep-to submerged rocks about 0.1 mile apart, close inside the

40m curve; in moderate weather, the sea breaks at uncertain intervals.

5.57 Minns Ledge, 2m high, lies about 2 miles ENE of Geographe Reef; there are many rocks between it and Cape

Hamelin, 2.25 miles N.

5.57 Cumberland Rock, 10m high and of a dark color, lies 4.5

miles NW of Cape Leeuwin. The outer submerged reef in this

vicinity lies 1.25 miles SW of Cumberland Rock; the reef

breaks only during a heavy swell. Jacks Ledge lies inside Cumberland Rock. Between Cumberland Rock and Cape Leeuwin,

there are many submerged rocks on which the sea breaks in

heavy weather.

St. Alouarn Islet (34°24'S., 115°12'E.) lies 3.5 miles SE of

Cape Leeuwin; Southeast Rocks extend 1.5 miles farther SE. A

sunken rock lies about 0.1 mile E of them.

5.57 Southwest Breaker, on which the sea seldom breaks, is the S

extremity of the reef; it has a depth of 3m, with 24m close seaward. The rock lies about 4.75 miles SSE from Cape Leeuwin

Light.

5.57 The W rock of the rocky chain has a depth of 3.2m and lies

about 2.5 miles SSE from Cape Leeuwin Light. The sea only

breaks over this rock in bad weather. The position of the rocks

may best be seen on the chart.
Pub. 175

6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu

6.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 6 — CHART INFORMATION
139

Pub. 175

SECTOR 6 

SOUTHWEST COAST OF AUSTRALIA—CAPE LEEUWIN TO CAPE ADIEU

6.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Australia from

Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu, about 900 miles E. The port of

Albany and other facilities are included in their respective positions. The arrangement is from W to E, including the offshore

islands and dangers. 

General Remarks

6.1 The coast of Australia from Cape Leeuwin E to Cape

Adieu presents a varied front, from the mountains of the W to

the low swampy salt marsh of W South Australia. In the SW

part of the state of Western Australia, the Darling Range, with

heights of less than 610m, parallels the W coast for about 300

miles N from the vicinity of D’Entrecasteaux Point. The highest peak of the Sterling Range lies near Albany and is 1,109m

high.

6.1 The country descends gradually from the mountains toward

the E part of the state, which is mainly tableland, where it gives

way to the swamps and marshland of SW South Australia.

6.1 The ports of Albany and Esperance are the primary ports of

importance described in this sector.

6.1 Winds—Weather.—There is a tendency along this coast for

winds between S and E to predominate in the summer and for

winds between N and W to predominate in winter. However,

these seasonal tendencies are greatly complicated by the effects

of the local sea breezes. Under suitable conditions, an onshore

wind develops during the late forenoon and persists until dusk,

blowing perpendicular to the general coastline. Late at night

and in the early morning, an offshore wind tends to blow in the

opposite direction.

6.1 At Cape Leeuwin, SE winds predominate in the summer, especially in the afternoon. In the winter, the winds are variable,

mainly between SW and NE through NW. Near Eyre, the sea

breeze occurs in the late afternoon and is generally from the SE

from November to March. In July, winds from the NW are

most frequent, with a high proportion of these winds caused by

the land breeze effect.

6.1 These coasts are, for the most part, low-lying and therefore

are not generally subject to the type of squalls associated with a

mountainous coast. However, exceptions can be found, especially near Bald Head and Limestone Head, where gusts of

great strength occur when the general wind direction at sea is

between S and W.

6.1 Visibility is generally good, with exceptionally good visibility quite common; the limiting factors are rain, mist, and fog.

Rain associated with s depressions, which most frequently occur from May to August, frequently reduces visibility below 2

miles and occasionally below 0.5 mile. On rare occasions, it

may drop to 100m in very heavy rains.

6.1 Fog seems comparatively rare on the coast and over the adjacent sea. Observations indicate the highest frequencies occur

during the winter months. Along the coast, where there are numerous inlets and profuse vegetation, there may be patchy

drifts of shallow mist or fog occurring frequently during the

early morning hours.

6.1 Tides—Currents.—The current setting E from Cape Leeuwin along the S coast of Australia appears to be influenced

principally by the prevailing winds. Since the winds show considerable variability, the currents, too, must show a similar

variability. The currents in the vicinity of Cape Leeuwin set

predominantly SE from April to November; the currents are

more variable from December to March. In all months, however, there is a moderate possibility of onshore sets, with rates of

2 knots in this area. Some vessels have experienced constant N

and NE currents, at rates of 1 to 1.5 knots, while others have

been set to the E but little to the N as they approach the SW

coast of Australia.

6.1 In the area covered by this sector, the prevailing winds from

between NW and S arrive after a long fetch over uninterrupted

ocean. These winds are often strong and persistent, with resulting rough seas and spells of moderate to heavy swells. Rough

seas may persist for several days, particularly from June to

September. The maximum disturbances occur at the frontal

troughs, with the severity increasing from N to S. The normal

rate of movement of the high and low pressures is such that a

vessel traveling E may experience rough seas from Cape Leeuwin to Gabo Island, at the SE extremity of Australia, while a

vessel traveling W would pass through rough and smooth seas

at comparatively short intervals.

Cape Leeuwin to King George Sound

6.2 Flinders Bay (34°20'S., 115°12'E.) is located between Matthew Point, 1 mile ENE of Cape Leeuwin, and

Ledge Point, 5 miles farther ENE. The W shore is rocky and

backed by a ridge from 30 to 45m high. The N shore is comparatively low and sandy, backed by hills covered with dense

brush and attains a height of 40m. Barrack Point, 8m high, is

located on the W side of the bay 1.5 miles NNE of Matthew

Point.

6.2 Cole Rock, with a least depth of 4m, lies 0.4 mile SE of Barrack Point, and a rocky patch, consisting of two rocks with a

depth of 5.5m, lie 1.25 miles NE of the same point.

6.2 Bessie Reef, with a least depth of less than 1.8m near its E

end, lies with its shallowest depth 2 miles SE of Ledge Point;

the depths increase rapidly to 16.5m S of the reef, which seldom breaks.

6.2 A similar reef lies between Bessie Reef and Ledge Point.

6.2 Augusta (34°20'S., 115°10'E.), a small township on the W

bank of the Blackwood River, lies close N of Barrack Point.

The Blackwood River discharges into the head of Flinders Bay

1.25 miles N of Augusta, and the coast is fringed by reefs and

shoal patches extending up to 0.5 mile offshore. The bar across

the mouth of the river is about 1m in depth, except during the

winter months or with heavy rains when there are depths of 1.8

to 2.1m; boats should not attempt to cross the bar without local

knowledge.

6.2 Anchorage.—Safe anchorage can be obtained in the NW
140 Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 

Pub. 175

part of Flinders Bay from October to May. 

6.3 From Ledge Point for 6 miles E, the coast continues

low and sandy, with hills behind ranging from 45 to 61m high,

and covered with dense brush. From there to White Point, 7.5

miles farther SE, the land becomes higher with several patches

of sand on their slopes. White Point is named from a long

white patch of sand at its extremity. Reefs, some of which dry,

extend up to 0.5 mile seaward from White Point.

6.3 Cape Beaufort (34°25'S., 115°32'E.), 43m high, 4.5 miles

SE of White Point, with Black Point close W, is composed of

dark basaltic rock, which is easily identified as the coast on either side for several miles is sandy. Dickson Peak, a dark conspicuous hill, 142m high, is located 2 miles NW of Cape

Beaufort. There is a foul bight on either side of the cape.

6.3 From Cape Beaufort, the coast trends in a SE direction for 34

miles to Point D’Entrecasteaux. The Donnelly River and the

Warren River discharge 7 and 17 miles, respectively, SE of the

cape. The mouth of both rivers is closed, except during winter

and after heavy freshets.

6.3 Silver Mount, 136m high, is located about midway between

the Donnelly River and the Warren River, 1.5 miles inland. The

coast, a short distant SE of the Warren River, is composed of

dark bushy-topped sand hills, culminating in Callcup Hill,

236m high. From the base of the sand hills, swamps extend to

the beach.

6.3 The Meerup River, which extends a few miles inland, percolates through the beach 4 miles SSE of the entrance to the Warren River, forming quicksand which can only be crossed by

keeping on the edge of the surf. These quicksands occur at the

mouth of most of the rivers between Cape Beaufort and Point

D’Entrecasteaux.

6.3 The high coastal ridge terminates abruptly, about 9.5 miles

SE of the Warren River, in a bare sand-topped hill, 246m high;

then the coast is low and rocky for a distance of 2.5 miles to

Black Head. Doggerup Creek flows through a bare sand patch

of moderate height, 1 mile SE of Black Head. From Doggerup

Creek, high rocky sandstone cliffs extend about 0.5 mile beyond Point D’Entrecasteaux, but a small break about 1.5 miles

N of the point is low and grassy.

6.3 From Cape Beaufort to Point D’Entrecasteaux, the coast is

fronted by heavy breakers; those breakers S of the Warren River break from 0.5 to 0.75 mile from shore. 

6.4 Point D’Entrecasteaux (34°50'S., 116°00'E.), composed of reddish perpendicular cliffs, 122m high, is one of the

most remarkable projections on this part of the coast. Mount

Chudalup, a conspicuous granite hill, rises abruptly from a low

swamp to a height of 185m, 6 miles NE of the point. This point

has been reported to give good radar returns at 23 miles and to

be identifiable with charted features at 16 miles. A light is

shown from a white square tower situated on Point D’Entrecasteaux. 

6.4 Flat Island, 8m high, with a number of dry rocks around it,

lies about 0.5 mile SW of Point D’Entrecasteaux. South West

Reefs, consisting of three reefs 0.5 mile apart, lie 2.75 miles S

of the same point. The two N reefs are about 0.15 mile in diameter and are nearly awash; the S reef is smaller, with greater

depths, and does not break regularly.

6.4 Sandy Island, 14m high, lies 2.5 miles SE of Point D’Entrecasteaux; a number of small ledges and submerged rocks extend from it. Several reefs, some of which are awash, lie

between the island and the shore, and in heavy weather this locality appears as a mass of breakers.

The coast between Point D’Entrecasteaux and the entrance

to the Gardner River, 6 miles E, is fronted by a sandy beach.

Low grassy ridges and swamps, with occasional clumps of

trees, extend several miles inland behind the beach. Close within the 40m curve, which lies about 5 miles offshore, there are

detached rocks, with depths of less than 1.8m.

6.4 The Gardner River flows into the sea over a narrow rocky

bar; off the bar are several dry ledges and sunken rocks. The

river usually flows with great strength, except in very dry seasons, when it may be forded at its mouth.

6.4 Between the Gardner River and West Cliff Point, 9 miles

ESE, is a small projection fronted by rocks; a conspicuous sand

patch is located 1 mile NNW of West Cliff Point.

6.5 West Cliff Point (34°54'S., 116°17'E.), 43m high, is

the W extremity of high precipitous cliffs which form the coast

to Broke Inlet, 5 miles ESE, and continue to Cliffy Head, 7

miles farther SE. The entrance of Broke Inlet (Brookes Inlet) is

generally closed by a broad bar of sand. A rock, on which the

sea breaks at times, lies 1 mile WSW of West Cliff Point.

6.5 The hills SE of Broke Inlet rise gradually to an elevation of

248m about 2 miles NW of Cliffy Head. The SW extremity of

Cliffy Head terminates in a narrow cliff, 115m high.

6.5 Cow and Calf Rocks (35°01'S., 116°13'E.) are two rocks located about 8 miles offshore SSW of West Cliff Point. The W

rock, 33m high, has a jagged top whitened by guano. The

smaller rock, 12m high, is of dark appearance and has a flattened top. These rocks are steep-to and soundings give no indication of their proximity, but they do afford good radar targets.

6.5 Broke Reefs (Brookes Reefs) lie 2 miles SW of the entrance

to Broke Inlet; the sea breaks constantly on the shallowest part,

which lies 1.75 miles WSW of the entrance. Breakers also lie 4

miles SE of the inlet. The extremity of Point Nuyts, in range

with the S edge of Chatham Island, leads S of the reef and

breakers and N of Cow and Calf Rocks.

6.6 Chatham Island (35°02'S., 116°30'E.), 0.5 mile SSE

Courtesy of NatureBase - Dept. of Conservation and Land Management, Gov’t

of Western Australia

Point D’Entrecasteau as seen from Windy Harbor
Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 141

Pub. 175

of Cliffy Head, appears brown and bald and has a few scrubby

bushes near its 186m summit. The S end of the island rises perpendicularly from the sea and slopes steeply N; when seen

from the E or W, it has a wedge-shaped appearance. A rocky islet, 27m high, lies 0.15 mile W of Chatham Island and a rock,

awash, lies 1 mile farther W. A shoal, with a depth of 24m, lies

8 miles SW of Chatham Island.

6.6 The coast between Cliffy Head and Long Point, a narrow

cliffy projection, 43m high, 4.25 miles ESE, forms a bight

which has a conspicuous sand patch at its head. A high cliff extends from the sand patch ESE to Long Point; a conspicuous

round green hill rises abruptly from a gully on its E side, 1 mile

E of Long Point. From the gully the high cliffs continue to a

position about 1 mile E of Point Nuyts.

6.6 Point Nuyts (35°04'S., 116°38'E.), projecting SSW from the

coast in a position about 3 miles ESE of Long Point, is 144m

high and rises to an elevation of 197m close within the point.

6.6 Mount Hopkins, a remarkable mass of granite, is located on

a ridge 204m high, which rises abruptly from the coast 2 miles

ENE of Point Nuyts. About 1.75 miles farther SE, there is a

narrow sandy beach backed by a steep sand cliff which has a

dark cliffy head at its S end. Rocky Head, about 24m high, lies

1.5 miles E of the dark head.

6.6 Mount Frankland (Caldyanup Peak), Mount Mitchell (Rugged Peak), and Granite Peak (Sugar Loaf Peak), three prominent peaks, each between 308 and 411m high, are located

between 13 and 19 miles N of Rocky Head.

6.7 Goose Islet (35°04'S., 116°44'E.), 38m high, lies 2

miles S of Rocky Head. Rocks, on which the sea generally

breaks, lie 0.2 mile E and W of the islet and a rocky ledge,

1.2m high, on which the sea constantly breaks, lies 0.75 mile

WSW of the islet.

6.7 Black Rock, 21m high, and Saddle Island, 45m high, lie 3.75

miles WNW and 0.5 mile N, respectively, from Goose Islet.

Other dangers, which may best be seen on the chart, are located

between Point Nuyts and Rocky Head.

6.7 Anchorage, sheltered from NW gales, can be obtained with

local knowledge off Rocky Head.

6.7 Nornalup Inlet, located on the W side of the bay close E of

Rocky Head, has an entrance about 0.1 mile wide between the

heads. The fairway of the entrance is shallow, but during the

rush of water after heavy rains, depths may reach 3.6m. Heavy

swells constantly roll into the bay making it difficult for even

boats to enter. The Frankland River and the Walpole River flow

into the inlet.

6.7 Sand hills, 45 to 60m high, extend 3 miles E from Nornalup

Inlet, then rise to a rocky bluff 98m high, about 1 mile farther

SE. A rocky ledge extends 0.2 mile seaward from the bluff.

6.7 A rock, which breaks in a heavy swell, lies about 0.75 mile

offshore in a position 2.5 miles E of Rocky Head.

6.7 A small green headland, 45m high, projects from the coast 5

miles ESE of Rocky Head; the land within the headland rises

abruptly to a height of 137m. A stream flows through a high

sand patch into a bight on the W side of the green headland.

6.7 Rame Head (35°03'S., 116°52'E.), 125m high, lies 0.75 mile

E of the small green headland; Point Irwin lies 3 miles farther

E. The coastal waters from the small green headland to Point

Irwin are foul, with above and below-water rocks extending up

to 1 mile offshore SE and SW of Rame Head.

6.8 Point Irwin (35°04'S., 116°55'E.), 52m high, is the

SW extremity of Foul Bay. A prominent green peak rises

abruptly to an elevation of 52m, about 0.75 mile NW of the E

entrance point of Foul Bay. The bay, about 5 miles in width between the entrance points, is encumbered with reefs and submerged rocks, and in bad weather, the entire bay is a mass of

breakers.

6.8 Irwin Inlet opens into the head of Foul Bay. The entrance of

the inlet is seldom closed, but it is too shallow for a boat to enter except after a heavy freshet. There are several villages on

the N side of the inlet.

6.8 The coast from Foul Bay trends E for 2 miles to a dark headland, 49m high, which has several rocks off its SE extremity.

6.8 Boat Harbor lies to the E of the dark headland described

above and is safe for boats in moderate weather; landing might

be made on a small sandy beach at the head of the harbor.

Rocks extend nearly 0.5 mile SE from the N entrance point of

Boat Harbor.

6.8 From the swampy flats close E of Boat Harbor, the land rises

gradually to Hillier Point, 3 miles farther E. An island, 37m

high, lies 0.1 mile offshore, 1 mile E of Boat Harbor.

6.8 Point Hillier (35°04'S., 117°09'E.) is a narrow projection,

134m high, with a cliffy face and a flat top, from which the

land rises abruptly to an elevation of 155m. There are times

when landing can be made inside the point. A depth of 23m

lies 3.5 miles SSW of Point Hillier.

6.8 Stanley Islet, whose 49m summit is covered with coarse

grass, is located 0.1 mile S of Point Hillier. Foul ground, which

breaks in bad weather, lies about 0.75 mile ESE of Stanley Islet.

6.8 William Bay lies between Hillier Point and Edward Point

about 5 miles ENE. Parry Inlet, whose entrance is generally

closed, discharges into the NW part of the bay and on the NE

shore of the bay there is a conspicuous sand patch.

6.9 Wilson Head (35°03'S., 117°20'E.), located 4 miles E

of Edward Point, is a broad, cliffy projection, 122m high. Two

small streams flow into the head of the bay that lies between

Edward Point and Wilson Head.

6.9 Bennett Range is an irregular and broken range that extends

N from Wilson Head. Mount Shadforth, the S peak, 319m

high, is located 3 miles N of Wilson Head and Mount Lindesay, 459m high and prominent from seaward, lies 10 miles farther N. A ridge extends some miles E from Mount Lindesay.

6.9 Ratcliffe Bay is located close NE of Wilson Head. A heavy

swell usually sets into the bay.

6.9 Wilson Inlet opens into Ratcliffe Bay, 1 mile N of Wilson

Head; its 0.5 mile wide entrance is generally blocked by sand.

A number of streams discharge into the inlet.

6.9 Two sand drifts are located a short distance E of Wilson Inlet; the coast then rises steeply to an elevation of about 155m

and presents a cliff front that continues to Knapp Head, 7 miles

ESE. A heavy surf always breaks on this coast.

6.9 A submerged rock lies 0.35 mile offshore, 1.5 miles NW of

Knapp Head.

6.9 Knapp Head (35°05'S., 117°29'E.), 122m high, is conspicuous and has grassy ridges rising to 183m high, 0.75 mile inland. The head has been reported to give good radar returns up

to 17 miles.

6.9 West Cape Howe, 6.5 miles SE of Knapp Head, is the W of
142 Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 

Pub. 175

three bluff headlands, each 91m high, located at the S end of a

promontory. Torbay Head, the farthest E of the three headlands, has a round scrubby top.

The coast trends N from Torbay Head to Forsyth Bluff, a distance of about 3 miles, then in a general NNE direction 3 miles,

to the entrance of Torbay Inlet.

6.9 To the E of Torbay Inlet, for about 1.25 miles, the land rises

to a height of 143m; then the coast trends 8.5 miles SE to Sharp

Point.

6.9 Torbay Bay lies between Torbay Head and the coast N of

Stony Island, and includes Port Harding, Port Hughes, and Torbay Inlet. There are several islands in the bay which may best

be seen on the chart.

6.9 Anchorage has been obtained, in 32m, about 0.6 mile NW of

a rocky bluff, 0.75 mile N of Torbay Head. Shelter for vessels

with local knowledge may be found in Port Harding, close N of

Forsyth Bluff and in Port Hughes, 1 mile ESE of Torbay Inlet.

6.10 Sharp Point (35°07'S., 117°52'E.) rises to a height of

165m; the cliffs at the point and for 0.5 mile E are precipitous.

Grove Hill, 212m high, stands 0.5 mile N of Sharp Point.

6.10 Cave Point (35°08'S., 117°54'E.), 2 miles ESE of Sharp

Point, is faced with low, dark cliffs. A black rock, 15m high,

lies close S of Black Head, which is located 1 mile E of Cave

Point.

6.10 Peak Head, 150m high, is a bluff, rocky projection 1.25

miles ESE of Black Head. Stony Hill, a prominent mass of

granite boulders 224m high, rise abruptly 1 mile within Peak

Head. A small dry rock lies close off Peak Head.

6.10 Between Peak Head and Black Head, a bight is formed,

which has a narrow rocky cove in its N part. Landing may also

be made in Newles Inlet, 0.25 mile NW, which provides good

shelter for small craft in all but S winds.

6.10 An intermittent stream of water flows out of a precipitous ravine on the N side of a bluff, 1.5 miles NE of Peak Head. A little farther N is a dark, round, granite hill, 140m high. Isthmus

Bay is formed between the bluff and Bald Head, 2.5 miles E.

6.10 Bald Head (35°06'S., 118°01'E.) is the E extremity of the

Flinders Peninsula, which forms the S side of King George

Sound. The head, 122m high, with a smooth round surface, almost destitute of vegetation, has a white sterile appearance

when seen from the E. The Flinders Peninsula reaches a height

of 234m, and Limestone Head, on the N side of the peninsula,

is 176m high. Northumberland Rock, 4m high, lies 0.1 mile S

of Bald Head.

6.10 Caution.—Vessels rounding Bald Head should be prepared

for heavy rolls. Marine farms are situated along the N shore of

the Flinders Peninsula.

Off-lying Islands and Dnagers

6.11 Stony Island (35°06'S., 117°47'E.), a dome-shaped

granite island, 45m high, with two or three prominent boulders

on its summit, lies 7.5 miles ENE of Torbay Head, and appears

white with the sun shining on it. It is steep-to and may be approached to a distance of 0.1 mile.

6.11 Passage Reefs (35°08'S., 117°49'E.) are three reefs which

lie between 1.5 and 3 miles SE of Stony Island. The N reef has

a least depth of 12.7m, the SW reef has a least depth of 5.9m,

and the SE reef has a least depth of 9.1m. There is deep water

around each of the reefs and the sea occasionally breaks on

them.

6.11 The Green Islands, two in number about 0.1 mile apart, lie

about 0.5 mile SSW of Sharp Point. The islands are composed

of dark granite and have a low grass covering. A 6m high black

ledge lies 0.1 mile W of the W islet.

6.11 North Rock, with a least depth of 16m, lies 0.5 mile SW of

the Green Islands.

6.12 Eclipse Island (35°11'S., 117°53'E.), 109m high, lies

about 3.5 miles SSW of Cave Point. The island is the largest of

a group of islets, rocks, and dangers that lie in its immediate vicinity, and which extend from Eclipse Island in a NW direction

about 6.25 miles to Stony Island. These dangers may best be

seen on the chart. Eclipse Island Light is shown from a white

lantern on a round concrete tower.

6.12 An area, whose limits are shown on a chart, in which anchorage is prohibited, lies between the N and E sides of Eclipse Island and the coast between Cave Point and Black Head. A

shoal, with a least depth of 10m, lies 1.5 miles NE of the NE

end of Eclipse Island; another shoal, with a least depth of

25.5m, lies 0.5 mile N of the 10m shoal.

6.12 Maude Reef (35°12'S., 117°58'E.), which has a depth of less

than 2m, lies 4 miles ESE of Eclipse Island Light; the reef seldom breaks.

6.12 Vancouver Rock, 5m high, lies 2.5 miles SW of Bald Head.

The swell, which usually rolls in from the S and W, breaks violently over this steep-to rock.

6.12 At night, vessels making for King George Sound should

maintain depths of 82m until a bearing of Breaksea Island

Light (see paragraph 6.16) indicates that they have passed

Maude Reef.

6.12 Caution.—Near Bald Head and Limestone Head, gusts of

wind of great strength sometime occur when the general direction of wind at sea is between S and W.

King George Sound

6.13 King George Sound (35°03'S., 117°58'E.) is entered

between Bald Head and Herald Point, about 5 miles NNE. The

sound is the safest and most convenient port along this coast of

Australia. There is good anchorage in the sound, and on its W

side is Princess Royal Harbor, which is landlocked, and available to ocean-going vessels. The SW part of the sound is

known as Frenchman Bay and the NW part is known as Middleton Bay; Oyster Harbor lies N of Middleton Bay. The port

of Albany lies on the N shore of Princess Royal Harbor.

6.13 The SW shore of King George Sound trends in a NW direction from the Flinders Peninsula to the Vancouver Peninsula,

about 3.5 miles distant. The summit of the Flinders Peninsula

is 234m high, while the hilly land of the Vancouver Peninsula

rises to a height of 82m in its center. Possession Point is the NE

extremity of the Vancouver Peninsula.

6.13 Caution.—A marine farm lies between Limestone Head and

Waterbay Point; the extremities of the fish cages within the area are marked by lighted buoys.

6.14 Frenchman Bay (35°05'S., 117°57'E.) lies between

Flat Rock on the S and Mistaken Island to the North. Flat

Rock, 2m high, is located 0.2 mile offshore, 1.75 miles W of
Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 143

Pub. 175

Limestone Head. Mistaken Island, 44m high, is located 2 miles

NNW of Flat Rock. There are a number of above-water rocks

between it and shore.

6.14 Seal Island, 32m high, is located 1.5 miles NW of Limestone

Head and is steep-to, but has a rocky spit extending about 0.1

mile from its W side; the island lies 1.25 miles E of Frenchman

Bay. An 18m patch lies about 0.65 mile NW of the island.

6.14 Frenchman Bay provides convenient anchorage over sand

and weeds, in a depth of 16m, about 0.35 mile offshore, with

Seal Island and the center of Michaelmas Island in line and Flat

Rock bearing 131°. Good anchorage can also be found, in all

but very strong W or N winds, between Seal Island and the first

sandy beach W of Limestone Head, with Limestone Head

bearing 073°. A partly submerged pipeline, which is a hazard

to navigation, extends about 0.3 mile NNW from a disused

whaling station, 0.25 mile SSW of Flat Rock. A dangerous

wreck lies 650m SW of Seal Island.

6.15 Herald Point (35°01'S., 118°02'E.), on the N shore of

King George Sound, is covered with grass; the land close NW

of the point rises to a height of 69m. The coast is backed by a

grassy ridge, which rises to Mount Taylor, at a height of 206m,

and then slopes gradually to Ledge Point, 1.25 miles W of Herald Point. The beach between Herald Point and Ledge Point is

fronted by sunken rocks lying up to 0.1 mile offshore.

6.15 The coast between Ledge Point and Cheyne Head, about

1.75 miles WNW, recedes and forms a sandy cove where small

vessels, with local knowledge, can obtain anchorage sheltered

by all but SW winds.

6.15 From Cheyne Head, the coast trends NW 1.5 miles to the entrance to Oyster Harbor; the land behind the coast rises to a

height of 156m and is densely wooded.

6.15 Herald Rocks (35°02'S., 118°02'E.), with least depths of

4m, lie between 0.3 and 0.5 mile S of Herald Point. Middle

Rock, with a least depth of 8.3m, lies 0.25 mile S of the S extremity of Herald Rocks; Mount Pleasant Rock, with a least

depth of 5.1m, lies about 0.25 mile farther SSW.

6.15 Gull Rock, 10m high, is located 0.35 mile WSW of Ledge

Point; there is a small dry rock lying close W. There are depths

from 5.3 to 9.1m in the channel between Gull Rock and Ledge

Point.

6.15 Cheyne Ledge, farther W along the coast about 1 mile WNW

of Cheyne Head, is a small rocky ledge, awash at high water,

located about 0.1 mile offshore. The entrance to Oyster Harbor

is obstructed by a bar, with a depth of 3m, in the fairway. The

tidal currents run with considerable strength in the entrance

and no vessel should attempt to enter it without local knowledge.

6.15 The coast between the entrance to Oyster Harbor and Wooding Point, 2 miles SW, is low and forms Middleton Bay. Ellen

Cove, near the S end of Middleton Bay, has a jetty, with depths

of 1 to 1.4m alongside, which can be used by boats. 

6.15 Wooding Point (35°02'S., 117°55'E.) is the E extremity and

King Point is the SE extremity of the headland that forms the N

side of Princess Royal Harbor. King Point Light is shown from

a white framework tower.

6.15 A spoil ground lies 0.25 mile N of Wooding Point and Whale

Head Rock lies close offshore, 0.15 mile N of King Point.

6.16 Belches Foul Ground (35°06'S., 118°03'E.) lies 1.5

miles ENE of Bald Head; it consists of a number of rocky

patches. East Shoal, with depths of 11.3m, and West Shoal,

with depths of 16.8m, are the shallowest. During S gales, the

sea breaks heavily on East Shoal and the whole area of Belches

Foul Ground is covered with a dangerous and confused sea.

6.16 Breaksea Island (35°04'S., 118°03'E.), 3 miles NE of Bald

Head, is a rugged mass of rock 103m high, with an islet 20m

high, located off its E end. A light is shown from a round stone

tower on the summit of the Breaksea Island; two ruined dwellings stand at the top of the island E of the light. A detached

shoal, with a depth of 16m, lies 0.4 mile ENE of the E end of

Breaksea Island. Less water may exist over this shoal.

6.16 South Channel lies between Belches Foul Ground and

Breaksea Island.

6.16 Michaelmas Island (35°03'S., 118°03'E.), 152m high, lies

0.75 mile N of Breaksea Island and is covered with grass and

stunted trees.

6.16 Middle Channel, which separates Breaksea Island from

Michaelmas Island, is deep and clear of dangers.

6.16 North Channel lies between Michaelmas Island and Herald

Point, on the mainland, about 1 mile N. The channel is encumbered with rocks. A wreck, with a depth of 10m, lies in North

Channel, close N of the W end of Michaelmas Island. Vessels

with a draft of greater than 3m should not use North Channel

without a pilot.

6.16 Michaelmas Reef (35°03'S., 118°01'E.), which has a least

depth of 6.3m, consists of several rocky patches that lie from

0.6 to 1.1 miles W of Michaelmas Island.

6.16 Gio Batta Patch is a detached area of foul ground, with a

least depth of 5.5m, lying about 1.75 miles W of Michaelmas

Island. 

6.16 Princess Royal Harbor (35°03'S., 117°53'E.), which is entered through a dredged channel that lies between Possession

Point on the S and King Point on the N, is shallow over the

greater part of its area, especially on its S and W sides. Princess

Royal Harbor is very sheltered from the sea and an excellent

place to moor with a well marked channel. A considerable area

has been dredged in the NE part to form the port of Albany,

which can accommodate large vessels.

Albany (35°02'S., 117°54'E.)

World Port Index No. 54470

6.17 The port of Albany lies within Princess Royal Harbor.

The port includes all the waters of King George Sound and

Princess Royal Harbor lying W of a line joining the E extremity of Bald Head, Breaksea Island Light, and Herald Point.

6.17 Albany is primarily concerned with the import of general

merchandise, petroleum products, phosphate, and sulfur. Exports include grain, silica sand, and woodchips.

6.17 Winds—Weather.—Prevailing winds are from the W in

winter and the E in summer.

6.17 Tides—Currents.—The tides are often irregular and predominantly diurnal. Springs rise about 0.9m and neaps rise

Albany Port Authority Home Page

http://www.albanyport.com.au
144 Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 

Pub. 175

about 0.7m.

6.17 Tidal currents are not appreciable in King George Sound, but

run with considerable strength in the entrance to Princess Royal Harbor; the flood current sets SW across the entrance and

the ebb current sets towards the NE.

6.17 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance to Albany is through

King George Sound, then via the dredged channel that lies between King Point and Possession Point. The channel is

dredged to a depth of 12.2m over a width of 145m. The channel and the turning basin, which is also dredged to a depth of

12.2m, are marked by lighted beacons and indicated by a

range. A 230m section of the channel NW of Possession Point

has been dredged to a depth of 12.5m.

6.17 The Princess Royal Land Backed Wharf fronts the shore

from a position about 1 mile W of the entrance. The berths are

numbered from the W. The wharf is 608m in length, with a

depth alongside Berth No. 1 and Berth No. 2 of 10.4m and

12.2m alongside Berth No. 3. Berth No. 3 handles bulk cargo,

mostly grain, in addition to container and ro/ro vessels. Bulk

petroleum products are worked at Berth No. 2. Berth No. 6,

which handles woodchips, is 216m in length and has a depth of

12.2m alongside.

6.17 Vessels up to 67,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 220m, a

maximum draft of 11.5m, and a maximum beam of 33m, can

be accommodated, subject to the harbormaster’s discretion and

dependent on the weather and tidal conditions during daylight

hours.

6.17 Aspect.—The lights that are shown on Breaksea Island and

King Point are good landmarks. A directional light, leading

NNW from near the pilot boarding position, stands on Emu

Point (35°00'S., 117°57'E.). Range lights at the head of Princess Royal Harbor lead through the harbor approach to the SE

end of the port of Albany. A memorial illuminated by floodlights is situated near the summit of Mount Clarence, 1.25

miles WNW of King Point; Mount Clarence has a height of

186m. An observation tower, lit at night, stands on Mount

Melville, 157m high, about 1.25 miles WNW of Mount Clarence. 

6.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage for Albany is compulsory. The pilot station is situated near Semaphore Point, about 0.5 mile WSW of

King Point. Pilots embark about 3 miles ESE of King Point

Light.

6.17 Albany is a first port of entry. Radio channels guarded are

VHF channels 6, 12, and 16, but there is limited Port Radio

Service. Vessels should send an ETA 24 hours and 2 hours in

advance.

6.17 Anchorage.—Good holding ground lies 1.5 miles E of Possession Point. Seven designated anchor berths, with 560m radius swinging circles, have been established approximately 1

mile E of Wooding Point and Possession Point. They are lettered A through G and can best be seen on the chart. Anchoring

is prohibited in the charted area, about 1 mile E of King Point,

having a radius of 0.5 mile.

6.17 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the W wishing to

use South Channel should steer to pass about 2.75 miles E of

Bald Head, until South Channel can be entered, when King

Point Light bears 292°. King Point Light is sometimes difficult

to make out, but a group of boulders on rising ground behind

the light can be used as a reference. Continue on course 292°

for the pilot boarding position.

6.17 Vessels approaching from the E wishing to use South Channel should steer for Seal Island on a course of 270°, and then

change course to 292° when King Point Light is on that bearing, continuing on to the pilot boarding position.

6.17 Middle Channel, although seldom used, can be used by vessels approaching from the E. By day, keep the S extremity of

Rock Dunder (35°02'S., 118°10'E.) astern bearing 077°, steering a course of 257° until King Point Light bears 292°, when

course is altered to 292°, continuing on to the pilot boarding

position. At night, alter course S after passing the W end of

Breaksea Island until King Point Light bears more than 290°,

when the vessel will be S of Gio Batta Patch.

6.17 Caution.—Several marine farms have been established in

the waters adjacent to Albany and can best be seen on the chart.

King George Sound to Esperance

6.18 Cape Vancouver (35°02'S., 118°11'E.) is the S exReproduced with permission of the Albany Port Authority

Albany from WNW

Courtesy of Albany Port Authority

Princess Royal Land Backed Wharf
Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 145

Pub. 175

tremity of an islet, 51m high, that lies 7.5 miles E of Herald

Point. The coast recedes about 2.25 miles between Herald

Point and Cape Vancouver and is backed by a series of hills, of

which the most conspicuous are Reservoir Hill, 165m high, 6

miles NNW of Cape Vancouver, and Mount Gardner, 399m

high. Mount Gardner is a peaked mass of granite partially covered with grass and poisonous scrub.

6.18 Stirling Range lies about 40 miles N of Cape Vancouver and

has several conspicuous peaks. The most conspicuous one is

Toolbrunup (Castle Peak), 1,018m high, and is located near the

center of the range. Bluff Knoll and Ellen Peak, both higher

than Toolbrunup, lie near the E end of the range.

6.18 False Island and Inner Islet lie close off the coast 1 and 2

miles, respectively, NW of Cape Vancouver. Foul ground lies

between the two islands and may best be seen on the chart.

6.18 Rock Dunder (35°02'S., 118°10'E.), a long, narrow rock

60m high, lies 1.25 miles W of Cape Vancouver. Close E of the

rock is a small rock above water; the rest of Rock Dunder is

steep-to.

6.18 The coast between Cape Vancouver and South Point, about

3.5 miles N, is steep and rocky. Coffin Island (Caffin Island),

45m high, lies 0.1 mile offshore, 2 miles NE of Cape Vancouver. A number of rocks lie up to 0.35 mile S of the island; the

outer one is 2.5m high.

6.18 Two Peoples Bay, which has not been properly surveyed, lies

between South Point and North Point, 2 miles NNE. A ledge of

rock extends about 0.1 mile N from South Point and a ledge, on

which the sea generally breaks, lies about 0.3 mile NE of this

ledge.

6.19 North Point (34°57'S., 118°13'E.) is a rough, stony

islet, 27m high, with little vegetation on its top; it is connected

to the mainland by a ledge of rocks. Immediately behind the

point, the land rises steeply to a height of 195m; a remarkable

square granite boulder is located on the summit.

The coast from North Point to a rocky projection about 2.25

miles NE is a long rock-fringed sandy beach, backed by a ridge

of bush-topped sand hillocks. The coast between the rocky projection and Mermaid Point, about 7.5 miles E, is steep and has

several rocky indentations.

6.19 Mount Manypeaks rises to an elevation of 565m, 4 miles NE

of North Point; it falls gradually toward the Waychinicup River, 3.5 miles E.

6.19 The Waychinicup River flows into the sea 4 miles W of Mermaid Point. Excellent shelter for small craft with local knowledge can be found within the second bend of the river.

6.19 The coastal ridge in the vicinity of Mermaid Point rises to an

elevation of 150 to 195m, surmounted by huge granite boulders, and terminates 2 miles NE.

6.19 The Twin Islets, 2 miles SSW of Mermaid Point, are each

26m high. There are submerged rocks between the islets; a

shallow patch extends 0.25 mile N from the N islet. The sea

generally breaks on a rock approximately 1 mile W of Mermaid Point.

6.19 Bald Island (34°55'S., 118°27'E.), 311m high, is separated

from the mainland by a channel 0.75 mile wide. Submerged

rocks extend 0.1 mile from its NW side. The sea breaks constantly on a detached ledge, 0.6m high, that lies 0.25 mile S of

the island.

6.19 Bird Rock, 3.6m high, is located 0.5 mile NE of Bald Island.

A small rock lies close W and a similar rock lies close S of

Bird Rock.

6.19 The coast between Bald Island and Butty Head, about 173

miles ENE, has not been closely surveyed and special caution

is necessary when navigating in those areas where no sounding

are charted.

6.20 Lookout Point (34°53'S., 118°26'E.) lies about 2

miles NE of Mermaid Point. Anchorage, in a depth of 12.8m,

sand, may be obtained off a sandy beach about 1.25 miles

WNW of Lookout Point, with Mount Manypeaks bearing 260°

and Lookout Point in line with the E side of Bald Island, bearing 123°.

6.20 The coast from the above anchorage to a point about 10

miles NNE is one continuous sand beach. Warriup Hill lies

about 2.5 miles N of the N end of the sandy beach. Warriup

Hill is a prominent scrubby mount, 311m high. Green Ridge,

from 245 to 309m high, extends W from a position N of Warriup Hill.

6.20 Haul-off Rock (34°42'S., 118°39'E.), a prominent granite

rock, 96m high, lies 1 mile offshore, 8 miles E of Warriup Hill.

A ledge of rocks extends off its SW end and a detached ledge

lies 0.5 mile SW of the highest part of the rock.

6.20 Two small rocks lie close to Ledge Point, 4 miles NE of

Haul-off Rock. 

6.20 Cape Riche, 4 miles farther NE, is a cliffy projection of moderate elevation, with a level appearance.

6.20 Cheyne Islet, 34m high, lies 1 mile NW of Cape Riche.

Large vessels can anchor midway between the islet and the

cape. Smaller vessels can anchor W of the islet and vessels of

not more than 3m draft can anchor SW of the islet.

6.20 A dangerous reef, reported to have a least depth of 5.5m and

a charted depth of 8.5m, is steep-to and lies 4 miles SE of Cape

Riche. As the sea has seldom been seen to break on this reef, it

is considered to be of small extent.

6.20 The coast between Cape Riche and Cape Knob, 23 miles E,

forms a large bay, which may be identified by the land on its W

side being cliffy and that on the E side consisting of almost

bare sand hills.

6.21 Groper Point (34°30'S., 118°54'E.), 58m high, is located 9 miles NE of Cape Riche. Close NW of the point, the

land rises to form Mount Groper, which has a height of 154m.

6.21 Smooth Rocks, located about 11 miles E of Groper Point,

consist of three bare rocks. The S rock, the largest of the three,

is 51m high. Roe Rock, 3.6m high, lies about 2 miles ESE of

Smooth Rocks.

6.21 Cape Knob (34°32'S., 119°14'E.) is a rugged stony promontory which rises to a height of 220m, in a position about 1.5

miles NNE.

6.21 Good anchorage can be found, in a depth of 13m, off a sandy

beach close NW of Cape Knob; it has been reported anchorage

could be obtained W of the cape.

6.21 Dillon Bay is the sandy bight between Cape Knob and Point

Henry, about 5.5 miles ENE. Breakers and indications of

shoals have been observed in the middle of the bay and it

should not be entered without local knowledge.

6.21 Black Point (34°27'S., 119°25'E.) is the NE extremity of a

small promontory which extends E from the coast 1.75 miles

NE of Point Henry.
146 Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 

Pub. 175

6.21 Bremer Bay is located between Black Point and the W extremity of Point Hood, about 4.5 miles NE. Glass Islet lies 0.5

mile offshore, on the W side of the bay, 2.5 miles N of Black

Point. It is reported that Bremer Bay appears free from dangers

and that anchorage, sheltered from all winds, could be found in

it.

6.22 Hood Point (34°22'S., 119°33'E.), 112m high, is the

SE extremity of a cliffy headland that projects about 4 miles in

a SE direction from the general trend of the coast. When seen

at a distance from seaward, the headland appears to be an island, as the land connecting it to the mainland is low and

sandy. A conspicuous building stands on the N side of Hood

Point.

6.22 The Doubtful Islands, the highest of which is 75m, extend

2.25 miles E from Hood Point. Between the two E and two W

islands, there is a channel 1 mile in width that has depths of 37

to 44m and which shoals to 22m, close around the N side of the

two inner islands.

6.22 Seal Rock, 3m high, and a sunken rock close N of it, lie 1

mile NW of the two W islands of the Doubtful Islands.

6.22 Doubtful Island Bay is formed within the Doubtful Islands.

The bay affords shelter from winds between S and SW.

6.22 There are depths of 13m, about 0.1 mile offshore, 1 mile NW

of Hood Point. A submerged rock lies near the shore of the bay,

4 miles NW of Seal Rock.

6.22 The land on the W and NW side of the bay is sandy and

rocky; several barren peaked hills rise to considerable heights a

short distance inland. The mouths of Gordon Inlet and the

Boondadup River are located about 6.5 and 10 miles, respectively, N of Hood Point. West Mount Barren rises to a height of

372m, in a position about 12 miles NNW of the same point.

6.22 Ann Point (34°10'S., 119°34'E.) is located about 12.5 miles

N of Point Hood; the St. Mary River mouth is close N of Ann

Point and the Fitzgerald River flows into the sea in a position

close N of Point Charles, which is located about 4.5 miles NE

of Ann Point.

6.22 Middle Mount Barren, 457m high, is located about 6 miles

NE of Point Charles. From Middle Mount Barren, the high

rocky coast trends NE for about 19 miles to East Mount Barren, which rises to a height of 299m about 0.5 mile inland.

6.22 The Whoogarup Range rises to an elevation of 392m, 13

miles NE of Point Charles.

6.22 Red Islet, 43m high, lies near the coast 5 miles ENE of Middle Mount Barren; submerged rocks extend nearly 1 mile SW

from the islet. The Hammersley River flows into the sea in a

position about 7 miles NE of Red Islet.

6.22 Mary Ann Point (33°57'S., 120°08'E.) lies 6 miles ESE of

East Mount Barren; the intervening coast is low, sandy, and is

broken in its W part by the entrance to Culham Inlet. The coast

is fronted, in its E part, by foul ground and reefs which extend

a considerable distance offshore. 

6.23 Mary Ann Haven (Hopetoun) (33°57'S., 120°07'E.)

lies within the reefs which extend about 1 mile off Mary Ann

Point. The haven is exposed to all except offshore winds, but

during SW gales, when the seas break heavily on the outer

reefs, it is quite smooth within. A light is shown from the

breakwater at Mary Ann Haven. 

6.23 Anchorage may be obtained inside the reefs, in a depth of

4.9m, good holding ground, and outside the entrance, in a

depth of 7m, with No. 1 Beacon and No. 2 Beacon in line.

6.23 A directional light leads E of all dangers in the approach to

the haven. No. 1 Beacon and No. 2 Beacon, on the W side of

the haven, in line bearing 275°, lead through the entrance and

to the inner anchorage. Both beacons were reported (1989) to

be in disrepair. No. 4 Beacon marks the shoal on the S side of

the entrance.

Caution.—Although this coast has not been closely surveyed, there are dangers known to exist between East Mount

Barren and Powell Point, 20 miles E of Mary Ann Point.

Soundings give no indication of the proximity of the dangers,

and many of them, several meters below the surface, are only

occasionally discernible in rough weather.

6.23 A small sunken rock, on which the sea seldom breaks, lies

about 9 miles SSE of East Mount Barren; a similar rock lies

about 3 miles farther E. A shoal, with patches over an area of

1.5 miles in a N to S direction, is located about 9 miles SE of

Mary Ann Point; the sea breaks heavily on this shoal.

6.24 West Islet (34°05'S., 120°28'E.) is a low sandy islet,

with a smooth and sterile aspect, 19 miles ESE of Mary Ann

Point. Black Rock lies 1.5 miles WSW and a reef, depth unknown, lies 1 mile NNE, respectively, of West Islet. Breakers

exist 2 miles N and 2.5 miles NW of West Islet. Breakers were

reported to extend from the coast nearly out to the islet and it is

doubtful whether there is a safe passage between it and the

coast.

6.25 Powell Point (33°56'S., 120°33'E.), 20 miles E of

Mary Ann Point, is the SE extremity of the promontory that

forms the S side of Bedford Harbor (Starvation Boat Harbor).

North Powell Point is the NE extremity of the promontory and

Maintop Hill, 36m high, the highest point of the promontory,

lies 0.5 mile W of North Powell Point.

6.25 Bedford Harbor affords good shelter during SW winds in an

anchorage 0.35 mile N of North Powell Point, in a depth of

7.6m, but there is a 5.2m patch about 0.1 mile N of this anchorage. Inside Rock, with a least depth of 3.6m, lies 0.25 mile

NNE of North Powell Point; a rocky shoal, with a least depth

of 3m, and which generally breaks, lies 0.5 mile NE of the

same point.

6.25 Submerged reefs extend 5 or 6 miles E from a position 1

mile NE of North Powell Point; the sea breaks over them in

places along their entire length in any but the finest weather.

6.25 Shoal Cape (33°53'S., 121°07'E.), located about 28 miles E

of Powell Point, is composed of sand hills that resemble white

cliffs. The Oldfield River discharges into the sea in a position

about 9 miles E of North Powell Point; the Margaret River discharges into the sea about 11 miles farther E. The Young River

and the Lort River discharge into Stokes Inlet, which is located

about 3 miles NW of the cape. An islet, surrounded by foul

ground and breakers, lies close off the SE side of Shoal Cape.

Depths of 21.9m and 10.9m lie 5.5 and 7 miles, respectively, S

of the mouth of the Oldfield River.

6.26 The Rocky Islets (34°04'S., 120°54'E.), two small islets about 54m high, lie 17 miles SW of Shoal Cape. The islets,

which are joined at their S ends by a narrow, rocky, boulderstrewn beach, are surrounded by breakers which appear to ex-
Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 147

Pub. 175

tend farthest from the SE side. A rock, which breaks, lies about

1.25 miles E of the islets; a 1.8m patch, which breaks, lies

about 3.25 miles SW of the islets. The depths in the area make

it appear probable that there are other sunken rocks in the vicinity.

6.26 The two islets, and the beach which connects them, form a

circular basin in which anchorage may be found by vessels up

to 36.6m in length, in a depth of about 18m. The entrance is

from N and is fairly steep-to on both sides. Good anchorage is

afforded in E winds, but in W winds it is hazardous.

6.26 Fanny Cove (33°52'S., 121°07'E.) is a small rock and reefencumbered cove that lies close NE of Shoal Cape. No shelter

is available in the cove.

6.26 Barker Inlet lies 10 miles ENE of Shoal Cape. From the inlet, grassy hills extend about 11 miles E, and are backed by

sandy, undulating hills; Butty Head lies 7 miles farther SE.

6.26 There is a heavy surf all along the coast between Shoal Cape

and Butty Head, 28 miles E. Red Island lies about 11.5 miles E

of Shoal Cape and SE of Barker Inlet. Mariners are advised to

keep at least 5 miles S of the latitude of Red Island, due to the

existence of unexamined shoals.

6.26 Butty Head (33°54'S., 121°39'E.) is a dark headland covered with stunted scrub that rises from its seaward extremity to

a conspicuous conical hill. The shore in the vicinity of the head

is very rocky. Bayliss Rock, 2.1m high, lies about 0.7 mile W

of Butty Head. The sea always breaks heavily on this rock.

6.26 Butty Harbor, 2 miles NE of Butty Head, is only suitable for

small coasting vessels; there is good landing at the SW corner

of the cove.

6.26 Between Butty Head and the rocky point abreast Obsevatory

Island, 6.5 miles SE, the coast is composed of sand and limestone cliffs backed by conspicuous white sand hills. The rocky

point attains a height of 92m. From the rocky point, the coast

trends ENE for 5.75 miles to Dempster Head and is divided into three bays by two rugged rocky projections, which have

sandy beaches on either side of them.

Approaches to Esperance

6.27 Esperance Bay (33°54'S., 121°58'E.) is contained between the point N of Observatory Island and Cape Le Grand,

17 miles ESE. The town and port of Esperance are situated on

the NW shore of the bay.

6.27 The N and E shores of Esperance Bay, between the town and

the headland which rises to Mount Le Grand, about 13 miles

SE, consists of a long stretch of sand broken by Bandy Creek

and by Wylie Head, 4.75 miles ENE of Esperance. There is

good landing in Wylie Bay, a small bay close N of Wylie Head,

but elsewhere there is a constant heavy surf.

6.27 There is a small craft harbor, protected by breakwaters, at

Bandy Creek.

6.27 Cape Le Grand (34°01'S., 122°07'E.), 154m high, the SE

extremity of Esperance Bay, rises to Mount Le Grand, 345m

high, 1.75 miles NE.

6.27 Mount Merivale rises to a height of 197m, 6.5 miles E of

Wylie Head, and is conspicuous from seaward.

6.27 Low Rock, 8m high, is located in the N part of Esperance

Bay, about 1.25 miles SSW of Wylie Head. Lion Island, 52m

high, is located 1.5 miles offshore, 3 miles SE of Wylie Head.

Other rocks, 1 to 6m high, lie between Lion Island and the

shore.

6.27 Woody Island (33°58'S., 122°01'E.), 127m high, is the largest island in the SE part of Esperance Bay. Time Rock, Thistle

Rock, and Murray Rock are among the named rocks located

SE of Woody Island. The positions of these and of adjacent unnamed islets and dangers may best be seen on the chart.

6.27 The two channels in the W approach to Esperance Bay are

known as West Channel and Causeway Channel.

6.28 West Channel (33°57'S., 121°42'E.) lies between

Butty Head on the N and West Group, which consists of three

principal islands and a number of islets, rocks, and dangers, lying from 8 miles SSW to 6.5 miles SSE of this headland. The

channel leads in an E direction for about 15 miles and is joined

by Causeway Channel in the entrance of Esperance Bay. General depths of 37m and over are found in the fairway of West

Channel.

6.28 Figure of Eight Island (34°02'S., 121°36'E.), at the SW end

of West Group, has a height of 112m; it is rocky and covered,

in places, with coarse grass and small scrub. A rocky islet, 30m

high, lies off its S extremity.

6.28 A light is situated on the summit of Figure of Eight Island

and is shown from a lantern on a concrete base; a white hut

stands nearby.

6.28 Caution.—A 6.5m shoal lies 0.75 mile SW of the light; a

2.2m patch, with a below-water rock close NE of it, lies about

1 mile SE of the light.

6.29 Capps Island (33°59'N., 121°41'E.), 3.75 miles NE

of Figure of Eight Island, is the N danger of West Group. Fury

Rock, awash, on which the sea breaks heavily, lies 1.25 miles

SE of Capps Island and is the E danger of this group. There are

a number of rocks, islands, and submerged patches between

Figure of Eight Island and Fury Rock, which may best be seen

on the chart.

6.29 Vessels should not attempt to pass through West Group.

6.29 Observatory Island (33°56'S., 121°48'E.), on the N side of

West Channel, is very rocky with stunted vegetation on its rugged, 78m high, summit. Foul ground extends 0.5 mile SW from

the island, and a rock, on which the sea occasionally breaks,

lies 0.1 mile off its E point. A 2.2m shoal lies in the narrow

channel between Observatory Island and the coast.

6.29 Gig Rocks, 5m high, lie 1 mile W of Observatory Island;

foul ground extends 0.25 mile WSW of them.

6.29 Sunday Patch, 1.25 miles E of Observatory Island, is a rocky

patch with a least known depth of 8.6m. The patch breaks in

heavy weather.

6.29 Charley Island, located about 3.25 miles E of Observatory

Island, is rocky and sparsely covered with vegetation. It rises to

a fairly well-defined summit, 106m high. Two rocks are located on a ledge that extends about 0.4 mile SE from the island.

The outermost of the two rocks is 9m high.

6.29 Cull Island (33°55'S., 121°54'E.) lies 0.75 mile E of Charley

Island. There are some stunted trees on the flat summit, which

is 94m high. The island can be approached with safety to a distance of 0.25 mile on its E and S sides.

6.29 A light is situated on the summit of Cull Island and is shown

from a white hut, surmounted by a lantern.

6.29 There are rocks and islets N of Observatory Island and the islands E, previously described, which do not affect the safety of
148 Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 

Pub. 175

vessels in West Channel; these rocks and islets may be seen on

the chart.

6.30 Causeway Channel (34°00'S., 121°50'E.), deep and

free from dangers, lies between West Group, Sunk Rocks, and

Douglass Patch on the N, and The Causeway on the S.

6.30 Sunk Rocks, two rocks with depths of 5.5m, lie 4.5 miles

SSW of Observatory Island. They are steep-to and will break

heavily, at intervals, with moderate S winds and swells.

6.30 Douglass Patch, with a least depth of 12.8m, lies 3 miles

SSE of Observatory Island; the patch breaks in heavy weather.

A 22m bank lies 1 mile W of the patch.

6.30 The Causeway, which forms the S side of Causeway Channel, consists of rocks, islands, and sunken reefs extending from

Giant Rocks to Long Island, which lies about 16 miles to the

NE.

6.30 Giant Rocks (34°11'S., 121°40'E.) are two rocks lying in a

position 8.5 miles SSE of the Figure of Eight Islands. The W

rock has a height of 13m and the E rock has a height of 9m.

These rocks should be given a wide berth when a vessel is approaching Causeway Channel from the S.

6.30 A reef, on which the sea breaks heavily, lies 3.75 miles NE

of the E Giant Rocks, and another reef lies 1.75 miles farther

ENE.

6.30 Smith Rock, 6m high, and Hendy Isle, 16m high, are located

about 12 and 13 miles, respectively, NE of Giant Rocks and are

surrounded by foul ground. A sunken reef lies 0.4 mile NW of

Smith Rock and a rock, 6m high, with foul ground extending

0.2 mile SW from it, is located 0.85 mile NE of Smith Rock.

6.30 Long Island, 103m high, lies 3.25 miles E of Hendy Island.

Long Island and the other reefs and islands of The Causeway,

not previously described, are of no danger to vessels in transit

of Causeway Channel.

6.30 Coates Reef (33°59'S., 121°58'E.), nearly awash and with

the sea nearly always breaking on it, lies on the E side of

Causeway Channel, and is the SW danger of a group of islands,

rocks, and reefs that are located in the entrance of Esperance

Bay. Coates Reef lies 4.5 miles SSE of Cull Island.

6.30 Magistrate Rocks, the largest being 14m high, form a conspicuous group rising from a small bank with depths of less

than 37m, and are located 3 miles E of Cull Island. The SW

rocks are awash, and the sea always breaks heavily on them.

6.30 Limpet Rock, 24m high, is located in Esperance Bay 3.75

miles N of Cull Island. There is deep water within 0.1 mile of

the rock. A spoil ground lies about 1 mile WSW of Limpet

Rock.

6.30 Directions.—Vessels approaching Esperance Bay from the

E are recommended to pass well clear S of Salisbury Island

(34°22'S., 123°33'E.), and S of Termination Island (34°29'S.,

122°00'E.); this will lead S of the Archipelago of the Recherche. When the vessel has reached a position slightly W of the

meridian of Figure of Eight Island, course should then be set N

toward that island, then as directed on the illustration for

Causeway Channel. These directions will insure passing W of

Giant Rocks.

6.30 Vessels approaching from the S should pass S of Termination

Island, then proceed as directed above.

Esperance (33°52'S., 121°54'E.)

World Port Index No. 54450

6.31 Esperance, an artificial harbor situated on the NW

side of Esperance Bay close N of Dempster Head, is protected

by a long breakwater on the SE and by land on the W side.

Esperance

Esperance Port Authority Home Page

http://www.esperanceport.com.au
Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 149

Pub. 175

6.31 Tides—Currents.—The port has a tidal range of 0.7 to 1m.

6.31 Depths—Limitations.—An area maintained to a depth of

14.5m lies in the harbor and swing basin and is approached

through a channel with a depth of 19m, which extends about

0.2 mile ENE. Inner Harbor Berth No. 1 and Inner Harbor

Berth No. 2, which are 244m and 213m in length, respectively,

and having a depth of 14.5m alongside, lie on the SW side of

the maintained area. Movements at Berth No. 1 are restricted to

daylight hours only. Berth No. 3 lies along the NW side of the

breakwater, is 230m in length, and has a depth of 19m alongside. Vessels berth starboard side alongside Berth No. 3.

6.31 A tanker jetty exists 1.5 miles N of Dempster Head. A light

is shown from its head.

6.31 Aspect.—A breakwater, 4m high, extends NNE, then ENE,

from the NE side of Demster Head (33°53'S., 121°54'E.).

Lights are shown from a white round tower at the angle of the

breakwater and also at the breakwater head about 0.1 mile ENE

of the angle. A conspicuous tower, 150m in elevation, stands

0.4 mile NW of Demster Head.

6.31 The channel leading to the berths is marked by a lighted

range.

6.31 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory, except for vessels exempted by law, and is available 24 hours. The pilot boarding

ground is about 1 miles NE of Cull Island. Ships should signal

their estimated time of arrival 48 hours in advance, confirming

or amending the ETA 24 hours and 2 hours prior to arrival

through Perth. Vessels should contact Esperance Harbor 1 hour

before arrival on VHF channel 16. Vessels berth during daylight hours only, but may berth at night or sail at any time subject to the harbormaster’s discretion.

6.31 Anchorage.—The recommended anchorage is 1.5 miles NE

or ENE of the head of the breakwater, in depths of 14.5 to

27.5m; a heavy swell can be experienced in this anchorage.

Anchorage may also be found ESE of the breakwater head, in

depths of 7 to 9m, sand and weed; the anchorage is safe with

good holding ground, but it is uncomfortable.

6.31 Directions.—Vessels approaching Esperance via West

Channel should pass 1 mile N of Capps Island, steering 080° to

pass 0.5 mile S of the rocks off Charley Island. Causeway

Channel is then joined S of Cull Island.

6.31 Vessels approaching Esperance via Causeway Channel

should steer a mid-channel course through Causeway Channel,

observing that Limpet Rock open E of the E extremity of Cull

Island leads SE of Sunk Rocks and Douglas Patch. Cull Island

should be rounded at a distance of about 1 mile.

The Archipelago of the Recherche

6.32 The Archipelago of the Recherche consists of a great

number of islands and reefs and extends from Figure of Eight

Island (34°02'S., 121°36'E.), the W island of West Group, 7

miles SW of Butty Head, to the N rock of Eastern Group, 123

miles E; it extends up to 40 miles offshore in places.

6.32 Vessels, unless proceeding to Esperance Bay, should avoid

the archipelago at all times, as a haze is frequently found

among the islands, in the neighborhood of the small detached

reefs in the SW part of the archipelago, and up to 20 miles

from any of the islands.

6.32 The islands and dangers of the archipelago are not discussed

in detail; only those which lie near a proposed track are described. Vessels without local knowledge should not traverse

the area as much of it is inadequately surveyed. Passage should

not be attempted at night.

6.32 The archipelago is a nature reserve and landing on the islands is restricted.

6.32 A local magnetic anomaly has been observed among the islands of the archipelago. In the vicinity of Termination Island,

the variation observed when W of the island was 5° greater

than that observed when E of it.

6.32 Termination Island (34°28'S., 122°00'E.), 114m high, lies

27 miles S of Long Island and is the S island of the

archipelago. It is a solid mass of rock of a very light color, with

scarcely any vegetation on it; it is not easily seen from a

distance. When viewed from E or W, the summit appears well

defined.

6.32 Caution.—A depth of 13m lies 7.5 miles W of Termination

Island. A bank, with a depth of 18.3m on it, was reported to lie

19 miles S of Termination Island.

6.33 Waterwitch Rocks (34°20'S., 121°41'E.) are two

submerged rocks, with depths of 1.2 to 2.4m, that lie close together 12.5 miles NW of Termination Island; the sea breaks

over them only occasionally in moderate weather. A shoal,

with a depth of 6.5m, lies about 2 miles W of Waterwitch

Rocks.

6.33 Middle Rock (34°18'S., 121°50'E.), a black smooth-topped

rock, 9m high, with dangers lying off it, lies 8.5 miles E of Waterwitch Rock. A submerged reef, on which the sea occasionally breaks, lies about 3.75 miles NNE of Middle Rock. An 8.7m

shoal lies about 3.75 miles W of the same rock.

6.33 Little Islet, 0.5 mile N of Termination Island, is rocky and

42m high. Brown Reef, about 3 miles NE of Termination Island consists of two islets, each 1m high, around which the sea

always breaks.

6.33 Twin Rocks (34°22'S., 122°13'E.) are two small red rocks

located close together about 13 miles ENE of Termination Islet; the N rock, 28m high, is the higher of the two. The rocks lie

on a steep-to reef which extends one mile in all directions.

Reefs, which break, lie 9 miles WNW and NW of Twin Rocks.

6.33 Caution.—Navigation should not be attempted between Termination Island and The Causeway, or N of a line joining that

island and Salisbury Island (see paragraph 6.43), 77 miles E, as

there are numerous submerged dangers which only break in

heavy weather; other uncharted dangers may exist S of that

line.

Cape Le Grand to Mississippi Point

6.34 Inner dangers.—The coast between Cape Le Grand

and Mississippi Point, 8.25 miles E, has a bold rugged appearance and is backed by bare rocky slopes that rise to well-defined hills.

6.34 Mississippi Hill rises from the coast, 1.25 miles WNW of

Mississippi Point, to an elevation of 180m; its summit, on

which there is a cairn, is bare and rocky.

6.34 The coast between Cape Le Grand and Mississippi Point is

indented by five bays which have sandy beaches at their heads.

6.34 Lucky Bay, the E bay of the five above-mentioned bays, is

located close W of Mississippi Hill. 

6.34 Anchorage can be obtained during N and E winds in the bay,
150 Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 

Pub. 175

close under the islands that form the SE side of the bay, in a

depth of 22m, coarse sand. With E winds a S swell sets into the

bay; with W winds violent squalls sweep down from the hills

on the NW side of the bay.

6.34 Cliff Island (34°01'S., 122°05'E.), 43m high, lies about 1

mile W of Cape Le Grand; shoal ground extends 0.2 mile off

its E end, and a submerged rock lies close off its W end.

6.34 Ram Island, 133m high, lies 1.25 miles SE of Cape Le

Grand; the island is of rocky formation, with little vegetation.

A reef, on which the sea occasionally breaks, lies 0.3 mile S of

the island.

6.34 New Island, 54m high, lies close offshore, 0.4 mile N of

Ram Island.

6.34 Mississippi Reefs lie close off Mississippi Point; the inner

reef is awash, but the outer reef, 0.3 mile SE of the point, is

submerged and the sea only breaks on it at intervals.

6.34 Black Rocks (34°03'S., 122°13'E.) are two steep-to rocks,

4m high, located 3 miles ESE of Ram Island.

6.34 Rob Island and Roy Island, 4.5 miles E of Ram Island, are 56

and 43m high, respectively, and are bare and rocky. A submerged reef, on which stands a 2m high rock, lies 0.5 mile SE

of Roy Island. A 2.7m patch lies 0.4 mile WNW of Rob Island.

6.35 Outer dangers.—Cloud Island, 63m high, is located

2 miles SW of Cape Le Grand. A submerged rock, on which

the sea usually breaks, lies about 0.3 mile ENE of the island.

6.35 Pasco Island, 68m high, lies 1 mile SSE of Cloud Island.

Rocks, both above and below-water, extend up to 0.2 mile from

its E and SW sides.

6.35 Hope Island (34°05'S., 122°10'E.), 2.25 miles SSE of Ram

Island, is bare and rocky, with a well-defined summit, 45m

high; an islet lies close to its S extremity. 

6.35 French Reef, awash and on which the sea always breaks, lies

5 miles E of Hope Island.

6.35 Escape Rock, a dangerous patch with a depth of 3.6m, lies

about 0.75 mile S of French Reef. The patch does not break

and it can be made out only in good light.

6.35 Mondrain Island (34°08'S., 122°15'E.), 6.75 miles offshore

SSW of Mississippi Point, is the second largest island in the

Archipelago of the Recherche. The island, 226m high, is prominent from all directions.

Mississippi Point to Hammer Head

6.36 Inner dangers.—The coast between Mississippi

Point and Cheyne Point, 12 miles ENE, in general, consists of

sandy beaches backed by sandhills 9 to 30m high. For a distance of 2 miles N from Mississippi Point, the coast is rocky,

and a rocky promontory, 51m high, projects from the coast 5

miles NE of the point.

6.36 Cairn Hill, 128m high, 3 miles WNW of the rocky promontory, is prominent; Yungarup Hill, 7.5 miles ENE of the same

promontory, rises to an elevation of 165m.

6.36 The Tory Islands (34°01'S., 122°19'E.) are a group of four

rocky islets with very little vegetation on them, located 1.5

miles SE of Mississippi Point. The N islet, 73m high, is the

largest of the group and has deep water close up to its N side,

but a submerged reef lies 0.25 mile off the SW islet.

6.36 Outtrim Reef, awash and on which the sea always breaks,

lies 1.5 miles SE of the Tory Islands.

6.36 Mississippi Bay is a small bight which lies about 1 mile N of

Mississippi Point. A chain of six islands lies across the entrance of the bay. These islets afford inadequate shelter during

E winds, and the bay affords shelter from W winds only.

6.36 Other islands and rocks, which may best be seen on the

chart, lie in the bight between Mississippi Point and Cheyne

Point.

6.36 Hammer Head (33°58'S., 122°35'E.), 76m high, is a rocky

headland of rounded appearance and is sparsely covered with

vegetation. It is steep-to and may be approached to a distance

of 0.2 mile.

6.36 Cheyne Bay indents the coast between Hammer Head and

Cheyne Point, about 3 miles WNW. An islet, 9m high, lies 1

mile NNW of Hammer Head and several smaller islets lie as

far as 0.25 mile off the E and W shores of the bay.

6.36 Passage Island, 4 miles WSW of Cheyne Point, is 26m high,

bare, and rocky. Submerged rocks lie close off its NE and SW

ends, otherwise it is steep-to.

6.36 Scatterbreak Reef, upon which the sea always breaks, lies 1

mile SE of Passage Island.

6.36 The York Islands (34°00'S., 122°35'E.) are a group of five

islands lying 2.5 miles S of Hammer Head. The easternmost,

and most prominent, has a dark patch of vegetation on its E

face. It is steep-to on all sides, and from the SE appears as a

conspicuous peak, 110m high. The other islands of the group

are low, dark, and barren.

6.36 A reef, with two pinnacles and nearly awash, lies 0.75 mile

SSE of the largest island of the York Islands. The reef is steepto and always breaks.

6.37 Outer dangers.—Stokes Bank (34°05'S.,

122°19'E.), with a least depth of 13m over a rocky bottom, lies

in a position 4 miles NE of Mondrain Island, which has been

previously described in paragraph 6.35.

6.37 Finger Island, 45m high, is the N of a group of three islands.

It is rocky and round in appearance, with sparse vegetation

near its summit.

6.37 Draper Island (34°12'S., 122°30'E.), 80m high, bare, and

rocky, lies 14.5 miles SSW of Hammer Head. Detached reefs

and submerged rocks extend up to 0.5 mile from the island in

places; a rock, 7m high, lies on the reef NE of the island, and a

rock, 5m high, lies on the reef NW of it; a submerged rock, on

which the sea breaks only occasionally, lies 0.5 mile SW of the

island.

6.37 Spray Reef, nearly awash and steep-to, lies about 1.75 miles

ENE of Draper Island. The sea always breaks over the reef.

Hammer Head to Cape Arid

6.38 Inner dangers.—The coast between Hammer Head

and Cape Arid, 29 miles E, consists of a succession of sandy

beaches and rocky points backed by sandhills. Behind the sand

hills the country is open, undulating, and of moderate elevation. The most prominent summit is Howick Hill, a 265m high

granite hill located 9 miles inland behind the W part of this

stretch of coast.

6.38 Alexander Point, 32m high, is located about 13 miles ENE of

Hammer Head. Alexander Hill, long and flat-topped, lies 2

miles NE of Alexander Point. The hillsides are covered with

thick scrub and the top is bare; the actual summit, 117m high,
Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 151

Pub. 175

is marked by a granite cairn.

6.38 Tagon Point is the extremity of a rocky promontory, covered

with scrub, 7 miles E of Alexander Point

6.38 Hawes Hill, 140m high, stands 3.75 miles NNW of Tagon

Point.

6.38 Cape Arid (34°01'S., 123°10'E.), lies 11 miles SE of Tagon

Point; the cape and the coast in its vicinity is bare and rocky,

and rises in a succession of granite ridges to the double summit

of Mount Arid, 362m high, 3.5 miles NE of the cape.

6.38 Mount Belches, 1.25 miles N of Hammer Head, is a domeshaped rocky hill with smooth, steep slopes, rising to an elevation of 168m. A 3m high cairn stands on the summit and is

prominent from all directions.

6.38 Duke of Orleans Bay (33°55'S., 122°36'E.), an indentation

in the coast NE of Mount Belches, affords good anchorage

sheltered from all but E winds, which, especially in summer,

raise a short and very choppy sea; the holding ground, sand and

weed, is good.

6.38 The entrance to Duke of Orleans Bay is encumbered with

Nares Island, Table Island, and John Island and by Dodd Rock

and Bay Rock.

6.39 Nares Island (33°56'S., 122°36'E.) is 26m high, rugged, and covered with small bushes and some grass; it lies

close to the S point of Duke of Orleans Bay. A white-topped

rock, 1.5m high, lies close off its NW point.

6.39 Anchorage for vessels of not more than 4.9m draft can be

taken with the white-topped rock close off the NW point of

Nares Island bearing about 125°, distant 0.2 mile.

6.39 Belches Reefs, 4.5 miles ENE of Hammer Head, are two

submerged reefs lying 0.3 mile apart. The W reef has depths of

2.7 to 3.7m and seldom breaks; the E reef has lesser depths and

usually breaks.

6.39 Alexander Bay lies NW of Alexander Point. The W end of

the bay affords moderate shelter from W winds to vessels with

local knowledge and draft not exceeding 3m.

6.39 Tagon Bay, close NE of Tagon Point, is sometimes used as

an anchorage by coasters, but it is not recommended, as the

bottom is uneven and the bay is exposed to the S swell.

6.39 Arid Bay is an indentation in the coast immediately N of

Cape Arid. Rocks, above-water, and foul ground extend 0.75

mile N of Cape Arid; a 5.5m patch lies 1.25 miles NW of the

cape.

6.39 The Barrier Islands (33°59'S., 123°09'E.) are two islands

located 1.5 miles N and 2 miles NNW, respectively, of Cape

Arid; there is foul ground and several above-water rocks between the two islands. The islands are 18 and 39m high, with

the S island being the higher.

6.39 Barrier Anchorage, inside these islands, may afford shelter

from NE gales for a small vessel, with local knowledge, in a

depth of 9.1m.

6.39 Caution is necessary if taking shelter in Barrier Anchorage,

as the only approach is between the foul ground that extends N

from Cape Arid and S Barrier Island; the summit of Bearing

Rock, bearing 278° astern, leads between them and N of the

5.5m patch mentioned above.

6.39 Bearing Rock, 5m high, lies 1.5 miles WSW of the N Barrier

Island; foul ground extends 0.2 mile S and W from it.

6.39 There are numerous rocks, reefs, and islands that lie in the

bight between Hammer Head and Cape Arid; their positions

may best be seen on the chart.

6.40 Outer dangers.—The Marts Islands (34°00'S.,

122°39'E.) are a group of islands and rocks located 4 miles SE

of Hammer Head. The E part of the group consists of four islets lying close together; the largest has slight vegetation on it.

The W part of the group consists of one islet with several

rocks, 2 to 4m high, N of it. The islet in the W part of the group

is the highest and most prominent of the entire group; its

smooth, bare granite sides slope down symmetrically from its

132m summit.

6.40 Sulphur Reefs (34°07'S., 122°41'E.) are a group of detached

reefs, about 2 miles long, lying in a N-S direction. The N reef,

which seldom breaks, lies about 6 miles SSE of Marts Island;

the S reef of the group is awash and always breaks. Vessels

should not pass between or within 0.5 mile of these reefs.

6.40 Breakers are charted about 1 mile NNW and NW of the N

reef of Sulphur Reefs.

6.40 Foam Rocks (34°08'S., 122°51'E.), located 8 miles ESE of

Sulphur Reefs, consists of four rocks in a cluster; the highest is

8m high, but the sea always washes over them in great masses

of foam. A sunken reef, on which the sea breaks at intervals,

lies about 0.5 mile ENE of Foam Rocks. A charted obstruction

lies 3.5 miles S of Foam Rocks.

6.40 Matthew Rock (34°12'S., 123°00'E.), with a depth of 7.3m,

lies 8 miles SE of Foam Rocks; it seldom breaks, except with a

heavy S swell.

6.40 Recherche Rock (34°18'S., 122°55'E.), about 7 miles SW of

Matthew Rock, is steep-to, with a depth of 3.7m; the sea breaks

on it at intervals.

Cape Arid to Cape Pasley

6.41 Inner dangers.—From Cape Arid, the coast trends

ENE for about 8 miles and then ESE to Cape Pasley. An extensive bay, with a sandy shore, which has not been surveyed, is

formed within.

6.41 Mount Pasley (33°55'S., 123°33'E.), 2 miles NNE of the S

extremity of the cape, is 143m high, with a cairn on its summit,

and is a prominent feature on this part of the coast.

6.41 Arid Island, about 0.75 mile SSE of Cape Arid, is 5m high

and bare. A rock, with a depth of 1.8m, lies N of Arid Island.

Darling Shoal, a dangerous patch with depths of 5.5m, lies 0.75

mile SSE of Arid Island; the sea breaks on it at times.

6.41 An islet, 8m high, lies close offshore 3.5 miles ENE of Cape

Arid, and a shoal, which always breaks, lies 6 miles ENE of the

same cape.

6.42 Outer dangers.—Middle Island (34°06'S.,

123°12'E.), 5 miles SSE of Cape Arid, is separated from the

mainland by Arid Strait. The island is densely wooded, except

on the slopes near the coast. Flinders Peak, the highest point on

the island, is the summit of a conspicuous dome-shaped hill,

which rises to a height of 174m at the NW end of the island;

the hill is wooded on its E side. Dangerous rocks, on which the

sea always breaks heavily, extend nearly 0.5 mile offshore

from the S point of the island. North East Point, the NE extremity of the island, is low, with the land sloping up from the

point which should not be approached within a distance of 0.2

mile.
152 Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 

Pub. 175

6.42 Goose Island (34°05'S., 123°11'E.), lying 0.5 mile off the N

coast of Middle Island, is rocky, with sandy patches covered

with short scrub; the summit, 47m high, is composed of bare

granite rocks.

6.42 Goose Island Bay, on the N side of Middle Island between

North East Point and Goose Island, 1.5 miles W, is sheltered

from the swell and from all except N winds. A rock, near the

center of Goose Island Bay, is 0.3 high and covered with marine growth. The rock consists of two smooth granite boulders

lying close together. The sea breaking over the rock indicates

its position.

6.42 Blind Rocks, between 0.1 to 0.25 mile N of Sailor Rock,

consists of three dangerous granite boulders, with depths of 1.2

to 1.8m, and with depths of 9.1 to 11m close around them.

Caution is necessary when navigating in the vicinity of these

rocks, as they are small and not easily seen.

6.42 A dangerous rock lies in the S part of Goose Island Bay, 0.25

mile S of Sailor Rock, close within the 5m curve.

6.42 During W winds, anchorage may be taken off the E side of

Goose Island, in a depth of about 12.8m, with Sailor Rock in

line with the NE point of Goose Island, bearing 302°, and

Flinders Peak bearing about 253°, or further S if necessary.

Miles Island (34°04'S., 123°14'E.), 39m high, is separated

from North East Point on Middle Island by a deep clear channel more than 0.5 mile wide. Miles Island is the S island of a

group which extends about 4.25 miles NE and includes George

Island, Owen Island, Gulch Island, and Stanley Island.

6.42 Foul ground skirts all except the E side of Miles Island. A

5.5m patch, over which the sea breaks heavily, lies 0.25 mile E

of the SE point of the island.

6.43 Grace Shoal (34°03'S., 124°12'E.), 0.75 mile W of

the N end of the chain of islets that extend NNW from Miles

Island, has a depth of 3.4m, and breaks heavily at intervals.

6.43 Wickham Island (Stanley Island) (34°01'S., 123°17'E.), the

NE of the group, is 12m high, and has some vegetation on it.

Foul ground fronts the S side of the island and extends 0.5 mile

off the SW extremity. A detached sunken reef, on which the sea

usually breaks, lies about 0.75 mile SSW of the island.

6.43 The other islands of the group that extends NE from Miles

Island to Wickham Island are best seen on the chart.

6.43 Douglas Island (34°10'S., 123°09'E.), 3 miles SSW of Middle Island, is barren and rocky. The island consists of two hills

connected by a low narrow neck; the E summit, 82m high, is

slightly higher than the W, which is 79m high, precipitous on

its S side, and is conspicuous. There are submerged rocks, on

which the sea breaks with any swell, off the E and W sides of

the island. Matthew Rock, lying SW of Douglas Island, is described in paragraph 6.40.

6.43 Dome Island (34°10'S., 123°21'E.), 7.25 miles SE of Middle

Island, is a small dome-shaped island, 90m high. Sunken rocks

extend about 0.15 mile from its E and SW sides. A reef, which

has a rock 1.2m high, lies about 1 mile NE of the island.

6.43 Penguin Rock (34°13'S., 123°15'E.), a dangerous rock with

a least depth of 7.3m, and on which the sea seldom breaks, lies

6 miles SE of Douglas Island.

6.43 Salisbury Island (34°22'S., 123°33'E.), the SE and largest

island of the Archipelago of the Recherche, lies 28 miles SE of

Cape Arid. The island, 119m high, is rocky and covered with

matted, stunted scrub. The summit, in the middle of the island,

is somewhat flat, but with a slight saddle; the hill on the S end

of the island, 101m high, is better defined.

6.43 Submerged rocks extend 0.25 mile SW of the S point of Salisbury Island; two rocky ledges, awash, with the S one having

on it a rock 5m high, are located 0.75 mile off its NW side.

6.43 Salisbury Island is an excellent mark for making the archipelago, but vessels should not approach within 0.75 mile of its

S end.

6.43 Caution.—Heavy breakers have been reported about 6 miles

SSE of Salisbury Island.

6.44 Chester Reef (34°27'S., 123°37'E.), an extensive

shoal with a least depth of 10m, lies about 5.5 miles SE of the

S end of Salisbury Island.

6.44 Pollock Reef (34°34'S., 123°34'E.), 11 miles S of Salisbury

Island, has depths of less than 2m, and is steep-to. With S or W

swells, the sea breaks heavily on it, but during fresh E winds, it

is difficult to see, as the break on the reef is very similar to the

breaking waves in the vicinity.

6.45 Archipelago of the Recherche to Esperance—Directions from E.—The directions described here are only to be

used by vessels with local knowledge.

6.45 Vessels making Salisbury Island in the afternoon should not

attempt to pass through the archipelago, but should proceed to

the anchorage in Goose Island Bay, or to Duke of Orleans Bay

and anchor for the night.

6.45 From a position 2 miles W of the S extremity of Salisbury Island, the course leads WNW, passing about 2 miles SSW of

Penguin Rock and about 2.5 miles SSW of Douglas Island,

bearing 090°. Then steer 270°, passing 2 miles S of Foam

Rocks and Sulphur Reefs, and 1.25 miles N of Draper Island.

From this position, steer NW to pass 1.5 miles NE of Finger Island, to a position about midway between Stokes Bank and

Outtrim Reef; then steer W, passing 1 mile N of French Reef

and between Black Rocks and Hope Island.

6.45 Pass 1 mile S of Ram Island and S of Cliff Island, steering

between Gunton Island and Sandy Hook Island; then steer as

directed for Causeway Channel, as described in paragraph

6.30.

6.45 Vessels desiring to anchor in Goose Island Bay, from a position 2 miles W of the S end of Salisbury Island may steer

NNW, passing 1.5 miles SW of Dome Island and midway between North East Point, Middle Island, and Miles Island, then

into Goose Island Bay.

6.45 From Goose Island Bay to Esperance Bay, round Goose Island at not less then 0.5 mile N; from this position steer SW for

a position 4.5 miles W of Douglas Island, then proceed W as

described above.

6.45 If intending to anchor in Duke of Orleans Bay, follow the

track from Salisbury Island described above until the S Sulphur

Reef, described as always breaking, bears 016°, then steer 343°

for Mount Belches, keeping it ahead on that bearing. After

passing between the York Islands and the Marts Islands, steer

for the anchorage in Duke of Orleans Bay.

Cape Pasley to Cape Adieu

6.46 From Cape Pasley to Point Malcolm, the coast is generally low and fronted by sand dunes. The sand dunes are about
Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 153

Pub. 175

15m high and covered with scrub, but on a point 6 miles NE of

Cape Pasley, a prominent sandhill rises to a height of 25m.

6.46 The coast between Point Malcolm (33°48'S., 123°42'E.) and

Point Dempster, 11 miles NNE, is low and sandy. Submerged

dangers lie up to 5.5 miles off the coast between Cape Pasley

and Dempster Point.

6.46 Mount Ragged, 585m high, is located 31 miles NNW of

Cape Pasley. Of the craggy group of hills in this area, Mount

Ragged is the most remarkable.

6.46 Caution.—That part of the Archipelago of the Recherche

which lies NE of Salisbury Island, Dome Island, and Middle

Island has not been surveyed.

6.47 Round Island (34°05'S., 123°53'E.), located 19 miles

SE of Cape Pasley, is a prominent lump of rock; two small

rocks, lying 0.5 mile N and WNW, respectively, of the island

are also prominent.

6.47 Eastern Group (33°47'S., 124°05'E.), located between 15

and 26 miles NNE of Round Island, consists of eight rocky islets, most of them low and barren. However, the S islet, which

is the largest, rises at its N end to an elevation of 152m; near its

S end there is a sugarloaf hill, 140m high, with the land between being low with little vegetation.

6.47 Two small rocky islets lie close off the SW end of the islet

described above, and give protection to an indentation on its

SW coast; this indentation is reported to afford anchorage, in a

depth of about 18.3m, sand, weed, and rock. When approaching the anchorage, steer for the sugarloaf hill on Daw Islet,

bearing about 140°, until a small sandy beach at the head of the

bay bears 145°, then steer for it on that bearing, anchoring as

soon as a depth of 18.3m has been reached.

6.47 As this part of the archipelago has not been surveyed, vessels

should approach these islets only with extreme caution.

6.48 Israelite Bay (33°37'S., 123°48'E.), an indentation in

the coast immediately N of Point Dempster, affords good anchorage, in a depth of 5.5m, inside the reef that extends NE

from the point. There are a number of shoals in the bay, but

they can be seen from aloft when conditions are favorable.

6.48 Vessels approaching the bay from the S should give Point

Dempster a berth of 2 miles, and proceed into the bay with the

head of the small pier situated at the head of the bay, in range

bearing 260°, with a slight rise in the distant background.

There is good anchorage about 0.5 mile from the pier, in depths

of 7m.

6.48 Cormorant Rock lies about 7 miles E of Dempster Point. Six

Mile Island lies about 1.25 miles S of Comorant Rock. Dangerous rocks lie about 1.5 miles ESE and 1 mile WSW of Comorant Rock. 

The coast NNE of Israelite Bay is low and sandy, without irregularity. It is backed by a steep limestone terrace from 76 to

82m high. The limestone terrace, which originates some distance inland in the vicinity of Israelite Bay and follows the

general trend of the coast line, closes the coast gradually and

terminates in a bluff, 87m high, 55 miles NE of Dempster

Point.

6.48 From this bluff to Point Culver (32°54'S., 124°42'E.), about

10 miles E and then ENE for about 70 miles, the coast is of

cliffy formation. These cliffs are about 76m high, without any

remarkable feature by which one part can be distinguished

from another; the upper part of them is brown and the lower

portion is almost white. Each small projection on the coast has

the appearance of a steep cape to a vessel coming along the

coast, but, before coming abreast, it is lost in the general uniformity of the coast. The bluff, located 10 miles W of Point

Culver, and Point Dover (32°21'S., 125°31'E.), about 47 miles

ENE of Point Culver, are exceptions to this uniformity, but it is

necessary to be near the coast before they can be distinguished.

6.48 Small Rock (32°45'S., 124°58'E.), an above-water rock, is

located near the coast, 16 miles NE of Point Culver.

6.48 No known dangers exist near this coast, and depths of 37 to

51m are found at a distance of 4 to 5 miles off it.

6.49 Twilight Cove (32°17'S., 126°01'E.), 30 miles ENE

of Point Dover, indents the coast slightly and affords good

landing on a sandy beach. The cliffs commence to recede from

the coast in the vicinity of this bight.

6.49 A steep limestone terrace, from 75 to 90m high, extends

ENE from Twilight Cove and runs parallel with the coast,

about 15 miles inland to Eucla, where it gradually approaches

the coast again and forms the actual line of the coast E of Eucla.

6.49 A tower, 76m high and with an elevation of 166m, stands 11

miles NW of Twilight Cove; a similar tower, with an elevation

of 155m, stands 9 miles N of Eyre.

6.49 Foul ground extends about 1 mile from the coast, from 1.5 to

6.5 miles ENE of Twilight Cove.

6.49 Eyre (32°16'S., 126°17'E.), a settlement 13 miles E of Twilight Cove, may be easily identified by Eyre sand patch, a

white sand patch near the coast, and a peaked sand hill, covered with dense scrub, that rises about 4.5 miles inland. Vessels

have found adequate shelter at an anchorage off Eyre, in a position SW of the peaked sand hill, during heavy weather from all

quarters.

6.49 The coast between Low Sandy Point (32°18'S., 126°16'E.),

6 miles ESE of Eyre, and Low Point (32°01'S., 128°15'E.),

about 100 miles E, has a level ridge on which there are some

trees and shrubs. The depths off this part of the coast are fairly

regular.

6.49 The coast between Low Point and Eucla Roads (31°45'S.,

129°00'E.), 35 miles ENE, is backed by low sand hills; it

should not be approached within a distance of 5 miles. 

6.49 The coast about 1.5 miles W of Eucla is formed by a low

sand bank, not more than 5m high and covered with bushes.

From here the land rises gradually, and the coast, a short distance E of Eucla, consists of sandhills rising to a height of 15m.

The limestone terrace, which closes the coast in this vicinity,

passes about 2.5 miles N of Eucla; it is covered with mallee

scrub, and has the appearance of a dark brown mass of bushes

as far as the eye can see.

6.49 Delisser Sands (31°42'S., 128°57'E.) are a bare patch of

sands that extend for more than 1 mile, in a NE direction, from

a position about 2 miles E of Eucla. Several of these dunes rise

to conspicuous peaks, the highest of which is 35m high, located near the center of the area.

6.49 Murdeyerrah Sands (31°39'S., 129°07'E.) are the farthest E

of the group of named sand patches that lie in the vicinity of

Eucla. They are located on the slopes of scrub-covered hills,

which rise to a height of 101m, 17 miles E of Eucla. The highest of these dunes is about 37m.
154 Sector 6. Southwest Coast of Australia—Cape Leeuwin to Cape Adieu 

Pub. 175

6.50 Eucla (31°43'S., 128°46'E.) is a township situated 0.5

mile inland, about 5 miles W of the boundary between the

states of Western Australia and South Australia.

6.50 Eucla Roads, the only known anchorage between that off Eyre and Fowler’s Bay, a distance of more than 300 miles, affords

shelter at all times to vessels, with local knowledge, of not

more than 4m draft.

6.50 The anchorage is protected by a rocky shoal that lies S and

SW of it; the outer edge of this shoal lies about 1.5 miles offshore, and is generally marked by breakers.

6.50 A rocky shoal, about 2 miles long, with depths of 4.6 to

5.5m, and on which the sea breaks with a heavy swell, lies parallel with the coast S of Delisser Sands.

6.50 Wilson Bluff, a nearly perpendicular cliff 90m high located

E of Eucla Sands, makes the best landfall when approaching

Eucla Roads, but the approach should be made with great caution. A tower, with an elevation of 78m, stands 25 miles WSW

of Eucla; similar towers, each with an elevation of 173m, stand

4 miles NNW and 20 miles NE of Eucla.

 The coast for a distance of about 10 miles E of Murdeyerrah

Sands continues to be steep and dark; a perpendicular cliff with

a white substratum, having no remarkable feature, extends

about another 94 miles E to the head of the bight.

6.50 A number of towers, between 61 and 76m high, stand at distances from the coast, varying from 1.5 to 8 miles, between Eucla and the head of The Great Australian Bight.

6.51 Twin Rocks (31°30'S., 131°08'E.) are located close

inshore off the junction of the cliff and sand, at the head of the

bight. Conspicuous bare sand hills extend more than 1 mile inland from the head of the bight, rising to an elevation of 57m.

There is a heavy surf here, usually, which breaks about 0.5 mile

offshore, in depths of 5.5m, even in good weather. These conditions render landing impracticable, or very hazardous.

6.51 The coast between Twin Rocks and Cape Adieu, 60 miles

SE, consists of a series of low, dark, rocky points and sandy

beaches, fronted by rocks and foul ground, on which the sea

breaks at a general distance of about 0.5 mile offshore.

6.51 Black Hill (31°33'S., 131°33'E.) is located near the coast 13

miles ESE of Twin Rocks. A peak, 93m high, on the inland

ridge, rises 4.5 miles ENE of Black Hill.

6.51 Shoulder Hill (31°40'S., 131°40'E.), 13 miles SE of the peak

and on the same ridge, is 99m high.

6.51 Three round-topped hills rise to elevations of about 75m,

near the coast, about 40 miles ESE of Twin Rocks.

6.51 A submerged reef, on which the sea breaks in a heavy swell,

lies 2 miles offshore, SSW of the three round-topped hills described above.

6.51 There is a bare sand hill, 73m high, about 9 miles SE of the

round-topped hills. A dark, wooded hill, 172m high stands 7

miles NNE of Cape Adieu; it is the highest land on this part of

the coast.

6.51 Cape Adieu (32°01'S., 132°09'E.) is a dark, cliffy point,

37m high. The cape is bordered by submerged rocks; two detached sunken rocks, which break with a heavy swell, lie about

3 miles W and 2 miles SSW, respectively, of the cape. Other

offshore dangers in the vicinity of the cape are described in

paragraph 7.2.
155

Pub. 175

7. 

South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer including Spencer Gulf

7.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 7 — CHART INFORMATION
157

Pub. 175

SECTOR 7 

SOUTH COAST OF AUSTRALIA—CAPE ADIEU TO CAPE SPENCER INCLUDING SPENCER 

GULF

7.0 Plan.—This sector describes the S coast of Australia from

Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer and includes Spencer Gulf. The

descriptive sequence is SE to the entrance of Spencer Gulf and

then NNE through this gulf to its head. 

General Remarks

7.1 The S coast of Australia between Cape Adieu and

Cape Catastrophe, about 266 miles SE, is bordered by moderately-high cliffs and hills and indented by several open bays

and inlets. Most of these bays are fairly deep up to within a

short distance of the coast, whereas, others are fairly shoal and

obstructed by numerous islets, rocks, and reefs. All of these

bays are exposed to the heavy SW swell which constantly rolls

in, even during SE winds. 

7.1 The small settlements which lie within these indentations

are, in most cases, available only to small vessels of moderate

draft. Several commercial ports are available to ocean-going

vessels in Spencer Gulf. Sheltered anchorage is provided in the

lee of some of the islands for small craft with local knowledge.

The entrance of Spencer Gulf lies between Cape Catastrophe

and Cape Spencer, about 48 miles to the ESE. The gulf extends

about 180 miles in a general NNE direction to Port Augusta at

its head. Port Lincoln, Tumby Bay, Franklin Harbor, and Port

Whyalla stand along the W side of the gulf. Port Victoria,

Tipara Bay, Wallaroo Bay, Port Broughton, Port Pirie, and Germein Bay stand along the E side. 

7.1 The gulf is navigable over most of its area by deep-draft vessels, but only vessels of moderate draft can reach and berth at

Port Augusta.

7.1 From the first day of October through the end of May, extensive lobster and giant crab fishing takes place inshore of the

500m isobath off the coast of South Australia. Mariners are

cautioned that surface floats associated with the activity may

be encountered. 

7.1 Winds—Weather.—There is a marked winter maximum

and a marked summer minimum in the annual course of rainfall along the coast. The annual average ranges from about

210mm at Port Hedland, a sheltered location at the head of

Spencer Gulf to the E, to about 970mm at Cape Leeuwin, on

the extreme W part of the S coast of Australia. It is dry at Eucla

and at other stations along the coast of the Great Australian

Bight; rainfall in the area averages about 305mm annually.

7.1 The S depression, with its mainly onshore accompanying

winds, is responsible for the greatest portion of the rains. The

depression and rainfall are most frequent from May to August,

with the highest intensities occurring in June and July. In the

summer, the depressions occur less than once a month, during

which time rainless months are frequent along all but the W

part of the S coast.

7.1 Tropical depressions extending S also cause rain. An average

of two or three of these tropical depressions occur each month

during the spring, which is the season of greatest frequency.

7.1 Prolonged rain in the summer and transient months does not

occur anywhere along the coast. Occasionally, a wet spell of 2

to 4 days duration occurs with a tropical depression as it moves

S.

7.1 The mean temperature of the air over the area varies little

from E to W. The winter averages during June, July, and August along the SW coast, and along the Great Australian Bight,

are between 12.2°C and 14.4°C. In the E section of Adelaide

and Port August, the winter temperatures 11.1°C to

13.3°C.The summer averages are about 10.6°C than in the winter. The extreme heat reaches over 37.8°C at all the stations,

with a high temperature of 50.6°C being recorded at Eucla in

January. The winter extremes seldom fall below freezing, with

a low temperature of -3.9°C being recorded at Eyre in July. The

daily range is usually small, but it varies with the season, usually with a maximum in the summer and a minimum in the

winter.

7.1 The highest occurrence of thunderstorms is usually associated with the movement of the S depressions across the area.

These thunderstorms occasionally are violent, with heavy rain

and hail. Convectional thunderstorms, caused by the afternoon

heat, also occur at places along the coast, but their incidence is

more localized.

7.1 Lightning alone is frequently recorded when a tropical depression moves S over the coast. During this situation, night

lightning at sea is frequently observed, possibly indicating a

more frequent occurrence of thunderstorms at sea than observations indicate.

7.1 The cold front thunderstorm in mainly a winter and spring

development. The convectional thunderstorm is most frequent

in summer.

7.1 Fog is comparatively rare on the coast and over the adjacent

sea. The highest frequency of fog occurs during the winter

months.

7.1 Along the coast, patchy drifts of shallow fog or mist frequently occur in low-lying areas during early morning hours.

They are due to the combined effects of numerous islets, profuse vegetation, and the saturation of the air. They develop into

dense fogs in tropical air chiefly of the pre-warm front type.

7.1 Fogs are likely to be dense along the coast when conditions

favorable for their formation are preceded by rain. Low patches

of clouds moving close to the surface are characteristic of the

broken and changing skies observed during the frequent

squalls that develop in the prevailing westerlies.

7.1 Tides—Currents.—Near Cape Leeuwin and off the S coast

of Australia, the current appears to be principally influenced by

the prevailing winds. Some vessels have experienced constant

N and NE currents, with velocities of 1 to 1.5 knots. Other vessels have been set to the E, but little to the N, as they approached the SW coast of Australia.

7.1 From Cape Leeuwin to the Archipelago of the Recherche,

the current usually sets in a direction parallel to the coast, being strongest between D’Entrecasteaux Point and King George
158 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

Sound, where its rate can sometimes attain a velocity of 1.5

knots.From the archipelago around the Great Australian Bight

to Cape Northumberland, it has less strength than farther to the

S. When approaching Bass Strait, the current sets E and SE at a

rate of 1 to 2.5 knots.

7.1 From November to April, the E current loses strength, and

after a fresh E wind frequently changes its direction to the NW.

7.1 In the offing between Cape Leeuwin and Cape Otway, the

currents appear to be influenced mainly by the strong W winds

which prevail during 9 months of the year.

7.1 Near the Australian coast, with E winds, a current has been

found setting W, but this current is probably confined to the vicinity of the coast. To the N of Cape Jaffa, which lies about 220

miles NW of Cape Otway, a current sets E, at a rate of about 1

knot, during W gales; at the same time near Cape Jaffa, the current sets N.

7.1 Vessels approaching the vicinity of Cape Otway during

strong W winds should be prepared for a S set.

7.1 Caution.—Vessels entering the gulf are advised that dangerous currents exist off Cape Catastrophe (34°59'S., 136°00'E.)

and Waterhouse Point, on the SE end of Thistle Island

(35°00'S., 136°09'E.), and violent tide rips exist in the vicinity

of the islets between Cape Catastrophe and the W side of Thistle Island. Deep-draft vessels should not approach within 5

miles of South Neptune Island (35°20'S., 136°07'E.) because

bottom irregularity and the lack of detailed surveys.

Offlying Dangers

7.2 D’Entrecasteaux Reef (31°59'S., 131°56'E.), lying

between 11 and 12.5 miles W of Cape Adieu, is divided into

two parts. The N part, the outline of which is always marked by

breakers, is about 2 miles in extent and has several rocks,

awash, near its NE extremity. The S part, which only breaks

during a heavy swell, lies about 0.5 mile S of the N part. As

soundings are not a good guide when approaching the coast in

this vicinity, these dangers should be given a wide berth at

night.

7.2 Nuyts Reefs (32°08'S., 132°09'E.) consist of a number of islets and sunken rocks extending about 9 miles S from Cape

Adieu. The highest islet of the group rises to a height of 13m

and stands about 7.5 miles S of the cape. This islet is connected

to a smaller islet by rocks which uncover. The sea breaks a

short distance N of some rocky heads that lie off the N end of

these islets; elsewhere they appear steep-to. Three reefs lie

about 1.5 miles S of the above highest islet. The center of the

NE reef uncovers, but the other two are sunken and do not always break. However, during W gales and heavy swells, the

breakers on the two sunken reefs can be seen before the islets

are sighted. Two above-water rocks lie close together about 1.5

miles ENE of the above 13m islet. The NE rock is 9.1m high.

The N danger of the group is a 6.1m high rock about 5 miles

NNE of the 13m islet and about 1.5 miles off the coast. The

sunken reef extends almost 1 mile S from it. There are depths

of 22 to 51.2m between this reef and the 9.1m rock mentioned

above.

Cape Adieu to Denial Bay

7.3 Cape Adieu (32°01'S., 132°09'E.) is described in

paragraph 6.51. From Cape Adieu, the coast extends ESE for

about 3.5 miles and then E for about 7.5 miles to Cape Nuyts.

The coast between these capes consists of low, dark cliffs

topped by sand hills in places and fronted by foul ground. The

outermost rocks, about 1 mile offshore, break during heavy

swells. The W of three hills, all of which are about 120m high,

stands 3 miles NW of Cape Nuyts and is densely covered with

scrub.

7.3 Cape Nuyts (32°02'S., 132°21'E.), 59m high, is a rocky cliff

topped by sand hills. A steep-to sunken reef, which seldom

breaks, lies about 1 mile SE of the cape. A detached 18.3m

high rock stands close E of the NE side of the cape. The small

bight between this rock and Scott Point is fronted by rocks

which extend about 0.3 mile from the shore.

7.4 Scott Point (32°01'S., 132°23'E.) is 49m high and

faced by steep cliffs. The point slopes down to the swamps behind it and appears like an island when seen from the SW or

SE.

7.4 Scott Bay (32°01'S., 132°24'E.), fouled by rocks, lies close

E of Scott Point. An extensive area of bare sand, which rises to

a height of 38m, stands N of the bay. 

7.4 Point Fowler (32°02'S., 132°29'E.), about 4 miles ESE of

Scott Point, is a promontory that extends about 3 miles from

the coast and forms the S side of Port Eyre. The point is faced

by dark cliffs and appears flat-topped when seen from seaward.

Sand hills, sparsely covered with vegetation, rise slightly above

the cliffs on the SW side. The NE side of the point is lower and

slopes gently upward. The SE extremity of the promontory is

48m high. Three rocky banks, with depths of 18.3m and less,

lie between 0.5 and 1.5 miles SE of the point. The heavy swells

and high rollers that accompany and follow SW gales break on

these banks. Nantabi Sand, about 8 miles NE of Point Fowler,

is a conspicuous mark on the N shore of Fowlers Bay. A tower

stands 2 miles from the coast, 5 miles WNW of Nantabi Sand.

7.5 Port Eyre (32°00'S., 132°27'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54430) consists of a bight which lies at the W end of Fowlers Bay, close N of Point Fowler, and provides shelter from all

winds within the 10m curve. The high outside seas, which have

been raised by SE winds, quickly subside in height when nearing the anchorage. Depths within the bay decrease gradually

toward the shore. An extensive area of sandhills, N of Scott

Bay, extends to the W shore of Port Eyre. The N end of these

sand hills is steep and conspicuous. North of these sand hills,

the beach is backed by a low ridge; farther inland the land is

low and swampy. A scrub-covered range of hills, 55 to 66m

high, stands farther N about 1 to 2 miles inland. A rock, awash,

lies about 1 mile NW of Fowler Point and about 0.2 mile offshore. A shoal, with depths of less than 1.8m, extends about

0.5 mile NE from the shore on the SW side of Port Eyre. A jetty, suitable only for fishing boats, extends from the shore in the

vicinity of the settlement. 

7.5 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9.1 to 10m, with the E

end of Point Fowler bearing 165° and the head of the jetty

bearing 284°, or closer in according to draft. The bottom of

sand and weed is good holding ground. Because of the increased height of the seas during SE winds, vessels should allow a safety margin of at least 0.9m under the keel at the inner

anchorage and 1.8m at the outer anchorage. There are no per-
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 159

Pub. 175

manent residents at the settlement.

7.6 From Nantabi Sand, the coast extends E for about 9.5

miles and then curves SE for 14 miles to the inner end of the

promontory that forms Sinclair Point. The first 4 miles consists

of a sandy beach and then red bluffs for 6 miles, continued by a

sandy beach with rocky points for the remaining distance. 

7.6 Chadinga Hill, 52m high, extends about 2 miles inland as a

sand dune along this latter stretch of coast. A dark flat-topped

range of hills covered with dense scrub extends from a position

about 3.5 miles NNE of Nantabi Sand to a position N of Chadinga Hill. North of Nantabi Sand and Eyre Bluff (31°58'S.,

132°44'E.), the summits of this range attain heights of about

122m.

7.6 Yatala Reef (32°37'S., 132°26'E.), a dangerous detached

reef, lies about 36 miles S of Fowler Point in the S approach to

Port Eyre and in the W approach to the Nuyts Archipelago.

The reef consists of two sunken rocks about 0.2 mile apart. The

sea breaks on the N rock, which has a depth of less than 1.8m;

the other rock, which breaks occasionally, has a greater depth

over it. In 1984, a below-water rock, with 2m or less over it,

was reported to lie 0.4 mile N of Yatala Reef. The reef lies near

the E side of a bank, with depths of less than 55m, but the

depths do not vary sufficiently for soundings to give warning of

being too close to it. The reef is visible most days under normal

conditions. When a large swell is running, the reef is visible at

night at about 0.5 mile and can be picked up on radar at 6 to 8

miles. With little or no swell, the reef cannot be seen at night

nor can it be picked up by radar. Vessels should give this reef a

wide berth at night and during hazy weather. Eyre Bluff, about

13 miles ENE of Fowler Point, is a steep rocky islet, about 37m

high, which is connected to the coast by rocks which uncover.

A patch of foul ground, with a depth of 18.3m, lies about 4.25

miles SSW of Eyre Bluff. 

7.7 Sinclair Point (32°07'S., 132°59'E.), 47m high and

topped by a growth of coarse grass, is the outer end of a promontory that extends S for about 2 miles from the coast. A bare

limestone cap stands about halfway up the granite slope which

forms the S extremity of the point. There are heavy breakers on

the rocks off this part of the coast. A rocky patch, with depths

of 18.3m, lies about 4 miles WNW of Sinclair Point.

7.7 Sinclair Island (32°09'S., 132°59'E.), of granite and 16m

high, stands 2.5 miles S of Sinclair Point. A 1.5m high rock,

marked by breakers on its E side, lies about midway between

the island and the point. 

7.7 Pudding Rock (32°07'S., 133°00'E.), a bare rock, about

5.8m high, stands 2 miles SE of Sinclair Point. A reef, awash,

lies about midway between the rock and the point. Sunken

rocks extend about 0.4 mile SW from this reef; a sunken rock

lies between this reef and Pudding Rock. 

7.7 Port Le Hunte (32°06'S., 133°00'E.), close E of Sinclair

Point, was formerly a landing place for the surrounding district. The jetty fronting the shore is no longer usable. Vessels

anchoring in the vicinity should do so seaward of the 5m curve.

The coast between Port Le Hunte and Bell Point, about 10

miles to the SE, is fronted by a long sandy beach backed by

sand hills, 24.4 to 36.6m high. 

7.7 Black Peak (32°06'S., 133°04'E.), 36m high, stands near the

coast about 4 miles E of Sinclair Point.

7.8 Point Bell (32°12'S., 133°08'E.) extends about 2.5

miles from the coast, about 9.75 miles SE of Sinclair Point.

The 54m high summit is grass-covered; the S extremity of the

point consists of a smooth low granite formation. Rocks, which

uncover, extend about 0.2 mile S from its extremity. A dark

rock, 4.6m high, stands 1.25 miles SSW of Point Bell. This

rock is surrounded by foul ground which breaks. Foul ground

extends more than 1 mile SSW from this rock and its steep-to

outer end breaks with a heavy sea and swell. An area of extensive shoals, with depths of 17.4 to 20m, lies centered about 9

miles SSW of Point Bell. 

7.8 The bight close E of Point Bell provides anchorage, in

depths of 3.7 to 5.5m, sandy bottom, in all seasons, for vessels

with local knowledge and a draft of about 3m. Anchor bearings

may be taken, with the shed near the beach bearing about 284°

and the E extremity of Point Bell bearing 183°. A conspicuous

bare sand peak, 35m high, stands on the N side of the bight

about 2.5 miles NNE of the summit of Bell Point.

7.8 Rocky Point (32°12'S., 133°15'E.), low and backed by 30m

high grass-covered hills, stands 6.5 miles E of Bell Point. The

coast between these points is sandy and backed by barren sand

hills. The most conspicuous sand hills stand near Bell Point

and about midway between the two points. A rock, awash, lies

about 0.75 mile W of Rocky Point and rocks lie within 0.1 mile

of the S and E sides of the point. 

7.8 Flinders Rock (32°13'S., 133°13'E.), a steep-to rock with a

depth of 5.5m, lies about 2.5 miles WSW of Rocky Point. The

sea occasionally breaks over this rock in a moderate swell. 

7.9 The Purdie Islets (32°16'S., 133°14'E.) consist of a

large granite islet, 25m high, and several above and below-water rocks. A small 3m high rock stands about 0.5 mile S of the

islet and sunken rocks extend over 0.25 mile N from the islet.

A chain of breaking rocks, 1.5 to 4.6m high, extends about 1.5

miles NE from the islet. An isolated rock, 3.9m high, stands

2.25 miles ENE of the 25m islet. Depths of more than 18.3m

are found close to all these dangers, but a depth of 7.5m lies 2.5

miles SE of the 25m islet. The Purdie Islets were reported to be

good radar targets at distances of up to 11 miles.

7.9 Lounds Island (32°16'S., 133°22'E.) stands 7 miles SE of

Rocky Point; the island is 10m high and steep-to.

7.9 Lounds Reef (32°14'S., 133°22'E.), which breaks occasionally, lies 2.75 miles N of Lounds Island and about 5.5 miles

ESE of Rocky Point. 

7.9 James Point (32°12'S., 133°25'E.), about 8.5 miles E of

Rocky Point, is a small projection which has three dark rises,

about 42m high, a short distance NW of it. Two bare sand hills

lie close W of these rises; the E hill is 47m high. The intervening coast between the two points consists of rocky points and

low cliffs with sandy beaches in between. Rocks extend about

0.25 mile offshore along this stretch of coast. A rock, which

breaks, lies about 0.75 mile offshore abreast the W sand hill

and about 2.5 miles W of James Point. 

7.9 Peter Point (32°12'S., 133°29'E.), about 3.25 miles E of

James Point, is the E extremity of an irregular peninsula that

forms the S side of Tourville Bay, and is also the N point of the

entrance of Denial Bay. The point rises gradually to its 34m

high summit. Between James Point and Peter Point, the coast is

indented by a sandy bay. Cowie Yalkeena, a bare sand hill, 36m

high, is the most conspicuous feature of this bay. A rock, with a
160 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

depth of 4.6m and on which the sea breaks occasionally, lies

about 0.75 mile SW of Peter Point. A shoal, with a depth of

6m, on the N side of Yatala Channel, lies 2.5 miles ESE of the

point. Yatala Channel leads from Denial Bay into Murat Bay.

The Nuyts Archipelago

7.10 The Nuyts Archipelago (32°15'S., 133°40'E.), comprising a number of islands and rocks, extends about 32 miles

SW from that part of the coast SE of Peter Point and between

Denial Bay and Smoky Bay. St. Peter Island and St. Francis Island are the largest and only inhabited islands of the archipelago. 

7.10 The only anchorages among the outer islands lie off the N

side of St. Francis Island and off the N side of Franklin Island.

The latter anchorage is available only during the summer, when

SE winds prevail.

7.10 St. Francis Isles (32°34'S., 133°18'E.), consisting of a group

of 11 islets, form the outermost and SW portion of the archipelago. St. Francis Island, the largest of this group, lies about

19 miles SSE of Bell Point. 

7.10 Hart Island (32°39'S., 133°08'E.), the outermost island of

the St. Francis Isles, stands 28 miles E of Yatala Reef

(32°37'S., 132°26'E.) and about 10.5 miles SW of St. Francis

Island. The island consists of a rock, 20m high, and is almost

bare. The island is steep-to, except for a sunken rock within 0.1

mile of its SW end and an above-water rock near its NE end.

Hart Island is a useful mark for vessels bound for Port Eyre

from the SE. 

7.10 Cannan Reefs (32°39'S., 133°15'E.), about 5.5 miles E of

Hart Island, consist of a bare 7.6m high rock about 0.2 mile

long, and several rocks awash. A breaking rock lies about 0.2

mile WSW of the 7.6m rock. A rock, awash, lies about 0.3 mile

NNE of the E end of the 7.6m rock and another breaking rock

lies about 0.75 mile NNE of the same above-water rock. A

dangerous rocky patch, with a least depth of 4.9m was reported

(1968) to lie about 4.25 miles SSE of this above-water rock. A

depth of 29m was reported (1968) to lie 1.5 miles SSW of this

rocky patch. A bank, with depths of 16m, lies 10 miles ESE of

Cannan Reefs.

7.11 Fenelon Island (32°35'S., 133°17'E.), about 3 miles S

of St. Francis Island, is very steep and rises to a height of 57m

as a single peak. An above-water rock lies 0.2 mile off the N

extremity of the island; detached boulders extend about 0.1

mile from the NW and E ends of the island. Elsewhere the island is steep-to. 

7.11 Masillon Island (32°34'S., 133°17'E.), about 1 mile N of

Fenelon Island, has three peaks of almost equal height, the

highest rising to an elevation of 76m. The island is steep-to, except for a few rocks close offshore, and is very steep. A bight

indents the W side of the island. 

7.11 Smooth Island (32°30'S., 133°18'E.), almost 1 mile N of the

NE extremity of St. Francis Island, is 35m high, smooth,

round, and steep-to.

7.11 Dog Island (32°29'S., 133°20'E.), 1.5 miles NE of the NE

extremity of St. Francis Island, is composed of light-colored

cliffs which rise to a 60m high summit on the E side. The N

side of the island is sheer, but the S end slopes gently. A few

detached boulders lie on the N and E sides of the island, and

rocks extend over 0.1 mile from the E and NE extremities of

the island, otherwise it is steep-to. 

7.11 Freeling Island (32°29'S., 133°20'E.), 0.5 mile NE of Dog

Island, is dark in appearance and has a rounded summit, 35m

high. Two rocks, awash, lie 0.15 mile off its N extremity; elsewhere it is steep-to. 

7.11 Egg Island (32°28'S., 133°19'E.), the N island of the St.

Francis Isles, stands 0.5 mile NE of Smooth Island. The island

has a rounded summit, 37m high, which is steep on its E side

and slopes on its W side. With the exception of a rock which

lies 0.1 mile off the N extremity and on which the sea breaks,

the island is steep-to. 

7.11 West Island (32°31'S., 133°16'E.), about 1 mile WSW of the

NW extremity of St. Francis Island, is 27m high and has a

number of loose boulders on its W slope. The sea breaks within

an area about 0.5 mile N of the island, and there are high rollers, which break occasionally, for a distance of 0.5 mile S of

the island. A long, barren, rocky islet, about 7.6m high, stands

about midway between West Island and St. Francis Island. The

passage on either side of this islet should not be attempted. 

7.12 St. Francis Island (32°31'S., 133°18'E.) is about 2

miles in extent and almost covered with vegetation. Its rounded

summit, 80m high, stands on the E side of the island, and the

highest point on the W side rises to a height of 49m. The sea

breaks heavily on all except the N side of the island. A 17.7m

rock, with a breaker close S of it, lies close off the SE extremity of the island and sunken rocks extend about 0.5 mile S from

the S end of the island. With the exception of Petrel Bay, the N

and E sides of the island are steep-to and clear of dangers. A

light is shown from the summit of the island. 

7.12 Petrel Bay (32°30'S., 133°16'E.) indents the N side of St.

Francis Island close W of the NE extremity, and has a sandy

beach. There are depths of 5.5m about 0.1 mile offshore, with

depths of 12.8 to 18.3m farther offshore. Vessels with local

knowledge can anchor in the bay over a bottom of weed and

sand. The anchorage in Petrel Bay is sheltered from all except

N and NE winds; however, such winds seldom blow with sufficient force to raise a heavy sea at this distance from the mainland. During W winds, the best anchorage lies in the W part of

the bay, in a depth of 16.5m, about 0.5 mile offshore; smaller

vessels can anchor farther in. During SE winds, the best anchorage is in the E part of the bay, in a depth of 16.5m, with the

W side of the Egg Island bearing 025° and open W of the W

side of Smooth Island, and with the NE extremity of the E entrance point of the bay bearing 093°.

The Lacy Islands (32°24'S., 133°22'E.), with its largest island lying about 6.5 miles NNE of St. Francis Island, is 45m

high and has a steep and apparently inaccessible coast, which

is free of dangers. A small round islet lies 2 miles NW of the

above island. A rock that uncovers lies about 0.3 mile E of the

islet, and a sunken rock lies about 0.1 mile N of this rock. An

above-water rock lies about 0.5 mile WSW of the islet. Depths

of 23m and 18.2m lie 3 miles WNW and 9 miles W, respectively, of the 45m island.

7.12 Evans Island (32°23'S., 133°29'E.), 37m high, stands about

5 miles ENE of the largest of the Lacy Islands. Detached above

and below-water rocks extend about 0.25 mile from the NW

and SE extremities of the island. A breaking rock lies close off

the SW extremity of the island. A depth of 13.8m lies 1.5 miles
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 161

Pub. 175

ENE of the island. A light is shown from the summit of the island.

7.13 Flinders Reef (32°13'S., 133°12'E.), about 3.5 miles

E of Evans Island, consists of two rocks, one drying 1.5m and

the other drying 2m, lying about 0.2 mile apart. The swell

breaks heavily on this reef, which has deep water about 0.5

mile from it. A shoal, with a depth of 13.7m, lies about 1.5

miles NE of Evans Island.

7.13 The Franklin Islands (32°28'S., 133°38'E.), which has its

two principal islands lying about 16 miles E of St. Francis Island, are joined by a drying sand bar about 0.25 mile long.

Both islands are flat-topped; the W island is 48m high, while

the E island is almost the same height and has a conspicuous

bush on its summit on the N side. A chain of above and belowwater rocks, about 1.25 miles long, lies almost parallel to the S

coast of the W island at a distance of 0.25 to 0.75 miles offshore. The largest rock of the chain rises to a height of 4.6m. A

pyramidal rock, about 15.2m high, stands about 0.4 mile NE of

the E island. Rocks which uncover extend almost 0.2 mile N

from the 15.2m rock. The channel between this rock and Goalen Rocks, about 2 miles NE, is clear of reported dangers.

7.13 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 11 to 16.5m, sand, off

the N side of the W island. However, this anchorage provides

shelter from SE winds only. Two dangers which must be avoided in the approach to this anchorage are a sunken rock, about

0.5 mile ENE of the NW island, and foul ground, which breaks

occasionally, lying a little more than 0.5 mile WSW of the NW

point of the E island.

7.13 Directions.—Round the W side of the W island at a distance

of about 1 mile, taking care to avoid the W end of the chain of

rocks S of the island. When the high water mark on the SW extremity of the E island is in range 123° with the high water

mark on the NE end of the W island, proceed on this range until the point between the two sandy beaches on the N side of the

W island bears 156°. Alter course to this bearing and anchor almost immediately with the NW point of the W island bearing

244°. A small vessel may anchor farther in with the NW end of

the W island bearing 262°.

7.14 Goat Island (32°19'S., 133°31'E.), about 3 miles

NNE of Evans Island, is 59m high. Its W side is free of dangers, but a reef, which has a 0.9m high rock on it, lies about

0.75 mile S of the E extremity of the island. Goat Island is

joined to St. Peter Island, about 1 mile to the E, by a ridge

which has a passage that is almost blocked by uncovering

rocks. A dangerous wreck, with a depth of 0.5m and marked

close N by a buoy, lies on this reef close N of the E extremity

of Goat Island. 

7.14 Temporary anchorage can be taken about 1 mile N of the E

extremity of Goat Island. However, this anchorage, which is

sheltered by the ridge mentioned above, has a rocky bottom in

places and provides shelter from SE winds only. 

7.14 St. Peter Island (32°17'S., 133°35'E.), the largest island of

the Nuyts Archipelago, stands on the S side of Denial Bay. The

S part of the island has two parallel ranges of hills, about 42m

high, which are covered with bushes and grass. Mount Younghusband, 44m high, forms a landmark on the NE extremity of

the island. This conspicuous hill slopes gradually on its SW

side, but on the NE side it falls steeply to a low sand spit that

extends about 2 miles ENE from the island. A drying sandbank

extends about 2 miles NE from the extremity of the sandspit. A

large uncovering sandbank fronts the E side of the island and

extends about 4 miles ENE from the E extremity of the island.

A line of breaking reefs extends 3 miles ESE from the SE extremity of the island. 

7.14 Gliddon Reef (32°20'S., 133°34'E.), which uncovers, lies

0.5 mile WSW of the S extremity of St. Peter Island.

Denial Bay to Cape Finnis

7.15 Denial Bay (32°15'S., 133°30'E.), lying N of St. Peters Island and E of Peter Point, indents the coast in a general

NE direction for about 10 miles, and is divided into three

smaller bays, Tourville Bay, Murat Bay, and Bosanquet Bay, by

two projecting headlands.

7.15 Tourville Bay (32°10'S., 133°28'E.), the W bay, is entered

between Peter Point and Cape Beaufort, about 4 miles NE. The

bay is fouled by drying sand banks and has no commercial value. A depth of 6.4m lies about 2.75 miles ESE of Peter Point.

Davenport Creek lies on the S side of the bay and is shallow.

Vessels with local knowledge and with a draft of less than 3.7m

can take sheltered anchorage within the creek at the S end of

the first reach. 

7.15 Murat Bay (32°09'S., 133°37'E.), the central bay and the

only one of any commercial importance, is entered between

Cape Beaufort and Cape Thevenard, about 4.75 miles ENE.

The bay is entered through Yatala Channel. The bay is protected from seaward by St. Peter Island and is obstructed across its

entrance by shoals and drying sandbanks. Drying sand flats

and reefs extend almost 0.75 mile from the shore in places and

there are general depths of less than 5.5m within 1 to 1.5 miles

offshore. 

7.15 Cape Thevenard (32°09'S., 133°39'E.) is a square grasscovered point, 17m high, with a conspicuous clump of bushes

on its summit. The point, which is connected to the coast by a

low isthmus, projects W about 1.75 miles and forms the SE

part of Murat Bay. There are conspicuous silos on the cape. 

7.15 Bosanquet Bay (32°10'S., 133°40'E.), the E bay of the three,

lies between Cape Thevenard and Cape Vivonne about 3.5

miles SE. A conspicuous red cliff, about 18.3m high, stands at

the SE end of the beach which lines the shore. Cape Vivonne, a

flat grass-covered point about 9.1m high, slopes gradually

from the summit of a hill, 34m high, 1 mile E of the cape. 

7.16 Port Thevenard (32°08'S., 133°39'E.) (World Port

Index No. 54410) consists of that part of Murat Bay which lies

N of Cape Beaufort and Cape Thevenard. The principal berth

extends W from the latter cape and is approached through

Yatala Channel. 

7.16 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds are from the W,

although strong S winds up to 35 knots are common during the

summer. 

7.16 Tides—Currents.—The tidal current in Yatala Channel between the shoal ground at the S end of the bay attains a velocity

Flinders Port South Australia 

http://www.flindersportscorp.com.au/about_loc_thev.htm
162 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

of 1.5 to 2 knots at spring; the flood sets NE and the ebb to the

SW. In the dredged channel, the currents setting across the

channel are weak and in the N part of Murat Bay they are barely perceptible. An E wind may lower the level of the water by

0.3 to 0.6m. The mean spring rise is 1.7m and the mean neap

rise is 1m. The tidal current sets across the final leg of the approach channel between Lighted Beacon 16 and Lighted Beacon 28. 

7.16 Depths—Limitations.—Yatala Channel, the principal entrance, is entered about 2.5 miles S of Cape Beaufort and leads

in a NE direction for 3 miles between the foul ground which

extends N from St. Peter Island and the foul ground extending

SE from Cape Beaufort. The channel then leads E for about

1.25 miles between two drying sandbanks to a position almost

0.5 mile SE of Bird Rock. This rock stands about 3.5 miles

ESE of Cape Beaufort. The channel then leads N, passing E of

a large drying sand bank, to the deep water area in Murat Bay.

The controlling depth is 8.2m in The Cutting, a dredged channel about 78m wide, which lies with its entrance about 0.4 mile

E of Bird Rock and extends about 1.5 miles to the N. 

7.16 Daphne Rock, which uncovers, lies about 0.5 mile SW of

Cape Thevenard and is marked by a beacon. 

7.16 Thevenard Jetty extends about 390m W from Cape Thevenard and has depths of 9.8m along both sides for a distance of

198m from its outer end. The principal commodities handled

are gypsum, salt, and grain in bulk, all of which are carried

along the jetty to the loading berths by conveyors. Vessels up to

180m long, with a maximum beam of 28m, can be accommodated, although vessels exceeding these limits may be accommodated at the discretion of the port master.

7.16 During strong S and NW winds, vessels may have to leave

the jetty and anchor in Murat Bay because of the heavy surge

alongside. An underkeel clearance of at least 0.9m is required

for vessels with a draft of 8.2m and over; an underkeel clearance of 0.8m is required for all other vessels. These underkeel

clearance figures are subject to change if abnormal tide or

weather conditions prevail. Ceduna Jetty and Denial Jetty,

which lie in the inner reaches of Murat Bay, are closed to commercial shipping. 

7.16 Aspect.—The limits of the channel fairway are marked by

lighted beacons and the alignment of the channel reaches are

defined by lighted range beacons. A lighted aerobeacon, which

stands about 3.5 miles ENE of Cape Thevenard, will be lighted

when required.

7.16 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and should be requested

at least 2 hours in advance; if the pilot is required outside normal working hours, the request should be made at least 4 hours

in advance. The vessel’s ETA should be given 24 hours in advance and confirmed 4 hours prior to arrival. The pilot boards

about 1 mile SW of Entrance Lighted Beacon from an orange

and white launch which is fitted with VHF. Only one pilot is

available for night departures. 

7.16 Anchorage.—Secure anchorage can be taken, in a depth of

7.3m, NW of Cape Thevenard. The mud bottom is good holding ground. Anchorage, for vessels awaiting a pilot for an extended period of time, can be obtained about 4 miles SW of the

Entrance Lighted Beacon, in a depth of about 12m. Mariners

are cautioned not to approach Entrance Lighted Beacon without a pilot owing to restricted sea room. 

7.16 Directions.—Pass about 6.5 miles E of St. Francis Island

Light and then steer 002° to pass between the Lacy Islands and

Evans Island. Approach Yatala Channel in the white sector of

Entrance Lighted Beacon; by day, make the approach by keeping the lighted beacon bearing 042°. When Channel Lighted

Beacon 2 and Channel Lighted Beacon 4 come in range, alter

course to bring them fine on the starboard bow, then pass between Channel Lighted Beacon 2 and Channel Lighted Beacon

1 and steer a mid-channel course between the channel lighted

beacons.

7.16 Caution.—Mariners are warned of the presence of marine

farms in the coastal waters surrounding Cape Thevenard,

Smoky Bay, and Denial Bay. Marine farms, which may be

floating or fixed structures, and their associated moorings

should be avoided. The farms are generally marked by buoys or

beacons, which may be lit.

7.17 Decres Bay (32°14'S., 133°44'E.) indents the coast

between Cape Vivonne and Cape D’Estree, about 5.75 miles

SE, and consists for the most part of two long sandy beaches

backed by sand hills. Whittelby Point, low and rocky, separates

the two beaches. The coast on the SE side of the bay, up to 2

miles NNW of Cape D’Estree, is cliffy and about 21.3m high.

There are general depths of 7.3 to 9.1m over the greater part of

the bay, which may be approached by Waterwitch Channel and

Smoky Bay, or from Denial Bay. The channel from Denial Bay

has depths of 3.7 to 5.5m and leads between Cape Vivonne and

the drying sandbank which extends NE from the sandspit off

St. Peter Island. The limits of this channel are marked by beacons.

7.17 Cape D’Estree (32°16'S., 133°46'E.), the extremity of a

headland which extends 3 miles S from the coast, is faced with

light-colored cliffs 30m high. The land close behind it is lower;

about 2.5 miles farther inland the land rises to scrub-covered

hills. The cape separates Decres Bay from Smoky Bay. 

7.18 Smoky Bay (32°18'S., 133°49'E.), which is contained

between Cape D’Estree and Eyre Island, about 5.75 miles SSE,

is protected from the sea by shoal ground that extends E from

St. Peter Island and by Eyre Island and the banks and shoals

that surround it. 

7.18 The bay is about 12 miles long and provides anchorage, in a

depth of about 7.3m. The bay is entered through Waterwitch

Channel, which can be navigated at all times by vessels having

local knowledge and a draft of not more than 5.5m. The coast

between Cape D’Estree and the entrance of Laura Bay, about

2.5 miles ENE, consists of broken limestone cliffs. 

7.18 A rocky islet, 9.1m high, is connected to the coast by a drying sand bank, about 1 mile SE of the entrance of Laura Bay.

From Laura Bay, the coast extends SE for about 11.5 miles and

curves sharply W and then NNW to Cape Missiessy. 

7.18 The NE part of this coast consists of rocky points, low cliffs

and beaches backed by sand hills. The most conspicuous of

these hills stands about 1 mile E of Laura Bay and rises to a

height of 44m. Saddle Peak, saddle-shaped and 28m high,

stands 5.5 miles SE of Laura Bay. Two long round-topped hills

stand 3 miles SE of Saddle Peak; the NE hill is 50m high. The

coast in the SE part of Smoky Bay is low and backed by

swamps in places.

7.19 Cape Missiessy (32°24'S., 133°52'E.) is the NW ex-
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 163

Pub. 175

tremity of a low, sandy point. Swamps lie on the E side of this

point. Smoky Bay Hill, dark and 33m high, stands 2.5 miles S

of the cape. 

7.19 Eyre Island (32°23'S., 133°50'E.), which lies on the SW

side of Smoky Bay, stands close NW of Cape Missiessy and is

separated from it by a narrow shallow channel. A drying bank

surrounds the island and extends about 3.25 miles WSW from

its NW end. A small bare islet stands on the S side of this extension.

7.19 Goalen Rocks (32°24'S., 133°43'E.), consisting of two

rocks, one above-water and the other awash, lie about 4.25

miles SW of the NW extremity of Eyre Island. The intervening

area is foul. A series of breaking reefs lies parallel to the coast

of Eyre Island and extends from Goalen Rocks to the mainland

about 2 miles SW of Smoky Bay Hill. The passage between

Goalen Rocks and the 10m rock ENE of Franklin Island has

depths of 14.6 to 27.4m and is clear of dangers. 

7.19 Waterwitch Channel (32°20'S., 133°43'E.) leads into

Smoky Bay, between the foul ground extending about 8 miles

E from St. Peter Island and the shoal area extending N and NW

from Eyre Island. The least depth in the fairway is a 5.5m patch

near the E end of the channel, about 2.5 miles S of Cape D’Estree. A drying sand bank lies on the N side of this channel,

about 1.5 miles SW of Cape D’Estree. Shoal water, with depths

of 1.8m and less, lies on the S side of the channel about 3 miles

S of Cape D’Estree. Mount Younghusband and Cape D’Estree

are useful marks when navigating this channel. The N side of

the channel is marked by a beacon about 7 miles E of the SE

end of St. Peter Island. 

7.19 The tidal currents in the outer part of Waterwitch Channel set

in a NE and SW direction at a rate of 1 knot at springs. In the

narrowest part of the channel, these currents set in an E and W

direction at a rate of 2 knots at springs. The currents within the

bay are negligible. 

7.19 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 7.3m, with Cape

D’Estree bearing 293° and the 44m hill E of Laura Bay bearing

034°. Small vessels can anchor anywhere within the bay according to draft and the direction of the wind. During strong W

winds, the best sheltered anchorage lies in the W part of Decres

Bay. Smoky Bay Jetty, which lies in the S part of the bay, has

shallow depths and is closed to commercial shipping. The coast

between Smoky Bay and Brown Point, about 6 miles S, consists of rocky points and sandy beaches backed by sand hills.

7.19 Mount Mary (32°31'S., 133°51'E.), the highest of these

sand hills, rises to a height of 45m, about 2 miles NNE of

Brown Point. Detached submerged rocks extend some distance

off this part of the coast, and it should not be approached nearer

than 2 miles.

7.20 Streaky Bay (32°35'S., 134°04'E.), entered between

Brown Point and Cape Bauer, about 15 miles to the SE, recedes

about 15 miles to the NE. This bay contains, in its NE part, the

only secure anchorage in all weather for large vessels along the

S coast of Australia between King George Sound and Port Lincoln. This anchorage is approached through Warburton Channel, which has a least fairway depth of 8.5m. 

Brown Point (32°33'S., 133°51'E.), the N entrance point of

Streaky Bay, is 35m high, red in color,and covered with coarse

grass. Its E side is steep, whereas the W side has a gentle slope.

A detached sunken rock lies about 0.5 mile S of the point. 

7.20 The E part of the bay, S of Warburton Channel, is fronted by

an extensive shoal area intersected by two channels which lead

to deeper water between the shoals and the mainland. Dashwood Channel, with a least depth of 5m, leads through the middle of this shoal area and divides it into North Bank to the N

and South Sand to the S. South Channel, with a depth of 3.4m,

leads through the shoal area lying to the S of South Sand and

the shoal area that fronts the N side of the Gibson Peninsula. 

7.20 Cape Bauer is the NW extremity of this peninsula. With the

exception of the dangers to be described, there are general

depths of 18.3m between the entrance points shoaling gradually to the shoal areas mentioned above. Blanche Port and

Streaky Bay Township are situated in the S part of the bay;

Carawa Jetty lies on the NE side of the bay. A 9.1m rocky

patch, on which the sea breaks during a heavy swell, lies about

4.5 miles SE of Brown Point. Another patch, which breaks during a heavy swell, lies about 4 miles E of the 9.1m patch. The

least known depth over this patch is 14.6m, but lesser depths

may exist.

Dashwood Rock (32°38'S., 134°04'E.), about 6 miles N of

Cape Bauer, is a dangerous pinnacle rock with a depth of 2.7m

and with depths of more than 9.1m about 0.2 mile from it. The

sea only breaks occasionally on this danger, even with a heavy

swell.

7.20 Mount Westall (32°54'S., 134°08'E.), bearing less than 172°

and open W of Cape Bauer, leads W of Dashwood Rock. 

7.20 Olive Island (32°44'S., 133°58'E.), a flat-topped rock 30m

high, stands 4.5 miles W of Cape Bauer. Numerous rocks and

other dangers extend about 1.75 miles NE from the island, and

a small head of rock, about 3m high, stands near the NE extremity of this foul ground. Rocks and other dangers, which

can usually be located by the heavy breakers over them, extend

about 1 mile SSW and W from the island.

7.21 Streaky Bay—North side.—Collinson Point

(32°33'S., 133°53'E.), 2 miles E of Brown Point, is low and

sandy. A sunken reef, which breaks only during a heavy swell,

extends about 1 mile S from the point, and a detached rocky

patch, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 1.5 miles E of the point.

In bad weather, heavy rollers are formed between Brown Point

and Collinson Point. 

7.21 Gascoigne Bay (32°31'S., 133°56'E.) indents the coast between Collinson Point and De Mole Point, about 5.5 miles

ENE. The low, sandy shores are fronted by rocks, except at the

N part. A sand hill, 24m high, stands near the shore, about 3

miles W of De Mole Point.

7.21 Good anchorage can be taken in the NW part of the bay by

small vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of 4m, sand and

weed, with Collinson Point bearing 218° and De Mole Point

bearing 090°. Two sunken rocks, on which the sea usually

breaks, lie S and ESE of the anchorage, about 3.25 and 2.5

miles, respectively, W of De Mole Point. The 24m sand hill,

bearing 009°, leads between them to the anchorage. 

7.21 De Mole Point (32°31'S., 133°59'E.), 31m high, is dark and

wooded. A rock, which uncovers, lies about 0.75 mile S of the

point. Between De Mole Point and Lindsay Point, about 5

miles ENE, the coast is indented by a shallow bay. A conspicuous 20m high hillock stands close to the beach near the head of

this bay. 

7.21 Lindsay Point (32°29'S., 134°05'E.), 3.7m high, is round
164 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

and sandy. Shoal water, with depths of less than 5.5m, extending almost 3.25 miles S from the point, forms the N side of

Warburton Channel. The mouth of the Acraman Creek stands

on the NE side of Lindsay Point. A drying bar obstructs the entrance of this creek. A sand hill, conspicuous from the anchorage E of Lindsay Point, rises to a height of 15.5m about 1 mile

NW of the creek entrance.

7.22 Streaky Bay—East side.—From the entrance of Acraman Creek, the coast extends about 2 miles E and then 5.25

miles SE to Carawa Jetty. 

7.22 North Bank (32°33'S., 134°10'E.), a shoal area which dries

in places, extends almost 6.5 miles offshore, about 1.25 miles S

of Carawa Jetty, and lies between Warburton Channel to the N,

and Dashwood Channel to the S. A long and narrow drying

sandbank extends 2 miles W from the NE extremity of the

bank and detached dry patches extend S from its W end to the

N side of Dashwood Channel. The NE extremity of this bank

has been reported to be extending NE.

7.22 Warburton Channel (32°33'S., 134°06'E.) leads in a NE direction between the shoal area to the S of Lindsay Point and the

NW edge of North Bank. A least depth of 8.5m can be carried

to the anchorage off Carawa Jetty, and also to the anchorage in

the NE part of the bay. Tidal currents in the channel attain a

rate of 1 knot at springs.

7.22 South Sand (32°39'S., 134°13'E.), a drying sandbank, extends about 4.75 miles W from a position about 1.5 miles W of

Perlubie Hill. A shoal bank extends NW, W, and SW from the

W end of South Sand, and lies between Dashwood Channel to

the N and South Channel to the S. Depths of 10m are available

in the fairway of the channel between the E extremity of South

Sand and the coast. 

7.22 Dashwood Channel (32°36'S., 134°08'E.), with a least

depth of 5.5m in the fairway, leads in an E direction between

North Bank and the shoal between the S side of North Bank

and the bank extending W from South Sand. Tidal currents in

the channel attain a rate of 1.5 knots at springs. 

7.22 South Channel (32°40'S., 134°08'E.), with a depth of 3.4m

in the fairway, leads in an E direction between the shoal water

that extends SW from South Sand and the shoal area that fronts

the N side of the Gibson Peninsula. Tidal currents in the channel run at less than 1 knot at springs. 

7.22 Anchorage can be taken by large vessels, in depths of 5.5 to

12.8m, W of Carawa Jetty, or, in a depth of 9.8m, sand and

weed, with Lindsay Point bearing 272°, distant 1.75 miles and

the summit of the prominent sandhill inside Acraman Creek

bearing 309°. Small vessels can anchor between this position

and the entrance of Acraman Creek according to draft. Good

shelter with fairly smooth water is provided in all weather.

7.22 Vessels that can pass through Dashwood Channel can anchor

anywhere between North Bank and South Sand and the shore,

or between the shoal water that extends N from the Gibson

Peninsula and the S side of South Sand. West winds raise a

short uncomfortable sea near the E shore in this part of the bay,

and considerable strain on the cable is experienced. Under

these conditions the best sheltered anchorage lies SE of the

middle of North Bank and as near as possible to its edge; however, Blanche Port is to be preferred. 

7.22 Perlubie Hill (32°38'S., 134°16'E.), about 8.25 miles SSE of

Carawa Jetty, is a conspicuous bare sand patch, 21.6m high.

The intervening coast is low and has some sand hills standing

near the beach. A range of rounded hills, 37m to 46m high and

scrub-covered, parallels the coast about 1 to 2 miles inland.

The coast between Perlubie Hill and the entrance of Blanche

Port, about 7 miles to the SSW, continues low with some sand

hills in places. 

7.22 Eba Island (32°41'S., 134°16'E.), 28m high and grass-covered, is connected to the coast about 2.5 miles S of Perlubie

Hill by a drying sand bank. A sandy cliff on the N side of the

island is topped by sand hills. A rocky islet, 9.1m high, stands

1 mile S of the E end of Eba Island; a rock that uncovers lies

close SW of this islet.

7.23 Streaky Bay—South side.—Cape Bauer (32°44'S.,

134°04'E.) is the S point of the entrance of Streaky Bay. Sand

hills surmount the cliffy extremity of the cape; the coast up to 2

miles E of the cape is cliffy. Its 90m summit, about 1 mile inland and covered with scrub, is the NW extremity of a range of

scrub-covered hills of about the same height that extends several miles SE. Detached rocks lie between 0.25 and 0.75 mile N

of the cape. A light is shown from Cape Bauer. From the end of

the cliffs, about 2 miles E of Cape Bauer, the sandy coast extends about 6 miles E to Point Gibson, the NE extremity of the

Gibson Peninsula. 

7.23 Point Gibson (32°45'S., 134°13'E.), the W entrance point of

Blanche Port, is very low and sandy. A shallow inlet extends W

for 3 miles from the S side of Point Gibson. A drying sandspit

extends 1 mile E from Point Gibson and is steep-to on its outer

end. A light is shown at the outer end of the spit and a lighted

beacon stands about 4 miles NW of the point. 

7.23 Blanche Port (32°47'S., 134°13'E.), entered between Point

Gibson Light and the coast about 1 mile to the SE, occupies the

extreme S part of Streaky Bay. The port is almost enclosed by

the Gibson Peninsula and provides anchorage, with excellent

holding ground, for vessels with a draft of 5.8m or less. The

shore is lined with sandy beaches and cliffy banks, some of

which are red. One Tree Hill, SE of the port, a church in

Streaky Bay Township, and a house on the W shore of the port

are good landmarks. Streaky Bay township stands at the S end

of Blanche Port. 

7.23 Perforated Rocks (32°45'S., 134°14'E.), two limestone

rocks, each 1.5m high with numerous holes in them, stand

about 1 mile SSE of Point Gibson Light. 

7.23 Fairway Rock (32°45'S., 134°13'E.), about 0.6 mile W of

Perforated Rocks, consists of a rocky patch about 0.4 mile in

length, with a depth of 0.4m.

7.23 Oyster Spit (32°46'S., 134°13'E.) dries for a distance of

about 0.5 mile W of Crawford Landing, which is the next point

S of Perforated Rocks.

7.23 Sponge Rocks (32°47'S., 134°12'E.), with depths of about

2m, lie about 1.25 miles W and SW of Crawford Landing. 

7.23 Anchorage can be taken off Blanche Port, in a depth of 5m,

mud, with the church in Streaky Bay township bearing 176°

and the point at Crawford Landing bearing 082°. Small vessels

anchor nearer the township. A good berth, in a depth of 3m,

mud, lies about 0.3 mile from the jetty with the church bearing

177°. 

7.23 The mean range of the tide in Streaky Bay is 1m. The tidal

currents in Streaky Bay generally set directly through the channels, but are very weak in the open parts of the bay. At springs,
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 165

Pub. 175

they attain a velocity of 1 knot in Warburton Channel, 1.5 knots

in Dashwood Channel, less than 1 knot in South Channel, 1.5

knots in the channel between South Sand and Perlubie, and 2.5

knots in the entrance of Blanche Port. Within the port, the currents are slight.

7.23 Streaky Bay Township (32°48'S., 134°12'E.) is situated at

the S end of Blanche Port and is fronted by a wooden pier

which extends from the shore N of the town. Streaky Bay is

now only used as a fishing port.

7.24 Directions—Warburton Channel.—To pass through

Warburton Channel, steer for a position about 3 miles S of De

Mole Point, taking care to avoid the previously-described dangers. From this position, steer to bring Carawa Jetty to bear

081°, and steer for it on that bearing. Having passed the NW elbow of North Bank, which is marked by a beacon, steer an

ENE course until Carawa Jetty bears 089°; it should be steered

for on this bearing, which leads to the anchorage or alongside.

If intending to anchor at the N end of Streaky Bay, proceed as

directed above and do not alter course for the N anchorage until near the anchorage off the jetty. 

7.24 Dashwood Channel.—To enter by Dashwood Channel,

steer for the entrance, avoiding the previously-described dangers SE of Brown Point and Dashwood Rock. 

7.24 Approach Dashwood Channel with Perlubie Hill bearing

106° until the red beacon at the SW end of North Bank bears

344°, distant about 1.75 miles, then steer to cross the bar in the

best charted water. 

7.24 If proceeding to Blanche Port and having crossed Dashwood

Channel Bar, steer to bring Perlubie Hill to bear 113° and steer

for it on that bearing; when the W end of Eba Island bears 177°

steer for it, passing between the E end of South Sand and Perlubie Hill. When Perlubie Hill bears 060°, alter course to pass

not less 0.6 mile W of Eba Island and about midway between

that island and the 6.7m shoal lying 1.75 miles W of it; then

steer for Perforated Rocks at the entrance of Blanche Port. 

7.24 Give Perforated Rocks a berth of about 0.3 mile and steer to

pass between them and Fairway Rock, which is marked by a

beacon. When Streaky Bay Church bears 200°, steer for it on

that bearing, until Perforated Rocks bear 048°, then steer to

keep them astern on that bearing until the church bears 177°;

steer for the church on that bearing and anchor according to

draft. 

7.24 The least depth obtained when following these directions is

4.9m. 

7.24 South Channel.—To enter by South Channel, cross the bar

with Eba Island bearing 093°, and having passed N of the lighted beacon marking the S side of the channel, steer ESE until

Perforated Rocks bear 171°, then steer for them on that bearing

until the directions given above can be followed. 

7.25 Corvisart Bay (32°49'S., 134°05'E.) indents the coast

between Cape Bauer and Westall Point, about 11 miles to the

S. The shore of the bay consists of sand and rocks, with sand

hills behind and the hills of the Gibson Peninsula farther inland. Dreadnaughts Reef, with a depth of 7.3m over its outer

end and on which the sea occasionally breaks, extends more

than 1 mile N from a position about 2 miles NE of Westall

Point. With the exception of this reef, there are considerable

depths near the shore of Corvisart Bay; however, this bay is exposed to SW winds, and anchorage is not recommended. 

7.25 Westall Point (32°55'S., 134°03'E.) is a narrow projection

which extends W about 0.75 mile from a headland forming the

S side of Corvisart Bay. The coast near the point is generally

steep and reddish in appearance. Mount Westall, which rises to

a height of 96m, stands about 1.75 miles NE of the point and

has a conspicuous and even-shaped summit. A reef, on which

the sea breaks heavily, extends about 1 mile SW from a position about 1.75 miles SE of Westall Point. A small foul bight

indenting the shore about 3 miles SE of Westall Point is bordered by sand hills, about 36 to 40m high. 

7.25 Sceale Bay (32°58'S., 134°10'E.) is entered about 6 miles SE

of Westall Point and provides anchorage to small vessels with

local knowledge at both ends during SE winds; however, it is

not safe during W gales except in its NW part. 

7.25 Yanerby Hill (32°55'S., 134°11'E.) rises to a height of 46m

at the N end of a large patch of bare sand on the N shore of the

bay and is conspicuous. A rocky patch, with a least depth of

8.2m and on which the sea breaks at times, lies about 1.25

miles E of a rocky point on the N side of Sceale Bay; otherwise, the bay is free of dangers. 

7.25 Anchorage can be taken in the N part of the bay, in a depth of

5.5m, with Mount Westall, seen over the sand hills in the bight

W of Sceale Bay, bearing 307° and the near point 206°. Note

that when approaching this anchorage, Yanerby Hill bearing

034° leads W of the 8.2m patch and when the N point of the

entrance bears 275° this patch will have been passed. 

7.25 The S anchorage lies at the junction of the long sandy beach

and the rocky coast of Cape Blanche on a bearing 172°. Anchorage can be taken according to draft. 

7.25 Sceale Bay Jetty extends offshore at the S end of the bay, but

can no longer be used by commercial shipping. 

7.25 Cape Blanche (33°02'S., 134°07'E.) is the outer extremity

of a headland that extends about 3.5 miles W from the coast

and forms the S side of Sceale Bay. The outer end of the cape is

bold and cliffy and topped by sand which is nearly of the same

height as the summit for a distance of 2 miles SE. 

7.25 From the sea, the point slopes inland to a low grassy plain

which forms an isthmus. Rocks and breakers extend almost 1

mile W and N from the cape. Slade Point, the S extremity of

the above headland, stands 3 miles SE of Cape Blanche. A

heavily-breaking reef extends 0.6 mile S from Slade Point. An

18.3m patch lies about 7 miles WSW of Cape Blanche. A

depth of 35m lies 12.5 miles WSW of Cape Blanche. 

7.25 Searcy Bay (33°05'S., 134°12'E.) indents the coast between

Slade Point and Point Labatt, about 7 miles SSE. The shores of

the bay are sandy and backed by sand hills, 37 to 61m high.

Point Labatt is fringed by foul ground which extends up to 1

mile offshore in all directions.

7.26 Cape Radstock (33°12'S., 134°19'E.), about 5 miles

SE of Point Labatt, is the N entrance point of Anxious Bay. At

Point Labatt the cliffs begin and extend uninterruptedly to the

cape. At the cape, which is steep and bold, the cliffs rise to a

height of 135m, but on either side of the cape the cliffs decrease in height. The cape has been reported to be a good radar

target at distances up to 23 miles. 

7.26 Sunken rocks, marked by heavy breakers, extend almost 2

miles offshore at the N end of the cliffs between Point Labatt

and Cape Radstock. A reef, which breaks occasionally, extends
166 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

about 0.75 mile S from the cape. A rocky patch, about 100m in

extent and with a depth of 3.7m, was reported to lie about 2.25

miles SE of the cape. Detached banks, with depths of 55 and

37m, lie 23 and 26.5 miles, respectively, W of Cape Radstock.

7.27 Anxious Bay (33°24'S., 134°34'E.), entered between

Cape Radstock and Cape Finnis, about 35 miles SE, extends

about 10 miles NE and is fully exposed to the prevailing SW

swell. 

7.27 Venus Bay, about 16 miles E of Cape Radstock, is the only

place of commercial importance. 

7.27 Baird Bay is an indentation close NE of Cape Radstock.

7.27 Mount Hall (33°04'S., 134°28'E.), about 11 miles NE of

Cape Radstock, is the 195m summit of a flat-topped, sandy,

and scrub-covered range that extends some distance inland.

Calca Bluff, 106m high, stands 8 miles N of Cape Radstock.

The bluff slopes steeply and marks the W end of the above

range. 

7.27 Mount Camel (33°17'S., 134°45'E.) stands 5 miles SE of

the entrance of Venus Bay and close to the coast. This peak is

79m high and shows above the sand hills on both sides of it.

Talia Hill, 4 miles inland, about 8 miles SE of Mount Camel, is

a round isolated hill that attains a height of 122m. Bramfield

Hill, somewhat similar to Talia Hill but higher, stands 7.5 miles

ENE of Cape Finnis.

7.27 Baird Bay (Beard Bay) (33°07'S., 134°19'E.) is a shallow

inlet extending about 10 miles inland in a NW direction. The

bay entrance, 1.5 miles E of Cape Radstock, is fouled by Jones

Island and numerous other rocks, which generally break the

sea surface. A least depth of 3m can be carried over this bar by

those possessing local knowledge. 

7.27 The coast extends ENE for 5 miles from the entrance of

Baird Bay and consists of rock and sand backed by sand hills

about 30m high. Rocks and breakers extend about 1 mile offshore along this stretch of coast. The coast then extends SE for

10 miles to Weyland Point and is fronted by a continuous line

of cliffs. 

7.28 Weyland Point (33°15'S., 134°38'E.), a conspicuous

cliffy point, 89m high, stands close SW of the entrance of Venus Bay. The point rises to a height of 96m close N and slopes

inland toward Venus Bay. 

7.28 Howard Rock (33°15'S., 134°37'E.) is a dangerous rock that

lies 0.25 mile SE of Weyland Point. During bad weather, the

sea breaks heavily over this rock, but at high water with a

smooth sea it may not show. 

7.28 Venus Bay (33°14'S., 134°39'E.) is an almost completely

landlocked lagoon that is available to vessels with local knowledge having a draft of not more than 3.7m. 

7.28 Anchorage is available, but the space is limited. Only fishing

vessels frequent the bay and the port accommodations. 

7.28 The bay is fouled over most of its area by sand banks and

shoals; the only entrance to the bay lies about 1.75 miles NE of

Weyland Point. The outer and most exposed part of the entrance bar has a least depth of 6.4m and usually breaks, except

with a flood current and in moderate weather. During bad

weather with an ebb current, the bar is a mass of breakers. In

the inner and narrowest part of the entrance, there is a least

depth of 4m, which is usually marked by smooth water. 

7.28 The town of Parkin stands on the S side of the bay, about 1

mile E of the entrance. Port Kenny stands on the N side of the

bay 3.5 miles N of Parkin. 

7.28 Germein Island (33°13'S., 134°40'E.) lies on the N side of

the channel leading to Port Kenny, about 0.75 mile NE of the N

point of the entrance. The island is low and swampy and

marked by mangroves on all except its S side, which is marked

by a sand ridge, 12.2m high. Within the bay, the currents set in

the direction of the channels at a rate of 3 to 4 knots. Two white

range beacons, with triangular topmarks, stand on the W side

of the entrance. These beacons, in range 027°, lead through the

outer part of the bar. Two beacons, in range 069.5°, lead

through the deepest water on the inner part of the bar and between the entrance points. The channel to Port Kenny is

marked by beacons. 

7.29 Port Kenny (33°14'S., 134°41'E.) and Parkin are the

distribution centers for the surrounding area. A jetty is situated

0.5 mile E of the entrance, with a depth of 4m at its outer end,

which is 37m long; there is a small crane on the jetty. Another

jetty, 32m in length, with depths alongside of 1.5m, is situated

at Port Kenny, on the N side of the bay, about 3.5 miles N of

Venus Bay. 

7.29 From the entrance of Venus Bay, the coast extends about 9

miles SE and then 18 miles S to Cape Finnis. This section of

coast consists of sandy beach backed by sand hills. Between

Weyland Point and Cape Finnis, the coast may be approached

at a distance of 1 mile. 

7.29 Cape Finnis (33°38'S., 134°49'E.), the S entrance point of

Anxious Bay, is a rocky headland with a rounded top, 47m

high. Sunken rocks, with a depth of less than 1.8m, extend

from the N side of the cape to the E island of th Waldegrave Islands, about 1.5 miles to the NW.

The Investigator Group

7.30 The Investigator Group (33°44'S., 134°21'E.) consists of a number of islands, rocks, and sunken dangers which

extend about 38 miles SW from Cape Finnis. The group consists of the Waldegrave Islands, The Watchers, Flinders Island,

Topgallant Isles, the Ward Isles, and the Pearson Islands. 

7.30 Anchorage, except during strong N and NE winds, can be

taken off the NE side of Flinders Island, and for small vessels

during S winds, NE of the more E of the Waldegrave Islands. 

7.30 The Waldegrave Islands (33°36'S., 134°47'E.) consist of

two islands joined to each other and to Cape Finnis by sunken

rocks. The E island, which is the larger of the group, is flattopped and grassy and rises to a 39m summit near the E end.

An above-water rock stands at the N end of a reef that extends

0.1 mile N from the NE extremity of the island. 

7.30 During S winds, anchorage can be taken by small vessels

with local knowledge close off the NE side of the island. The

W island, 25m high, has a steep cliff on its S side, from the top

of which the land slopes gradually on the N side. An above-water rock stands between the two islands about 0.15 mile W of

the E island. 

7.30 The Watchers (33°36'S., 134°42'E.) are two detached

above-water rocks about 1 mile apart. The W rock, 7.3m high,

lies about 3.5 miles W of the W island of the Waldegrave Islands. These rocks are surrounded by sunken rocks for a short

distance, but there are moderate depths in the passage between
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 167

Pub. 175

them. 

7.31 Flinders Island (33°43'S., 134°29'E.), about 15.5

miles WSW of Cape Finnis, is the largest and only inhabited

island of the group. The coast consists of cliffs and sandy

beaches. The cliff on the E side of the island is 53m high and

that on the next point to the W is 62m high. The land slopes N

from these remarkable cliffs and three heads show above the

top of them when viewed from the E. A steep cliff, 63m high,

fronts the N end of the island. The island has several longtopped rises which slope to the S and W and are somewhat

higher than the above cliffs; however, the most conspicuous of

these hills, about 1 mile NE of the SW extremity of the island,

is 66m high. Several small bights indent the E side of the island. 

7.31 The bight close N of the inner end of the projection that

forms the E end of the island is the only one which provides

anchorage. The beach in this bight is backed by sand hills. A

detached reef, which dries in its central part, lies about 0.5 mile

E of the S end of the beach in this bight. 

7.31 The N and W sides of the island are generally foul, and reefs

and rocky patches extend over 1 mile from the coast. The bays

on the S coast are foul, but between them and the SW extremity

of the island, rocks do not extend more than 0.25 mile offshore.

A light is shown from the NE point of the island. 

7.31 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor in a bight on the

NE side of Flinders Island. This anchorage is safe only when

W or SW gales occur or in the summer during moderately S or

E winds. Large vessels can anchor about 0.5 mile offshore, N

of the middle of the beach, in depths of 11 to 14.6m, sand, with

the SE extremity of the island bearing 169°, and the point at the

N end of the beach bearing 301°. 

7.31 Small vessels anchor between the above-mentioned detached

reef and the shore, in depths of 5.5 to 7.3m, sand, with the SE

extremity of the island bearing 161° If the wind blows from the

N or NE, vessels should heave up and head for deeper water

before the sea has time to break. 

7.31 Directions.—When approaching this anchorage from the S,

steer to pass between Flinders Island and the Topgallant Isles,

keeping more than 1 mile off Flinders Island until the N isle of

the Topgallant Isles bears 099°. Then alter course to 279° and

steer for the anchorage, with Topgallant Isles astern, taking

care to avoid the previously-mentioned detached reef. 

7.31 A large area of foul ground, about 2.5 miles in extent and on

which the sea always breaks, lies between 3 and 6 miles W of

the N part of Flinders Island. A detached breaking rock lies 2.5

miles NW of the NW end of the island, with a similar rock lying about midway between the SE extremity of the foul area

and the island.

7.32 The Topgallant Isles (33°43'S., 134°37'E.), about 3.5

miles E of Flinders Island, consist of an islet and a number of

bare rocks that extend almost 1 mile SE from it. The islet,

101m high, has a rounded top and a high, steep, cliffy coast.

The group takes its name from the rocks that, from various directions, have the appearance of sailing vessels showing their

upper sails above the horizon. Sunken rocks extend about 0.5

mile SW from the islet and 0.75 mile E from the rock; elsewhere the Topgallant Isles are steep-to. 

7.32 The Ward Islands (33°45'S., 134°15'E.) consist of two islets, surrounded by sunken rocks, and three detached reefs, on

which the sea generally breaks. The larger and NW islet, about

8 miles WNW of the SW end of Flinders Island, is 49m high

and flat-topped, with a steep coast. Sunken rocks extend almost

0.5 mile N from it. 

7.32 A detached reef lies 1 mile WNW of this islet; two similar

reefs lie 0.75 and 1.25 miles, respectively, S of the same islet.

A depth of 15.5m lies about 15 miles W of the islet. The SE islet, 28m high, is a small rock which lies about 1.5 miles from

the NW islet. Sunken rocks surround the islet and extend about

0.1 mile S and N from it. Two shoals, each with a depth of

15m, lie 4 miles NW and 16.5 miles WNW of the Ward Islands. 

7.32 The Pearson Islands (33°57'S., 134°15'E.), the SW and outermost of the Investigator Group, consists of four bold granite

formations which lie between 13 and 18 miles SW of Flinders

Island. An above-water rock lies W of the N island of the

group, and a sunken rock lies between this island and the island

S of it. A reef is located close to the SW end of the S island.

With the exception of the above dangers, the Pearson Islands

are steep-to. 

7.32 The N island has steep cliffs on its W side which rise in the

N part almost to its 238m high peaked summit. When first

seen, this part of the island resembles Greenly Island (see paragraph 7.42), about 50 miles to the SE. The E side of the summit

consists of a grassy slope that is partly wooded. The N end of

the island attains a height of 183m. The S part of the island has

two bare, rocky peaks, the S peak rising to a height of 115m. A

light is shown from the W side of the island. 

7.32 The two middle islands of the group are bare rocks; the N

rock is 82m high and the S rock is 36m high. The S island of

the group is barren and almost split in the middle. The N part

of the island is 140m high and the S part is 102m high. Banks,

with depths of 32m and 27m lie, respectively, 4.75 miles W

and 9 miles W of Pearson Islands Light. 

7.32 Caution.—Care should be taken when approaching the

Pearson Islands at night; the light is obscured from several directions. The Pearson Islands have been reported to be a good

radar target at distances up to 22 miles.

Cape Finnis to Coffin Bay

7.33 The coast between Cape Finnis and Wellesley Point,

about 2.5 miles SE, is cliffy and backed by hills about 61m

high. 

7.33 Waterloo Bay (33°38'S., 134°52'E.), a semicircular indentation in the coast, is entered between Wellesley Point and Wellington Point, about 0.75 mile SE. The bay is open to the SW,

but is partially protected by the reefs which obstruct the entrance. 

7.33 Bramfield Hill (33°35'S., 134°58'E.), 193m high and conspicuous, stands 6.25 miles NE of Wellesley Hill. When

viewed from the SW, the hill appears to slope on either side.

The bay provides shelter to vessels with local knowledge and a

draft not exceeding 4.6m in all weather except SW gales. A

rocky ledge extends across the bay entrance close behind the

reefs, the edges of which can usually be seen. The basin within

the ledge has depths of 5.5 to 10.3m and is about 0.25 mile in

extent. There is a least depth of 4m leading through the channel

in the fairway of the entrance. Vessels with a draft of not more
168 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

than 3m at all stages of the tide can use this channel. 

7.33 Caution.—Vessels are advised to use their anchors with care

in the area between 235 and 470m SW of the pier. An obstruction, presumed to be an old mooring cable, was reported to lie

in this area. Two lighted beacons and two daybeacons, in range

031.75°, lead across the bar in the greatest depths.

7.34 Elliston (33°38'S., 134°52'E.), a small town on the E

side of the bay, is fronted by a pier, about 412m long, with a

depth of 4.9m alongside its outer end. Vessels up to 45m in

length, with a draft of up to 3.7m, can be accommodated alongside. The coast between Wellington Point and Drummond

Point, about 35 miles SE, consists principally of steep cliffs.

The only dangers along this stretch of coast are Tungketta

Reef, a breaking reef which extends 1 mile offshore, 14 miles

SE of Wellington Point, and some rocks in a sandy bight about

6 to 8 miles farther SE. 

7.34 Conspicuous hills standing between Waterloo Bay and

Drummond Point are Tungketta Hill, 138m high, about 11

miles SE of Waterloo Bay; Mount Misery, 114m high, about

midway between Tungketta Hill and Drummond Point; and Kiana Cliff, 115m high, steep, and bold, almost midway between

Mount Misery and Drummond Point. 

7.34 Cap Island (33°57'S., 135°07'E.), named for its appearance,

is 28m high and steep-to. This small islet lies W of Mount Misery, about 4 miles offshore.

7.35 Drummond Point (34°09'S., 135°14'E.), a prominent

cliffy headland that extends from the coast, rises to a hill about

59m high. Mount Hope, a wooded hill 172m high, stands 5

miles E of the point and Mount Drummond, also wooded and

173m high, stands 6 miles SE of the point. Both hills are conspicuous. A small above-water rock, with some breakers in the

vicinity, lies close off Drummond Point. The coast between

Drummond Point and another point about 2 miles S, and on

which there is a hillock, 45m high, is steep-to. A rock, awash,

lies 1 mile S of the latter point. From this point, the coast extends about 1 mile NE and forms a bight. Between the head of

this bight and the foot of Mount Greenly, about 12 miles SE,

the sandy coast rises gradually to some wooded ranges about 3

miles inland. These ranges terminate abruptly about 2 miles S

of Mount Greenly. 

7.35 Rocky Island (34°16'S., 135°15'E.), 15m high, stands 6.5

miles S of Drummond Point and about 3.5 miles offshore. The

island has been reported to be a good radar target at distances

up to 28 miles. 

7.35 Krause Rock (34°14'S., 135°05'E.), over which the depth is

14.6m, lies about 8.5 miles WSW of Drummond Point. The sea

breaks heavily over this danger during a high swell. Less water

than charted has been reported to lie in the vicinity of this rock.

7.35 Caution.—An unexamined depth of 12.1m lies 2 miles NE

of Krause Point. 

7.36 Mount Greenly (34°21'S., 135°22'E.) rises to a

height of 305m about 0.5 mile inland. When viewed from the

N or S, the mount appears as a sharp peak, but when seen from

the W, it has a rather long summit that falls abruptly to the N

and slopes gradually in three steps to the S. Rocky cliffs form

the top of the hill on the seaward side and around the summit,

but between the base of these rocky cliffs and the top of the

coastal cliff, the sloping sides are wooded. From the base of

Mount Greenly to Frenchman Lookout, 0.5 mile inland abreast

the E point of the entrance of Coffin Bay, the coast extends S

for 4 miles and is cliffy. 

7.36 North Block (34°22'S., 135°32'E.), a high peak, stands 9

miles E of Mount Greenly. 

7.36 Frenchman Lookout rises to three peaks of almost equal

height; the summit, which is the central peak, rises to a height

of 166m.

7.37 Sir Isaac Point (34°26'S., 135°13'E.), about 8 miles

W of Frenchman Lookout, is the W point of the entrance of

Coffin Bay and the N extremity of the Coffin Bay Peninsula,

which forms the W side of Coffin Bay. The W side of the point

is fronted by cliffs, which are topped by partly-vegetated hills

rising to a height of 52m. The E side of the point is lower and

has a sandy beach at its base. A light is shown from Sir Isaac

Point. 

7.37 The W side of the Coffin Bay Peninsula, between Sir Isaac

Point and Whidbey Point, about 11 miles SSW, is rugged and

cliffy. Reef Point, about midway between the above points, is

the most projecting part of this coast. A depth of 2.7m lies 1.25

miles NNW of Reef Point. A sunken reef, about 1.5 miles in

extent and which breaks heavily, lies off Reef Point. The S part

of this reef apparently dries. Rocky ground, with depths of 11

to 14.6m, extends 1 mile N from the reef. During W gales the

sea breaks over this rocky ground. Mount Greenly kept open N

of Sir Isaac Point and bearing more than 063° leads NW of the

dangers off Reef Point. 

7.37 Whidbey Point (34°35'S., 135°06'E.) is fronted by low cliffs

and rises to a round hill, 62m high, about 1 mile inland. Breaking reefs extend almost 0.75 mile S from the middle and E

parts of the seaward side of Whidbey Point. 

7.37 Caution.—The W side of the Coffin Bay Peninsula should

not be approached within a distance of 2 miles because of the

heavy W swell that rolls in.

Coffin Bay

7.38 Coffin Bay (34°30'S., 135°20'E.), about 14 miles

long, lies between the mainland S of Frenchman Lookout and

the Coffin Bay Peninsula. The bay is divided into two parts by

the Horse Peninsula. That part of Coffin Bay to the W and S of

this peninsula is Port Douglas; Mount Dutton Bay lies to the E

of the peninsula and Kellidie Bay is the SE extension of Coffin

Bay. There are considerable depths in parts of the bay, but

many are so exposed that anchorage is not advised. Sheltered

anchorage can be obtained by small vessels only, either in the

lee of Sir Isaac Point, at Port Douglas, or in Mount Dutton Bay. 

7.39 Coffin Bay—East side.—The coast from Frenchman

Lookout to the Horse Peninsula consists of rugged cliffs

backed by wooded hills. South of the peninsula, the coast is

bordered by sandy beach for 1.75 miles. Cliff Hill, about 3.25

miles S of Frenchman Lookout, is very similar in appearance to

it. The central peak of three is the highest. 

7.39 Mount Dutton, about 2.3 miles SSE of Cliff Hill, slopes

gradually and is well-covered by trees. Its 276m summit curves

to the E and S from the highest part on the W side. Marble

Range, rising to a height of 411m about 7 miles ESE of
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 169

Pub. 175

Frenchman Lookout, has two remarkable summits, with the S

summit being very rocky near the top.

7.40 Coffin Bay—West side.—The coast from Sir Isaac

Point extends S for 4 miles and is generally low, with rocky

points and sandy beaches. It then extends E for 7 miles to the

outer end of Longnose Point. Some conspicuous bare sand hills

of moderate height stand close to the beach about 2 miles E of

the junction of the S and E trend of the coast. A shoal, with a

depth of 1.3m, lies about 3.75 miles SE of Sir Isaac Point; another shoal, with a depth of 1.8m, lies about 0.75 mile farther

SSE. Longnose Point is a very narrow, sandy peninsula about 2

miles long and 6.1m high. 

7.40 Port Douglas (34°32'S., 135°23'E.) is entered over a bar that

lies between Longnose Point and a low point on the Horse Peninsula, about 1.5 miles to the E. Local knowledge is essential.

7.40 Shoal water and drying sand banks obstruct the entrance of

Port Douglas. A drying sand bank fronts the W side of the

Horse Peninsula and extends W in places up to 2 miles. A similar bank extends from the peninsula terminating in Longnose

Point as far S as 2 miles in places. However, depths of 3.7 to

7.3m are found over a considerable area in the S part of Port

Douglas. In the NW part of the port, there is a basin with

depths of 4.6 to 9.1m between the W edge of the drying sand

bank and the shore. 

7.40 There is a least depth of 2.4m in the fairway of a narrow intricate channel that leads over the bar and between the drying

sand banks to the S part of the bay, and to Mount Dutton Bay

and Kellidie Bay. 

7.40 The Brothers, two small rocky islets, lie in the S part of Port

Douglas about 1 mile W of the S extremity of the Horse Peninsula. Another rocky islet, 8.5m high and surrounded by a drying sand bank, lies about 1.25 miles SSE of the SE extremity of

the Horse Peninsula. 

7.40 The channel that leads to Port Douglas is marked by lighted

beacons and buoys. 

7.40 Caution.—The shoals and soundings are subject to change

and the beacons should not be passed close to. 

7.41 Mount Dutton Bay (34°34'S., 135°25'E.) lies between the E side of the Horse Peninsula and the mainland.

There are depths of 3.7 to 7.3m in the S part of the bay, which

is relatively steep-to on its E side, but the N part of the bay is

shallow. A small rocky islet lies in the NE part of Mount Dutton Bay.

7.41 Kellidie Bay (Killidie Bay) (34°36'S., 135°28'E.), E of the S

part of Port Douglas, is shallow and obstructed across its entrance by a rocky ledge which almost dries. A submarine telephone cable, marked by notice boards, is laid across the

entrance to Killidie Bay. A jetty, 28m long, with a depth of

3.4m alongside, extends from the shore of the bay for the use

of fishing vessels. 

7.41 Anchorages.—The outer part of Coffin Bay is exposed and

not recommended as an anchorage. However, there is sheltered

anchorage for small vessels in a bight formed in the shoal bank

SE of Sir Isaac Point. The anchorage has a depth of 4.6m, sand

and mud, with Frenchman Lookout bearing 062° and the NE

extremity of Sir Isaac Point bearing about 340°. 

7.41 In Port Douglas, the best anchorage can be taken, in a depth

of 4m, sand and mud, with the W point of the entrance of

Mount Dutton Bay bearing 043° and the 8.5m rocky islet bearing 094°. 

7.41 In Mount Dutton Bay, anchorage can be taken, in depths of

2.7 to 3.7m, mud, with Mount Dutton just open W of the rocky

islet and bearing 356°, and 0.5 mile from the islet. 

7.41 At the entrance to Port Douglas, the tidal currents commence

1 hour after high and low water, respectively. Inside the entrance, the currents set in the direction of the channel where the

fairway trends in a N and S direction, but where the channel

trends in an E and W direction, the currents set across the channel. After a continuance of W winds, the tidal currents are very

strong at the entrance from 1 hour after high water to 1 hour after low water.

7.41 Directions.—A vessel approaching Coffin Bay from the SE

should pass about 4 miles WNW of Reef Point, with Mount

Greenly open N of Sir Isaac Point and bearing more than 063°.

Sir Isaac Point should then be rounded at a distance of 0.5 mile.

Vessels intending to anchor in the outer part of the bay should

steer for the conspicuous 46m sand hill in the SW part of the

bay bearing 167° for about 2 miles or until Frenchman Lookout

bears 062°. Course can then be altered to the W for the previously-described anchorage. 

7.41 Local knowledge is necessary for vessels intending to anchor

in Mount Dutton Bay.

Coffin Bay to Spencer Gulf

7.42 Greenly Island (34°39'S., 134°47'E.), about 16 miles

WSW of Whidbey Point, is a bold mass of granite that rises to

a 230m summit in its E part. The island is almost divided into

two parts near its NW part. The isthmus that connects its two

parts is awash at times. A rock, 61m high, stands 0.5 mile E of

the island. Considerable depths exist about 1 mile from the island. 

7.42 Rocky Island (34°39'S., 134°42'E.), about 10.5 miles SSW

of Greenly Island, is a precipitous granite rock, 68m high. A

sunken rock, which breaks, lies 0.5 mile W of the N extremity

of the island, and rocks extend about 0.2 mile from the S extremity of the island; otherwise it is steep-to. Rocky Island has

been reported to be a good radar target at distances of up to 28

miles. 

7.42 The Whidbey Islands (34°44'S., 135°08'E.) consist of the

Four Hummocks Islands, a rock to the E of them, Perforated Island, Price Island, and an island near the S side of Avoid Point;

all of this group lies between Rocky Island and Avoid Point,

which lies 12 miles SE of Whidbey Point. 

7.42 The Four Hummocks Islands (34°46'S., 135°01'E.) are four

steep rounded granite islands with several small rocks among

them, most of which are above water. The S and highest of the

group rises to a height of 110m and stands 15 miles E of Rocky

Island. A large rock lies close off its SE side. A light is shown

from the summit of the S island. 

7.42 The two middle islands are almost joined and appear on most

bearings as one island with two peaks; the N peak rises to a

height of 88m and is the higher of the two. The passage between the S island and the two middle islands is about 0.3 mile

wide and fouled by rocks, the highest of which is 15.2m high.

The N island of the group, 89m high, stands about 2 miles

NNE of the S island. The passage between this island and the

two middle islands is about 0.75 mile wide, clear of dangers,
170 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

and has depths of 27.5m and more. 

7.42 A bare 23m high rock stands 2 miles E of the N island and is

separated from it by a clear passage with depths of 38.4m and

more. A depth of 42m was reported to lie 3 miles WNW of the

S island. A depth of 31m was reported to lie 5 miles W of the

island. Depths of 34m were reported to lie 0.5 mile farther NW.

Depths of 33m and 35m were reported to lie 6 miles SW of

Four Hummocks Light. 

7.43 Perforated Island (34°43'S., 135°09'E.), about 8.25

miles SSE of Whidbey Point and nearly midway between Four

Hummocks and Avoid Point, is 72m high, irregular in shape,

and surrounded by steep cliffs almost as high as the summit.

The heavy sea which breaks on the island has washed the island into rugged forms. There is a hole through the island near

the top, about 0.25 mile from its N end. A breaking sunken reef

extends about 1 mile W from the S end of the island. 

7.43 Caution.—There is much foul ground S of an E-W line tangent to the S extremity of Perforated Island and within 3 miles

of that extremity. Vessels should not approach the island nearer

than 4 miles on any bearing more than 090° or less than 270°. 

7.43 A depth of 8m lies about 1.5 miles N of the NE end of Perforated Island.

7.44 Price Island (34°43'S., 135°17'E.), about 2.5 miles

SW of Avoid Point, is 64m high, surrounded by limestone

cliffs, and steep-to, except for a reef which extends 0.2 mile N

from its N end. A limestone island, 55m high, stands 0.75 mile

S of Avoid Point and is joined to it by an above and below-water ledge. A sunken reef extends about 1 mile W from the W

extremity of the island.

7.44 Currents.—The currents between Greenly Island, Rocky Island, and the Whidbey Islands are very strong. During and after a gale, these currents cause a confused sea in many places

about the islands. Among the outer islands, from November to

May, and after a continuance of SE winds, the current sets NW

and attains a velocity of up to 2 knots. From May to November,

during W winds, the current sets E at about the same velocity.

7.45 Avoid Bay (34°37'S., 135°14'E.) is entered between

Whidbey Point and Avoid Point, about 12 miles SE, and recedes about 4.5 miles to the NE. There are considerable depths

in Avoid Bay, with soundings of 18.3m and more being found

up to 1 mile offshore. 

7.45 Black Rocks (34°37'S., 135°17'E.) lie about 5 miles NNW

of Avoid Point. The largest and highest of this group is an islet

47m high. A reef, which breaks, extends about 0.75 mile SE

from the islet. A small above-water rock stands on the SE extremity of this reef. A flat rock lies about 0.1 mile WNW of the

islet and a reef, with a small rock on its NW end, extends 0.3

mile farther WNW from the flat rock.

7.45 Avoid Point (34°40'S., 135°19'E.) is fronted on all of its seaward sides by limestone cliffs, about 46m high, which change

abruptly to sand hills E of its S extremity. A green hill rises to a

height of 57m above the point and a sand hill tops a rocky point

in the N part of Avoid Point. 

7.45 A rock, which seldom breaks, lies about 0.25 mile NE of the

above-mentioned rocky point. A flat above-water rock lies

close to the W side of Avoid Point. A sunken rock, which almost always breaks, lies about 1 mile W of the flat rock and

must be avoided when entering Avoid Bay from the SW. 

7.45 The sandy coast from the S side of Avoid Point extends

about 10 miles SE to where the cliffs begin. The beach along

the SE stretch of this coast is backed by bare sand hills that extend about 5 miles inland and attain their greatest height of

165m about 2 miles behind the beach. The shore is fairly steepto and always marked by breakers. 

7.45 A wooded hill, which slopes down to the cliffs NNW of

Shoal Point (Stuart Point) (34°47'S., 135°29'E.) and joins the

sand hills to the N of it, rises to a summit 193m high, about 2.5

miles N of Shoal Point. This is the highest land between Whidbey Point and Cape Catastrophe. Shoal Point, which is fronted

by cliffs about 122m high, has a round green hill, about 137m,

high for a summit. 

7.45 Stuart Reef (34°50'S., 135°22'E.), a dangerous sunken reef

which breaks heavily at times, lies 6.5 miles WSW of Shoal

Point. The coast from Shoal Point extends regularly SE for 10

miles and then extends SSW for 2 miles to the extremity of

Cape Carnot. This entire stretch of coast is fronted by high

cliffs which are steep in places. Sand hills rise an additional

15.2 to 30.5m above these cliffs. 

7.45 D’Anville Bay, a slight indentation, lies 3 miles N of Cape

Carnot. A sunken rock, which seldom breaks during SE winds,

lies about 0.5 mile offshore, 3 miles SSE of Shoal Point. 

7.45 Cape Rock (34°55'S., 135°32'E.), 6.4m high, stands 4.5

miles WNW of Cape Carnot. A small breaking sunken rock

lies 2 miles NE of Cape Rock.

7.46 Cape Carnot (34°56'S., 135°37'E.) is the SW extremity of a broad promontory of which Cape Wiles, 3 miles to the

E, is the SE extremity. The summit of Cape Carnot is a round

stony hill, 89m high, which slopes to the shore. Low cliffs

commence at the extremity of Cape Carnot and rise gradually

with the E trend of the coast, attaining their greatest elevation

at Cape Wiles; the summit of Cape Wiles, 143m high, rises just

above these cliffs. 

7.46 A breaking rock lies about 0.75 mile NW of Cape Carnot

and an uncovered ledge extends about 0.3 mile S from the

cape. A 7.8m shoal depth lies approximately 1.5 miles SW of

Cape Carnot. Two high rocks, conspicuous from the W or from

Sleaford Bay, are just detached from Cape Wiles, and an

above-water rock, about 0.2 mile long, lies about 0.3 mile S of

the cape. 

7.46 Liguanea Island (35°00'S., 135°37'E.) about 2 miles S of

Cape Carnot, is cliffy and rather flat-topped. The highest part

of the island, 56m high, stands near the S end. A detached reef,

with its S end above water, extends about 0.5 mile SSW from

the S extremity of the island. 

7.46 Cabbage Patch, a shoal with a depth of 14.6m over which the

sea breaks, lies 16 miles S of Liguanea Island. A bank, with a

depth of 29m, which also breaks, lies 3 miles N of Cabbage

Patch.

7.47 Sleaford Bay (34°54'S., 135°46'E.), entered between

Cape Wiles and Cape Tournefort, about 8 miles to the ENE, indents the coast in a N direction for about 4.5 miles. There are

depths of 18.3 to 36.6m about 1 mile offshore around the perimeter of the bay, but anchorage is not recommended because

of the heavy swell which sets inward. During bad weather, a

very confused sea can be expected. 
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 171

Pub. 175

7.47 Cobbler Hill, conspicuous, conical, and 198m high, stands

about 6.5 miles N of the head of the bay. North Side Hill, 195m

high and conspicuous when viewed from the W part of the bay,

stands 5.5 miles E of Cobbler Hill. 

7.47 From Cape Wiles, the coast extends N for 2 miles to the S

point of the entrance of Fishery Bay and is fronted by cliffs.

Fishery Bay, about 0.5 mile in extent, is fronted by cliffs. Anchorage is not recommended in this bay. A breaking rock lies

about 0.5 mile E of the N entrance point of the bay. 

7.47 The coast of Sleaford Bay from the entrance of Fishery Bay

extends about 4 miles N and then generally SE for 7.5 miles to

Cape Tournefort. The shores of the bay are fronted by sandy

beaches and backed by cliffs and hills. A rocky islet, about

7.6m high, stands close offshore about 2.25 miles NNW of

Cape Tournefort. Another rocky islet, 55m high, stands about

0.75 mile SE of the above islet.

7.48 Cape Tournefort (34°55'S., 135°51'E.), which extends about 0.75 mile SW from the coast, rises to a 104m green

summit that is bare of trees. The E side of the cape is fronted

by high cliffs. 

7.48 Jussieu Bay (34°57'S., 135°54'E.), a slight indentation, is

entered between Cape Tournefort and West Point, about 6.5

miles SE. A chain of low rocks and islets, the highest being

about 37m high, extends 2 miles S from the coast about 1 mile

SE of Cape Tournefort. The coast of Jussieu Bay has been reported to be a good radar target at distances up to 24 miles. 

7.48 West Point (35°00'S., 135°57'E.), the S extremity of Cape

Catastrophe, is a cliffy headland that rises to a 140m high conical summit. 

7.48 Williams Island (35°02'S., 135°58'E.), about 1 mile SSE of

West Point, is separated from the mainland by a passage with

considerable depths. The top of the island is almost flat. The S

side of the island is very rugged, with long ledges of rock extending out from the cliffs. 

7.48 A bay on the N side of the island has depths of 8.2m at its

head, but is not suitable as an anchorage, except as a last resort.

A light is shown from the W summit of the island. 

7.48 A sunken rock lies close off the SE point of the island. A

bank, with a depth of 44m, lies 4.5 miles SSW of Williams Island; a rocky bank, with a depth of 68m, lies 1.75 miles farther

SSW. 

7.48 Cape Catastrophe (34°59'S., 136°00'E.) is high and generally rocky. The cliffs, 15 to 30m high, consist of red and white

limestone formation. Behind the cliffs, the land rises to conical

hills, which are densely covered with scrub; farther inland the

land rises to a rocky range of considerable height, upon which

there are a few trees. A ledge of black rocks, which breaks, extends about 100m S from the cape.

Spencer Gulf

7.49 Spencer Gulf (34°38'S., 136°53'E.) is entered between Cape Catastrophe and Cape Spencer, about 48 miles to

the ESE. The gulf extends about 180 miles in a general NNE

direction to Port Augusta, at the head of the gulf. Port Lincoln,

Tumby Bay, Franklin Harbor, and Port Whyalla are on the W

side of the gulf. Port Victoria, Tipara Bay, Wallaroo Bay, Port

Broughton, Port Pirie, and Germein Bay are on the E side of

the gulf. 

7.49 The gulf is navigable over most of its area by deep-draft vessels; vessels of moderate draft can reach and lie at Port Augusta. In the middle of the entrance of the gulf lie the Gambier

Islands; Thistle Island lies in the entrance near the W shore.

Low Rocks and Neptune Isles are located in the offing to the S

of Thistle Island. 

7.49 Tides—Currents.—Strong tidal currents flow close around

Cape Catastrophe, and between the cape and Williams Island.

The ebb sets SW and the flood sets NE. With onshore winds,

these tidal currents cause a race dangerous to small vessels. 

7.49 Caution.—Local magnetic disturbances affecting the compass to a very marked degree have been reported by vessels

navigating Spencer Gulf, especially between Middle Bank and

Tiparra Reef. This magnetic attraction is stronger on the W

side of the gulf, but it has been reported that there were considerable magnetic disturbances on the E side as well. Vessels

traveling S find that their compasses become sluggish after

shaping course from Middle Bank to Tiparra Reef, and the farther W the vessel happens to be, the more sluggish the compass

becomes. It has been reported that the variation changed from

001° W to 008° E within a distance of 2 miles of a position

about 11 miles WSW of Tiparra Reef Light.

Spencer Gulf—Islands off the Entrance

7.50 The Neptune Islands (35°16'S., 136°06'E.), consisting of South Neptunes and North Neptunes, stand 22 and 15

miles SSE, respectively, of Cape Catastrophe. 

7.50 South Neptunes (35°20'S., 136°07'E.), two islands composed of black-colored granite, are separated by a narrow foul

channel. The S island is 37m high and covered with stunted

vegetation; the N island is 35m high. The sea breaks very

heavily on the S side of both islands. A rock, with a depth of

less than 1.8m, lies within 0.2 mile of the NW side of the N island. An above-water rock lies 0.2 mile NW of the S island. A

light is shown from the summit of the S island. A racon transmits from the light. The light on South Neptunes has been reported to be a good radar target at distances up to 19 miles.

7.50 A jetty, with a depth of 1.8m alongside its outer end, extends

from the S island. 

7.50 Caution.—Because of the irregularity of the bottom and

lack of detailed surveys, deep-draft vessels should not approach within 5 miles of South Neptunes. 

7.51 North Neptunes (35°14'S., 136°04'E.) consists of an

island, an islet, and several detached rocks. The island is 49m

high and almost flat-topped. Granite cliffs, against which the

sea breaks heavily, front the S and SW sides of the island. A

heavy surf breaks on the sand

7.51 A rock, on which the sea breaks only at times, but then with

great violence, lies 0.25 mile E of the SE extremity of the island. A 12.8m shoal lies 1 mile E of the same extremity. A

granite islet, 29m high, stands 0.25 mile E of the NE extremity

of the island. A large rock, on which the sea breaks heavily, lies

about 0.5 mile E of the islet. A light is shown from the summit

of the island. North Neptunes have been reported to be a good

radar target at distances of up to 19 miles. 

7.51 Low Rocks (35°10'S., 136°27'E.), about 3.5 miles N of

North Neptunes, are a straggling mass of rocks, about 9.1m

high. A rock, which breaks heavily, lies awash about 0.5 mile
172 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

NNE of Low Rocks.

7.52 The Gambier Islands (35°10'S., 136°27'E.), consisting of Wedge Island, North Islet, and a number of rocks and

dangers in the vicinity, are located in the entrance of Spencer

Gulf, about midway between Cape Catastrophe and Cape

Spencer.

7.52 Wedge Island (35°10'S., 136°28'E.), about 19 miles ENE of

South Neptunes, consists of limestone covered with low bushes, trees, and some grass. The island rises gradually from its N

part and attains a height of 202m at its SE end, where it forms a

nearly perpendicular cliff facing S. This cliff gives the island a

wedge-shaped appearance when seen from a distance. Wedge

Island has been reported to be a good radar target at distances

up to 22 miles. 

7.52 Sunken rocks extend about 0.25 mile offshore from a low

point 1 mile SE of the NW extremity of the island; a 10.7m

patch lies about 0.25 mile offshore, 0.5 mile N of the island’s E

extremity. Wedge Island Light is shown from the SE point of

the island. 

7.52 Louise Shoal (35°13'S., 136°32'E.), an 18.3m patch, and Suzanne Shoal, a 15.8m patch, lie about 3.5 and 5.25 miles SE of

the SE extremity of Wedge Island. During and after SW gales,

there are heavy breakers in this area. 

7.52 Lake Macquarie Bank (35°19'S., 136°39'E.), with a depth

of 29.2m, lies 11.5 miles SE of Wedge Island Light. 

7.52 Peaked Rocks (35°11'S., 136°30'E.), 64 and 43m high, are

two conical islets which lie 0.5 mile SW and 0.25 mile SSE, respectively, of the SE extremity of Wedge Island. A detached

10.1m patch lies 0.5 mile SE of the westernmost Peaked Rock. 

7.52 Southwest Rock (35°11'S., 136°25'E.), about 1.75 miles

SW of the SW end of Wedge Island and separated from it by a

clear deep passage, is a mass of granite, 21m high. A cleft runs

in a NNE direction in the rock and divides it into two unequal

parts.

7.52 West Rock (35°09'S., 136°27'E.), which always breaks, lies

awash about 0.5 mile W of the NW extremity of Wedge Island. 

7.52 North Islet (35°07'S., 136°28'E.), about 1.25 miles NNE of

the NW extremity of Wedge Island and separated from it by a

passage with a depth of 9.1m, is 47m high. It has a few trees

and some vegetation on it. 

7.52 Ward Rock (35°07'S., 136°27'E.), with a depth of 12.8m,

rises abruptly from depths of 37m about 0.75 mile W of North

Islet. The rock is dangerous during a heavy swell because the

sea then breaks violently over it. The rock does not break in

fine weather.

7.53 Middle Rock (35°06'S., 136°29'E.) and Northnortheast Rock, both awash, lie 1 mile N and 3 miles NNE of North

Islet. Deep water lies between Middle Rock and North Islet,

and also between Middle Rock and Northnortheast Rock, but

the latter, which stands on a foul area, should be given a berth

of at least 1 mile.

7.53 A 16.5m patch, which breaks at times, lies at the W end of

the passage between North Islet and Middle Rock, about 1.25

miles WSW of the latter. Southwest Rock, open its own

breadth or more, W of the W end of Wedge Island and bearing

less than 198°, leads W of Middle Rock and Northnortheast

Rock. The 43m high Peaked Rock, open E of the E end of

Wedge Island and bearing more than 190°, leads E of the rocks. 

7.53 There is a good anchorage off the sandy beach on the NE

side of Wedge Island, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, rocky bottom,

sheltered from NW through W to S winds. The anchorage is located SE of the sunken rocks which extend from the low point

near the NW extremity of the island, about 0.25 mile offshore,

with the stone house, or the E corner of the field, on the island

bearing 184° and the E point of Wedge Island bearing 139°. 

7.53 Vessels approaching the anchorage from the W between

West Rock and Ward Rock should keep the high cliff on the E

end of Wedge Island just open E of the N extremity of the island bearing 128°. The N extremity may be passed close, but a

good berth should be given to the sunken rocks off the low

point about 1 mile SE of it. 

7.53 Tidal currents in the vicinity of the Gambier Islands vary in

velocity from less than 0.5 to 0.75 knot. The flood sets to the

NW and the ebb sets to the SE.

Spencer Gulf—West Side

7.54 Thistle Island (35°00'S., 136°09'E.) lies on the W

side of the entrance of Spencer Gulf, about 4 miles E of Cape

Catastrophe. Thorny Passage separates Thistle Island from

Cape Catastrophe. The island is irregular in outline, being

about 9 miles long in a NW-SE direction. It rises to a 228m

high summit near the middle of the island. 

7.54 Good anchorage can be taken off the E and NE side of the island. 

7.54 Waterhouse Point (35°04'S., 136°12'E.), the SE extremity

of Thistle Island, is a rugged cliffy head, 46m high. The rock

fringed point is steep-to. A small bight indents the coast between Waterhouse Point and another point about 1 mile to the

W, but no good anchorage is available because of the S swell

which rolls in. Waterhouse Point Light is shown from this

point. 

7.54 Albatross Islet (35°04'S., 136°11'E.) lies 0.5 mile S of the

W entrance point of the above bight and is separated from it by

a passage with depths of 4.6 to 11m. During gales, the sea

breaks across this passage. 

7.54 South Rock (35°05'S., 136°11'E.), which breaks, lies awash

about 1 mile S of the above islet. The rock is steep-to and has a

depth of 13.4m about 0.3 mile N of it. 

7.54 Caution.—Vessels rounding Waterhouse Point should give

it a berth of more than 2 miles to clear South Rock and the race

off the point. 

7.55 Fossil Point (35°02'S., 136°09'E.), about 3.5 miles

NW of Waterhouse Point, extends WNW from the W coast of

Thistle Island. 

7.55 O’Loughlin Bay (35°01'S., 136°09'E.), a small bight, indents the coast NE of Fossil Point. From the N point of this

bay, the coast extends NW for 3.5 miles to a sandy beach

backed by a causeway of sand extending 0.75 mile NE to a remarkable hill, 82m high. The stretch of coast from Fossil Point

to this sandy beach is fronted by red limestone cliffs 120 to

180m high. 

7.55 From the N end of the sandy beach, Carrington Point

(34°58'S., 136°05'E.), a high white cliffy projection, extends

about 1 mile W from the coast. A ledge of breaking rocks

fronts the S side of this projection for a distance of about 0.2

mile offshore. A small bay lies between Carrington Point and
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 173

Pub. 175

Nose Point (34°57'S., 136°05'E.), the NW extremity of the island, about 1 mile to the N. Observatory Point is located 2

miles farther NE.

7.55 Observatory Point (34°56'S., 136°06'E.), the N extremity of

Thistle Island, is the low projecting extremity of a long sandy

beach. A foul sand flat, which is occasionally marked by

breakers during strong S or SW winds, extends 0.75 mile NW

from the point. From Observatory Point, the coast extends

about 5.5 miles SE to Whalers Bay. 

7.55 Whalers Bay (35°00'S., 136°11'E.), which lies W of Horny

Point, provides anchorage for coasters with local knowledge.

Shelter is provided from S to W winds, in a depth of 7.3m,

sand, with Horny Point bearing 071°, distant 0.25 mile. A rock,

awash, lies in the S side of Whalers Bay, about 0.15 mile W of

Horny Point. The coast between Horny Point and Waterhouse

Point, about 3 miles to the S, consists of sandy beach. Depths

of 36m and more lie about 1.5 miles offshore along this stretch

of coast.

7.55 Caution.—A restricted area, with a radius of 2 miles, lies

about 1.5 miles E of Horny Point.

7.56 Waterhouse Bay (35°03'S., 136°12'E.) provides shelter to coasters with local knowledge. A rocky patch, which occasionally breaks, lies almost awash, about 0.3 mile offshore,

0.25 mile NW of the S entrance point of the bay. 

7.56 Anchorages.—On the NE side of Thistle Island, the soundings gradually shoal to the NW. A vessel may take good anchorage, in a depth of 12.8m, sand, with Observatory Point

bearing 276°, distant 0.75 mile, and the SE end of the sandy

beach bearing from 194° to 184°. 

7.56 Waterhouse Bay provides shelter for small vessels, in a depth

of 5.5m, near the S part of the bay. Caution is necessary to

avoid a 0.1 mile long rocky patch which lies 0.25 mile NW of

the point. 

7.56 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the vicinity of Waterhouse Point attain a rate of 2 knots; the flood sets N around

the point, and the ebb sweeps S around the point. Near the anchorage off Observatory Point, the tidal currents never attain a

velocity that exceeds 0.5 knot. Sometimes they reverse direction, with the flood setting SE and the ebb setting NW. However, there is no regularity to these currents, and frequently they

set in one direction all day and night. Between Observatory

Point and Porter Rock, about 3 miles to the N, the currents attain a velocity of about 1.5 knots; the flood sets NE and the ebb

sets SW. A dangerous race occurs off Waterhouse Point when

the S current meets the SW swell during S winds. 

7.56 Note.—The dangers extending NNE from Observatory Point

are described beginning in paragraph 7.59.

7.57 Thorny Passage (34°57'S., 136°02'E.), which lies between Thistle Island and Cape Catastrophe and the mainland N

of it, is interspersed with a number of islands and dangers. Between Hopkins Island and Cape Catastrophe, the passage is restricted to its narrowest part, about 2.5 miles wide, which in

turn is divided by Smith Island. 

7.57 The best channel in the passage lies between Cape Catastrophe and Smith Island. This channel is about 1 mile wide and

has depths of over 36.6m. In the S part of Thorny Passage,

there are general depths of over 40m, which decrease gradually

to about 18.3m NW of Thistle Island. Vessels navigating this

channel at night do so in the white sector of Taylor Island Light

between the bearings of 355° and 001°. 

7.57 Smith Island (34°59'S., 136°01'E.), 1 mile E of Cape Catastrophe, is 30m high, oval in shape, flat-topped, covered with

stunted vegetation, and steep-to. A shoal, with a depth of 11m,

lies about 1.5 miles SE of the S extremity of Smith Island. 

7.57 Hopkins Island (34°58'S., 136°03'E.), located 1.25 miles

NE of Smith Island, is separated from the NW extremity of

Thistle Island by a passage about 0.5 mile wide. This passage

is fouled by rocks. Rollers break across this passage during a S

current. The island is about 69m high, sandy, and flat-topped,

with steep cliffs that resemble the white cliffs at the NW end of

Thistle Island. Several detached rocks lie off the N end of the

island. 

7.57 Hopkins Island is dangerous to approach from the S because

the S side of the island is fronted by foul ground and a sunken

rock, with a depth of 4.2m. This rock, which only breaks during bad weather, lies 0.5 mile SSW of the SW extremity of the

island. 

7.57 The W side of Grindal Island, described below, in range 353°

with the E side of Lewis Island leads about 0.5 mile W of the

foul ground off Hopkins Island in depths of 49.4m.

7.57 Lewis Island (34°57'S., 136°02'E.), 44m high and steep-to,

lies 1.5 miles N of Smith Island. This island is peaked, whereas

the others are flat-topped. A shoal patch, with a depth of

10.4m, lies about 1 mile NE of Lewis Island. 

7.57 Little Islet (34°57'S., 136°02'E.), about 0.5 mile NW of

Lewis Island, is an irregular mass of black granite, 8.2m high.

A 6.4m shoal patch lies about 2 miles NNE of this islet. 

7.57 Caution.—It is dangerous to pass between Lewis Island and

Little Islet because the currents sweep from one side to the other at a rate of more than 3 knots, forming eddies and tide rips.

With a strong N current, these rips extend more than 0.5 mile N

from Little Islet. 

7.58 Grindal Island (34°55'S., 136°02'E.), about 3.75

miles N of Smith Island, is 25m high, flat-topped, and brush

covered. Several rocks, awash, lie off the NE extremity of the

island. A coral ledge, with depths of 7.3 to 12.8m, extends

about 0.75 mile N from the N end of the island. 

7.58 Doolan Shoal, a detached 6.1m shoal patch, lies about 0.75

mile SE from the SE extremity of the island; elsewhere, there

are depths of 16.4 to 18.3m close offshore. 

7.58 Taylor Island (34°53'S., 136°01'E.), the N island in Thorny

Passage, is about 1.25 miles NNW of Grindal Island; the fairway between the islands has depths of 17.4 to 18.3m. A 69m

high summit stands near the N end and a high cliff fronts the E

side of the island. A light, with sectors which aids vessels

through the passage, stands on the NE side of the island. With

the exception of a sand flat that extends about 0.25 mile N from

its N end, the island is steep-to. An islet, 12.2m high, stands on

the N extremity of the sand flat. An islet off the S end of Taylor

Island is separated from it by a narrow passage.

7.58 Anchorage.—The passage between Taylor Island and the

mainland, about 1.5 miles to the W, is clear of dangers and provides anchorage, in a depth of 16.5m, marl bottom, with the S

extremity of Taylor Island bearing 139° and a remarkable high

striped limestone cliff on the mainland bearing about 229°. 

7.58 Tidal currents in Thorny Passage attain a rate of 3 knots; between Taylor Island and the mainland a rate of 1 knot is at-
174 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

tained during spring tides. The flood sets to the N and the ebb

to the S. In the vicinity of the islands between Cape Catastrophe and Thistle Island, there are tide rips which are strong

enough to swamp a boat. 

7.58 Directions.—When proceeding N through Thorny Passage,

pass Cape Catastrophe at a distance of about 0.5 mile and then

proceed between Grindal Island and Taylor Island.

7.59 Caution.—Black Rock (34°55'S., 136°06'E.) lies

awash at high water about 1.25 miles N of Observatory Point,

but at low water the rock appears as a mass of black granite,

1.8m above water. Sunken rocks surround the rock; a ledge extends about 0.2 mile SSW from it. 

7.59 There are depths of 3.7 to 5.5m between Black Rock and the

sand flat off Observatory Point. The small projection SE of Observatory Point kept open between the high cliffs and Horny

Point leads between Black Rock and the sand flat NW of Observatory Point. The E end of Hopkins Island kept well-open of

Thistle Island leads W of Black Rock. 

7.59 Porter Rock (34°53'S., 136°09'E.), about 0.2 mile in extent,

lies about 3 miles NNE of Observatory Point. There is a least

depth of 1.2m over several knobs near the N end of this rock,

but near the S end of this rock there are depths of 3.7m. 

7.59 Between Black Rock and Porter Rock, there are depths of

about 11m, rocky bottom. Black Rock is dangerous because

the sea seldom breaks over it enough to be seen. Frequently,

there is no broken water over it for some days. 

7.59 Hopkins Island closed in by Thistle Island leads E of Porter

Rock, while the same islands kept well-open of each other lead

W of the rock. The northernmost of the high wooded conical

hills N of Memory Cove kept open N of Taylor Island, bearing

274°, leads about 0.75 mile N of Porter Rock. 

7.59 Simms Rock (34°52'S., 136°08'E.), on which the sea does

not always break, lies about 4.75 miles NNE of Observatory

Point. It consists of a number of pinnacle rocks, with a least

depth of 3m. There are depths of 12.8m at a distance of 0.25

mile from the rock. 

7.59 Howard Rock (34°50'S., 136°09'E.), on which the sea seldom breaks, lies about 6.5 miles NNE of Observatory Point

and about 2.75 miles WSW of the center of Dangerous Reef.

This steep-to rock has a depth of 3.9m. The W tip of Hopkins

Island bearing not more than 200° leads clear of Howard Rock,

Porter Rock, Simms Rock, and Black Rock. A shoal, about

0.75 mile long and 0.25 mile wide, lies 8.5 miles NE of Observatory Point and about 2.5 miles SE of the center of Dangerous

Reef. The depths over this shoal are less than 9.1m and decrease to a least depth of 2.7m near its middle, on which the sea

occasionally breaks heavily during S gales. 

7.59 Dangerous Reef (34°49'S., 136°13'E.), which consists of

four large rocks and a number of small rocks, lies about 9 miles

NNE of Observatory Point. These rocks, the highest of which

is 3m, extend 0.75 mile W and about 2.5 miles SE, respectively, from the largest rock. The depths exceed 18.3m about 0.25

mile from the reef. A light is shown from the center of the reef. 

7.59 A 12.2m patch, with depths of 14.6 to 18.3m all around, lies

4.5 miles NW of Dangerous Reef Light. 

Spencer Gulf—West Coast

7.60 The coast between Cape Catastrophe and the E entrance of Memory Cove, about 1.5 miles to the N, is fronted by

high cliffs. 

7.60 Memory Cove (34°58'S., 135°59'E.), a small bight, is sheltered from all winds from the NNW through W to SE. Winds

from other directions raise a short sea in the bay. 

7.60 Anchorage can be taken by moderate-sized vessels, with local knowledge, in a depth of 9.1m, sand, with the E entrance

point of the cove in range 088° with the cliffs on the N side of

Hopkins Island and the E end of the beach in the bight bearing

184°. 

7.60 Larger vessels anchor farther out, in depths of 14.6 to 16.5m,

with the N extremity of Smith Island bearing 128° and the E

end of the beach in the bight bearing 195°. 

7.60 The coast between Memory Cove and Maclaren Point, about

10 miles NNE, consists of rocky points bordered by sandy

beaches in between.

7.60 Maclaren Point (34°48'S., 136°01'E.) extends about 0.5

mile E of the general line of the coast and has a small bight on

either side of it. A rock, with a depth of 1.8m, lies about 0.15

mile NE of the E extremity of the point. 

7.60 The coast from the inner end of Maclaren Point extends N

for 4 miles to Cape Donington. It consists of sandy beaches

broken by rocky points and backed by high hills. A rock, about

3m high, stands 1.5 miles N of Maclaren Point. Depths of 11 to

12.8m are found about 0.5 mile offshore along this stretch of

coast.

7.60 Cape Donington (34°44'S., 136°00'E.), the S entrance point

of Port Lincoln, is the N extremity of a peninsula which extends 4 miles N from the coast. This extension forms the E side

of Spalding Cove. About 0.5 mile SW of the cape, the land rises to a wooded summit, 53m high. Cape Colbert is the NW extremity of the peninsula and is cliffy. A light is shown from

Cape Donington. 

7.60 Donington Reef (34°43'S., 136°00'E.), with a depth of 1.8m

over its outer end, extends about 0.25 mile N from a rock, 3m

high, which lies 0.25 mile NNE of Cape Donington. Depths of

10.3 and 11m lie about 0.25 mile ESE and 0.25 mile E of the

same rock. 

7.60 Helen Shoal, with a depth of 14m, lies 3.5 miles E of Cape

Donington. Jane Shoal, with a depth of 10.9m, and Nicolette

Shoal, with a depth of 13.5m, lie about 7 and 6 miles, respectively, ENE of the same cape. A 15.5m patch lies about 0.5

mile W of Nicolette Shoal.

7.61 Port Lincoln (34°43'S., 135°56'E.), a large bay that

indents the coast very irregularly in a general W direction for

about 6 miles between Cape Donington and Boston Point,

about 5.5 miles to the NW, has several smaller bays within it. It

is divided into two parts by Kirton Point, which is located 4.75

miles W of Cape Colbert, and Boston Island. The S part of the

bay consists of Spalding Cove, Proper Bay (Port Lincoln Proper), and Porter Bay. The N part consists of Boston Bay. Boston

Island lies 1 mile inside the entrance of Port Lincoln and separates it into two entrances. The N entrance lies between Boston

Island and Boston Point; the S entrance lies between Cape Colbert and the SE extremity of Boston Island. 

7.61 Port Lincoln is the terminal for the Eyre Peninsula Railway

System and is considered the finest harbor in South Australia

The bay can provide landlocked anchorage for a large number

of deep-draft vessels between Boston Island and the mainland
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 175

Pub. 175

to the W. 

7.61 The town of Port Lincoln is situated in the SW part of Boston Bay. Alongside berthing facilities, described in paragraph

7.66, are provided for ocean-going vessels. 

7.61 The approach channel to Port Lincoln is dredged to a depth

of 14.6m.

7.61 Boston Point (34°39'S., 135°56'E.), the N entrance point of

Port Lincoln, is broad and low. It is also the S extremity of a

peninsula that forms the NE side of Boston Bay. A light is

shown from Boston Point. Davidson Rock, with a depth of

14m, lies about 2.75 miles SSE of Boston Point. 

7.61 Boston Island (34°42'S., 135°56'E.) is generally hilly and

rises to a summit, 90m high, near the middle of the island. It is

wooded and in the winter is covered with very green grass. The

coast of the island is irregular and composed of sandy bays and

sloping points. The island is fairly steep-to, with depths of 11

to 14.6m lying 0.25 mile offshore.

7.61 Caution.—Marine farms, best seen on chart, have been established E of Boston Island. Marine farms, which may be

floating or fixed structures, and their associated moorings

should be avoided. The farms are usually marked by buoys or

beacons, which may be lit.

7.62 Fanny Point (34°44'S., 135°56'E.), the S extremity of

Boston Island, is low. A reef, with a depth of 2.7m over its outer end, extends about 0.15 mile S from the point. A light is

shown from the point. 

7.62 The coastal bank, with a depth of 6.1m over its outer end, extends 0.3 mile NE from Hayden Point, the SE extremity of

Boston Island. A depth of 1.5m lies midway along the length of

this bank 0.15 mile NE of the point. 

7.62 Maria Point (34°40'S., 135°55'E.), the N end of Boston Island, is low, rocky, and the end of a narrow projection which is

about 12.2m high. A steep-to reef, with a depth of 0.9m, extends about 0.25 mile W from a small white cliff, with a house

near it, on the W side of the island, about 0.6 mile S of Maria

Point.

7.62 Kangaroo Reef (34°40'S., 135°55'E.), with depths of less

than 5.5m, has a least depth of 1.2m. This steep-to reef extends

about 0.75 mile NE from Maria Point and is marked by a buoy.

7.63 Spalding Cove (34°46'S., 135°58'E.), entered between Cape Colbert and Surfleet Point, about 2 miles SW, extends about 3.5 miles S. The shores of the cove consist of

sandy bights and low, rocky points; its E side is bordered by

sandy cliffs. There are general depths of 9.1 to 14.6m within 1

mile of the cove head and within 0.5 mile of both sides.

7.63 Anchorage can be taken anywhere because there are no

known dangers. The best anchorage lies in the small bay located close S of the summit of Cape Donington. During strong N

winds, there is a short sea in this bay. 

7.63 Surfleet Point (34°46'S., 135°57'E.) and the Bickers Islets

separate Spalding Cove from Proper Bay. The Bickers Islets,

two in number and small, lie NW of Surfleet Point. A ledge extends about 0.15 mile S from the S side of the N islet, but there

are depths of 12.8 to 14.6m about 0.1 mile from the other sides. 

7.63 A stony bank extends about 0.1 mile SE from the SE end of

the S islet. There are depths of more than 9.1m about 0.1 mile

off the W side and 0.25 mile off the E side of the S islet. 

7.63 Sunken Brother Rock, with a depth of 2.7m, lies about 0.5

mile WSW of the summit of the southernmost of the Bickers

Islets. A short distance off there are depths of over 9.1m. 

7.64 Proper Bay (Port Lincoln Proper) (34°46'S.,

135°54'E.), which is entered between Surfleet Point and Billy

Lights Point, the S entrance point of Porter Bay, about 3.25

miles to the WNW, extends almost 8 miles in a general SW direction. The coast between Surfleet Point and a point SE of

Horse Rock, about 5.75 miles to the SW, consists of rocky

points and sandy beaches backed by low scrub-covered rises,

over which the sand hills inland from Sleaford Bay are visible. 

7.64 Horse Rock (34°48'S., 135°51'E.), about 0.6m high, lies

5.75 miles SW of Surfleet Point. The rock is connected to the

point SE of it by a sandy spit with a depth of 0.4m. The coast

between the point SE of Horse Rock and a sandy beach at the

head of Proper Bay, about 3.75 miles to the W, consists of low

limestone cliffs that have scrub-covered hills rising directly

above them. 

7.64 From the N end of the sandy beach at the head of the port the

low limestone coast extends NE for 4.75 miles to the W end of

the sandy beach on the S side of the peninsula of which Kirton

Point is the NE extremity. 

7.64 A drying sand spit extends about 0.5 mile offshore from a

sandy beach located about 1.75 miles NE of the head of the

port. The coast from the W end of the sandy beach on the S

side of the peninsula curves E for 0.5 mile, then S for 1 mile,

and forms a shallow bay. 

7.64 From Murray Point (34°46'S., 135°52'E.), the E entrance

point of this bay, the coast extends NE for about 2 miles to Billy Lights Point. This section of coast consists of low cliffs with

sandy beaches and two slightly projecting points backed by

hills, about 46m high. A sand flat, with shallow depths, extends

SE from the S part of this stretch of coast to Grantham Island. 

7.64 General depths of 5.5 to 9.1m are found in Proper Bay, with

depths of 6.4 to 9.1m completely across the entrance. In the S

part of the port, from Surfleet Point to within 1 mile of the head

of the port, there are depths of more than 5.5m about 0.5 mile

offshore; however, the NW part of the port is shallower, with

depths of 5.5m and less N of a line from Grantham Island to

the head of the port.

7.64 Grantham Island (34°47'S., 135°52'E.), about 4 miles

WSW of Surfleet Point, is 15.2m high and scrub-covered. It

has a cliffy coast, with rocks extending a short distance from

all sides except the SE, which is steep-to. 

7.64 Caution.—Shoals, with depths of 5.5 to 9.1m, extend about

1.5 miles ENE from Billy Lights Point and occupy the greater

part of the W side of the passage between that point and Fanny

Point. A shoal patch, with depths of 6.7 to 7.3m, lies in the

deeper part of Port Lincoln Proper about 1 mile NE and 1.75

miles ENE of the NE extremity of Grantham Island. 

7.64 An 8.5m patch lies S of the above patch, about 1 mile ENE

of the NE extremity of Grantham Island. A 5.5m patch lies

about 1.25 miles W of Horse Rock. The summit of the northernmost of the Bicker Islets, in range 062° with the S end of

Grantham Island, leads N of this patch; the SE extremity of

Boston Island, in range 050° with the S end of Grantham Island, leads S of the patch.

7.65 Porter Bay (34°44'S., 135°53'E.) indents the peninsula

which forms the SW side of Boston Bay for about 1 mile. The S
176 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

side of the bay consists of low sandy beach backed by scrub-covered hills. Foul ground extends about 0.25 mile in all directions

from the S entrance point of the bay; depths of 7.3 to 9.1m exist

between the entrance points, shoaling gradually toward the bay

head. A small craft harbor is located in Porter Bay; a range bearing

261° marks the approach to the entrance. 

7.65 Kirton Point (34°43'S., 135°53'E.), the N entrance point of

Porter Bay, is a broad projection that rises to a 67m high summit covered with scrub; a radio mast stands on the point. 

7.65 Boston Bay (34°41'S., 135°53'E.), protected from the sea by

Boston Island, is an indentation in the coast between Kirton

Point and Boston Point. It can be entered by either the S or N

entrance. The 10m curve lies about 0.75 mile off the W shore

and about 1.5 miles off the NW and N shores of the bay. 

7.65 Le Hunte Shoal (34°42'S., 135°52'E.), with a least depth of

6.1m, soft mud over a rock bottom, lies about 2 miles NNW of

Kirton Point. North Side Hill in range 223° with Town Jetty

leads 0.25 mile SE of Le Hunte Shoal; the Roman Catholic

Church in range 198° with the outer end of Town Jetty leads

about 0.25 mile W of the shoal. 

7.65 Bass Shoal (34°41'S., 135°53'E.), a detached 8.5m patch,

lies about 2.25 miles N of Kirton Point. A fish haven, marked

close E by a buoy, lies W of Bass Shoal.

7.66 Port Lincoln (34°43'S., 135°52'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54350) lies about 1 mile W of Kirton Point and is fronted

by a sandy beach that extends W for 0.5 mile, and then NW for

another 0.5 mile. The coast then extends almost due N for

about 5 miles to the village of North Shields. From North

Shields, the coast extends NE, then E for about 1.25 miles, and

is bordered by a sandy beach backed by low sand hills. From

the E end of this beach, the coast extends SSE for 2 miles to

Boston Point. Port Lincoln is a first port of entry. 

7.66 Winds—Weather.—Prevailing winds are from the W. 

7.66 Tides—Currents.—There is very little tidal current in any

part of Port Lincoln, but about 2 to 3 miles outside the port entrance the currents set N on the flood and S on the ebb. The tidal range is 0.9 to 1.5m. 

7.66 Depths—Limitations.—The principal berths in Port Lincoln are at the Shipping Pier, which extends N from the S shore

of Boston Bay. Berth No. 1 through Berth No. 4 are situated on

the W side of the Shipping Pier; Berth No. 5 through Berth No.

10 are situated on the E side. 

7.66 Berth No. 1 (Old Grain Berth), is 204m long, with a depth

alongside of 9.7m; this berth is no longer used and alongside

depths are no longer maintained by dredging. The berth extends E, at a right angle, from the root of the Shipping Pier. 

7.66 Berth No. 2, a general cargo berth situated at the root of

Shipping Pier, is 189m long and has a dredged depth of 8.5m. 

7.66 Berth No. 3, in the middle of the W side of the Shipping Pier,

is not used. 

7.66 The seaward end of the Shipping Pier is equipped for loading

deep draft bulk grain ships. Berth No. 4 lies the W side and

Berth No. 5 lies on the E side. Both are 349m in length, have a

dredged depth of 14.9m, and can accommodate vessels up to

60,000 dwt. 

7.66 Berth No. 6 is in the middle of the E side of the Shipping

Pier and is 247m in length, with an alongside depth of 11.9m. 

7.66 Berth No. 7 through Berth No. 10 are situated along the E

root of the Shipping Pier, have alongside depths of 4.6 to 8.2m,

and are used for local shipping and fishing craft. 

7.66 A ro-ro ramp, dredged to 5.5m alongside, is situated at Berth

No. 9. 

7.66 Kirton Point Jetty, about 0.25 mile E of the Shipping Pier,

extends from the shore close W of Kirton Point. An oil tanker

berth, formed by a 61m long T-head with four dolphins, is situated at the head of the jetty. An acid berth lies close S of the Thead. The tanker berth is 280m long, with a depth of 9.9m

alongside; a vessel up to 198m in length, with a draft of 8.7m,

has been accommodated.

7.66 Proper Bay (Port Lincoln Proper) lies in a small bight about

0.5 mile SW of Billy Lights Point and contains facilities for the

loading of limestone. An L-shaped pier extends from the shore

at the head of the bight and is approached from the ENE

through a channel with a least fairway depth of 9.1m. A lighted

beacon marks the E side of the channel 0.75 mile SW of Point

Fanny. The L-shaped pier at Proper Bay has a berthing length

of 274m between the dolphins, with a depth of 9.6m alongside. 

7.66 Vessels up to 76,500 dwt, with lengths of up to 245m and

drafts up to 14.7m, can be accommodated in Port Lincoln. At

Proper Bay, the maximum length permitted at the berth is

183m; the maximum beam permitted is 24m.

7.66 The depth in the approach channel to Port Lincoln through

Boston Bay is 14.4m.

7.66 Aspect.—A power station is situated on Kirton Point.

7.66 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots board incoming

vessels off the N entrance of Port Lincoln, about 1.5 miles SE

of Boston Point.

7.66 Pilotage should be requested through the harbormaster at

least 2 hours prior to arrival; if a pilot is required outside normal working hours, the request should be sent at least 4 hours

in advance. The pilot vessel is equipped with radiotelephone.

There is a Port Radio Station at Port Lincoln.

7.66 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 24 hours and

4 hours in advance.

7.66 Berthing is allowed during daylight hours only. Unberthing

may be done at any time.

7.66 Vessels normally berth port side-to.

7.66 Signals.—At Proper Bay, berthing signals are shown from

the ship loader, as follows: 

1. Four green neon strips—Jetty open for berthing.

2. Four red neon strips—Jetty closed for berthing.

7.66 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor 2 miles SE of Point Boston, in 18 to 22m, good holding ground. 

7.66 The anchorages at the N and S ends of Boston Bay, in 13m,

are more sheltered; however, the holding ground is reported to

be fair to moderate.

7.66 Directions.—The preferred approach to Port Lincoln and

Boston Bay is to pass N of Boston Island rounding Point Boston close-to, avoiding Kangaroo Reef. Vessels should then follow the 14.4m dredged channel, which is marked by lighted

beacons, taking care to avoid Bass Shoal and Le Hunte Shoal.

7.67 Louth Bay (34°34'S., 136°00'E.) indents the coast between Boston Point and Bolingbroke Point, about 10 miles NE,

Flinders Ports South Australia

http://www.flindersports.com.au/about_loc_linc.htm
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 177

Pub. 175

and is divided into three distinct smaller bays by the irregular

coastal formations. There are general depths of 16.5 to 21.9m

in the entrance of Louth Bay between Rabbit Island and Berlin

Rock and 12.8 to 18.3m in the middle of the bay. 

7.67 In the smaller bays within the limits of Louth Bay, there are

general depths of 7.3 to 14.6m in the middle bay, and 10 to

11m in Peake Bay and the N bay. The S bay is shallow. 

7.67 A range of wooded hills, about 2 miles inland, parallels the

W shore of the bay. Mount Knott, the highest of these hills, is

well-wooded and flat-topped, and rises to a 254m high summit

about 8 miles NNW of Boston Point. Mount Gawler, also flattopped, rises to a height of 248m about 2 miles WSW of Mount

Knott.

7.67 On the N side of the bay, between the foot of the range of

hills and Bolingbroke Point, the country consists of low hills

covered with dense scrub, but the land on the W side of the bay

is well-grassed and has open woods. Mount Liverpool, 322m

high, about 16 miles N of Boston Point, and a conical hill,

259m high, about 1.5 miles ENE of Mount Liverpool, are both

very conspicuous from Louth Bay. 

7.68 Bolingbroke Point (34°33'S., 136°05'E.) is a round

rocky point about 12.2m high. A reef, with a depth of less than

1.8m, extends about 0.5 mile S from the point, and a detached

shoal, with a depth of 6.4m, lies about 1.5 miles S of the point.

A light is shown from the point. A dangerous wreck lies 0.75

mile SE of Bolingbroke Point.

7.68 Berlin Rock (34°36'S., 136°04'E.), with a depth of 4.9m,

lies about 3.25 miles SSW of Bolingbroke Point. A rock with a

depth of less than 2m lies 1.75 miles NNW of Berlin Rock.

7.68 Rabbit Island (34°36'S., 135°59'E.), 10m high, lies about

3.5 miles NE of Boston Point and about 1.5 miles E of the entrance of the S bay. Its E side is cliffy, but its W side slopes

gradually to the waters edge. A rock, with a depth of less than

1.8m, lies about 0.25 mile N of the N end of the island; a shoal,

with a least depth of 7.6m, lies almost 0.75 miles farther N.

Nowland Shoal, with a depth of 6.7m, lies about 0.5 mile S of

the S end of the island. Elsewhere, there are depths of over

9.1m about 0.25 mile offshore and 9.1 to 12.8m between the island and the entrance of the bay. 

7.68 Hawkers Devil (34°38'S., 135°57'E.), a rock, awash at low

water, lies 1.25 miles NNE of Boston Point. Shoal water lies

between the rock and the shore to the W. The S bay lies between a point about 2.5 miles N of Boston Point and Louth Island, which lies about 1 mile farther NE. With the exception of

Hawkers Devil, the 10m curve extends from a position about

230m E of Boston Point to a position about 0.25 mile S of the S

end of Louth Island. There are depths of 5.5 to 7.3m in an area

about 1 mile in extent close within the entrance of the bay.

7.69 Louth Island (34°34'S., 135°57'E.), almost 1.75

miles NW of Rabbit Island, has two wooded peaks, both 23m

high. A dry sandspit extends about 0.75 mile W from the NW

end of the island and is connected to the mainland about 1 mile

farther W by a sand bar which almost dries. The middle bay

lies between the S extremity of Louth Island and Peake Point,

about 5.5 miles to the NE, and has depths of more than 11m

about 1 mile from its head. A pier extends from the shore of a

cove about 2 miles NNW of Louth Island. The pier is 91m

long, with a depth of 1.5m alongside, but is closed to commercial shipping. A reef lies close E of the pier. A rock, with a

least depth of 0.9m, lies 0.25 mile offshore, about 0.75 mile N

of the pier. Another reef lies about 0.5 mile offshore, about 1.5

miles NE of the pier. 

7.69 Peake Bay (34°30'S., 136°03'E.) indents the E part of Louth

Bay between Peake Point and Bolingbroke Point, about 4 miles

ESE. There are depths of 10 to 11m in an area about 2 miles in

extent in the middle of the bay. 

7.69 Bolingbroke Reef, which uncovers and is steep-to off its W

end, extends about 3 miles W from Bolingbroke Point and restricts the entrance of the bay to a width of 0.75 mile between

the 10m curves. The E extremity of Peake Point, bearing N,

leads close off the W extremity of Bolingbroke Reef.

7.69 Anchorages.—The best anchorage in Louth Bay lies N of

the sandspit extending from Louth Island, in a depth of 5.8m,

sand, with the extremities of Louth Island bearing 128° and

173°, respectively. 

7.69 There is good anchorage, except during S gales, off the long

sandy beach on the E side of Peake Bay, in a depth of 5.5m,

sand, with the W side of Bolingbroke Point bearing 167° and

the S extremity of some rocks that extend seaward from the

middle of the beach bearing 055°. 

7.69 Directions.—Vessels approaching Louth Bay from the N

must pass about 3 miles E of Bolingbroke Point, and then steer

to pass S of Berlin Rock, taking care to avoid the 6.4m patch

and the foul ground between Bolingbroke Point and Berlin

Rock. Care must be taken to give Berlin Rock a good berth. 

7.69 Vessels intending to enter Peake Bay must have local knowledge.

The Sir Joseph Banks Group

7.70 The Sir Joseph Banks Group (34°35'S., 136°18'E.)

consists of about 20 islands, islets, and above-water rocks located E of Louth Bay and Bolingbroke Point. The S part of the

group lies as far as 23.5 miles E of Cape Donington and the N

part lies about 11 miles ENE of Bolingbroke Point. The N part

of the group, excepting Kirkby Islet and Dalby Islet, is located

on a shoal bank, with depths of less than 9.1m, that extends 9

miles N from positions 8.25 and 12 miles ESE of Bolingbroke

Point; the islands of the group to the S are all detached. 

7.70 Anchorages near Spilsby Island, Blyth Islet, and Reevesby

Island are included in the principal description. Spilsby Island

and Reevesby Island are the only two islands of the group

which are inhabited and on which the vegetation is higher than

low bushes. 

7.70 Buffalo Reef (34°43'S., 136°28'E.), 3m high, the southernmost and outermost of the group, lies about 23.5 miles E of

Cape Donington and about 14 miles ENE of Dangerous Reef.

Sunken rocks extend about 0.2 mile W and 0.1 mile NE from

the reef; otherwise, it is steep-to. The sea sometimes breaks

with considerable violence on this reef. 

7.70 Rosalind Shoal (34°48'S., 136°33'E.), with a depth of

16.5m, lies about 6 miles SE of Buffalo Reef. 

7.70 Spilsby Island (34°40'S., 136°21'E.), about 6 miles NW of

Buffalo Reef, is the highest and only wooded island of the

group; its N part rises to a round wooded summit, 41m high. Its

coast is cliffy and bordered by sandy beaches and sand hills. A

drying ledge extends about 0.2 mile offshore on the SW side of

the island. 
178 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

7.70 A sunken reef, about 0.5 mile in extent, extends about 1 mile

W from the S end of Spilsby Island. There are depths of less

than 1.8m on the reef, but the foul outer end projects S for

about 0.5 mile to a depth of 3.7m. 

7.70 A shoal bank, with a depth of 2.4m, extends about 1.25 miles

NE from the NE extremity of the island. Boucaut Islet, 9.1m

high, with Seal Rock close SE of it, lies near the NE edge of

this shoal. The E side of Seal Rock is steep-to. The sea sometimes breaks over the shoal area between Spilsby Island and

Boucaut Islet. A shoal area, with depths of 9.1m and less, extends between 1 and 1.25 miles from the N, NW, W and SW

sides of the island. 

7.71 Bridget Shoal (34°43'S., 136°18'E.), with a depth of

11.9m, lies about 5 miles SW of the S extremity of Spilsby Island. A detached patch, with a depth of 11.3m, lies about midway in between. A 10m patch lies about 1 mile N of the latter

patch. 

7.71 Rosemary Shoal (34°42'S., 136°22'E.), with a depth of

7.9m, lies about 1 mile SE of the S extremity of Spilsby Island. 

7.71 Duffield Islet (34°39'S., 136°20'E.), about 6m high, lies

about 0.75 mile W of the NW extremity of Spilsby Island. Foul

ground lies between the islet and the island; rocks extend about

0.2 mile S from the islet. 

7.71 There is good anchorage, sheltered from winds from W to S

to SE, in a depth of 9.1m, off the N side of Spilsby Island. During E winds, small craft can anchor with the extremities of

Spilsby Island bearing 088° and 167°, in a depth of 5.5m, but

this position lies close to the 1.8m bank extending NW from

the island. Local knowledge is required for both anchorages. 

7.71 Stickney Islet (34°41'S., 136°17'E.), about 2.5 miles WSW

of Spilsby Island, is 30.5m high and almost divided by two inlets. An above-water rock lies about 0.2 mile off the islet’s SE

point, being connected to it by drying rocks. The islet is steepto at a distance of 0.5 mile offshore. 

7.71 Sibsey Islet (34°39'S., 136°11'E.), about 24m high and

steep-to, lies about 4.25 miles WNW of Stickney Islet; a light

is shown on Sibsey Islet. 

7.71 English Islet, about 0.75 mile NE of Sibsey Islet, is about 9m

high, rocky, and steep-to, except on its N side. There are depths

of 12.8 to 16.5m between these two islets. 

7.71 Karen Shoal, with a depth of 14.6m, lies about 1 mile NE of

the N extremity of English Islet. 

7.71 Caution.—The islands comprising the N part of the Sir Joseph Banks Group all lie within the limits of a shoal bank, with

depths of less than 9.1m.

7.72 Roxby Islet (34°36'S., 136°19'E.) lies near the SE extremity of the above bank, about 3.5 miles NNW of Spilsby Island. The islet is 23m high and cliffy on its N and E sides, but

slopes to sandy beaches on its S and W sides. A reef, with a

rock awash on it, extends about 0.5 mile SSE from the SE extremity of the islet. 

7.72 Hareby Islet (34°35'S., 136°18'E.), located about 0.5 mile

NW of Roxby Islet, rises to a height of 15m in its E part, which

is the highest part of the islet. Shoals and drying rocks extend

about 0.75 mile W from the islet and there are depths of 4.6m

between it and Roxby Islet. 

7.72 Langton Islet (34°36'S., 136°15'E.), 9.1m high, lies at the

SW extremity of the above bank and about 2.5 miles W of

Roxby Islet. The NE side of the islet consists of a sandbank

about 0.2 mile long. The islet is steep-to about 0.5 mile off the

E and S sides. A shoal, with a depth of a little over 5.5m, extends about 1 mile W from the islet. 

7.72 Smith Rock (34°35'S., 136°16'E.) lies above water about 0.5

mile NE of Langton Islet. A channel, with a fairway depth of

6.4m, lies midway between Langton Islet and the rock. Also,

between Smith Rock and the foul ground that extends W from

Hareby Islet, there is a narrow channel with a fairway depth of

6.4m. 

7.72 Blyth Islet (34°34'S., 136°18'E.), about 0.75 mile N of Hareby Islet, is 11.6m high, round, and sandy. Depths of less than

1.8m extend up to 1 mile NW from the islet; an above-water

rock lies 0.3 mile NE of the island, with drying rocks in between. 

7.72 Anchorage can be taken by vessels with local knowledge

with Blyth Islet bearing 308° and the N extremity of Hareby Islet bearing 240°. Shelter is provided from W and S winds.

7.73 Reevesby Island (34°32'S., 136°17'E.), the largest island of the N group of the Sir Joseph Banks Islands, lies 1.25

miles NNW of Blyth Islet. The island has a general height of

9.1 to 12.2m, but a round green hill, with a clump of bushes

near the top, rises to a height of 33m near the S end of the island. A sandy peninsula, topped by a sand hill, extends 0.5

mile E from the N part of the island. A farm house and some

sheds stand near the S end of the island. 

7.73 The coast consists of sandy beaches and low rocky points.

The 10m curve lies about 0.5 mile off the E side of the island,

but on the W side foul ground extends W to Partney Island,

Marum Islet, and Lusby Islet. A sandspit, with a rock ,awash,

at its extremity, extends about 0.5 mile W from a position 1

mile S of the NW extremity of the island.

7.73 Good anchorage can be taken by vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 5.5 to 9.1m, N of the above sandspit, except

during N and NW winds. Small vessels can anchor, in a depth

of 6.4m, about 0.25 mile offshore.

7.73 Winceby Island (34°30'S., 136°17'E.), 10m high and the N

island of the group, lies 0.5 mile N of Reevesby Island. The intervening channel has a fairway depth of 7.3m. This channel is

available only to vessels with local knowledge. 

7.73 Shoal water, with a depth of less than 9.1m, extends 1 mile

NW and 0.75 mile N from the island. Winceby Island Light is

shown from a tower situated on the summit of the island.

7.73 Judith Shoal (34°28'S., 136°21'E.), with a least depth of less

than 15.5m, lies about 3 miles ENE of Winceby Island. 

7.73 Marum Islet (34°31'S., 136°15'E.), 8.8m high, lies 1.5 miles

WSW of the NW extremity of Reevesby Island. The 10m curve

lies about 0.3 mile N and W of the islet. 

7.74 Partney Island (34°31'S., 136°16'E.), 14m high, lies

0.5 mile SSE of Marum Islet and is joined to it by a sandspit

which dries in places. A rocky patch, with a depth of less than

1.8m, lies about 0.75 mile W of Partney Island. 

7.74 A detached reef, with depths of less than 1.8m and with a

rock, awash, near its center, lies about 1.75 miles WSW of

Partney Island. The reef marks the W extremity of the shoal

bank on which the N part of Sir Joseph Banks Group lies.

7.74 Lusby Islet (34°32'S., 136°15'E.), 8.8m high, is joined to the

W part of the S extremity of Reevesby Island by a drying sand-
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 179

Pub. 175

spit,about 0.5 mile long. Rocks that dry in patches extend

about 0.25 mile W and N from the NW extremity of the islet.

The 10m curve lies close S and W of the islet. 

7.74 Kirkby Islet (34°33'S., 136°13'E.), located about 6 miles E

of Bolingbroke Point and 2 miles W of Lusby Islet, is 26m

high and cone-shaped. Shoal water, with depths of less than

5.5m, extends about 0.5 mile NW from the islet. A small rock,

with a depth of 8.2m and 18.3 to 20.1m all around, lies 0.75

mile NNE of the islet. 

7.74 Dalby Islet (34°34'S., 136°15'E.), 8.8m high, lies about 1.25

miles SE of Kirkby Islet. The islet is steep-to, except on its SW

side, where the 10m curve lies about 0.25 mile offshore.

Spencer Gulf—West Coast (continued)

7.75 The coast between Bolingbroke Point and Cape Euler,

about 7 miles to the N, consists of low, red cliffs and sandy

beaches, with drying rocks extending up to 0.5 mile offshore in

places. Massena Bay is an indentation in the coast about 4

miles N of Bolingbroke Point. A red cliff stands on the N entrance point of the bay. 

7.75 Tumby Island (34°24'S., 136°09'E.) stands about 2.25 miles

NNE of Cape Euler and off a low point to which it is connected

by a spit. There are depths of 14.6 to 20.1m between this

stretch of coast and Sir Joseph Banks Group, but the coast

should be given a berth of at least 1 mile between Bolingbroke

Point and Cape Euler. Tumby Island should be given a berth of

2 miles. 

7.75 Secret Rock (34°31'S., 136°07'E.) lies, awash, almost 0.5

mile E of a point located about 2 miles N of Bolingbroke Point.

Quilty Rock, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 1.25 miles SE of

the same point. There are depths of less than 5.5m between the

former point and the rock, and shoal water, with depths of less

than 9.1m, extends about 0.75 mile S from Quilty Rock. 

7.75 Rabbit Island, bearing 243° and well open S of Bolingbroke

Point, leads clear of the shoal water S of Quilty Rock. The

same bearing of Rabbit Island leads NW of the 6.4m shoal that

lies 1.5 miles S of Bolingbroke Point, although this course is

not recommended. 

7.76 Tumby Bay (34°23'S., 136°10'E.), also known as

Harvey’s Bay, lies between Tumby Island and a point about

4.75 miles NE. Depths in the middle of the entrance range from

9.1 to 11m, shoaling gradually to the shores around the bay. 

7.76 From a position about 3 miles E of Tumby Island, the range

of hills to the N of the bay is conspicuous; Sheep Hill is the

summit of this range. The red cliffs of Tumby Island and the

coast between the island and Bolingbroke Point are prominent

marks; however, the low hills that back this coast are barely

visible above the cliffs. 

7.76 A remarkable range, of which Mount Liverpool is the most

conspicuous summit, is visible inland. The town of Tumby is

situated in the SW corner of the bay, about 2.5 miles NW of

Tumby Island. A jetty, about 0.2 mile long, with a depth of

5.2m, extends from the shore abreast of the town but is now

closed to commercial shipping. A light is shown from a white

post on the jetty head. 

7.76 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 5 to 9m, with the jetty

at the town bearing 269°. Local knowledge is necessary. 

7.76 Small vessels can anchor, in depths of 4.6 to 5.5m, about

1.25 miles NW of Tumby Island with the NE extremity of the

island bearing 122°. 

7.76 Pilotage is not compulsory, but a pilot can be obtained at

Port Lincoln if needed. 

7.76 Directions.—Vessels approaching Tumby Bay from the S

should pass about 2 miles E of Tumby Island on a N course until the jetty at the town of Tumby bears 269°. Course should

then be altered to approach the jetty on that bearing. 

7.76 Vessels approaching from the N should give the N entrance

point of the bay a berth of about 2.25 miles until the jetty at

Tumby bears 269°, then proceed as directed above. 

7.77 The coast between the N entrance point of Tumby

Bay and Lipson Cove, about 5.5 miles NE, consists of a sandy

beach backed by low land for a distance of 3.5 miles and then

high rocky points with sandy beach for the remaining distance. 

7.77 Lipson Cove (34°16'S., 136°16'E.) is formed by a sandy

beach and a rock that extends 0.2 mile in a NE direction from

the S end of the beach; the cove contains a damaged and disused jetty. 

7.77 Vessels with local knowledge may anchor, in a depth of

5.5m, about midway between the NE end of the rock and the N

end of the beach. The anchorage is only 0.3 mile across and

provides little swinging room during NE winds. It should only

be used during offshore winds that are likely to continue from

that direction.

7.78 Cape Hardy (34°11'S., 136°20'E.), 30m high and

grassy, lies 5 miles NE of Lipson Cove. A range of wooded

hills parallels the coast between Lipson Cove and Cape Burr, 8

miles NE.

7.78 Sheep Hill (34°14'S., 136°15'E.), the summit of this range,

rises about 1.75 miles NNW of Lipson Cove. 

7.78 Cape Burr (34°07'S., 136°21'E.) lies 4 miles NNE of Cape

Hardy. With the exception of a rock with a depth of 1.8m,

which lies 0.75 mile S of the cape, the coast between Lipson

Cove and Cape Burr is fairly steep-to close offshore. 

7.78 Mount Hill (34°04'S., 136°11'E.), the highest and most conspicuous landmark along this coast, consists of an isolated,

truncated cone, 378m high, which stands 8.5 miles WNW of

Cape Burr. 

7.78 Mottled Cove (34°06'S., 136°21'E.), a small sandy bight

about 1 mile N of Cape Burr, is the site of Port Neill, a small

settlement. A jetty extends about 250m offshore abreast the

settlement and has a depth of 4.6m alongside its outer end. The

jetty is now closed to commercial shipping. 

7.78 Lighted beacons, in range 279°, indicate the axis of the jetty.

By keeping N of the range with the lights slightly open, vessels

may approach in the deepest water right up to the seaward end

of the jetty. 

7.78 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a depth of

5.5m, between Cape Burr and the jetty, with Cape Burr bearing

162°. 

7.78 Dutton Bay (34°05'S., 136°24'E.), formed by a slight curve

in the coast between Cape Burr and a sandy point about 11

miles to the NE, consists of sandy bays and cliffs. The cliffs

along this stretch of coast are higher than those S of Cape Burr,

and the country immediately behind the cliffs is lower and covered with dense scrub. The land behind the sandy point mentioned above is very low. 
180 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

7.78 The 10m curve lies about 1.75 miles off the N and S parts of

the bay, but in the middle of the bay, where the cliffs are highest, there are depths of more than 9.1m about 0.5 mile offshore. 

7.78 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor on the bank in the

N part of Dutton Bay, in a depth of 5.5m, sand, 1 mile offshore,

with Cape Driver bearing 043° and the SW extremity of the

long beach, 7.75 miles N of Port Neill, bearing 263°.

7.79 Cape Driver (33°57'S., 136°35'E.), a broad point

16m high, with rocks around its seaward face, lies 5 miles NE

of the N point of Dutton Bay. A red cliffy point, of similar

height and appearance to Cape Driver, lies 2 miles SW of Cape

Driver. 

7.79 Elbow Hill (33°43'S., 136°48'E.), which rises to a height of

216m about 6.5 miles NNE of Gibbon Point, appears by itself

on the extreme right to the NE. Triple Hill, the first conspicuous summit W of Elbow Hill, rises to a height of 283m, in three

summits of almost equal height, about 9 miles NW of Gibbon

Point. 

7.79 In clear weather, two ranges can be seen WSW of Triple

Hill; the most conspicuous part of these ranges is a summit

which rises to a sharp peak, 408m high, about 16.5 miles NW

of Gibbon Point. The land to the SW of these ranges is much

lower, and there are no conspicuous peaks as far as Mount

Priscilla. 

7.79 Mount Priscilla rises to a sharp cone, about 244m high, 12

miles NW of Cape Driver. Cone Hill and a ridge about 1 mile

long rise to elevations of 122m midway between Mount

Priscilla and Cape Driver. 

7.79 Towards the W and SW, there is nothing conspicuous to be

seen except Mount Hill, which may be seen if it is sufficiently

clear. The land immediately behind the coast consists of low

rises covered with dense scrub, and is barely higher than the

cliffs or coastal sand hills. 

7.80 Arno Bay (Salt Creek Cove) (33°55'S., 136°35'E.) indents the coast between a sandy point about 0.5 mile N of Cape

Driver and another similar point about 1.5 miles farther N. A

reef, which dries, extends 0.2 mile from the S point of the bay;

a similar reef extends 0.3 mile SE from the N point of the bay.

A sunken rock lies about 0.2 mile SW of the extremity of the

latter reef. 

7.80 A salt creek discharges into the SW part of the bay. A pier,

with a depth of 3.7m alongside its outer end, extends from the

shore close N of the creek, but is closed to commercial shipping. 

7.80 Anchorage can be taken by small vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of 5.8m, sand, with Cape Driver bearing 195°,

distant 1.25 miles, and the mouth of the salt creek bearing

257°. Shelter is provided from N to SW winds. 

7.80 A sandy bight is formed in the coast between the N point of

Arno Bay and a position about 1.75 miles NE. From this position, the coast extends NE for 9 miles to Gibbon Point. The

first 5.5 miles of this coast is cliffy with an occasional sand

hill, and the remaining 3.5 miles consists of a sandy beach

backed by low sand hills. A green hill, 45m high, rises on the

highest part of the cliffy coast, about 0.75 mile NE of the SW

end of the cliffs. 

7.80 All of the dangers between Arno Bay and Gibbon Point are

contained within the 10m curve, which lies about 0.5 mile offshore. A marine farm is situated here.

7.81 Gibbon Point (33°50'S., 136°47'E.), which lies about

12.25 miles NE of Cape Driver, consists of a sandy point,

16.8m high, with drying rocks on either side.

7.81 Port Gibbon (33°49'S., 136°49'E.) lies in a bight between

Gibbon Point and a low, rocky point about 3.75 miles NE. The

S half of the bight consists of low, red sandy beach backed by

low sand hills.

7.81 A jetty, 60m long with a depth of 2.1m alongside, extends

from the shore about 2 miles NNE of Gibbon Point. This jetty

is now closed to commercial shipping. 

7.81 Anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge can be

taken, in a depth of 6.4m, with Gibbon Point bearing 229°, distant 0.5 mile. Shelter is provided against W winds. 

7.81 The coast between Port Gibbon and Germein Point, the SW

entrance point of Franklin Harbor, about 7 miles ENE, is

sandy.

7.82 Franklin Harbor (33°44'S., 136°57'E.) is a large

landlocked body of water which is half-filled with drying sand

banks; it is available only for vessels of not more than 2.4m

draft, to which it offers shelter in all weather. 

7.82 The harbor is entered over a bar that lies about 1.25 miles

seaward of the entrance between Germein Point and Victoria

Point, 1.25 miles to the NE. An intricate channel, marked by

beacons and indicated by ranges, leads to the town of Cowell

about 4 miles NW of Germein Point. 

7.82 The shores of the harbor are generally very low, swampy,

and covered with mangroves, except in the NE corner, where

there is a bare sandy beach. 

7.82 A narrow passage, with depths of 2.4 to 4.9m, leads from the

main channel in the vicinity of Cowell through drying sand

banks to a large pool that forms the SW part of the harbor that

has depths of 2.4 to 4.3m. 

7.82 With the exception of the low sandy beach that extends SW

for about 5 miles from Germein Point, the land between the SE

side of this pool and the sea is swampy and nearly covers at

spring tides. 

7.82 Entrance Island fronts the harbor entrance about 0.75 mile

within the entrance points. The island is infested with highlyvenemous Death adders. 

7.82 Germein Point (Germain Point) (33°45'S., 136°58'E.) is low

and composed of masses of sand and weed which shift about

from time to time. A spit, with depths of 0.6 to 1.4m, extends

about 0.3 mile E and 1.25 miles SE from the E end of the point;

this spit forms the W side of the bar. There are depths of less

than 1.8m within 230m of the N side of the point. An obstruction lies about 1.75 miles S of Germein Point. 

7.82 Victoria Point (33°45'S., 136°59'E.), the NE entrance point

of Franklin Harbor, has a red cliff, 15.2m high, for a sea face.

A drying bank, composed of sand and reefs, extends about 0.5

mile W and 0.75 mile S from the point, and a shoal, with

depths of less than 1.2m, extends 0.75 mile farther S from the

drying bank. This foul ground forms the E side of the bar. The

underwater remains of a beacon lie about 1.5 miles S of Victoria Point. 

7.82 Cowell (33°41'S., 136°56'E.), a small town and fishing port,

is situated in a gap in the mangroves on the W side of the N

part of the harbor. The town jetty consists of a causeway ex-
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 181

Pub. 175

tending 0.25 mile E from the shore at Cowell. New Jetty extends 320m SE from the head of the causeway and has a depth

alongside of 3m. A light is shown from the head of the jetty.

Old Jetty extends 147m E from the head of the causeway.

7.83 The coast between Victoria Point and a sand hill at the

entrance of a swamp about 3.5 miles ENE is very low, with the

exception of one wooded rise. From the sand hill, the coast extends E for 6 miles to a very low point and then NE for 2.5

miles to Shoalwater Point. Three wooded rises stand 7 miles

ENE of Victoria Point; off these rises, the edge of the drying

bank lies a little over 1 mile from the beach. From Victoria

Point and up to 4 miles to the E, the 10m curve lies 2 miles offshore; from there to Shoalwater Point, it lies from 3 to 4 miles

offshore. The majority of coastal dangers are contained within

this curve. A dangerous wreck lies 3 miles SE of Victoria

Point.

7.83 Shoalwater Point (33°40'S., 137°12'E.) is not more than 3m

high and backed by swampy land up to 15 miles inland. The

shore bank dries up to 1.5 miles offshore and there are depths

of less than 9.1m within 4 miles offshore. A conspicuous house

stands about 1 mile inland of Shoalwater Point. A light is

shown at the point and a beacon stands about 2.5 miles SSE of

the light structure marking the shore bank. 

7.83 At a distance of about 3 miles off Shoalwater Point, the flood

sets NE and the ebb sets SW, at a rate of about 2 knots. 

7.83 Good anchorage can be taken anywhere on the bank off

Shoalwater Point, in depths of 3.7 to 9.1m, good holding

ground. The coast between Shoalwater Point and Plank Point,

about 15 miles NNE, never rises higher than 6.1m. A drying

sand bank extends about 1 mile off this coast; depths of less

than 9.1m are formed up to 5 miles offshore. 

7.83 Clan Macdougall Shoal (33°53'S., 137°13'E.), with a depth

of 10.6m, lies 11 miles S of Shoalwater Point beacon. 

7.83 Dillon Shoal (33°49'S., 137°08'E.), with a least depth of

11.6m, lies about 8.5 miles SSW of Shoalwater Point beacon.

A shoal, with a least depth of 3m, lies with its outer edge about

5 miles offshore, about 11.25 miles NE of Shoalwater Point

beacon. Depths of 9.1m and less extend about 2 miles SSE

from this shoal. A shoal, with a least depth of 7.6m, lies 6

miles ESE of Shoalwater Point beacon. 

7.83 Plank Point (33°27'S., 137°21'E.) may be easily identified

by the obelisk on it. The point lies close to the northernmost of

three prominent sand hills. A lighted beacon stands about 6

miles SE of Plank Point and marks Plank Shoal; this shoal lies

7 miles ESE of the obelisk on Plank Point and is 2.5 miles in

extent, with a least depth of 8.8m. 

7.83 The coast from Plank Point extends in a general NNE direction for 21 miles to the foot of Mount Young and forms a shallow bay close S of the mount. This section of coast is bordered

by a shallow bank that extends about 2 miles offshore in places

and is steep-to. 

7.83 A shoal area, about 0.75 mile in extent, with depths of about

10m, lies 5 miles offshore about 9 miles NNE of Plank Point.

A 5.2m patch lies about 5 miles NE of Plank Point.

7.84 Mount Young (33°06'S., 137°29'E.), about 22 miles

NNE of Plank Point, is the most conspicuous feature of this

part of Spencer Gulf; it rises steeply to an elevation of 135m

about 1 mile inland. When viewed from a distance, it appears

as a double peak. The land between it and the coast is swampy.

Mount Young has been reported to be a good radar target at

distances up to 10 miles. 

7.84 The country inland of Mount Young is an extensive plain

gradually rising to the W and is covered with stunted scrub.

Mount Middleback, 457m high, stands 19 miles WSW of

Mount Young. This mount and the surrounding ranges are too

far distant to be of any use to navigation. An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated about 3 miles NE of Mount Young. 

7.84 Western Shoal (33°09'S., 127°32'E.), with depths of less

than 5.5m, extends about 5 miles offshore in the vicinity of

Mount Young. A part of the shoal, about 3.5 miles S of Mount

Young, dries; depths of less than 1.8m are formed up to 3 miles

E of the drying patch. A lighted beacon stands about 2 miles

SE of Western Shoal. 

7.84 The coast between Mount Young and Hummock Hill, about

6.5 miles NE, is very low and swampy for some distance inland, and is fringed by mangroves. Drying sand flats extend

from 0.5 to 1 mile offshore along this section of coast.

7.84 Hummock Hill (33°02'S., 137°36'E.), about 6.5 miles NE of

Mount Young, is a grassy, round hill that rises to an elevation

of 61m a short distance inland. A conspicuous metal framework tower, 78m high, stands 0.75 mile WNW of Hummock

Hill.

7.84 Mount Laura (33°00'S., 137°31'E.), a conspicuous sharp

wedge-shaped hill with a nearly perpendicular W face, is 182m

high and is located 4 miles NW of Hummocks Hill.

7.85 Port Whyalla (33°02'S., 137°36'E.) (World Port Index No. 54320) is one of the major ports of call in Spencer

Gulf; it consists of an inner harbor and an outer harbor, both

approached through dredged channels marked by lighted beacons and indicated by ranges. The berthing facilities are situated in the SW part of False Bay. Port Whyalla is a first port of

entry. 

7.85 Winds—Weather.—The climate is hot and dry. The warmest weather is from November to March. South of the port, the

heat is modified by the sea breeze. July and August are the

coldest months. The prevailing winds are from the SW. 

7.85 Tides—Currents.—The tide rises 2.5m at springs and 1.5m

at neaps. About 0.5 mile offshore, in the vicinity of Hummock

Hill, the flood sets N and the ebb sets S. Off Black Point, the

flood sets E and the ebb sets W. 

7.85 Depths—Limitations.—The Preferred Route to Whyalla

from the Spencer Gulf is charted as far S as in the vicinity of 15

miles W of Cape Elizabeth. The route is approximately 77

miles long from its commencement off Cape Elizabeth to the

entrance buoy 6.5 miles SSE of Port Whyalla.The tracks shown

have not been surveyed in accordance with IMO standards for

recommended tracks, but are the preferred routes for vessels

with regard to the charted depths. A least depth of 20m is

charted along this route.

7.85 Outer Harbor (South Harbor) consists of two jetties. The N

jetty extends ESE from the coast at the foot of Hummock Hill.

The ore berth, on the N side of the outer end of the N jetty, is

dredged to a depth of 11.6m and is 250m long. A dolphin to assist vessels in turning lies off the head of the jetty. The maximum length of a vessel permitted at the berth is 250m. 

7.85 The jetty S of the ore jetty is lighted and has alongside

depths of less than 2m
182 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

7.85 The approach channel, dredged to a depth of 10.7m, is

marked by a lighted beacons; the center line of the channel is

indicated by lighted beacons, in range 280°. 

7.85 The channel, leading in a 251° direction toward the ore jetty

and dredged to a depth of 7.6m, is unmarked.

7.85 Inner Harbor (North Harbor) is located 1 mile N of Outer

Harbor and is entered through a channel dredged to a depth of

10m. The sides of this channel are marked by lighted beacons;

the alignment of the channel is indicated by lighted beacons, in

range 306.5 °. 

7.85 Main Harbor Wharf (Blast Furnace Wharf), on the N side of

Inner Harbor, is 700m long, with four berths having a depth of

10.7m alongside, including one berth for ro-ro traffic. The

main wharf is equipped with loading facilities for bulk cargo,

coal, limestone, and salt. 

7.85 There is a berth, 180m long, on the S side of the basin used

by the shipyard.

7.85 Vessels up to 69,000 dwt can be accommodated at Port Whyalla. 

7.85 One Steel Whyalla Steelworks has a floating offshore terminal vessel in operation at Whyalla named the “Spencer Gulf.”

The terminal consists of the “Spencer Gulf,” a Floating Offshore Transfer Barge (FOTB), which is serviced by the transfer

barges “Middleback” and “Barngala.” 

7.85 Aspect.—Several buildings and a conspicuous convoluted

blast furnace stand on the NE side of Inner Harbor. A radio

tower stands at the seaward corner of the Main Wharf.

7.85 A high radio tower stands on high ground about 1 mile

WNW of the ore-loading jetty. A hospital is situated 0.75 mile

WNW of Hummock Hill.

7.85 Radar navigation has been reported to be good within 15

miles of Whyalla.

7.85 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all non-exempt vessels and vessels over 35m loa. Pilots board in the vicinity of

Whyalla Pilot Boarding Ground, which is situated approximately 1.7 miles SE of Lighted Beacon No. 1. 

7.85 The request for pilot and ETA should be made 48 hours and

24 hours in advance. The signal for a pilot should be displayed

when within at least 10 miles of Port Whyalla. The pilot vessel

is equipped with radiotelephone. There is a Port Radio Station

at Port Whyalla.

7.85 After being loaded at the FOTB, cape-size vessels with a

draft of more than 16m and heading S must undertake the voyage with a pilot licensed by the South Australian Government

for this particular outbound trip. Pilotage will continue to at

least a point as far S as Wallaroo. Pilotage should be arranged

by the vessel’s owner or agent. 

7.85 Regulations.—Vessels must have an underkeel clearance of

10 per cent of the maximum draft. If the vessel’s draft is less

than 6.53m, then a minimum underkeel clearance of 0.76m is

required.

7.85 For trans-shipping operations, once moored, vessels will be

provided UHF radio equipment to enable communications between the vessel and the FOTB. 

7.85 Signals.—Berthing signals are displayed from a tower at the

outer end of the Inner Harbor, as follows: 

7.85 Berthing signals are also shown from the top of the ore loader at the Outer Harbor Ore Jetty, as follows:

7.85 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in a depth of 8.2m,

clay and mud, with the summit of Hummock Hill bearing 245°,

distant 1.5 miles. 

7.85 The quarantine anchorage lies close off the outer beacons on

the 306.5 ° range line and about 2 miles ESE of the ore jetty. At

least 48 hours notice for a request for pratique is required.

7.86 False Bay (33°00'S., 137°40'E.) is an indentation in

the coast between Hummock Hill and Black Point, about 7

miles ENE. The land at the head of the bay is very low and

swampy for many miles inland. The bay shore is bordered by a

drying sand flat which extends about 1.5 miles offshore in

places. 

7.86 East of Hummock Hill and S of Black Point, the 5m curve

lies close offshore but between the two places it lies up to 2.5

miles offshore; the 10m curve lies from about 1 to 2 miles farther offshore than the 5m curve. 

7.86 A dumping ground for solid ballast and a spoil ground are

situated within the bay and can best be seen on the chart. An

obstruction, least depth 2.8m, is situated in the NW corner of

the spoil ground.

7.86 Black Point (32°59'S., 137°43'E.), a fairly steep-to limestone cliff about 15.2m high, lies 7 miles ENE of Hummock

Hill. Although the point is light-colored, its overhanging face

is nearly always shadowed and appears black. 

7.86 The coast between Black Point and Lowly Point, about 3.3

miles to the E and marked by a light, is bordered by a drying

rocky ledge that extends about 0.3 mile offshore in places. Off

this section of coast, the 10m curve varies from about 1.5 miles

offshore S of Black Point to about 0.25 mile offshore S of

Lowly Point. 

7.87 Port Bonython (33°00'S., 137°46'E.) (World Port Index No. 54325), situated close E of Stony Point, about 2 miles

E of Black Point, is an oil and LPG terminal. 

7.87 Tides—Currents.—In the area off the berth, the spring

floods reach 1.25 knots and the ebbs 1.75 knots; both flood and

ebb set slightly across the line of the berth towards the shore. 

7.87 Depths—Limitations.—The port consists of a jetty 1.25

miles long, with a T-head wharf 340m long, and has a depth

Signal Meaning

One intensified red light Vessel may not enter berth.

One intensified green light Vessel may enter berth.

Signal Meaning

Day signal

Two yellow balls Vessel may berth.

One yellow ball Vessel may not berth.

Night signal

One green light or 

neon strip Vessel may berth.

One red light or neon 

strip Vessel may not berth. 

Signal Meaning
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 183

Pub. 175

alongside of 18m. The jetty will accommodate tankers up to

110,000 dwt; gas carriers of up to 45,0000 dwt may be accommodated. The maximum departure draft is 16m. 

7.87 A submarine pipeline is laid from the T-head NNE to the

shore. A swinging basin, with a least depth of 20m, extends

0.25 mile from the jetty. 

7.87 The approach channel to the jetty lies E of Fairway Bank and

is marked by lighted buoys. The least charted depth in the

channel is 18.4m.

7.87 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all non-exempt vessels. Vessels with a draft of 14m or greater board the pilot 5

miles SSE of Whyalla Entrance Lighted Beacon No. 1. Vessels

having a draft less than 14m board pilots either in the vicinity

of the Port Pirie Pilot Boarding Ground or the Whyalla Pilot

Boarding Ground. The port is equipped with VHF radio. 

7.87 Regulations.—Navigation is permitted during daylight

hours only.

7.87 Vessels should send an ETA through their agent 48 hours and

24 hours in advance, stating the following: 

1. Draft.

2. Last port of call.

3. Whether ballast is clean and hull is sound.

7.87 A restricted area surrounds the T-headed jetty. Berth operation lights indicate vessels are prohibited from entering the area without prior permission from Port Bonython.

7.87 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in 16m, sand, good

holding ground, near the pilot boarding position.

Spencer Gulf—East Side—The Althorpe Islands

and Off-lying Dangers

7.88 The Althorpe Islands (35°23'S., 136°51'E.) consists

of a group of three islands, the southernmost of the group lying

about 4.5 miles S of Cape Spencer, the E entrance point of

Spencer Gulf. The group has been reported to be a good radar

target from distances of up to 16 miles.

7.88 Althorpe Island, the S and largest, lies 4.5 miles S of Cape

Spencer, with Haystack Island, 3.75 miles NE, and Seal Island,

3.5 miles ENE of it. 

7.88 Haystack Island (35°19'S., 136°54'E.) and Seal Island are

bare rocks, 43m and 30m high, respectively. A submerged

rock, which generally breaks, lies 0.25 mile N of Seal Island.

Althorpe Island is 93m high, nearly flat-topped, with steep

sides, and has a cleft across its S part which is visible from

both E and W. 

7.88 Several rocks and islets lie within 1.5 miles off the NW side

of Althorpe Island and the outer rock breaks. A light is shown

from the center of Althorpe Island. 

7.88 A range consisting of a light situated on the NW side of the

island and the one at the center leads on a bearing of 157° between the mainland and the off-lying dangers at the SW extremity of the Yorke Peninsula.

7.88 Anchorage, sheltered from W gales, can be taken, in depths

of 14.6 to 18.3m, sand, off a remarkable yellow overhanging

cliff on the E side of Althorpe Island. 

7.88 A jetty, with depths of 3.4m at its outer end, extends from the

NE side of the island. 

7.88 Southwest Rock (35°20'S., 136°49'E.), which breaks during

a heavy swell or in W gales, has a depth of 3m, and lies 3.25

miles NW of Althorpe Island Light. 

7.89 Emmes Reef (35°18'S., 136°49'E.), almost 2 miles

NNE of Southwest Rock, is a steep-to rocky patch about 2.1m

high. The sea breaks heavily on this rock.

7.89 Brook Shoal (35°19'S., 136°48'E.), with a depth of 8.8m,

lies about 0.75 mile WSW of Emmes Reef.

7.89 Iron Whyalla Shoal (35°18'S., 136°47'E.), with a depth of

11.3m and on which the sea breaks, lies 1.75 miles WNW of

Emmes Reef; the sea also breaks close NW of this shoal during

heavy SW swells. 

7.89 A shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, lies 2 miles NNW of Iron

Whyalla Shoal. This shoal breaks with a SW swell. 

7.89 Tides—Currents.—South of the Althorpe Islands, the flood

sets NE and divides off Cape Spencer, with the E part setting

along the coast toward Marion Bay, and the W part setting NW,

around West Cape, at a rate of 1.5 knots. 

7.89 Directions.—Small vessels with local knowledge may pass

between Haystack Island and Cape Spencer; Packman Shoal

(see paragraph 7.90) lies close to this route. 

7.89 Vessels approaching from a position midway between Althorpe Island and Seal Island should steer to pass midway between Emmes Reef and the reef extending off Reef Head (see

paragraph 7.90). 

7.89 Emmes Reef is very close to the track of vessels using the inner route and the greatest care should be exercised when navigating in this vicinity.

Spencer Gulf—East Side

7.90 Cape Spencer (35°18'S., 136°53'E.), 79m high, is the

E entrance point of Spencer Gulf. When viewed from the S,

Cape Spencer appears as a cone with a ledge of rocks at its

base. Together with Reef Head and West Cape, two cliffy

points lying 2 and 4 miles, respectively, NW, it forms the SW

end of the Yorke Peninsula, which separates Spencer Gulf from

the Gulf St. Vincent. Cape Spencer has been reported to be a

good radar target at distances up to 15 miles. A light is shown

on the S extremity of the cape. 

7.90 Packman Shoal (35°19'S., 136°53'E.), with a depth of

11.6m, lies about 1 mile S of Cape Spencer. A rocky shoal,

with a depth of 13.1m, lies about 1.5 miles E of Packman

Shoal. 

7.90 Reef Head (35°17'S., 136°51'E.), about 2 miles WNW of

Cape Spencer, has a reef extending about 0.4 mile SW from it.

Foul ground lies in the vicinity. 

7.90 West Cape (35°15'S., 136°49'E.), lies 2.25 miles NNW of

Reef Head. A reef of sunken rocks, which breaks during SW

gales, extends about 0.5 mile seaward from a cliffy head close

S of a point about 0.75 mile NNE of West Cape. West Cape

Light is shown from the cape. 

7.90 Lawry Shoal (35°15'S., 136°46'E.), with a depth of 15.2m,

lies 2.75 miles WNW of West Cape.

7.90 Waller Shoal (35°13'S., 136°48'E.), with a least depth of

10.4m, lies 2.25 miles NNW of West Cape. An 18.3m patch

lies about 3.75 miles NNW of West Cape. 

7.91 Pondalowie Bay (35°14'S., 136°50'E.), a small indentation in the coast, lies between a point located 0.75 mile NNE

of West Cape and Royston Head, about 2.75 miles farther

NNE. The E shore of the bay consists of a sandy beach backed

by sand hills. Three islets, dark-colored on their W sides, front
184 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

Pondalowie Bay. With the sun behind them, these islets appear

quite black against the sand hills on the shore. 

7.91 The S islet is small and is joined to the S point of the bay by

drying ground. A light is shown on the S islet. 

7.91 A rock, with a depth of 2.1m and which breaks at times during SW gales, lies close inside the bay entrance, about 0.25

mile NE of the outer point of the S islet. 

7.91 The middle islet, about 0.75 mile N of the S islet, is 31m

high and separated from the mainland by a rocky channel. A

drying reef extends 0.4 mile from its W point; a similar reef extends 0.1 mile from its S side. 

7.91 The N islet, 38m high, is close to Royston Head and is connected to it by a drying reef. 

7.91 The S part of Pondalowie Bay provides anchorage from

winds between N through E to WSW, in a depth of about 6.4m,

about 0.25 mile offshore, over a bottom of smooth limestone

with a thin cover of sand. The holding ground is poor. 

7.91 The entrance of Pondalowie Bay is about 0.75 mile wide between the S and middle islets; there are depths of 11m in it.

Small vessels, entering the bay between the middle and S islets, should steer with the high sand hill just open N of the S islet, bearing 105°, in order to avoid the sunken rock NE of the S

islet and the reef extending S from the middle islet. This course

passes the steep-to S islet at a distance of about 0.1 mile, but

local knowledge is necessary.

7.91 Royston Head (35°12'S., 136°50'E.), 59m high, lies 3.25

miles NNE of West Cape and is cliffy. The coast between

Royston Head and a point about 8 miles to the NE is composed

of small sandy beaches and rocky points. 

7.91 Formby Bay, a small bight, lies between the point about 8

miles NE of Royston Head and Daly Head, 4 miles to the N.

This bay has a sandy beach about 4 miles long. High sand hills

back this section of coast and most of the rocky points have

rocks which extend between 0.1 and 0.2 mile from them. 

7.91 A heavily-breaking rock lies 1 mile offshore 3.5 miles NNE

of Royston Head. During E winds and in very fine weather this

rock does not break. A 13.7m shoal patch, over which tide rips

occur, lies about 4.5 miles NNE of Royston Head.

7.92 Daly Head (35°02'S., 136°56'E.), almost 11 miles

NNE of Royston Head, is a steep rocky point which has a

grassy summit, 63m high. This point has been reported to be a

good radar target at distances of up to 14 miles.

7.92 A reef, part of which is 1.2m high, extends about 0.5 mile

seaward from the head. 

7.92 The coast between Daly Head and Corny Point, about 9

miles NNE, is generally sandy and backed by sand hills. This

section of coast forms two bights, with Berry Bay being the N

bight. 

7.92 The coast NE of Daly Head is low and marked by salt

swamps and small grassy plains. Two reefs extend about 0.3

mile seaward from a rocky point about 1 mile NE of Daly

Head; a number of rocks lie about 0.25 mile farther NE. A

rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies off a rocky point 4

miles NE of Daly Head.

7.93 Webb Rock (34°58'S., 136°55'E.) lies about 3 miles

N of Daly Head and 2.25 miles offshore. A knob on the outer

part of the rock is awash and there are usually heavy breakers

over it;. In the summer, during long continued E winds, it

breaks only at intervals, but then only slightly. Passage E of

Webb Rock should never be attempted except by those completely familiar with the coast. A rock, with a depth of 3.7m,

has been reported to lie about 1.25 miles ENE of Webb Rock.

Two low, above-water rocks lie in this vicinity. 

7.93 Corny Point (34°54'S., 137°01'E.), a sloping rocky double

projection, lies about 9 miles NNE of Daly Head. The coast on

the N side is low and sandy whereas the coast on the S side is

higher than the point itself. Corny Point has been reported to be

a good radar target at distances of up to 11 miles. A light is

shown from the point. 

7.93 Some detached rocks lie not more than 0.25 mile offshore

SW of Corny Point, but it is otherwise free of dangers. The

point may safely be rounded at a distance of 0.5 mile, but the

depths shoal rapidly E of the point.

7.94 Hardwicke Bay (34°40'S., 137°20'E.) lies between

Corny Point and the S extremity of Wardang Island, about 28

miles NE. 

7.94 Port Turton is situated in the SE part of the bay; Port Minlacowie and Port Rickaby are situated on the E shore; and Port

Victoria is situated at the N end. 

7.94 The bay has general depths of 14.6 to 20.1m, but between 5

and 10 miles SW of Wardang Island, the depths are very irregular. The rocky bottom raises a disturbed sea in the bay during

W gales. 

7.94 Anchorage, sheltered from all S winds, can be taken in many

parts of the bay. These S winds appear to be the only ones with

much strength. Although there is a rocky bottom in all parts of

the bay, vessels with a good scope of chain should anchor safely. 

7.95 Hardwicke Bay—South side.—The coast between

Corny Point and Souttar Point, 12.75 miles E, consists of a

sandy beach backed by woodlands. Corny Point Settlement is

situated 4 miles E of Corny Point. 

7.95 A spit, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends 3.75 miles

NNW from a low sandy point 8.75 miles E of Corny Point. A

shoal with similar depths, which extends 2.5 miles offshore in

places, fronts the coast between Corny Point and the above low

sandy point. A shoal, with depths of less than 9.1m, and with

depths of 6.4m near its outer end, extends 7 miles NE from the

N point of the spit.

7.95 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 8.2m, off Corny Point

Settlement, with Corny Point bearing 257°. There is good shelter, good holding ground, and smooth water in a depth of 5m,

about 0.5 mile offshore, between the lighted beacon, about 4

miles WNW of Souttar Point, and the point itself. 

7.95 Souttar Point (34°54'S., 137°17'E.), 12.75 miles E of Corny

Point, is marked by a 26m high sand hill, which is partly white.

A lighted beacon stands about 4 miles W of the point. 

7.95 The coast between Souttar Point and Point Turton, a cliffy

projection about 4 miles to the ESE, consists of stony beaches

and low cliffs. 

7.95 Mount Gore (35°00'S., 137°16'E.), 101m high, is located 6

miles S of Souttar Point. 

7.95 Port Turton (34°57'S., 137°21'E.), used exclusively by fishing boats, lies close E of Turton Point. A jetty, with a depth of

3.4m alongside its outer end and marked by a light, extends

about 137m from the SE side of the point. The jetty is closed to
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 185

Pub. 175

commercial shipping and is now occationaly used to offload

fish catches of salmon and prawns. 

7.95 A number of rocks, with depths of 0.6 to 1.2m, lie off off either side of the jetty and at its extremities.

7.95 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in

depths of 6.1 to 6.7m, with the jetty bearing 230°, distant 0.3

mile. 

7.95 Small vessels can anchor, in depths of 3.7 to 4.6m, on the

alignment of the jetty, bearing 241°, distant 0.15 mile. 

7.95 The bottom in the vicinity of Port Turton is so rocky that a

broken sea rises very quickly but subsides just as quickly when

the wind dies down. 

7.96 Hardwicke Bay—East side.—A sandy beach, which

extends E and NE from Port Turton for a distance of 5 miles,

forms the head of Hardwicke Bay. There is low sandy land between the two wooded ranges S of this beach; this is the narrowest part of the Yorke Peninsula, which is only 9 miles

across here. 

7.96 The coast from the NE end of this sandy beach extends N to

Gawler Point, about 26.5 miles NNE of Turton Point. This section of coast consists of sandy beaches and low, rocky points,

with a coastal range of sand hills. Behind these hills the land

rises gradually to an elevation of about 152m.

7.97 Port Minlacowie (34°51'S., 137°28'E.) is situated almost 8 miles NE of Turton Point. The shore in this vicinity is

backed by low sand hills covered with bushes and small trees,

and fronted by a ledge of rocks which dry up to a distance of

about 0.15 mile offshore. A cairn on the shoreline marks where

the root of the former jetty once stood. A number of dangerous

rocks, with depths of 0.6 to 3.4m, lie up to about 0.2 mile offshore. 

7.97 Anchorage can be taken about 0.3 mile offshore in depths of

6.1 to 6.7m or about 0.75 mile offshore in depths of 7.3 to

7.9m. Local knowledge is essential. 

7.97 Brown Point (34°43'S., 137°29'E.), marked by a whitetopped sand hill with trees on it, stands 7 miles N of Port Minlacowie.

7.98 Port Rickaby (34°40'S., 137°30'E.), 10.75 miles N of

Port Minlacowie, is fronted by a sandy beach. A jetty, with a

depth of 5.5m along its outer end, extends from the shore

abreast of Port Rickaby but is no longer used by shipping. 

7.98 A tree-topped 21m high hill rises 0.25 mile S of the jetty. A

rocky point lies almost 0.2 mile N of the root of the jetty; a drying reef lies about 0.1 mile off this rocky point, with a 3m

patch lying about 0.15 mile farther seaward. 

7.98 A sandy beach, which is clear of rocks, lies between the

above rocky point and a position about 0.4 mile to the N, from

which rocky drying ledges extend 0.4 mile seaward. Two bare

sand hills rise behind this beach. 

7.98 General depths of less than 5.5m extend not more than 0.15

mile off this beach, but a number of rocky patches, with depths

of 4.6 to 5.5m, lie about 0.4 mile off the middle of the beach;

beyond this the bottom is very irregular, but there are not

depths of less than 5.8m. 

7.98 Anchorage can be taken in, depths of 7.3 to 8.2m, about 0.75

mile offshore, with the 16.8m sand hill with a pole on it bearing 095°. 

7.98 Small vessels can anchor on the same alignment but closer

inshore. 

7.98 Local knowledge is necessary for both anchorages. 

7.98 In Hardwicke Bay, the flood current sets N and the ebb current sets S, following the direction of the coast. The offshore

currents are stronger than the inshore currents. 

7.98 Directions.—As a general rule, when approaching any of

the ports in Hardwicke Bay, there are depths of more than 9.1m

to within a distance of 1 mile of the shore, but off Port Victoria

and Turton Point such depths are found much closer inshore. 

7.98 At night, all dangers will be avoided if vessels anchor immediately upon obtaining depths of less than 9.1m. 

7.98 Corny Point may be safely rounded at a distance of 0.5 mile,

but vessels bound for Port Turton should keep Corny Point

bearing less than 237° astern until Mount Gore bears more than

181°, at which time the jetty at Port Turton may be steered for. 

7.98 Vessels drawing no more than 4.6m may keep Corny Point

bearing less than 247°, and when Mount Gore bears more than

163°, steer for the jetty at Port Turton. 

7.98 When approaching Port Minlacowie, and if drawing more

than 3m, keep the outer end of the jetty bearing 125°; when

within 0.5 mile of the shore; with a draft exceeding 2.4m, the

outer end of the jetty must be kept between the bearings of

050° and 140° to avoid the submerged rocks. 

7.98 Vessels approaching Port Rickaby should not come within 1

mile of the coast until the sand hill, mentioned above and located almost 0.35 mile N of the root of the jetty, bears between

072° and 140°.

7.99 Port Victoria (34°27'S., 137°28'E.) is the bight at the

N end of Hardwicke Bay, E of Wardang Island and E of the

peninsula of which Pearce Point is the S extremity. 

7.99 The port has general depths of 6.4 to 9.1m, but the N and W

sides of the port are shallow. 

7.99 Within the harbor is a jetty, which is closed to commercial

traffic, having a depth alongside of 3.4m. A ramp is situated almost 0.75 mile S of the jetty. A light is shown from the head of

the jetty. The jetty is popular with recreational fishermen and

Port Rickaby Jetty
186 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

divers.

7.99 Anchorage.—The port provides protection from all winds

except those from between SW and S. The holding ground is

not good and NW and W gales usually end with a gale from the

SW, at which time anchorage becomes dangerous. 

7.99 The shallow N entrance between Wardang Island and Pearce

Point is used by small coastal vessels; otherwise, the port is approached from Hardwicke Bay. 

7.99 Gawler Point (34°30'S., 137°28'E.), the SE entrance point

of Port Victoria, is located 10 miles N of Port Rickaby. The

low, sloping grassy point is steep-to on its W side, there being

depths of 5.5m at less than 0.1 mile offshore. Drying rocks extend about 0.25 mile N from the point. 

7.99 Eclipse Rock (34°30'S., 137°28'E.), with a depth of 1.8m,

and with depths of less than 3.7m extending for a distance of

about 100m from it, lies 0.75 mile N of Gawler Point. The rock

is marked by a beacon. 

7.100 Wardang Island (Wauraltee Island) (34°32'S.,

137°21'E.), with its S point about 6 miles WSW of Gawler

Point, rises to a height of 29m near its W side. The island is

grass-covered except near the coast. Marine farms established

in the offshore waters are best seen on the chart.

7.100 Above-water and sunken rocks extend as far as 0.5 mile S

from the S part of the island. A light is shown from the summit

of the island. Stranded wrecks lie close offshore on the W side

of the island, 0.5 mile WNW and 1.5 miles SSW of the light

structure. Historic wrecks are protected from unauthorised interference. 

7.100 The W coast of Wardang Island consists of alternate sandy

beaches and rocky points, with sand hills toward the N end of

the island, where there are some remarkable cliffy points. 

7.100 A dangerous wreck lies approximately 0.5 mile off the NE

end of the island.

7.100 Goose Islet (34°27'S., 137°22'E.), a small grassy islet 27m

high, lies about 0.3 mile off the N end of Wardang Island, to

which it is connected at LW. 

7.100 Cormorant Islet lies about 0.1 mile NNE of Goose Islet, to

which it is connected at LW. The outer edge of White Rock,

which dries, lies about 0.3 mile NNW of Goose Islet. An obstruction, with depths of less than 2.7m over it and the position

of which is approximate, lies about 0.1 mile N of White Rock. 

7.100 The E coast of Wardang Island, with the exception of a red

cliff located about 0.75 mile SE of the N extremity of the island, is a continuous sandy beach as far S as Cliff Point, the SE

extremity of the island. 

7.100 A drying sandy spit extends about 3.75 miles ENE from Bird

Point, the E extremity of Wardang Island. Three narrow channels intersect this spit.

7.100 Caution.—Mariners are warned of the presence of marine

farms in the coastal waters surrounding Wardang Island. Marine farms, which may be floating or fixed structures, and their

associated moorings should be avoided. The farms are generally marked by buoys or beacons, which may be lit.

7.101 Island Point (34°27'S., 137°25'E.) is a low grassy

point with a low islet close off it. It is the NE entrance point of

the N entrance to Port Victoria and is connected to the peninsula at low water. 

7.101 Beatrice Rock, which dries 0.6m, lies about 0.5 mile N of the

above low islet at Island Point. A small drying rock lies 0.75

mile WSW of the islet. 

7.101 Green Islet (34°26'S., 137°25'E.), which is connected to the

W side of the above peninsula at LW, lies 1 mile SSW of the

above low islet.

7.101 Pearce Point (34°28'S., 137°26'E.), the S point of the peninsula, lies 1.25 miles SE of Green Islet.

7.101 Rocky Islet (34°29'S., 137°26'E.) lies 0.75 mile S of Pearce

Point. There are depths of about 1.8m in a channel that leads N

of Rocky Islet and into Port Victoria, but local knowledge is

necessary for the use of this channel. 

7.101 The three channels, which intersect the spit extending ENE

from Bird Point, lie between Rocky Islet and Wardang Island.

These channels are liable to change, both in position and depth,

and local knowledge is necessary to use them. Rocky Islet

Channel, the E channel of the three, has a least depth of 2.4m

and is used by small coastal craft. It is marked by two red can

buoys, with red square topmarks, on its E side. 

7.101 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, sheltered from all

but N and NW winds, in the N entrance of Port Victoria. The

best anchorage lies, in a depth of 8.2m, sand and mud, with

Goose Islet summit bearing 268° and Bird Point bearing 179°.

Smaller vessels may anchor farther S. 

7.101 Anchorage can be taken by vessels with a draft of 5.5m, in

depths of 6.4 to 7m, off Port Victoria Jetty, with the outer end

of the jetty bearing 134°, distant not less than 0.5 mile; vessels

of greater draft can anchor, in depths of 7.3 to 8.2m, with the

outer end of the jetty bearing 095°, distant not less than 1 mile. 

7.101 With the prior permission of the harbormaster, small vessels

unable to go alongside the jetty may anchor, in depths of 3 to

3.7m, with the outer end of the jetty bearing 162°, distant about

0.15 mile. 

7.101 Tides—Currents.—The mean range of the tide is 0.8m; the

spring range is 1.2m. 

7.101 At the anchorage in the N entrance of Port Victoria, the flood

sets N at a rate of about 1.25 knots and the ebb sets S. 

7.101 In the vicinity of Rocky Islet Channel the flood sets NW and

the ebb SE at a rate of 2.5 knots at springs.

7.102 Reef Point (34°24'S., 137°27'E.), lying about 3.25

miles NNE of Island Point, is a low projection with a reddish

cliff on its W side and a remarkable white sand patch about 0.4

mile S of it. Drying ledges and a sunken reef extend 0.5 mile

NW from it. 

7.102 A number of detached rocks, which generally break at LW,

Wardang Island Light
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 187

Pub. 175

extend about 2 miles N from the point. The coast between Reef

Point and Point Warrenne, about 5.25 miles NNE, is low and

forms a sandy shallow bay obstructed by numerous rocks and

shoals. A drying flat extends about 0.5 mile offshore in the S

part of the bay. 

7.102 Point Warrenne (Balgowan Point) (34°19'S., 137°29'E.) is a

low rocky projection with a grassy summit. A disused jetty extends about 138m W from the point. A reef lies about 0.1 mile

W of the jetty. 

7.102 The coast extends N for 3.25 miles from Point Warrenne to

some low red cliffs at the head of a small open bay; this section

of coast consists of red cliffs that rise, in one place, to a height

of 16.5m. 

7.102 The coast N of the bay consists of sandy beach extending 4

miles N to some bare white sand hills. From these hills a continuation of the sandy beach extends 3.5 miles NNW to Cape

Elizabeth, and is bordered by rocky ledges, which in some

places extend up to 0.5 mile offshore. 

7.102 Directions.—When traveling N up the coast between Island

Point and Cape Elizabeth, small vessels usually keep close inshore. Larger vessels should not approach the bay N of Reef

Point within a distance of 2 miles, as the depths shoal rapidly,

in some places, from 11m to 1.8m. 

7.102 There is no good holding ground along this coast and anchorage is not recommended. 

7.103 Cape Elizabeth (34°08'S., 137°27'E.), a rounded

sandy point, lies 11 miles N of Point Warrenne. It is covered

with sparse vegetation and has a small cliffy point NE of it.

Some bush-covered sand hills, which from seaward appear as

separate elevations, the highest being 21.3m high, rise close S

of the cape. 

7.103 The land behind the cape is very low, level, and grassy. A

drying ledge extends about 0.3 mile W from Cape Elizabeth. A

dangerous rocky patch lies awash about 0.4 mile NW of Cape

Elizabeth; the outer edge of this patch lies about 0.4 mile farther NW and is marked by a beacon. A dangerous wreck lies 2

miles WNW of the cape. 

7.103 The 3.6m channel between the rocky patch and Cape Elizabeth should not be used because the currents are strong and attain a rate of 3 knots. 

7.103 A rocky patch, with a least depth of 4.1m, lies almost 1.25

miles NNE of Cape Elizabeth,.

7.103 Tiparra Bay (34°04'S., 137°30'E.) lies between Cape Elizabeth and Warburton Point, about 8.25 miles NNE. Tiparra Reef

divides the entrance into two parts. 

7.103 Port Hughes lies in the middle of the E shore of the bay; Port

Moonta lies about 1.5 miles NNE of Port Hughes. 

7.103 Tiparra Bay has general depths of 5.5 to 11m. The land in the

vicinity of Tiparra Bay presents no prominent features. When

viewed from about 10 miles offshore, the outline of the land

appears almost straight and uniformly dark in color. The objects on the coast are generally low and are not easily seen. 

7.103 Tiparra Reef (34°04'S., 137°24'E.) is a bank of sand, 2.5

miles in extent, with depths of less than 5m, that lies in the

middle of Tiparra Bay. A limestone ledge, 0.1 mile long in a NS direction and about 20m wide, that just dries, lies on the SW

end of the reef 5 miles NW of Cape Elizabeth. A light is shown

from the drying ledge.

7.103 Two patches, which almost dry, lie on the reef NNE and N of

Tiparra Reef Light. Unless the wind force is very high, there is

only a slight break on the drying ledge. Some of the shallow

parts may show white where the sand is clear of weeds. 

7.103 When navigating seaward of Tiparra Reef, vessels should

keep in depths of not less than 12.8m. The entire S shore of the

bay is fronted by drying sand flats. The bight in the SE part of

the bay is backed by salt swamps. A sand hill, 30.5m high, is

located close to the coast about 4 miles ENE of Cape Elizabeth. Although this hill is partly covered with bushes, it may be

identified by a bare space on its side; when viewed from the N

part of the bay, this hill appears like a point. A drying rocky

ledge extends off a point about 0.75 mile NNE of the 30.5m

sand hill, and a sandy beach lies between this drying ledge and

Middle Point.

7.104 Middle Point (34°05'S., 137°33'E.), almost 6 miles

NE of Cape Elizabeth, is a rocky projection with a smooth

grassy summit. The small town of Port Hughes lies on Middle

Point. 

7.104 The coast up to 2 miles NNE of Middle Point consists of

sandy red cliffs fronted by rocky ledges that dry. Because of

the rolling character of the country in this vicinity, the buildings of the Moonta Mines, about 3 miles inland, can be seen

from a W direction. A 32m hill stands close to the coast almost

1.5 miles NNE of Middle Point; Port Moonta lies close N of

this hill. A sandy beach extends NNW for about 2.5 miles from

Port Moonta to the inner end of Warburton Point. 

7.104 Warburton Point (Warburto Point) (34°01'S., 137°30'E.),

about 4.25 miles NNW of Middle Point, is a rocky projection

that extends about 1.5 miles W from the mainland. It is 6.1m

high and is fringed by mangroves along each of its sides. The

point is marked by a light.

7.104 A shoal, with depths of less than 5m, extends about 1.75

miles S, almost 3.5 miles W, and 2.5 miles NW from Warburton Point. The S part of this shoal has been reported to be extending S. 

7.104 A shoal, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 4 miles SW of Warburton Point. 

7.104 The tidal currents in the vicinity of Cape Elizabeth, Tiparra

Reef, and Warburton Point are irregular and rapid. Off Cape

Elizabeth, the flood sets NW and the ebb SW, at a rate of 2

knots. Over Tiparra Reef, the flood sets NNE and the ebb SSW,

at a rate of 2 knots; outside the reef, the currents set in a more

N and S direction. In Tiparra Bay, the currents generally follow

the direction of the shore; the inshore currents are not as strong

as those outside the bay. 

Tiparra Reef Light
188 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

7.104 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor about 0.5 mile off Port

Hughes, in depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, or about 1 mile off Port

Moonta in the same depths.

7.104 During SW gales, good anchorage can be taken, in a depth of

8.2m, mud, in the S part of Tipara Bay, with the N end of Cape

Elizabeth bearing 238°, and the 30.5m sandhill about 4 miles

ENE of that cape bearing 092°.

7.104 Directions.—A vessel approaching from the W should not

bring Cape Elizabeth to bear more than 128° until at least 1

mile S of Tiparra Reef Light. A course can then be steered for

Port Hughes Jetty or the anchorage. 

7.104 Small craft approaching from the S, having passed W of the

buoy off Cape Elizabeth, may enter the bay in a least depth of

7.3m, with the 30m sand hill 4 miles ENE of Cape Elizabeth

bearing 084°. Local knowledge is essential. 

7.104 Vessels of light draft may use the entrance between the bank

extending from Warburton Point and Tiparra Reef; the 30m

sand hill is a good mark on which to steer. Care should be taken to avoid the detached 5.5m patch 4 miles SW of Warburton

Point. 

7.104 If passing through Tiparra Bay, using the inner route to Wallaroo, pass W of the beacon off Cape Elizabeth, 2 miles E of

Tiparra Reef Light, and 0.5 mile W of the W extremity of the

5m bank extending from Warburton Point. The depths on this

track are not less than 7.3m. 

7.105 Port Hughes (34°05'S., 137°33'E.), a small township

and fishing port, lies on Middle Point. Moonta, an old coppermining center and the center of a large wheat-growing area,

lies 3 miles inland from Port Hughes. Port Hughes Jetty extends 412m from Middle Point and has a depth of 6.1m alongside its head. The jetty is closed to commercial shipping. 

7.105 Port Moonta (34°04'S., 137°33'E.), another fishing port, situated 1.5 miles NNE of Port Hughes, has a jetty 503m long,

with a depth of 2.1m alongside. 

7.105 The coast between Warburton Point and Hughes Point, about

6.25 miles NE, consists of a low, sandy beach partly fringed by

mangroves. Rocky ledges and drying sand flats front this section of coast. These drying flats extend as far as 1.5 miles offshore at Bird Reef, a rocky ledge located on the outer edge of

these flats about 2.25 miles NNE of Warburton Point. East of

Bird Reef, the flat narrows and its outer edge lies close offshore at Hughes Point. Bird Reef is awash at HW.

7.105 ThebBird Islands, between Bird Reef and the coast, are low

and covered with mangroves. Bird Islands have been reported

to be a good radar target at distances up to 22 miles.

7.106 Walrus Rock (34°00'S., 137°30'E.), a dangerous

rocky patch with depths of not more 0.3m in places, lies almost

1 mile NNW of Warburton Point. Although there are strong

tide rips over the rock, the sea does not break over it in ordinary weather. A small rock, with a depth of 1.2m, lies almost 1

mile NW of Walrus Rock. The outer edge of the large shoal,

with depths of less than 5m, that extends from Warburton

Point, lies up to 2.5 miles offshore NW of that point. The outer

edge then follows a general NE trend of the coast until the

shoal terminates in a narrow spit about 2 miles W of Hughes

Point. 

7.106 A small 5m patch lies about 2.5 miles WSW of Hughes

Point. 

7.106 Hughes Point (33°56'S., 137°36'E.), about 6.25 miles NE of

Warburton Point, is a red cliffy projection, 7.6m high; a 15.8m

hill rises close to the coast about 0.25 mile SW of the point.

Hughes Point cannot be distinguished as a point, and appears

only as a small red patch on the coast, until viewed from a position near the anchorage off Wallaroo.

7.106 Wallaroo Bay (33°55'S., 137°35'E.), is formed by a bight in

the coast which lies between Point Hughes and Point Riley,

about 3.5 miles to the N. The town of Wallaroo lies on the SE

shore of this bay. 

7.106 Point Riley (33°53'S., 137°36'E.), 13.7m high, is a cliffy

projection fringed by rocky ledges that extend about 0.25 mile

offshore. This point is not easily made out until well in, either

N or S of it, because the land which backs it is much higher

than the point.

7.107 Wallaroo (33°56'S., 137°37'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54280), which contains the town and port facilities for the

loading of bulk cargo, lies in the SE part of Wallaroo Bay. It is

a small commercial port and a first port of entry. Alongside

berthing facilities are provided for handling ocean-going vessels. 

7.107 Winds—Weather.—There are no prevailing winds from

August to November; the wind shifts around the compass every

3 or 4 days. After a day of calms, or land and sea breezes, the

former from the E, and the latter from the SW, the wind may

shift to the N, accompanied by a clear sky, a falling barometer,

and the land on the opposite side of Spencer Gulf coming into

view because of the mirage effect. 

7.107 If the wind shifts to the NW, and the sky becomes overcast,

and the barometer does not rise, a gale may be expected. When

the barometer begins to rise, the wind shifts to the W or SW

and the sky becomes clear. 

7.107 When the wind shifts to SW or W and then back to NW

again, some heavy weather, which sometimes lasts two or three

days, can be expected. 

7.107 The N wind is very hot, even in the winter, and the shift of

the wind to the W sometimes brings heavy squalls accompanied by thunder and lightning. If the wind shifts from N to SW,

and does not shift back, and the barometer suddenly rises, the

weather remains fine. 

7.107 From November to March the prevailing winds are from the

S or SW, sometimes continuing for weeks on end in Spencer

Gulf, with land and sea breezes inshore. The SW wind is sometimes very fresh, but occasionally it is interrupted by a day or

two of hot winds from the N. The barometer is a very good

guide, and rises rapidly as a gale shifts to the SW and the wind

soon subsides. 

7.107 Tides—Currents.—The mean range of the tide is 0.8m; the

spring range is 1.5m. 

7.107 Outside a line drawn between Hughes Point and Point Riley,

the flood sets to the NE and the ebb sets to the SW; a W gale

causes a N setting current of long duration, and stops the S setting current altogether. The tidal currents are barely felt at the

anchorage NW of New Jetty, but a strong W wind causes a set

Flinders Ports South Australia

http://www.flindersports.com.au/about_loc_wall.htm
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 189

Pub. 175

to windward. 

7.107 Depths—Limitations.—A broad flat, with depths of less

than 9.1m, fronts the bay to a distance of about 4 miles from its

head; the seaward edge of this flat is fairly steep-to. The outer

edge of this flat forms a bar, with a least depth of 8.2m in the

fairway of the channel over it. East of this bar, the depths increase slightly and there are depths of over 9m about 1 mile W

of the head of the bay. The 5m curve lies from 0.15 to 0.4 mile

off the shores of the bay. 

7.107 The dredged approach channel to Wallaroo is approximately

4 miles long, with a depth of 8.5m. It is marked on its seaward

side by Entrance Lighted Beacon, then by lighted beacons,

mostly in pairs. 

7.107 Moonta Shoal (33°54'S., 137°36'E.), with a depth of 4.6m,

lies to the N of the fairway, about 1.5 miles SW of Point Riley. 

7.107 Riley Shoal (33°54'S., 137°35'E.), with a least depth of

3.6m, lies about 1 mile WSW of Point Riley. The shoal is composed of hard sand, and its shallowest part appears white because of the absence of weed, which covers the sandy bottom

in other parts of the bay. 

7.107 The depths for some distance seaward of Point Riley are

very irregular. Depths of 4.1 to 6.4m lie between Riley Shoal

and Point Riley. A rocky shoal, with a depth of 4.9m, lies 0.75

mile NW of Point Riley; a detached 5m patch lies about 0.2

mile SW of this shoal. 

7.107 Wallaroo Jetty has three berths on either side, extending over

a length of 440m. Depths alongside ranged from 9.5m at the

outer berths to 7.3m at the inner berths. A spur jetty used as a

fishing wharf projects from the N side of the main jetty.

7.107 Vessels up to 65,000 dwt, with lengths up to 200m, can be

accommodated. 

7.107 Vessels normally enter only during daylight hours. Vessels

with a draft of less than 8.5m must have an underkeel clearance

of 0.6m; vessels with a draft greater than 8.5m must have an

underkeel clearance of 0.75m. 

7.107 Aspect.—Two lighted beacons, in range bearing 120°30',

stand W of Wallaroo Jetty.

7.107 A square chimney, 43m high, built of light-colored bricks,

and which is the E of several chimneys at the Wallaroo smelting works, is prominent; rising higher than the surrounding

country, it may be seen over Warburton Point. During the mirage, which is frequent with N winds, it has been seen distinctly from a position off Cape Elizabeth, a distance of 15 miles. 

7.107 The large grain silos near the root of Wallaroo Jetty are conspicuous. 

7.107 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels. The

pilot will board about 1.5 miles W of Channel Entrance Beacon. 

7.107 Pilots should be requested from the harbormaster at least 2

hours in advance; if the pilot is required outside normal working hours, the request should be made at least 4 hours in advance. The pilot vessel is equipped with radiotelephone.

7.107 Regulations.—Vessels should send thier ETA 24 hours and

4 hours prior to arrival.

7.107 Signals.—Australian weather forecast signals for severe

gales are displayed at Wallaroo. 

7.107 Anchorage.—Good secure anchorage can be taken, in a

depth of about 9m, about 0.75 mile NW of the outerend of

Wallaroo Jetty. Although the bay is open, the force of the sea is

well broken at the anchorage; with suitable light the bottom

shows very clearly in the approaches, the weeds on the bottom

appearing like rocks with white sand between them. 

7.107 The quarantine anchorage is defined by a line between Point

Hughes and Point Riley. 

7.107 Directions.—When approaching from the S, proceed to

round Tiparra Reef at a distance of about 3 miles keeping in

depths of not less than 12.8m. When the 43m chimney at Wallaroo bears 112°, steer for it on that bearing to the pilot boarding station. A vessel using the inner passage, through Tiparra

Bay should pass W of the beacon off Cape Elizabeth, avoiding

the rocky patch and dangerous wreck off that cape, then about

2 miles E of the light on Tiparra Reef, and then about 0.5 mile

W of the W extremity of the 5.5m shoal that extends W from

Warburton Point. The depths along this track are not less than

7.3m. 

7.107 Caution.—A high pressure system in the Bight of Australia

may cause tides to be lower than predicted; a low pressure system may cause tides to be higher than predicted.

7.108 The coast extends NE for 3.75 miles from Point Riley

to Myponie Point (Tickera Point), which is marked by a clear

grassy space that looks like the face of a cliff. The coast then

extends NE for 3.25 miles to the S point of Tickera Bay. The

entire stretch of coast between Point Riley and Tickera Bay is

rocky and bordered by limestone cliffs. 

7.108 Tickera Bay (33°46'S., 137°42'E.) is a slight indentation

with a smooth sandy beach fringed by sand flats. A red cliff,

13.4m high, with some huts to the S of it, is located about midway along the shore of the bay. 

7.108 Anchorage, sheltered from winds S of SW, may be taken

about 1 mile offshore in Tickera Bay, in a depth of 5.5m, with

the huts bearing 174°. This anchorage is partially protected on

its W side by a spit, with depths of less than 5m, that extends

about 2.75 miles NNW from the S part of the shore of the bay. 

7.108 The coast for 12 miles NE of the 13.4m cliff at Tickera Bay

is formed by a sandy beach; from there to Mundoora Arm, the

S arm of the Hamilton Lagoons, the coast is low. This section

of coast is fronted by a flat which dries up to 2 miles offshore. 

7.108 Webling Point (33°37'S., 137°52'E.), about 21 miles NE of

Point Riley, is thickly covered with vegetation. A reddish bank,

15.2m high, stands close N of the point, which is higher than

any of the land to the N of it. 

7.108 The Hamilton Lagoons (33°35'S., 137°55'E.) consist of two

inlets, named Mundoora Arm to the S and Fisherman Bay

(Mundoora Bay) to the N. Both lagoons, which nearly dry, are

surrounded by swampy land except on their E sides, which are

thickly wooded. 

7.108 The entrance of Fisherman Bay is plainly visible from seaward, there being a red cliff on its N side and a small mangrove

islet about 1 mile W of it; the channel of this bay dries. 

7.108 Mundoora Channel, leading to the jetty at Port Broughton, is

marked by beacons. It has been dredged to a depth of 3m, over

a width of about 20m. An artificial reef of automobile bodies,

with a least depth over it of 4.5m, lies 1.25 miles NW of the

channel entrance and is marked by a buoy.

7.108 Anchorage, with good holding ground, can be taken about 2

miles W of Port Broughton Light, in a depth of 10.1m. 

7.109 Port Broughton (33°36'S., 137°55'E.) lies on the E

side of Mundoora Arm, just inside the entrance. Port Brought-
190 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

on Jetty, which is about 366m long, has a T-head with depths of

2.4m alongside; there is a turning basin, 90m in extent, off the

jetty. The jetty is now closed to commercial shipping and used

only by fishing craft. 

7.109 Directions.—When approaching from the S, pass about 4

miles W of Point Riley and steer for a position 5 miles WNW

of Port Broughton Light, keeping in depths of more than 11m. 

7.109 Barn Hill (33°35'S., 138°08'E.), bearing 101°, leads up to

the entrance of Mundoora Channel. The coast between the entrance of Fisherman Bay and Wood Point, a low sandy projection about 12 miles N of Webling Point, consists of a sandy

beach backed by low swampy land. The sand flat that fronts

this coast dries up to 4 miles seaward of Wood Point. 

7.109 Aspect.—The summit of a hill, which can be seen from

Spencer Gulf, stands 25.5 miles E of Point Riley; a range of

hills, reddish brown in color during the summer months, extends about 30 miles N from this hill. 

7.109 Barn Hill rises to an elevation of 356m about 11 miles E of

Webling Point; this conspicuous hill has a flat top, is barren,

and has a saddle with a small peak close N of it. With the exception of Barn Hill, the other hills are too far inland to be easily identified. 

7.109 Middle Bank (33°38'S., 137°34'E.), with a least known

depth of 5.2m, extends about 13 miles N from a position about

10 miles NNW of Point Riley.

7.109 A light is shown from a structure standing about 16 miles

NNW of Point Riley and marking the center of the bank. The S

extremity of the bank is marked by a lighted beacon, with a racon standing about 10 miles NW of Point Riley. There are general depths of 6.1 to 8.2m over most of this bank with the least

depths near the center of the E side, NE and SE of the light. 

7.109 A 7.3m shoal lies about 2 miles NW of the N extremity of

the bank. A line of shoals, with depths of 8.5 to 10m, lies in a

N-S direction from 6.5 to 8.75 miles NNW of Middle Bank

Light. 

7.109 It should be noted that several patches were reported to lie N

and NW of Middle Bank, but were found to be non-existent or

inaccurately charted during recent surveys. 

7.109 To the E of Middle Bank, a shoal spit, with depths of less

than 9.1m, extends about 14.5 miles NE in the direction of

Wood Point from a position about 5.25 miles ESE of Middle

Bank Light; it has depths of 8.5m near its S end. 

7.109 An 8.5m patch and a 9.1m patch lie about 2 miles S and 1

mile ESE, respectively, of the S end of the shoal spit; these

patches lie in the track of vessels approaching Port Broughton. 

7.109 The channel between Middle Bank and the above shoal spit

is obstructed by an 8.2m patch that lies 1 mile NW of the S end

of the spit. Use of this channel is not recommended by deepdraft vessels.

7.110 Point Jarrold (33°16'S., 137°49'E.), about 8 miles

NNW of Wood Point, is a low sandy projection. The sand and

mud flats that border the coast between Wood Point and Point

Jarrold dry up to 1.75 miles seaward of Point Jarrold. 

7.110 The coast extends NNE for 3.5 miles from Point Jarrold to a

mangrove point which is the S point of Germein Bay. This section of coast consists of mangroves backed by low partially

flooded land; drying sand and mud flats extend up to 1.5 miles

offshore. 

7.110 The sand and mud flats that front the coast between the entrance of Port Broughton and the entrance of Germein Bay are

fronted by shallow water. The 10m curve extends in a general

N direction from a position about 7.75 miles W of Wood Point

to a position about 5 miles NW of Jarrold Point.

7.110 Yarraville Shoals (33°17'S., 137°36'E.), about 4.75 miles

long and 2.75 miles wide, lies centered about 10.5 miles W of

Point Jarrold. These shoals, with depths of less than 11m, have

a least depth of 6.4m and are marked by a lighted beacon. 

7.110 Musgrave Shoal (33°15'S., 137°39'E.), about 1 mile NE of

Yarraville Shoals, is almost 3 miles long and 0.75 mile wide.

This shoal has a least depth of 5.2m in its central part. 

7.110 Eastern Shoal (33°08'S., 137°46'E.) lies with its S end

about 1.5 miles ENE of Musgrave Shoal and extends about

10.5 miles NE. Depths over this shoal range from 5.8m at the S

end to a drying patch near its NE end. The shoal is marked by

lighted beacons at its N and S ends.

7.110 A detached shoal, with depths of less than 5m and with a

1.8m patch near its center, lies about 6.5 miles N of Jarrold

Point and is marked by a pile beacon. 

7.110 A similar shoal, with a least depth of 3.3m, lies centered

about 8.5 miles N of the same point and is marked by a buoy on

the N side.

7.110 A detached shoal, with a least depth of 1.5m, lies centered

about 3.5 miles ESE of the lighted beacon on the N end of

Eastern Shoal and is marked by a beacon. 

7.110 A clear channel, about 3 miles wide and with depths of 11 to

20.1m, lies between Eastern Shoal and Fairway Bank to the

NW. The channel is marked by lighted buoys.

7.111 Germein Bay (33°05'S., 137°55'E.) lies between a

mangrove swamp fronted by sand and mud, extending NE of

Point Jarrold and Ward Spit, a drying shoal which extends 5.5

miles W from Ward Point (33°01'S., 137°57'E.). Ward Spit is

marked by a light shown from a structure about 6.5 miles

WSW of Ward Point and a lighted beacon situated 2.75 miles E

of the light structure. 

7.111 The approaches to the bay and the bay itself are fouled by

numerous shoals, banks, and shallow depths. 

7.111 Port Germein lies in the N side of the bay; the dredged channel that leads to Port Pirie is in the SE part of the bay. 

7.111 Cockle Spit (33°04'S., 137°56'E.), a detached shoal with

depths of less than 5m and with a central part which dries, lies

in the middle of Germein Bay. Cockle Spit is marked on the N

side by a light shown from a structure about 2.75 miles SSW of

Ward Point and on the S side by a beacon. 

Middle Bank Light
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 191

Pub. 175

7.111 The S shore of Germein Bay consists of thick mangroves

with partially-flooded land behind; it is bordered by drying

sand and mud flats, which dry for a distance of 1 mile. 

7.111 Mount Ferguson (33°06'S., 138°02'E.), a rounded grassy

hill, isolated by a swamp, rises to an elevation of 41m on the E

shore of the S part of the bay. The low country behind the hill is

thickly wooded for about 3 miles inland and rises to the

Flinders Range. Mount Ferguson shows up well against the

dark vegetation that covers the slopes of the Flinders Range,

near The Bluff, 700m high, 6 miles inland. A light is shown in

the vicinity of Mount Ferguson. 

7.111 From a position 1 mile NE of Mount Ferguson, a sandy

beach and drying sand flat curves round the NE part of the bay

to Ward Point. 

7.112 Germein (33°02'S., 138°00'E.), a town and a former

port, lies 5 miles NNW of Mount Ferguson. A jetty extends

from the shore abreast of the town. Lighted beacons stand 1.5

miles W and 1.25 miles WSW of the jetty head, which is

marked by a light.

7.112 Channels.—Two channels lead into Germein Bay. The N

channel, which is lighted, is the principal fairway. It passes between the N end of Eastern Shoal and Ward Spit, where there is

a least depth of 6.4m in the fairway, over a width of about 2

miles, this being the least depth to within 2 miles of Port Germein Jetty. From a position between Eastern Shoal and Ward

Spit, the channel leads N of Cockle Spit, and then directy to

Port Germein Jetty. A fish haven, with a least depth of 3m, lies

1 mile SSE of the head of Port Germein Jetty. 

7.112 A channel, with a controlling depth of 6.4m, leads SSE from

a position about 1.75 miles W of the head the jetty, passing between Cockle Spit and the shoal water extending from the E

shore of the bay, to the entrance of the dredged channel leading

into Port Pirie. 

7.112 The Port Pirie Entrance Lighted Beacon stands about 1.5

miles E of the light marking the N side of Cockle Spit. 

7.112 The S channel, for which local knowledge is necessary, passes between Eastern Shoal and the two shoals to the ESE, then S

of the 1.5m shoal that lies WSW of Cockle Spit, and S of the

beacon marking the S side of Cockle Spit. 

7.112 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 5.5 to 7.3m, S of Ward

Point, with the outer end of Port Germein Jetty bearing 084°,

distant 1.5 miles. Larger vessels may anchor on the same bearing, distant about 2.5 miles. Anchorage may also be found

about 1.5 miles NW of the lighted beacon marking the N end

of Eastern Shoal.

7.112 Vessels proceeding to Port Pirie, but wishing to anchor off

the port first, should anchor as above, or off the entrance of the

dredged channel into Port Pirie, taking care to anchor clear of

the fairway in the approach to that channel.

7.112 Directions.—In the approach to Germein Bay, after a few

days of fine weather, the water becomes clear and the shoals

can be seen, but during and after foul weather the disturbed

mud and sand obscures the bottom and the deepest water is often the most discolored. 

7.112 Allowance must be made for the tidal currents, which set obliquely across the N channel, the flood setting NE and the ebb

SW, at a rate of 1.5 knots at springs. 

7.112 Entering Germein Bay by the N entrance, pass midway between the lighted beacon marking the N end of Eastern Shoal

and Ward Spit Light, and then steering a mid-channel course

toward Port Germein Jetty. 

7.112 If bound for Port Pirie, after passing Cockle Spit, steer to

pass between the lighted beacon standing 1.25 miles WSW of

the Port Germein Jetty head and the Port Pirie Entrance Lighted Beacon, then steer to pass between the lighted beacons

marking the dredged channel to the port. 

7.112 Local knowledge is essential for entering by the S channel; it

is also necessary for the approach to Port Pirie. 

7.112 At night, the white sector of Port Germein Jetty Light covers

the fairway between Ward Spit and Cockle Spit.

7.113 Port Pirie (33°11'S., 138°01'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54290), the principal port for the mines at Broken Hill,

some 250 miles NE, lies on the W side of a tidal inlet at the SE

end of Germein Bay. The chief exports are ores, concentrates,

and grain. Port Pirie is a first port of entry. 

7.113 Winds—Weather.—Prevailing winds are from the NNE to

NW. During January and February, freak thunderstorms, with

winds of 40 to 50 knots, may occur.

7.113 Tides—Currents.—Neap tides rise 1.7m; springs rise 2.7m.

Strong W or N winds can affect the tides.

7.113 Depths—Limitations.—The channel leading to Port Pirie

from the E side of Germein Bay is dredged to a depth of 6.4m,

and is marked by pairs of lighted beacons throughout its length,

numbered from seaward. A tide gauge on Lighted Beacon No.

7, on the W side of the channel, displays depths above chart datum. 

7.113 Three sets of ranges indicate the approach into the channel,

harbor, and swinging basin. The speed of vessels in the harbor

S of Lighted Beacon No. 43 shall not exceed 4 knots. 

7.113 Berths are all on the W side of the harbor and are numbered

from 1 to 11, commencing at the inner end. 

Flinders Ports South Australia 

http://www.flindersports.com.au/about_loc_pir.htm

Port Pirie Berth Information

Berth Length Depth Remarks

No. 1 152m 11.3m Fishing and recreation

No. 2 190m 8.2m Grain

No. 3 198m 7.3m Oil

No. 4 107m 5.8m Tug berth

No. 5 198m 8.2m General

No. 6 183m 8.2m Ore exports

No. 7 145m 8.2m General cargo and 

containers

No. 8 180m 8.2m Lead exports

No. 9 180m 8.2m Lead and coal

No. 10 158m 8.2m Bulk imports

No. 11 46m 3.7m Acid
192 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

7.113 Berth No. 3, a 198m long T-head jetty with dolphins at each

end, and a depth of 7.3m alongside, is the oil berth. 

7.113 Berth No. 5 through Berth No. 10, inclusive, consist of a

1,043m long continuous wharf, which has been dredged to a

depth of 8.2m throughout. Berth No. 5 and Berth No. 6 are

equipped with ore loaders. 

7.113 An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 54m,

crosses the channel between Berth No. 7 and Berth No. 8. 

7.113 Berth No. 8, Berth No. 9, and Berth No. 10 are smelting factory berths; coke is discharged at Berth No. 10. 

7.113 Berth No. 11, 46m long, with a depth of 3.7m alongside, is

the acid loading berth. 

7.113 Vessels of up to 42,500 dwt can be accommodated within the

port. The maximum length of vessels is 183m, with a maximum beam of 30.5m. An underkeel clearance of 0.9m is required. 

7.113 A small craft basin, dredged to a depth of 2.1m, is situated at

the S end of the main berths. 

7.113 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all non-exempt vessels. Pilots should be requested from the harbormaster at least

3 hours in advance; if the pilot is required outside normal

working hours, the request should be made at least 5 hours in

advance. Pilots board in the vicinity of the Port Pirie Pilot

Boarding Ground (33°05'S., 137°46'E.). 

7.113 The pilot vessel is equipped with VHF radio. 

7.113 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA at the lighted

beacon marking the N end of Eastern Shoal 24 hours and 4

hours in advance.

7.113 Vessels bound for Port Pirie and requiring to discharge solid

ballast must do so in False Bay. Clean water ballast may be discharged in the harbor.

7.113 Caution.—Vessels with a length greater than 180m can enter or leave during daylight hours only. Vessels with a length of

180m or less can enter or leave at any time.

Spencer Gulf—Upper Part

7.114 The upper part of Spencer Gulf extends about 36

miles N from Lowly Point, on the W side, and Ward Point, on

the E side. 

7.114 Port Augusta (32°30'S., 137°46'E.), described in paragraph

7.121, lies about 4 miles S of the head of the gulf. The port

stands on both the E and W side of the upper gulf. There is a

least depth of 8.8m in the fairway of the channel for a distance

of about 10 miles N of the entrance of this part of the gulf. Farther N the channel narrows, and there is a least depth of 9.1m

in the fairway for a distance for about 15 miles farther N to

near the N end of Bluff Reach. North of Bluff Reach, the channel again narrows and there is a least depth of 4.9m in the fairway, which is only 61m wide in places, as far as Port Augusta.

About 3 miles N of Port Augusta, the channel dries, and a salt

swamp extend farther N for a considerable distance. 

7.114 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents, which turn at about

the time of high and low water, generally set in the direction of

the channel at a rate of 1.5 to 2 knots. However, S of Douglas

Bank, the flood sets NW across the channel and the ebb sets

SE. In the vicinity of East Sands, the currents also set across

the main channel. 

7.114 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in any part of the upper reaches of the gulf S of Douglas Bank according to draft.

The most convenient anchorage lies off the E shore, in a depth

of 11m, where the current is less than in the deeper water along

the W shore. 

7.114 Anchorage is recommended in Backy Bay, in depths of 7.3

to 11m, with Lowly Point bearing 179°, distant 3 miles. 

7.114 From May to September, when strong N and W winds are

frequent, better shelter can be obtained, in depths of 10 to 11m,

near the head of the bay, with Backy Point bearing between

050° and 072°, distant about 1 mile. In this position the current

is negligible. 

7.114 During strong SE winds which prevail from December to

March, a vessel seeking anchorage for the night or awaiting a

tide should anchor in the lee of Ward Spit, in a depth of 11m,

when N of the entrance. 

7.114 Vessels are warned of the existence of a 4.9m shoal 5 miles

NE of Lowly Point and an 8.8m shoal about 4 miles ENE of

Lowly Point. 

7.114 Variations in sea level.—Significant changes in normal sea

level occur in the N part of Spencer Gulf with the passing of a

deep depression across the Great Australian Bight from Cape

Leeuwin to Tasmania. The sea level is lowered with the onset

of N winds, as the barometer starts falling; but, as the wind

backs to the NW, an increase in level occurs. There will be a

gradual build-up if the wind remains steady. A strong, gusty

NW wind, with such a depression, backing to WSW at about

the time of low water, will cause the highest storm surge, and

heights of 0.6m to 1.5m above predictions may be expected.

These high levels will continue until the wind backs further

and the barometer starts to rise. Unless the depression’s passage is blocked, the wind usually backs rapidly to the SSE

within 12 hours, and, with a rapidly rising barometer, the sea

level returns to normal in about the same time.

7.114 Caution.—A submarine gas pipeline crosses the gulf from a

position about 0.5 mile S of Douglas Point (32°51'S.,

137°49'E.), on the W shore of the gulf, to a position on the E

shore of the gulf close NW of Mount Mambray (32°52'S.,

137°56'E.).

7.115 West shore.—Lowly Point Shoal (32°59'S.,

137°48'E.), with a least depth of 3.1m, lies almost 1 mile NNE

of Lowly Point.

7.115 The coast between Lowly Point and the head of Fitzgerald

Bay (Backy Bay), about 5.5 miles NNW, is bordered by low

whitish cliffs and stony beaches, with mangroves after the first

3 miles; between 1 and 4 miles from Lowly Point, the whitish

cliffs are backed by a ridge of hills, about 100m high. 

7.115 The 5m curve lies within a distance of 0.25 mile of this

coast, to within about 1 mile of the head of Fitzgerald Bay. A

hard sand flat, which dries, extends about 0.5 mile from the

head of the bay; shallow water extends about 0.25 mile beyond

the flats. 

7.115 A shoal, with a least depth of 7.6m, lies about 3 miles N of

Lowly Point Bight. A 4.9m shoal lies 5 miles NE of the same

point. 

7.115 Backy Point (32°55'S., 137°47'E.), about 5 miles N of Lowly Point, is a bold, rocky, black projection, 54m high; it may be

approached to a distance of 0.1 mile, but there is a race off it. 

7.115 Between Backy Point and Crag Point, about 1.5 miles NNE,

the coast is bold, broken, and rocky; it is backed by grassy

hills, the highest of which is 103m, about 1 mile NNW of
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 193

Pub. 175

Backy Point. 

7.115 Depths of 10.1 and 10.4m lie about 0.75 and 2.25 miles, respectively, SE of Backy Point. Two small bays lie within a distance of 2.25 miles NNE of Crag Point. Both bays are fouled

by hard, drying sand flats. Depths of less than 5m lie within 0.5

mile seaward of these flats. 

7.116 Douglas Point (32°51'S., 137°49'E.), about 2.5 miles

NNE of Crag Point, is rocky, and backed by a low black cliff.

Douglas Hills, which stand NW of the point, are separated by

rocky ravines. A hill, 199m high, with a stone cairn on it,

stands 2 miles NW of Douglas Point.

7.116 The coast for 3.25 miles N from a position 2.5 miles N of

Douglas Point consists of thick mangroves with low land behind them; a drying, hard sand flat extends up to 0.5 mile offshore.

7.116 Douglas Bank (32°48'S., 137°50'E.), with a least depth of

2.2m, lies about 2.75 miles N of Douglas Point. It is steep-to

on its W side, but the depths increase gradually to 11m about

0.5 mile off its E side and 0.75 mile off its S side. A shoal area,

having depths of less than 10m, lies 1 mile W of the S end of

Douglas Bank.

7.116 A clear channel about 0.5 mile wide between the 10m curves

lies W of Douglas Bank, but the principal channel lies off its E

side. 

7.116 Backy Point bearing 202° leads SE of Douglas Bank; the N

extremity of Two Hummock Point bearing 340° leads NE of

the bank. 

7.116 Two Hummock Point (32°45'S., 137°48'E.) stands about

6.25 miles N of Douglas Point. It is a low, broad projection

with alternate rock and sandy beach. South Hummock stands

on the point and North Hummock, 29m high, stands about 0.75

mile NNW of South Hummock. A third hummock stands 1.25

miles WSW of South Hummock. A drying sand flat fronts Two

Hummock Point to a distance of almost 0.5 mile. 

7.116 A shoal, with a depth of 5m, lies 0.3 mile E of Lighted Beacon No. 4, which marks the outer edge of the sand flat fronting

Two Hummock Point. 

7.116 Two Hummock Spit (32°46'S., 137°49'E.), with depths of

less than 5m, extends about 1 mile SE from Two Hummock

Point. A shoal, with a least depth of 6.4m, lies almost 0.75 mile

ENE of the N extremity of Two Hummock Point.

7.117 East shore.—The summits of Flinders Range lie from

8 to 12 miles E of the E shore of the upper part of Spencer

Gulf. The land is mostly low between the coast and the foot of

this range. The most conspicuous summits are Mount Remarkable, Mount Brown and Devil’s Peak; Mount Brown

(32°30'S., 138°00'E.), the highest of the these summits, rises to

a height of 968m, about 30 miles N of Ward Point. On a clear

day this peak is visible for about 60 miles. Other peaks of considerable elevation stand along the ridge of this barren rocky

range, which terminates at Mount Arden.

7.117 The coast for almost 3 miles N of Ward Point is covered with

thick mangroves, but for 7 miles farther N, to the mouth of

Mambray Creek, the coast consists of low sandy beach backed

by scrub-covered level land. 

7.117 Mount Mambray, 34m high, stands 0.75 mile SE of the

mouth of Mambray Creek and is covered with thick scrub. 

7.117 The coast for about 1 mile N from Mambray Creek is covered with thick scrub; farther N, a salt swamp extends to the S

side of Yatala Harbor. 

7.117 Mount Gullet, 64m high, stands 3 miles N of Mount Mambray; it is thickly-covered with scrub and has a broad base with

a round flat top. Mount Mambray and Mount Gullet are the

only conspicuous features near this coast. 

7.117 The coast between Ward Point and Yatala Harbor is fronted

by a hard sand flat, which dries up to 1.5 miles offshore as far

N as Mount Gullet; farther N the sand flat dries to a distance of

about 2.5 miles W of a projecting mangrove point on the S side

of Yatala Harbor, and depths of less than 5m extends as much

as 1.25 miles farther seaward in places. 

7.117 The depths on the E side of the upper part of the gulf are irregular and range from 5.5 to 12.8m; there is a 3.9m patch

about 2.5 miles NW of Ward Point. 

7.117 Yatala Harbor (32°45'S., 137°53'E.), a shallow bight entered between the mangrove point about 3 miles NNW of

Mount Gullet, and a position about 1.75 miles NE, is lined with

mangroves and almost completely obstructed by a flat of sand,

mud, and weeds. 

7.117 The anchorage or navigable part of Yatala Harbor, is a shallow basin about 2 miles in extent. The soundings shown on the

chart are taken from very old surveys and at that time, the harbor appeared to be shoaling. 

7.117 Mount Grainger, 78m high, is a round black-colored hill

covered with bushes which stands about 2.75 miles N of the

above-mentioned mangrove point on the S side of Yatala Harbor. 

7.117 Red Cliff Point (32°42'S., 137°50'E.) lies 3.25 miles WNW

of Mount Grainger; a red cliff, 18.3m high, stands about midway between Mount Grainger and Red Cliff Point.

Approaches to Port Augusta

7.118 Flinders Channel (32°43'S., 137°48'E.) is that part of

the fairway which extends up to 5 miles N from Two Hummock Point. 

7.118 Middle Bank (32°43'S., 137°49'E.), with depths of less than

9.1m and with a least depth of 1.9m, extends about 1.25 miles

NNW from a position about 1.25 miles NE of the N extremity

of Two Hummock Point. 

7.118 There is a clear channel, with depths of 11 to 18.3m, on either side of Middle Bank, but the W channel is preferred. It is

also the more direct channel. 

7.118 The low mangrove coast between Two Hummock Point and

Mangrove Point, about 3 miles to the NW, is bordered by a

hard drying sand bank.

7.118 Blanche Harbor (32°42'S., 137°46'E.), with depths of 1.8 to

3.6m, lies W of a drying spit which extends 1 mile N from

Mangrove Point. Two narrow channels lead into this harbor

which is available only to small craft. 

7.118 West Sands (32°41'S., 137°46'E.), a drying sand bank that

extends almost 1.5 miles NNW from a position about 1.25

miles N of Mangrove Point, fronts the entrance of Blanche

Harbor. A spit, with depths of less than 5m, extends about 0.25

mile E from the S end of West Sands; the NE side of West

Sands may be passed at a distance of 0.25 mile, in depths of at

least 12.8m. A beacon marks the N end of West Sands. 

7.118 Caution.—An obstruction, with a depth of 7m over it, lies in

Flinders Channel, about 0.5 mile N of the beacon. 
194 Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 

Pub. 175

7.119 The E side of Flinders Channel is bordered by drying

sandbanks that cover most of a large bay formed between Red

Cliff Point and Point Paterson, almost 5.75 miles NNW. Dense

mangroves border the shores of this bay up to 3 miles N of Red

Cliff Point, but from there to Point Paterson the shore is low

and swampy. 

7.119 East Sands (32°40'S., 137°48'E.), a large drying bank almost 3 miles long, fronts the S and middle parts of the bay between Red Cliff Point and Point Paterson; it borders the E side

of the N part of Flinders Channel and the S end of Bluff Reach.

East Sands is fairly steep-to abreast Flinders Channel, but at

the S end of Bluff Reach, shallow water extends about 0.5 mile

from it. A shallow bank extends from the NW end of East

Sands. 

7.119 Bluff Reach (32°39'S., 137°46'E.) is the continuation N of

the fairway from Flinders Channel. It extends as far as Commissariat Point, which lies about 6.5 miles N of Mangrove

Point.

7.119 Caution.—At night, a vessel should not enter this reach because there are no lighted aids to mark the channel N of Beacon No. 9, which stands 3.75 miles N of Mangrove Point. A

tide gauge on this beacon indicates the height of the tide above

chart datum. The W shore of this reach consists of a stony

beach fringed by mangroves and backed by Bluff Range, a

range of flat-topped hills. 

7.120 The Bluff (32°37'S., 137°44'E.), the highest hill of

this range, rises to a height of 301m about 5.5 miles NNW of

Mangrove Point. About 4 miles NNW of The Bluff, the range

turns sharply inland. 

7.120 The Sisters, two peaks which stand out well when viewed

from the SE, stand on a detached ridge in the vicinity of this

sharp turn. A drying sand bank fronts the beach and shoal

patches lie off the W side of the reach. The E side of Bluff

Reach is bound, in most places, by drying sand banks.

Port Paterson (32°35'S., 137°48'E.), entered between Point

Paterson and Snapper Point, about 3 miles NNW, is fouled by

very extensive drying sand and mud banks. The shores of the

port are mostly swampy. 

7.120 Port Paterson can be approached through a channel lying between the drying banks near the N end of Bluff Reach. This

channel is available only to vessels with local knowledge. 

7.120 Snapper Reach (32°35'S., 137°47'E.), a continuation of the

fairway N from Bluff Reach, extends as far as Curlew Point, almost 3.75 miles N of Commissariat Point. The channel, with

depths of 5.2 to 9.2m, is closely bound by banks on each side

that dry at half tide. The channel is not less than 0.2 mile wide

in most places, but near its N end it narrows to a least width of

about 0.1 mile.

7.120 Snapper Point (32°34'S., 137°47'E.), about 3 miles NNW of

Point Paterson, is the W extremity of a mass of thick mangroves. 

7.120 Curlew Point (32°32'S., 137°46'E.), almost 1.25 miles

NNW of Snapper Point, is fronted by Curlew Island a short distance to the E. This mangrove island lies on a drying bank; a

sandy knoll that covers only at high water lies on the N end of

this bank. 

7.120 A power station wharf is situated on the E bank of the channel, about 0.4 mile E of Curlew Island. Four dolphins are situated on the W side of the wharf. Two overhead power cables,

with a least vertical clearance of 45m, span the channel in the

vicinity of Curlew Island.

7.121 Port Augusta (32°30'S., 137°46'E.), which lies in the

upper reaches of Spencer Gulf, is closed to commercial vessels. Port Augusta lies on the E bank, about 3 miles N of Curlew Point; Port Augusta West lies on the opposite bank. 

Tides—Currents.—The mean tidal rise at Port Augusta is

3m at springs and 1.8m at neaps.

When the wind shifts from W to S and blows strongly, the

water level may rise as much as 1m. With a strong N wind, the

water level may be lowered by as much as 0.5m.

7.121 Depths—Limitations.—Abreast Snapper Point, the upper

gulf narrows to a width of 0.75 mile between the mangroves on

either side, and the gulf assumes the appearance of a river. The

mangroves on both shores are backed by swampy land, which

is flooded at springs. 

7.121 The navigable channel through this part of the upper gulf is

narrow and intricate. The dredged approach channel is no longer maintained. 

7.121 There are general depths of 6.4 to 7.9m in the SW half of the

port area and general depths of 4.9 to 5.8m in the NE half of

the port area. The channel limits between Curlew Point and

Port Augusta are well-marked by buoys and beacons. 

7.121 Commonwealth Wharf, which fronts the town, is in ruins.

7.121 A T-head jetty, used only by fishing vessels, extends from

the shore at Port Augusta West. There is a depth of 3m alongside the T-head. 

7.121 A causeway crosses the upper gulf N of Commonwealth

Wharf and obstructs navigation above the port. 

7.121 The port is closed to commercial shipping.

7.121 Pilotage.—Pilotage for Port Augusta is compulsory. The request for pilotage should be made 24 hours in advance and the

vessel’s ETA at Eastern Shoal North End Lighted Buoy confirmed 4 hours prior to arrival with the Port Pirie harbormaster.

The pilot boards about 2 mile W of the lighted beacon on the N

end of Eastern Shoal.

7.121 Regulations.—Vessels must have an underkeel clearance of

0.6m.

7.121 Caution.—Visibility along the approach channel to Port Augusta may be reduced by smoke. Vessels should exercise caution when such conditions exist. 

General Directions for Spencer Gulf

7.122 Large vessels bound for Spencer Gulf from the W are

advised to keep at least 5 miles S of South Neptunes. The

Gambier Isles may be passed on either side, care being taken to

clear the foul ground about 5 miles SE of Wedge Island. From

there, a middle course may be steered to reach a position

34°09.0'S, 137°09.6'E, about 14 miles W of Cape Elizabeth.

7.122 If proceeding from Port Lincoln to Lowly Point from near

Boston Point, a vessel should steer to pass S of Berlin Rock,

making allowance, if necessary, for the N current; then steer to

pass between Sir Joseph Banks Group and the mainland, and

then steer to pass midway between Shoalwater Point and Wallaroo Bay.

7.122 Between Sir Joseph Banks Group and Shoalwater Point, during the N current, a vessel may be set considerably N of her

course, and may get too close to the banks between Franklin
Sector 7. South Coast of Australia—Cape Adieu to Cape Spencer 195

Pub. 175

Harbor and Shoalwater Point. Frequent sounding is the best

guide both by day and night and while off this part of the coast,

depths of not less than 14.6m should be maintained. If less

depths are found, a S course should be taken immediately. 

7.122 After very hot days, Tiparra Light may be so elevated by mirage that the fact of it being in sight cannot ensure a vessel of

being in safety, although, in ordinary weather, it would not be

visible if passing too near Shoalwater Point. 

7.122 Large vessels entering the gulf from Investigator Strait

should pass S of the Althorpe Islands and, having rounded the

S isle, should not bring it to bear more than 115° until Royston

Head (35°11'S., 136°51'E.) bears 040°, when course may be altered N, clear of the shoals lying up to 7.5 miles NW of the Althorpe Islands, and the dangers in their vicinity. 

7.122 At night, Cape Borda Light, described in paragraph 8.2,

should be brought to bear 184° before proceeding into the gulf,

keeping on this bearing while passing between Wedge Island

and the Yorke Peninsula. 

7.122 From mid-channel on the W side of Middle Bank, which is

marked by a lighted beacon, to Lowly Point, it is advisable to

pass W of Yarraville Shoals and then steer to the NE. The lighted beacon on the S end of Eastern Shoal is a good guide, although the W channel is preferred for larger vessels. 

7.122 When in sight of Lowly Point, Mount Brown kept in range

021° over the point, leads up the gulf in depths of 18.3 to

14.6m, between Eastern Shoal and Fairway Bank.
197

Pub. 175

8. 

South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland including Kangaroo Island and Gulf St. Vincent

8.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 8 — CHART INFORMATION
199

Pub. 175

SECTOR 8 

SOUTH COAST OF AUSTRALIA—CAPE SPENCER TO CAPE NORTHUMBERLAND INCLUDING KANGAROO ISLAND AND GULF ST. VINCENT

8.0 Plan.—This sector describes the S coast of Australia between Cape Spencer and Cape Northumberland and includes

Kangaroo Island, Investigator Strait, and Gulf St. Vincent. The

descriptive sequence is SE. 

General Remarks

8.1 The S coast of Australia between Cape Spencer and

Cape Northumberland, about 253 miles SE, is indented in its

NW part by Gulf St. Vincent, which lies between the Yorke

Peninsula to the W and the Fleurieu Peninsula to the E. The

central part of the gulf is deep and clear of dangers, but both

shores are fringed by shoals with depths of 9.1m and less. In

some places these shoals extend up to 12 miles offshore, especially in the N part of the gulf. 

8.1 Several commercial ports are situated within the limits of the

gulf and are available to vessels of moderate to deep draft. Port

Adelaide, the largest berthing facility, is situated on the E shore

of the gulf about 55 miles N of the entrance. 

8.1 Kangaroo Island, an elongated island, high and wooded, lies

across the entrance of the Gulf St. Vincent. 

8.1 Investigator Strait, the most direct channel between Spencer

Gulf and Gulf St. Vincent, lies between the N coast of Kangaroo Island and the S coast of the Yorke Peninsula. 

8.1 Depths in the strait seaward of the fringing shoals are deep.

Backstairs Passage, the E entrance to Gulf St. Vincent and Investigator Strait, lies between the Macdonnell Peninsula, on

the E end of Kangaroo Island, and the W end of the Fleurieu

Peninsula, about 7 miles to the NE. It is navigable by the largest vessels and presents no difficulties. 

8.1 Anchorage can be taken in some of the bays which indent the

shores of Kangaroo Island. Kingscote, the principal town, is

situated on the NE part of the island, and has alongside berthing facilities for small vessels. 

8.1 The mainland coast between Cape Jervis and Cape Jaffa,

about 115 miles SSE, turns abruptly E and then SSE forming a

large embayment. The Murray River, the largest river in Australia, empties into the sea about 37 miles E of Cape Jervis after crossing Lake Alexandrina, a shallow lagoon. 

8.1 The coast between the entrance of the Murray River and

Cape Jaffa, at the S end of Lacepede Bay, about 92 miles SSE,

consists of a continuous stretch of sandy beach backed by sand

hills which are so much alike that it is difficult to identify any

of them. The surf is always heavy along this section of coast

and during W and SW gales this surf extends up to 4 miles offshore in places. 

8.1 Lacepede Bay, although exposed to the prevailing swell, provides safe anchorage in all weather. 

8.1 Kingston, the port for the offshore anchorage area known as

Port Caroline, is situated about 11 miles NE of Cape Jaffa.

Only fishing vessels can be accommodated. 

8.1 The coast between Cape Jaffa and Cape Northumberland,

about 83 miles SSE, continues low and sandy and is marked in

places by moderately high sand dunes topped by a few trees.

Anchorage can be taken off the entrances of the bays which indent the coast along this section of coast, but with onshore

winds a heavy swell rolls in.

8.1 Winds—Weather.—In the region covered by this sector, the

weather is largely controlled by the seasonal N and S movement of the belt of high pressure which extends from W to E

across the area, and by the continuous E procession, within the

belt, of anticyclones and the troughs or depressions which separate them. The winds circulate in a counterclockwise direction

in this area of high pressure.

8.1 There is a tendency along the coast for winds between S and

E to predominate in the summer and for winds between N and

W to be most frequent in July. This seasonal tendency is greatly complicated by the local sea breeze effect.

8.1 Land and sea breezes blow on the coasts, in settled weather,

throughout the year. The land breeze blows offshore at night

and in the early morning, while the sea breeze is best developed during summer afternoons.

8.1 At Adelaide, the sea breeze from the SW is pronounced in

the afternoon, except in the winter; in the morning the winds

are mainly from between N and E. In the winter, the NE land

breeze is prominent in the forenoon, while in the afternoon, the

winds are mainly from between W and N.

8.1 Strong winds are frequent, with their frequency and strength

increasing from N to S. It is difficult to assess the frequency of

squalls and gales, but it is not unlikely that gales accompany

every cold front that crosses the area. These wind changes occur at least once per week; in certain seasons and under some

meteorological situations they are more frequent, and if intense, the associated gales may extend intermittently over a few

days. Gales have been reported in every month at Adelaide,

with the highest frequency occurring in the early winter

months.

8.1 Visibility is generally good and fog is infrequent. Temperatures are high in the summer near the coast, but low humidity

reduces personal discomfort. The winters are mild and frost is

rare. From time to time tropical depressions affect these coasts

and are a serious, though infrequent, hazard.

8.1 There is a marked winter maximum and marked summer

minimum in the annual coarse of rainfall.

8.1 The S depression, with its accompanying mainly onshore

winds, is responsible for the greatest portion of the rain. The

depressions and rainfall are most frequent from May to August, with the greatest intensities occurring in June and July.

8.1 Tides—Currents.—There is a seasonal variation of currents

in this sector, almost entirely due to the S movement of the

subtropical anticyclones in the summer. The currents are fairly

weak, with a commonly experienced rate of about 0.25 knot.

From January to March, the currents are predominantly ESE,

while from April to December, the currents are predominantly

WNW and NW.

8.1 Caution.—Special care is required when navigating along
200 Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 

Pub. 175

the coast between Cape Martin and Cape Northumberland,

about 40 miles to the SE. The prevailing winds are from the

SW. A continuous swell sets toward the coast which, together

with the uneven bottom, produces an irregular sea. In bad

weather, with S winds, soundings should be taken frequently.

Several vessels have been wrecked between Cape Buffon and

Cape Northumberland from neglecting this precaution. 

8.1 From November to June, extensive lobster fishing takes

place on the continental shelf, inshore of the 150m curve between Cape Jaffa and Cape Northumberland. Vessels are requested, when passage permits, to transit outside the 200m

curve, and also to pass at least 10 miles seaward of Cape

Banks. From the first day of October through the end of May,

extensive giant crab fishing takes place inshore of the 500m

curve off the coast of South Australia. Mariners are cautioned

that surface floats associated with the activity may be encountered.

Kangaroo Island—West Coast

8.2 Kangaroo Island (35°49'S., 137°15'E.), which stands

at the entrance of Gulf St. Vincent, is high and well-wooded. 

8.2 Cape Borda(35°46'S., 136°35'E.), the NW point of Kangaroo Island, is a bold cliffy headland, 61m high. The upper half

of the cliff is formed of white limestone, and the lower half is

very dark volcanic rock. The hills at the cape rise to a height of

more than 152m and are covered with small scrub. Cape Borda

has been reported to be a good radar target at distances up to 25

miles. A light is shown at Cape Borda from the slope of a hill,

about 0.3 mile S of the cape. 

The coast between Cape Borda and Cape Vennachar, the N

point of West Bay, about 8 miles to the S, is composed of dark

limestone cliffs, 61m high. Numerous caves, into which the sea

runs, mark the face of these cliffs. The Ravine de Casoars, a

break in the cliffs about 2.5 miles S of Cape Borda, can be seen

from a considerable distance. Scrub-covered hills, 152 to 183m

high, rise behind the cliffs. This part of the coast should be

carefully avoided as the ocean swell rolls in with considerable

force. 

8.2 During a heavy W swell, there are rollers off the Ravine de

Casoars to a distance of about 1 mile. Depths of 21.9m are

found about 1 mile offshore for a distance of about 2 miles S

from Cape Borda. Farther S the depths are greater. 

8.2 West Bay (35°53'S., 136°33'E.) lies between the S point of

Cape Vennachar and a point about 1 mile farther S. A low islet

lies about 0.3 mile off this point. The depths within the bay decrease gradually from 18.3m in the entrance to 7.3m near its

head. 

8.2 Small vessels with local knowledge sometimes anchor in the

bay, but the heavy swell which rolls in with a W wind makes

this a risky proceeding. The heavy swells are accompanied by

rollers about 1 mile S of the entrance. The terrain S of West

Bay is much lower than the land to the N. 

8.2 Cape Bedout (35°57'S., 136°36'E.), about 3.5 miles SSE of

the S point of West Bay, is a round point with a scrubby hill at

the back. The coast between Cape Bedout and a low sloping

point a little more than 1 mile to the SE forms a bight with a

sandy beach at its head. The bight in the coast between this low

point and Cape du Couedic, about 8 miles to the SE, is known

as Maupertuis Bay. 

8.2 The coast between the NW point of this bay and the mouth

of the Rocky River, about 3 miles to the E, consists of low

cliffs backed by scrub-covered hills, 30.5 to 45.7m high. A

conspicuous bare sand patch extends about 0.75 mile S from a

position about 0.5 mile S of the Rocky River. This patch slopes

downward from sand hills about 91m high. Southeast of this

patch, the cliffs rise to a height of 143m within a distance of 1

mile of Cape du Couedic. The inland hills are highest about 4

miles N of the cape, where the summit of a partially wooded

range is 218m high. 

8.3 Cape du Couedic (36°06'S., 136°42'E.), the SW tip

of Kangaroo Island, is a narrow promontory about 1 mile long.

Its SW face slopes to the sea whereas its N and S sides are

steep. In 1984, depths of 24m and 12.8m were reported to lie

3.25 miles SE and 21.5 miles E, respectively, of Cape du

Couedic. A light is shown at the cape. 

8.3 The Casuarina Islets (36°04'S., 136°43'E.), two in number,

lie S of Cape du Couedic. The N islet is 29m high and the S islet is 35m high. Both islets are composed of large bare rocks.

The S islet has been reported to be a good radar target at distances up to 17 miles. 

8.3 Deep water, over a rocky bottom, is found between the islets.

There is a heavy tide rip SW of the S islet. A shoal, with a least

depth of 7.3m and surrounded by rocky uneven ground, lies

about 2 miles SW of the S islet. 

Courtesy of Peter Coombs and Malcolm Macdonald’s Lighthouses of

Australia Page

Cape Borda Light Cape du Couedic Light
Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 201

Pub. 175

8.3 Tides—Currents.—The E current divides at Cape du

Couedic, with one part setting N along the W coast and

strengthening the flood; the ebb sets S but is overcome at times

by the N current and the flood.

Caution.—Lipson Reef (36°10'S., 136°50'E.) lies about

8.25 miles SE of Cape du Couedic. The portion above water is

3m high and small in extent. An area of broken water surrounds the reef. A heavy swell usually breaks over this reef.

There are considerable depths about 1 mile off the reef, but this

area has not been closely examined. 

8.3 In 1984, a depth of 20m was reported to lie about 4 miles NE

of Lipson Reef. A depth of 7.9m lies 1 mile SE of Lipson Reef.

Kangaroo Island—South Coast

8.4 The coast for about 2 miles NE from Cape du Couedic

consists of high, steep cliffs, and is steep-to. Farther E, a sandy

beach backed by steep cliffs extends about 1.25 miles to Kirkpatrick Point. The cliffs over the W end of the beach rise to a

height of 131m. 

8.4 Kirkpatrick Point (36°03'S., 136°46'E.), a sloping point

about 76m high, is marked by three conspicuous boulders on

its top. One boulder is about 30.5m high. 

8.4 Weirs Cove (36°03'S., 136°45'E.), entered close W of Kirkpatrick Point, has a small jetty, with a depth of 3m alongside,

extending from its head. 

8.4 Sanderson Bay (36°02'S., 136°48'E.) lies between Kirkpatrick Point and Cape Younghusband, about 2.5 miles ENE.

Fairly high cliffs border the sandy shore. 

8.4 Hanson Bay (36°02'S., 136°52'E.), entered between Cape

Younghusband and Cape Bouguer, about 4 miles E, has depths

of 18.3 to 35m over a rocky bottom. This bay is not available as

an anchorage because it is open to the prevailing winds. The W

and E shores of the bay are cliffy, with hills behind them about

91m high. There are four sandy beaches, with low land behind

them, in the N part of the bay. A detached rock, about 15.2m

high, stands 0.5 mile E of Cape Younghusband.

Cape Bouguer (36°02'S., 136°55'E.), about 1 mile wide, has

three cliffy projections with rocks at their base. Wooded hills,

91m high, stand N of the cape. A conspicuous clump of trees

on a plateau about 11.5 miles N of the cape can be seen off this

part of the coast. 

8.4 Caution.—Douglas Rock (36°03'S., 136°51'E.), an isolated

pinnacle rock, awash, lies 2.5 miles W of Cape Bouguer. It has

depths of not less than 25.5m surrounding it and the sea does

not always break over it. Vessels of any size are advised to pass

outside Douglas Rock. 

8.5 The coast between Cape Bouguer and Cape Kersaint,

about 10 miles E, consists of low cliffs and scrubby rises. A remarkable sand patch lies at the top of a cliff, close to the coast,

about 2 miles NE of Cape Bouguer. A sunken reef extends

about 0.3 mile S from a point about 0.75 mile E of the sand

patch. A river flows into the sea, over a sandy beach, about 2.5

miles farther ENE. 

8.5 Cape Kersaint (36°02'S., 137°07'E.) is a bold cliffy headland, with a scrub-covered hill, 96m high, above it. A SW swell

rolls in with great force on this part of the island; it is advisable

to give this coast a wide berth between Cape Bouguer and

Cape Kersaint. 

Caution.——Northwest Snare (36°02'S., 137°11'E.) is a

dangerous pinnacle rock that lies about 2 miles offshore, 3

miles E of Cape Kersaint. There are depths of 3.6m over it and

depths of more than 18.3m close around it. It breaks heavily

with a big swell, but only occasionally when the sea is smooth. 

8.5 An 8.2m patch was reported (1960) to lie about 4 miles SSE

of Cape Kersaint, and an 18.3m shoal was reported (1961) to

lie about 4 miles SSW of the same cape; a 12.8m shoal was reported (1984) to lie 2.5 miles ENE of the 18.3m shoal. 

8.5 Southeast Snare, a dangerous pinnacle rock, lies 7 miles ESE

of Cape Kersaint. There are depths of 5.5m over it, and depths

of more than 18.3m close around it. It does not break as often

as Northwest Snare and a good lookout is necessary when in its

vicinity. It breaks heavily in bad weather. During a heavy

swell, there are rollers in depths of 12.8 to 16.5m over some irregular ground about 1 mile S of Nobby Islet. This area should

be avoided because of the possibility of lesser depths. 

8.5 A group of above-water rocks lies between 17 and 23 miles

SE of Cape Kersaint. As they are above-water rocks, they are

not dangerous by day in clear weather but at night they should

be given a wide berth. 

8.6 Young Rocks (36°23'S., 137°15'E.) is a group of

three above-water rocks and a sunken rock. The largest rock,

9.1m high, lies 21.5 miles SSE of Cape Kersaint. Two low

rocks, close together, lie about 0.25 mile NE of the 9.1m rock,

and a sunken rock lies about the same distance SW of it. A

bank, with a depth of 14.6m at its N end and depths of 10m

close S, lies about 0.5 mile SE of the 9.1m rock. In 1989,

Young Rocks were reported to lie 1.1 miles ESE of their charted position.

8.6 North Rock (36°18'S., 137°15'E.), about 3m high, lies about

4.25 miles N of the largest of the Young Rocks. The sea usually

breaks completely over it. Southwest Rock (36°23'S.,

137°13'E.), 1.5m high, lies 2.25 miles SW of the largest of the

Young Rocks. In 1989, North Rock and Southwest Rock were

reported to lie 1.4 miles ESE of their charted positions.

8.7 A small bight lies between Cape Kersaint and a point,

59m high, about 1 mile to the ENE. There are depths of 16.5 to

18.3m within this bight and depths of 24m close to the S side

of the point. The cliffs between this point and Ellen Point,

about 2 miles NE, gradually decrease in elevation; there are

depths of 11 to 16.5m about 0.25 mile offshore. 

8.7 Ellen Point (36°00'S., 137°09'E.), a grassy mound 8.5m

high, is bordered by low rocks at its base. A light is shown

from the point. 

8.7 Vivonne Bay (36°00'S., 137°12'E.) is a bight in the coast between Ellen Point and the mouth of the Mary River, about 1.75

miles NNE. The Harriet River flows into the W part of the bay. 

8.7 Mount Bloomfield (35°58'S., 137°14'E.), about 83m high,

conical, and barren, stands about 0.75 mile inland and 2 miles

E of the mouth of the Mary River. 

8.7 During N and W winds, anchorage can be taken in Vivonne

Bay, in depths of 9.1 to 11m. The bay is open to the SE, and although the sea is smooth during fresh SE winds, there is no

space to get underway if the wind increases and a sea is raised. 

8.7 From November to April, when the SE winds blow, vessels

seeking shelter go to D’Estree Bay, where the sea is smoother

and room is available to put to sea. 
202 Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 

Pub. 175

8.7 A small jetty, with depths of 1m alongside its outer end, extends 79m offshore in the W part of Vivonne Bay. 

Nobby Islet (36°00'S., 137°16'E.), a rock 75m high, lies 4.5

miles ESE of the mouth of the Mary River and close offshore.

Between Nobby Islet and Cape Gantheaume, about 9.75 miles

ESE, the coast is backed by cliffs of moderate height and bordered by foul ground which extends about 0.5 mile offshore in

places. 

8.7 Conspicuous hills, which form the summit of a wooded

range, stand about 4.5 miles NW of Cape Gantheaume. A sand

hill, 95m high, and a green-colored conical hill, 86m high,

stand 3.25 and 1.5 miles NW, respectively, of Cape

Gantheaume. 

8.8 Cape Gantheaume (36°04'S., 137°27'E.), about 46m

high, is steep on its W side and sloping on its E side. A reef extends about 0.75 mile WSW from the cape and several rocks on

it are just above water. The outer rock is awash. There are

breakers about 0.1 mile W of the outer rock.

8.8 Quin Rock (36°05'S., 137°24'E.), with a depth of 1.8m, and

with depths of more than 18.3m within 0.5 mile of it, lies 2.25

miles WSW of Cape Gantheaume. The rock is small and with a

smooth sea seldom breaks. A shoal, with a least depth of 9.1m,

lies 3.25 miles SSW of Cape Gantheaume. 

8.8 Pelorus Islet (36°07'S., 137°31'E.), a bare rock, 12.2m high,

lies 4.25 miles ESE of Cape Gantheaume. A reef, with several

above-water rocks on it, extends about 0.2 mile E from the islet; an above-water rock lies close to its SW side. A clear deep

channel lies between the islet and the cape. With a heavy swell,

the sea breaks completely over the islet. 

The coast between Cape Gantheaume and Cape Linois,

about 7.5 miles NE, is bordered by fairly high cliffs. The latter

cape is a bold. cliffy headland. The highest land near the coast

is a scrub-covered hill, 92m high, about midway between the

capes. 

8.9 Cape Linois (36°01'S., 137°35'E.) is a bold. cliffy

headland about 72m high. The cliffs decrease in height NE of

Cape Linois and end about 1.5 miles from it. 

8.9 An 18.3m shoal was reported (1961) to lie about 13.5 miles

SE of Cape Linois. 

8.9 Tinline Point (35°58'S., 137°37'E.), with a remarkable

cracked rock on it, lies about 3.75 miles NE of Cape Linois.

The crack in the detached rock is open when viewed from the

N or S. 

8.9 D’Estree Bay (35°55'S., 137°39'E.), an open body of water,

lies between Tinline Point and Reynolds Point, about 8 miles

NE; the latter point is a high headland with a steep-to fringing

reef. The first 5 miles of the bay’s shore is backed by white

limestone cliffs, with the remaining shore being bold and cliffy. 

8.9 Osmanli Reef (35°58'S., 137°38'E.), about 0.5 mile NE of

Tinline Point, consists of a number of detached patches. The

outer patch, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 0.35 mile

NNE of Tinline Point. There are depths of more than 9.1m

close outside of it. During fine weather, the reef breaks only

occasionally, and vessels are advised to give Tinline Point a

berth of about 1 mile. Two remarkable sand patches are located

on the coast about 1.75 miles WSW of Reynolds Point. 

8.9 In the W part of the bay, the depths shoal rapidly from 9.1 to

2.7m about 0.5 mile offshore; the N side of the bay is steeper,

there being depths of 9.1 to 11m less than 0.5 mile offshore. 

8.9 Good anchorage can be taken in the W part of the bay, in a

depth of 9.1m, sand, with the extremity of Tinline Point bearing 182°, distant 2.25 miles, and the highest of the limestone

cliffs in the bay bearing 275°. Little swell is felt in this position

in ordinary weather and during offshore winds. By keeping

Tinline Point bearing 182°, depths of 8.2 to 9.1m will be maintained to within 0.75 mile of the point. Should landing be necessary, in ordinary weather, or even with moderate SE winds,

there is no surf on the beach between 0.5 mile from Tinline

Point and 0.5 mile N of the highest limestone cliff. 

8.9 The coast between Reynolds Point and the low sandy bight

of Pennington Bay, about 1 mile NE, is cliffy. Prospect Hill, N

of this bay, rises to a sandy height of 100m and is bush-covered. It stands on a sandy neck of land which connects the

Macdonnell Peninsula (Dudley Peninsula) with the main island. 

8.9 The coast between Pennington Bay and False Cape, about 14

miles ESE, is generally cliffy and fronted in places by sandy

beaches. This entire section of coast is steep-to. A river flows

into the sea about 4.5 miles WNW of False Cape, but has no

commercial value. 

8.10 Cape Hart (35°54'S., 138°03'E.), a low rocky point,

lies 1.5 miles E of False Cape. A breaking reef extends 0.2 mile

S from the cape. Cape Hart has been reported to be a good radar target at distances up to 17 miles. 

8.10 A 9m patch was reported (1961) to lie about 11 miles S of

Cape Hart. 

8.10 Vessels should avoid a dumping ground for barges which lies

within 2.5 miles of a position 7 miles WSW of Cape Hart. 

8.10 From Cape Hart the coast extends 5 miles NE to Cape Willoughby.

Kangaroo Island—East Coast

8.11 Cape Willoughby (35°51'S., 138°08'E.), the E extremity of Kangaroo Island, is a bold, rocky headland, 53m

high. The cape has been reported to be a good radar target at

distances up to 18 miles. A light is shown at the cape.

8.11 Sanders Bank (36°03'S., 138°20'E.), with depths of less

than 36m, extends about 12 miles NNE from a position about

17.5 miles SSE of Cape Willoughby. A least depth of 22m lies

on this bank about 15.5 miles SE of the same cape. Sometimes

there is a heavy, breaking sea over this bank and 10 to 20 miles

S of Cape Willoughby; it may be due to the comparatively

shoal depths in this area or to the ebb current from Backstairs

Passage meeting a heavy swell. 

8.11 Carter Knoll (36°09'S., 138°10'E.), with a least depth of

36m, and Fenris Bank, with a depth of 18.3m, lie 18 and 10

miles S, respectively, of Cape Willoughby. The sea occasionally breaks heavily in the vicinity of Fenris Bank. 

8.11 Threshold Bank (35°55'S., 138°15'E.), which has a least

depth of 14.6m, lies 7 miles SE of Cape Willoughby. 

8.12 Cape St. Alban (35°48'S., 138°08'E.) lies about 2.25

miles N of Cape Willoughby and extends in a N direction as a

narrow neck of land. The cape has been reported to be a good

radar target at distances up to 12 miles. A light is shown at the

cape. 
Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 203

Pub. 175

8.12 A bank of sand and rock, with depths of less than 10m, lies

up to 1 mile offshore between Cape Willoughby and Cape St.

Alban. The shallowest part of this bank, known as The Scraper,

which breaks except in the calmest weather, lies about 0.5 mile

ESE of Cape St. Alban. The depths increase rapidly about 1

mile SE of Cape St. Alban, causing a tide rip in fine weather.

During bad weather, a heavy breaker rolls right up to the shore. 

8.12 Antechamber Bay (35°48'S., 138°06'E.) lies between Cape

St. Alban and Cape Coutts, about 3.75 miles NW. The SE

shore is high and wooded. The SW shore is low, and the NW

shore is high and rocky. The Chapman River flows into the W

part of the bay, but has no commercial significance. 

8.12 Vessels can anchor in any part of the bay at distances of 0.5

to 0.75 mile offshore. Good anchorage can be taken, in a depth

of 6.4m, sand, in the SE corner of the bay, between the cape

and the rocky point about 1.25 miles W of the cape. Smaller

craft can anchor farther in according to draft. The current is

weak inside depths of 5.5m. 

8.12 From its appearance it would seem that a heavy swell would

enter the bay with ESE winds, but this is not the case. The

strong tidal currents in the passage raise such a ripple that the

swell is smoothed before it reaches the shallow water. The

heaviest swell is raised during strong S gales when the swell

rounds Cape St. Alban. The S part of the bay is the smoothest,

but with proper precautions, a vessel may anchor in any part of

the bay.

8.13 Cape Coutts (35°46'S., 138°04'E.) is bold, high land,

with depths of more than 18.3m close offshore. The coast between Cape Coutts and Hog Point, about 6.5 miles WSW, continues bold and steep-to. Snapper Point Light is shown from a

tower with shingles which form the letter T standing on the

cliff top at Snapper Point, 1.5 miles NW of Cape Coutts. 

8.13 Hog Bay (35°44'S., 137°56'E.) lies on the E side of Hog

Point. A small village lies along its shores. A small jetty, with a

depth of 5.5m alongside its outer end, extends 145m E from the

NE extremity of Hog Point.

8.13 Small vessels can anchor in the bay, in depths of 3.7 to

7.3m, about 0.1 to 0.2 mile offshore. 

8.13 Kangaroo Head (35°43'S., 137°54'E.), about 1.5 miles W of

Hog Point, is a bluff, rocky point marked by a conspicuous

white cairn. The land behind Kangaroo Head rises steeply to

heights of 91 to 122m. The head is steep-to and the current sets

rapidly past it, forming an eddy S of it during the W current

and causing strong ripples off the point. 

8.13 Hardstaff Shoals (35°42'S., 137°53'E.), a group of shoals

with depths of 10m and less over them, lie within 3.5 miles

NW of Kangaroo Head. There is a least depth of 6.4m over the

SE end of the N shoal, and 6.4m on the E side of the S shoal,

1.5 miles off Kangaroo Head.

8.14 Nepean Bay (35°40'S., 137°45'E.) lies between Kangaroo Head and Marsden Point, about 16 miles NW. It comprises the three large anchorages of Eastern Cove, Western

Cove, and Kingscote Harbor. 

8.14 Eastern Cove (35°46'S., 137°51'E.) lies between Kangaroo

Head and Morrison Point, about 6 miles W. Morrison Point is a

moderately high headland with a few rocks close off it. This

cove is used principally by coasters and small craft which have

been overtaken by bad weather from the NW while at the outer

ports in Gulf St. Vincent. Large deep-draft vessels will not find

much shelter from N winds. 

8.14 The shore of Eastern Cove, between Kangaroo Head and

American Beach, 2.5 miles S, is rugged and rocky. Between

the SW end of American Beach and Rocky Point, it consists of

alternate beaches and low, rocky points. A sandy beach forms

the S shore between Rocky Point and Strawbridge Point, 2.75

miles WNW. The S side of the cove is low with wooded hills at

the back. 

8.15 Strawbridge Point (35°47'S., 137°47'E.) is the S

point of the mouth of the American River, which forms the entrance of Pelican Lagoon. Extensive sand flats front the shore

from Strawbridge Point to Ballast Head; these flats dry up to

about 0.5 mile off Strawbridge Point. 

8.15 The American River (35°47'S., 137°47'E.) and Pelican Lagoon are available only to small craft with local knowledge.

The tidal currents in the American River flow at a rate of 2 to 3

knots, changing from 1 to 2 hours after the times of high and

low water. 

Courtesy of Lighthouses of Australia

Cape Willoughby Light
204 Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 

Pub. 175

8.15 Ballast Head (35°45'S., 137°48'E.), about 2 miles N of

Strawbridge Point, is a bluff-looking point with its lower part

black-colored. 

8.16 Western Cove (35°42'S., 137°38'E.) lies between

Morrison Point and Beare Point, about 8 miles NW. The S

shore, between Morrison Point and a red cliffy point about 3

miles W, is high and rocky. A range of wooded hills along the S

shore falls gradually to the W. Red cliffs extend about 1.5 miles

W from the red cliffy point, and from there to the head of the

cove is a continuous sandy beach. The land at the head of the

cove is low and swampy and continues so to Beare Point, at the

entrance of Kingscote Harbor. 

8.16 The Cygnet River, which flows into the cove about midway

between the head of the cove and Beare Point, is navigable

only by boats at high water. 

8.16 Beare Point has been reported to be a good radar target at

distance up to 21 miles. 

8.16 Frenchman Rock (35°43'S., 137°43'E.), a rocky patch with

a least depth of 3.7m, lies 1 mile NNW of the red cliffy point

and 1.75 miles W of Morrison Point. The depths between this

patch and the red cliffy point are very irregular. Two rocky

patches, with depths of less than 1.8m, lie about 0.5 mile offshore near the W end of the red cliffs. A drying sand flat lies

between 0.25 and 0.5 mile offshore between the red cliffs at the

head of the cove up to 1 mile S of Kingscote Jetty and almost

to Beare Point. 

8.16 Good anchorage can be taken in any part of Western Cove,

except off the red cliffs on the S side, where the bottom is

rocky. The depths shoal gradually from 10.1m in the center of

the cove toward the W side. 

8.16 There is good anchorage, in a depth of 5m, with the easternmost of the W sand hills, on the S side of the cove, bearing

185°, distant about 0.5 mile.

8.17 Kingscote Harbor (35°39'S., 137°39'E.) lies about 1

mile S of the entrance of the Bay of Shoals, between the E side

of the promontory of which Beare Point is the SE point and the

S end of a drying spit about 2.25 miles ESE. This drying spit

extends about 5 miles NW to Cape Rouge. 

8.17 The harbor is sheltered from N and W winds, in depths of

5.8m. Depths of 7.3m lie S of the SE end of the drying spit, but

the shelter is poor. 

8.17 The coast between Beare Point and Beatrice Point, about 1

mile N, is 1.5 to 61m high, the land behind being high and cultivated on the summit. A conspicuous silo stands 0.25 mile S of

the summit. 

8.17 A narrow drying sand spit extends about 0.5 mile N from Beatrice Point. 

8.17 A reef, with depths of 0.9m over its outer end, extends about

0.25 mile E from a position on the coast 0.5 mile N of Beare

Point. 

8.17 West of Beatrice Point, the coast curves W and NE to Cape

Rouge, enclosing a shallow body of water known as Bay of

Shoals. A drying spit, marked by three low, small islets known

as Bushy Islet and the Beatrice Islets, extends almost 5 miles

SE from Cape Rouge. Depths of less than 5m extend about

1.25 miles farther SE. 

8.17 The obstructed channel leading into the Bay of Shoals crosses the N part of this spit and has a least depth of 0.9m in the

fairway. Within the bay the depths increase to 2.7 to 3m. 

8.18 Kingscote (35°39'S., 137°38'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54200), the principal town on Kangaroo Island, is the terminal for a car ferry from Port Lincoln and an export terminal

for island cattle and agricultural products. Kingscote Jetty, with

a depth of 4.6m at its head, extends 350m abreast of the town.

The jetty is fitted out for ro-ro freight, with a lift bridge at its

outer end where trailer ships berth stern-to. 

8.18 In the narrow channel that leads into the Bay of Shoals, the

currents attain a rate of 3 to 4 knots. The flood sets N at the anchorage while the ebb SSE, at a rate of 0.5 knot at springs.

8.18 The best anchorage lies about 0.75 mile E of the jetty, in a

depth of 5.8m. 

8.18 Small craft can anchor with Beatrice Point bearing 286°, in a

depth of 3.7m, soft sand. 

8.18 A vessel approaching from the E, having identified TableTopped Hill, about 6.5 miles WNW of Beare Point, should

steer for it on course 285°, passing S of the lighted beacons

marking the S end of the sand spit extending SE from Cape

Rouge. Beatrice Point on a bearing of 314° leads W of the sand

spit to the anchorage. There is a least depth of about 6.4m until

within about 0.75 mile of the jetty.

Backstairs Passage

8.19 Backstairs Passage (35°44'S., 138°10'E.), the E entrance of Gulf St. Vincent and Investigator Strait, lies between

the Macdonnell Peninsula, the E end of Kangaroo Island, and

the W end of the Fleurieu Peninsula, about 7 miles to the NE. It

is navigable by the largest vessels and presents but few difficulties. 

8.19 The SW side of the passage, which is for the most part bold

and cliffy, has been previously described in paragraph 8.12

through paragraph 8.14. The NE side, which is bold and rocky,

with high scrub-covered hills intersected by deep ravines, is

described under the principal description of the W end of the

Fleurieu Peninsula, in paragraph 8.55. 

8.19 North Page Island (35°45'S., 138°18'E.), a rocky islet,

24.4m high, about 8.75 miles ENE of Cape St. Alban, is steepto on its S side but has depths of less than 9.1m up to 0.25 mile

N of it. This islet is the largest and northernmost of The Pages,

a group of rocks and islets lying near the middle of the S entrance of the passage. 

8.19 South Page Island (35°47'S., 138°18'E.), 20m high, lies

about 1 mile SSW of North Page. There is a deep channel between the two islets, but a depth of 8.5m lies in the S part of the

channel, about 0.5 mile NNE of South Page.

8.19 The Pages have been reported to be a good radar target at

distances up to 13 miles. Two small rocky islets, about 0.9m

high, lie between 0.3 and 0.5 mile SSW of South Page. A light

is shown from South Page Islet. 

8.20 Yatala Shoal (35°44'S., 138°11'E.), with depths of

less than 18.3m, lies centered about 6.5 miles WNW of North

Page and breaks with any sea running. There is a least depth of

5.5m near the middle of the shoal and patches of 6.1 to 8.2m lie

on its N part. The upheaval of this shoal, which is composed of

gravel, coarse sand, and shell, may have been caused by the action of the tidal currents, which sometimes run at a rate of 4 to
Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 205

Pub. 175

5 knots; the depths over the shoal may vary. 

8.20 Landing Shoal (35°39'S., 137°59'E.), with depths of less

18.3m, is 3.5 miles in extent in a N-S direction, with a depth of

13.1m at its center, 6.25 miles WSW of Cape Jervis. 

8.20 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Backstairs Passage

are rapid and sometimes irregular; their influence in the S part

of the entrance does not extend far outside Cape Willoughby.

The flood sets NW and the ebb sets SE. The rate of the current

in the passage is charted as 3 knots, but it varies according to

the strength and direction of the prevailing wind, and at times

is reported to exceed 4 knots. 

8.20 Vessels traveling E through Backstairs Passage should keep

as close to Cape Jervis as wind and weather will permit to

avoid being set W by the current from that channel. 

8.20 Caution.—A submarine power cable extends across the

strait from a bay 1.5 miles SE of Cape Jervis to a point on the

shore about 1 mile NW of Snapper Point. 

8.20 A ferry plies across the passage between Hog Point and

Cape Jervis.

Investigator Strait

8.21 Investigator Strait (35°30'S., 137°00'E.), the most

direct channel to Gulf St. Vincent from the W, and between

Spencer Gulf and Gulf St. Vincent, lies between the N coast of

Kangaroo Island and the S coast of the Yorke Peninsula. With

the exception of the rocks in the vicinity of the Althorpe Islands and the shoal off Point Davenport, both on the N side,

and Orcades Bank, which has a least depth of 18.3m and lies

almost 14 miles ESE of the Althorpe Islands, it is clear of offlying dangers. The greatest depths are formed on the S side,

which is steep-to. The bottom is mostly broken shells mixed

with sand, gravel, or coral. 

Investigator Strait—South Side

8.22 The coast between Cape Borda and Cape Forbin,

about 10 miles E, is bold and cliffy. There is a break in the cliff

about 2.5 miles E of Cape Borda, where there is a small cove

known as Harvey’s Return. 

8.22 Cape Torrens (35°43'S., 136°43'E.) is a high point, with

cliffs about 220m high, about 6.75 miles E of Cape Borda. It

divides the space between Cape Borda and Cape Forbin into

two bights. In the W bight, the cliffs are high and level for a

distance of 4 miles from Cape Torrens, but in the E bight they

fall gradually to the De Mole River, a small river of no commercial importance. 

8.22 Between Cape Forbin, a rugged cliffy point, 54m high, and

Cape Dutton, about 18 miles ENE, the coast is very rugged and

cliffy. 

8.22 Snug Cove (35°42'S., 136°50'E.), the next cove E of Cape

Forbin, is the most sheltered, being open only to the NW. The

cove may be recognized by a small peaked islet, about 27.4m

high, lying close to the point and also by a high cliff, with some

white marks near its summit, about 1.25 miles E of it. 

8.22 Small coasters can lie, in depths of 11 to 16.5m, close to the

beach on the N side, secured bow and stern. 

8.22 The coast between Snug Cove and the mouth of the Western

River, about 7.25 miles E, is a range of high level cliffs. The

highest part of the range rises to a height of 220m, about 3.5

miles E of Snug Cove. Inland, the terrain rises to a height of

267m about 1.25 miles S. 

8.23 The Western River (35°41'S., 136°59'E.) is a small

stream which flows into a cove of no commercial importance. 

8.23 Snelling’s Beach (35°41'S., 137°04'E.), about 5 miles E of

the mouth of the Western River, is bordered by cliffs which are

lower than those to the W. The Middle River flows into the sea

through Snelling’s Beach. 

8.23 During S winds coasters can anchor about 0.1 mile off Snelling’s Beach, in a depth of 5m, and about 0.5 mile off, in a

depth of 12.8m, but the bottom is rocky at the latter depth. 

8.23 Vessels anchoring off the beach should give its NE point a

berth of 0.25 mile in order to avoid a reef which extends from

it; the sea usually breaks over this reef. 

8.23 Cape Dutton (35°38'S., 137°09'E.), a sloping cliffy point

about 61m high, lies 4 miles E of Snelling’s Beach. A sunken

reef extends about 0.25 mile NE from Cape Dutton, with

depths of 18.3m outside it. A tidal race generates off the cape

at times; in strong winds, the race resembles breakers. 

8.23 The coast between Cape Dutton and Cape Cassini, about 9

miles ENE, consists of high broken cliffs intersected by several

small coves. Stokes Bay, the largest of these coves, is located

about 3 miles E of Cape Dutton. At times, coasters anchor here

during S winds, about 0.2 mile offshore, in depths of 7.3 to

12.8m, rocky bottom. Local knowledge is necessary.

8.24 Cape Cassini (35°35'S., 137°20'E.), a white limestone headland, is 39m high. The terrain inland rises to heights

of 213 to 244m. 

8.24 Mount Macdonnell (35°38'S., 137°19'E.), a round-topped

hill and the highest land on the N side of Kangaroo Island, rises

to a height of 299m about 3.5 miles SSW of the cape. The

coast up to 1.5 mile E of Cape Cassini is low and rocky and is

bordered by a ledge which extends a short distance offshore. A

reef, almost awash, extends about 0.25 mile offshore about

1.25 miles E of the cape. The coast up to 4 miles farther E, rises to high, dark cliffs intersected by small sandy beaches. 

8.24 Dashwood Bay (35°35'S., 137°24'E.) is a slight indentation

in the coast, about 3.5 miles E of Cape Cassini. 

8.24 Anchorage can be taken in Dashwood Bay, in a depth of

9.1m, about 0.25 mile from the beach. 

8.24 Smith’s Bay (35°36'S., 137°27'E.), marked by a black boulder beach, is located about 6 miles E of Cape Cassini. The land

behind the bay is low and rises S to Freestone Hill, flat-topped

and 172m high. 

8.24 Anchorage can be taken during offshore winds, about 0.25

mile off the middle of the beach, in a depth of 10.1m. 

8.24 Local knowledge is necessary in anchoring in either Dashwood Bay or Smith’s Bay.

8.25 Cape d’Estaing (35°35'S., 137°30'E.), a 13.2m high

cliff with a white face to the N, lies 2 miles E of Smith’s Bay. A

breaking reef extends up to 0.25 mile offshore between the bay

and the cape. A rocky ledge extends about 0.5 mile N from the

cape and is just awash at high water. 

8.25 Emu Bay (35°35'S., 137°32'E.) lies between Cape d’Estaing

and a rocky point about 3.5 miles to the E. The depths, which

are more than 9.1m in the middle of the bay, decrease gradually

toward the shore. 
206 Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 

Pub. 175

8.25 A jetty, about 110m long with a depth of 1.2m at its outer

end, extends from the W shore of the bay, but is no longer used

by commercial shipping. 

8.25 Good anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 9.1m, with the N

extremity of White Point, about 5 miles E of Cape d’Estaing, in

range 072° with the E rocky point of the bay. Smaller vessels

can anchor closer in 

8.25 The coast between Emu Bay and White Point is fronted by

high, dark cliffs. A rocky ledge, parts of which are awash, extends about 0.25 mile N from the point. 

8.26 Mount Marsden (35°35'S., 137°35'E.), round-topped

and wooded, rises to a height of 178m, about 1.25 miles SW of

White Point. East of White Point, the land becomes lower and

forms Boxing Bay. There are depths of 11m near the middle of

the bay, which gradually shoals toward the shore. 

8.26 Marsden Point (35°34'S., 137°37'E.), a rocky headland of

moderate height, stands 1.75 miles E of White Point. High

wooded land rises about 0.5 mile W of it. Marsden Point has

been reported to be a good radar target at distances up to 20

miles. A light is shown from about 0.5 mile W of the point. An

aeronautical light is situated about 9.5 miles SSW of Marsden

Point. 

8.26 Good anchorage can be taken, in depths of 7.3 to 11m, good

holding ground, with Marsden Point bearing between 325° and

314°, distant about 1 mile. This anchorage is out of the current

and is sheltered from W to NW. 

8.26 A detached 11m patch lies about 3.75 miles ESE of Marsden

Point.

Investigator Strait—North Side

8.27 The Althorpe Islands (paragraph 7.88) and Cape

Spencer (paragraph 7.90) have been previously described. 

8.27 The coast of the Yorke Peninsula between Cape Spencer and

Penguin Point, the W point of Marion Bay, 5 miles to the ENE,

forms three bays which have cliffy and rocky points with low

land to the N. The point 3 miles E of Cape Spencer is bold and

steep, with high, white cliffs to the W. Several rocky islets lie

about 0.2 mile offshore in a position midway between Cape

Spencer and this point. There is a reef between the islets and

the coast. 

8.28 Stenhouse Bay (35°16'S., 136°57'E.) lies between the

white cliffy point mentioned above and Rhino Head, a sloping

cliffy headland with a remarkable pinnacle rock on its extremity, about 1.5 miles E. This head resembles the head of a rhinoceros. 

8.28 A jetty extends 205m SE from the W shore of the bay, being

protected from the SW swell by the W point. The berth at the

head of the jetty, on its N side, is 115m long, with an alongside

depth of 6.9m. During SW weather, vessels lie off from the jetty. The jetty is equipped for bulk loading of gypsum. 

8.28 Foul ground exists about 100m SE of the head of the jetty;

the depth in the approach to the jetty is 6.7m. The hull of a sailing vessel was placed about 250m SSE of the head of the jetty

and sunk in that position. Part of the hulk is visible at low water. The jetty is now closed to commercial shipping. 

8.28 The currents within the bay set NNW and SSE at a rate of 1

knot. 

8.28 Pilotage is not compulsory. There is limited port radio service at Stenhouse Bay. 

8.29 Penguin Point (35°15'S., 136°58'E.), a low cliffy

point with sand hills at the back, lies about 1.25 miles NNE of

Rhino Head. A sunken reef extends about 0.1 mile from the

point. 

8.29 Marion Bay (35°14'S., 137°00'E.) lies between Penguin

Point and a cliffy point about 4.75 miles to the E. The head of

the bay is shallow and fouled by a rocky bottom. 

8.29 After a strong W gal,e heavy rollers set in from the S, and the

whole bay becomes a mass of breakers. 

8.29 A jetty, 267m long, with a depth of 2.1m at its head, extends

from the shore 0.75 mile N of Penguin Point. 

8.29 For a distance of about 1.5 miles E from the E point of Marion Bay, the coast is cliffy. From here to Hillock Point, a low,

rocky point with a hillock on it, about 0.5 mile farther E, the

coast is sandy. After SW gales, the sea breaks heavily more

than 0.5 mile seaward of these cliffs, off which the bottom is

rocky and uneven. 

8.29 Yorke Point (35°14'S., 137°10'E.), 55m high, lies 3 miles E

Stenhouse Bay—Jetty Signals

Signal Meaning

By day

One yellow ball Vessel must not berth

Two yellow balls, 

disposed vertically Vessels may berth

Two yellow balls, 

disposed horizontally

Vessel must proceed 

elsewhere

By night

One red light Vessel must not berth

One green light Vessel may berth

Stenhouse Bay Jetty 
Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 207

Pub. 175

of Hillock Point. An islet lies close under the cliff at the point.

Yorke Point has been reported to be a good radar target at distances up to 18 miles. 

8.30 Foul Bay (35°11'S., 137°15'E.) lies between a point

about 2 miles E of Yorke Point and Point Davenport, a low

sandy point about 8 miles NE. For a distance of about 1 mile N

of the W point of the bay, the coast is cliffy; from there the

shore of the bay consists of a low, sandy beach. 

8.30 Foul Bay is shallow, and the depths on its W part decrease

gradually to the shore, there being depths of 5.5m from 0.5 to 1

mile offshore. At the head of the bay and toward Point Davenport, the depths are very irregular, with rocky patches having

depths of 3.7 to 5.5m over them less than 1.5 miles offshore. 

8.30 The S swell sets into the bay, but in fine weather there is no

surf on the beach. The flood sets NNE into Foul Bay at a rate

of 1.5 knots; the ebb sets SW.

8.30 A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies 1 mile offshore, 3

miles WSW of Point Davenport. 

8.31 Point Davenport (35°10'S., 137°20'E.), which separates Foul Bay from Sturt Bay to the E, is very low and difficult

to make out from the S, as it is hardly a point on the beach. 

8.31 Point Davenport Shoal (35°11'S., 137°22'E.), with depths

of less than 5.5m, extends about 2.5 miles W and N from a position 3 miles SE of Point Davenport. 

8.31 There is a least depth of 10m in the narrow channel between

the shoal and the drying sand flat that extends from Point Davenport. Depths of less than 10m extend about 0.5 mile seaward

from the shoal. 

8.31 Sturt Bay (35°08'S., 137°27'E.), a bight in the coast between

Point Davenport and Gilbert Point, about 8.5 miles ENE, consists of a sandy beach with some sand dunes on its W part. A

level scrub-covered range, about 91m high, starts near Marion

Bay and extends almost parallel to the coast to abreast the head

of Sturt Bay, where it ends abruptly, forming a well-defined

high shoulder which is a good landmark. 

8.31 Cootes Hill (35°06'S., 137°28'E.) is a conspicuous, grassy

elevation at the head of Sturt Bay. It is 28m high and because

of its shape and the lowness of the adjoining land, it is conspicuous. Rocks, with depths of less than 1.8m, extend about 0.3

mile S from Gilbert Point. The depths in Sturt Bay decrease

gradually to the shore, there being depths of 9.1m about 1 mile

from the beach. 

8.31 Anchorages.—Sturt Bay provides good anchorage, in

depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, fine sand and clay, about 1 mile NE of

Point Davenport. Local knowledge is necessary to use this anchorage. Here there is protection from winds from NE through

N to SSE; Point Davenport Shoal completely breaks the SW

swell. With the wind strong between SE and NE, a short sea

sets in, which is made more unpleasant by the tidal currents,

which set NE and S at the anchorage. 

8.31 The shoulder, described above, bearing less than 359°, leads

into the bay, E of Point Davenport Shoal, in depths of not less

than 11m. When making for the anchorage, vessels should

steer for it until Point Davenport is identified, bearing 252°.

8.32 About 1 mile E of Point Gilbert is a point, backed by

sand hills, the highest of which is 20m high. A reef, awash, extends 0.2 mile SSW from this point and has depths of not more

than 1.8m for a further distance of 0.3 mile. 

8.32 Port Moorowie (35°07'S., 137°31'E.), an anchorage for vessels with a draft of not more than 3m, lies between the reef and

the coast N of it. The anchorage can only be used with local

knowledge. 

8.32 The tidal currents set E along the 20m curve on the flood,

following the direction of the coast;the ebb current sets W at a

rate of 1.5 knots at springs.

8.32 The coast between the E point of Port Moorowie and Troubridge Hill, 6 miles SE, is sandy for about 2 miles, and then becomes cliffy, with sand hills, about 43m high, behind the cliffs,

and with sandy beaches at the foot of the cliffs. Troubridge Hill

is 31m high, with a cliff face to the sea and a grassy slope on

the inland side. A light and a racon are situated on the hill. 

8.33 Troubridge Point (35°10'S., 137°41'E.), the W point

of the entrance to Gulf St. Vincent, is about 2 miles E of Troubridge Hill. The coast between is formed by a low cliff, with no

danger at a distance of more than 0.1 mile from it. 

8.33 Directions.—It is best to give the N shore of Investigator

Strait a wide berth. The N coast of Kangaroo Island, which

forms the S shore of the strait, has no offshore dangers, and is

very high and bold; on the N side of the strait, the depths vary

little and do not give warning of nearing shoals. If it is necessary to approach the Yorke Peninsula, depths of at least 24m

should be maintained.

Gulf St. Vincent

8.34 Gulf St. Vincent (35°00'S., 138°10'E.) lies between

the Yorke Peninsula and the Fleurieu Peninsula. When entering

the gulf, the high ranges of hills on its E side may be seen for a

considerable distance. 

8.34 Mount Lofty, the highest part of the range, rises near Adelaide to a height of 727m. It is visible from any part of the gulf

in clear weather, and is a good landmark. A white obelisk

stands near its summit, and three television towers standing together near the summit are conspicuous. 

Marion Bay Jetty
208 Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 

Pub. 175

8.34 Black Hill, 466m high, and Para Hill, 214m high, are located

5.5 and 11 miles N, respectively, from Mount Lofty. The summit of Mount Bonython is situated 0.5 mile N of Mount Lofty

and must not be confused with that summit. 

8.34 Small vessels anchor and work cargo off any of the beaches

in the gulf in fine weather, but the E shore between Cape Jervis

and Adelaide is exposed to W winds, and gales from that direction bring in a heavy sea. 

Gulf St. Vincent—West Side

8.35 The coast for a distance of 1 mile NNE of Troubridge

Point consists of a series of broken cliffs. From this position to

Sultana Point, 4 miles farther NE, the coast is formed by a

sandy beach, fronted by a drying flat of sand and rocks that extends from 0.5 to 0.75 mile offshore. 

8.35 Troubridge Shoals (35°08'S., 137°48'E.), with depths of

less than 10m over them, and including two large sandbanks

that dry, extend 5 miles E from Sultanta Point. Shoaling has

been reported S of the E of these two sandbanks. 

8.35 Troubridge Island, about 5m high, is located on the outer

drying sand bank, 3.25 miles E of Sultanta Point. A disused

light is situated on the W end of the island.

8.35 Marion Reef, which breaks, lies at the S end of Troubridge

Shoals, and has rocks with less than 1.8m over them. It is moderately steep-to on its S side. Marion Reef Lighted Buoy is

moored 0.25 mile SSE of the reef. 

8.35 Tapley Shoal (35°05'S., 137°56'E.), with general depths of

less than 10m and a least depth of 5.2m, lies 5 miles NE of

Troubridge Island (35°07'S., 137°50'E.). The depths over the

shoal vary due to the effect of the strong tidal currents on the

sandy bottom. The shoal is steep to on its E side and the bottom, of sand and weed, can easily be seen. Tapley Shoal Light

is shown from a pile at the N end of that shoal, 7 miles NE of

Troubridge Island. 

8.35 The tidal currents outside Troubridge Shoals run roughly

parallel with the coast, at a rate of 2 to 3 knots at springs. 

8.35 McIntosh Bank, with a depth of 17.3m, lies 8.5 miles ESE of

Troubridge Island. 

8.35 Macdonell Sound (35°03'S., 137°50'E.) is an open roadstead that lies N of Troubridge Shoal, between Tapley Shoal

and the coast. It is bordered on the N by a coastal bank, which

extends in places up to 7 miles offshore, and fronts the coast N

to Rogues Point. Macdonell Sound Lighted Beacon stands

about 6.5 miles NNE of Troubridge Shoals Light and marks the

S extremity of the coastal bank. The sound is entered between

this beacon and Tapley Shoal Light. Edithburg, Port Giles, and

Wool Bay are situated within the sound. 

8.35 The best anchorage in Macdonnell Sound is with Troubridge

Island bearing between 185° and 140°, distant 2 to 3 miles, in

depths of 9 to 12m, fine sand. 

8.35 Edithburgh (35°05'S., 137°45'E.) is a fishing port that is no

longer used by commercial shipping. It is situated 1.75 miles

NNW of Sultana Point. 

8.35 The coast between Edithburgh and Giles Point, 2.5 miles N,

forms a bay, most of which is encumbered by a drying flat of

mud and sand. 

8.35 Giles Point (35°03'S., 137°45'E.) is a rounded point, low

and grassy on its S side, and cliffy toward the N. Depths of less

than 5.5m extend more than 0.5 mile E from it.

8.35 Caution.—Marine farms, best seen on chart, have been established near Giles Point. Marine farms, which may be floating or fixed structures, and their associated moorings should be

avoided. The farms are generally marked by buoys or beacons,

which may be lit.

8.36 Port Giles (35°02'S., 137°46'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54255) consists of a jetty which extends E from the shore,

4 miles N of Edithburgh. The port is the administrative center

for Edithburgh. 

8.36 Grain is transported from the silos to the ships by a conventional belt conveyor and loaded by telescopic booms which can

feed into any hold without movement of a ship along the berth. 

Courtesy of Ed Kavaliunas and Malcom Macdonald’s Lighthouses of

Australia Page

Troubridge Hill Light

 Flinders Ports South Australia 

http://www.flindersports.com.au/about_loc_giles.htm
Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 209

Pub. 175

8.36 Winds.—The prevailing winds are from the NE. 

8.36 Tides.—The mean high water springs are 1.9m; mean high

water neaps are 1.5m. 

8.36 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel has a depth

of 13.5m. A jetty extends about 617m from the shore; a berth

on the N side of the jetty is 340m in length. The depth alongside is 14.7m. 

8.36 Vessels up to 40,000 dwt, with lengths up to 205m and

beams up to 29m, can be accommodated. The maximum loaded draft allowed is 12.2m. Berthing is done during daylight

hours only. 

8.36 Aspect.—Grain silos, which are conspicuous, are situated

near the root of the jetty. 

8.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and may be arranged for

through Port Adelaide. The pilot embarks about 2.5 miles E of

the jetty in Port Giles. 

8.36 Notice of arrival is required 24 hours in advance; the ETA

should be confirmed 4 hours before arrival. Entry is made on

slack water during daylight hours only. The pilot vessel is

equipped with radiotelephone.

8.37 Wool Bay (35°00'S., 137°45'E.), 1.75 miles N of Port

Giles, is about 0.3 mile in extent, with a high, cliffy bank behind its beach. A jetty, with depths of 2.4m at its outer end, extends 180m from the beach. The jetty is closed to commercial

shipping. 

8.37 A shoal, with depths of 5.2 to 6m, extends 2.5 miles SE from

a position 3 miles ENE of Wool Bay Jetty. 

8.37 Klein Point Jetty (Farquhar Jetty) (34°58'S., 137°46'E.), extends from the shore at Klein Point, the S point of a small cove,

2 miles N of Wool Bay Jetty. It is a T-head structure providing

a berth 150m long, with a depth of 6.5m alongside. The jetty

works limestone cargo exclusively. 

8.37 Anchorage may be taken with Wool Bay Jetty bearing 286°

and Giles Point bearing 202°, in depths of 11 to 12.8m. 

8.37 Small vessels, with local knowledge, anchor about 0.25 mile

off the jetty, in depths of 3.7 to 5.5m. 

8.37 The shore of Wool Bay, contained between Giles Point and

Oyster Point, 8 miles NNE, presents a line of cliffs from 18 to

27m, high, until within 1 mile of Oyster Point; the land behind

is slightly higher than the cliffs and has a flat, wooded outline. 

8.37 Oyster Point (34°55'S., 137°48'E.) is a low, sandy point that

projects E, about 0.5 mile from the general line of the coast. It

is not easily distinguished, but some huts on a grassy slope inside the point aid in recognition. 

8.37 Caution.—A dangerous wreck lies about 5.25 miles ESE of

Oyster Point.

8.38 The coast between Oyster Point and Black Point,

about 18 miles NNE, is a mixture of low cliffs and sandy

beaches, with a few prominent marks. 

8.38 Beach Point (34°52'S., 137°49'E.), 2.75 miles N of Oyster

Point, is cliffy, but the cliffs are much lower than those S of the

point. Beach Point may be identified by a patch of white sand

in a gully on its S side.

Oyster Bay (34°53'S., 137°49'E.) is contained between

South Spit, a sandy spit, which dries in patches, that extends 3

miles NE from Oyster Point, and Beach Point. It provides sheltered anchorage from all winds, for small vessels with local

knowledge, in a depth of 3.7m, with Oyster Point bearing 202°

and Beach Point about 270°. A light is shown from a beacon

off the N extremity of South Spit. 

8.38 Caution.—Marine farms, best seen on chart, have been established off Beach Point and Stansbury. Marine farms, which

may be floating or fixed structures, and their associated moorings should be avoided. The farms are generally marked by

buoys or beacons, which may be lit.

8.39 Stansbury (34°55'S., 137°48'E.) is a small town on

the shore of Oyster Bay, 0.5 mile WNW of Oyster Point. A water tower 58m high stands in Stansbury. 

8.39 The coast between Beach Point and Surveyor Point, about 6

miles NNE, is cliffy to within a distance of about 1 mile from

Surveyor Point. 

8.39 Surveyor Point (34°47'S., 137°52'E.) is similar in appearance to Oyster Point. The coast becomes cliffy about 1 mile N

of Surveyor Point. 

8.39 Dowcer Bluff (34°45'S., 137°52'E.), about 1.5 miles N of

Surveyor Point, is composed of white sand and limestone

spots. This bluff and two red cliffs N of it are conspicuous from

about 7 miles offshore. 

8.39 Streak Point, about 0.25 mile N of Dowcer Bluff, is so

named because of a narrow white mark down the face of the

cliff. The coast again becomes cliffy 1 mile N of Surveyor

Point, and continues so to Black Point, 9 miles farther N. If the

sun is not shining on these cliffs, the land presents a dark flat

outline, gradually rising to Black Point; the point itself, however, is a low projection from the beach. 

8.39 Orontes Bank (34°44'S., 138°00'E.), with depths of less

than 5.5m, extends 15 miles NNE from a position 5 miles E of

Beach Point; it consists of two extensive banks, which lie parallel to the coast, about 3 to 5 miles offshore, together with two

detached smaller patches. The whole shoal lies on the 10m previously-described coastal bank. Orontes Bank Light is shown

from a white metal hut on piles.

8.40 Port Vincent (34°46'S., 137°53'E.) is an open roadstead contained between Middle Spit, which dries in patches,

and the coast N of Surveyor Point. Port Vincent is a fishing

port only. At the small town of Port Vincent, situated close N

of Surveyor Point, there is a wharf with a berth 35m long on its

N side, having a depth of 3.4m alongside. The approach to the

wharf is indicated by a range. 

8.40 Good anchorage, for small vessels with local knowledge, in

a depth of 4m, may be taken with Streak Point bearing 326°,

and the first cliffy point S of Surveyor Point, and just inside

that point bearing 210°. 

8.40 A water tower, 52m high, stands 0.75 mile NW of Surveyor

Orontes Bank Light
210 Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 

Pub. 175

Point. 

8.40 North Spit is a drying spit that extends 1.5 miles NE from the

coast, 4.5 miles N of Surveyor Point. 

8.40 Port Julia, 7 miles N of Surveyor Point, has a jetty which

dries at low water. 

8.40 Black Point (Kooley Wurtie) (34°37'S., 137°54'E.) is a low

beach point about 9.5 miles N of Surveyor Point. A sandspit,

which dries in places, extends about 1.5 miles NE from Black

Point; it should be given a wide berth. 

8.40 Caution.—A fish haven, with a depth of 4.1m, lies 3 miles

ENE of Black Point. 

8.41 Port Alfred, which lies on the N side of Black Point,

affords shelter for small craft, in depths of 3.7m, sand and mud.

The anchorage is with Black Point bearing 162°, and a gap in

the cliff about 1.75 miles WNW of Black Point, bearing 270°. 

8.41 The coast for a distance of about 6 miles N from Black Point

is rocky with red and yellow-colored cliffs. There is a conspicuous red cliff, 32m high, 4 miles N of Black Point. 

8.41 A sandy beach succeeds the red cliffs for a distance of 4

miles. This beach forms two small points; the N one, on which

there are some houses, is known as Perara. The ridge of high

land approaches the coast at this point, then gradually rises N

toward Hummock Mount. The last of the red cliffs on this part

of the coast, commence about 1.5 miles N of Perara. They are

24m high and extend about 2 miles NE.

8.42 Ardrossan (34°26'S., 137°55'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54236) is an open roadstead located about 2.25 miles N of

Perara. It is primarily a dolomite exporting port but a considerable quantity of grain and some salt are also shipped. 

8.42 Tides—Currents.—Tides range from 1.8 to 3.1m. 

8.42 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel, 125m wide,

is dredged to a depth of 9.1m. 

8.42 BHP Jetty extends ESE from the shore and has a T-head

berth formed of dolphins. The berth is 409m in length and

dredged to a depth of 9m alongside. 

8.42 Vessels up to 46,000 dwt and up to 200m in length can be accommodated. 

8.42 Town Jetty extends about 415m from the shore about 1 mile

N of BHP Jetty; it has two berths at its head. The berths, and

the channel leading to them, have been dredged to a depth of

3m. 

8.42 Aspect.—Conspicuous grain silos are situated about 0.5

mile SSW of the root of the BHP Jetty.

8.42 The channel is entered close S of Androssan Lighted Beacon; range lights are situated SW of the berth. To assist in the

final approach to the berth, two beacons near the head of the

jetty bear 226° when in line. 

8.42 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for overseas vessels and

is recommended for other vessels. The pilot boards about 1

mile E of the berth. The port is equipped with VHF radio.

8.42 Regulations.—Vessels are required to have an underkeel

clearance of 10 per cent of their deep draft.

8.42 Vessels should send their ETA 24 hours in advance.

8.43 Mangrove Point (34°16'S., 138°01'E.) is located

about 11 miles NNE of Ardrossan. A light is shown from a pile

beacon at the point. 

8.43 Port Price (34°17'S., 138°00'E.), at the head of Will Creek,

which nearly dries, is situated at the S end of a shallow indentation close within Mangrove Point. There is a wharf at Will

Creek that is 80m long, with a depth of 1.5m alongside. 

8.43 Port Wakefield (34°12'S., 138°06'E.) forms the head of

Gulf St. Vincent between Mangrove Point and Sandy Point, 6.5

miles E, on the E shore. Its shores, which are generally

swampy, except in the S part on the W coast where there are

some red cliffs, is fronted by a flat of mud, sand, and weed,

which dries about 1.8m. 

8.43 Although large, the port is so encumbered with sand and

mud banks that only a small part is used for shipping. 

8.43 Ross Rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies near the head

of the gulf. 

8.43 Wakefield, a small town and fishing port, is situated at the

mouth of the Wakefield River, a tidal creek, 4.5 miles N of

Sandy Point. 

8.43 The creek and wharf, which dries at low water, can only be

used at high water, when there are depths of 3.7 to 4.3m in it

and at the wharf. The wharf is closed to commercial vessels. 

8.43 Anchorage can be obtained 2.5 miles WNW of Sandy Point,

with Bald Hill bearing about 103°, distant 3.5 miles, in depths

of 7.3 to 8.2m. 

8.43 Anchorage for smaller craft lies N of the above anchorage,

about 2.75 miles SW of Wakefield Wharf, in 3m. Should a vessel anchor in such shallow water as to ground, no damage is

likely to occur if care is taken to keep the vessel clear of her

own anchor, as the bottom, composed of sand and mud, is soft

everywhere, and there is no sea.

Gulf St. Vincent—East Side—Cape Jervis to Port

Stanvac

8.44 The coast between Cape Jervis and Adelaide, 50

miles NNE, is exposed to W winds, and a gale from that quarter throws in a heavy sea. On the approach of such a gale, vessels at anchor off this coast should put to sea and seek shelter in

Eastern Cove, on Kangaroo Island. The coast for a distance of

about 18 miles NE from Cape Jervis is bold, thence to the head

of the gulf it is very low, with sand hummocks on it. 

8.44 Cape Jervis (35°37'S., 138°06'E.), the W extremity of the

Fleurieu Peninsula, is a high bold headland having but little

vegetation. It is intersected by gullies and has several cliffy

projections. The W, and most prominent, of these projections,

referred to as The Cape, does not present so steep a face to the

sea as the other projections, but slopes down, gradually, from

the heights inland, of which Tree Hill, 345m high, 3 miles ESE

of Cape Jervis, is the most prominent. A light is shown from a

structure on the cape.

8.44 There is a boat harbor, with a jetty, 120m long and having a

depth of 2.6m alongside, within the rocks that extend about 0.2

mile offshore near the light. 

8.44 Rapid Head (35°31'S., 138°10'E.) projects N about 6 miles

NNE of Cape Jervis.

8.45 Rapid Bay (35°31'S., 138°11'E.), 1 mile E of Rapid

Head, is an open roadstead with a T-head jetty which extends

500m N from the shore. 

8.45 Depths—Limitations.—The T-head provides a berth 222m

long, icluding the dolphins, and has a depth of 8.8m alongside.

The jetty is equipped with bulk loading facilities, but the unit
Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 211

Pub. 175

does not traverse; ships must warp to load hatches in turn. 

8.45 The approach has a least depth of 9.1m. Vessels up to 22,000

dwt can be accommodated. It is recommended that vessels

berth during daylight hours only.

8.45 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but pilots can be arranged through Port Adelaide (see paragraph 8.51).

8.45 Regulations.—Vessels should contact the port on VHF

channel 16 to obtain berthing clearance.

8.45 Signals.—The following berthing signals are shown from

the jetty: 

8.46 Second Valley (35°31'S., 138°13'E.) is a cove formed

by a slight indentation in the coast 2.5 miles ENE of Rapid

Head. 

8.46 The rocky point on the W side of the cove is steep-to. It provides some protection to small vessels with local knowledge

from S winds, but the anchorage is exposed to W gales. A

heavy sea sets in on the approach of these gales, and vessels

should leave at the first sign of approaching bad weather. 

8.46 A shoal, with a least depth of 4.3m, lies about 1.5 miles offshore about 2.75 miles NE of Second Valley. There is a jetty,

with a depth of 4m at its head, projecting from the W point of

the cove. 

8.47 The Bungala River (35°27'S., 138°18'E.) enters the

sea through a sandy beach 8 miles NE of Rapid Head. The

townships of Normanville and Yankalilla are situated on the

banks of the river. 

8.47 Yankalilla Bay is contained between Second Valley and Carrickalinga Head, a bold headland, 9 miles NE. It affords good

anchorage, in depths of 12.8 to 16m, 1.25 miles NW of the

Bungala River. 

8.47 The coast between Bungala River and the S end of Carrickalinga Head is formed by a sandy beach. 

8.47 A range of hills, rising near the coast about 3 miles NE of

Carrickalinga Head, extends NE about 17 miles, then curves N

and W behind and beyond Port Adelaide. 

8.47 Carrickalinga Hill, 258m high, is 1.5 miles ESE of Carrickalinga Head. Mount Jeffcott, 333m high; Black Hill, 343m

high; and Mount Terrible, 385m high, are located 4, 5, and 9

miles, respectively, NE of Carrickalinga Hill. 

8.47 Aldinga Bay lies between Myponga Jetty, 3 miles NE of

Carrickalinga Head, and Snapper Point, 6 miles NE. It is open

to winds from about N to SW, but its S part is safe during S

winds. 

8.47 A drying reef extends about 0.25 mile NW from Snapper

Point. It fringes the coast for a distance of about 0.75 mile S

and ENE of it. Foul ground, with depths of less than 5m, extends 0.25 mile seaward of the drying reef. 

8.47 Port Willunga (35°16'S., 138°27'E.), which can be identified by its white cliffs, is an indentation in the coast between

Snapper Point and Blanche Point, 1.75 miles NNE. 

8.47 Anchorage can be obtained in Port Willunga, sheltered from

S winds by Snapper Point and the reef that extends from it. The

holding ground is good anywhere the depths exceed 7.3m, but

a heavy sea rolls in at times, and a vessel should leave the anchorage immediately on the approach of bad weather. 

8.48 Onkaparinga Head (35°10'S., 138°28'E.) is a cliffy

projection, 25m high, 5 miles N of Blanche Point. A ledge of

submerged rocks extends off the head and the Onkaparinga

River flows into the sea through a bar of shifting sand, close N

of the head. 

8.48 The coast between the mouth of the river and Witton Bluff,

about 1 mile N, is formed by a sandy beach, which is backed

by sandhills. Witton Bluff is a bold, red projection, 35m high. 

8.48 Port Noarlunga (35°09'S., 138°28'E.) is a safe harbor for

small vessels and lies between Onkaparinga Head and Witton

Bluff. Two narrow reefs, which dry 1.2m in places and lie

roughly parallel to the coast and about 0.2 mile offshore, extend about 0.85 mile NNW from a position about 0.55 mile N

of Onkaparinga Head. These two reefs are separated by Middle

Entrance Channel, which is very narrow, with depths of 6.4 to

14.6m within the entrance. There are lesser depths on the range

line which leads through Middle Entrance Channel. 

8.48 There are entrance channels both N and S of Middle Entrance Channel, but they are only suitable for vessels with local

knowledge. 

8.48 The coast in the vicinity of Witton Bluff consists of sand

hills, with occasional red cliffs NNE of the bluff. 

8.48 A fish haven, with a least charted depth of 15.8m, lies about

1 mile W of Witton Bluff. Another fish haven has been established 2.5 miles NW of the port, which can best seen on the

chart.

8.48 A spur of the Mount Lofty range reaches the coast near

Black Hill, about 4.5 miles N of Witton Bluff, changing the appearance of the coast from sandhills to abrupt cliffs. 

8.48 Horseshoe Reef, which dries, lies near the outer part of shoal

water that extends 0.5 mile offshore N of Witton Bluff. 

8.48 Caution.—A submarine pipeline extends about 0.5 mile

from the shore close N of Horseshoe Reef.

Cape Jervis Light

Signal Meaning

By day

One yellow ball Vessel may not berth

Two yellow balls, 

disposed vertically Vessel may berth

By night

One red light or 

red neon strip Vessel may not berth

One green light or 

green neon strip Vessel may berth
212 Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 

Pub. 175

8.49 Port Stanvac 35°07'N., 138°28'E.), an oil refinery

complex, is situated 2.5 miles NNE of Witton Bluff and terminated operations in April 2003. The following information is

being kept for continuity purposes should the refinery reopen

in the future. 

8.49 The terminal consists of an offshore SBM for handling crude

products and a pier, with an L-shaped head, for handling refined products. Port Stanvac is the deepest refinery port in Australia.

8.49 Winds—Weather.—From September to May, the prevailing

winds are from E to S; from June to August, the prevailing

winds are from SW through N.

8.49 Depths—Limitations.—The pier extends over a stone

causeway to an L-shaped head which provides one berth with a

depth of 10.6m alongside. Vessels up to 42,000 dwt, with a

maximum length of 183m and a maximum draft of 10.7m, can

be accommodated at the jetty.

8.49 A depth of 6.7m, marked on its SW side by a lighted buoy,

lies about 0.3 mile NE of the head of the jetty. 

8.49 The offshore SBM enables vessels up to 233,000 dwt, with a

maximum length of 345m and a maximum draft of 17.1m, to

discharge crude oil to the refinery. A submarine pipeline extends from the SBM, 2 miles SE to the shore.

8.49 The controlling depth in the approach to the SBM is 22.8m.

8.49 Aspect.—Two conspicuous chimneys, the N of which has a

flare, are situated about 0.5 mile E of the root of the pier. 

8.49 A conspicuous radio tower, 274m high, stands about 2.5

miles E of the pier; it may be seen from offshore in the vicinity

of Port Noarlunga. 

8.49 Anchorage.—The anchorage for crude carrier vessels, in

20m, hard sand, good holding ground, is with Marino Rocks

Light, described in paragraph 8.50, bearing 065°, distant 3.5

miles.

8.49 Product carriers anchor on the same bearing, 3 miles distant.

8.49 Caution.—Wrecks, with a least depth of 18m, lie 3 miles

WSW of the head of the jetty.

Gulf St. Vincent—East Side—Port Stanvac to

Port Adelaide

8.50 Hallets Cove (35°05'S., 138°30'E.) is a bight in the

coast located about 2 miles NE of Port Stanvac pier. From Hallets Cove, the coast remains rocky for about 2 miles to a sandy

beach, which continues N for about 4 miles to Glenelg. 

8.50 Marino Rocks (35°02'S., 138°30'E.), a 5.5m patch, lie about

0.5 mile offshore, 6.5 miles N of Witton Bluff. A patch with a

depth of 5.2m, lies outside the 5m line, 0.75 miles N of Marino

Rocks. Marino Rocks Light is shown from a structure about 4

miles NE of Port Stanvac Jetty. 

8.50 O’Halloran Hill, 200m high, stands 1.25 miles E of the light

structure. 

8.50 Holdfast Bay (34°59'S., 138°30'E.), the open roadstead off

the town of Glenelg, about 3.5 miles N of Marino Rocks, has

depths that decrease gradually from 11m, 2 miles offshore, to

3.7m 0.25 mile offshore. Southwest gales cause a heavy sea in

the roadstead, but the holding ground is good. 

8.50 Anchorage can be obtained, in depths of 9 to 11m, clay,

about 1.5 to 2 miles offshore, with Mount Lofty in line with

Glenelg church bearing 087°. The anchorage was at one time

the roadstead for Adelaide, but is now seldom used. 

8.50 The remains of a breakwater, 0.2 mile long, lie parallel with

the shore, and about 0.3 mile from it, off Glenelg. Lights are

shown from its N and S ends.

8.50 Glenelg church stands near the center of town. The town hall

tower is near the shore, 0.2 mile WNW of the church; a water

tower stands near the coast, 1 mile farther N. A pipeline extends 1.75 miles WSW from the coast in the vicinity of the water tower. 

8.50 Fish havens, marked by a buoy, lie off the coast in the vicinity of Glenelg. 

8.50 Patawalonga Creek opens into the sea close N of Glenelg; a

breakwater extends 30m NW from the S entrance point of the

creek. A boat haven lies within the creek entrance. An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated about 2.5 miles NE of Patawalonga Creek entrance; an aeronautical lighted beacon is shown at

times from a position about 0.75 mile NW of the radiobeacon. 

8.50 The seaside towns of Henley and Grange are situated 4 and 5

miles, respectively, N of Glenelg. 

8.50 The coast between Grange and Pelican Point, the NW extremity of the Lefevre Peninsula, 8 miles N of Grange, consists

of a sandy beach, backed by the buildings of the NW districts

of Adelaide. 

8.50 Point Malcolm, 5.5 miles S of Pelican Point, is the W extremity of the peninsula. Semaphore Jetty is a promenade jetty

extending 0.3 mile offshore, 1 mile N of Point Malcolm; Largs

Bay Jetty, extends 320m offshore about 1 mile farther N. 

8.50 Wonga Shoal (34°50'S., 138°28'E.), with depths of less than

5m, extends 2.25 miles in a NW direction from Point Malcolm.

There are depths of 2.4 to 3.7m within 0.75 mile of its outer

end. 

8.50 A detached 5.2m patch lies 0.4 mile NW of the outer end of

Wonga Shoal; midway between this patch and Entrance Lighted Beacon, 2 miles NW, depths of 6.7 and 7m are charted. 

8.50 Largs Bay is located in the vicinity of Wonga Shoal. Wrecks,

with 11m and 14.6m over them, lie 3.25 miles and 7 miles, respectively, W of Largs Bay Jetty.

Port Adelaide (34°50'S., 138°30'E.)

World Port Index No. 54220

8.51 Port Adelaide is the capital port of South Australia.

The port is comprised of the Outer Harbor and Inner Harbor,

which are both situated along the Port Adelaide River. 

8.51 Outer Harbor, situated within the breakwaters at the entrance

to the Port Adelaide River, has deep-water wharves; it is intended for the accommodation of large vessels and is regularly

used by mail and passenger vessels. The port also provides facilities for petroleum product, general cargo, container, ro-ro,

and fishing vessels.

8.51 The Port Control Center, 40m high, is situated in the Outer

Harbor at the S end of No.1 Berth. The center is equipped with

radiotelephone, and all maritime channels are monitored. The

station is manned continuously; the call sign is Adelaide Outer

Harbor. The station controls all shipping movements in the port

and is fitted with radar.

Flinders Ports South Australia 

http://www.flindersports.com.au/about_loc_ade.htm
Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 213

Pub. 175

Winds—Weather

8.51 In the morning the wind, from N to E, is from the land. During the afternoon, the sea breeze comes from the SW, except in

winter, when it is mainly from between W and N. The heaviest

gales occur in May, June, July, and August. 

8.51 Occasionally, a depression from the interior of the continent,

or the center of a tropical hurricane from the W coast of Australia, may reach the S coast. The latter usually loses much of

its intensity by the time it has moved so far S and its winds are

seldom destructive. 

8.51 Vessels may inquire by telephone direct to Adelaide Weather

Bureau for the latest information regarding marine weather

conditions and forecasts. Weather forecast signals are displayed at the Customs House, which overlooks the harbor.

Tides—Currents

8.51 The mean tidal ranges in the Outer Harbor and in Port Adelaide are 2.4m springs and 2.0m at neaps. Strong NW winds

may raise the sea level up to 1.2m above normal, while continuous SE winds may depress it by 0.5m. 

8.51 The tidal currents between Wonga Shoal and the Port Adelaide River entrance turn S about 1 hour before HW and to the

N about 1 hour before LW. The flood sets N and the ebb sets S

across the dredged channel entrance. 

8.51 Between the breakwaters and in the river to Port Adelaide,

the current turns at the time of high and low water. The velocity

of the current is greatest between the river entrance and North

Arm, but it seldom exceeds 3 knots.

Depths—Limitations

8.51 The entrance to the Outer Harbor, and to the river, is through

dredged channels marked by lighted beacons and indicated by

ranges. The entrance channel to Outer Harbor has a maintained

depth of 14.2m.

8.51 The main swinging basin in Outer Harbor is about 550m in

length, 420m wide, and dredged to a depth of 11m. A swinging

basin in the vicinity of the container terminal is about 460m in

diameter and dredged to 12m. 

8.51 The Outer Harbor wharf constitutes a total of six berths.

Berth information is given in the accompanying chart.

8.51 The dredged channel in the Port Adelaide River to Inner

Harbor (Port Adelaide Harbor), a distance of about 7 miles, is

well-marked by lighted beacons and lighted ranges. 

8.51 The main channel is dredged to a depth of 9.1m as far as No.

2 Dock, and then 8.2m to the Birkenhead Bridge. Above the

bridge, the river is dredged to a depth of 6.1m. 

8.51 The Inner Harbor, located over a 4-mile stretch of the river,

consists of numerous berthing facilities on both banks. Depths

alongside range from 7.5m to 11.2m. The location of the

wharves can best be seen on the chart. 

8.51 Generally, vessels up to 81,000 dwt, with a maximum draft

of 11.3m, can be accommodated at the Outer Harbor. Vessels

up to 29,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 206m and a maximum draft of 10.8m, can be accommodated at the Inner Harbor. 

8.51 A fishing harbor is situated close within North Arm at the Inner Harbor. North Haven, a small craft basin protected by

breakwaters, is situated close S of the entrance to Outer Harbor. 

8.51 Power cables span the river at points 1, 1.75, and 3 miles

above the Quarantine Station. The cables have a vertical clearance of 54m and are suspended from towers, 110m high, situated on each side of the river. 

8.51 A fourth set of power cables, with a vertical clearance of

59m, spans the river about 0.6 mile above the Quarantine Station.

8.51 Submarine gas pipelines cross the river close N of the ETS

Power Station in the vicinity of 34°48'23"S and about 1 mile S

of this position in the vicinity of 34°49'30"S. Another submaCSX World Terminals Adelaide 

http://www.csxwt.com./Terminals/Adelaide/

Adelaide—Outer Harbor Berth Information

Berth Length Depth Remarks

No. 1 185m 11.5m General cargo 

and livestock

No. 2 183m 11.2m Cruise/ro-ro

No. 3 150m 11.2m Car Carriers

No. 4 214m 11.2m Car Carriers

No. 6 300m 13.2m Containers

No. 7 210m 13.2m Containers

Adelaide—Inner Harbor Berth Information

Berth Length Depth Remarks

Osborne 1 208m 10.0m

Penrice 120m 7.5m Bulk soda

No. 16 160m 9.3m General

No. 17 169m 9.3m General

No. 18 178m 10.0m General

No. 19 168m 10.0m General

No. 20 163m 10.0m General

No. 25 240m 10.2m W. Mine Corp.

No. 27 204m 10.9m Bulk grain

No. 29 245m 10.0m General 

H 304m 11.2m Cement

K 171m 7.5m Limestone

M 205m 9.7m Petroleum

N 150m 8.7m Petroleum

Adelaide—Outer Harbor Berth Information

Berth Length Depth Remarks
214 Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 

Pub. 175

rine gas pipeline runs parallel to the shore and N from the quarantine station.

Aspect

8.51 Prominent landmarks in the approach to Port Adelaide are

Mount Lofty (34°59'S., 138°43'E.), 727m in elevation, and the

Port Control signal station on the S side of the harbor entrance. 

8.51 Conspicuous landmarks include a water tower, 76m high,

about 2 miles S of Pelican Point; a three-story hotel situated

near the root of Largs Bay Jetty; and a water tower, about 30m

high, close SE of the root of Semaphore Jetty. 

8.51 In the vicinity of the Inner Harbor, the conspicuous landmarks include the chimney of the Quarantine Station on the E

bank about 1.25 miles SE of Pelican Point; a chimney, 82m

high, on the W bank about 2 miles S of the same point; and two

chimneys, the highest with an elevation of 163m and marked

by red obstruction lights, on the E bank about 1.75 miles S of

the Quarantine Station.

8.51 Entrance Channel Lighted Beacon, which marks the entrance to the approach channel, is shown from a tripod structure, 11m high, 2.5 miles W of the entrance between the

breakwaters. Vessels should pass N of the Fairway Beacon and

approach the channel with the range beacons in line with the

NE of the two conspicuous chimneys in the Inner Harbor at the

power station on the E bank.

Pilotage

8.51 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels entering Outer Harbor or

Port Adelaide Harbor. The pilot station is at the signal tower.

Incoming vessels are usually boarded 2 mile W of Entrance

Lighed Beacon. Pilotage is available 24 hours, but vessels are

not turned in the harbor at night. Pilots must be requested 2

hours in advance, or 4 hours in advance if outside of office

hours, to the harbormaster. Vessels must maintain a continuous

listening watch on VHF channel 16.

8.51 Pilotage is also provided for Port Giles and Rapid Bay.

8.51 Notice of arrival is required 24 hours in advance; the ETA

should be confirmed 4 hours before arrival.

Regulations

8.51 A copy of the harbor regulations should be obtained on arrival. The following information is taken from these regulations.

A vessel arriving within 5 miles of Fairway Beacon should, by

day, hoist its name, and the name of the port from which it has

come, by the International Code of Signals. At night, similar

signals should be made by light.

8.51 Should the customs boat, showing the customs flag and pennant by day, or a flashing light by night, appear in any part of

the gulf, ships should heave to and remain so during the time

the customs officer is on board, or until permission is given to

proceed. 

8.51 Vessels should not proceed at a speed greater than 7 knots

between Beacon No. 6 and Beacon No. 12 or when S of Beacon No. 27.

8.51 Vessels should not proceed at a greater speed than 4 knots

while in any part of the harbor or river channel between the

fairway beacons and the Jervois Bridge; when abreast of any

vessel moored at a wharf or any established mooring place, or

within 200m upstream or downstream or any such area; or

within 200m of any dredge or marine works; or in North Arm

between Beacon No. 36 and Grand Trunkway Bridge.

8.51 Ships are required to have an underkeel clearance of 10 per

cent of the maximum draft and a minimum keel clearance of

0.9m.

Anchorage

8.51 Vessels are prohibited from anchoring in the approaches to

the entrance channel. A prohibited anchorage zone has been

established approximately 6 miles NW of the breakwater entrance and can best be seen on the chart. Vessels anchor according to their draft, clear of the channel and navigational

aids. 

8.51 An anchorage area, with a depth of 18m, lies approximately

1 mile W of the pilot boarding area. A wreck, with a depth of

14.6m, lies about 1.25 miles SSE of this anchorage. 

8.51 Vessels should take care not to anchor near the historic

wreck which lies about 2.3 miles SSE of Fairway Beacon.

Gulf St. Vincent—East Side—Port Adelaide to

Cape Jervis

8.52 Torrens Island, a low island which forms the E bank

of the Port Adelaide River, has a range of sand hills in its SW

part. The greater part of the island is covered with mangroves.

A drying sand spit extends about 2.5 miles NW from the N end

of Torrens Island, and forms the N side of the entrance to the

Port Adelaide River. 

8.52 A beacon stands about 3 miles NE of Fairway Beacon and

marks the N limit of a spoil ground. 

8.52 A lighted beacon marks the NW extremity of the sand spit

and another beacon marks the SW extremity. A channel for

small craft lies between Torrens Island and the sand spit on the

W side and the mainland on the E. 

8.52 St. Kilda (34°45'S., 138°32'E.) is situated on the mainland,

about 1.5 miles NE of the N end of Torrens Island. Port Gawler

is a small creek that enters the gulf 6.5 miles NW of St. Kilda. 

8.53 The coast between Port Gawler and Great Sandy

Point, about 14 miles NNW, is low and swampy. It consists of

alternating sandy beaches and mangrove coast. The depths decrease gradually to the sand flat that fronts this coast, and

depths of less than 5m extend about 8 miles offshore W of

Great Sandy Point. Depths of less than 11m extend 12 miles

SW from Great Sandy Point, forming Long Spit Shoal. The

least depths over the shoal consist of isolated patches of 6.1m,

in the vicinity of Long Spit Light, which stands about 9.5 miles

SW of Great Sandy Point.

8.53 The coast between Great Sandy Point and Sandy Point, the E

entrance point of Port Wakefield, 14 miles NNW, is a continuous low sandy beach. Foul ground extends 3 miles offshore between Great Sandy Point and Sandy Point. A rock, with a depth

of 1.5m, lies 3.75 miles NW of Great Sandy Point.

8.54 Sandy Point (34°16'S., 138°09'E.), 13.5 miles NNW

of Great Sandy Point, is a low mangrove point fronted by a

drying sand spit that extends 2 miles offshore. A low, wooded
Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 215

Pub. 175

range that rises above the mangrove swamp between Sandy

Point and Wakefield, about 5 miles to the N, ends in Bald Hill,

18m high, 1 mile within the point. 

8.54 Bald Spit extends about 2.25 miles WSW of Sandy Point;

the spit has depths of less than 5m.

8.54 A historic wreck lies about 4 miles NNW of Long Spit

Light; unauthorized diving is prohibited in the vicinity of the

protected zone around the wreck.

8.54 A prohibited area, marked by lighted beacons and the limits

of which may best be seen on the chart, is situated adjacent to

the shore S of Sandy Point.

Cape Jervis to Cape Northumberland

8.55 The coast between Cape Jervis (35°37'S., 138°06'E.)

and the Murray River, about 39 miles E, presents a varied appearance, from the bold rocky hills in the W to the sandhills

close W of the Murray River which gradually fall to the flat,

bare white sand near the river. 

8.55 The coast trends 1.25 miles S from Cape Jervis to Lands

End, then 6.25 miles ESE to Porpoise Head; it is bold and

rocky, with high scrub-covered hills intersected by steep ravines. Porpoise Head has been reported to be a good radar target at a distance of 20 miles. 

8.55 Tunk Head projects S from the coast about 7 miles E of Porpoise Head. There is a bold, cliffy point 2 miles E of Tunk

Head, and 5.5 miles farther E is Newland Head, formed by a

steep cliff. The coast immediately W of Newland Head is

sandy, with rocky points between the beaches and backed by

high land. 

8.55 The depths offshore between Cape Jervis and Newland Head

exceed 16.5m, except SE of Porpoise Head, where the 20m

curve lies about 2.5 miles offshore. 

8.55 A strong tidal current is located about 1 mile offshore between Cape Jervis and Lands End. 

8.55 A detached 16.5m patch lies 2.5 miles SSE of Lands End. 

8.56 Newland Head (35°39'S., 138°31'E.) is the W extremity of Encounter Bay and the Murray River, 18 miles ENE,

marks its E extremity. 

8.56 The coast between Newland Head and Rosetta Head, about 5

miles NE, is formed by a high, steep cliff, which becomes low

and grassy toward Rosetta Head. Newland Head has been reported to give strong radar returns from a distance of 22 miles. 

8.56 Rosetta Head is a grassy mound, 97m high, cliffy on its E

side, and covered with granite boulders; it is steep-to on its E

and S sides. 

8.56 From Rosetta Head, the coast trends 5 miles NE to Freeman

Nob. The appearance of the land backing this coast is that of

gently sloping hills, rising to an elevation of 150 to 175m,

about 2 miles inland, with wooded summits and cultivated

sides, broken N of Victor Harbor by the gap formed by the

Hindmarsh River as it flows toward the sea. 

8.57 West Island (35°37'S., 138°35'E.) lies 1 mile SW of

Rosetta Head, abreast a small projection on the coast. The island is 40m high and steep-to on its seaward side, but there is a

rocky ledge, which generally breaks, between it and the coast. 

8.57 Wright Islet, 24m high, lies 0.35 mile NNE of Rosetta Head;

Granite Island lies 1.75 miles farther NE. 

8.57 Seal Rock is a mass of granite boulders, 12m high, located 1

mile SE of Granite Island, which shows a light from its E end.

A rock, with depths of 8.2m and on which the sea breaks with a

heavy swell, lies 0.25 mile E of Seal Rock. 

8.57 A reef, on which the sea breaks heavily, extends 0.2 mile W

of Seal Rock; a rocky ledge, with a depth of 4m in places, connects this reef to the foul ground that fronts the coast W of it.

The sea breaks heavily over this ledge, in places, during SW

gales.

8.58 Victor Harbor (35°34'S., 138°38'E.) (World Port Index No. 54190) lies at the head of a bight that is formed between Granite Island and Freeman Nob, 2.75 miles NE. A

causeway connects the N side of Granite Island to the mainland

NW and a breakwater extends about 0.15 mile ENE from the E

side of the island. 

8.58 There is some protection in the harbor except during SE

winds. 

8.58 A jetty, with depths alongside of 4.5 to 5.5m, extends from

the island near the root of the breakwater; it is closed to commercial shipping. A light is shown from the head of the jetty. 

8.58 Anchorage can be obtained, in depths of less than 9m, rock,

with a thin coating of sand; the anchorage is not good. 

8.58 Vessels bound for Victor Harbor should round Seal Rock at a

distance of not less than 0.5 mile, however, during a SW gale

or with a heavy swell that follows one, it is advisable to give it

a berth of 1 mile. After rounding the rock, steer N and then approach the anchorage on a safe bearing of Bracken House, 1.25

miles NNW of Granite Island. 

8.59 Freeman Nob (35°33'S., 138°41'E.) is the E extremity of Victor Harbor. A white obelisk is situated on its summit. 

8.59 Port Elliot is a bight in the coast lying between Freeman Nob

and Commodore Point, 0.35 mile NE. The port is used only by

boats and small local vessels. 

8.59 Pullen Island, a mass of granite boulders, 6m high, lies about

0.35 mile E of Freeman Nob. 

8.59 The Sisters, two above-water rocks, lie 0.15 mile NNW of

Pullen Island and The Twins, a detached shoal with two rocks

nearly awash, lie 0.1 mile E of Freeman Point. No attempt

should be made to pass between Pullen Island and Freeman

Nob. 

8.59 From Commodore Point, the coast trends SE about 10 miles

Long Spit Light
216 Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 

Pub. 175

to the entrance of the Murray River. 

8.59 The coast from Middleton, about 2 miles NE of Commodore

Point, to the Murray River is backed by bush-covered sand

hills, about 24m high, which slope gradually downward until

within 1 mile of the Murray River, which is a flat of bare white

sand. 

8.59 Frenchman Rock, awash, lies about 0.75 mile NE of Commodore Point. About 3.5 miles E of Frenchman Rock, a shoal

patch, with depths of 7.3m, extends 1 mile offshore. 

8.59 Heavy surf rolls in from Middleton to the entrance to the

Murray River.

8.60 The Murray River (35°35'S., 138°53'E.), the longest

river in Australia at 1,600 miles, enters the sea through the

large, but shallow, Lake Alexandrina lagoon. A system of barrages, also including locks, provides a navigable channel with

a depth of 1.8m, between Goolwa (35°30'S., 138°47'E.), 7

miles within the mouth of the river, and Mildura, a town situated on the river about 300 miles from the mouth. 

8.60 The entrance, now but rarely used, is obstructed by a bar that

extends 0.75 mile seaward of it, which is constantly shifting

and altering in extent, depth, and position. The bar, consisting

of sand, shells, and small stones, usually breaks heavily across

the entrance, except in exceptionally quiet weather. There are

depths on the bar from 2.1 to 2.4m; however, within 2 hours

before or after HW, depths of 3 to 3.4m might be depended on

as the least water, except for 3 or 4 days during neap tides with

SE winds, when there are depths of barely 3m at HW. 

8.60 In the entrance to the Murray River, the outgoing current is

strongest at low water, the ordinary rate then being 3 knots on

the surface in the deep part and 4 knots on the bar. 

8.60 Without local knowledge of the bar, no attempt should be

made to enter the Murray River. There is no difficulty in navigating to Goolwa for any craft not exceeding 1.8m draft that

can cross the bar. 

8.60 The Murray River is no longer used by any commercial shipping. The coast between the Murray River and Cape Jaffa, at

the S end of Lacepede Bay, 91 miles SSE, is formed by a continuous sandy beach. 

8.60 This coast is backed along the whole distance to Kingston by

sand hills, from 27 to 50m high, which are so alike it is difficult

to identify any of them, though some of the bare patches might

be identified. At a distance of 6 to 7 miles offshore, however,

no marks can be made out. 

8.60 The surf is heavy at all times, and in W and SW gales, extends from 3 to 4 miles offshore in places. 

8.60 Granite Rocks (36°40'S., 139°51'E.) are two conspicuous

rocks located on the beach near the sea; the larger of the two is

6m high. These rocks show black against the sand, and some

drying rocks extend about 100m seaward from them. 

8.60 Sunken rocks. with depths of 8.2 to 9.1m, lie from 2 to 5.5

miles NNW of Granite Rocks. 

8.60 Nation Rock lies 1 mile SW of Granite Rocks; it has a pinnacle, which dries 0.6m, but the sea seldom breaks on the rock. A

small rock, with a depth of 2.1m, lies 1 mile SW of Nation

Rock.

8.61 Lacepede Bay (36°50'S., 139°44'E.) is formed by a

bight in the coast between Granite Rocks and Cape Jaffa, about

19 miles SSW. The sandy shore is backed by sandhills, gradually decreasing in height, for a distance of 7 miles S of Granite

Rocks. 

8.61 Kingston is situated on the S side of the entrance to Maria

Creek, at the head of the bay. 

8.61 Between Kingston and Cape Jaffa, the land is low and

swampy, with a wooded bank behind the sandy beach; there is

a prominent white sand patch on the bank above the beach, 9

miles SW of Kingston. 

8.61 Port Caroline (36°49'S., 139°48'E.), an open roadstead, is

the name given to the anchorage off the town of Kingston,

which is a fishing port only. The jetty at Kingston extends

412m from the shore, and has a depth of 2.4m alongside; it is

closed to commercial shipping. A light is shown from the end

of the jetty. A conspicuous water tower is situated 0.55 mile SE

of the root of the jetty. There are several marine farms in the vicinity.

8.61 Anchorage.—A vessel may anchor safely, according to

draft, anywhere between Kingston and Cape Jaffa, in depths of

less than 9.1m. 

8.61 The anchorage off Kingston, for vessels of moderate draft, is

with the light on the jetty bearing 109°, 1.75 miles distant, in

depths of 8m, sand and weed. 

8.61 Lacepede Bay, although exposed to ocean swell, affords safe

anchorage in all weathers even in W gales. 

8.62 Cape Jaffa (36°58'S., 139°40'E.) is a low sandy

point; its sea face is about 1 mile long. A wooded range rises

near the S part of the cape and reaches a height of 77m at

Mount Benson, about 8.5 miles SE. A group of dwellings,

called King’s Camp, are situated 0.5 mile E of the NW extremity of the cape. An historic wreck, which is protected from unauthorized interference, lies 3.6 miles W of Cape Jaffa.

8.62 Margaret Brock Reef is an extensive danger, with depths of

less than 3.6m, the outer extremity of which lies 4.5 miles W of

Cape Jaffa. A light is shown from a rock, that dries 2m, near

the center of the reef. The extremities of the reef do not always

break; however, the sea often breaks in bad weather, up to a

distance of 5 miles outside the reef, and with such violence as

to jeopardize a small, deeply laden vessel. 

8.62 North Rock, with a least depth of 2.1m over its N extremity

and on which the sea breaks at times, lies 1.5 miles N of the

light. An obstruction was reported (1956) 1 mile N of North

Rock. 

8.62 South Breaker is a 3.7m patch 2.75 miles S of the light. Several patches, on which the sea breaks at times, lie between

South Breaker and Margaret Brock Reef. 

8.62 Vessels bound for Kingston first make Margaret Reef Light.

When rounding the reef, keep in depths of 28m to ensure passing more than 2 miles from any part of it. 

8.62 There is an appreciable tidal current in Lacepede Bay, but

both inside and outside Margaret Brock Reef, there is a strong

N set after E winds; this N current, setting NE round Cape Jaffa, causes a set toward the reef.

8.63 Cape Thomas (37°05'S., 139°45'E.) lies about 8

miles SSE of Cape Jaffa. 

8.63 The coast for about 3 miles S of Cape Jaffa is lined with sandhills that rise to a height of 22m. Farther S, it is formed by a

low bank which continues as far as Cape Thomas. The wooded

range that rises near the S part of the cape forms the back-
Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 217

Pub. 175

ground for this coast. 

8.63 Rocks and foul ground extend up to 2 miles offshore along

this coast, which must not be approached to closely. 

8.63 Guichen Bay (37°09'S., 139°46'E.) is contained between

Cape Thomas and Cape Dombey, 5 miles S. The E shore of the

bay, for a distance of about 6 miles S of Cape Thomas, is

formed by a sandy beach with a low bank behind it. The inland

wooded range, 3 miles from the beach, is about 30m high. The

S shore of the bay is composed of rocky points and sandy bays. 

8.63 There are depths of 9.1 to 11m over the greater part of the

bay. 

8.63 A rocky point projects S about 0.75 mile ESE of Cape Thomas; drying rocks extend a short distance offshore from the S

shore of the bay. 

8.63 The Godfrey Islands (37°05'S., 139°43'E.), lying 1.25 miles

SW of Cape Thomas, are a rugged broken group of above-water rocks, the highest being 12m. 

8.63 Foul ground lies between the rocks and the cape. The sea

breaks over the submerged rocks that lie about 0.3 mile N of

the N rock of this group. 

8.63 The Black Pigs, awash at LW, are located 0.75 mile SSE of

the Godfrey Islands; rocky reefs with depths of less than 5m

over them lie between. 

8.64 Cape Dombey (37°10'S., 139°44'E.) is the NW extremity of the headland forming the S point of Guichen Bay. A

light is shown at the cape. 

8.64 Snewin Rock, with a depth of 7.9m and with depths of more

than 14.6m all round, lies 2.25 miles NW of Cape Dombey; it

breaks only when there is a high W swell. 

8.64 South Reef, composed of rocks, awash, extends 0.6 mile NW

from Cape Dombey. The sea nearly always breaks on this reef;

it should be given a wide berth. 

8.64 A shoal patch, with a depth of 7.9m, lies about midway between South Reef and Snewin Rock. A 6.7m patch lies 0.25

mile NNW of South Reef. 

8.64 Robe (37°10'S., 139°45'E.), a fishing port, is situated on the

S shore of Guichen Bay, about 0.5 mile E of Cape Dombey. 

8.64 A jetty extends 150m ENE from the E side of the headland,

0.35 mile ESE of Cape Dombey. The jetty, which is closed to

commercial shipping, has depths of 3m alongside. Robe Light

is shown from a tower about 0.5 mile SE of Cape Dombey. A

racon bouy is situated near to the south of Robe Light. 

8.64 Anchorage, in a depth of 7m, fine sand, with Cape Dombey

bearing 260° and Robe Light bearing 172°, is safe with SE

winds, which are most frequent from November to April. With

W and NW winds, which are frequent from May to October, it

is unsafe. 

8.64 Caution.—Heavy breakers may be encountered at times

about 1.5 miles E of Cape Dombey. 

8.65 Cape Lannes (37°12'S., 139°44'E.) projects W from

the coast about 1.5 miles S of Cape Dombey. A reef extends 1

mile WNW from Cape Lannes; there are some above-water

rocks at the inshore end of the reef. 

8.65 The coast between Cape Lannes and Cape Martin, about 23

miles SE, consists of alternate rocky points and sandy beaches,

backed by sand hills that are more than 30m high.

8.65 Bishop’s Pate is a round bare sand hill that rises to a height

of 34m in a position near the coast 4 miles SSE of Cape

Lannes. 

8.65 Rabelais Peak is a conspicuous pointed hill that rises to a

height of 48m in a position near the coast about 5 miles farther

SSE. A wooded range, which rises to a height of 77m about 5

miles inland from Rabelais Peak, is seen above the coastal

range when more than 5 miles offshore. Between this range

and the coastal sandhills there are four large salt lakes. 

8.65 Drying rocks and some isolated submerged patches extend

up to 1 mile offshore along the coast between Cape Lannes and

Rabelais; the sea breaks heavily on this coast. A number of

bare sand hills, which rise above the S stretch of this coast, are

conspicuous when viewed from S; the highest of these is 33m

high. Farther S, between these bare sand hills and Cape Martin,

the hills are higher and not so bare. A green-colored point,

backed by a wooded hill, 47m high, projects SW from the

coast, about 8 miles NNW of Cape Martin. The coast between

the point and Cape Martin becomes more cliffy than that farther NW. 

8.65 The coastal waters between Cape Lannes and Rabelais Peak

are encumbered by rocks, which dry, and some isolated submerged patches, extending up to 1 mile offshore in places; the

sea breaks heavily on this coast and landing is impossible. 

8.65 A reef lies roughly parallel with the coast for a distance of

6.5 miles SE of Rabelais Peak, and extends 1.5 miles offshore

near its S end. The depths abreast the conspicuous sandhills are

irregular for a distance of about 3 miles offshore and for a distance of 3 miles SE of them, causing high rollers and overfalls

when the swell is high. 

8.65 The coast for about 2 miles NW of Cape Martin is fringed

with reefs and submerged rocks, which extend up to 0.35 mile

offshore in places. 

8.65 Vessels transiting between Guichen Bay and Rivoli Bay at

night should maintain depths of not less than 37m and ensure

being at least 5 miles offshore.

8.66 Cape Martin (37°30'S., 140°01'E.), 25m in elevation,

projects S from the coast at the NW corner of Rivoli Bay. The

cape is fringed by a reef;a large detached reef lies close NW. A

light is shown from a structure about 0.5 mile N of the S exCourtesy of Grant and Tracey’s Lighthouse Page

Robe Light
218 Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 

Pub. 175

tremity of the cape. 

8.66 Rivoli Bay (37°33'S., 140°05'E.) is an indentation in the

coast between Cape Martin and Cape Buffon, about 6.25 miles

SE. 

The central part of Rivoli Bay is obstructed by numerous

reefs, rocky patches, and shoals and is dangerous for navigation. A marine farm lies at the northernmost end of the bay.

8.66 Glen Point is a rocky point located 0.5 mile NE of Cape

Martin. A sandy beach forms the shore of the bay between

Glen Point and the promontory of Cape Buffon, at the S end of

the bay.

8.66 Lake George approaches within 0.15 mile of the shore close

N of Glen Point. East of the lake, the sandy beach is backed by

a range of sand hummocks, about 18.3m high. A range of

wooded hills, 46 to 55m high, parallel the E shore, at a distance

of 2 to 3 miles inland. 

8.66 Lake Frome, a freshwater lake, lies about 1 mile E of the S

end of the bay. Freshwater swamps extend for a distance of

nearly 0.25 mile from Lake Frome toward the beach.

8.67 Penguin Islet (37°31'S., 140°01'E.), 16m high, is a

rocky islet lying close SE of Cape Martin. On its N end there is

a perpendicular cleft down to the water’s edge; when open to

the E and W, the cleft is a good mark. A white stone tower, formerly a lighthouse, stands on the S part of the islet. 

8.67 A rock, awash, lies about 0.25 mile SSE of Glen Point. 

8.67 De Mole Reef, with depths of 4.5m and which breaks in a

moderate swell, lies about 1 mile E of Penguin Islet.

8.67 The W extremity of Ringwood Reef, which has depths of

less than 1.8m, is the outermost danger, and lies 2 miles SSE of

Penguin Islet; some parts of this reef always break. 

8.67 West Rock, with depths of 4.9m and on which the sea breaks

heavily at times, lies 1.25 miles SSE of Penguin Islet. An 8.2m

rocky patch lies 0.2 mile N of West Rock. With a heavy swell,

this patch breaks at times; breakers extend across from West

Rock to Lipson Rock, 0.6 mile ENE, which is just awash and

on which the sea breaks, even in calm weather. 

8.67 Sherbert Rock, a 2m high mound of stones, lies 2 miles ENE

of the W extremity of Ringwood Reef. 

8.67 The Beak is a dangerous reef, on which the sea breaks heavily, that lies outside numerous detached rocks off the W side of

Cape Buffon. The outer end of The Beak lies 0.75 mile SW of

Cape Buffon. 

8.67 A shoal, with depths of 8.5 to 9.1m and that breaks at times,

lies 1.75 miles W of Cape Buffon. 

8.67 A field of kelp, rising to the surface from depths of 16 and

18m, extends SSE from Ringwood Reef to a position abreast

Cape Buffon.

8.68 Beachport (37°30'S., 140°01'E.), a small town, is situated on the shore N of Glen Point close within Cape Martin.

An iron jetty, with an alongside depth of 4m, extends 0.4 mile

from the beach, abreast the town. The jetty is closed to commercial shipping. A light is shown on the head of the jetty. 

8.68 Anchorage off Beachport, is suitable for a number of vessels

of less than 4.6m draft and with local knowledge, in a pool,

with depths of 5 to 7m, firm white marl-like clay, good holding

ground, 0.5 mile offshore, E of the town. 

8.68 There is a least depth of 5.5m in the fairway of the approach,

which lies between De Mole Reef and the rock awash 0.25

mile SSE of Glen Point. 

8.68 Anchorage may be taken in the S part of the bay, with Cape

Buffon bearing 231°, 0.5 mile distant, in a depth of 5.8m, marl,

good holding ground. 

8.68 With a W to WSW gale, the swell rolls directly into S anchorage. The sea breaks in heavy rollers across the entrance. In

the event of the approach of a W gale, it is advisable to get underway and make for the N end of the bay; these gales are uncertain, but are not frequent in the summer.

8.68 In strong S and SE winds, which may continue for weeks in

the summer, the S anchorage is smoother. 

8.69 Cape Buffon (37°35'S., 140°07'E.), which projects

about 0.5 mile NW from the S end of the bay, is 11m high and

cliffy. A light is shown from the cape. 

8.69 Grey (Greytown) lies at the S end of the bay, within the

promontory of Cape Buffon, where there is an angled jetty

275m in length and marked by a light, used by fishermen. 

8.69 Caution.—Special care and attention is required when navigating along the coast between Cape Martin and Cape

Northumberland, about 40 miles to the SE. The prevailing

winds are SW. A continual swell sets toward the coast, which,

together with the uneven bottom, produces an irregular sea. In

bad weather, with S winds, soundings should be carefully attended to. 

8.69 Depths of not less than 46m should be maintained at night;

these depths, over a rocky bottom, are found about 5 miles offshore. A 10.9m patch lies about 3 miles offshore, 9 miles SSE

of Cape Buffon Light.

8.70 The coast for a distance of about 5 miles SE from

Cape Buffon is cliffy and is backed by wooded hills, which rise

to a height of 60m. Farther SE, the coastal hills are sandy and

not so high; the most conspicuous one is a sand hill, 44m high,

about 9.5 miles SE from Cape Buffon. 

8.70 The most conspicuous hill along this coast, which stands out

boldly and is visible to a vessel more than 3 miles off the land,

is Mount Muirhead, 150m high, which is isolated in a position

Courtesy of Grant and Tracey’s Lighthouse Page

Penguin Islet
Sector 8. South Coast of Australia—Cape Spencer to Cape Northumberland 219

Pub. 175

about 14 miles E of Cape Buffon. 

8.70 Mount Burr, 240m high; Mount Lookout, 216m high; and

The Bluff, 201m high and with a very steep fall on its S side,

are all part of a continuous range. The range rises 18 miles E,

and runs about 21 miles ESE of Cape Buffon. A conspicuous

radio tower stands on the summit of Mount Burr. 

8.70 The coast for a distance of 5 miles S of Cape Buffon has drying rocks extending 0.25 mile offshore. For a distance of 8

miles farther SE, the coast is steep-to, except for a rocky patch,

with depths of less than 1.8m and that lies 0.5 mile offshore,

6.5 miles SE of the cape. 

8.70 From a position about 13 miles SSE of Cape Buffon to Carpenter Rocks, 11 miles farther SSE, there are abovewater rocks

a short distance offshore; a reef, on which the sea breaks, fronts

the beach for the entire 11 mile distance, and extends up to 1

mile offshore in places. 

8.71 Cape Banks (37°55'S., 140°23'E.) is a rocky point,

15m high, 24 miles SSE of Cape Buffon. A light is situated on

Cape Banks. 

8.71 Carpenter Rocks are two black rocks lying close off Cape

Banks. The rocks have been reported to give good radar returns

up to 11 miles. The coast between Cape Banks and Douglas

Point, 12.5 miles SE, is low and sandy, the highest part being a

sand hill, 32m high, about halfway between them. 

8.71 Douglas Point (38°02'S., 140°35'E.) is a green-colored

point, 23m high. The coast between Douglas Point and Middle

Point, 2.25 miles farther ESE, and then to Cape Northumberland, 2.25 miles farther in the same direction, is low, with one

sandhill on it, 1.5 miles E of Douglas Point. Mount Gambier

rises to a height of 192m, in a position about 14 miles NE of

Douglas Point.

8.71 There is a small bay immediately S of Cape Banks, with a

reef across its entrance, which extends S from Carpenter

Rocks, and another reef off the beach inside. There is a sand

hill, 38m high, at the back of the bay. 

8.71 A rock, with depths of 9.1m, lies 3.75 miles S of Cape

Banks. It is steep-to and breaks heavily in a SW swell. 

8.71 Bucks Bay is a small opening in the reefs 1.25 miles SE of

Cape Banks. 

8.72 Pelican Point (37°56'S., 140°25'E.), 3 miles SE of

Cape Banks, is fronted by rocks; here the 10m coastal bank extends 2 to 3 miles SW. Bungaloo Bay is a small indentation in

the coast immediately NW of Pelican Point. 

8.72 Umpherstone Bay is contained between Douglas Point and

Middle Point; the indentation immediately E of Middle Point is

known as Blanche Bay. 

8.72 Middle Point (38°02'S., 140°37'E.) is formed by a sand hill

which rises to a height of 17m. The coast for a distance of 1

mile E of the point is low, with swampy land at the back of it;

sand hills then commence and continue as far as Cape

Northumberland, about 1.25 miles farther SE. Rocks, which

dry, fringe the coast between Middle Point and Cape Northumberland, and foul ground, with depths of less than 1.8m, extends about 0.75 mile offshore in places. 

8.72 Between Cape Banks and Cape Northumberland, there are

fields of kelp which extend for a distance of 1 to 4 miles offshore. The kelp does not appear to grow where the depths are

greater than 28m. 

8.72 For the description of Cape Northumberland (38°03'S.,

140°38'E.) and the coast of Australia farther E, see Pub. 127,

Sailing Directions (Enroute) East Coast of Australia and New

Zealand.
221

Pub. 175

9. 

The Cocos Islands, Christmas Island, Heard Island, and the 

McDonald Islands

9.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 9 — CHART INFORMATION
223

Pub. 175

SECTOR 9 

THE COCOS ISLANDS, CHRISTMAS ISLAND, HEARD ISLAND, AND THE MCDONALD ISLANDS

9.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Cocos Islands (Keeling Islands) and Christmas Island, which lie about 1,100 miles

WNW and 825 miles NW, respectively, of North West Cape,

Western Australia and Heard Island and the McDonald Islands

which lie about 2,100 miles SW of Cape Leeuwin, Western

Australia. 

9.0 The general arrangement of each group is from W to E with

each island group described under a separate heading. 

9.0 Note.—Ile Amsterdam (37°51'S., 77°33'E.), Ile Saint Paul

(38°43'S., 77°33'E.), and Iles Kerguelen (49°16'S., 69°34'E.)

are described in Pub. 171, Sailing Directions (Enroute) East

Africa and the South Indian Ocean. 

General Remarks

9.1 Sea and swell.—The worst sea and swell conditions

are likely to occur between 40°S and 50°S in the Indian Ocean.

Swellw higher than 4m are present from 30 to 70 per cent of

the time in areas between 50°S and 60°S. The maximum wave

height to be expected over this area is about 25m, but that rises

to 35m near Iles Kerguelen, about 230 miles NW of Heard Island, in the winter.

9.1 Caution.—Icebergs from the Antarctic at times drift into the

area of the South Indian Ocean. There is a possibility of meeting icebergs at any time during the year S of 35°S; they are

most numerous from October to March.

The Cocos Islands (Keeling Islands)

9.2 The Cocos Islands (Keeling Islands) (12°08'S.,

96°50'E.) lie about 600 miles SW of Tanjung Layar, the W extremity of Jawa. They are in two distinct divisions, lying N and

S and are separated by a channel 15 miles wide. The N division

has a single island known as North Keeling Island while the S

division has about 20 islands, known collectively as South

Keeling.

South Keeling Island

9.3 This division of the Cocos Islands is formed of about

20 islands and islets. They lie around a central lagoon in the

approximate form of a horseshoe with the opening to the NW;

the longer dimension is about 8 miles and the shorter about 7

miles. Horsburgh Island, Home Island, and the W end of West

Island are reported to be good radar targets. 

9.3 A reef, against which the sea breaks continually, fronts the

outer sides of the islands and protects the enclosed lagoon.

Seaward of this reef the depths increase abruptly except off

Horsburgh Island. The greater part of the lagoon is filled with

patches of growing coral with deep water between them; it is

navigable only by shallow draft boats with the aid of local

knowledge. 

9.3 All the islands are low; the highest land is the 12.5m hill on

South Island. They are thickly covered with coconut palms

which reach a height of between 12m and 25m above sea level,

and can be seen from up to 12 miles. 

9.3 The land forming South Keeling is evidently rising, and at

some time in the future will probably form a circular island

with a crater like rim. 

9.3 Direction Island (12°05'S., 96°53'E.), located at the NE corner of the group is about 2.1m high. The concrete pier at the

SW side of the island is 27m long and has a depth of 0.1m at its

head. The ruins of a house stand on the W extremity of the island. A light is shown near the ruins; the light is powered by

solar cells and may become weak in overcast weather. 

9.3 Caution.—The light is difficult to distinguish from Port Refuge by day. 

9.4 Home Island (New Selma Island) (12°07'S.,

96°54'E.) lies about 0.9 mile S of Direction Island and is connected to it by a coral reef that dries in places. Prison Island is

conspicuous and lies on this reef. Pulo Gangsa, once an island

close N of Home Island, now forms the N peninsula of the island. Pulo Gangsa has a cemetery on it. 

9.4 Permission from the Home Island Council must be obtained

to visit the island. On the W side of the island is a small boat

harbor, protected on the N by a breakwater, in which there are

depths of 0.3m to 1.0m. There is a group of 11 islets, accessible

only to vessels of light draft, S of Home Island. 

9.4 South Island (12°12'S., 96°55'E.), known locally as Pulau

Atas, forms the SE side of the group. Along the E and S sides

of the island, is a ridge of sand hills 3 to 6m high, terminating

at its S extremity with a hill 12.5m high. Between the W extremity of South Island and the E extremity of West Island are

a number of islands, all of which may be seen from the N part

of the lagoon and from seaward. 

9.5 West Island (12°10'S., 96°50'E.), known locally is

Pulau Panjang, forms the SW side of the group. The reef fringing the SW side of the island was reported (1959) to extend farther seaward than charted. It is impossible to land by boats on

the NE side of the island at any rate of the tide. There is an airfield on the island. 

9.5 A wooden jetty, 93m long with a depth of 2.7m at its head, is

situated on the E side of West Island, about 0.25 mile SE of

Ujong Tanjong, the N extremity of the island. A light was reported to be shown from the head of the pier (1985). 

9.5 A pipeline extends about 1.25 miles ENE from the E side of

the N extremity of West Island. The seaward end of the pipeline and the end of the attached flexible hose are marked by a

buoy. Mooring buoys are available. A vessel up to 110m in

length, with a draft of 4.1m, can moor here. 

9.5 A group of masts in the vicinity of the airfield are conspicuous. An aeronautical light is shown from a position about 3

miles S of Ujong Tanjong. Trees obscure the light from some

directions. The light may also be extinguished while an aircraft
224 Sector 9. The Cocos Islands, Christmas Island, Heard Island, and the Mcdonald Islands 

Pub. 175

is making its final approach to the airfield. 

9.5 Between West Island and Horsburgh Island, the NW island

of South Keeling, is a gap of 3.5 miles of almost continuous

barrier reef. 

9.5 Turk Reef, on which the sea always breaks, is located about

1.5 miles N of West Island. The W entrance of South Keeling

lies between Turk Reef and the reefs that extend N from West

Island. Vessels are advised to stay at least 1 mile from the shore

of West Island. 

9.5 Horsburgh Island (Pulau Luar) (12°05'S., 96°50'E.), flat

with areas of grass and coconut palms up to 25m high, is the N

island of the group. A boat track leads to a landing place about

0.1 mile NW of Possession Point, the SE extremity of the island. This track may best be seen on the chart.

9.6 Port Refuge (12°06'S., 96°52'E.), in the N part of the

lagoon between Horsburgh Island and Direction Island, comprises an outer and inner harbor. The entrance should be approached with caution, as the bottom rises very steeply from

the ocean depth to the 20m curve. The change of color of the

water from a dark to a light shade of blue is very marked and it

can be seen from some distances and may be relied on as a

guide. The bottom is generally visible in Port Refuge where the

depth is less than 14.6m. 

Tides—Currents.—The tides are practically semidiurnal.

The mean spring rise is 1.1m while the mean neap rise is 0.9m.

The flood current sets S into the harbor at a rate of 0.75 knot,

while the ebb current sets NW at a rate of 0.5 knot.

9.6 Pilotage.—A pilot boarding station is established in position

12°07'42"S, 96°50'36"E, close ENE of the mooring buoys.

9.6 Anchorage.—The bay formed by the S side of Direction Island provides good shelter and is the recommended anchorage

for small craft. The best anchorage for large vessels is at the

entrance to Port Refuge, with Direction Island Light bearing

096° and the E extremity of Pulau Maria bearing 180°, in a

depth of about 10m, coral. This anchorage, used by vessels

with a maximum draft of 7.6m, is sheltered from the predominant SE winds, but is open to winds and swells from the N and

NE.

9.6 Smaller vessels, with drafts up to 3m, can use an inner anchorage, with Direction Island Light bearing NE, distant 0.35

mile, in a depth of about 7m. 

9.6 Vessels may anchor, in a depth of 8m, sand and coral, about

0.3 mile S of the West Island pipeline mooring position previously described in paragraph 9.5. 

9.6 Directions.—Lighted beacons, in line bearing 196°, lead

through Port Refuge to the track marked by lighted beacons,

which leads to the pipeline off West Island. Vessels bound for

the inner anchorage should leave the channel when Prison Island bears 120°. Vessels proceeding into the lagoon should enter Port Refuge on the range and proceed along the marked

channel; odd-numbered lighted beacons mark the starboard

side while even-numbered lighted beacons mark the port side. 

9.6 It was reported (1986) that the least depth in the channel is

2.8m W of Beacon No. 5. The beacons have been reported to

be unreliable.

9.6 An alternative track, with a least depth of 4.1m, runs direct

from Beacon No. 3 to Beacon No. 8. Vessels with drafts up to

4.1m, and on occasion 4.7m, have used the channel at HW. 

9.6 Swell affects vessels only in the N part of the channel where

the depth is ample. 

9.6 Local knowledge is recommended for all vessels entering the

lagoon. 

9.6 The Western Entrance lies between a reef which extends N

from West Island and Turk Reef about 0.75 mile farther NNE.

It is encumbered by numerous coral heads. A narrow channel,

with depths of 4.8m, exists through the entrance. Vessels

should steer 096° with Beacon No. 8 ahead, then shape course

for the anchorage when about 0.2 mile from the beacon. 

9.6 This entrance is not recommended except with local knowledge. A complete line of breakers forms across the entrance

with a moderate ocean swell from NW and N wind.

9.6 Caution.—Muirfield Seamount (13°10'S., 96°11'E.), with a

depth of 18m, lies 70 miles SSW of South Keeling Island. 

9.6 In 1981, a patch of discolored water was reported about 300

miles SW of South Keeling Island in position 17°19'S,

97°04'E.

North Keeling Island

9.7 North Keeling Island (11°50'S., 96°50'E.), 14 miles

N of Horsburgh Island, is an atoll, approximately elliptical in

shape, about 1.25 miles long in a N and S direction and about

0.5 mile wide. The coral rim encircling the central lagoon, except for a narrow break in the E side, is from 90 to 350m wide.

Dense vegetation and coconut trees rise from this coral rim.

The island has been reported to be a good radar target at a distance of 16 miles. 

9.7 Depths—Dangers.—A spit of coral and sand extends 1.5

miles SW from the island, with depths of less than 30m. Heavy

rollers rise suddenly at times off the S end of the island, and

make the approach dangerous. 

9.7 Anchorage.—In good weather, anchorage can be obtained 1

mile SW of the S point of the island, in a depth of 20m. The

only landing place is on the W side of the island, which is normally the lee side. If the wind gets to N of E, this landing place

is dangerous. A heavy surf makes landing impracticable at

times. The lagoon cannot be entered.

Christmas Island

9.8 Christmas Island (10°30'S., 105°40'E.) lies about

530 miles ENE of the Cocos Islands, and about 220 miles S of

Tanjung Layar, the W extremity of Jawa. The island is of irregular shape; it is nearly 12 miles between Low Point and Egeria

Point, the E and W extremities, respectively, and about 10

miles between Northeast Point and South Point, the NE and S

extremities, respectively. 

9.8 Christmas Island is densely wooded and hilly; it is visible, in

clear weather, from distances up to 30 miles. When seen from

the N or S, it has the shape of a saddle, with the E and W portions of the island higher than the central portion. 

9.8 Christmas Island attains a height of 357m in Murray Hill, a

summit about 3.25 miles SE of Northwest Point (10°26'S.,

105°35'E.), and a height of 335m in Headridge Hill, which lies

about 1.75 miles SSW of Northeast Point. 

9.8 An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated on Christmas Island

close SE of Flying Fish Cove. 

9.8 The shores of Christmas Island consist almost entirely of

perpendicular cliffs, from 6 to 24m high. These cliffs have,
Sector 9. The Cocos Islands, Christmas Island, Heard Island, and the Mcdonald Islands 225

Pub. 175

here and there, been undermined by sea action to form caves,

some of them vented at the top; it is not uncommon to see

spray forced through these vents as high as 18 to 21m. 

9.8 A reef that does not uncover fringes Christmas Island completely. 

9.8 The reef is steep-to all around the island, except in Flying

Fish Cove, the only harbor, and off Egeria Point, the SW extremity of the island. 

9.8 The bottom off the E shore of the island is of a volcanic nature.

9.9 Flying Fish Cove (10°25'S., 105°40'E.) (World Port

Index No. 50910) lies at the E end of a bight formed on the N

coast of Christmas Island between Northwest Point and Rocky

Point, 8 miles ENE. The cove is an indentation at the E end of

this bight; it is about 1 mile wide between Rocky Point and

Smith Point to the SW. The principal part of the harbor lies between Smith Point and a position about 0.1 mile N of Isabel

Beach, which is about 0.6 mile NE of Smith Point.

9.9 Winds—Weather.—The wind strength at the reporting station on Christmas Island is much less than the Southeast Trade

Wind over the sea around the island. Gale frequency is also low

compared with reports from the open sea. Winds of force 7 or

more are reported in the vicinity of the island on 1 to 5 per cent

of occasions in January and February and also from June to

September. 

9.9 The island normally escapes the tropical storms which affect

the sea area towards NW Australia. Heavy downpours accompanied by thunderstorms are common, with 250mm of rain

having been recorded in one day. 

9.9 The Northwest Monsoon reaches its S limit in January and

February, when W winds predominate. 

9.9 At times the haze from Australia will reduce visibility to 3

miles. 

9.9 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set NE and SW; the

SW current sometimes attaining a rate of 1 to 2 knots. Strong

and erratic currents are often experienced.

9.9 The mean spring tides rise 1.6m. The mean neap tides rise

1.3m.

9.9 Depths—Limitations.—The cove is fronted by a coral shelf

with white sand, which extends a short distance offshore, with

depths of 10m. Outside this depth, the water deepens very rapidly, with depths of 128m about 0.2 mile offshore; the bottom

is rocky and uneven. 

9.9 Cargo working facilities are situated 0.5 mile SSW of Rocky

Point, where there are cantilever arms for loading bulk phosphate. Vessels moor at mooring buoys laid in deep water.

9.9 Vessels up to 35,000 dwt, with lengths up to 192m and a

beam of 28m, can be accommodated at the moorings. 

9.9 The phosphate mine has closed and bulk exports have been

discontinued.

9.9 Aspect.—Three prominent oil tanks are situated about 0.2

mile SW of the flagstaff close SE of Smith Point.

9.9 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels. The

pilot boards 1 mile W of Smith Point. 

9.9 Vessels should not approach the moorings nearer than 1 mile

until the pilot has embarked. 

9.9 There is a port radio station at Christmas Island. The vessel’s

ETA should be sent 48 hours and 24 hours prior to arrival. 

9.9 Regulations.—Trading between ship and shore personnel is

forbidden, as is the consumption of alcohol. 

9.9 Vessels must not approach the moorings in Flying Fish Cove

closer than 1 mile without instructions.

9.9 Caution.—Some protection from the Southeast Monsoon

(Southeast Trade Winds) is provided by the island. Apart from

this, the open nature of Flying Fish Cove provides no shelter.

Vessels in imminent danger are unberthed without delay and

instructed to lie adrift off the island. 

9.9 A small craft anchorage lies in the SW part of the cove.

There are no anchorages for merchant vessels. From November

to May, the wet season is experienced; N and W winds are frequent during this period. Vessels may be called to lie off the island when conditions are unsafe.

Heard Island

9.10 Heard Island (53°06'S., 73°31'E.) lies 2,120 miles

SW of Cape Leeuwin, Western Australia, and is under the sovereignty of the Government of Australia. The island is of recent

volcanic origin and is about 23 miles long in a NW and SE direction, and about 10 miles wide across its broadest part. The

central and main part of the island forms the impressive and almost circular mountain known as Big Ben. From the crater top

of this volcano rises Mawson Peak, 2,745m high. Anzac Peak,

715m high, occupies the center of the Laurens Peninsula,

which is connected to the main island by a low and narrow

sandy isthmus. 

9.10 The Spit, a narrow strip of flat ground, extends 3.5 miles E

from the island, beyond which breakers can be seen another 5

miles seaward. In 1983, a shoal depth of 20m was reported to

lie 8 miles NE of Spit Point, the E extremity of The Spit. 

9.10 Permanent ice covers nearly all of this treeless island; in

most places, except where diverted by large outcrops of rock,

this ice flows down to the sea, terminating in ice cliffs from 15

to 30m high. 

9.10 Winds—Weather.—In winter the whole island is under

snow, but in summer the lowest slopes of the Laurens Peninsula, the immediate environs of Atlas Cove, Rogers Head, and

Copyright Commonwealth of Australia reproduced by permission

Flying Fish Cove
226 Sector 9. The Cocos Islands, Christmas Island, Heard Island, and the Mcdonald Islands 

Pub. 175

The Spit are ice-free. On various occasions, smoke has been

seen issuing from the summit of Mawson Peak, and in 1950

and 1985, molten lava was observed on the side of the cone.

Snow has been observed in every month.

9.10 Gales are frequent in all seasons and can arise very quickly;

they are generally from the W, but gales from E and N are not

uncommon.

9.10 The strongest winds blow from NW, with a heavy overcast

sky and a falling barometer. They are followed by SW winds,

as the barometer rises and the sky clears.

9.10 The E winds are accompanied by dull gloomy weather. The

best month is December, during which about 15 days of excellent weather may be expected.

9.10 In the vicinity of Heard Island and the McDonald Islands

(see paragraph 9.13), fog is frequent, especially with N and

NW winds, but with W winds visibility is often good.

9.10 Visibility drops below 6 miles about 45 to 55 per cent of the

time year round and below 1.3 miles about 10 to 18 per cent of

the time from May through September.

9.10 Skies are cloudy (7/10 cloud cover) on 20 to 30 days per

month all year. Clear skies (3/10 cloud cover) can be observed

on 1 to 6 days per month.

9.10 Tides—Currents.—Spring and neap tides rise about 1m.

9.11 Red Islet (52°58'S., 73°18'E.), 94m high, is the N extremity of the Laurens Peninsula, to which it is attached by a

narrow neck, and lies 2 miles N of Anzac Peak; shoal water exends 0.5 mile NNW. 

9.11 Rogers Head (53°00'S., 73°24'E.), 4.5 miles SE of Red Islet,

is the E entrance point of Atlas Cove and the W entrance point

of Corinthian Bay; it is a double-peaked promontory, 145m

high, off which submerged rocks extend for a considerable distance. 

9.11 Saddle Point (53°01'S., 73°29'E.), on the N shore of Heard

Island, the E entrance point of Corinthian Bay, is located 3.5

miles ESE of Rogers Head. There are a number of above-water

rocks off Saddle Point. 

9.11 Cape Bidlingmaier (53°01'S., 73°32'E.) lies 1.5 miles E of

Saddle Point. From this cape, the N shore of Heard Island

trends ESE of Spit Point (53°07'S., 73°51'E.), the E extremity

of the island. 

9.11 Caution.—In W winds, there is a strong set towards the spit

from both sides. 

9.12 Cape Labuan (53°12'S., 73°30'E.), about 13.5 miles

WSW of Spit Point, is the S extremity of Heard Island. From

this cape, the shore trends 10 miles NNW to Cape Gazert, then

4 miles farther NNW to West Cape, the S extremity of the Laurens Peninsula. 

9.12 Shag Islet (52°55'S., 73°35'E.), lying 6 miles NNE of Cape

Bidlingmaier, is 92m high. It is the largest of three islets in this

area. 

9.12 Sail Rock, 17m high, lies 1 mile NW of Shag Islet and Drury

Rock, 37m high, lies 0.5 mile S of the islet. 

9.12 Morgan Island and Black Rock, together with other submerged rocks, lie up to 0.15 mile offshore, 1.5 miles E of Cape

Bidlingmaier. 

9.12 Off Spit Point, a bank of black mud and sand is reported to

extend 20 miles or more. 

9.12 A shoal, the position of which is doubtful, lies on the N side

of the island, 3 miles W of Spit Point. 

9.12 Wakefield Reef (53°11'S., 73°21'E.), on which the sea

breaks heavily in rough weather, lies 5 miles WNW of Cape

Labuan. Other rocks lie 2 miles ENE of Wakefield Reef and a

rock, whose position is doubtful, lies 2 miles NE of the reef. 

9.12 Pulpit Rock, 55m high, lies close S of Cape Gazert and a

rock, whose position is doubtful, lies 3 miles farther S. 

9.12 Norwegian Rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m and whose

position is doubtful, lies 1.25 miles SE of West Cape and a

shoal, the existence of which is doubtful, is charted 2 miles SW

of West Cape. 

9.12 Anchorages.—Anchorage may be obtained 1 mile NW of

the head of Atlas Cove, in a depth of 18m, good holding

ground. The anchorage should be approached by steering 203°

with a peak 124m high, close W of Atlas Cove, ahead on that

bearing. The anchorage will be found when the spit sheltering

the boat harbor in the cove bears 130°. 

9.12 This anchorage is exposed to the prevailing W swell rolling

in from NNW, and in W gales, fierce squalls and gusts of hurricane force, but of short duration, come down from the passes

between the mountains of the Laurens Peninsula. 

9.12 Landing on Heard Island is generally difficult, but there is a

fine sheltered beach in Atlas Cove on the E side where boats

can land near the site of the research station. 

9.12 There is a food depot in Atlas Cove. 

9.12 Anchorage can be taken in Corinthian Bay, in a depth of

18m, with Saddle Point bearing about 082° and Church Rock,

at the head of the bay, bearing about 147°.

9.12 Squalls are usually violent off Rogers Head and until the bay

is well-opened. The anchorage, in general, is more secure than

that off Atlas Cove, except with winds from the NE quadrant.

In W gales, the wind is much steadier and without the extreme

turbulence of that in Atlas Cove. 

9.12 Vessels entering Corinthian Bay should give Rogers Head a

wide berth and steer for the center of the bay, with the 210m

hill located 2.5 miles S of Rogers Head ahead bearing 225°, on

which course there is a depth of 18m when the two peaks of

Rogers Head are almost in line. Landing may usually be made

on a sandy beach in the SW corner of the bay. 

Copyright Australian Antarctic Division 2002

The Laurens Peninsula and Anzac Peak from SE
Sector 9. The Cocos Islands, Christmas Island, Heard Island, and the Mcdonald Islands 227

Pub. 175

9.12 Anchorage, in SW winds, may be found in Spit Bay under

the lee of Stephenson Glacier, at the W end of the bay, in

depths of 14 to 22m, black sand. Anchorage is judged to be unsafe E of a line drawn 000° from the E extremity of the

Stephenson Glacier. 

9.12 Landing may be made during SW winds on the S side of Spit

Bay. 

9.12 A small hut containing emergency provisions is situated at

the top of the beach W of Spit Bay and 9 miles SE of Cape

Bidlingmaier; the hut is 75m from the edge of Stephenson Glacier, and between a remarkable square boulder and a water

course through a moraine.

The McDonald Islands

9.13 The McDonald Islands lie about 23 miles W of Heard

Island. The group consists of two small islands and Meyer

Rock. The shores of these barren uninhabited islets are formed

by precipitous cliffs. The islands are under the sovereignty of

the Government of Australia.

9.13 McDonald Island (53°03'S., 72°35'E.), the largest of the

group, is 0.75 mile long and 0.5 mile wide. It consists of two

distinct parts, each about equal in area, joined by a narrow central isthmus. The N half is a sloping plateau, rising from 30m

in the SE to 120m in the NW; the S half is a steep-sided hill,

230m high. Each is bound by vertical cliffs, which fall to the

sea around most of the hill and around the W and NW side of

the plateau. 

9.13 A promontory extends from the NE side of the island. Access to the island appears to be practicable in good weather

conditions, on the beach at the S end of the island, and on the N

promontory. 

9.13 Flat Island (53°02'S., 72°35'E.), 55m high, consists of a plateau from which sheer cliffs fall to the sea, except in the SE

corner. The island lies about 90m N of McDonald Island. 

9.13 Meyer Rock, which lies about 1 mile NW of McDonald Island, rises steeply to 170m and is barren.
Sec. 

Para.

229

Pub. 175

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed

alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign

languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.

Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States

Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.

To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the

Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.

To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best

scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above. 

Index—Gazetteer

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec. 

Para.

A

ABBOT PATCHES 12 28 S 130 48 E 2.67

ABBOTT ISLET 12 02 S 135 30 E 2.9

ABBOTT SHOAL 11 50 S 131 31 E 2.39

ADAM BAY 12 09 S 131 12 E 2.46

ADELE ISLAND 15 31 S 123 09 E 3.62

ADELE ISLAND SHOAL 15 42 S 123 14 E 3.62

ADIEU POINT 15 15 S 124 35 E 3.44

AFGHAN SHOAL 11 54 S 130 08 E 2.61

AFRICAN REEF 28 58 S 114 37 E 5.27

AIRLIE ISLAND 21 19 S 115 10 E 4.47

AIRLIE ISLAND TERMINAL 21 18 S 115 10 E 4.48

ALAGNA SHOAL 14 06 S 136 03 E 1.31

ALARM SHOAL 16 20 S 122 59 E 3.85

ALBANY 35 02 S 117 54 E 6.17

ALBATROSS BAY 12 40 S 141 40 E 1.4

ALBATROSS ISLET 35 04 S 136 11 E 7.54

ALBERT ISLETS 14 32 S 124 55 E 3.38

ALBERT REEF 14 15 S 125 10 E 3.34

ALBERT REEF 15 37 S 123 20 E 3.63

ALBERT RIVER 17 34 S 139 45 E 1.11

ALGER ISLAND 11 53 S 135 58 E 2.6

ALLEN ISLAND 17 02 S 139 14 E 1.19

ALTHORPE ISLANDS 35 23 S 136 51 E 7.88

AMERICAN RIVER 35 47 S 137 47 E 8.15

AMUR REEF 16 28 S 123 16 E 3.92

ANCHOR ISLET 21 31 S 114 46 E 4.56

ANCHOR SHOAL 16 21 S 123 09 E 3.85

ANDERDON ISLETS 14 56 S 125 09 E 3.40

ANGURUGU CREEK 13 58 S 136 25 E 1.33

ANJO POINT 13 57 S 126 35 E 3.12

ANN POINT 34 10 S 119 34 E 6.22

ANN SHOALS 11 42 S 132 12 E 2.40

ANSON BAY 13 20 S 130 03 E 2.71

ANT CLIFF 11 47 S 131 11 E 2.38

ANTECHAMBER BAY 35 48 S 138 06 E 8.12

ANXIOUS BAY 33 24 S 134 34 E 7.27

APSLEY STRAIT 11 30 S 130 25 E 2.56

ARCHDEACON LEDGE 28 14 S 114 16 E 5.19

ARDROSSAN 34 26 S 137 55 E 8.42

ARNHEM BAY 12 19 S 136 11 E 1.59

ARNO BAY 33 55 S 136 35 E 7.80

ASHBURTON ROAD 21 39 S 115 02 E 4.54

ASHMORE REEF 12 15 S 123 03 E 3.4

ATALUMA POINT 15 45 S 136 49 E 1.25

ATTACK SHOAL 11 43 S 136 43 E 1.51

AUGUSTA 34 20 S 115 10 E 6.2

AUGUSTUS ISLAND 15 21 S 124 33 E 3.48

AVOID BAY 34 37 S 135 14 E 7.45

AVOID POINT 34 40 S 135 19 E 7.45

B

BACKSTAIRS PASSAGE 35 44 S 138 10 E 8.19

BACKY POINT 32 55 S 137 47 E 7.115

BAIRD BAY 33 07 S 134 19 E 7.27

BALD HEAD 35 06 S 118 01 E 6.10

BALD ISLAND 34 55 S 118 27 E 6.19

BALDWIN BANK 12 51 S 126 06 E 3.21

BALEINE BANK 16 47 S 122 00 E 4.8

BALGOWAN POINT 34 19 S 137 29 E 7.102

BALLA BALLA 20 40 S 117 47 E 4.22

BALLAST HEAD 35 45 S 137 48 E 8.15

BARBARA SHOAL 11 53 S 131 45 E 2.43

BARCLAY POINT 11 44 S 133 24 E 2.14

BARCOO SHOAL 15 39 S 122 55 E 3.62

BARN HILL 33 35 S 138 08 E 7.109

BARRETT ROCK 16 04 S 123 20 E 3.67

BARRICADE SHOAL 11 43 S 136 49 E 1.51

BARRIER ISLANDS 33 59 S 123 09 E 6.39

BARRON BANKS 15 46 S 124 18 E 3.56

BARROW BAY 11 20 S 132 12 E 2.31

BARROW ISLAND 20 47 S 115 24 E 4.42

BARROW ISLAND OFFSHORE TERM. 20 48 S 115 33 E 4.44

BARROW ISLAND SHOALS 21 05 S 115 24 E 4.43

BARTALUMBA BAY 13 48 S 136 30 E 1.33

BASS SHOAL 34 41 S 135 53 E 7.65

BASSETT-SMITH SHOAL 13 18 S 125 45 E 3.19

BATHURST ISLAND 16 02 S 123 31 E 3.74

BATHURST POINT 31 59 S 115 32 E 5.36

BAUDIN ISLAND 14 08 S 125 37 E 3.28

BAY OF REST 22 17 S 114 08 E 4.58

BAYLEY POINT 16 55 S 139 02 E 1.12

BAYLISS ISLANDS 16 09 S 123 32 E 3.70

BAYU-UNDAN GAS FIELD 11 04 S 126 39 E 3.2

BEACH POINT 34 52 S 137 49 E 8.38

BEACHPORT 37 30 S 140 01 E 8.68

BEADON POINT 21 38 S 115 06 E 4.46

BEAGLE BAY 16 52 S 122 30 E 4.5

BEAGLE GULF 12 10 S 130 19 E 2.60

BEAGLE ISLET 21 12 S 115 38 E 4.36

BEAGLE ISLETS 29 49 S 114 52 E 5.28

BEAGLE REEF 15 20 S 123 31 E 3.63

BEAGLE REEF 20 23 S 117 50 E 4.21

BEAGLE ROCKS 32 04 S 115 44 E 5.40

BEARD BAY 33 07 S 134 19 E 7.27

BEATRICE REEF 11 53 S 132 12 E 2.42

BEDOUT ISLET 19 35 S 119 06 E 4.16

BEEJALING SHOALS 24 39 S 113 28 E 5.5

BELCHES FOUL GROUND 35 06 S 118 03 E 6.16

BELLEFIN FLATS 25 58 S 113 17 E 5.13

BENNETT SHOAL 12 28 S 130 50 E 2.67

BENTINCK ISLAND 17 04 S 139 30 E 1.17

BERLIN ROCK 34 36 S 136 04 E 7.68

BERNIER ISLAND 24 52 S 113 08 E 5.6

BERNOUILLI ISLAND 15 02 S 124 45 E 3.45

BESSIERES ISLAND 21 31 S 114 46 E 4.56

BEZOUT ISLET 20 33 S 117 10 E 4.23

BICKERTON ISLAND 13 45 S 136 14 E 1.35

BIGGE ISLAND 14 34 S 125 10 E 3.37

BIGGE POINT 14 17 S 125 44 E 3.23,

3.29

BISHOP ROCKS 13 44 S 126 07 E 3.20

BLACK CLIFF POINT 15 02 S 128 06 E 2.83

BLACK HILL 31 33 S 131 33 E 6.51

BLACK LEDGE 21 34 S 114 42 E 4.57
230 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 175

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

BLACK PEAK 32 06 S 133 04 E 7.7

BLACK POINT 32 59 S 137 43 E 7.86

BLACK POINT 34 27 S 119 25 E 6.21

BLACK POINT 34 37 S 137 54 E 8.40

BLACK ROCK 16 05 S 123 35 E 3.77

BLACK ROCK 34 55 S 136 06 E 7.59

BLACK ROCKS 34 03 S 122 13 E 6.34

BLACK ROCKS 34 37 S 135 17 E 7.45

BLANCHE HARBOR 32 42 S 137 46 E 7.118

BLANCHE PORT 32 47 S 134 13 E 7.23

BLIND STRAIT 26 07 S 113 13 E 5.13

BLOWFISH BANKS 24 48 S 113 34 E 5.5

BLUE MUD BAY 11 12 S 131 51 E 2.34

BLUE MUD BAY 13 30 S 136 15 E 1.42

BLUFF POINT 14 04 S 126 39 E 3.12

BLUFF REACH 32 39 S 137 46 E 7.119

BLUNDER BAY 15 12 S 129 44 E 2.77

BLYTH ISLET 34 34 S 136 18 E 7.72

BOLINGBROKE POINT 34 33 S 136 05 E 7.68

BOMBARD SHOAL 14 04 S 136 59 E 1.41

BONAPARTE ARCHIPELAGO 15 00 S 125 00 E 3.32

BORDA ISLAND 14 14 S 126 01 E 3.31

BOSANQUET BAY 32 10 S 133 40 E 7.15

BOSTON BAY 34 41 S 135 53 E 7.65

BOSTON ISLAND 34 42 S 135 56 E 7.61

BOSTON POINT 34 39 S 135 56 E 7.61

BOUCAUT BAY 12 00 S 134 29 E 2.11

BOULLANGER ISLAND 30 19 S 115 00 E 5.30

BOUNTIFUL ISLANDS 16 40 S 139 52 E 1.16

BOUVARD REEFS 32 50 S 115 35 E 5.44

BOWEN STRAIT 11 15 S 132 31 E 2.25

BOYD POINT 12 55 S 141 38 E 1.6

BRACE POINT 11 19 S 130 20 E 2.58

BRADY ROCK 13 41 S 136 27 E 1.34

BRAITHWAITE POINT 11 46 S 133 56 E 2.13

BRAMBLE ROCKS 10 53 S 132 46 E 2.19

BRAMFIELD HILL 33 35 S 134 58 E 7.33

BRANCH BANKS 13 38 S 126 12 E 3.19

BREADING PATCH 16 05 S 123 02 E 3.65

BREAKSEA ISLAND 35 04 S 118 03 E 6.16

BREMER ISLAND 12 07 S 136 49 E 1.50

BREWIS REEF 21 30 S 114 55 E 4.50

BRIDGET SHOAL 34 43 S 136 18 E 7.71

BRITOMART SHOAL 10 54 S 132 33 E 2.23

BROGDEN POINT 11 31 S 133 05 E 2.15

BROMBY ISLAND 11 50 S 136 40 E 1.53

BROOK SHOAL 35 19 S 136 48 E 7.89

BROOME 17 58 S 122 14 E 4.13

BROWE ISLET 14 06 S 123 33 E 2.1

BROWN POINT 32 33 S 133 51 E 7.20

BROWN POINT 34 43 S 137 29 E 7.97

BROWN STRAIT 11 40 S 136 05 E 2.7

BROWSE ISLET 14 06 S 123 33 E 3.61

BRUE REEF 15 56 S 123 02 E 3.65

BRUNSWICK BAY 15 10 S 124 40 E 3.44

BUCHANAN BAY 15 40 S 136 43 E 1.26

BUCKINGHAM BAY 12 05 S 135 55 E 1.60

BUCKLE HEAD 14 26 S 127 53 E 2.87

BUFFALO REEF 34 43 S 136 28 E 7.70

BUNBURY 33 19 S 115 39 E 5.45

BUNGALA RIVER 35 27 S 138 18 E 8.47

BUNKER BAY 33 33 S 115 02 E 5.48

BURFORD ISLAND 11 29 S 131 57 E 2.40

BURGUNNGURA ISLAND 11 36 S 136 05 E 2.6

BURKETOWN 17 44 S 139 32 E 1.11

BURNEY ISLAND 13 36 S 136 14 E 1.44

BURRA-BURRA HEAD 11 22 S 130 42 E 2.52

BUSSELTON 33 38 S 115 20 E 5.47

BUSTARD ISLAND 13 42 S 136 24 E 1.34

BUTTY HEAD 33 54 S 121 39 E 6.26

BYAM MARTIN ISLAND 15 24 S 124 21 E 3.50

BYNOE HARBOR 12 39 S 130 32 E 2.69

BYRON ISLAND 16 10 S 123 27 E 3.69

C

CADELL STRAIT 12 00 S 135 45 E 2.9

CAESER ISLAND 16 04 S 123 56 E 3.57

CAFFARELLI ISLAND 16 02 S 123 17 E 3.64

CALDER SHOAL 10 51 S 129 04 E 2.54

CALEDON BAY 12 51 S 136 35 E 1.46

CALVERT RIVER 16 16 S 137 45 E 1.20

CAMDEN SOUND 15 26 S 124 24 E 3.51

CAMP HILL 21 48 S 114 10 E 4.58

CANNAN REEFS 32 39 S 133 15 E 7.10

CAP ISLAND 33 57 S 135 07 E 7.34

CAPE ADIEU 32 01 S 132 09 E 6.51

CAPE ARID 34 01 S 123 10 E 6.38

CAPE ARNHEM 12 21 S 136 59 E 1.48

CAPE BANKS 37 55 S 140 23 E 8.71

CAPE BARROW 13 40 S 136 04 E 1.32

CAPE BASKERVILLE 17 08 S 122 15 E 4.7

CAPE BAUER 32 44 S 134 04 E 7.23

CAPE BEATRICE 14 18 S 136 58 E 1.32

CAPE BEAUFORT 34 25 S 115 32 E 6.3

CAPE BEDOUT 35 57 S 136 36 E 8.2

CAPE BELLEFIN 26 01 S 113 16 E 5.13

CAPE BERTHOLET 17 15 S 122 11 E 4.10

CAPE BIDLINGMAIER 53 01 S 73 32 E 9.11

CAPE BLANCHE 33 02 S 134 07 E 7.25

CAPE BOILEAU 17 40 S 122 11 E 4.11

CAPE BOUGAINVILLE 13 53 S 126 06 E 3.15

CAPE BOUGUER 36 02 S 136 55 E 8.4

CAPE BOUVARD 32 41 S 115 36 E 5.43

CAPE BREWSTER 15 06 S 124 54 E 3.44

CAPE BUFFON 37 35 S 140 07 E 8.69

CAPE BURR 34 07 S 136 21 E 7.78

CAPE CARNOT 34 56 S 135 37 E 7.46

CAPE CASSINI 35 35 S 137 20 E 8.24

CAPE CATASTROPHE 34 59 S 136 00 E 7.48

CAPE CLAIRAULT 33 42 S 114 58 E 5.51

CAPE COCKBURN 11 20 S 132 52 E 2.15

CAPE COSSIGNY 20 29 S 117 56 E 4.20

CAPE COUTTS 35 46 S 138 04 E 8.13

CAPE CROKER 10 58 S 132 36 E 2.23

CAPE CUVIER 24 13 S 113 24 E 5.3

CAPE D'ESTREE 32 16 S 133 46 E 7.17

CAPE D’ESTAING 35 35 S 137 30 E 8.25

CAPE DOMBEY 13 54 S 129 42 E 2.72

CAPE DOMBEY 37 10 S 139 44 E 8.64

CAPE DOMETT 14 49 S 128 23 E 2.80

CAPE DON 11 19 S 131 46 E 2.34

CAPE DONINGTON 34 44 S 136 00 E 7.60

CAPE DRIVER 33 57 S 136 35 E 7.79

CAPE DU COUEDIC 36 06 S 136 42 E 8.3

CAPE DUSSEJOUR 14 45 S 128 13 E 2.81

CAPE DUTTON 35 38 S 137 09 E 8.23

CAPE ELIZABETH 34 08 S 137 27 E 7.103

CAPE FARQUHAR 23 38 S 113 37 E 5.3

CAPE FINNIS 33 38 S 134 49 E 7.29

CAPE FORD 13 26 S 129 52 E 2.72

CAPE FOURCROY 11 47 S 130 01 E 2.59

CAPE GAMBIER 11 56 S 130 58 E 2.47

CAPE GANTHEAUME 36 04 S 137 27 E 8.8

CAPE GREY 13 00 S 136 40 E 1.45

CAPE HAMELIN 34 15 S 115 02 E 5.55

CAPE HARDY 34 11 S 136 20 E 7.78

CAPE HART 35 54 S 138 03 E 8.10

CAPE HAY 14 03 S 129 29 E 2.73

CAPE HEIRISSON 26 01 S 113 20 E 5.13

CAPE HOTHAM 12 03 S 131 18 E 2.45

CAPE JAFFA 36 58 S 139 40 E 8.62

CAPE JAUBERT 18 56 S 121 33 E 4.14

CAPE JERVIS 35 37 S 138 06 E 8.44

CAPE KEERWEER 13 55 S 141 28 E 1.7

CAPE KEITH 11 36 S 131 27 E 2.38

CAPE KERSAINT 36 02 S 137 07 E 8.5

CAPE KNOB 34 32 S 119 14 E 6.21

CAPE LABUAN 53 12 S 73 30 E 9.12

CAPE LAMBERT 20 36 S 117 11 E 4.23

CAPE LANNES 37 12 S 139 44 E 8.65

CAPE LAVERY 11 20 S 130 39 E 2.52

CAPE LE GRAND 34 01 S 122 07 E 6.27

CAPE LEEUWIN 34 22 S 115 08 E 5.56

CAPE LEGENDRE 20 21 S 116 50 E 4.24

CAPE LESCHENAULT 31 17 S 115 27 E 5.33

CAPE LESUEUR 25 44 S 113 23 E 5.12

CAPE LEVEQUE 16 23 S 122 56 E 3.106

CAPE LINOIS 36 01 S 137 35 E 8.9

CAPE LONDONDERRY 13 44 S 126 58 E 3.9

CAPE MARTIN 37 30 S 140 01 E 8.66

CAPE MISSIESSY 32 24 S 133 52 E 7.19

CAPE NATURALISTE 33 32 S 115 01 E 5.49
Index—Gazetteer 231

Pub. 175

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

CAPE NORTHUNBERLAND 38 03 S 140 38 E 8.72

CAPE NUYTS 32 02 S 132 21 E 7.3

CAPE PERON FLATS 25 25 S 113 31 E 5.11

CAPE POIVRE 20 49 S 115 19 E 4.43

CAPE POND 14 45 S 125 08 E 3.39

CAPE PRESTON 20 50 S 116 13 E 4.31

CAPE RADSTOCK 33 12 S 134 19 E 7.26

CAPE RANSONNET 26 10 S 113 13 E 5.10

CAPE ROCK 34 55 S 135 32 E 7.45

CAPE RULHIERES 13 56 S 127 22 E 2.74,

2.87

CAPE SHIELD 13 20 S 136 21 E 1.45

CAPE SPENCER 35 18 S 136 53 E 7.90

CAPE ST. ALBAN 35 48 S 138 08 E 8.12

CAPE STEWART 11 56 S 134 44 E 2.10

CAPE STEWART 11 56 S 134 45 E 2.11

CAPE TALBOT 13 48 S 126 45 E 3.10

CAPE THEVENARD 32 09 S 133 39 E 7.15

CAPE THOMAS 37 05 S 139 45 E 8.63

CAPE THOUIN 20 20 S 118 11 E 4.20

CAPE TORRENS 15 00 S 125 06 E 3.40

CAPE TORRENS 35 43 S 136 43 E 8.22

CAPE TOURNEFORT 34 55 S 135 51 E 7.48

CAPE VAN DIEMEN 11 10 S 130 23 E 2.53

CAPE VAN DIEMEN 16 32 S 139 43 E 1.14

CAPE VANCOUVER 35 02 S 118 11 E 6.18

CAPE VLAMING 32 02 S 115 27 E 5.35

CAPE VOLTAIRE 14 15 S 125 34 E 3.23

CAPE WELLINGTON 15 10 S 124 50 E 3.44

CAPE WESSEL 11 00 S 136 45 E 2.2

CAPE WILBERFORCE 11 55 S 136 35 E 1.53

CAPE WILLOUGHBY 35 51 S 138 08 E 8.11

CAPE WIRAWAWOI 12 10 S 136 47 E 1.49

CAPSTAN ISLET 14 35 S 125 16 E 3.36

CAREENING BAY 15 06 S 125 00 E 3.42

CAREENING BAY 32 14 S 115 42 E 5.39

CARLISLE HEAD 16 45 S 123 08 E 3.100

CARNAC ISLAND 32 07 S 115 40 E 5.38

CARNARVON 24 53 S 113 39 E 5.7

CARRINGTON POINT 34 58 S 136 05 E 7.55

CARTER KNOLL 36 09 S 138 10 E 8.11

CARTIER ISLET 12 32 S 123 33 E 3.5

CASCADE BAY 16 34 S 123 26 E 3.94

CASSINI ISLAND 13 57 S 125 38 E 3.24

CASTLE HILL 11 48 S 130 11 E 2.59

CASTLEREAGH BAY 12 07 S 135 09 E 2.9

CASUARINA ISLETS 36 04 S 136 43 E 8.3

CASUARINA POINT 32 19 S 115 38 E 5.44

CAUSEWAY CHANNEL 34 00 S 121 50 E 6.30

CAVE POINT 35 08 S 117 54 E 6.10

CENTRAL HILL 13 58 S 136 39 E 1.39

CENTRE ISLAND 15 42 S 136 46 E 1.25

CERVANTES ISLETS 30 32 S 115 02 E 5.32

CHAMBERS BAY 12 12 S 131 36 E 2.43

CHAMBERS ISLAND 16 16 S 123 32 E 3.71

CHAMPAGNY ISLANDS 15 09 S 124 14 E 3.49

CHAMPION BAY 28 44 S 114 36 E 5.20

CHAMPION ROCK 32 02 S 115 36 E 5.38

CHANNEL POINT 13 10 S 130 07 E 2.71

CHANNEL ROCK 12 25 S 130 47 E 2.67

CHANNEL ROCK 16 26 S 123 23 E 3.90

CHARLES POINT 12 23 S 130 37 E 2.63

CHARLES POINT 15 41 S 136 55 E 1.23

CHARLES POINT PATCHES 12 21 S 130 40 E 2.66

CHASM ISLAND 13 40 S 136 35 E 1.37

CHATHAM ISLAND 35 02 S 116 30 E 6.6

CHESTER REEF 34 27 S 123 37 E 6.44

CHRISTINE POINT 17 12 S 123 17 E 3.102

CHRISTMAS ISLAND 10 30 S 105 40 E 9.8

CHURCHILL REEF 15 28 S 123 15 E 3.63

CLAN MACDOUGALL SHOAL 33 53 S 137 13 E 7.83

CLARKSON POINT 15 50 S 137 02 E 1.23

CLEFT ISLET 16 02 S 123 21 E 3.66

CLERKE REEF 17 19 S 119 21 E 4.2

CLIFF ISLAND 34 01 S 122 05 E 6.34

CLIFFY POINT 12 22 S 136 18 E 1.59

COATES REEF 33 59 S 121 58 E 6.30

COBHAM BAY 11 37 S 131 24 E 2.38

COCKATOO ISLAND 16 06 S 123 37 E 3.76

COCKELL REEFS 15 45 S 124 05 E 3.56

COCKLE SPIT 33 04 S 137 56 E 7.111

COCOS ISLANDS 12 08 S 96 50 E 9.2

COFFIN BAY 34 30 S 135 20 E 7.38

COLBERT ISLET 14 52 S 124 43 E 3.43

COLLIER BAY 16 12 S 124 15 E 3.58

COLLINSON POINT 32 33 S 133 53 E 7.21

COMBE ROCK 13 25 S 125 55 E 3.19

CONDER POINT 11 44 S 131 17 E 2.38

CONDILLAC ISLET 14 06 S 125 33 E 3.25

CONNEXION ISLAND 13 50 S 136 21 E 1.35

COOKE POINT 20 18 S 118 38 E 4.18

COOTAMUNDRA SHOAL 10 51 S 129 13 E 2.54

COOTES HILL 35 06 S 137 28 E 8.31

COPELAND ISLAND 11 29 S 132 44 E 2.22

CORNEILLE ISLAND 14 11 S 125 44 E 3.27

CORNELISSE SHOAL 20 02 S 118 22 E 4.19

CORNY POINT 34 54 S 137 01 E 7.93

CORONATION ISLANDS 15 00 S 124 56 E 3.44

CORVISART BAY 32 49 S 134 05 E 7.25

COTTON ISLAND 11 51 S 136 29 E 1.55

COURTENAY HEAD 20 31 S 116 41 E 4.29

COVENTRY REEF 32 20 S 115 38 E 5.39

COW AND CALF ROCKS 35 01 S 116 13 E 6.5

COW ROCK 33 58 S 114 58 E 5.51

COWAN PATCHES 14 50 S 128 16 E 2.82

COWARAMUP POINT 33 52 S 114 59 E 5.51

COWARAMUP REEF 33 50 S 114 57 E 5.51

COWELL 33 41 S 136 56 E 7.82

COXON SHOAL 20 04 S 118 28 E 4.19

CRAGGY ISLETS 15 36 S 136 41 E 1.26

CROCODILE ISLANDS 11 44 S 135 11 E 2.9

CROKER ISLAND 11 10 S 132 33 E 2.23

CRYSTAL HEAD 14 27 S 125 51 E 3.30

CULL ISLAND 33 55 S 121 54 E 6.29

CULLEN POINT 11 57 S 141 54 E 1.2

CUMBERLEGE REEF 14 28 S 136 53 E 1.32

CUNNINGHAM ISLANDS 11 45 S 136 06 E 2.6

CUNNINGHAM POINT 16 41 S 123 08 E 3.99

CURLEW POINT 32 32 S 137 46 E 7.120

CYGNET BAY 16 34 S 123 01 E 3.98

D

D'ARCOLE ISLANDS 15 08 S 124 35 E 3.45

D'ENTRECASTEAUX REEF 31 59 S 131 56 E 7.2

D'ESTREE BAY 35 55 S 137 39 E 8.9

DALBY ISLET 34 34 S 136 15 E 7.74

DALUMBA BAY 14 07 S 136 49 E 1.41

DALY HEAD 35 02 S 136 56 E 7.92

DALY RIVER 13 19 S 130 17 E 2.71

DAMPIER 20 40 S 116 43 E 4.30

DAMPIER ARCHIPELAGO 20 27 S 116 47 E 4.24

DANCE HEAD 32 10 S 115 40 E 5.41

DANGER POINT 11 07 S 132 21 E 2.26

DANGEROUS REEF 34 49 S 136 13 E 7.59

DART SHOAL 28 40 S 113 54 E 5.24

DARWIN 12 28 S 130 51 E 2.68

DARWIN REEFS 24 36 S 113 26 E 5.5

DASHWOOD BAY 35 35 S 137 24 E 8.24

DASHWOOD CHANNEL 32 36 S 134 08 E 7.22

DASHWOOD ROCK 32 38 S 134 04 E 7.20

DE FREYCINET ISLET 15 00 S 124 32 E 3.43

DE MOLE POINT 32 31 S 133 59 E 7.21

DECEPTION BAY 15 38 S 124 25 E 3.53

DECLARATION ROCK 17 55 S 122 09 E 4.11

DECRES BAY 32 14 S 133 44 E 7.17

DEEP BAY 14 07 S 126 38 E 3.13

DEGERANDO LIGHT 15 20 S 124 11 E 3.49

DELAMBRE ISLAND 20 26 S 117 05 E 4.24

DELAMBRE REEF 20 26 S 117 15 E 4.23

DELISSER SANDS 31 42 S 128 57 E 6.49

DEMSTER HEAD 33 53 S 121 54 E 6.31

DENHAM CHANNEL 25 57 S 113 12 E 5.13

DENHAM ISLAND 16 43 S 139 10 E 1.15

DENHAM SOUND 25 41 S 113 15 E 5.11

DENIAL BAY 32 15 S 133 30 E 7.15

DENMAN SHOAL 15 43 S 123 56 E 3.57

DEPUCH ISLAND 20 38 S 117 43 E 4.22

DERBY 17 18 S 123 36 E 3.105

DESFONTAINES ISLAND 15 02 S 124 50 E 3.45

DILLON SHOAL 11 00 S 125 35 E 3.3

DILLON SHOAL 33 49 S 137 08 E 7.83

DINGO REEF 15 19 S 123 37 E 3.63
232 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 175

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

DIRECTION ISLAND 12 05 S 96 53 E 9.3

DIRECTION ISLAND 21 32 S 115 08 E 4.47

DIRECTION ISLET 32 01 S 115 33 E 5.37

DIRK HARTOG HOMESTEAD 26 00 S 113 09 E 5.12

DIRK HARTOG ISLAND 25 51 S 113 07 E 5.10

DISAPPOINTMENT REACH 25 45 S 113 55 E 5.9

DISASTER BAY 16 54 S 123 11 E 3.100

DIXON ISLAND 20 38 S 117 04 E 4.24

DOG ISLAND 32 29 S 133 20 E 7.11

DOME ISLAND 34 10 S 123 21 E 6.43

DONGARA 29 16 S 114 55 E 5.28

DONINGTON REEF 34 43 S 136 00 E 7.60

DORRE ISLAND 25 08 S 113 06 E 5.6

DOUBLE ISLET 20 44 S 115 30 E 4.42

DOUBTFUL BAY 16 03 S 124 02 E 3.54

DOUGLAS BANK 32 48 S 137 50 E 7.116

DOUGLAS ISLAND 34 10 S 123 09 E 6.43

DOUGLAS POINT 32 51 S 137 49 E 7.116

DOUGLAS POINT 38 02 S 140 35 E 8.71

DOUGLAS ROCK 36 03 S 136 51 E 8.4

DOWCER BLUFF 34 45 S 137 52 E 8.39

DRAPER ISLAND 34 12 S 122 30 E 6.37

DRUMMOND POINT 34 09 S 135 14 E 7.35

DRYSDALE ISLAND 11 41 S 136 00 E 2.7

DUFFIELD ISLET 34 39 S 136 20 E 7.71

DUFFIELD RIDGE 32 02 S 115 28 E 5.37

DUKE OF ORLEANS BAY 33 55 S 122 36 E 6.38

DUNDAS POINT 15 10 S 128 06 E 2.83

DUNDAS STRAIT 11 20 S 131 40 E 2.36

DUTTON BAY 34 05 S 136 24 E 7.78

DUYFKEN POINT 12 34 S 141 36 E 1.3

DYER ISLET 32 01 S 115 33 E 5.37

E

EAGLE POINT 16 11 S 124 25 E 3.58

EAST ALLIGATOR RIVER 12 06 S 128 15 E 2.42

EAST BANKS 14 56 S 128 16 E 2.82

EAST HOLOTHURIA REEF 13 35 S 126 00 E 3.19

EAST POINT 12 25 S 130 49 E 2.65

EAST ROE ISLAND 16 22 S 123 47 E 3.91

EAST SANDS 32 40 S 137 48 E 7.119

EASTER GROUP 28 43 S 113 47 E 5.24

EASTERN COVE 35 46 S 137 51 E 8.14

EASTERN GROUP 33 47 S 124 05 E 6.47

EASTERN SHOAL 33 08 S 137 46 E 7.110

EBA ISLAND 32 41 S 134 16 E 7.22

ECLIPSE ISLAND 35 11 S 117 53 E 6.12

ECLIPSE ISLANDS 13 54 S 126 19 E 3.16

ECLIPSE ROCK 34 30 S 137 28 E 7.99

EDITHBURGH 35 05 S 137 45 E 8.35

EDWARD ISLET 14 30 S 135 37 E 1.31

EDWARDS POINT 11 11 S 132 16 E 2.27

EGG ISLAND 32 28 S 133 19 E 7.11

EGLINTON ROCKS 31 38 S 115 39 E 5.33

EIGHTY MILES BEACH 18 56 S 121 33 E 4.15

ELANG TERMINAL 10 52 S 126 34 E 3.2

ELBOW HILL 33 43 S 136 48 E 7.79

ELCHO ISLAND 11 55 S 135 45 E 2.8

ELLEN POINT 36 00 S 137 09 E 8.7

ELLIOTT POINT 12 28 S 130 49 E 2.65

ELLISTON 33 38 S 134 52 E 7.34

EMERY POINT 12 27 S 130 49 E 2.65

EMMES REEF 35 18 S 136 49 E 7.89

EMU BAY 35 35 S 137 32 E 8.25

ENDERBY ISLAND 20 36 S 116 32 E 4.32

ENDERBY REEF 20 36 S 116 32 E 4.33

ENDYALGOUT ISLAND 11 41 S 132 34 E 2.41

ENFIELD OIL FIELD 21 29 S 113 59 E 4.62

ENTRANCE ISLAND 15 17 S 124 37 E 3.47

EPINEUX BAY 26 20 S 113 17 E 5.16

ESCAPE CLIFF 12 08 S 131 15 E 2.46

ESCAPE ISLAND 30 20 S 115 00 E 5.31

ESKDALE OIL FIELD 21 23 S 113 49 E 4.62

ESPERANCE 33 52 S 121 54 E 6.31

ESPERANCE BAY 33 54 S 121 58 E 6.27

EUCLA 31 43 S 128 46 E 6.50

EUCLA ROADS 31 45 S 129 00 E 6.49

EVANS ISLAND 32 23 S 133 29 E 7.12

EVERETT ISLAND 12 15 S 136 04 E 1.59

EXMOUTH GULF 22 10 S 114 19 E 4.58

EYRE 32 16 S 126 17 E 6.49

EYRE BLUFF 31 58 S 132 44 E 7.6

EYRE ISLAND 32 23 S 133 50 E 7.19

F

FAIRWAY LIGHT BEACON 12 42 S 141 41 E 1.4

FAIRWAY ROCK 32 45 S 134 13 E 7.23

FAIRWAY ROCKS 16 35 S 123 19 E 3.92

FALSE BAY 33 00 S 137 40 E 7.86

FALSE ENTRANCE 26 20 S 113 17 E 5.16

FALSE ISLAND POINT 21 51 S 114 01 E 5.2

FALSE PERA HEAD 13 05 S 141 37 E 1.6

FANNY COVE 33 52 S 121 07 E 6.26

FANNY POINT 34 44 S 135 56 E 7.62

FANTOME BANK 11 38 S 123 57 E 3.3

FATHOM ROCK 14 43 S 128 14 E 2.81

FAURE ISLAND 25 51 S 113 53 E 5.9

FAVELL BANK 12 42 S 126 09 E 3.21

FENELON ISLAND 14 08 S 125 42 E 3.26

FENELON ISLAND 32 35 S 133 17 E 7.11

FENTON PATCHES 12 12 S 130 43 E 2.62

FIELD ISLAND 12 05 S 132 23 E 2.42

FIGURE OF EIGHT ISLAND 34 02 S 121 36 E 6.28

FINKE BAY 12 13 S 132 04 E 2.43

FISH REEF 12 26 S 130 26 E 2.69

FISHERMAN ISLETS 30 08 S 114 57 E 5.29

FITZROY REEFS 24 33 S 113 24 E 5.5

FITZROY RIVER 16 15 S 123 53 E 3.102

FLAT ISLAND 53 02 S 72 35 E 9.13

FLETCHER ISLAND 16 21 S 124 21 E 3.59

FLINDERS BAY 34 20 S 115 12 E 6.2

FLINDERS CHANNEL 32 43 S 137 48 E 7.118

FLINDERS ISLAND 33 43 S 134 29 E 7.31

FLINDERS POINT 12 04 S 136 03 E 1.57

FLINDERS REEF 32 13 S 133 12 E 7.13

FLINDERS ROCK 32 13 S 133 13 E 7.8

FLYING FISH COVE 10 25 S 105 40 E 9.9

FOAM ROCKS 34 08 S 122 51 E 6.40

FONTANES ISLET 14 54 S 124 55 E 3.41

FORESTIER ISLANDS 20 32 S 117 51 E 4.21

FORSYTH ISLAND 16 50 S 139 07 E 1.19

FORT POINT 12 28 S 130 51 E 2.65

FORTESCUE ISLAND 20 55 S 116 02 E 4.35

FORTESCUE ROAD 20 53 S 116 07 E 4.34

FOSSIL POINT 35 02 S 136 09 E 7.55

FOUL BAY 35 11 S 137 15 E 8.30

FOUL POINT 16 48 S 123 09 E 3.100

FOUR HUMMOCKS ISLANDS 34 46 S 135 01 E 7.42

FOWLER ISLAND 17 07 S 139 33 E 1.17

FRANKLIN HARBOR 33 44 S 136 57 E 7.82

FRANKLIN ISLANDS 32 28 S 133 38 E 7.13

FRASER ROCK 16 07 S 123 04 E 3.66

FRAZER ISLET 22 39 S 113 38 E 5.3

FREELING ISLAND 32 29 S 133 20 E 7.11

FREEMAN NOB 35 33 S 138 41 E 8.59

FREMANTLE 32 03 S 115 44 E 5.41

FRENCHMAN BAY 35 05 S 117 57 E 6.14

FRENCHMAN ROCK 35 43 S 137 43 E 8.16

FREYCINET ESTUARY 26 25 S 113 43 E 5.15

FREYCINET POINT 34 06 S 114 59 E 5.52

FROST SHOAL 15 47 S 123 21 E 3.62

G

GAGE ROADS 32 02 S 115 41 E 5.40

GALAH CHANNEL 16 05 S 123 34 E 3.80

GALE BANK 12 37 S 126 05 E 3.21

GALES BAY 22 25 S 114 11 E 4.58

GAMBIER ISLANDS 35 10 S 136 27 E 7.52

GANTHEAUME BAY 27 40 S 114 10 E 5.17

GARDEN ISLAND 32 12 S 115 41 E 5.39

GASCOIGNE BAY 32 31 S 133 56 E 7.21

GASCOYNE FLATS 25 00 S 113 38 E 5.8

GAWLER POINT 34 30 S 137 28 E 7.99

GEDGE POINT 11 12 S 136 38 E 2.4

GEE WEE POINT 16 38 S 139 09 E 1.15

GEELVINK CHANNEL 28 45 S 114 15 E 5.26

GEOGRAPHE BAY 33 31 S 115 21 E 5.46

GEOGRAPHE CHANNEL 24 40 S 113 16 E 5.5
Index—Gazetteer 233

Pub. 175

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

GEOGRAPHE REEF 34 19 S 114 59 E 5.57

GEOGRAPHE SHOALS 20 16 S 117 54 E 4.21

GEORGE WATER 15 52 S 124 35 E 3.55

GERALDTON 28 47 S 114 36 E 5.20

GERANIUM HARBOR 13 55 S 126 34 E 3.12

GERMAIN POINT 33 45 S 136 58 E 7.82

GERMEIN 33 02 S 138 00 E 7.112

GERMEIN BAY 33 05 S 137 55 E 7.111

GERMEIN ISLAND 33 13 S 134 40 E 7.28

GERMEIN POINT 33 45 S 136 58 E 7.82

GIANT ROCKS 34 11 S 121 40 E 6.30

GIBBINGS ISLAND 16 09 S 123 31 E 3.70

GIBBINGS REEFS 15 56 S 123 45 E 3.73

GIBBON POINT 33 50 S 136 47 E 7.81

GIBSON POINT 14 00 S 125 58 E 3.31

GILBERT ROCK 16 29 S 123 03 E 3.98

GILES POINT 35 03 S 137 45 E 8.35

GILES SHOAL 11 42 S 131 45 E 2.39

GLIDDON REEF 32 20 S 133 34 E 7.14

GLOMAR SHOAL 19 31 S 116 47 E 4.24

GLYDE POINT 12 10 S 131 07 E 2.46

GOALEN ROCKS 32 24 S 133 43 E 7.19

GOAT ISLAND 32 19 S 133 31 E 7.14

GOAT POINT 15 51 S 137 04 E 1.23

GODFREY ISLANDS 37 05 S 139 43 E 8.63

GOODRICH BANK 10 42 S 130 19 E 2.54

GOOLWA 35 30 S 138 47 E 8.60

GOOSE ISLAND 34 05 S 123 11 E 6.42

GOOSE ISLET 34 27 S 137 22 E 7.100

GOOSE ISLET 35 04 S 116 44 E 6.7

GORDON BAY 11 39 S 130 07 E 2.58

GORE POINT 17 38 S 139 56 E 1.11

GOULET BLUFF 26 13 S 113 40 E 5.12

GOURDON BAY 18 27 S 121 55 E 4.14

GOVE HARBOR 12 12 S 136 40 E 1.54

GOVERNOR ISLETS 13 56 S 126 42 E 3.14

GRACE SHOAL 34 03 S 124 12 E 6.43

GRANITE ISLET 15 29 S 124 36 E 3.52

GRANITE ROCKS 36 40 S 139 51 E 8.60

GRANT ISLAND 11 09 S 132 55 E 2.20

GRANTHAM ISLAND 34 47 S 135 52 E 7.64

GREAT SANDY ISLET 21 12 S 115 38 E 4.36

GREEN ISLET 34 26 S 137 25 E 7.101

GREEN ISLETS 30 41 S 115 06 E 5.32

GREENLY ISLAND 34 39 S 134 47 E 7.42

GRIFFIN MARINE TERMINAL 21 13 S 114 39 E 4.51

GRINDAL ISLAND 34 55 S 136 02 E 7.58

GRINDALL POINT 13 19 S 136 03 E 1.43

GROPER POINT 34 30 S 118 54 E 6.21

GUICHEN BAY 37 09 S 139 46 E 8.63

GUION POINT 11 46 S 133 40 E 2.14

GULF ST. VINCENT 35 00 S 138 10 E 8.34

GULUWURU ISLAND 11 31 S 136 26 E 2.5

GUNN POINT 12 10 S 131 00 E 2.46

GUTHRIE BANKS 14 55 S 128 10 E 2.82

H

HADLEY PASS 16 25 S 123 09 E 3.93

HALL BANK 32 02 S 115 43 E 5.40

HALL POINT 15 40 S 124 22 E 3.53

HALLETS COVE 35 05 S 138 30 E 8.50

HALLS POINT 16 28 S 139 19 E 1.14

HAMELIN BAY 34 11 S 115 01 E 5.52

HAMELIN INNER HARBOR 34 12 S 115 01 E 5.54

HAMILTON LAGOONS 33 35 S 137 55 E 7.108

HAMMER HEAD 33 58 S 122 35 E 6.36

HANOVER BAY 15 17 S 124 46 E 3.47

HANSON BAY 36 02 S 136 52 E 8.4

HARDSTAFF SHOALS 35 42 S 137 53 E 8.13

HARDWICKE BAY 34 40 S 137 20 E 7.94

HARDY POINT 14 59 S 125 01 E 3.41

HARE CHANNEL 15 19 S 128 04 E 2.84

HAREBY ISLET 34 35 S 136 18 E 7.72

HARRIS ISLET 11 26 S 130 24 E 2.57

HART ISLAND 32 39 S 133 08 E 7.10

HAT POINT 13 56 S 126 01 E 3.22

HAUL-OFF ROCK 34 42 S 118 39 E 6.20

HAWKERS DEVIL 34 38 S 135 57 E 7.68

HAWKNEST ISLAND 13 38 S 136 25 E 1.34

HAYSTACK ISLAND 35 19 S 136 54 E 7.88

HEARD ISLAND 53 06 S 73 31 E 9.10

HEIRISSON FLATS 25 57 S 113 18 E 5.13

HELBY BANK 21 48 S 114 01 E 5.2

HELPMAN ISLETS 16 44 S 123 38 E 3.96

HENRI FREYCINET HARBOR 26 25 S 113 43 E 5.15

HENRY ELLIS REEF 12 05 S 131 01 E 2.49

HERALD BAY 25 53 S 113 09 E 5.12

HERALD BIGHT 25 34 S 113 33 E 5.9

HERALD GUT 25 47 S 113 45 E 5.9

HERALD HEIGHTS 25 57 S 113 06 E 5.10

HERALD POINT 35 01 S 118 02 E 6.15

HERALD ROCKS 35 02 S 118 02 E 6.15

HERON POINT 22 16 S 114 08 E 4.58

HEYWOOD ISLANDS 15 20 S 124 23 E 3.50

HIBERNIA REEF 11 59 S 123 21 E 3.4

HIDDEN ISLAND 16 15 S 123 30 E 3.70

HIGH BLUFF 15 16 S 124 41 E 3.44

HIGH BLUFF 16 17 S 124 23 E 3.58

HIGH ISLAND 16 21 S 123 21 E 3.88

HIGH POINT 11 13 S 132 26 E 2.26

HOG BAY 35 44 S 137 56 E 8.13

HOGMANAY SHOAL 10 59 S 133 09 E 2.19

HOLDFAST BAY 34 59 S 138 30 E 8.50

HOLOTHURIA BANKS 13 51 S 126 00 E 3.18

HOME ISLAND 12 07 S 96 54 E 9.4

HOOD POINT 34 22 S 119 33 E 6.22

HOPE ISLAND 34 05 S 122 10 E 6.35

HOPE POINT 15 37 S 124 24 E 3.53

HOPELESS REACH 25 40 S 113 42 E 5.9

HOPETOUN 33 57 S 120 07 E 6.23

HOPKINS ISLAND 34 58 S 136 03 E 7.57

HORSBURGH ISLAND 12 05 S 96 50 E 9.5

HORSE ROCK 34 48 S 135 51 E 7.64

HOUTMAN ABROLHOS 28 39 S 113 47 E 5.22

HOWARD CHANNEL 12 05 S 131 05 E 2.48

HOWARD ISLAND 12 08 S 135 24 E 2.9

HOWARD ROCK 33 15 S 134 37 E 7.28

HOWARD ROCK 34 50 S 136 09 E 7.59

HUGHES POINT 33 56 S 137 36 E 7.106

HUMMOCK HILL 33 02 S 137 36 E 7.84

HUMMOCK ISLET 28 48 S 114 03 E 5.25

HUMMOCKY ISLET 12 05 S 136 06 E 1.57

HUNTER CREEK 16 23 S 122 59 E 3.106

HUTT RIVER 28 13 S 114 18 E 5.19

HYLAND BAY 13 58 S 129 39 E 2.72

I

ILE AMSTERDAM 37 51 S 77 33 E 9.0

ILE SAINT PAUL 38 43 S 77 33 E 9.0

ILES KERGUELEN 49 16 S 69 34 E 9.0

IMPERIEUSE REEF 17 35 S 118 55 E 4.2

INGLIS ISLAND 12 02 S 136 14 E 1.56

INGRAM REEF 14 07 S 125 17 E 3.34

INVESTIGATOR GROUP 33 44 S 134 21 E 7.30

INVESTIGATOR ROAD 17 07 S 139 35 E 1.18

INVESTIGATOR STRAIT 35 30 S 137 00 E 8.21

IRON WHYALLA SHOAL 35 18 S 136 47 E 7.89

IRVINE ISLAND 16 05 S 123 32 E 3.74

ISLAND POINT 34 27 S 137 25 E 7.101

ISRAELITE BAY 33 37 S 123 48 E 6.48

J

JABIRU OIL TERMINAL 11 55 S 125 00 E 3.8

JAGGED HEAD 13 42 S 136 45 E 1.37

JAMES POINT 32 12 S 133 25 E 7.9

JAMES PRICE POINT 17 30 S 122 09 E 4.10

JAMIESON REEF 14 04 S 125 21 E 3.34

JANSSEN SHOAL 12 35 S 141 34 E 1.4

JENSEN BAY 11 08 S 136 42 E 2.4

JOHNSON BANK 12 23 S 123 17 E 3.5

JONES ISLET 13 45 S 126 21 E 3.16

JUDITH SHOAL 34 28 S 136 21 E 7.73

JUNCTION BAY 11 50 S 133 57 E 2.13

JURIEN BAY 30 17 S 115 01 E 5.30

JUSSIEU BAY 34 57 S 135 54 E 7.48
234 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 175

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

K

KANGAROO HEAD 35 43 S 137 54 E 8.13

KANGAROO ISLAND 35 49 S 137 15 E 8.2

KANGAROO REEF 34 40 S 135 55 E 7.62

KARUMBA 17 40 S 141 05 E 1.9

KATERS ISLAND 14 28 S 125 32 E 3.36

KELLIDIE BAY 34 36 S 135 28 E 7.41

KERR REEF 11 48 S 141 50 E 1.2

KEYS INLET 14 46 S 129 37 E 2.76

KILLIDIE BAY 34 36 S 135 28 E 7.41

KING GEORGE SOUND 35 03 S 117 58 E 6.13

KING ISLETS 15 52 S 123 38 E 3.72

KINGSCOTE 35 39 S 137 38 E 8.18

KINGSCOTE HARBOR 35 39 S 137 39 E 8.17

KIRKBY ISLET 34 33 S 136 13 E 7.74

KIRKPATRICK POINT 36 03 S 136 46 E 8.4

KIRTON POINT 34 43 S 135 53 E 7.65

KLEIN POINT JETTY 34 58 S 137 46 E 8.37

KNAPP HEAD 35 05 S 117 29 E 6.9

KNIGHT REEF 12 01 S 131 06 E 2.47

KNOBBY HEAD 29 40 S 114 58 E 5.29

KNOBBY HEAD 34 14 S 115 02 E 5.55

KNOCKER BAY 11 18 S 132 07 E 2.30

KOOJARA SHOAL 13 47 S 126 35 E 3.11

KOOLAN ISLAND 16 08 S 123 45 E 3.78

KOOLEY WURTIE 34 37 S 137 54 E 8.40

KOOMBANA PAPS 33 21 S 115 37 E 5.46

KRAUSE ROCK 34 14 S 135 05 E 7.35

L

LABYRINTHIAN SHOALS 15 12 S 136 07 E 1.28

LACEPEDE BAY 36 50 S 139 44 E 8.61

LACEPEDE CHANNEL 17 00 S 122 15 E 4.9

LACEPEDE ISLANDS 16 53 S 122 09 E 4.8

LACROSSE ISLAND 14 45 S 128 19 E 2.80

LACY ISLANDS 32 24 S 133 22 E 7.12

LAGRANGE BAY 18 38 S 121 41 E 4.14

LAKE MACQUARIE BANK 35 19 S 136 39 E 7.52

LAMARCK ISLET 14 47 S 125 02 E 3.39

LAMINARIA TERMINAL 10 37 S 126 00 E 3.2

LANCELIN ISLET 31 00 S 115 19 E 5.32

LANDING SHOAL 35 39 S 137 59 E 8.20

LANGTON ISLET 34 36 S 136 15 E 7.72

LATITUDE POINT 20 47 S 115 28 E 4.42

LAWRY SHOAL 35 15 S 136 46 E 7.90

LAWSON ISLETS 11 04 S 132 52 E 2.20

LE HUNTE SHOAL 34 42 S 135 52 E 7.65

LEANDER POINT 29 17 S 114 55 E 5.27

LEANDER REEF 29 23 S 114 50 E 5.28

LEARMONTH 22 13 S 114 05 E 4.60

LEDGE POINT 31 07 S 115 22 E 5.33

LEE POINT 12 20 S 130 54 E 2.64

LEGENDRE MARINE TERMINAL 19 42 S 116 43 E 4.27

LESCHENAULT REEF 31 17 S 115 20 E 5.33

LESUEUR ISLET 13 50 S 127 16 E 2.88

LEVILLAIN SHOAL 25 31 S 113 01 E 5.12

LEWIS ISLAND 34 57 S 136 02 E 7.57

LIGUANEA ISLAND 35 00 S 135 37 E 7.46

LIMMEN BIGHT 14 45 S 135 40 E 1.28

LIMMEN BIGHT RIVER 15 06 S 135 43 E 1.28

LINDSAY POINT 32 29 S 134 05 E 7.21

LINGI POINT 11 16 S 131 49 E 2.34

LIPSON COVE 34 16 S 136 16 E 7.77

LIPSON REEF 36 10 S 136 50 E 8.3

LITTLE ISLET 34 57 S 136 02 E 7.57

LIVERPOOL RIVER 12 00 S 134 12 E 2.11

LONG ISLAND 16 34 S 123 22 E 3.94

LONG ISLAND 21 37 S 114 40 E 4.57

LONG ISLAND 30 19 S 115 00 E 5.30

LONG REEF 13 55 S 125 45 E 3.24

LOOKOUT POINT 34 53 S 118 26 E 6.20

LOOSLI SHOAL 12 02 S 135 16 E 2.9

LORD MAYOR SHOAL 16 31 S 122 37 E 4.4

LORNA SHOAL 12 21 S 130 19 E 2.61

LOUIS ISLETS 14 01 S 126 34 E 3.12

LOUISE SHOAL 35 13 S 136 32 E 7.52

LOUNDS ISLAND 32 16 S 133 22 E 7.9

LOUNDS REEF 32 14 S 133 22 E 7.9

LOUTH BAY 34 34 S 136 00 E 7.67

LOUTH ISLAND 34 34 S 135 57 E 7.69

LOW ISLET 12 23 S 136 10 E 1.60

LOW POINT 32 01 S 128 15 E 6.49

LOW ROCKS 14 04 S 125 52 E 3.24

LOW ROCKS 35 10 S 136 27 E 7.51

LOW SANDY POINT 32 18 S 126 16 E 6.49

LOWENDAL ISLETS 20 29 S 115 35 E 4.40

LOWLY POINT SHOAL 32 59 S 137 48 E 7.115

LOWRIE CHANNEL 13 45 S 136 05 E 1.42

LOXTON SHOAL 9 36 S 128 43 E 2.55

LUGGER COVE 16 28 S 123 02 E 3.98

LUSBY ISLET 34 32 S 136 15 E 7.74

LYNEDOCH BANK 10 02 S 130 49 E 2.55

M

MACDONELL SOUND 35 03 S 137 50 E 8.35

MACKENZIE ANCHORAGE 14 01 S 126 32 E 3.12

MACLAREN POINT 34 48 S 136 01 E 7.60

MACLEAY ISLAND 15 57 S 123 42 E 3.73

MACLEAY ISLANDS 15 15 S 123 41 E 3.72

MACQUARIE STRAIT 11 42 S 133 25 E 2.17

MALAY BAY 11 23 S 132 53 E 2.21

MALAY ROAD 11 50 S 136 25 E 1.56

MALLISON ISLAND 12 11 S 136 07 E 1.58

MAMALIMANDJA POINT 13 55 S 136 52 E 1.41

MANGLES BAY 32 16 S 115 43 E 5.41

MANGOLA SHOAL 11 40 S 125 07 E 3.3

MANGROVE BLUFF 12 05 S 134 12 E 2.12

MANGROVE ISLETS 28 52 S 113 59 E 5.25

MANGROVE POINT 24 54 S 113 38 E 5.8

MANGROVE POINT 34 16 S 138 01 E 8.43

MANOWAR ISLET 16 17 S 139 16 E 1.13

MARCHINBAR ISLAND 11 14 S 136 38 E 2.3

MARET ISLETS 14 25 S 124 59 E 3.38

MARGARET ISLAND 16 09 S 123 35 E 3.79

MARGARET SHOAL 11 46 S 132 17 E 2.40

MARIA ISLAND 14 52 S 135 44 E 1.29

MARIA POINT 34 40 S 135 55 E 7.62

MARIE SHOAL 10 55 S 130 06 E 2.54

MARINO ROCKS 35 02 S 138 30 E 8.50

MARION BAY 35 14 S 137 00 E 8.29

MARSDEN POINT 35 34 S 137 37 E 8.26

MARSH SHOAL 12 06 S 130 57 E 2.49

MARTS ISLANDS 34 00 S 122 39 E 6.40

MARUM ISLET 34 31 S 136 15 E 7.73

MARY ANN HAVEN 33 57 S 120 07 E 6.23

MARY ANN POINT 33 57 S 120 08 E 6.22

MARY ANNE PASSAGE 21 12 S 115 30 E 4.52

MARY ANNE REEF 21 16 S 115 28 E 4.46

MARY ISLAND 13 59 S 126 23 E 3.16

MASILLON ISLAND 32 34 S 133 17 E 7.11

MATARAM SHOAL 11 35 S 131 52 E 2.40

MATTHEW ROCK 34 12 S 123 00 E 6.40

MAUDE REEF 35 12 S 117 58 E 6.12

MAVIS REEF 15 31 S 123 36 E 3.63

MCARTHUR RIVER 15 50 S 136 47 E 1.21

MCCLUER ISLAND 11 04 S 133 00 E 2.19

MCDONALD ISLAND 53 03 S 72 35 E 9.13

MCINTYRE ISLET 15 59 S 123 32 E 3.74

MCLENNAN BANK 20 46 S 116 05 E 4.34

MEANARRA HILL 27 42 S 114 13 E 5.17

MEDA PASS 16 22 S 123 10 E 3.93

MEDA REEF 21 03 S 115 46 E 4.36

MEDA SHOAL 16 35 S 123 07 E 3.99

MEDINA INLET 11 51 S 130 35 E 2.57

MEDUSA BANKS 14 30 S 128 19 E 2.80

MELVILLE BAY 12 05 S 136 40 E 1.52

MELVILLE ISLAND 11 30 S 131 00 E 2.51

MEMORY COVE 34 58 S 135 59 E 7.60

MENMUIR ROCK 16 22 S 123 15 E 3.92

MERMAID BANK 14 30 S 129 20 E 2.76

MERMAID ISLAND 16 26 S 123 21 E 3.89

MERMAID PASSAGE 16 25 S 123 20 E 3.89

MERMAID REEF 17 06 S 119 37 E 4.2

MERMAID SHOAL 11 09 S 130 13 E 2.53

MERMAID SOUND 20 30 S 116 45 E 4.28

MERMAID STRAIT 20 39 S 116 32 E 4.33

MESQUITE SHOAL 11 13 S 130 01 E 2.55

MICHAELMAS ISLAND 35 03 S 118 03 E 6.16

MICHAELMAS REEF 35 03 S 118 01 E 6.16
Index—Gazetteer 235

Pub. 175

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

MIDDLE BANK 32 43 S 137 49 E 7.118

MIDDLE BANK 33 38 S 137 34 E 7.109

MIDDLE GROUND 12 22 S 130 46 E 2.66

MIDDLE HEAD 11 21 S 132 12 E 2.31

MIDDLE ISLAND 34 06 S 123 12 E 6.42

MIDDLE POINT 34 05 S 137 33 E 7.104

MIDDLE POINT 38 02 S 140 37 E 8.72

MIDDLE REEF 12 28 S 130 31 E 2.69

MIDDLE ROCK 34 18 S 121 50 E 6.33

MIDDLE ROCK 35 06 S 136 29 E 7.53

MILES ISLAND 34 04 S 123 14 E 6.42

MILNER BAY 13 52 S 136 25 E 1.36

MINDEN REEFS 32 03 S 115 43 E 5.40

MINILYA BANK 20 11 S 118 38 E 4.17

MINSTREL SHOAL 17 19 S 119 21 E 4.2

MISSION BAY 11 10 S 132 37 E 2.24

MISSION BAY 14 06 S 126 42 E 3.13

MITCHELL POINT 11 49 S 130 03 E 2.61

MITCHELL RIVER 15 13 S 141 35 E 1.8

MJRUNGGA ISLAND 11 57 S 135 05 E 2.10

MONDRAIN ISLAND 34 08 S 122 15 E 6.35

MONEY SHOAL 10 21 S 132 44 E 2.20

MONTALIVET GROUP 14 18 S 125 16 E 3.33

MONTE BELLO ISLANDS 20 27 S 115 33 E 4.37

MONTGOMERY ISLANDS 15 57 S 124 12 E 3.56

MOONTA SHOAL 33 54 S 137 36 E 7.107

MORNINGTON ISLAND 16 35 S 139 25 E 1.14

MOSS SHOAL 11 08 S 129 55 E 2.55

MOTTLED COVE 34 06 S 136 21 E 7.78

MOUNT ALEXANDER 12 42 S 136 41 E 1.47

MOUNT BLAZE 20 00 S 119 41 E 4.15

MOUNT BLOOMFIELD 35 58 S 137 14 E 8.7

MOUNT BONNER 12 06 S 136 34 E 1.52

MOUNT BORRADAILE 12 03 S 132 54 E 2.41

MOUNT BROWN 32 30 S 138 00 E 7.117

MOUNT CAMEL 33 17 S 134 45 E 7.27

MOUNT CASUARINA 14 24 S 127 42 E 2.87

MOUNT CONNOR 14 32 S 126 08 E 3.31

MOUNT DORRIGO 26 26 S 113 20 E 5.16

MOUNT DUNDAS 12 13 S 136 52 E 1.49

MOUNT DUTTON BAY 34 34 S 135 25 E 7.41

MOUNT FERGUSON 33 06 S 138 02 E 7.111

MOUNT GORE 35 00 S 137 16 E 7.95

MOUNT GREENLY 34 21 S 135 22 E 7.36

MOUNT HALL 33 04 S 134 28 E 7.27

MOUNT HILL 34 04 S 136 11 E 7.78

MOUNT LAURA 33 00 S 137 31 E 7.84

MOUNT LEOPOLD 20 59 S 116 37 E 4.31

MOUNT LOFTY 34 59 S 138 43 E 8.51

MOUNT MACDONNELL 35 38 S 137 19 E 8.24

MOUNT MAMBRAY 32 52 S 137 56 E 7.114

MOUNT MARSDEN 35 35 S 137 35 E 8.26

MOUNT MARY 32 31 S 133 51 E 7.19

MOUNT PASLEY 33 55 S 123 33 E 6.41

MOUNT PERON 30 07 S 115 09 E 5.30

MOUNT SAUNDERS 12 11 S 136 47 E 1.49

MOUNT WESTALL 32 54 S 134 08 E 7.20

MOUNT YOUNG 33 06 S 137 29 E 7.84

MOUNTNORRIS BAY 11 22 S 132 43 E 2.21

MUDGE BAY 14 33 S 125 23 E 3.36

MUIRON ISLANDS 21 40 S 114 20 E 4.57

MULLALOO POINT 31 48 S 115 43 E 5.34

MURAT BAY 32 09 S 133 37 E 7.15

MURDEYERRAH SANDS 31 39 S 129 07 E 6.49

MURRAY POINT 34 46 S 135 52 E 7.64

MURRAY REEFS 32 23 S 115 41 E 5.43

MURRAY RIVER 35 35 S 138 53 E 8.60

MUSGRAVE SHOAL 33 15 S 137 39 E 7.110

MYAOOLA BAY 13 08 S 136 20 E 1.43

N

NAPIER BROOME BAY 14 00 S 126 47 E 3.11

NAPIER POINT 11 57 S 135 55 E 2.2

NARES ISLAND 33 56 S 122 36 E 6.39

NARES POINT 16 08 S 123 42 E 3.79

NARES ROCK 21 26 S 115 18 E 4.46

NASSAU RIVER 15 55 S 141 23 E 1.6

NATIVE POINT 12 43 S 130 21 E 2.70

NATURALISTE CHANNEL 25 22 S 113 00 E 5.6

NATURALISTE REEFS 33 14 S 115 02 E 5.44

NELSON ROCKS 20 27 S 116 41 E 4.29

NEPEAN BAY 35 40 S 137 45 E 8.14

NEPTUNE ISLANDS 35 16 S 136 06 E 7.50

NEW ISLET 15 28 S 124 30 E 3.52

NEW MOON INLET 14 36 S 129 37 E 2.76

NEW SELMA ISLAND 12 07 S 96 54 E 9.4

NEW YEAR ISLAND 10 54 S 133 02 E 2.18

NEWBY SHOAL 11 52 S 129 11 E 2.60

NEWLAND HEAD 35 39 S 138 31 E 8.56

NIBLOCK ROCKS 15 49 S 123 59 E 3.57

NICHOLLS POINT 15 03 S 128 07 E 2.82

NICKOL BAY 20 35 S 116 55 E 4.24

NIGHT CLIFF 12 23 S 130 51 E 2.64

NOB HILLOCK 17 16 S 123 37 E 3.103

NOBBY ISLET 36 00 S 137 16 E 8.7

NORMAN RIVER 17 30 S 140 50 E 1.9

NORTH BANK 29 12 S 114 52 E 5.27

NORTH BANK 32 33 S 134 10 E 7.22

NORTH BLOCK 34 22 S 135 32 E 7.36

NORTH CHANNEL 12 00 S 131 05 E 2.50

NORTH CROCODILE REEF 11 36 S 135 10 E 2.10

NORTH EAST ISLET 13 38 S 136 57 E 1.40

NORTH EAST REEF 28 25 S 113 49 E 5.23

NORTH GOULBURN ISLAND 11 30 S 133 26 E 2.16

NORTH HEAD 16 50 S 122 32 E 4.5

NORTH HEAD 30 14 S 115 00 E 5.29

NORTH ISLAND 15 35 S 136 52 E 1.24

NORTH ISLET 35 07 S 136 28 E 7.52

NORTH KEELING ISLAND 11 50 S 96 50 E 9.7

NORTH MARY ISLET 17 16 S 123 33 E 3.104

NORTH NEPTUNES 35 14 S 136 04 E 7.51

NORTH PAGE ISLAND 35 45 S 138 18 E 8.19

NORTH POINT 34 57 S 118 13 E 6.19

NORTH POINT ISLAND 13 38 S 136 43 E 1.37

NORTH ROCK 31 58 S 115 44 E 5.40

NORTH ROCK 36 18 S 137 15 E 8.6

NORTH SAHUL PASSAGE 10 10 S 126 50 E 3.2

NORTH SANDY ISLET 21 06 S 115 39 E 4.36

NORTH TURTLE ISLET 19 53 S 118 54 E 4.17

NORTH WEST BLUFF 13 50 S 136 25 E 1.33

NORTH WEST CAPE 21 47 S 114 10 E 4.61

NORTH WEST ISLAND 20 22 S 115 31 E 4.38

NORTHERN ENDEAVOR TERMINAL 10 38 S 125 59 E 3.2

NORTHWEST POINT 10 26 S 105 35 E 9.8

NORTHWEST SNARE 36 02 S 137 11 E 8.5

NORTHWEST TWIN ISLET 16 17 S 123 04 E 3.85

NORWEGIAN BAY 22 37 S 113 39 E 5.3

NOSE POINT 34 57 S 136 05 E 7.55

NOTCH POINT 25 57 S 113 08 E 5.12

NUYTS ARCHIPELAGO 32 15 S 133 40 E 7.10

NUYTS REEFS 32 08 S 132 09 E 7.2

O

O'LOUGHLIN BAY 35 01 S 136 09 E 7.55

OBSERVATION ISLAND 15 37 S 136 54 E 1.24

OBSERVATORY ISLAND 33 56 S 121 48 E 6.29

OBSERVATORY POINT 34 56 S 136 06 E 7.55

OBSTRUCTION HILL 14 40 S 128 08 E 2.86

OLD MAN ROCK 34 12 S 115 00 E 5.53

OLIVE ISLAND 32 44 S 133 58 E 7.20

OLIVER ROCK 13 58 S 125 33 E 3.24

ONKAPARINGA HEAD 35 10 S 138 28 E 8.48

ONSLOW 21 38 S 115 06 E 4.53

ORONTES BANK 34 44 S 138 00 E 8.39

ORONTES REEF 11 04 S 132 05 E 2.28

OSBORN REEFS 15 09 S 124 12 E 3.48

OSMANLI REEF 35 58 S 137 38 E 8.9

OTWAY BANK 13 40 S 126 04 E 3.19

OUTER RIP SHOAL 17 06 S 123 31 E 3.104

OYSTER BAY 34 53 S 137 49 E 8.38

OYSTER POINT 34 55 S 137 48 E 8.37

OYSTER SPIT 32 46 S 134 13 E 7.23

P

PACKMAN SHOAL 35 19 S 136 53 E 7.90

PALM BAY 11 08 S 132 29 E 2.25

PARA HEAD 12 57 S 141 36 E 1.6

PARADICE BAY 15 32 S 136 51 E 1.25
236 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 175

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

PARAKEET CHANNEL 16 07 S 123 40 E 3.80

PARKER POINT 32 02 S 115 32 E 5.37

PAROO SHOAL 21 34 S 115 00 E 4.55

PARRY HARBOR 13 58 S 126 03 E 3.22

PARRY ISLET 14 19 S 125 46 E 3.28

PARRY SHOAL 11 12 S 129 42 E 2.54

PARTNEY ISLAND 34 31 S 136 16 E 7.74

PASCAL ISLET 14 04 S 125 39 E 3.26

PASCO PASSAGE 12 28 S 123 32 E 3.6

PASSAGE ISLANDS 21 03 S 115 48 E 4.36

PASSAGE REEFS 35 08 S 117 49 E 6.11

PASSAGE ROCK 32 20 S 115 41 E 5.42

PAXIE SHOAL 11 26 S 134 09 E 2.13

PEAK ISLET 34 12 S 115 01 E 5.53

PEAKE BAY 34 30 S 136 03 E 7.69

PEAKED ROCKS 35 11 S 136 30 E 7.52

PEARCE POINT 14 26 S 129 21 E 2.75

PEARCE POINT 34 28 S 137 26 E 7.101

PEARSON ISLANDS 33 57 S 134 15 E 7.32

PEE SHOAL 11 45 S 124 50 E 3.3

PELICAN ISLET 14 46 S 128 47 E 2.78

PELICAN POINT 37 56 S 140 25 E 8.72

PELORUS ISLET 36 07 S 137 31 E 8.8

PELSAERT BANK 29 27 S 114 14 E 5.26

PELSAERT GROUP 28 55 S 113 55 E 5.25

PELSART GROUP 28 55 S 113 55 E 5.25

PENDER BAY 16 44 S 122 41 E 4.4

PENDER POINT 15 17 S 128 06 E 2.83

PENGUIN BANK 21 12 S 115 04 E 4.49

PENGUIN ISLET 37 31 S 140 01 E 8.67

PENGUIN POINT 35 15 S 136 58 E 8.29

PENGUIN ROCK 34 13 S 123 15 E 6.43

PENGUIN SHOAL 13 05 S 125 58 E 3.18

PENQUIN SHOAL 13 05 S 125 58 E 2.1

PERA CHANNEL 12 00 S 136 04 E 1.57

PERA HEAD 12 57 S 141 36 E 1.6

PERFORATED ISLAND 34 43 S 135 09 E 7.43

PERFORATED ROCKS 32 45 S 134 14 E 7.23

PERLUBIE HILL 32 38 S 134 16 E 7.22

PERON PENINSULA 25 53 S 113 35 E 5.11

PETER POINT 32 12 S 133 29 E 7.9

PETREL BAY 32 30 S 133 16 E 7.12

PHIL POINT 15 39 S 136 51 E 1.25

PHILLIP POINT 32 00 S 115 34 E 5.37

PICARD ISLET 20 11 S 117 16 E 4.22

PILOT REEF 32 00 S 115 35 E 5.38

PINCOMBE REEF 16 05 S 123 10 E 3.66

PISONIA ISLET 16 30 S 139 48 E 1.14

PITT SHOALS 16 15 S 122 53 E 3.85

PLANK POINT 33 27 S 137 21 E 7.83

POINT ARROWSMITH 13 15 S 136 28 E 1.45

POINT BELL 32 12 S 133 08 E 7.8

POINT BLANE 13 17 S 136 10 E 1.43

POINT BLAZE 12 56 S 130 08 E 2.70

POINT BURROWES 16 58 S 140 58 E 1.8

POINT CLOATES 22 43 S 113 40 E 5.2

POINT CULVER 32 54 S 124 42 E 6.48

POINT D’ENTRECASTEAUX 34 50 S 116 00 E 6.4

POINT DAVENPORT 35 10 S 137 20 E 8.31

POINT DAVENPORT SHOAL 35 11 S 137 22 E 8.31

POINT DAVID 11 22 S 132 35 E 2.25

POINT DOVER 32 21 S 125 31 E 6.48

POINT FOWLER 32 02 S 132 29 E 7.4

POINT GIBSON 32 45 S 134 13 E 7.23

POINT HILLIER 35 04 S 117 09 E 6.8

POINT IRWIN 35 04 S 116 55 E 6.8

POINT JAHEEL 11 11 S 131 17 E 2.51

POINT JAHLEEL 11 11 S 131 17 E 2.51

POINT JARROLD 33 16 S 137 49 E 7.110

POINT LEFROY 22 18 S 114 11 E 4.58

POINT MALCOLM 33 48 S 123 42 E 6.46

POINT MAUD 23 07 S 113 46 E 5.3

POINT MURAT 21 49 S 114 11 E 4.59

POINT NUYTS 35 04 S 116 38 E 6.6

POINT PARKER 17 02 S 139 09 E 1.12

POINT QUOBBA 24 29 S 113 24 E 5.4

POINT RILEY 33 53 S 137 36 E 7.106

POINT TORMENT 17 00 S 123 36 E 3.97

POINT WARRENNE 34 19 S 137 29 E 7.102

POLLOCK REEF 34 34 S 123 34 E 6.44

PONDALOWIE BAY 35 14 S 136 50 E 7.91

PORT ADELAIDE 34 50 S 138 30 E 8.51

PORT AUGUSTA 32 30 S 137 46 E 7.121

PORT BONYTHON 33 00 S 137 46 E 7.87

PORT BRADSHAW 12 33 S 136 43 E 1.47

PORT BREMER 11 08 S 132 15 E 2.27

PORT BROUGHTON 33 36 S 137 55 E 7.109

PORT CAROLINE 36 49 S 139 48 E 8.61

PORT COCKBURN 11 22 S 130 23 E 2.56

PORT DENISON 29 16 S 114 55 E 5.28

PORT DOUGLAS 34 32 S 135 23 E 7.40

PORT EXMOUTH 21 49 S 114 11 E 4.59

PORT EYRE 32 00 S 132 27 E 7.5

PORT GEORGE IV 15 22 S 124 39 E 3.47

PORT GIBBON 33 49 S 136 49 E 7.81

PORT GILES 35 02 S 137 46 E 8.36

PORT GREGORY 28 11 S 114 15 E 5.18

PORT HEDLAND 20 19 S 118 34 E 4.19

PORT HUGHES 34 05 S 137 33 E 7.105

PORT KEATS 14 04 S 129 33 E 2.73

PORT KENNY 33 14 S 134 41 E 7.29

PORT LANGDON 13 48 S 136 46 E 1.38

PORT LE HUNTE 32 06 S 133 00 E 7.7

PORT LINCOLN 34 43 S 135 52 E 7.61,

7.66

PORT LINCOLN PROPER 34 46 S 135 54 E 7.64

PORT MINLACOWIE 34 51 S 137 28 E 7.97

PORT MOONTA 34 04 S 137 33 E 7.105

PORT MOOROWIE 35 07 S 137 31 E 8.32

PORT MUSGRAVE 12 00 S 141 55 E 1.2

PORT NELSON 15 04 S 125 00 E 3.42

PORT NOARLUNGA 35 09 S 138 28 E 8.48

PORT OF CAPE CUVIER 24 13 S 113 24 E 5.4

PORT PATERSON 32 35 S 137 48 E 7.120

PORT PATTERSON 12 37 S 130 28 E 2.70

PORT PIRIE 33 11 S 138 01 E 7.113

PORT PRICE 34 17 S 138 00 E 8.43

PORT REFUGE 12 06 S 96 52 E 9.6

PORT RICKABY 34 40 S 137 30 E 7.98

PORT STANVAC 35 07 S 138 28 E 8.49

PORT THEVENARD 32 08 S 133 39 E 7.16

PORT TURTON 34 57 S 137 21 E 7.95

PORT USBORNE 16 39 S 123 30 E 3.95

PORT VICTORIA 34 27 S 137 28 E 7.99

PORT VINCENT 34 46 S 137 53 E 8.40

PORT WAKEFIELD 34 12 S 138 06 E 8.43

PORT WALCOTT 20 38 S 117 13 E 4.23

PORT WARRENDER 14 31 S 125 52 E 3.30

PORT WHYALLA 33 02 S 137 36 E 7.85

PORT WILLUNGA 35 16 S 138 27 E 8.47

PORTER BAY 34 44 S 135 53 E 7.65

PORTER ROCK 34 53 S 136 09 E 7.59

POWELL POINT 33 56 S 120 33 E 6.25

POWERFUL ISLAND 16 06 S 123 26 E 3.68

PRICE ISLAND 34 43 S 135 17 E 7.44

PRINCE FREDERICK HARBOR 15 05 S 125 16 E 3.40

PRINCE REGENT RIVER 15 16 S 124 51 E 3.46

PRINCESS ROYAL HARBOR 35 03 S 117 53 E 6.16

PRIOR POINT 15 43 S 124 23 E 3.53

PROBABLE ISLAND 12 08 S 136 02 E 1.58

PROPER BAY 34 46 S 135 54 E 7.64

PRUDHOE ISLETS 14 25 S 125 15 E 3.35

PUDDING ROCK 32 07 S 133 00 E 7.7

PULAU LUAR 12 05 S 96 50 E 9.5

PURDIE ISLETS 32 16 S 133 14 E 7.9

Q

QUEENS CHANNEL 14 41 S 129 21 E 2.77

QUIN ROCK 36 05 S 137 24 E 8.8

QUOIN BLUFF NORTH 25 03 S 113 06 E 5.7

QUOIN ISLAND 14 51 S 129 33 E 2.76

R

RABBIT ISLAND 34 36 S 135 59 E 7.68

RADAR HILL 11 50 S 130 05 E 2.59

RADFORD POINT 11 18 S 130 54 E 2.52

RAFFLES BAY 11 10 S 132 23 E 2.26

RAFT POINT 16 04 S 124 27 E 3.54

RAME HEAD 35 03 S 116 52 E 6.7

RANKIN BANK 19 44 S 115 35 E 4.45
Index—Gazetteer 237

Pub. 175

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

RANTYIRRITY POINT 14 11 S 135 54 E 1.31

RAPID BAY 35 31 S 138 11 E 8.45

RAPID HEAD 35 31 S 138 10 E 8.44

RARAGALA ISLAND 11 35 S 136 17 E 2.5

RAT ISLAND 28 43 S 113 47 E 5.24

RAT ISLET 28 43 S 113 47 E 5.24

RECHERCHE ROCK 34 18 S 122 55 E 6.40

RECORD POINT 11 19 S 132 11 E 2.30

RED BLUFF 17 03 S 122 19 E 4.7

RED BLUFF 24 02 S 113 25 E 5.3

RED BLUFF 27 44 S 114 09 E 5.17

RED CLIFF POINT 32 42 S 137 50 E 7.117

RED ISLAND 15 13 S 124 15 E 3.48

RED ISLET 52 58 S 73 18 E 9.11

REEF HEAD 35 17 S 136 51 E 7.90

REEF POINT 34 24 S 137 27 E 7.102

REES ISLET 16 23 S 123 06 E 3.93

REEVESBY ISLAND 34 32 S 136 17 E 7.73

REYNE SHOAL 15 42 S 124 10 E 3.56

RILEY SHOAL 33 54 S 137 35 E 7.107

RIPPLE SHOALS 21 11 S 115 20 E 4.47

RIPPLING SHOAL 12 18 S 136 07 E 1.60

RIVOLI BAY 37 33 S 140 05 E 8.66

ROBE 37 10 S 139 45 E 8.64

ROBE POINT 21 20 S 115 38 E 4.34

ROBERTS ISLET 16 07 S 123 46 E 3.78

ROBINSON RIVER 16 02 S 137 16 E 1.20

ROBROY REEFS 14 27 S 124 52 E 3.38

ROCK DUNDER 35 02 S 118 10 E 6.18

ROCKY ISLAND 34 16 S 135 15 E 7.35

ROCKY ISLAND 34 39 S 134 42 E 7.42

ROCKY ISLET 14 44 S 128 38 E 2.78

ROCKY ISLET 16 19 S 139 17 E 1.13

ROCKY ISLET 34 29 S 137 26 E 7.101

ROCKY ISLETS 34 04 S 120 54 E 6.26

ROCKY POINT 11 29 S 130 09 E 2.58

ROCKY POINT 21 44 S 114 51 E 4.56

ROCKY POINT 32 12 S 133 15 E 7.8

ROE ISLANDS 16 18 S 123 12 E 3.91

ROEBUCK BAY 18 05 S 122 12 E 4.12

ROGERS HEAD 53 00 S 73 24 E 9.11

ROLLER SHOAL 21 39 S 114 56 E 4.55

ROLLING BAY 11 54 S 134 06 E 2.13

ROOPER ROCK 12 04 S 131 11 E 2.48

ROPER RIVER 14 45 S 135 25 E 1.30

ROSALIND SHOAL 34 48 S 136 33 E 7.70

ROSELLA SHOAL 15 35 S 123 50 E 3.63

ROSEMARY ISLAND 20 29 S 116 36 E 4.32

ROSEMARY SHOAL 34 42 S 136 22 E 7.71

ROSILY ISLETS 21 16 S 115 01 E 4.49

ROSS POINT 11 41 S 133 21 E 2.15

ROTTNEST ISLAND 32 00 S 115 30 E 5.35

ROUND ISLAND 34 05 S 123 53 E 6.47

ROWLEY SHOALS 17 20 S 119 20 E 4.2

ROXBY ISLET 34 36 S 136 19 E 7.72

ROYSTON HEAD 35 11 S 136 51 E 7.91

RUTLAND SHOAL 14 00 S 136 21 E 1.33

S

SABLE ISLET 20 35 S 117 45 E 4.21

SADDLE HILL 11 18 S 132 15 E 2.30

SADDLE POINT 53 01 S 73 29 E 9.11

SALADIN MARINE TERMINAL 21 27 S 115 03 E 4.50

SALIER ISLANDS 16 19 S 123 16 E 3.88

SALISBURY ISLAND 34 22 S 123 33 E 6.43

SALT CREEK COVE 33 55 S 136 35 E 7.80

SAMPSON INLET 15 31 S 124 28 E 3.52

SANDERS BANK 36 03 S 138 20 E 8.11

SANDERSON BAY 36 02 S 136 48 E 8.4

SANDY ISLET 12 02 S 135 30 E 2.9

SANDY ISLET 14 03 S 121 46 E 3.7

SANDY ISLET 14 26 S 135 53 E 1.31

SANDY POINT 16 54 S 122 28 E 4.6

SANDY POINT 28 41 S 114 36 E 5.20

SANDY POINT 34 16 S 138 09 E 8.54

SCEALE BAY 32 58 S 134 10 E 7.25

SCOTT BAY 32 01 S 132 24 E 7.4

SCOTT POINT 13 45 S 136 51 E 1.40

SCOTT POINT 32 01 S 132 23 E 7.4

SCOTT REEFS 14 00 S 121 53 E 3.7

SCOTT STRAIT 14 30 S 125 07 E 3.37

SEARCY BAY 33 05 S 134 12 E 7.25

SECOND VALLEY 35 31 S 138 13 E 8.46

SECRET ROCK 34 31 S 136 07 E 7.75

SECURE BAY 16 27 S 124 23 E 3.59

SERINGAPATAM REEF 13 40 S 122 05 E 3.7

SERRURIER ISLAND 21 37 S 114 40 E 4.57

SHAG ISLET 52 55 S 73 35 E 9.12

SHARK BAY 25 35 S 113 32 E 5.5

SHARP POINT 35 07 S 117 52 E 6.10

SHEEP HILL 34 14 S 136 15 E 7.78

SHELL BANK 16 30 S 123 06 E 3.99

SHENTON BLUFF 16 28 S 123 03 E 3.98

SHEPARDS PATCH 16 01 S 122 55 E 3.65

SHEPPARTON SHOAL 12 06 S 129 53 E 2.60

SHERLOCK RIVER 20 43 S 117 33 E 4.20

SHOAL BAY 16 25 S 124 16 E 3.60

SHOAL CAPE 33 53 S 121 07 E 6.25

SHOAL POINT 28 07 S 114 10 E 5.17

SHOAL POINT 34 47 S 135 29 E 7.45

SHOALWATER POINT 33 40 S 137 12 E 7.83

SHOULDER HILL 31 40 S 131 40 E 6.51

SIBSEY ISLET 34 39 S 136 11 E 7.71

SIMMS ROCK 34 52 S 136 08 E 7.59

SINCLAIR ISLAND 32 09 S 132 59 E 7.7

SINCLAIR POINT 32 07 S 132 59 E 7.7

SIR GRAHAM MOORE ISLANDS 13 52 S 126 36 E 3.11

SIR ISAAC POINT 34 26 S 135 13 E 7.37

SIR JOSEPH BANKS GROUP 34 35 S 136 18 E 7.70

SKARDON RIVER 11 45 S 142 00 E 1.2

SKELETON POINT 16 32 S 123 01 E 3.99

SLADE POINT 10 59 S 142 08 E 1.2

SLEAFORD BAY 34 54 S 135 46 E 7.47

SMALL ROCK 32 45 S 124 58 E 6.48

SMITH ISLAND 34 59 S 136 01 E 7.57

SMITH POINT 11 07 S 132 08 E 2.29

SMITH ROCK 34 35 S 136 16 E 7.72

SMITH’S BAY 35 36 S 137 27 E 8.24

SMOKEY POINT 11 15 S 131 09 E 2.51

SMOKY BAY 32 18 S 133 49 E 7.18

SMOOTH ISLAND 32 30 S 133 18 E 7.11

SNAPPER BANK 28 41 S 114 00 E 5.24

SNAPPER POINT 32 34 S 137 47 E 7.120

SNAPPER REACH 32 35 S 137 47 E 7.120

SNELLING’S BEACH 35 41 S 137 04 E 8.23

SNUG COVE 35 42 S 136 50 E 8.22

SOLDIER POINT 11 28 S 131 32 E 2.37

SOMMERVILLE BAY 11 01 S 132 30 E 2.25

SOUTH ALLIGATOR RIVER 12 09 S 132 26 E 2.42

SOUTH CHANNEL 12 08 S 131 02 E 2.50

SOUTH CHANNEL 32 40 S 134 08 E 7.22

SOUTH GOULBURN ISLAND 11 37 S 133 25 E 2.16

SOUTH ISLAND 12 12 S 96 55 E 9.4

SOUTH MEDA SHOAL 16 54 S 123 17 E 3.101

SOUTH NEPTUNE ISLAND 35 20 S 136 07 E 7.1

SOUTH NEPTUNES 35 20 S 136 07 E 7.50

SOUTH PAGE ISLAND 35 47 S 138 18 E 8.19

SOUTH PASSAGE 32 02 S 115 35 E 5.38

SOUTH POINT 14 15 S 136 19 E 1.32

SOUTH ROCK 35 05 S 136 11 E 7.54

SOUTH SAND 32 39 S 134 13 E 7.22

SOUTHERN FLATS 32 15 S 115 42 E 5.39

SOUTHWEST ISLAND 15 44 S 136 40 E 1.26

SOUTHWEST POINT 11 27 S 136 28 E 2.4

SOUTHWEST ROCK 34 14 S 114 59 E 5.55

SOUTHWEST ROCK 35 11 S 136 25 E 7.52

SOUTHWEST ROCK 35 20 S 136 49 E 7.88

SOUTHWEST ROCK 36 23 S 137 13 E 8.6

SOUTTAR POINT 34 54 S 137 17 E 7.95

SPALDING COVE 34 46 S 135 58 E 7.63

SPENCER GULF 34 38 S 136 53 E 7.49

SPILSBY ISLAND 34 40 S 136 21 E 7.70

SPIT POINT 20 02 S 119 00 E 4.16

SPIT POINT 53 07 S 73 51 E 9.11

SPONGE ROCKS 32 47 S 134 12 E 7.23

SPRING CREEK 16 48 S 141 05 E 1.8

ST. ALOUARN ISLET 34 24 S 115 12 E 5.57

ST. ASAPH BAY 11 19 S 130 22 E 2.56

ST. FRANCIS ISLAND 32 31 S 133 18 E 7.12

ST. FRANCIS ISLES 32 34 S 133 18 E 7.10

ST. GEORGE BASIN 15 24 S 125 01 E 3.46

ST. KILDA 34 45 S 138 32 E 8.52
238 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 175

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

ST. PETER ISLAND 32 17 S 133 35 E 7.14

STAG MARINE TERMINAL 20 17 S 116 16 E 4.28

STANLEY ISLAND 34 01 S 123 17 E 6.43

STANSBURY 34 55 S 137 48 E 8.39

STEAMBOAT ISLAND 20 49 S 116 04 E 4.35

STEEP HEAD 16 18 S 123 31 E 2.83

STEEP POINT 26 09 S 113 09 E 5.11

STENHOUSE BAY 35 16 S 136 57 E 8.28

STEPHENS BANK 12 07 S 131 11 E 2.46

STEVENS ISLAND 11 33 S 136 06 E 2.6

STICKNEY ISLET 34 41 S 136 17 E 7.71

STOKES BANK 34 05 S 122 19 E 6.37

STOKES BAY 16 55 S 123 40 E 3.96

STONY ISLAND 35 06 S 117 47 E 6.11

STRAGGLER REEFS 32 04 S 115 38 E 5.38

STRAGGLER ROCKS 32 04 S 115 38 E 5.38

STRAWBRIDGE POINT 35 47 S 137 47 E 8.15

STREAKY BAY 32 35 S 134 04 E 7.20

STREAKY BAY TOWNSHIP 32 48 S 134 12 E 7.23

STUART POINT 34 47 S 135 29 E 7.45

STUART REEF 34 50 S 135 22 E 7.45

STURT BAY 35 08 S 137 27 E 8.31

STYBARROW OIL FIELD 21 28 S 113 50 E 4.62

SUCCESS STRAIT 15 57 S 124 33 E 3.55

SUGARLOAF ROCK 33 33 S 115 00 E 5.51

SULPHUR REEFS 34 07 S 122 41 E 6.40

SULTAN REEF 21 25 S 115 06 E 4.49

SUNDAY ISLANDS 16 25 S 123 13 E 3.91

SUNDAY STRAIT 16 24 S 123 16 E 3.86

SURFLEET POINT 34 46 S 135 57 E 7.63

SURVEYOR POINT 34 47 S 137 52 E 8.39

SWAN POINT 16 21 S 123 02 E 3.84

SWEENEY PATCHES 16 00 S 123 44 E 3.73

SWEERS ISLAND 17 06 S 139 37 E 1.17

SYDNEY ISLAND 16 41 S 139 28 E 1.16

T

TAIT BANK 13 45 S 126 15 E 3.16

TALBOT BAY 16 18 S 123 52 E 3.60

TALBOYS ROCK 17 18 S 122 02 E 4.10

TALC HEAD 12 29 S 130 47 E 2.64

TANCRED ISLET 14 20 S 125 20 E 3.35

TAPLEY SHOAL 35 05 S 137 56 E 8.35

TARRANT POINT 17 22 S 139 25 E 1.17

TASMANIAN SHOAL 15 53 S 123 21 E 3.62

TAYLOR ISLAND 34 53 S 136 01 E 7.58

TERMINATION ISLAND 34 28 S 122 00 E 6.32

THE BLUFF 32 37 S 137 44 E 7.120

THE CANAL 16 08 S 123 44 E 3.78

THE NARROWS 11 17 S 130 18 E 2.56

THE ROARERS 32 06 S 115 39 E 5.38

THE WATCHERS 33 36 S 134 42 E 7.30

THEVENARD ISLAND 21 28 S 115 00 E 4.49

THIRSTY POINT 30 31 S 115 03 E 5.31

THISTLE ISLAND 35 00 S 136 09 E 7.54

THOMAS BAY 16 28 S 122 53 E 4.3

THORNY PASSAGE 34 57 S 136 02 E 7.57

THREE HUMMOCKS POINT 15 38 S 138 04 E 1.23

THRESHOLD BANK 35 55 S 138 15 E 8.11

THURBURN BLUFF 14 35 S 128 03 E 2.87

TICKERA BAY 33 46 S 137 42 E 7.108

TIDE RIP ISLANDS 16 19 S 123 18 E 3.87

TINLINE POINT 35 58 S 137 37 E 8.9

TIPARRA BAY 34 04 S 137 30 E 7.103

TIPARRA REEF 34 04 S 137 24 E 7.103

TOBY INLET 33 37 S 115 09 E 5.48

TOPGALLANT ISLES 33 43 S 134 37 E 7.32

TOR 11 56 S 133 08 E 2.14

TORTOISE ISLET 21 35 S 114 52 E 4.55

TORY ISLANDS 34 01 S 122 19 E 6.36

TOURVILLE BAY 32 10 S 133 28 E 7.15

TRAFALGAR BAY 11 07 S 136 42 E 2.4

TREE ISLAND 16 23 S 123 18 E 3.89

TREE ISLAND 16 40 S 123 29 E 3.95

TREE POINT 14 01 S 129 36 E 2.72

TREPANG BAY 11 11 S 131 56 E 2.33

TRIAL BAY 13 02 S 136 34 E 1.45

TRIGG ISLET 31 53 S 115 44 E 5.34

TROUBRIDGE ISLAND 35 07 S 137 50 E 8.35

TROUBRIDGE POINT 35 10 S 137 41 E 8.33

TROUBRIDGE SHOALS 35 08 S 137 48 E 8.35

TROUGHTON ISLET 13 45 S 126 09 E 3.20

TROUGHTON PASSAGE 13 48 S 126 07 E 3.20

TRUANT ISLAND 11 40 S 136 50 E 1.51

TRUANT ISLAND PASSAGE 11 42 S 136 45 E 1.51

TRYAL ROCKS 20 17 S 115 22 E 4.40

TRYON POINT 18 44 S 121 37 E 4.14

TUMBY BAY 34 23 S 136 10 E 7.76

TUMBY ISLAND 34 24 S 136 09 E 7.75

TURNER POINT 11 45 S 133 32 E 2.14

TURTLE BAY 25 29 S 112 58 E 5.12

TURTLE DOVE SHOAL 29 21 S 114 12 E 5.26

TURTLE POINT 14 51 S 129 14 E 2.78

TWILIGHT COVE 32 17 S 126 01 E 6.49

TWIN ROCKS 31 30 S 131 08 E 6.51

TWIN ROCKS 34 22 S 122 13 E 6.33

TWO HUMMOCK POINT 32 45 S 137 48 E 7.116

TWO HUMMOCK SPIT 32 46 S 137 49 E 7.116

TWO ISLAND BAY 11 35 S 136 24 E 2.4

U

UNGWARIBA POINT 14 08 S 136 55 E 1.41

URANIE BANK 25 10 S 113 10 E 5.6

USELESS LOOP 26 07 S 113 24 E 5.14

V

VALENTIA ISLET 11 23 S 132 48 E 2.21

VALENTINE ISLET 17 05 S 123 19 E 3.101

VAN CLOON SHOAL 12 39 S 126 25 E 3.21

VAN DIEMEN GULF 11 50 S 132 10 E 2.35

VANCOUVER POINT 14 50 S 128 12 E 2.82

VANDERLIN ISLAND 15 43 S 137 02 E 1.22

VANSITTART BAY 14 04 S 126 18 E 3.15

VARANUS ISLAND 20 39 S 115 34 E 4.41

VARANUS ISLAND TERMINAL 20 37 S 115 35 E 4.41

VASHON HEAD 11 07 S 132 00 E 2.29

VEE SHOAL 11 50 S 123 49 E 3.3

VENUS BAY 33 14 S 134 39 E 7.28

VERNON ISLAND 12 03 S 131 05 E 2.47

VERONICA ISLET 12 03 S 136 47 E 1.50

VICKERY ISLET 16 29 S 123 21 E 3.90

VICTOR HARBOR 35 34 S 138 38 E 8.58

VICTORIA POINT 33 45 S 136 59 E 7.82

VICTORIA RIVER 15 00 S 129 33 E 2.77

VICTORIA SHOAL 11 54 S 132 02 E 2.42

VINEY ISLAND 16 01 S 124 01 E 3.57

VIVONNE BAY 36 00 S 137 12 E 8.7

VLAMING HEAD 21 48 S 114 06 E 5.2

VRILYA POINT 11 14 S 142 07 E 1.2

VULCAN ISLAND 15 14 S 124 23 E 3.47

VULCAN ISLETS 15 14 S 124 23 E 3.50

VULCAN SHOAL 12 48 S 124 17 E 3.6

W

WAKEFIELD REEF 53 11 S 73 21 E 9.12

WALCOTT INLET 16 22 S 124 22 E 3.59

WALDEGRAVE ISLANDS 33 36 S 134 47 E 7.30

WALKER RIVER 13 35 S 135 50 E 1.42

WALLABI GROUP 28 22 S 113 42 E 5.23

WALLAROO 33 56 S 137 37 E 7.107

WALLAROO BAY 33 55 S 137 35 E 7.106

WALLER SHOAL 35 13 S 136 48 E 7.90

WALMESLY BAY 14 24 S 125 42 E 3.29

WALRUS ROCK 34 00 S 137 30 E 7.106

WANAEA MARINE TERMINAL 19 35 S 116 27 E 4.26

WANARAIJ POINT 11 08 S 131 58 E 2.33

WANARY POINT 11 08 S 131 58 E 2.33

WANDOO MARINE TERMINAL 20 09 S 116 25 E 4.25

WARBURTON CHANNEL 32 33 S 134 06 E 7.22

WARBURTON POINT 34 01 S 137 30 E 7.104

WARBUTO POINT 34 01 S 137 30 E 7.104

WARD ISLANDS 33 45 S 134 15 E 7.32

WARD POINT 33 01 S 137 57 E 7.111

WARD ROCK 35 07 S 136 27 E 7.52

WARDANG ISLAND 34 32 S 137 21 E 7.100

WARGARPUNDA POINT 12 11 S 136 41 E 1.52
Index—Gazetteer 239

Pub. 175

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

WARIGILI POINT 11 33 S 132 07 E 2.40

WARN ROCK 13 09 S 126 06 E 3.18

WARNBRO SOUND 32 20 S 115 43 E 5.42

WARWICK CHANNEL 13 48 S 136 19 E 1.35

WATER ISLET 14 21 S 125 30 E 3.34

WATERHOUSE BAY 35 03 S 136 12 E 7.56

WATERHOUSE POINT 35 04 S 136 12 E 7.54

WATERLOO BAY 33 38 S 134 52 E 7.33

WATERWITCH CHANNEL 32 20 S 133 43 E 7.19

WATERWITCH ROCKS 34 20 S 121 41 E 6.33

WATSON PATCH 16 23 S 139 42 E 1.14

WAURALTEE ISLAND 34 32 S 137 21 E 7.100

WAVE GOVERNOR BANK 12 34 S 123 36 E 3.6

WEALJUGOO HILL 22 33 S 113 43 E 5.2

WEBB ROCK 34 58 S 136 55 E 7.93

WEBLING POINT 33 37 S 137 52 E 7.108

WEDGE ISLAND 35 10 S 136 28 E 7.52

WEDGE ISLET 30 50 S 115 11 E 5.32

WEERDEE ISLAND 20 19 S 118 28 E 4.21

WEIPA 12 40 S 141 52 E 1.5

WEIRS COVE 36 03 S 136 45 E 8.4

WELLS SHOAL 11 47 S 131 39 E 2.39

WEST ALLIGATOR RIVER 12 13 S 132 17 E 2.42

WEST BAY 11 23 S 132 10 E 2.32

WEST BAY 14 05 S 126 29 E 3.12

WEST BAY 35 53 S 136 33 E 8.2

WEST CAPE 35 15 S 136 49 E 7.90

WEST CHANNEL 33 57 S 121 42 E 6.28

WEST CLIFF POINT 34 54 S 116 17 E 6.5

WEST FORESTIER ISLET 20 35 S 117 45 E 4.21

WEST HOLOTHURIA REEF 13 35 S 125 45 E 3.19

WEST ISLAND 12 10 S 96 50 E 9.5

WEST ISLAND 15 35 S 136 33 E 1.26

WEST ISLAND 32 31 S 133 16 E 7.11

WEST ISLAND 35 37 S 138 35 E 8.57

WEST ISLET 34 05 S 120 28 E 6.24

WEST POINT 11 57 S 134 11 E 2.12

WEST POINT 12 26 S 130 46 E 2.63

WEST POINT 35 00 S 135 57 E 7.48

WEST ROCK 35 09 S 136 27 E 7.52

WEST SANDS 32 41 S 137 46 E 7.118

WESTALL POINT 32 55 S 134 03 E 7.25

WESTERN COVE 35 42 S 137 38 E 8.16

WESTERN RIVER 35 41 S 136 59 E 8.23

WESTERN SHOAL 33 09 S 127 32 E 7.84

WEYLAND POINT 33 15 S 134 38 E 7.28

WHALERS BAY 35 00 S 136 11 E 7.55

WHIDBEY ISLANDS 34 44 S 135 08 E 7.42

WHIDBEY POINT 34 35 S 135 06 E 7.37

WHIRLPOOL PASS 16 15 S 123 30 E 3.71

WHITE CLIFF POINT 34 13 S 115 01 E 5.52

WHITE ISLET 15 14 S 124 19 E 3.45

WHITE POINT 11 42 S 133 18 E 2.15

WICKHAM ISLAND 34 01 S 123 17 E 6.43

WICKHAM POINT 12 30 S 130 51 E 2.65

WIGRAM ISLAND 11 47 S 136 34 E 1.55

WILDCAT REEFS 15 17 S 124 08 E 3.48

WILLIAMS ISLAND 35 02 S 135 58 E 7.48

WILSON HEAD 35 03 S 117 20 E 6.9

WILSON POINT 15 33 S 124 24 E 3.51

WINCEBY ISLAND 34 30 S 136 17 E 7.73

WINCHELSEA ISLAND 13 43 S 136 30 E 1.34

WINJEE SAM ROCK 33 40 S 115 00 E 5.51

WITHNELL BAY TERMINAL 16 35 S 116 46 E 4.30

WOKATHERRA HILL 28 39 S 114 39 E 5.19

WOLLASTON ISLAND 14 30 S 125 28 E 3.36

WOMERANGEE HILL 26 54 S 113 47 E 5.16

WONGA SHOAL 34 50 S 138 28 E 8.50

WOODAH ISLAND 13 27 S 136 09 E 1.43

WOODBINE BANK 12 24 S 123 30 E 3.5

WOODHOUSE ROCKS 16 43 S 122 42 E 4.5

WOODING POINT 35 02 S 117 55 E 6.15

WOODMAN POINT LIGHT 32 08 S 115 46 E 5.41

WOODY ISLAND 33 58 S 122 01 E 6.27

WOOL BAY 35 00 S 137 45 E 8.37

WOOLAWAR GULLY 28 30 S 114 32 E 5.19

WOOLEN RIVER 12 14 S 135 10 E 2.9

WOOLLYBUTT 20 52 S 114 55 E 4.43

WRECK POINT 31 30 S 115 35 E 5.33

WRIGHT BANK 33 30 S 115 01 E 5.50

WYBRON ISLETS 16 28 S 123 21 E 3.90

WYNDHAM 15 27 S 128 06 E 2.85

Y

YAMPI SOUND 16 07 S 123 40 E 3.75,

3.81

YANERBY HILL 32 55 S 134 11 E 7.25

YARRAVILLE SHOALS 33 17 S 137 36 E 7.110

YATALA HARBOR 32 45 S 137 53 E 7.117

YATALA REEF 32 37 S 132 26 E 7.6

YATALA SHOAL 35 44 S 138 11 E 8.20

YORK ISLANDS 34 00 S 122 35 E 6.36

YORK SOUND 14 53 S 125 07 E 3.39

YORKE POINT 35 14 S 137 10 E 8.29

YOUNG ROCKS 36 23 S 137 15 E 8.6